Table of Contents

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013

or

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Commission file number 1-14978

 

 

Smith & Nephew plc

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

England and Wales

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA

(Address of principal executive offices)

 

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class

 

Name on each exchange on which registered

American Depositary Shares

Ordinary Shares of 20¢ each

 

New York Stock Exchange

New York Stock Exchange*

 

* Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of American Depositary Shares, pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None.

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None.

 

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report: 918,167,367 Ordinary Shares of 20¢ each

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act    Yes   x     No   ¨

If this Report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934    Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days:    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes   ¨     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer:

Large Accelerated Filer   x                  Accelerated Filer   ¨                  Non-accelerated filer   ¨

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing.

 

¨   U.S. GAAP    x   International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board    ¨   Other

If “Other” has been checked to the previous question indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:    Item 17   ¨      Item 18   ¨

If this is an annual report, indicated by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).    Yes   ¨     No   x

 

 

 


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

Contents

 

 

LOGO

 

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT*

 

Financial highlights   4
Chairman’s statement   5
Smith & Nephew today   6
Chief Executive Officer’s review of strategy   10
Strategic performance   12
Chief Financial Officer’s overview   14
Our marketplace   16
Our business   19
Segment performance    
Advanced Surgical Devices   24
Advanced Wound Management   29
Sustainability   34
Financial review and principal risks   36

LOGO

 

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

Our Board of Directors*   44
Our Executive Officers*   46
Corporate Governance Statement*   48
Audit Committee Report*   58
Directors’ remuneration report   62
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

LOGO

 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
AND OTHER INFORMATION
Directors’ responsibilities for the accounts*   88
Independent auditor’s US reports   91
Independent auditor’s UK report   92
Group accounts   94
Notes to the Group accounts   101
Independent auditor’s report for the Company   150
Company accounts   151
Notes to the Company accounts   152
Group information*   155
Other financial information*   159
Information for shareholders*   168
 
 
 

 

 

 

 

Smith & Nephew is a global medical technology business. We have leadership positions in our four chosen specialities:

– Orthopaedic Reconstruction

– Advanced Wound Management

– Sports Medicine

– Trauma & Extremities

 

This success is built upon our three values of:

– Innovation

– Trust

– Performance

 

*These sections and pages 95, 97 and 99 form the Directors’ Report.

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

 

 

    1

 

 

Our mission

Delivering advanced medical technologies that help healthcare professionals, our customers , improve the quality of life for their patients

 

 

 

$4.4bn

 

$987m

 

$810m

Revenue 1 up 4%   Trading profit 1, 2 up 5%   Operating profit 1 up 1%

76.9¢

 

61.7¢

 

27.4¢

Adjusted earnings per share 2 up 3%   Earnings per share down 23%   Dividends per share up 5%

 

1 The underlying percentage increases/decreases are after adjusting for the effect of currency translation and the inclusion of the comparative impact of acquisitions and exclusion of disposals.
2 Explanations of these non-GAAP financial measures are provided on pages 161 to 163.

You can read more about our financial performance in the financial review on page 36

 

LOGO
 


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      3

 

 

 

 

 

Group strategic report

 

Financial highlights   4
Chairman’s statement   5
Smith & Nephew today   6
Chief Executive Officer’s review of strategy   10
Strategic performance   12
Chief Financial Officer’s overview   14
Our marketplace   16
Our business   19
Segment performance    
Advanced Surgical Devices   24
Advanced Wound Management   29
Sustainability   34
Financial review and principal risks   36

We are investing more in R&D to provide

our customers with greater innovation

 
LOGO  
   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
4      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Financial highlights

We delivered a good

performance in 2013

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

TRADING PROFIT 2

MARGIN

  

  

-60bps     22.7%   

 

TRADING PROFIT

TO CASH CONVERSION 2

89%

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

OPERATING PROFIT

MARGIN

  

  

-180bps     18.6%   

 

OPERATING PROFIT

AS A PERCENTAGE OF

CASH GENERATED

FROM OPERATIONS

71%

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

1 The underlying percentage increases/decreases are after adjusting for the effects of currency translation and the inclusion of the comparative impact of acquisitions and exclusion of disposals.
2 Explanations of these non-GAAP financial measures are provided on pages 161 to 163.
3 Earnings per share and adjusted earnings per share have been restated following the adoption of the revised IAS 19 Employee Benefits standard. See Note 1 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

LOGO

 

 

You can read more about our financial performance in the financial review on page 36


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      5

 

Chairman’s statement

Dear Shareholder,

In 2013, Smith & Nephew generated good underlying revenue and trading profit growth.

We continued to focus investment on growth opportunities and returned significant value to Shareholders through increased dividends and a share buy-back programme. Momentum increased throughout the year as we delivered on our strategy to reshape Smith & Nephew for the future.

Our revenue was $4,351 million, up 4% on an underlying basis. Advanced Wound Management delivered strong growth, led by Healthpoint Biotherapeutics, our major 2012 acquisition. Sports Medicine Joint Repair had another successful year, and we improved our performance in Orthopaedic Reconstruction.

Almost 13% of our revenues now come from emerging market countries, up from just over 8% in 2010. We were one of the first companies in our sector to focus on these markets. We are building sustainable businesses through the strategy of establishing direct relationships with customers, as well as developing tailored products. In 2013, we invested further in our existing teams and made acquisitions in Brazil, India and Turkey to strengthen our platform.

Our trading profit was up 5% on an underlying basis at $987 million. The trading profit margin of 22.7% met our expectations as we invested more in the emerging markets and in research & development, and cost of the US medical device excise tax ($24 million in 2013).

Ethics, compliance & governance

We give high priority to compliance and ethics, as well as health, safety and the environment. The Board continues to encourage management in their drive to ensure all of Smith & Nephew’s programmes are world-class.

The Board also places great emphasis on governance and is mindful of its responsibility to promote the long-term interests of the Company for all our stakeholders. This is described in detail in the Corporate Governance section of this Annual Report (pages 44 – 85).

Creating sustainable value

Smith & Nephew has a long track record of creating value for Shareholders. For instance, we have paid a dividend every year since 1937. Since 2006, during my tenure as Chairman, it is pleasing to report that we have delivered a compound annual growth rate in adjusted earnings per share of 8% against a FTSE 100 average of 6%, along with a dividend compound growth rate of 14%. And the share price is up more than 90% in that time. The Group generated trading cash flow of $5.9 billion between 1 January 2006 and 31 December 2013, demonstrating our vitality over the long-term.

In 2013, we set out a Capital Allocation Framework that will govern how we prioritise the use of the strong cash flow we generate. This framework will guide our continued

 

LOGO

 

 

investment in organic growth, and maintenance of a progressive dividend. It also gives us headroom to make further acquisitions and includes a commitment to return any excess capital to Shareholders. It is underpinned by a desire to maintain a strong balance sheet to ensure solid investment grade credit metrics.

Following these principles, we spent $226 million on a share buy-back programme during the year. This, together with the 2012 dividend increase, resulted in a total distribution to Shareholders in 2013 of $465 million, two and a half times the level of the prior year.

The Board is pleased to propose a final dividend for the year of 17.0¢ per share, giving a total dividend for 2013 of 27.4¢, up 5% year-on-year.

Board changes

I will step down as Chairman of Smith & Nephew at the Annual General Meeting in April 2014. Roberto Quarta joined the Board as Non-executive Director in December 2013 and will take over as Chairman. Roberto has impressive business and board experience and is chairman of IMI plc, a FTSE 100 listed engineering business and of Clayton, Dubilier & Rice, Europe, a private equity firm.

Our Senior Independent Non-executive Director, Richard De Shutter, and Non-executive Director Ajay Piramal, will also both retire at the Annual General Meeting. I would like to thank them for their service. In particular, Richard’s contribution in this most important role has been invaluable. We are fortunate to have as replacement the highly experienced Brian Larcombe, who will become Senior Independent Non-executive Director.

In 2013, we welcomed to the Board Julie Brown as Chief Financial Officer and Michael Friedman as Non-executive Director. Julie has quickly established herself as an effective Executive Director and her influence is already seen in many areas, including the Capital Allocation Framework. Michael’s expertise in the US healthcare system and experience leading a major research and treatment institution has enhanced the Board.

Setting Smith & Nephew apart

During 2013, I was reminded of the quality of our people as we reviewed our responses to natural disasters, providing resources to aid recovery in the Philippines and in our own offices and communities, under Olivier Bohuon’s leadership, responding to a major flood at the Advanced Wound Management site in Hull, UK and to a tornado near our facility in Oklahoma City, US. The tenacity and compassion sets Smith & Nephew apart, as it has throughout our history of supporting healthcare professionals for more than 150 years.

It has indeed been a privilege working with the people at Smith & Nephew and to serve the interests of customers, employees and Shareholders. The Company has shown great resilience in the recent economic environment, building services for customers and value for Shareholders. There is an excellent team in place, both Executive and Non-executive.

I wish the Company well for a promising future.

Yours sincerely,

 

LOGO

Sir John Buchanan

Chairman

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
6      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Smith & Nephew today

 

We are operating in  growth markets  

 

 

 

TOTAL SEGMENT VALUE

   

TOTAL SEGMENT VALUE

  
ADVANCED SURGICAL DEVICES     ADVANCED WOUND MANAGEMENT   
$23.2bn   +4%     $7.0bn    +4%   

GLOBAL POPULATION

 

LOGO

Source: United Nations – World Population Prospects, The 2012 Revision.

You can read more about our financial performance in the marketplace review on page 16


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      7

 

 

 

   

With a business model

 

LOGO

   

that creates value

 

   

OUR MISSION STATEMENT

 

Delivering advanced medical technologies that help healthcare

professionals, our customers, improve the quality of life for their patients

 

OUR VALUES

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
8      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Smith & Nephew today continued

 

We are organised by  

 

our areas of expertise

 

  Advanced Surgical Devices

 

ORTHOPAEDIC RECONSTRUCTION

   
Specialist hip and knee implant systems.

 

REVENUE 1

   
$1,518m     -1%         

 

2012  $1,540m

               
     

TRAUMA & EXTREMITIES

   
Internal and external devices used in the stabilisation of severe fractures and deformity correction procedures.

 

REVENUE 1,2

   
$486m     +4%         

 

2012  $474m

               
     

SPORTS MEDICINE JOINT REPAIR

   
Instruments, technologies and implants necessary to perform minimally invasive surgery of joints.

 

REVENUE 1,2

   
$496m     +7%         

 

2012  $474m

               
     

ARTHROSCOPIC ENABLING TECHNOLOGIES

   
Cutting, visualisation and fluid management technologies necessary for Sports Medicine Joint Repair.

 

REVENUE 1,2

   
$441m     -2%         

 

2012  $458m

               
     

 

OTHER ASD

   
Including gynaecological instrumentation.    

 

REVENUE 1,2

   
$74m     +14%         

 

2012  $162m

 

               

Advanced Wound Management

 

 

ADVANCED WOUND CARE

   
Products for the treatment of acute and chronic wounds, including leg, diabetic and pressure ulcers, burns and post-operative wounds.

 

REVENUE 1

   
$843m     +1%         

 

2012  $849m

               
     

ADVANCED WOUND DEVICES

   
Traditional and single-use Negative Pressure Wound Therapy (‘NPWT’) and hydrosurgery systems.    

 

REVENUE 1

   
$213m     +20%         

 

2012  $180m

               
     

ADVANCED WOUND BIOACTIVES

   
Bioactive technologies that provide unique approaches to debridement and dermal repair and regeneration.    

 

REVENUE 1

   
$280m     +47%         

 

2012  N/A

               

 

 

 

 

 

1 The underlying percentage increases/decreases are after adjusting for the effect of currency translation and the inclusion of the comparative impact of acquisitions and exclusion of disposals.
2 The 2012 revenue by franchise has been restated to 2013 product franchises.

 

 

LOGO

 

 

You can read more about our franchise areas in the segment analysis on pages 24 to 33


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

    9

 

LOGO

 

 

 

With over 11,000 employees

supporting healthcare

professionals globally

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
10      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

 

Chief Executive Officer’s review of strategy

 

We are successfully

reshaping  and  rebalancing

Smith & Nephew

 

 

 

 

OUR STRATEGIC PRIORITIES

 

LOGO

 

  1 ESTABLISHED MARKETS  
 

 

Build upon existing strong positions, win market share through greater innovation and drive efficiencies to liberate resources.

 

 
  2 EMERGING & INTERNATIONAL MARKETS  
 

 

Deliver market leadership in the Emerging & International Markets by building strong, direct customer relationships and developing products specifically designed for these populations.

 

 
  3 INNOVATE FOR VALUE  
 

 

Accelerate our rate of innovation by investing more in research & development to support projects that will move clinical and cost boundaries and deliver maximum value.

 

 
  4 SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL  
 

 

Pursue maximum efficiency in everything we do, streamline our operations and manufacturing, remove duplication and build strong global functions to support our commercial teams.

 

 
  5 SUPPLEMENT ORGANIC GROWTH WITH ACQUISITIONS  
 

 

Build our platform by acquiring complementary technologies, manufacturing and distribution in the emerging markets and complementary products or businesses in our higher growth segments.

 

You can read more about our strategy in action throughout the report in boxed out case studies.

Dear Shareholder,

For more than 150 years Smith & Nephew has supported healthcare professionals as they improve the quality of life for patients. Today we do this by providing advanced medical technologies that move clinical boundaries and reduce economic costs.

We focus where we see developing needs and invest in new products and techniques to improve outcomes and expand access. Through these actions we are at the forefront of fast growing segments such as Sports Medicine and Advanced Wound Bioactives, are leaders in the emerging markets, and continue to develop in our more mature segments. We are building a sustainable business to best support surgeons, nurses and healthcare managers in the future.

In 2013, I am pleased to report that we made significant progress, expanding our product portfolio, building our platform, growing in the emerging markets and embedding a culture of perpetual efficiency.

Accelerating innovation

In 2013, we maintained a high rate of innovation, launching major new products such as the natural-motion JOURNEY à II BCS Total Knee System and, in Sports Medicine, HEALICOIL à REGENESORB à , an innovative next generation bio-composite suture anchor. We also delivered 23 new Advanced Wound Management products, such as the DURAFIBER à Ag antimicrobial dressing.

Looking ahead, we have a strong product pipeline, particularly in Trauma & Extremities and Sports Medicine. Overall we increased research & development (‘R&D’) investment to $231 million in 2013, representing 5.3% of revenue, and are committed to maintaining these high levels of investment and innovation going forward. We were proud to be named one of Forbes Magazine’s ‘Most Innovative Companies’ of 2013.

We are also investing in medical education to ensure that our customers continue to have access to the best training on our products and techniques. This includes significant online resources such as Education and Evidence . Launched in 2013, this is a powerful new e-learning platform for surgeons to access and share peer-to-peer education.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

    11

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

so that ever more of

our business comes from

areas of higher growth

 

 

 

Healthpoint acquisition delivers

 

Our major acquisition at the end of 2012, Healthpoint Biotherapeutics, has given us a leading position in bioactives, the fastest growing segment of Advanced Wound Management. This business has out-performed our expectations, increasing its revenue by 47% in 2013. With its unique portfolio, excellent sales execution and expertise in product research and development, it is an outstanding addition to Smith & Nephew.

 

Leaders in emerging markets

 

Throughout 2013, we have built upon our leading position in the emerging markets, generating strong revenue growth. We enhanced our platform, investing in the sales force and infrastructure in markets such as Mexico and the Middle East, as well as acquiring distributors in Turkey and Brazil. By having a direct relationship with our customers we are able to offer them a fuller range of products and services.

 

We see a major opportunity to create portfolios for patients in the economic mid-tier across the emerging markets, and launched our first products and acquired the Sushrut-Adler Indian trauma business in 2013.

 

Perpetual efficiency

 

These strategic investments and many other initiatives have been made possible through our continued drive to be more efficient, to reduce cost, and to simplify and improve our operating model. In 2011, we announced an initial programme to generate annual savings of $150 million and this will be largely complete by the end of 2014. We are now a leaner business, and, as importantly, we are embedding a culture of perpetual efficiency into our processes and future thinking.

 

Sustainability

 

Our mission at Smith & Nephew is to help our customers improve people’s lives. I can think of nothing more intrinsic to this mission than operating sustainably and responsibly to

 

LOGO

 

deliver long-term benefits. In 2013, we maintained our commitment to our customers, patients, employees, communities and Shareholders. This was again recognised in our inclusion in the FTSE4Good and Dow Jones Sustainability indices.

 

Sir John Buchanan

 

Sir John Buchanan will step down as Chairman of the Board in April 2014. I wish to thank Sir John for his leadership, counsel and dedication over the past nine years. As Chairman he has overseen a number of significant changes and has given me tremendous support in my role as Chief Executive Officer. We are confident that in Roberto Quarta we have found another excellent Chairman.

 

Acquisition of ArthroCare Corp

 

In February 2014, we announced our intention to acquire ArthroCare, an innovative medical devices company with a highly complementary sports medicine franchise. Based in Austin, Texas, ArthroCare’s technology and products will significantly strengthen our portfolio – and we will use our global footprint to drive substantial new revenue growth. We expect to complete this acquisition in the middle of 2014 for a net cost of approximately $1.5 billion.

 

Rebalancing Smith & Nephew

 

Smith & Nephew made excellent progress in 2013, delivering both revenue and earnings growth and generating strong cash flow. I would like to thank our employees for their contribution during the year. It was their dedication and focus that achieved these results, and importantly, are enabling us to accomplish our programmes to make the Group fit and effective for the future.

 

We are successfully reshaping and rebalancing Smith & Nephew so that even more of our business comes from areas of higher growth. In this way we will continue to deliver the best support for our customers and the greatest value for our Shareholders.

 

Yours sincerely,

 

LOGO

 

Olivier Bohuon

Chief Executive Officer

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
12      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Strategic performance

This is how we measure

our performance

 

 

   1 ESTABLISHED MARKETS
   

PERFORMANCE

Our businesses in the Established Markets grew by 5% in the US and was flat in the Other Established Markets, where the macro-economic environment in Europe continues to be weak.

 

By franchise, our performance relative to estimated global segment growth was slightly below in hip and knee reconstruction and trauma, around market in the higher growth joint repair segment of sports medicine and well above in advanced wound management. Hip and Knee Implant performance in 2013 was held back by our relatively high exposure to the weak European market, our position in the product cycle and metal-on-metal hip headwinds.

 

 

Our performance in the second half of 2013 was better than the first half, as a result of our investments in marketing, medical education and new products.

 

For more detail on the market and competition see pages 16 to 18.

 

GLOBAL OUTLOOK

Established Markets for Smith & Nephew are the US, Europe, Japan, Australia, New Zealand and Canada.

 

In these markets we expect the challenging economic conditions to continue, requiring realigned business models and focused investment, albeit that there are some signs of improvement in the US.

  LOGO
   
   2 EMERGING & INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
   

PERFORMANCE

The Emerging & International Markets grew at 18%, exceeding Established Markets rates and contributing half of annual revenue growth for the Group.

 

These geographies now represent 13% of the Group’s overall revenue.

 

During 2013:

 

–  Our success in China continued with growth of over 30% and now it is our 6th largest country by revenue

 

–  Significant investment to drive growth organically (e.g. Mexico and Saudi Arabia) and through acquisitions (Brazil, Turkey, India)

 

–  We put in place our strategy to address the mid-tier market.

 

 

GLOBAL OUTLOOK

Emerging & International Markets represent those outside of the Established Markets including Brazil, China, India and Russia.

 

The healthcare environment in these markets is rapidly expanding and with the right investments offers significant opportunities for the Group.

 

LOGO


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

    13

 

 

 

3 INNOVATE FOR VALUE

 

PERFORMANCE

R&D investment now represents 5.3% of revenue, an increase in spending of 35% in reported terms. We have maintained our strong momentum of introducing new products:

 

–  In ASD, we successfully launched the JOURNEY II BCS Knee System and our Sports Medicine franchise expanded through a next generation HEALICOIL suture anchor range and we also expanded our Extremities offering

 

–  Over 20 new AWM products launched

 

 

–  In our Emerging & International Markets we launched a low-cost camera to drive market expansion and access to minimally invasive joint repair

 

–  Launched new medical education websites to support healthcare professionals.

 

GLOBAL OUTLOOK

Innovation offers the key to meeting the realities of healthcare and economic paradigm in both Established and Emerging & International Markets. New products, technologies and surgical techniques hold the potential of reducing the overall cost of healthcare.

 

 

 

LOGO

 

4 SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

PERFORMANCE

Trading profit grew by 5% and trading profit margin decreased slightly to 22.7% as expected. Targeted investments, increased R&D and the new US Medical Device tax were partially off-set by efficiency and cost initiatives

 

Key initiatives included:

 

–  Continuing to deliver our $150 million per annum efficiency savings programme

 

–  Expansion of the Suzhou facility continues on track

 

–  Started roll-out of major Europe- wide single IT and business intelligence platform.

 

 

 

GLOBAL OUTLOOK

By simplifying and improving our operating model we can liberate resources to invest in growth opportunities and meet the persistent price pressure. A simpler and more efficient organisation allows us to make faster and better decisions.

 

 

LOGO

 

5 SUPPLEMENT ORGANIC GROWTH WITH ACQUISITIONS

 

PERFORMANCE

2013 has been another active year from a business development perspective, mainly focused on supporting our Emerging & International Markets strategy:

 

–  Acquisition of distributors in Brazil and Turkey

 

–  Acquisition of a mid-tier trauma business in India

 

–  Successful integration of Healthpoint Biotherapeutics which we acquired in 2012.

 

 

 

GLOBAL OUTLOOK

Acquisitions and partnerships are important elements which supplement organic investment and provide increased opportunity for high growth and value creation.

 

 

LOGO

 

 

1 The underlying percentage increases/decreases are after adjusting for the effect of currency translation and the inclusion of the comparative impact of acquisitions and exclusion of disposals.
2 Explanations of these non-GAAP financial measures are provided on pages 161 to 163.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
14      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Chief Financial Officer’s overview

 

We have delivered good  revenue  and  

 

 

 

earnings growth  

 

Dear Shareholder,

When I joined Smith & Nephew in February 2013 I found a business with a unified sense of purpose – helping customers to improve the quality of life of patients – and a clear strategy to deliver this in a sustainable manner across our Established and Emerging & International Markets. The management team were making choices about where to invest to maximise our impact today and to ensure Smith & Nephew has the products and platform for the future.

For me, the role of Finance is as a strategic partner, enabling and supporting the business as it makes investments and drives efficiencies, and ensuring we can maintain our financial strength and discipline. I believe Smith & Nephew has made significant progress in 2013 and that judicious financial management has been and remains central to our success.

Strong revenue and earnings

For the full year 2013, we generated good underlying revenue and trading profit growth and met our margin expectations. Revenue was $4,351 million, an underlying 4% increase. Trading profit was $987 million, up 5% underlying. The trading profit margin was 22.7% a reduction of 60bps. Our adjusted earnings per share were 76.9¢, up 3%. The trading cash flow was $877 million, reflecting a trading profit to cash conversion ratio of 89%.

Capital Allocation Framework

 

We consider that the efficient use of capital on behalf of Shareholders is an important objective. We have delivered good revenue and earnings growth and strong cash generation in the challenging markets of the last few years.

 

During 2011, we announced our Strategic Priorities, focusing our business on liberating resources to invest in driving greater growth. In order to support this strategy, the Board believes in maintaining an efficient, but prudent, capital structure, while retaining the flexibility to make value enhancing acquisitions. This approach was set out in the new Capital Allocation Framework announced in May 2013.

 

The Capital Allocation Framework will be used to prioritise the use of cash and ensure an appropriate capital structure. Our commitment, in order of priority, is to:

 

1.

 

 

 

continue to invest in the business to drive organic growth;

 

2.

 

 

maintain our progressive dividend policy;

 

3.

 

 

realise acquisitions in-line with strategy; and

 

4.

 

 

return any excess capital to Shareholders.

 

This is underpinned by maintaining leverage ratios commensurate with solid investment grade credit metrics.

 

 

LOGO


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

    15

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

and strong

cash generation

 

 

 

In-line with the above framework, and reflecting our confidence in the successful execution of our Strategic Priorities, we commenced a $300 million share buy-back programme in May 2013. As of 31 December 2013 we had spent $226 million. This programme was suspended following our agreement to acquire ArthroCare, announced on 3 February 2014.

 

Liberating resources

 

In August 2011, Smith & Nephew announced a programme to drive structural efficiencies in order to liberate the resources needed to fund investment in the emerging markets and R&D, targeting savings of at least $150 million per annum. The cost of the currently identified programmes is expected to be $160 million in cash and $40 million in non-cash costs.

 

To date the Group has realised annualised benefits of $131 million and we expect to complete the programme in early 2015 and realise slightly more than the anticipated benefits. The costs are on track. As a result of this programme and other actions, a culture of continuously looking to be more efficient is being embedded across the Group.

 

Acquisitions

 

During the year the Group has completed acquisitions of manufacturing and distribution businesses in Turkey, Brazil and India. The aggregate cost was $126 million. Through these acquisitions, we are implementing a number of our Strategic Priorities: to build leadership positions in the Emerging & International Markets; to supplement our organic growth through acquisitions; and to bring forward mid-tier portfolios to these countries.

 

LOGO

 

Outlook

 

We anticipate the market conditions seen in the second half of 2013 to continue in 2014. We expect the US to be stable with some signs of improvement, Europe to remain challenging and the emerging markets to continue to offer opportunities for higher growth.

 

In terms of revenue growth by franchise, we expect:

 

–  Orthopaedic Reconstruction, continuing its recent improved performance, to grow at approaching the market rate;

 

–  Trauma & Extremities, building upon our recent investments, to grow overall at the market rate, but with a stronger second half to the year;

 

–  Sports Medicine, with its strong product pipeline, to deliver growth above the market rate; and

 

–  Advanced Wound Management, with its unique mix of leading products, to deliver another year of growth above the market. Within this, we expect Advanced Wound Bioactives to grow at a rate in the mid-teens.

 

In terms of trading profit margin, we expect to exceed our 2013 performance.

 

I am confident that our continuing focus on efficiency, coupled with further investments to drive growth and the disciplined use of our strong cash flow will generate greater value for our Shareholders.

 

Yours sincerely,

 

LOGO

 

Julie Brown

 

Chief Financial Officer

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
16      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Our marketplace

We operate in

dynamic markets

 

 

Market trends

 

Demand for healthcare continues to increase worldwide influenced by the following trends:

 

Increased longevity and average age

 

As a result of improvements in healthcare and living conditions, life expectancy across the world has increased in modern times and this increase is expected to continue.

 

The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (‘OECD’) calculates the average life expectancy at birth in 2010 as 79.7, a significant rise from the 70.3 calculated in 1970.

 

As a consequence of longer life expectancy and the falling birth rates in many developed countries, there is an expanding gap between the demand for healthcare and the ability of governments to supply healthcare. Demand for healthcare will increase because of the ageing world population but at the same time the changing balance of age in the population means that, relatively speaking, there is potentially an accompanying decrease in funds available for healthcare raised through taxation of the working population.

 

LOGO

  

More active lifestyles

 

Demand for healthcare is also increasing because people now expect to maintain active lifestyles longer into retirement and to return to activity sooner after treatment. This has resulted in a desire for less invasive surgery and quicker recovery times. Patients also desire products with a better replication of natural movement and an ability to cope with more rigorous activity over a longer period.

 

Obesity and associated chronic diseases

 

Obesity is an increasing global problem which causes more wear on the joints of the human body and increases demand for orthopaedic reconstruction.

 

Across the OECD countries, an average of 18% of the population is obese; this has increased from 13% in 2000.

 

Obesity also increases the risk of diabetes which can lead to other medical conditions and complications. In 2012, the International Diabetes Federation estimated that 8.3% of the world’s population (371 million people] suffer from diabetes and this is projected to rise to 9.9% (552 million people] by 2030.

 

There is a proven link between diabetes and a higher risk of surgical site infections which increases the risk of surgical procedures on diabetic patients. This risk can be minimised with the use of specialist wound care products designed to lower the risk of infection.

 

It is estimated that up to 10% of people with diabetes also suffer from diabetic foot ulcers. These ulcers are prone to infection, causing an increased risk of amputation, increased morbidity and are a significant burden on the health system.

 

Increased affluence in emerging markets

 

The emerging markets are becoming more affluent and therefore more able to afford medical treatments. However, the cost of many medical devices restricts access by the wider population.

 

Patient awareness

 

In certain countries, patients are becoming increasingly aware, from the internet and direct-to-customer advertising, of the various healthcare options and treatments available. This has led to some increased patient influence over the product purchasing decisions of medical service providers.

    

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      17

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Global economic crisis

 

The supply of healthcare in many of our markets is funded by governments. The global economic crisis in recent years has placed increased pressure on governments around the world to reduce or constrain healthcare expenditure.

 

In summary

 

The increased demand for healthcare products and the limitation of available resources is widening the funding gap. Providing technologies that deliver value by improving clinical outcomes while reducing the consumption of overall healthcare resources is vital for the success and sustainability of medical device businesses.

   

Regulatory standards and compliance in the healthcare industry

 

The international medical device industry is highly regulated. Regulatory requirements are important in determining whether substances and materials can be developed into marketable products and the amount of time and expense that should be allotted to such development.

 

National regulatory authorities administer and enforce a complex series of laws and regulations that govern the design, development, approval, manufacture, labelling, marketing and sale of healthcare products. They also review data supporting the safety and efficacy of such products. Of particular importance is the requirement in many countries that products be authorised or registered prior to manufacture, marketing or sale and that such authorisation or registration be subsequently maintained. The major regulatory agencies for Smith & Nephew’s products include the Food and Drug Administration (‘FDA’) in the US, the Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency in the UK, the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare in Japan and the China Food and Drug Administration.

 

In general, the trend in many countries in which we do business is towards higher expectations and increased enforcement activity by governmental authorities.

 

We are committed to doing business with integrity and welcome the trend to higher standards in the healthcare industry. We and other companies in the industry have been subject to investigations and other enforcement activity that have incurred and may continue to incur significant expense. See ‘Legal proceedings’ on page 130.

 

   
   
       

 

RESPONDING TO THE MARKET

   
       

 

Smith & Nephew is committed to developing products that respond to the demand and supply pressures faced by the healthcare industry. Some examples are set out below.

 

Our VERILAST à Technology has been laboratory tested to demonstrate wear performance sufficient for 30 years of use enabling a total replacement option for younger, more active patients.

 

PICO à is our single use NPWT product which brings the wound healing benefits of NPWT to a wider audience due to its discrete size and portability. Research is also proving the benefits of NPWT products to reduce recovery times after major surgery, such as caesarean sections.

 

     

 

VISIONAIRE à , our patient matched instrumentation, uses the patient’s MRI and X-rays to design cutting blocks specific to each patient. This may reduce surgery time by eliminating several sizing and alignment steps and improves precision in fitting the implant.

 

We are developing products targeting the middle economic tier of the emerging markets to capitalise on their forecast growth. This will enable doctors and nurses to deliver quality products to new patient communities around the world.

   

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
18      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Our marketplace continued

 

 

Dependence on government and other funding

 

In most markets throughout the world, expenditure on medical devices is ultimately controlled to a large extent by governments. Funds may be made available or withdrawn from healthcare budgets as a result of government policy. We are therefore largely dependent on future governments providing increased funds commensurate with the increased demand arising from demographic trends.

 

Pricing of our products is largely governed in most developed markets by governmental reimbursement authorities. Initiatives sponsored by government agencies, legislative bodies and the private sector to limit the growth of healthcare costs, including price regulation, excise taxes and competitive pricing, are ongoing in markets where we operate. This control may be exercised by determining prices for an individual product or for an entire procedure. We are exposed to changes in reimbursement policy, tax policy and pricing which may have an adverse impact on revenue and operating profit. In particular, from 2013 changes to the healthcare legislation in the US have imposed significant taxes on medical device manufacturers. There may be an increased risk of adverse changes to government funding policies arising from the deterioration in macro-economic conditions in some of our markets.

   

Competitors

 

Competition exists among healthcare providers to gain patients on the basis of quality, service and price. Providers are under pressure to reduce the total cost of healthcare delivery. In order to achieve this there has been some consolidation in our customer base, as well as amongst our competitors, and these trends are expected to continue in the long term. We compete against both local and multinational corporations, including some with greater financial, marketing and other resources.

 

Our competitors include Arthrex, Biomet, DePuy Synthes, Stryker and Zimmer in our Advanced Surgical Devices division and Coloplast, Convatec, Kinetic Concepts and Molnlycke in our Advanced Wound Management division.

 

Customers

 

In certain parts of the world, including the UK, much of Continental Europe, Canada and Japan, the healthcare providers are largely government organisations funded by tax revenues. In the US, our major customers are public and private hospitals, which receive revenue from private health insurance and government reimbursement programmes. Medicare is the major source of reimbursement in the US, for knee and hip reconstruction procedures and for wound treatment regimes.

                       

 

LOGO


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      19

 

Our business

Our mission is to deliver

advanced medical technologies

 

 

Improving quality of life

 

Smith & Nephew’s business model, set out on page 7, supports our mission to deliver advanced medical technologies to help healthcare professionals, our customers, improve the quality of life for their patients.

 

Through it we:

 

–  invest in research & development to create innovative new solutions that improve clinical outcomes and reduce the economic burden on healthcare systems;

 

–  rigorously enforce regulatory and compliance standards, conducting business ethically everywhere we operate;

 

–  ensure our manufacturing , supply and distribution footprint is lean and efficient;

 

–  provide medical education and product training to healthcare professionals to help ensure safe and effective treatment for patients; and

 

–  support our sales and marketing teams to guarantee our customers have the advanced technologies and supporting services they need to treat their patients.

 

Our business model is underpinned by our values and Capital Allocation Framework :

 

–  our values of Innovation, Trust and Performance focus our people on being responsive to the needs of our customers; energetic, creative and passionate in our work; and building lasting and close relationships with our stakeholders; and

 

–  Our Capital Allocation Framework enables us to invest for the future, both in organic growth and through acquisitions, whilst also generating value for Shareholders today through a progressive dividend policy and commitment to return any excess capital.

 

By implementing our Strategic Priorities we increase momentum throughout the business model to:

 

–  build on our strong position in the Established Markets;

 

–  realise the significant opportunities in the Emerging & International Markets;

 

–  maintain an unremitting focus to innovate for value;

 

–  simplify and improve our operating model to maximise efficiency; and

 

–  supplement our organic growth through acquisitions.

 

Research and development

 

We have a deep knowledge of the needs of surgeons and nurses, we understand the economic pressures healthcare payers work under, and we recognise that patients are demanding better treatment options to restore quality of life. These factors inform our research and development (‘R&D’) strategy, which is at the heart of our business model.

 

In 2013, we again delivered many new and innovative products. These included a major new knee platform, the JOURNEY II BCS; the first sports medicine product to use Smith & Nephew’s proprietary advanced biocomposite material in the HEALICOIL REGENESORB Suture Anchor; and DURAFIBER Ag, combining a highly absorbent, gelling fibre dressing with the antimicrobial benefits of silver.

 

We have a strong new product pipeline for 2014, with many innovations scheduled, in particular in Sports Medicine Joint Repair, Trauma and Advanced Wound Management.

 

These new products, and many more currently in development, are a result of our focus on R&D. We invested $231 million in this area in 2013. At 5.3% of revenue this is an increase from the 4.1% spent in the previous year. We expect to maintain our investment level at around 5% of revenue going forward.

 

We are highly disciplined in project selection. Our R&D experts in the UK, US, Europe, China and India have extensive customer and sector knowledge, which is augmented by ongoing interaction with our marketing teams. Strict criteria are applied to ensure new products fulfil an unmet clinical need, have a strong commercial case, and are technologically feasible. Our R&D teams also work closely with manufacturing and supply chain management to ensure we can produce new products to clinical, cost and time specification.

 

Open Innovation

 

As part of our R&D strategy, Smith & Nephew supports and works with numerous small companies looking for help with developing and commercialising new technologies.

 

As supporters of NASA’s TecFusion Open Innovation programme we access and support companies developing highly creative, often disruptive, technologies that are funded by the US federal government.

 

We are a primary sponsor of the Massachusetts Medical Device Development Center (‘M2D2’) New Venture Competition, supporting entrepreneurial product development by early-stage medical device companies.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
20      

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Our business continued

We are the commercial partner in SWAN-iCare, an EU-funded initiative to bring multidisciplinary European research teams together to deliver a next generation integrated autonomous solution for monitoring and adapting personalised therapy of foot and leg ulcers.

InVentures

Smith & Nephew also welcomes new product concepts from surgeons. Through our InVentures programme we collaborate to bring ideas to reality. InVentures evaluates surgeon concepts for technical and market viability and our development team works hand-in-hand with surgeons to deliver new products that advance healing. Commercialised products benefit from the global selling power of Smith & Nephew.

In 2013, we introduced a new MODULAR RAIL SYSTEM for deformity correction and limb restoration that was designed in collaboration with Dror Paley MD through the InVentures programme. This new treatment option highlights our increased investment in extremities and limb restoration, and our commitment to working directly with surgeon inventors.

Intellectual property

We protect the results of our research and development through patents and other forms of intellectual property. The Group’s patent portfolio currently includes in excess of 5,000 patents and patent applications. Patent protection for our products is sought routinely in our principal markets.

We also have a policy of protecting our products by registering trademarks under the local laws of markets in which such products are sold. We vigorously protect our trademarks against infringement.

 

 

 

3 INNOVATE FOR VALUE

 

New treatment for venous leg ulcers

HP802-247 is an investigational human cell therapy for the treatment of venous leg ulcers currently in Phase III trials. Results from Phase llb trials investigating the efficacy of HP802-247 were previously published in The Lancet .

 

Based on in vitro studies, HP802-247 is believed to release various growth factors and cytokines into the micro-environment of the wound. These living cells are anticipated to interact with the patient’s own cells to stimulate wound healing. HP802-247 has been designed to deliver a defined cell ratio (keratinocyte:fibroblasts) to support optimal tissue regeneration.

 

Venous leg ulcers are increasingly common and costly to healthcare systems and a cause of prolonged suffering for patients. These wounds are caused by swelling and inflammation secondary to blockage or backflow in the veins of the legs. many venous ulcers fail to heal even after three months of standard treatment and develop into chronic, non-healing wounds.

 

Based on an estimated figure of 2.5 million venous leg ulcers in the United States alone and a study of actual direct treatment costs of $9,685 per person, the annual cost of treating these wounds is likely to be in the many billions of dollars. Accordingly, the availability of innovative and more effective treatment strategies for such high-risk wounds could provide tremendous benefits to both patients and society.

 

 

 

In addition to protecting our market position by filing and enforcing patents and trademarks, we may oppose third party patents and trademark filings where appropriate in those areas that might conflict with our business interests.

In the ordinary course of business, we enter into a number of licensing arrangements with respect to our products. None of these arrangements individually is considered material to our current operations and financial results.

Regulatory and compliance

Code of conduct and business principles

Smith & Nephew earns trust with patients, customers, healthcare professionals, authorities and the public by acting in an honest and fair manner in all aspects of its operations. We expect the same from those with whom we do business, including distributors and independent agents that sell our products, as well as vendors that interact with others on our behalf. Our Code of Conduct and Business Principles (‘Code’) governs the way we operate to achieve these objectives.

Smith & Nephew takes into account ethical, social, environmental, legal and financial considerations as part of its operating methods. We have a robust whistle-blowing system in all jurisdictions in which Smith & Nephew operates. We are committed to upholding our promise in our Code that we will not retaliate against anyone who makes a report in good faith.

New employees receive training on our Code, and we assign annual compliance training to employees. In 2013, we created two additional courses: a refresher course on Preventing Bribery and Corruption and ‘Effective Communication’.

Global compliance programme

Smith & Nephew has implemented what we believe is a world-class Global Compliance Programme that helps our businesses manage risk and comply with laws and regulations. In 2013, Smith & Nephew continued to strengthen its comprehensive compliance programme, which includes global policies and procedures, on-boarding and annual training for its employees, managers, independent agents and key employees of distributors and high risk vendors around the world, monitoring and auditing processes, and reporting channels. Through a global intranet website, we provide resources and tools to guide employees to make decisions that comply with the law and our Code and earn trust. We conduct advance review and approval for any significant interactions with healthcare professionals or government officials. New distributors are subject to due diligence and are contractually obligated to comply with applicable laws and our Code. Their management are required to take compliance training and certify that they will ensure their employees and agents comply with the law and our Code. In 2013, we launched a compliance programme toolkit, in multiple languages, for our distributors to provide them with the resources to establish their own compliance programme. The toolkit includes draft policies, training materials and approval forms.

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      21

 

In 2012, under the terms of the Company’s Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (‘FCPA’) settlement (see Note 17.3 of the Notes to the Group accounts), we retained an independent monitor to review the effectiveness of our compliance programme and make recommendations, as appropriate, for further enhancements to the programme. In collaboration with the independent monitor, our programme has been enhanced even further. In late 2013, the monitor completed his 18-month review and concluded that Smith & Nephew’s compliance programme is reasonably designed and implemented to detect and prevent violations of the anti-corruption laws and is functioning effectively. Smith & Nephew will report directly to the US Department of Justice (‘DOJ’) and the US Securities and Exchange Commission (‘SEC’) for the remainder of the three-year settlement agreement.

Manufacturing

We continue to implement Lean Manufacturing throughout our factories and the supply chain to improve and sustain higher levels of service, quality, productivity and efficiency.

Core competencies include: materials technology; high-precision machining in Advanced Surgical Devices; and high-volume, automated manufacturing in Advanced Wound Management.

 

 

 

4 SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

Perpetual efficiency

 

The significant investments undertaken in 2013 have been possible through our successful drive to be more efficient, reduce cost, and simplify and improve our operating model.

 

In 2011, we announced a programme to generate annual savings of $150 million. As a result of our work to date, we have annualised benefits of $131 million. The programme will be largely complete by the end of 2014.

 

Significant actions included a major reorganisation when we created the Advanced Surgical Devices division, the opening of an extension to our Advanced Wound Management factory in Suzhou, China, and the introduction of a major new IT platform.

 

We are now a leaner business, and, as importantly, we are embedding a culture of perpetual efficiency into our processes and future thinking.

 

We purchase raw materials, components, finished products and packaging materials from certain key suppliers. These principally include metal forgings and stampings for orthopaedic products, optical and electronic sub-components and finished goods for sports medicine products, active ingredients and finished goods for Advanced Wound Management and packaging materials across all businesses. Suppliers are selected, and contracts negotiated, by a centralised procurement team wherever possible, with a view to ensure value for money based on the total spend across the Group.

We outsource manufacturing where necessary to obtain specialised expertise or where it is possible to gain lower cost without undue risk to intellectual property. Suppliers of outsourced products and services are selected based on their ability to deliver products and services to specification, and establish and maintain a quality system. Suppliers are trained and are monitored through on-site assessments and performance audits that include quality, service and delivery.

Finished goods purchased for resale include screen displays, optical and electrical devices in the Advanced Surgical Devices division and skincare products in the Advanced Wound Management division.

We operate a number of manufacturing facilities around the globe, which are predominantly division specific, and a number of central distribution facilities in the key geographical areas in which we operate. Products are shipped to Group companies which hold small amounts of inventory locally for immediate or urgent customer requirements.

Advanced Surgical Devices

The Advanced Surgical Devices division’s largest manufacturing operation is based in Memphis (Tennessee, US), with additional production and assembly plants based in Mansfield (Massachusetts, US), Oklahoma City (Oklahoma, US), Aarau (Switzerland), Tuttlingen (Germany), Beijing (China), Calgary (Canada), Warwick (UK) and Sangameshwar (India).

The Memphis facilities produce key products and instrumentation in our Knee Implants, Hip Implant and Trauma franchises. These include the JOURNEY II BCS and LEGION à knees, the ANTHOLOGY à Primary Hip System and key Trauma products such as the PERI-LOC à Ankle Fusion Plating System and TRIGEN à Intramedullary Nails. In addition to this, Memphis is the home to the design and manufacturing process of the VISIONAIRE Patient Matched Instrumentation Sets.

The Mansfield facility focuses on sports medicine related products for minimally invasive surgery including the FAST FIX à 360 Meniscal Repair System, FOOTPRINT à PK Suture Anchor, DYONICS à Platinum Shaver Blades, ENDOBUTTON à CL Ultra and the HEALICOIL PK suture anchor.

The Aarau, Tuttlingen, Beijing and Warwick facilities produce a large number of products including key Trauma products, the PLUS à knee and hip range and the BIRMINGHAM à Hip Resurfacing System. The facility in Oklahoma City deals mainly with the assembly of surgical digital equipment, such as HD560 Camera.

A distribution facility in Baar (Switzerland) serves as the main holding and consolidation point for markets in Europe. In the US, the distribution hub is located in Memphis.

Advanced Wound Management

Advanced Wound Management is headquartered in Hull (UK) which is home to a large proportion of the division’s manufacturing activities. There are also manufacturing facilities in Gilberdyke (UK), Suzhou (China), Curaçao (Dutch Caribbean), Alberta (Canada) and Oklahoma City.

The products made at the Hull site cover the therapies of Exudate Management (Foam products – principally ALLEVYN à ), Burns treatment (ACTICOAT à ) and Wound Closure (OPSITE à film products). Several brands produced in Hull, such as JELONET à and BACTIGRAS à , will be transitioning to Suzhou in 2014.

A key base material used in the production of a large number of dressings is the intermediate bulk rolls of film which are manufactured in the Gilberdyke (UK) facility. The facility in Alberta (Canada) provides specific expertise in the addition of silver coatings onto the ACTICOAT burns range prior to shipping to Hull for the final conversion process into finished dressings.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
22      

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Our business continued

The Suzhou facility opened in 2009 initially to manufacture some Foam products within Exudate Management. It has since expanded to take on production of some Film Wound Closure products.

NPWT is an area of the business which is growing strongly. The majority of the NPWT components are bought in from third parties and assembled in the Advanced Surgical Devices Oklahoma City facility, with the exception of the dressings used for the PICO product which are manufactured in Hull.

Manufacturing for Advanced Wound Bioactives takes place in Curacao, and at various third party facilities in the US. The products are distributed from a third party logistics facility in San Antonio, Texas.

Advanced Wound Management distribution hubs are located in Neunkirchen (Germany) and Derby (UK) for international distribution, Bedford (UK) for UK domestic distribution and Lawrenceville (Georgia, US) for US distribution.

Medical education

Smith & Nephew is dedicated to helping healthcare professionals improve the quality of care for patients. We are proud to support the professional development of surgeons and nurses by providing them with medical education and training on our Advanced Surgical Devices and Advanced Wound Management products.

Every year thousands of customers attend our state-of-the-art training centres in the US, UK and China and Smith & Nephew courses at multiple hospitals and facilities around the world. Working under expert guidance, attendees refine techniques and learn new skills, whilst experiencing the safe and effective use of our products. We also support healthcare professionals through our online resources such as the Global Wound Academy and, for surgeons, our Education and Evidence website.

 

 

 

1 ESTABLISHED MARKETS

 

Pioneering e-learning

We have extended our commitment to medical education in 2013 with the launch of Education and Evidence, a new e-learning platform for surgeons to access and share peer-to-peer educational resources. It follows the success of our Global Wound Academy (www.globalwoundacademy.com) which has more than 46,000 registered users.

 

Education and Evidence supports joint repair and replacement, extremities and trauma specialties. The member-based service at www.smith-nephew.com/education/ hosts more than 1,000 videos, articles, surgical techniques, podcasts, training courses, tablet PC apps and iBooks TM . It uses an innovative search engine and self-profiling to tailor content to users, while also enabling the sharing of resources with colleagues.

 

Through these powerful e-learning tools we are delivering on our Strategic Priorities, reinforcing our position in the Established Markets and extending our reach in the Emerging & International Markets.

 

 

Sales and marketing

Our customers are the providers of medical and surgical treatments and services in over 90 countries worldwide. The largest single customer worldwide is a purchasing group based in the UK that represented 6% of our worldwide revenue in 2013.

In our Established Markets, our Advanced Surgical Devices are principally shipped and invoiced directly to healthcare providers, hospitals and other healthcare facilities. Certain Advanced Wound Management products are shipped and invoiced to wholesale distributors and others are consigned to distributors that lease the devices to healthcare providers, hospitals and other healthcare facilities and end-users.

Each division operates its own dedicated sales force as the customer for the divisions’ products are usually different. Our US sales forces consist of a mixture of independent contract workers and employees. Sales agents are contractually prohibited from selling products that compete with our products. In most Other Established Markets, each division typically manages employee sales forces directly.

In our Emerging & International Markets we operate through direct selling and marketing operations, and through distributors. In these markets, our Advanced Surgical Devices franchises frequently share sales resources. The Advanced Wound Management sales force may be separate where it calls on different customers.

Our people

Smith & Nephew had over 11,000 employees in 2013. We are committed to attracting, engaging, developing and retaining employees as well as to being a responsible corporate citizen.

Our employees are dedicated to our core values of Innovation, Trust and Performance which represent the foundation of our culture.

Investing in our people and communities helps ensure the long-term sustainability of our business. In 2013, we executed actions to address employee feedback from our Global Survey and also participated in the Great Places to Work survey in many of our markets.

Attracting the best talent and developing and engaging our employees is critical to achieving and sustaining our business objectives and overall performance. Our appointments are made on merit and in alignment with a core set of competencies and values of which ethics and integrity are central. We prioritise the development and promotion of our employees whenever possible.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

    23

 

Each year, Smith & Nephew conducts a comprehensive global development and capability review process to identify high-potential employees and ensure they have career development plans in place. Talented employees are provided with opportunities to develop and grow their skills and career. Current programmes include the CEO Forum, designed to develop talent and provide exposure to the broader business, and the General Managers Meeting, held annually to align these key leaders with the Group’s strategy and goals. In addition, the Board reviews succession plans for key executive roles. We have succession plans for critical positions across our business and have taken proactive steps to recruit specialist and leadership talent to augment our current team.

Our performance management process ensures all employees set objectives which align to our overall business goals. Reward systems are focused on promoting high-performance and ethical behaviour. Our Code of Conduct is an important measure of individual performance. All employees are required each year to complete training and certify their adherence to this Code.

Smith & Nephew strives to create a more engaged and productive workforce and focuses on measures to drive employee engagement. These include an understanding of the Group’s mission and direction, sense of employee involvement, focus and adaptability to customers and market place. We continue to listen to our employees, via regular surveys and focus groups, and we value their opinions.

Diversity at Smith & Nephew

Smith & Nephew believes that diversity fuels innovation. We are committed to employment practices based on equality of opportunity, regardless of colour, creed, race, national origin, sex, age, marital status, sexual orientation or mental or physical disability unrelated to the ability of the person to perform the essential functions of the job.

The Board and Executive Officers continue to recognise the importance of diversity and over the last two years have expanded their own diversity profile. Three of our 12 Board members are female.

At 31 December 2013, Smith & Nephew had the following breakdown of employees:

 

    Number of Employees  1

Directors

 

Male

  9

Female

  3

Total

  12

Senior Managers and above  2

 

Male

  484

Female

  140

Total

  624

Total employees

 

Male

  7,203

Female

  4,821

Total

  12,024

 

1     Number of employees as at 31 December 2013 including part time employees and employees on leave of absence.

2     Senior managers and above includes all employees classed as Directors, Senior Directors, Vice Presidents and Executive Officers and includes all statutory Directors of our subsidiary companies.

We aim to provide an open, challenging, productive and participative environment based on constructive relationships. We maintain good communications with employees through regular and timely information and consultation.

We provide clearly communicated goals and performance standards, and the training, information and authority needed to do a good job. We provide fair recognition and reward based on performance. Our annual CEO Award recognises employees who deliver exceptional results in-line with our core values, encouraging innovation and a spirit of continuous improvement at all levels. We are committed to working with employees to develop each individual’s talents, skills and abilities. We provide encouragement to learn and progress and to participate fully in the quest for continuous improvement. We recruit, employ and promote employees on the sole basis of the qualifications and abilities needed for the work to be performed. We do not tolerate discrimination on any grounds and provide equal opportunity based on merit.

We are committed to building diversity in a working environment where there is mutual trust and respect and where everyone feels responsible for the performance and reputation of our Company. We are committed to providing healthy and safe working conditions for all employees. We achieve this by ensuring that health and safety and the working environment are managed as an integral part of the business, and we recognise employee involvement as a key part of that process.

We do not use any form of forced, compulsory or child labour. We support the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of the United Nations. This means we respect the human rights, dignity and privacy of the individual and the right of employees to freedom of association, freedom of expression and the right to be heard.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
24      

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Segment performance: Advanced Surgical Devices

 

Advanced Surgical Devices  

............................

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

1 The underlying percentage increases/decreases are after adjusting for the effect of currency translation and the inclusion of the comparative impact of acquisitions and exclusion of disposals.
2 Explanation of these non-GAAP financial measures are provided on pages 161 to 163.
3 The 2012 revenue by franchise has been restated to 2013 product franchises.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      25

 

LOGO  

The Emerging &

International Markets have

become an increasingly

important opportunity

for our products

 

 

 

Overview

 

In Advanced Surgical Devices (‘ASD’) we develop, manufacture and sell products in the following franchise areas:

 

Orthopaedic Reconstruction

 

Smith & Nephew offers a range of specialist products for orthopaedic reconstruction in its Knee Implants and Hip Implants franchises.

 

Implant bearing surfaces such as the proprietary OXINIUM à Oxidized Zirconium continue to be a point of differentiation for Smith & Nephew. OXINIUM Technology combines the enhanced wear resistance of a ceramic bearing with the superior toughness of a metallic bearing. When combined with highly cross-linked polyethylene (‘XLPE’) it results in our proprietary VERILAST Technology. In Hip Implants, the combination of a ceramicised metal head and a polyethylene lined cup have been shown in joint registry data to have superior five-year survivorship (97.9%) compared to implants made from any other material. In Knee Implants, the LEGION Primary Knee with VERILAST Technology is the only knee implant with a 30-year wear performance claim – more than double the length of wear performance testing of conventional technologies.

 

 

Knee Implants

 

Smith & Nephew offers a range of products for specialised knee procedures. The JOURNEY II BCS Total Knee System was launched in the US in 2013. It is designed to restore the normal kinematic motion by replicating the anatomic shapes of a normal, healthy knee.

 

The LEGION/GENESIS à II Total Knee System is a comprehensive system designed to allow surgeons to address a wide range of knee procedures from primary to revision.

 

These systems also feature VERILAST Technology, our advanced bearing surface and also utilised VISIONAIRE Patient-Matched Instrumentation.

 

With VISIONAIRE Instrumentation, a patient’s MRI and X-rays are used to create customised cutting blocks that allow the surgeon to achieve optimal mechanical axis alignment of the new implant. In addition, VISIONAIRE also helps save time by reducing the number of steps and instruments needed in the operating room.

 

5 SUPPLEMENT GROWTH WITH ACQUSITIONS

 

Leadership in India

 

The Emerging & International Markets have become an increasingly important opportunity for our products. The acquisition of India’s Sushrut-Adler, a leader in trauma products, greatly enhanced our portfolio for this fast growing segment.

 

Sushrut-Adler has a long and distinguished history, a reputation for quality products and a loyal customer base. Its trauma portfolio strongly complements our established positions in orthopaedic reconstruction and sports medicine in India. From our enhanced platform we can develop further products for the mid-tier in India and for export. We are delivering on our Strategic Priorities to build leadership positions in the Emerging & International Markets and to bring forward products for these countries.

 

LOGO   

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
26      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Segment performance: Advanced Surgical Devices continued

 

Hip Implants

For Hip Implants, core systems include the ANTHOLOGY Hip System, SYNERGY à Hip System, the SMF Short Modular Femoral Hip System, the R3 Acetabular System, the POLARCUP à Dual Mobility Hip System and the SL-PLUS Hip Family System.

In 2013, we launched the SMF Monolithic Hip Stem which is intended to capitalise on the clinically proven flat taper cementless primary stem. The SMF Monolithic Stem family of products allows the surgeon to use the convenience of a one piece stem and the advantage of a short stem.

We also introduced the POLARSTEM à HA Cementless Stem System in the US for state-of-the-art minimally invasive surgical techniques that preserve bone and soft tissue, with good functionality and reproducible results.

Trauma & Extremities

Our Trauma & Extremities franchise offers both internal and external devices, as well as other products used in the stabilisation of severe fractures and deformity correction procedures.

During 2013, the US business refined its commercial model to increase the focus and resources addressing the opportunities in the high-growth trauma and extremities markets.

For Trauma, the principal internal fixation products are the TRIGEN à family of IM nails (TRIGEN META-NAIL à System, TRIGEN Humeral Nail System, TRIGEN SURESHOT à , and TRIGEN INTERTAN à ) and the PERI-LOC à Plating System. For extremities and limb restoration, the franchise offers the TAYLOR SPATIAL FRAME à Circular Fixation System as well as a range of plates, screws, arthroscopes, instrumentation, resection, and suture anchor products for foot, ankle, hand and wrist surgeons.

2013 saw the introduction of the MODULAR RAIL SYSTEM (‘MRS’) which is designed to correct bone deformities, malunions, non-unions and limb length discrepancies. The MRS takes advantage of the body’s ability to grow new bone tissue.

In Extremities during 2013 we expanded our ALL28 à Foot and Ankle portfolio to include ankle instability and Achilles tendon repair. Ankle instability builds upon our successful TWINFIX à titanium anchor technology in a new system specifically designed for foot & ankle surgeons. It allows the surgeon to re-attach or repair the anterior talofibular ligament (‘ATFL’) to the fibula. The Achilles tendon repair solution uses our FOOTPRINT à Ultra PK Suture Anchor to address traumatic avulsion of the tendon. This technology allows for tension adjustment after anchor insertion up until the inserter is removed, as well as eliminating knot stack on the heel that may cause irritation to the patient post procedure.

Sports Medicine Joint Repair

The Sports Medicine Joint Repair franchise offers surgeons a broad array of instruments, technologies and implants necessary to perform minimally invasive surgery of the joints, including knee, hip and shoulder repair.

Significant launches during the year included the HEALICOIL REGENESORB Biocomposite Suture Anchor, Active Heel Traction Boot and CLANCY à Depth Gauge.

The HEALICOIL Suture Anchor’s distinctive, open-architecture differs from solid-core implants by eliminating the material between anchor threads, allowing blood and bone marrow from the surrounding cancellous bone to enter the implant. Our proprietary REGENESORB Material is an advanced biocomposite.

Arthroscopic Enabling Technologies (‘AET’)

Our Arthroscopic Enabling Technologies franchise offers healthcare providers a variety of technologies such as fluid management equipment for surgical access; high definition cameras, digital image capture, scopes, light sources and monitors to assist with visualisation inside the joints; radio frequency (‘RF’) probes, electromechanical and mechanical blades, and hand instruments for removing damaged tissue.

Key AET products include DYONICS shaver blades, ACUFEX à handheld instruments, and a wide range of radio frequency probes. The DYONICS Platinum Series Shaver Blades are single-use blades that provide superior resection due to their unequalled sharpness and virtually eliminate clogging through their improved debris evacuation capabilities.

The new LED 3000 Light Source launched in 2013 is designed to optimise the HD visualisation experience by providing brilliant illumination through a compact and intuitive interface.

Other ASD

The Other ASD franchise includes smaller businesses such as Gynaecology.

The main Gynaecology product is the TRUCLEAR à System, a first-of-its-kind hysteroscopic morcellator that pairs continuous visualisation capabilities with minimally invasive tissue removal providing safe and efficient removal of endometrial polyps and submucosal fibroids. The business also sells a hysteroscopic fluid management system, which provides uterine distension and clear visualisation during hysteroscopic procedures.

 
 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      27

 

 

3 INNOVATE FOR VALUE

 

Natural-motion Journey II

BCS Total Knee System

 

JOURNEY II BCS sets a new standard in knee implant performance by restoring more normal motion. This is achieved through the reproduction of both the shapes of the joint’s hard surfaces and the normal force behaviour of the soft tissues, such as ligament and muscle firing patterns. As a result, the soft tissue’s re-adjustment to new shapes and forces after surgery is minimised, helping to return the patient’s stride to its natural rhythm.

 

This latest innovation is the result of intense research and design, and the development of new PHYSIOLOGICAL MATCHING à Technology. Using our LifeMOD à human simulation software, Smith & Nephew

 

 

engineers were able to conduct proprietary analysis of the bone, ligament and muscle forces that impact the knee, and then account for those forces within the design of an implant that restores anatomic shapes and normal motion.

 

JOURNEY II BCS is made from Smith & Nephew’s VERILAST Technology. The combination of two wear reducing materials – proprietary OXINIUM alloy and a highly cross-linked plastic liner, VERILAST Technology generates a significant reduction in implant wear compared to traditional bearing couples on the market.

 

 

LOGO

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
28      

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Segment performance: Advanced Surgical Devices continued

 

Market and competition

In 2013, weaker economic conditions worldwide continued to create several challenges for the overall surgical devices market, including continued deferrals of joint replacement procedures and heightened pricing pressures.

These factors contributed to the lower overall growth of the worldwide surgical devices market versus historic comparables. However, over the medium term, several catalysts are expected to continue to drive sustainable growth in surgical device procedures, including the growing and ageing population with active lifestyles, rising rates of co-morbidities such as obesity and diabetes, patient desire for minimally invasive procedures, technology improvements allowing surgeons to treat younger, more active patients, and the increasing demand for healthcare in emerging markets.

Orthopaedic and sports medicine procedures tend to be higher in the winter months (quarter one and quarter four in the US and Europe) when accidents and sports related injuries are highest. Conversely, elective procedures tend to slow down in the summer months due to holidays.

Global orthopaedic reconstruction segment

Smith & Nephew estimates that the global orthopaedic reconstruction segment is worth approximately $14 billion and the segment served by Smith & Nephew increased by approximately 3% in 2013. Competitors in the orthopaedic reconstruction segment include Biomet, DePuy Synthes (a division of Johnson & Johnson), Stryker and Zimmer.

Global orthopaedic trauma segment

Smith & Nephew estimates that the global orthopaedic trauma segment is worth approximately $5 billion and the segment served by Smith & Nephew grew by approximately 7% in 2013. Competitors in the orthopaedic trauma segment include Biomet, DePuy Synthes (a division of Johnson & Johnson), Stryker and Zimmer.

Global sports medicine segment

Smith & Nephew estimates that the global sports medicine segment (representing access, resection and repair products) is worth approximately $4 billion and the segment served by Smith & Nephew grew by approximately 6% in 2013. Competitors in the sports medicine segment include Arthrex, DePuy Mitek (a division of Johnson & Johnson) and Stryker.

Regulatory approvals

In 2013, regulatory clearances/approvals were obtained for several key products and instrumentations.

In the US, 510(k) clearance was obtained for Disposable Knee Instruments, SURESHOT à Distal Targeting System v3.0 (added drill depth measurement functionality), HEALICOIL REGENESORB Suture Anchor, TWINFIX Ti 3.5mm SL Anchor, FOOTPRINT Ultra 4.5mm & 5.5mm SL Anchors, SUTUREFIX à Ultra Suture Anchors and ULTRATAPE à Suture.

In Europe, we obtained renewals for LEGION Narrow Femoral Components (CE mark approval), ULTRA FAST-FIX à AB (indications expansion to include meniscal allograft transplantation), Round ENDOBUTTON à , SCREWBUTTON à and ULTRA FAST-FIX AB (CE Renewal).

In Canada, the TWINFIX Ti 3.5mm SL Anchor and FOOTPRINT Ultra 4.5mm & 5.5mm SL Anchors were approved.

In Australia, the OSTEORAPTOR à Curved 2.3 system was approved.

In Japan, we received approvals for SURESHOT Distal Targeting System (two approvals obtained in 2013, including approval of current software version, 3.0), JOURNEY II BCS Knee System, R3 Acetabular System (XLPE Liners and Shells), JOURNEY Uni Knee System (OXINIUM femoral components and all-poly tibial baseplates), JOURNEY Uni Knee System (Articular inserts and tibial baseplates), VISIONAIRE Patient-Matched Cutting Blocks, JOURNEY II CR Knee System, XTENDOBUTTON à , HEALICOIL PK Suture Anchor, Beaver Blade, TRUCLEAR Hysteroscopic Morcellator system, BIOSURE HA Interference Screw, BIORAPTOR Knotless Anchor and TWINFIX ULTRA HA Suture Anchor.

In our Emerging & International Markets, we obtained a number of regulatory clearances/approvals for several core product lines, as follows:

In China, we received approvals for Ultra FASTFIX and Ultra FASTFIX AB Meniscal Repair System, SURESHOT Distal Targeting Systems, TWINFIX ULTRA HA Suture Anchor, SPYROMITE and DYNOMITE Extremities Suture Achors and LEGION Primary Knee System – POROUS Femoral Component with HA Coating.

In Russia, we obtained approval to market our Multiple Knee Systems including JOURNEY UNI, GENESIS II, LEGION and TC_PLUS.

In Mexico, the OXINIUM Femoral Components, R3 Acetabular System, REDAPT Instruments, Cannulated Screw Systems were approved for distribution.

 
 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      29

 

Segment performance: Advanced Wound Management

 

Advanced Wound Management  

 

 

 

LOGO

 

1 The underlying percentage increases/decreases are after adjusting for the effect of currency translation and the inclusion of the comparative impact of acquisitions and exclusion of disposals.
2 Explanation of these non-GAAP financial measures are provided on pages 161 to 163.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
30      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Segment performance: Advanced Wound Management continued

 

Overview      

4 SIMPLIFY & IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

In Advanced Wound Management (‘AWM’) we offer products from initial wound bed preparation through to full wound closure. These products are targeted at chronic wounds associated with the older population, such as pressure sores and venous leg ulcers. There are also products for the treatment of acute wounds such as burns and invasive surgery that impact the wider population.

 

The main products within the AWM business are for Exudate management, Infection management, NPWT and Bioactives.

 

AWM has its global headquarters in Hull, UK and its North American headquarters in St Petersburg, Florida.

 

Advanced Wound Care

 

Exudate management

 

Exudate management products focus on effectively and efficiently locking away wound fluid and creating an optimal healing environment to ensure better healing outcomes. Our key brands in this space are ALLEVYN foam dressings and DURAFIBER gelling fibre dressings.

 

During 2013, we continued to invest in the commercialisation of ALLEVYN Life, our latest innovation in foam dressings, designed to provide a better quality of life to the patient during the healing process. In several studies this has resulted in better patient satisfaction, longer wear times and overall reduced healthcare management costs. One recent article published in the Journal of Community Nursing stated “In employing a design intended to combat the common problems of living with a wound, such as exudate leakage and conformability, the dressing has the potential to improve wound management practice and reduce the use of associated resources, such as nursing time”. The article concluded that around 2,500 working days could be saved annually as a result of using ALLEVYN Life.

 

DURAFIBER has continued to grow over the course of 2013, with customers switching from other products within the gelling fibre segment.

 

Infection management

 

AWM has two significant technologies in its infection management portfolio, silver (ACTICOAT, DURAFIBER Ag and ALLEVYN Ag) and iodine (IODOSORB à ). The iodine-based IODOSORB product has continued to gain interest as biofilms become a more important topic in wound care.

 

We launched DURAFIBER Ag in 2013 and with it entered the silver gelling fibre market, one of the largest segments of the infection management market.

     

Expanding Suzhou

 

In April distinguished guests from Suzhou Industrial Park and Jiangsu Province attended the official opening of the major extension to Smith & Nephew’s Advanced Wound Management manufacturing facility in Suzhou, China.

 

The expansion more than doubled the size of the Suzhou facility, and is enabling Smith & Nephew to continue to develop its product portfolio both for the Chinese market and for export. Those manufactured at Suzhou include ALLEVYN, Smith & Nephew’s leading foam dressing brand, which is used in the treatment of hard to heal wounds such as leg ulcers, as well as new portfolios for the mid-tier across the Emerging & International Markets.

 

Completed on time, to budget, and without a lost-time incident, the extension takes the total floor area to 27,000 square meters and doubles the production capacity to over 100 million wound dressings a year. We are delivering on our Strategic Priority to Simplify and Improve our Operating Model by optimising our global manufacturing footprint.

 

China is of great strategic importance to Smith & Nephew. We are proud of what we have achieved here and are investing for the long term. We now have more than 900 people in China, working across manufacturing and commercial operations. We have built our success upon a sustainable and ethical approach to business, and are bringing this long-term commitment to our work, our employees and our communities.

 

LOGO

 

 
 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      31

 

 

 

Other

We also offer a wide range of other wound care products, which means we have one of the most comprehensive ranges of wound care solutions in the industry. These products include our film and post-operative dressings, skincare products and gels.

ADERMA: Following the acquisition and integration of ADERMA pressure relieving technology in 2012, the launch in the UK and increase in ADERMA sales activity has seen it firmly established as the market leader. The UK government’s targeting of Pressure Ulcer Prevention and the known cost to the UK health system has driven the adoption of ADERMA in both the Acute and Community sectors. Due to the success in the UK, plans are in place to launch ADERMA as Dermapad in 2014 into other healthcare markets with equally strong Pressure Ulcer Prevention drivers. With our Skincare portfolio, ADERMA/ Dermapad and ALLEYVN Life, we are well placed to deliver a strong and comprehensive Pressure Ulcer Prevention and treatment solution through a tested and validated value proposition into the Established Markets.

IV 3000: AWM’s specialist breathable premium IV dressing, utilising REALTIC à film technology and unique patterned adhesive, continues to perform well, particularly driven by emerging markets. Success in these markets and elsewhere has identified an opportunity for a mid-tier offering.

OPSITE POST OP VISIBLE: This is our innovative dressing that combines the qualities of a premium dressing with the ability to see the incision. This unique product continues to deliver strong growth in both our Established and Emerging & International Markets as its adoption becomes more widespread backed by good clinical evidence.

Advanced Wound Devices

Advanced Wound Devices consists of two categories of products; NPWT and VERSAJET à .

NPWT

Our NPWT solutions include traditional NPWT products (RENASYS à products) and the single-use portfolio (PICO and KALYPTO à products).

In its sixth year on the market, our RENASYS traditional NPWT brand has seen continuous improvement and innovation. Product updates in 2013 enhanced both function and user experience with our RENASYS systems as a whole. The RENASYS product offering now includes multiple device options, a choice of foam or gauze dressings, along with a range of drains and specialty kits.

The PICO system, our single-use, canister-free solution is revolutionising NPWT. As familiar and easy to use as an advanced wound dressing, PICO provides an active intervention to help promote optimal healing for early discharge and enhanced outcomes in complex cases. PICO simplifies NPWT.

VERSAJET

The VERSAJET Hydrosurgery system is a mechanical debridement device used by surgeons to excise and evacuate non-viable tissue, bacteria and contaminants from wound, burns and soft tissue injuries.

Advanced Wound Bioactives

Bioactives represent the fastest growing category of chronic wound therapeutics. Our diversified biotherapeutic portfolio offers novel, cost-effective solutions for tissue repair and healing, addressing the full spectrum of hard-to-heal wounds.

Currently, our leading product is Collagenase SANTYL à Ointment, the only FDA-approved biologic enzymatic debriding agent for chronic dermal ulcers and severe burns. Other products include: REGRANEX à Gel, a FDA-approved platelet-derived growth factor; and the OASIS à family of naturally-derived, extracellular matrix replacement products indicated for the management of both chronic and traumatic wounds.

Additionally, the lead candidate in our bioactive pipeline is HP802-247, an investigational allogeneic living cell bioformulation containing keratinocytes and fibroblasts. HP802-247 is currently in Phase III for the treatment of venous leg ulcers following positive Phase IIb clinical trial results, which were recently published in The Lancet.

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
32      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Segment performance: Advanced Wound Management continued

 

Market and competition

The AWM market is focused on the treatment of chronic wounds of the older population and other acute hard-to-heal wounds such as burns and certain surgical wounds and is therefore expected to benefit from demographic trends. Growth is driven by an ageing population and by a steady advance in technology and products that are more clinically efficient and cost-effective than their conventional counterparts. The market for advanced wound treatments is relatively unpenetrated and it is estimated that the potential market is significantly larger than the current market. Management believes that the market will continue the trend towards advanced wound products with their ability to accelerate healing rates, reduce hospital stay times and cut the cost of clinician and nursing time as well as aftercare in the home.

Smith & Nephew estimates that the global wound management segment is worth approximately $7 billion and the segment served by Smith & Nephew grew by 4% in 2013. Global competitors vary across the various product areas and include Coloplast, Convatec, Kinetic Concepts and Molnlycke.

The 2013 Global NPWT market was flat versus 2012. Price pressures continue to offset the increase in patient therapy volumes. Price pressures have increased in some key markets due to competition, competitive bidding and reimbursement changes. Market size is estimated to be $2 billion.

Due to the nature of its product range there is little seasonal impact on the Advanced Wound Management business.

Regulatory approvals

In 2013, regulatory clearance was obtained for ALLEVYN Life Heel in the EU, US and Australia. ELECT à Super absorber was also approved in Europe. The complete range of DURAFIBER Ag sized dressings was approved in Europe and the US.

ALLEVYN Ag Gentle and ALLEVYN Ag Gentle Border were both approved in Japan. ALLEVYN Gentle Border and ALLEVYN Gentle were approved for import into China.

PICO Single Use Negative Wound Therapy System was approved in Brazil, Russia, Mexico and Korea.

The next generation VERSAJET II system was approved in Japan, China as well as several other Emerging & International Markets.

The RENASYS à EZ PLUS pump and RENASYS Foam and Gauze dressing kits were approved in China.

RENASYS EZ MAX Negative Pressure Wound Therapy pump also received clearance in the US, EU and Australia.

RENASYS EZ PLUS and RENASYS GO were both certified as compliant with the third edition of IEC 60601 an important standard for the safety of electro-medical devices.

 

 

 

2 EMERGING & INTERNATIONAL MARKETS

 
 

Building our product portfolio and commercial platform

 

We are building strong businesses in the Emerging & International Markets by having close, direct relationships with our customers – and by developing product portfolios that meet the needs of patients in the economic mid-tier.

 

In 2013 we furthered this strategy. Our first mid-tier product, a low cost camera system, was launched. We also acquired a portfolio of orthopaedic trauma products in India. By developing and manufacturing in the Emerging & International Markets we are able to deliver both quality and value.

 

We also completed acquisitions of distributors in Turkey and Brazil. Both these markets are fast-growing and offer exciting opportunities. These are important investments which will create a significant platform from which we can grow.

 

Smith & Nephew is delivering on its strategic priority to build a sustainable business in the Emerging & International Markets.

 

 
 
 


Table of Contents
 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
34      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Sustainability

Our sustainability strategy supports our five Strategic Priorities

 

Smith & Nephew promotes sustainability to our stakeholders through addressing economic, social and environmental considerations. In turn, our sustainability strategy is aligned with the strategic priorities.

 

 

 

1 ESTABLISHED MARKETS

 

 
 

Making best environmental choices and manufacturing and supply chain efficiencies all contribute to reducing our cost base, facilitating access to our products and helping our customers meet their sustainability ambitions.

 

 
 

2 EMERGING & INTERNATIONAL

   MARKETS

 

 
 

Cost base reductions facilitate wider access to our products. Specifically our focus on mid-tier products is aimed at supporting fundamental and affordable healthcare in the Emerging & International Markets.

 

 
 

3 INNOVATE FOR VALUE

 

 
 

Building sustainability into our New Product Development processes, including reducing packaging and waste, helps us innovate to meet our customers’ expectations, deliver mutual value and optimise patient care.

 

 
 

4 SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE

   OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

 
 

Incorporating sustainability into our business processes and optimising our facilities and supply chain to reduce our resource consumption and environmental impact help meet the expectations of our customers and society. Protecting our employees through the implementation of global HSE standards and responsible behaviours is not only right but also adds value to our business.

 

 
 

5 SUPPLEMENT ORGANIC GROWTH

   WITH ACQUISITIONS

 

 
  Our due diligence approach includes sustainability considerations, our global policies and standards to ensure we protect the integrity and reputation of our business. Specifically our acquisition of Sushrut-Adler in India is aimed at providing fundamental and affordable healthcare into the emerging markets.  

Sustainability strategy and targets

Progress towards the 2015 targets has been indexed to the baseline year 2011.

Target by 2015

 

 

 

Reduce non-renewable energy use by 15%

 

 

-0.6%

 

 

Energy consumption is decreasing but not in line with expectations. This is largely influenced by higher energy use in China as we scale up for expansion. The increased production levels at our Suzhou, China plant have given rise to an underlying increase in Group energy usage of 2.6%.

 

 

Reduce CO 2 emissions by 15%

 

+0.8%  

CO 2 emissions reflect different carbon footprints of energy production in different geographic locations. Increasing production capacity at the Suzhou plant has contributed to an underlying increase in the carbon emissions of 3.6%. The carbon footprint in China is roughly twice that of the UK.

 

 

Reduce water use by 15%

 

+11.9%  

Water usage continues to rise as new facilities are commissioned and we make operational choices based on best environmental options. For example, as we have expanded at Suzhou we have chosen to use a cooling system based on evaporation to reduce energy consumption.

 

+7.6%  

Water consumption at Memphis and Suzhou account for 84% of our total water usage and when excluded the increase was 7.6%.

 

 

Reduce packaging materials by 15%

 

 

We are evaluating all the options for reducing packaging whilst maintaining product safety and protection. This is a challenging area and details and examples of projects will be available in our Sustainability Report.

 

 

Reduce total waste by 15%

 

+15.1%  

In 2013, there were two exceptional waste sources that contributed to the increase in total waste generated by the business. Specifically these were from the validation of manufacturing start-up in China and the disposal of obsolete stock in the US. We continue to focus on waste reduction at source and recycling opportunities.

 

-21.7%   The landfill component of our total waste was reduced by 21.7%.

 

Increase % of total waste recycled by 15%

 

+21.2%

(Excludes waste

to energy)

 

 

Recycling of wastes continues to rise as more opportunities are exploited. We are now reporting separately the waste that is diverted for energy recovery.

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      35

 

 

 

 

Safety performance

 

Safety Reporting   2013     2012     2011  
OSHA recordable incidents per 200,000hrs worked (TIR)     1.11        1.09        1.16   
Lost time incidents per 200,000hrs worked (LTIFR)     0.48        0.51        0.58   
Number of lost time incidents arising from manufacturing facilities     25        37        42   

There were no fatalities. Lost time injuries in our manufacturing facilities decreased by 32% over the previous year. However, the number of injuries in our non-manufacturing and supply chain operations increased mainly due to car accidents. Improving driving safety is a particular priority in 2014. We are making significant progress with the deployment of risk based control processes and our new HSE Integrated Management System.

Greenhouse gases

Methodology, materiality and scope

We are reporting on the emission sources required under the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013. These sources fall within our consolidated financial statement. We have used the Greenhouse Gas Protocol: A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard (Revised Edition) as guidance for this process.

The focus of our data collection has been on the areas of the business that have the most influence on our environmental impacts and provide stakeholders with a level of detail that enables them to monitor emissions data, sustainability management and trends. Wherever possible, primary data from energy suppliers has been used.

The largest proportion of our environmental impacts is from manufacturing, warehousing and research. Sales locations are included however some smaller, leased or shared offices are not reported. We estimate that these exclusions represent less than 2% of our overall emissions.

The Biotherapeutics business (acquired at the end of 2012) is excluded from these figures along with other more recent acquisitions during 2013. This is in line with our established policy for integration of acquired assets.

Our emissions have been calculated by using specific emissions factors for each country outside the US and regional factors within the US. We have used the US EPA ‘Emissions & Generation Resource Integrated Database’ (eGRID) for US regions and the UK Government DEFRA Conversion Factors for Greenhouse Gas Reporting for elsewhere. We believe that these factors are the most appropriate to use for our business and give more accurate conversion rates than the conversion factors we have used in previous Sustainability Reports. The emissions from 2011, our baseline year for the sustainability targets, have therefore been recalculated using consistent rates. Fugitive emissions are included from the manufacturing and research locations and arise from the losses of refrigerant gases.

During the year, we have continued to make progress in reducing our energy consumption at many of our operational facilities. CO 2 emissions have not reduced in line with energy due to the different carbon footprints of energy production in different geographic locations, particularly China.

 

    

 

2013

   

 

2012

   

 

2011

 
Global GHG emissions data for current reporting year and comparisons   

CO 2 e emissions (tonnes) from:

  

Combustion of fuel and operation of facilities (process and fugitive)     10,102        10,922        10,894   
Purchased electricity, heat and steam     66,659        64,991        65,241   

Total

    76,761        75,913        76,135   

Intensity Ratio

     

Emissions (total) normalised to:

  

CO 2 e (t) per $m revenue (i)

CO 2 e (t) per full-time employee (ii)

   

 

18.9

7.3

  

  

   

 

18.3

7.2

  

  

   

 

17.8

7.1

  

  

Notes

2013 data adjusted to exclude Healthpoint.

(i) Revenue data: 2013: $4,071m, 2012: $4,137m, 2011: $4,270m.

(ii) Full-time employee data: 2013: 10,520, 2012: 10,477, 2011: 10,743.

Support for community

In 2013, Smith & Nephew’s support for community charitable causes, grants, sponsorships and third party medical education was $10m.

 

For more information on sustainability see our
Website www.smith-nephew.com/sustainability

 

Our 2013 Sustainability Report will be published in spring 2014.

 

 

 

References

Emission factors have been taken from the following source:

UK Government DEFRA Conversion Factors for Greenhouse Gas Reporting, http://www.ukconversionfactorscarbonsmart.co.uk/

Emission factors for electricity from locations in the US have been taken from the following source:

US EPA ‘Emissions & Generation Resource Integrated Database’ (eGRID) http://www.epa.gov/cleanenergy/energy-resources/egrid/index.html

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
36      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Financial review and principal risks

Judicious financial management

has been and remains central to

our success

 

LOGO

 

1 The underlying percentage increases/decreases are after adjusting for the effect of currency translation and the inclusion of the comparative impact of acquisitions and execution of disposals.
2 The 2012 revenue by franchise has been restated to 2013 product franchises.


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      37

 

Revenue by market

The underlying increase in each division’s revenues, by market, reconciles to reported growth, the most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS, as follows:

 

    

2013

$m

   

2012

$m

   

Reported
growth in
revenue

%

   

Constant
currency
exchange

effect

%

   

Acquisition

/Disposal

effect

%

   

Underlying
growth in
revenue

%

 

Advanced Surgical Devices

           

US

    1,391        1,449        (4            5        1   

Other Established Markets

    1,204        1,298        (7     2        2        (3

Established Markets

    2,595        2,747        (6     1        4        (1

Emerging & International Markets

    420        361        16        2        –         18   

Advanced Surgical Devices

    3,015        3,108        (3     1        3        1   
           

Advanced Wound Management

                                               

US

    471        202        133               (111     22   

Other Established Markets

    722        705        3        1        (1     3   

Established Markets

    1,193        907        32        1        (23     10   

Emerging & International Markets

    143        122        17        3        –         20   

Advanced Wound Management

    1,336        1,029        30        1        (20     11   

 

Advanced Surgical Devices

Revenue

ASD revenue decreased by $93m (-3% on a reported basis) from $3,108m in 2012 to $3,015m in 2013. The underlying increase of 1% is after adjusting for a net 3% adverse impact from the disposal of the Clinical Therapies business in 2012 and the acquisitions completed in quarter four 2013, and a 1% unfavourable foreign currency translation.

In the US, revenue decreased by $58m to $1,391m in 2013 from $1,449m in 2012 (-4% on a reported basis). The underlying increase of 1% is after adjusting 5% for the adverse impact of the Clinical Therapies disposal in 2012. In Other Established Markets, revenue was $1,204m in 2013, a decrease of $94m from $1,298m in 2012 (-7% on a reported basis). The underlying decrease was 3% after adjusting for the adverse impact of 2% on the Clinical Therapies disposal in 2012, and 2% from unfavourable foreign currency translation. Our Emerging & International Markets revenue increased by $59m to $420m in 2013 from $361m in 2012 (16% increase on a reported basis). The underlying increase was 18% after adjusting 2% for unfavourable foreign currency translation.

In the global Knee Implant franchise, revenue decreased by $9m from $874m in 2012 to $865m in 2013 (-1% on a reported basis), representing flat underlying revenue performance after 1% of unfavourable currency translation. Growth has been impacted by exposure to a weakening European market with conditions continuing to deteriorate in Germany, our largest European market, and our position in the product life cycle versus our peers. Growth improved in the second half of the year driven by sales of the Journey II BCS Knee System and benefits from the VERILAST bearing surface TV advertising campaign in the US.

 

Global revenue from the Hip Implant franchise decreased by $13m from $666m in 2012 to $653m in 2013 (-2% on a reported basis), which represented an underlying revenue decline of 1% after 1% unfavourable foreign currency translation. Continuing metal-on-metal headwinds have contributed to this decline.

Trauma & Extremities revenue increased by $12m from $474m in 2012 to $486m in 2013 (3% on a reported basis). This represents underlying revenue growth of 4% after 1% of unfavourable foreign currency translation. During 2013, benefits were seen from the additional extremities US sales representatives recruited earlier in the year.

Sports Medicine Joint Repair revenue increased by $22m from $474m in 2012 to $496m in 2013 (5% on reported basis), representing underlying revenue growth of 7% and 2% of unfavourable foreign currency translation. This reflects a strong contribution across all key joint types and geographies.

Global revenue from Arthoscopic Enabling technologies decreased by $17m from $458m in 2012 to $441m in 2013 (-4% on a reported basis). This decrease represents an underlying revenue decline of 2% and 2% of unfavourable foreign currency translation.

The revenue in the Other ASD franchise fell by $88m from $162m in 2012 to $74m in 2013 following the disposal of the Clinical Therapies business in 2012. Excluding the impact of this disposal, underlying revenue in the Other ASD franchise, which includes gynaecology, grew by 14% with the remaining Clinical Therapies geographies contributing $9m.

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
38      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Financial review and principal risks continued

Trading and operating profit

Operating profit, the most directly comparable financial measure under IFRS, reconciles to trading profit as follows:

 

    

2013

$m

   

2012

$m

 

Operating profit

    620        632   

Acquisition related costs

    7          

Restructuring and rationalisation costs

    44        57   
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments     41        39   

Trading profit

    712        728   

Trading profit margin increased from 23.4% to 23.6%. Trading profit decreased by $16m to $712m from $728m in 2012. This decrease reflects the impact of the CT disposal in May 2012, the impact of the US medical device excise tax and the cost of planned investments in the Knee Implants and Trauma franchises and Emerging & International Markets offset by benefits from our structural efficiency programme.

Operating profit decreased by $12m from $632m in 2012 to $620m in 2013. This comprises the decrease in trading profit of $16m discussed above, an increase in acquisition related costs of $7m, an increase in amortisation of acquisition intangibles of $2m, partially offset by a decrease in restructuring and rationalisation costs of $13m.

Advanced Wound Management

Revenue

AWM revenue increased by $307m (30% on a reported basis), from $1,029m in 2012 to $1,336m in 2013. The underlying increase of 11% is after adjusting for an increase of 20% for the acquisitions completed in the year and a 1% unfavourable foreign currency translation.

In the US, revenue increased by $269m to $471m in 2013 from $202m in 2012 (133% on a reported basis). The underlying increase of 22% is after adjusting 111% for the impact of acquisitions. In Other Established Markets, revenue was $722m in 2013, an increase of $17m from $705m in 2012 (3% on a reported basis). The underlying revenue increase was also 3% with the 1% impact of acquisitions offset by 1% of unfavourable foreign currency translation. Our Emerging & International Markets revenue increased by $21m in 2012 (17% on a reported basis). The underlying increase was 20% after adjusting 3% for unfavourable foreign currency translation.

Advanced Wound Care revenue decreased by $6m (-1% on a reported basis) from $849m in 2012 to $843m in 2013. The underlying growth of 1% is after adjusting for foreign currency translations. Conditions across many European markets remain challenging but the introduction of the ALLEVYN Life range continues to make good progress across Europe following product introductions and investment in marketing.

Advanced Wound Devices revenue increased from $180m in 2012 to $213m in 2013, a reported increase of $33m and 18%. The underlying growth of 20% is after adjusting for unfavourable foreign currency translations of 2%. This growth was impacted by continued gain in market share in NPWT, and our recent expansion into the emerging markets.

 

Advanced Wound Bioactives revenue of $280m in 2013 (2012 – $nil) relates to Healthpoint acquired in December 2012. The underlying increase, adjusted to include the results of Healthpoint for the commensurate period in 2012, was 47%.

Trading and operating profit

Operating profit, the most directly comparable financial measure under IFRS, reconciles to trading profit as follows:

 

    

2013

$m

   

2012

$m

 

Operating profit

    190        214   

Acquisition related costs

    24        11   

Restructuring and rationalisation costs

    14        8   
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments     47        4   

Trading profit

    275        237   

Trading profit margin decreased from 23.1% to 20.6%. Trading profit increased by $38m to $275m from $237m in 2012. The increase in the year is primarily attributable to the full year benefit of the Healthpoint acquisition and growth in the Emerging & International Markets, partially offset by additional investment in R&D and sales and marketing. The decrease in trading margin reflects these same investments, combined with price and mix changes at a gross margin level.

Operating profit decreased by $24m from $214m in 2012 to $190m in 2013. This comprises of the increase in trading profit of $38m discussed above, offset by an increase of $43m in amortisation of acquisition intangibles and an increase in acquisition related costs of $13m, both due to the Healthpoint acquisition which completed in December 2012, and an increase in restructuring and rationalisation costs of $6m.

Principal risks and risk management

As an integral part of planning and review Group, business area and functional management seek to identify the significant risks involved in the business, and to review the risk management action plans for those risks. The Group Risk Committee, which is comprised of the Chief Executive Officer and Senior Executives, meets twice a year to review the risks identified by the businesses and corporate functions and any risk management actions being taken. As appropriate, the Risk Committee may re-categorise risks or require further information on the risk management action plans. The Risk Committee reports to the Board on an annual basis detailing all principal risks. In addition, the Board considers risk as part of the development of strategy. Internal audit reviews and the Audit Committee reports on the effectiveness of the operation of the risk management process.

There are known and unknown risks and uncertainties relating to Smith & Nephew’s business. The following pages provide an overview of what the Board considers the most significant risks that could cause the Group’s business, financial position and results of operations to differ materially and adversely from expected and historical levels, and how these risks relate to the Group’s strategic priorities. In addition, other factors not listed here that Smith & Nephew cannot presently identify or does not believe to be equally significant, could also materially adversely affect Smith & Nephew’s business, financial position or results of operations.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      39

 

 

LOGO

 

Disruptive technologies        
The medical devices industry has a rapid rate of new product introduction. The Group must be adept at monitoring the landscape for technological advances, make good investment/acquisition choices, have an efficient and valuable product pipeline and secure protection for its intellectual property.

 

Specific risks we face

 

 

 

Risk management actions

 

 

 

Possible impacts

 

–  Competitors may introduce a disruptive technology, or obtain patents or other intellectual property rights, that affect the Group’s competitive position

 

–  Claims by third parties regarding infringement of their intellectual property rights

 

–  Lack of innovation due to low R&D investment, R&D skills gap or poor product development execution for Established and Emerging & International Markets

 

–  Failure to successfully commercialise a pipeline product, or failure to receive regulatory approval

 

–  Ineffective acquisition due diligence, valuation, purchase terms or integration.

 

–  Processes focused on identifying new products and potential disruptive technologies (internal and external)

 

–  Increasing productivity, prioritisation and allocation of R&D funds

 

–  Increasing R&D investment in order to enhance clinical capability, invest in biomaterials

 

–  Strengthen intellectual property rights

 

–  Support an emerging market portfolio

 

–  Business development resources and processes and investments to augment the internal product development

 

–  Increasing speed to market of new products.

  Loss of market share, profit and long-term growth.
   

 

Link to Strategic Priority

 

   

3  INNOVATE FOR VALUE

 

   

4  SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

   

5  SUPPLEMENT THE ORGANIC GROWTH THROUGH ACQUISITIONS

         
   

 

LOGO
 


Table of Contents
40      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

 

 

Financial review and principal risks continued

 

Country risk, pricing and reimbursement pressure

 

In most markets throughout the world, expenditure on medical devices is controlled to a large extent by governments, many of which are facing increasingly intense budgetary constraints. The Group is therefore largely dependent on governments providing increased funds commensurate with the increased demand arising from demographic trends. Reimbursement rates may be set in response to perceived economic value of the devices, based on clinical and other data relating to cost, patient outcomes and comparative effectiveness. Political upheaval in the countries where the Group operates or surrounding regions could adversely affect Group operations or turnover.

 

Group operations are affected by transactional exchange rate movements. The Group’s manufacturing cost base is situated in the US, UK, China and Switzerland and finished products are exported worldwide.

 

 

Specific risks we face

 

 

Risk management actions

 

 

Possible impacts

 

–  Reduced reimbursement levels and increasing pricing pressures

–  Reduced demand for elective surgery

–  Increased focus on health economics

–  Government policies favouring lower priced and locally sourced products

–  Political upheavals prevent selling of products, receiving remittances of profit from a member of the Group or future investments in that country

–  The Group is exposed to fluctuations in exchange rates. If the manufacturing country currencies strengthen against the selling currencies, the trading margin may be affected

–  Economic downturn impacts demand and collections

–  Increased generic and low cost products could impact revenue and profits.

 

–  Develop innovative economic product and service solutions for both Established and Emerging & International Markets

–  Incorporate health economic component into design and development of new products

–  Enhanced expertise supporting reimbursement strategy and guidance

–  Optimise cost to serve to protect margins and liberate funds for investment

–  Streamline COGS, SKUs, and inventory management

–  The Group may transact forward foreign currency commitments when firm purchase orders are placed to reduce exposure to currency fluctuations.

  Loss of revenue, profit and cash flows.
   

 

Link to Strategic Priority

 

   

1  ESTABLISHED MARKETS

 

   

2  EMERGING & INTERNATIONAL MARKETS

 

   

3  INNOVATE FOR VALUE

 

   

4  SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

 

 

Supply, system and site disruption

 

 

Unexpected events could disrupt the business by affecting either a key facility or system or a large number of employees.

 

The business is also reliant on certain key suppliers of raw materials, components, finished products and packaging materials.

Specific risks we face

 

 

Risk management actions

 

 

Possible impacts

 

–  Catastrophe could render one of the Group’s production facilities out of action

–  A significant event could impact key leadership or a large number of employees

–  Issues with a single source supplier of a key component and failure to secure critical supply

–  A severe IT fault or cyber crime could disable critical systems and cause loss of sensitive data.

 

–  Ensure crisis response/business continuity plans at major facilities and for key products and key suppliers

–  Audit programme for critical suppliers and second sources or increased inventories for critical components

–  Implement enhanced travel security and protection programme

–  IT disaster and data recovery plans are in place and support overall business continuity plans

–  Mobile device and cyber security protection plan implementation.

  Loss of revenue, profit and cash flows.
   

 

Link to Strategic Priority

 

   

1  ESTABLISHED MARKETS

 

   

4  SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

   
         
 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

      41

 

 

 

Product safety, regulation, and litigation

 

National regulatory authorities enforce a complex series of laws and regulations that govern the design, development, approval, manufacture, labelling, marketing and sale of healthcare products. They also review data supporting the safety and efficacy of such products and may also inspect for compliance with appropriate standards, including those relating to Quality Management Systems (‘QMS’) or Good Manufacturing Practice (‘GMP’) regulations. Design or manufacturing defects in products could result in product recalls and liability claims and impact revenues, profits and reputation.

 

 

Specific risks we face

 

 

 

Risk management actions

 

 

 

Possible impacts

 

–  Defective products supplied to Smith & Nephew or failure in design or manufacturing process

–  New technology, product or processes changed by Smith & Nephew or supplier do not identify product deficiencies

 

–  Standardise the Group’s quality management and practice

–  Monitoring and auditing programmes to assure compliance

–  Group-wide product complaint and registration systems

 

Loss of revenue, profit and reduction in share price.

 

Negative impact on brand/reputation.

–  Failure to implement programmes and supporting resources to manage quality and regulatory compliance

 

–  Group-wide practices to drive design, and production line performance and dependability

 

 

Link to Strategic Priority

 

–  Failure to manage, process and analyse customer complaints and adverse event data.

 

–  Design for manufacture in product development

 

–  Post launch review of product safety and complaint data.

 

3  INNOVATE FOR VALUE

 

   

4  SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

 

 

Compliance with laws and regulations

 

 

Business practices in the healthcare industry are subject to increasing scrutiny by government authorities. The trend in many countries is towards increased enforcement activity. The Group is also subject to increased regulation of personal information. Acquisitions and expansion into emerging markets could also require additional compliance resources.

 

 

Specific risks we face

 

 

 

Risk management actions

 

 

 

Possible impacts

 

–  Violation of healthcare, data privacy or anti-corruption laws could result in fines, loss of reimbursement and impact reputation

–  Serious breaches could potentially prevent the Group from doing business in a certain market

–  Failure to conduct adequate due diligence or to integrate appropriate internal controls into acquired businesses could result in fines and impact return on investment.

 

–  Strong Group oversight bodies with supporting global compliance resources

–  Code of Conduct/Global Policies and Procedures (‘GPPs’) providing controls for significant compliance risks

–  Training and e-resources to guide employees and third parties with compliance responsibilities

–  Monitoring and auditing programmes to verify implementation

–  Independent reporting channels for employees and third parties to report concerns with confidentiality

–  Additional controls for interactions with healthcare professionals and government officials and for distributors and agents

–  Due diligence reviews and integration plans required for acquisitions.

 

Loss of profit and reduction in share price.

 

Negative impact on brand/reputation.

   

 

Link to Strategic Priority

 

 

   

1  ESTABLISHED MARKETS

 

   

2  EMERGING & INTERNATIONAL MARKETS

   

4  SIMPLIFY AND IMPROVE OUR OPERATING MODEL

 

   

5  SUPPLEMENT ORGANIC GROWTH THROUGH ACQUISITIONS

       

By order of the Board, 26 February 2014

 

LOGO

Susan Swabey

Company Secretary

 

LOGO
 


Table of Contents

 

LOGO


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      43

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

Corporate governance

    

 

  Our Board of Directors   44
  Our Executive Officers   46
  Corporate Governance Statement   48
  Audit Committee Report   58
  Directors’ remuneration report   62
 

 

 

We have built our reputation by supporting healthcare

professionals for more than 150 years and are proud

of the trust they place in us.

LOGO

 

LOGO
 

 


Table of Contents
44      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Our Board of Directors

Our Board has the depth and breadth of experience necessary to help the business take full advantage of the opportunities and challenges ahead.

 

LOGO

 

Sir John Buchanan (70)

Chairman

Sir John was appointed Independent Non-executive Director in 2005 and was appointed Chairman and Chairman of the Nomination & Governance Committee in April 2006. He will retire from the Board following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014.

 

Sir John has broad international experience gained in large and complex international businesses, with extensive former board experience at Vodafone Group Plc, AstraZeneca PLC and Boots Group PLC. He has substantial experience in the petroleum industry and knowledge of the international investor community. He has held various leadership roles in strategic, financial, operational and marketing positions, including executive experience in different countries. He is a former Executive Director and Group Financial Officer of BP, serving on the BP Board for six years until 2003.

 

Other Directorships

–  Chairman of ARM Holdings plc (until 1 March 2014)

–  Senior Independent Director of BHP Billiton Plc

–  Chairman of International Chamber of Commerce UK

–  Chairman of the Trustees for The Christchurch
Earthquake Appeal (UK)

 

Nationality

British/New Zealand

 

   

LOGO

 

Olivier Bohuon (55)

Chief Executive Officer

Olivier was appointed Chief Executive Officer in April 2011. He is a member of the Nomination & Governance Committee.

 

Olivier has had extensive international and leadership experience within a number of pharmaceutical and healthcare companies. Prior to joining Smith & Nephew, he was President of Abbott Pharmaceuticals, a division of Abbott Laboratories based in the US, where he was responsible for the entire business, including R&D, global manufacturing and global support functions.

 

Other Directorships

–  Non-executive Director of Virbac group

 

Nationality

French

 

 

   

LOGO

 

Julie Brown (51)

Chief Financial Officer

Julie was appointed Chief Financial Officer on 4 February 2013 and elected by Shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 11 April 2013.

 

Julie is a Chartered Accountant and Fellow of the Institute of Taxation with international experience and a deep understanding of the healthcare sector. She trained with KPMG and then worked for AstraZeneca PLC, where she served as Vice President Group Finance, and more recently, as Interim Chief Financial Officer. Prior to that she held commercial roles as Regional Vice President Latin America, Marketing Company President AstraZeneca Portugal, and Vice President Corporate Strategy and R&D Chief Financial Officer. She has previously held Vice President Finance positions in all areas of the healthcare value chain including commercial, operations, R&D and business development.

 

Nationality

British

 

 

                 

LOGO

 

Roberto Quarta (64)

Independent Non-executive Director and

Chairman Elect

Roberto was appointed Non-executive Director and Chairman Elect on 4 December 2013. He is a member of the Nomination & Governance Committee.

 

Roberto has significant management experience spanning a broad range of manufacturing and service businesses in both the UK and internationally. He is Chairman of IMI plc, a FTSE 100 listed engineering business, Chairman of Clayton, Dubilier & Rice and Chairman of the Supervisory Board of Rexel SA. Previously, he was Chief Executive and then Chairman of BBA Group plc.

 

Other Directorships

–  Chairman of IMI plc

–  Chairman of Clayton, Dubilier & Rice

–  Chairman of the Supervisory Board of Rexel SA

 

Nationality

American/Italian

 

   

LOGO

 

Richard De Schutter (73)

Senior Independent Director and

Non-executive Director

Richard was appointed Non-executive Director in January 2001 and Senior Independent Director in April 2011. He is a member of the Nomination & Governance, Ethics & Compliance, Audit and Remuneration Committees. He will retire from the Board following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014.

 

Richard has had extensive US corporate experience at Chief Executive and Chairman level in a number of major corporations with primarily a scientific, chemical, engineering or pharmaceutical focus including G.D. Searle & Co., Monsanto Company, Pharmacia Corporation and DuPont Pharmaceuticals Company.

 

Other Directorships

–  Non-executive Chairman of Incyte Corporation

–  Non-executive Chairman of Durata Therapeutics, Inc.

–  Non-executive Director of Navicure, Inc.

–  Non-executive Director of Sprout Pharmaceuticals, Inc.

 

Nationality

American

 

   

LOGO

 

Ian Barlow (62)

Independent Non-executive Director

Chairman of the Audit Committee

Ian was appointed Non-executive Director in March 2010 and Chairman of the Audit Committee in May 2010.

 

Ian is a Chartered Accountant and has had considerable financial experience both internationally and in the UK. Prior to his retirement in 2008, he was a Partner at KPMG, latterly Senior Partner, London. During his career with KPMG, he was Head of their UK tax and legal operations, and he acted as Lead Partner for many large international organisations operating extensively in North America, Europe and Asia.

 

Other Directorships

–  Lead Non-executive Director chairing the Board of Her Majesty’s Revenue & Customs

–  Non-executive Director of The Brunner Investment Trust PLC

–  Non-executive Director of Foxtons Group plc

–  Board Member of the China-Britain Council

–  Chairman of The Racecourse Association

 

Nationality

British

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      45

 

 

 

LOGO

 

The Rt. Hon Baroness Virginia Bottomley (65)

Independent Non-executive Director

 

Baroness Virginia Bottomley was appointed Non-executive Director in April 2012. She is a member of the Remuneration Committee.

 

Baroness Virginia Bottomley has extensive experience and understanding of healthcare. She was appointed a Life Peer in 2005 following her career as a Member of Parliament between 1984 and 2005. She served successively as Secretary of State for Health and then National Heritage. She holds a number of positions within the public and private healthcare sector.

 

Other Directorships

–  Director of International Resources Group Limited

–  Member of the International Advisory Board of Chugai Pharmaceutical Co.,

–  Chancellor of University of Hull and Sheriff of Hull

–  Pro Chancellor of the University of Surrey

–  Governor of the London School of Economics

–  Trustee of The Economist Newspaper

 

Nationality

British

   

LOGO

 

Michael Friedman (70)

Independent Non-executive Director

 

Michael was appointed Non-executive Director and elected by Shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 11 April 2013. He is a member of the Ethics & Compliance Committee.

 

Michael was formerly Chief Executive Officer of City of Hope, the prestigious cancer research and treatment institution in California and is now Executive for Special Projects and Emeritus Cancer Center Director. He has also served as director of the institution’s comprehensive cancer centre and held the Irell & Manella Cancer Center Director’s Distinguished Chair. He was formerly senior vice president of research, medical and public policy for Pharmacia Corporation and has served as Deputy Commissioner and Acting Commissioner at the US Food and Drug Administration. He has also served on a number of Boards in a Non-executive capacity, including RiteAid Corporation.

 

 

Other Directorships

–  Non-executive Director of Celgene Corporation

–  Non-executive Director of MannKind Corporation

 

Nationality

American

 

 

   

LOGO

 

Pamela Kirby (60)

Independent Non-executive Director

Chairman of the Ethics & Compliance Committee

 

Pamela was appointed Non-executive Director in March 2002 and Chairman of the Ethics & Compliance Committee in April 2011. She is a member of the Remuneration Committee

 

Pamela has extensive commercial and product development experience within the international pharmaceutical and healthcare industry. Her last executive position was Chief Executive of Quintiles Transnational Corporation in the US, having previously held senior positions in various pharmaceutical companies including AstraZeneca PLC and F. Hoffmann-La Roche. She is now a Non-executive Director of a number of international companies.

 

Other Directorships

–  Non-executive Chairman of Scynexis, Inc.

–  Senior Independent Non-executive Director of Informa plc

–  Non-executive Director of DCC plc

–  Non-executive Director of Victrex plc

 

Nationality

British

 

 

                 

LOGO

 

Brian Larcombe (60)

Independent Non-executive Director

Brian was appointed Non-executive Director in March 2002. He is a member of the Nomination & Governance, Audit and Remuneration Committees. He will become Senior Independent Director following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014.

 

Brian spent his career in private equity with 3i Group. After leading the UK investment business for a number of years, he became Finance Director and then Chief Executive of the Group following its flotation. He is well known in the City and has held a number of Non-executive Directorships.

 

Other Directorships

–  Non-executive Director of gategroup Holding AG

–  Non-executive Director of Incisive Media Holdings Limited

 

Nationality

British

 

   

LOGO

 

Joseph Papa (58)

Independent Non-executive Director

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

Joseph was appointed Non-executive Director in August 2008 and Chairman of the Remuneration Committee in April 2011. He is a member of the Ethics & Compliance and Audit Committees.

 

Joseph has had over 30 years’ experience in the pharmaceutical industry working for a number of companies both in the US and Switzerland. He is now Chairman and Chief Executive of Perrigo Company plc, one of the largest over the counter pharmaceutical companies in the US, having previously held senior positions at Novartis International AG, Cardinal Health, Inc. and Pharmacia Corporation.

 

Other Directorships

–  Chairman and Chief Executive of Perrigo Company plc

 

Nationality

American

   

LOGO

 

Ajay Piramal (58)

Independent Non-executive Director

Ajay was appointed Non-executive Director in January 2012. He will retire from the Board following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014.

 

Ajay is one of India’s most respected businessmen. He enabled the Piramal Group to transform from a textile-centric group to a conglomerate in diversified areas. He has extensive industry and market knowledge and international experience. He has held a number of global healthcare leadership positions in both India and internationally.

 

Other Directorships

–  Chairman of Piramal Enterprises Limited, Piramal Glass Limited, Allergan India Pvt. Limited, and IndiaREIT Fund Advisers Pvt. Ltd.

–  Chairman of the Board of Governors of the Indian Institute of Technology, Indore

–  Member of the Board of Dean’s Advisors at Harvard Business School

–  Chairman of Pratham India

 

Nationality

Indian

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
46      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Our Executive Officers

 

Olivier Bohuon is supported in the day-to-day management of the Group by a strong team of Executive Officers:    

LOGO

 

Julie Brown (51)

Chief Financial Officer

 

Julie joined the Board on 4 February 2013 as Chief Financial Officer. She is a Chartered Accountant and Fellow of the Institute of Taxation with international experience and a deep understanding of the healthcare sector.

 

Previous Experience

Julie trained with KPMG and then worked for AstraZeneca PLC, where she served as Vice President Group Finance, and more recently, as Interim Chief Financial Officer. Prior to that she held commercial roles as Regional Vice President Latin America, Marketing Company President AstraZeneca Portugal, and Vice President Corporate Strategy and R&D Chief Financial Officer. She has previously held Vice President Finance positions in all areas of the healthcare value chain including commercial, operations, R&D and business development.

 

Nationality

British

 

 

   

LOGO

 

Mike Frazzette (52)

President, Advanced Surgical Devices

 

Mike joined Smith & Nephew in July 2006 as President of the Endoscopy Global Business Unit. Since July 2011, he has headed up the Advanced Surgical Devices division and is responsible for the Orthopaedic Reconstruction, Trauma and Endoscopy business. He is based in Andover, Massachusetts.

 

Previous Experience

Mike has held a number of senior positions within the global medical devices industry. He was President and Chief Executive Officer of Micro Group, a US manufacturer of medical devices, and spent 15 years at Tyco Healthcare (Covidien) in various commercial roles eventually becoming President of the Patient Care and Health Systems divisions.

 

Nationality

American

 

 

                 
   

LOGO

 

Roger Teasdale (46)

President, Advanced Wound Management

Roger joined Smith & Nephew in 1989 within the Wound Management business. He was appointed President of Advanced Wound Management in May 2009. He is based in Hull, UK.

 

Previous Experience

Roger has held a number of key roles within the Smith & Nephew Group in both the UK and the US and has been responsible for leading the transformation of the Wound business in recent years.

 

 

Nationality

British

   

LOGO

 

Rodrigo Bianchi (54)

President, IRAMEA

Rodrigo joined Smith & Nephew in July 2013 with responsibility for Greater China, India, Russia, Asia, Middle East and Africa, focusing on continuing our strong momentum in these regions. He is based in Dubai.

 

Previous Experience

Rodrigo’s experience in the healthcare industry includes 26 years with Johnson & Johnson in progressively senior roles. Most recently, he was Regional Vice President for Medical Devices and Diagnostics division in the Mediterranean region and prior to that President of Mitek and Ethicon. He started his career at Procter & Gamble, Italy.

 

Nationality

Italian

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      47

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Francisco Canal Vega (52)

President, Latin America

 

Francisco joined Smith & Nephew in January 2012 and now leads the Latin American region, focusing on driving the substantial opportunities we see in this region.

 

Previous Experience

 

Francisco has held senior management positions in global companies including Gambro AB and Baxter International. He has lived and worked in many countries including Switzerland, Germany, China, Japan, the US and Spain. Francisco was also formerly a board member of EUCOMED.

 

Nationality

Spanish

   

LOGO

 

Jack Campo (59)

Chief Legal Officer

 

Jack joined Smith & Nephew in June 2008 and heads up the Global Legal function. Initially based in London, he has been based in Andover, Massachusetts since late 2011.

 

Previous Experience

Prior to joining Smith & Nephew, Jack held a number of senior legal roles within the General Electric Company, including seven years at GE Healthcare (GE Medical Systems) in the US and Asia. He began his career with Davis Polk & Wardwell.

 

Nationality

American

   

LOGO

 

Gordon Howe (51)

President, Global Operations

Gordon joined Smith & Nephew in 1998 and, since 2013, is responsible for manufacturing, supply chain and procurement, IT systems and Regulatory and Quality Affairs. Prior to that, he headed up the Global Planning and Business Development teams. He is based in Memphis, Tennessee.

 

Previous Experience

 

Gordon has held a number of senior management positions within the Smith & Nephew Group, firstly in the Orthopaedics division and more recently at Group level. Prior to joining the Company, he held senior roles at United Technologies Corporation.

 

Nationality

American

 

 

 

 

 

                 

LOGO

 

Helen Maye (54)

Chief Human Resources Officer

 

Helen joined Smith & Nephew in July 2011 and leads the Global Human Resources and Internal Communications functions. Since 2013, she has also led the Sustainability, Health, Safety & Environment functions. She is based in London.

 

Previous Experience

Helen has more than 35 years’ experience across a variety of international and global roles in medical devices and Pharmaceuticals, including manufacturing, supply chain and human resources. Previously, she was Divisional Vice President of Human Resources at Abbott Laboratories.

 

Nationality

Irish

 

 

 

   

LOGO

 

Cyrille Petit (43)

Chief Corporate Development Officer

 

Cyrille joined Smith & Nephew in May 2012 and leads the Corporate Development function. He is based in London.

 

Previous Experience

Cyrille spent the previous 15 years of his career with General Electric Company, where he held progressively senior positions beginning with GE Capital, GE Healthcare and ultimately as the General Manager, Global Business Development of the Transportation Division. Cyrille’s career began in investment banking at BNP Paribas and then Goldman Sachs.

 

Nationality

French

 

   

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
48      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Corporate Governance Statement

 

 

 

    BOARD GENDER     BOARD NATIONALITY       BOARD BALANCE  
    LOGO     LOGO       LOGO  
  BOARD COMMITTEE MEMBERSHIP AND ATTENDANCE                      
             

Board

8 meetings

 

Audit

Committee

8 meetings

 

Nomination &
Governance
Committee

5 meetings

      

Ethics &
Compliance
Committee

4 meetings

      

Remuneration
Committee

5 meetings

        
  Sir John Buchanan     8     5            
  Olivier Bohuon     8     5            
  Ian Barlow     8   8              
  Julie Brown (i)     8                
  Michael Friedman (ii)     6                
  Baroness Virginia Bottomley     8   _   _     _     5    
  Pamela Kirby     8   _   _     4     5    
  Brian Larcombe (iii)     8   8   5         4    
  Joseph Papa     8   8       4     5    
  Ajay Piramal (iv)     3                
  Roberto Quarta (v)     1                
  Richard De Schutter       8   8   5       4       5      
 

(i)   Appointed to the Board on 4 February 2013.

 

(ii)  Appointed to the Board on 11 April 2013.

 

(iii)  Unable to attend one Remuneration Committee meeting due to an unforeseen commitment.

 

(iv) Unable to attend some meetings due to other commitments. To retire from the Board following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014.

 

(v)  Appointed to the Board on 4 December 2013.

                        
  COMPANY SECRETARY                                                            
 

 

Susan Swabey (52)                                                     

                      
  Susan was appointed Company Secretary in May 2009.                       
 

 

Susan has 30 years’ experience as a company secretary in a wide range of companies including Prudential plc, Amersham plc and RMC Group plc. Her work has covered Board support, corporate governance, corporate transactions, share registration, listing obligations, corporate social responsibility, pensions, insurance and employee and executive share plans. Susan is a member of the GC100 Group Executive Committee and the CBI Companies Committee and is a frequent speaker on corporate governance related matters.

 

With effect from 1 March 2014, she will be a trustee of ShareGift, the share donation charity.

                      
 

 

Nationality                                                                     

                      
  British                       
                        


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      49  

 

 

Compliance statement

We are committed to the highest standards of corporate governance and comply with all the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2012 (the ‘Code’). The Company’s American Depositary Shares are listed on the NYSE and we are therefore subject to the rules of the NYSE as well as to the US securities laws and the rules of the SEC applicable to foreign private issuers. We comply with the requirements of the SEC and NYSE except that the Nomination & Governance Committee is not comprised wholly of Independent Directors, as required by the NYSE, but consists of a majority of Independent Directors in accordance with the Code. We shall explain in this corporate governance statement and the Reports of the Audit and Remuneration Committees, how we have applied the provisions and principles of the Financial Conduct Authority’s (‘FCA’) Listing Rules, Disclosure & Transparency Rules (‘DTR’) and the Code throughout the year.

Board

The Board is responsible for determining the strategy of the Company. The Chief Executive Officer and his Executive team implement that strategy. More detail about the structure of the Board, the matters we deal with and the key activities we undertook in 2013 is on pages 49 and 50.

Changes to Board composition

We are making a number of changes to the composition of our Board at the Annual General Meeting:

 

Sir John Buchanan will be retiring from the Board, having joined the Board in 2005 and assumed the role of Chairman in April 2006
Roberto Quarta, who joined the Board as Non-executive Director and Chairman Elect on 4 December 2013, will become Chairman, assuming that he is elected as a Director by shareholders at the meeting
Richard De Schutter will retire from the Board. Richard has served on the Board since January 2001 as a Non-executive Director and a member of a number of the Board Committees. He has been the Senior Independent Director since April 2011
Brian Larcombe will take over as Senior Independent Director to assist a smooth transition between Chairmen
Ajay Piramal will retire from the Board. He has served on the Board since January 2012.

Roles of Directors

Whilst we all share collective responsibility for the activities of the Board, some of our roles have been defined in greater detail. In particular, the roles and responsibilities of the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer are clearly defined.

Chairman

 

–  Building a well balanced Board

–  Chairing Board meetings and setting Board agendas

–  Ensuring effectiveness of the Board and ensuring annual review undertaken

–  Encouraging constructive challenge and facilitating effective communication between the Board members

–  Promoting effective Board relationships

–  Ensuring appropriate induction and development programmes

–  Ensuring effective two way communication and debate with Shareholders

–  Setting the tone at the top with regard to compliance and sustainability matters

–  Promoting high standards of corporate governance

–  Maintaining appropriate balance between stakeholders.

 

 

Chief Executive Officer

 

–  Developing and implementing Group strategy

–  Recommending the annual budget and five-year strategic and financial plan

–  Ensuring coherent leadership of the Group

–  Managing the Group’s risk profile and establishing effective internal controls

–  Regularly reviewing organisational structure, developing executive team and planning for succession

–  Ensuring the Chairman and Board are kept advised and updated regarding key matters

–  Maintaining relationships with shareholders and advising the Board accordingly

–  Setting the tone at the top with regard to compliance and sustainability matters.

The Non-executive Directors meet regularly prior to each Board meeting without management in attendance. The roles of Non-executive Directors and, in particular, the Senior Independent Director are defined as follows:

Non-executive Directors

 

–  Providing effective challenge to management

–  Assisting in development of strategy

–  Serving on the Board Committees.

Senior Independent Director

 

–  Chairing meetings in the absence of the Chairman

–  Acting as a sounding board for the Chairman on Board-related matters

–  Acting as an intermediary for the other Directors where necessary

–  Available to Shareholders on matters which cannot otherwise be resolved

–  Leading annual evaluation into the Board’s effectiveness

–  Leading search for a new Chairman, as necessary.

Independence of Non-executive Directors

We require our Non-executive Directors to remain independent from management so that they are able to exercise independent oversight and effectively challenge management. We therefore continually assess the independence of each of our Non-executive Directors. The Executive Directors have determined that all our Non-executive Directors are independent in accordance with both UK and US requirements. None of our Non-executive Directors or their immediate families has ever had a material relationship with the Group. None of them receives additional remuneration apart from Directors’ fees, nor do they participate in the Group’s share plans or pension schemes. None of them serve as directors of any companies or affiliates in which any other Director is a director.

However, more importantly, each of our Non-executive Directors is prepared to question and challenge management, to request more information and to ask the difficult question. They insist on robust responses both within the Board room and sometimes between Board meetings. The Chief Executive Officer is open to challenge from the Non-executive Directors and uses this positively to provide more detail and to reflect further on issues.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
50      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

 

Corporate Governance Statement continued

 

 

As explained, Richard De Schutter will retire from the Board following the Annual General Meeting. Brian Larcombe, who has served for 12 years, will remain on the Board as Senior Independent Director to ensure a smooth transition between chairmen. Pamela Kirby who has served for 12 years will remain on the Board as Chairman of the Ethics & Compliance Committee and member of the Remuneration Committee. The Board believes that the skills, diversity and experience Brian and Pamela bring to the Board with their in-depth knowledge of the Company are important for continuity in this time of transition.

We are mindful that some of our Non-executive Directors have served on the Board for a period of time that some might regard as likely to impact their independence. We do not believe this to be the case, but have reviewed the length of service of our Non-executive Board members and have taken this into consideration, when making the changes to the Board composition outlined above.

We continue to search for other suitable Non-executive Directors, whose experience will align with our strategic objectives and, in due course, our longer serving directors will step down.

Board Membership

 

–  Non-executive Chairman Sir John Buchanan (to retire on 10 April 2014)

–  Chief Executive Officer Olivier Bohuon

–  Chief Financial Officer Julie Brown (appointed 4 February 2013).

Nine Independent Non-executive Directors

 

–  Richard De Schutter (Senior Independent Director) (to retire on 10 April 2014)

–  Ian Barlow

–  Baroness Virginia Bottomley

–  Michael Friedman (appointed 11 April 2013)

–  Pamela Kirby

–  Brian Larcombe (to become Senior Independent Director on 10 April 2014)

–  Joseph Papa

–  Ajay Piramal (to retire on 10 April 2014)

–  Roberto Quarta (appointed on 4 December 2013. Independent on appointment) (to become Chairman on 10 April 2014).

Role of the Board

Strategy

 

–  Approving the Group strategy including major changes to corporate and management structure, acquisitions, mergers, disposals, capital transactions over $10m, annual budget, financial plan, business plan, major borrowings and finance and banking arrangements

–  Approving changes to the size and structure of the Board, overseeing succession planning and the appointment and removal of Directors and the Company Secretary

–  Approving Group policies relating to corporate social responsibility, health and safety, Code of Conduct and Code of Share Dealing and other matters.

 

 

 

 

 

Performance

 

–  Reviewing performance against strategy, budgets and financial and business plans

–  Overseeing Group operations and maintaining a sound system of internal control

–  Determining dividend policy and dividend recommendations

–  Approving the appointment and removal of the Auditor and other professional advisers and approving significant changes to accounting policies or practices

–  Approving the use of the Company’s shares in relation to employee and executive incentive plans.

Risk

 

–  Determining risk appetite, regularly reviewing risk register and risk management processes (see pages 38–41 for more detail).

Shareholder Communications

 

–  Approving preliminary announcement of annual results, annual report, half yearly report, quarterly financial announcements, the release of price sensitive announcements and any listing particulars, circulars or prospectuses

–  Maintaining relationships and continued engagement with Shareholders.

Key activities in 2013

(in addition to regular annual activities)

 

–  Review and oversight of the implementation of the strategy and organisational structure

–  Oversight of risk management process and review of strategic risk

–  Approval of five-year plan

–  Review of Board effectiveness

–  Continued review of Board composition and appointment of Michael Friedman and Roberto Quarta to the Board

–  Consideration and approval of the acquisitions of Sushrut-Adler in India, Plato Grup in Turkey and Politec Saude and Pro Cirurgia Especializada in Brazil

–  Approval and oversight of European Process Optimisation programme

–  Six physical scheduled meetings and two scheduled telephone meetings

–  Four day strategy review and visit to our Tokyo headquarters

–  Two day visit to our US operations in Andover, Massachusetts

–  Considered and approved the Capital Allocation Framework

–  Considered and reviewed succession planning both at Board level and below

–  Approved the sustainability policy and report.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      51  

 

 

Board Development Programme

Our Board Development Programme is directed to the specific needs and interests of our Directors. We focus the development sessions on facilitating a greater awareness and understanding of our business rather than formal training in what it is to be a Director. We value our visits to the different Smith & Nephew sites around the world, where we meet with the local managers of our businesses and see the daily operations in action. Meeting our local managers helps us to understand the challenges they face and their plans to meet those challenges. We also take the opportunity to look at our products and in particular the new products being developed by our R&D teams. This direct contact with the business in the locations we operate around the world really helps us to make investment and strategic decisions. Meeting our local managers helps us when making succession planning decisions below Board level.

During the course of the year, we receive updates at the Board and Committee meetings on external corporate governance changes likely to impact the Company in the future. In 2013, we particularly focused on changes to Narrative Reporting and Reporting on Remuneration. We also looked into the implications of cyber security on the business.

New Directors receive tailored induction programmes, when they join the Board. In 2013, Michael Friedman attended a briefing on UK company law and corporate governance practices. He also attended a series of one-to-one meetings with senior members of management at our head office. Roberto Quarta has commenced his induction programme, meeting the leaders of key divisions and functions and visiting our key site in Hull. All Non-executive Directors are encouraged to visit our overseas businesses, if they happen to be travelling for other purposes. In 2013, visits of this nature were made to operations in the US, Singapore and India. Our local management teams enjoy welcoming Non-executive Directors to their business and it emphasises the interest the Board takes in all our operations.

The following development sessions were run during 2013:

 

Month   Activity 
April   Presentation from Roger Teasdale, President, Advanced Wound Management on the Advanced Wound Management business and progress of the integration of the Biotherapeutics business.
July   Audit Committee Development Session (open to all the Board) covering developments in the accounting and reporting landscape including narrative reporting, the Financial Reporting Council changes to Audit Committee and Auditor reporting, cyber security and other UK and European developments.
September  

Visit to our Tokyo offices with a presentation from senior Japanese management on the local business and challenges faced.

 

Presentations from the entire Executive team as part of the Board’s Strategy Review.

 

Board discussion on Risk as part of the Board’s Strategy discussions.

October  

Visit to Advanced Surgical Devices facility in Andover, Massachusetts.

 

Series of presentations from our Advanced Surgical Devices senior executives on the challenges faced by the business, our strategy and initiatives to meet these challenges and an update on progress made since the previous year.

December   Workshop on cyber security.

Board Effectiveness Review

We conduct an annual review into the effectiveness of the Board. In 2012, the review was facilitated externally and drew positive conclusions. In 2013 therefore, we undertook an internal review, which was led by Richard De Schutter, the Senior Independent Director.

The review in 2013 consisted of a questionnaire followed by a series of interviews with the Directors towards the end of the year. The questionnaire was based on the internal questionnaire used in 2011 enabling a comparison to be made between the two years. The interviews with the Directors were broadly based on the questionnaire but also covered any other matters the Directors wished to raise.

Mr De Schutter presented the results of his findings to the Board in early February 2014. Overall, the review concluded that the performance of the Board had improved since the previous internal review particularly in evaluating performance against the long-term strategic plan, identifying and monitoring strategic risks and gaining a better understanding of the competitive environment. Non-executive Directors also valued the meetings they held without management present, ahead of each Board and some Committee meetings as well as the opportunity to meet senior executives below Board level on site visits and at Board presentations.

The review identified the following areas that would require attention in 2014:

 

Areas for Attention 
The Board was currently in transition with the retirement of Sir John Buchanan as Chairman, Richard De Schutter as Senior Independent Director and Ajay Piramal as Non-executive Director following the Annual General Meeting. It was therefore recognised that Succession Planning at Non-executive Director level would be a key priority for the new Chairman, Roberto Quarta, after the Annual General Meeting.
It was felt that the number, timing and length of the Board and Committee meetings could be reviewed to consider whether the current pattern of meetings was most effective.

 

It is expected that the review in 2014 will be facilitated externally.

Company Secretary and independent advice

The Company Secretary, Susan Swabey, is responsible to the Board for ensuring that we comply with all corporate governance requirements and are kept updated on our responsibilities. We all have access to her, individually and collectively.

We may also, from time to time, obtain independent professional advice, at the Company’s expense, if we judge it necessary in order to fulfil our responsibilities as Directors. If we are unable to attend a Board meeting or Board Committee meeting, we ensure that we are familiar with the matters to be discussed and make our views known to the Chairman or the Chairman of the relevant Committee prior to the meeting.

Management of conflicts of interest

None of us, nor our connected persons, has any family relationship with any other Director or officer, nor has a material interest in any contract to which the Company or any of its subsidiaries are, or were, a party during the year or up to 24 February 2014.

Each of us has a duty under the Companies Act 2006 to avoid a situation in which we have or may have a direct or indirect interest that conflicts or might conflict with the interests of the Company. This duty is in addition to the existing duty that we owe to the Company to disclose to the Board any transaction or arrangement under consideration by the Company. If we become aware of any situation which may give rise to a conflict of interest, we inform the rest of the Board immediately and the Board is then permitted under the Articles of Association to authorise such conflict. The information is recorded in the Company’s Register of Conflicts together with the date on which authorisation was given. In addition, we certify, on an annual basis, that the information contained in the Register is correct.

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
52      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Corporate Governance Statement continued

 

When the Board decides whether or not to authorise a conflict, only the Directors who have no interest in the matter are able to participate in the discussion and a conflict is only authorised if we believe that it would not have an impact on our ability to promote the Company’s success in the long term. Additionally, we may, as a Board, determine that certain limits or conditions must be imposed when giving authorisation. We have identified no actual conflicts which have required approval by the Board. We have, however, identified six situations which could potentially give rise to a conflict and these have been duly authorised by the Board and are reviewed on an annual basis.

Re-appointment of Directors

In accordance with the Code, all Directors, offer themselves to Shareholders for re-election annually, except those who are retiring following the Annual General Meeting. Roberto Quarta who was appointed to the Board on 4 December 2013 will offer himself for election. Each Director may be removed at any time by the Board or the Shareholders.

Directors’ Indemnity Arrangements

Each Director is covered by appropriate directors’ and officers’ liability insurance and there are also Deeds of Indemnity in place between the Company and each Director. These Deeds of Indemnity mean that the Company indemnifies Directors in respect of any proceedings brought by third parties against them personally in their capacity as Directors of the Company. The Company would also fund ongoing costs in defending a legal action as they are incurred rather than after judgement has been given. In the event of an unsuccessful defence in an action against them, individual Directors would be liable to repay the Company for any damages and to repay defence costs to the extent funded by the Company.

Liaison with Shareholders

The Executive Directors meet regularly with investors to discuss the Company’s business and financial performance both at the time of the announcement of results and at industry investor events. During 2013, the Executive Directors held meetings with institutional investors, including investors representing approximately 43% of the share capital as at 31 December 2013.

As part of this programme of investor meetings, during 2013, as Chairman of the Company, I met with investors representing 16% of the share capital. Over the last three years, I have met investors representing in aggregate 21% of the share capital. Also during 2013, Joseph Papa met with Shareholders holding 20% of the share capital to discuss remuneration policies and plans. In addition, we contacted a further three Shareholders representing 8% of the share capital summarising the discussions held with the Shareholders we had met.

We receive a short report at every Board meeting reviewing our major Shareholders and any significant changes in their holdings since the previous meeting. Olivier Bohuon and Julie Brown routinely advise us of any concerns or issues that Shareholders have raised with them in their meetings. We also receive copies of analysts’ reports on the Company and our peers between Board meetings.

The Company’s website (www.smith-nephew.com) contains information of interest to both institutional investors and private Shareholders, including financial information and webcasts of the results presentations to analysts for each quarter, as well as specific information for private Shareholders relating to the management of their shareholding.

Share capital

As at 24 February 2014, the Company’s total issued share capital with voting rights consisted of 893,814,245 ordinary shares of 20.0 US cents each. 25,122,968 ordinary shares are held in treasury and are not included in the above figure. Further information on treasury shares can be found in Note 19 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

As at 24 February 2014, notification had been received from the undernoted investors under the DTR in respect of interests in 3% or more of the issued ordinary shares with voting rights of the Company.

 

     Number of Shares    

Invesco

    66,740,225      7.5 

BlackRock, Inc.

    42,621,011      4.8 

In addition to the above the Company is aware that Walter Scott & Partners Limited hold approximately 37.7 million ordinary shares (4.2%). Otherwise, the Company is not aware of any person who has a significant direct or indirect holding of securities in the Company and is not aware of any persons holding securities which may control the Company. There are no securities in issue which have special rights as to the control of the Company.

Dividend

The Board has proposed a final dividend of 17.0 US cents per ordinary share which, together with the interim dividend of 10.40 US cents, makes a total for 2013 of 27.40 US cents. The final dividend is expected to be paid, subject to Shareholder approval, on 7 May 2014 to Shareholders on the Register of Members at the close of business on 22 April 2014.

Annual General Meeting

The Company’s Annual General Meeting is to be held on 10 April 2014 at 2:00 pm at No.11 Cavendish Square, London W1G 0AN. Registered Shareholders have been sent either a Notice of Annual General Meeting or notification of availability of the Notice of Annual General Meeting.

Code of Ethics for Senior Financial Officers

We have adopted a Code of Ethics for Senior Financial Officers, which is available free of charge on the Group’s website (www.smith-nephew.com) and on request. This applies to the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Vice President, Group Finance and the Group’s senior financial officers. There have been no waivers to any of the Code’s provisions nor any amendments made to the Code during 2013 or up until 24 February 2014.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      53  

 

 

 

Internal controls

Evaluation of Internal Controls Procedures

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting as defined in Rule 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

There is an established system of internal control throughout the Group and our Divisions. The main elements of the internal control framework are as follows:

 

 

The management of each Division is responsible for the establishment and review of effective internal financial controls within their Division.

 

 

The Group Finance Manual sets out, amongst other things, financial and accounting policies and minimum internal financial control standards.

 

 

The Internal Audit function agrees an annual work plan and scope of work with the Audit Committee.

 

 

The Audit Committee reviewed reports from Internal Audit on their findings on internal financial controls.

 

 

The Audit Committee reviews the Group Whistle-blower procedures.

 

 

The Audit Committee reviews regular reports from the Vice President, Group Finance and the Heads of the Taxation and Treasury functions.

 

This system of internal control has been designed to manage rather than eliminate material risks to the achievement of our strategic and business objectives and can provide only reasonable, and not absolute, assurance against material misstatement or loss. Because of inherent limitations, our internal controls over financial reporting may not prevent or detect all misstatements. In addition, our projections of any evaluation of effectiveness in future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate. This process complies with the Financial Reporting Council’s ‘Internal Control: Revised Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code’ and additionally contributes to our compliance with the obligations under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 and other internal assurance activities. There has been no change in the Group’s internal control over financial reporting during the period covered by this Annual Report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the Group’s internal control over financial reporting.

We, as a Board, are responsible overall for reviewing and approving the adequacy and effectiveness of the risk management framework and the system of internal controls over financial, operational (including quality management) and ethical compliance processes operated by the Group. We have delegated responsibility for this review to the Audit Committee. The Audit Committee, through the Internal Audit function reviews the adequacy and effectiveness of internal control procedures and identifies any weaknesses and ensures these are remediated within agreed timelines. The latest review covered the financial year to 31 December 2013 and included the period up to the approval of this Annual Report. The main elements of this annual review are as follows:

 

 

The Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have evaluated the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Group’s disclosure controls and procedures as at 31 December 2013. Based upon this evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded on 24 February 2014 that the disclosure controls and procedures were effective as at 31 December 2013.

 

 

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Management assessed the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control over financial reporting as at 31 December 2013 in accordance with the requirements in the US under s404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. In making this assessment, they used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission in Internal Control-Integrated Framework. Based on their assessment, management concluded and reported that, as at 31 December 2013, the Group’s internal control over financial reporting is effective based on those criteria.

 

 

Having received the report from management, the Audit Committee reports to the Board on the effectiveness of controls.

 

 

Ernst & Young LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm issued an audit report on the Group’s internal control over financial reporting as at 31 December 2013. This report appears on page 91.

 

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
54      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Corporate Governance Statement continued

 

The Auditor

Ernst & Young LLP have expressed their willingness to continue as the Auditor. Resolutions proposing their re-appointment for 2014 and to authorise the Directors to determine their remuneration will be proposed at the Annual General Meeting, as approved by the Audit Committee.

We shall be tendering the provision of Audit services for future years during 2014. Further details are included in the Audit Committee Report.

Disclosure of information to the Auditor

In accordance with Section 418 of the Companies Act 2006, the Directors serving at the time of approving the Directors’ Report confirm that, to the best of their knowledge and belief, there is no relevant audit information of which the Auditor, Ernst & Young LLP, are unaware and the Directors also confirm that they have taken reasonable steps to be aware of any relevant audit information and, accordingly, to establish that the Auditor is aware of such information.

Principal accountant fees and services

Fees for professional services provided by Ernst & Young LLP, the Group’s independent auditor in each of the last two fiscal years, in each of the following categories were:

 

    

        2013 
  $ million 

        

        2012
  $ million

Audit

           3

Audit related fees

    –        

Tax

           2

Other

    –          
               5

Audit fees include fees associated with the annual audit and local statutory audits required internationally. A more detailed breakdown of audit fees may be found in Note 3.2 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

Corporate headquarters and registered office

The corporate headquarters is in the UK and the registered office address is: Smith & Nephew plc, 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA, UK. Registered in England and Wales No. 324357. Tel: +44 (0)20 7401 7646. Website: www.smith-nephew.com

Committees of the Board

We delegate some of the Board’s detailed work to each of the Nomination & Governance, Ethics & Compliance, Audit and Remuneration Committees. Each of these has their own Terms of Reference, which may be found on the Group’s website at www.smith-nephew.com. The Company Secretary or her designate is secretary to each of the Committees. The Chairman of each Committee reports orally to the Board and minutes of the meetings are circulated to all members of the Board.

Other Committees

Executive Risk Committee

Olivier Bohuon chairs our Executive Risk Committee which includes the Executive Directors and Executive Officers of the Group. As an integral part of our planning and review process, the management of each of our divisions identifies the risks applicable to their business, the probability of those risks occurring, the impact if they do occur and the actions required and being taken to manage and mitigate those risks. The Executive Risk Committee meets twice a year to review the major risks they identify across the Group and the mitigation processes and plans. As appropriate, the Executive Risk Committee may re-categorise risks or require further information or mitigating action to be undertaken. We receive an annual report from the Executive Risk Committee, which details the significant risks categorised by potential financial impact on profit and share price and by likelihood of occurrence. Details of new, key or significantly increased risks, along with actions put in place to mitigate such risks, are also reported to us as appropriate. We have provided further information on the principal risks identified through this process in ‘Financial review and principal risks’ on pages 36 to 41 of this Annual Report.

Disclosures Committee

Olivier Bohuon chairs the Disclosures Committee which includes the Chief Financial Officer and various additional senior executives. The Committee meets as required and approves the release of all major communications to investors, to the UK Listing Authority, SEC and to the London and New York Stock Exchanges.

By order of the Board, on 26 February 2014

 

 

LOGO

Sir John Buchanan

Chairman

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      55  

 

 

 

Nomination & Governance Committee

 

Sir John Buchanan   LOGO

Membership

 

Sir John Buchanan (Chairman) (Independent on appointment)
Olivier Bohuon
Brian Larcombe (Independent)
Richard De Schutter (Independent)
Roberto Quarta (Independent) (Chairman Elect) with effect from 4 December 2013.

Five meetings

Main responsibilities

 

Review size and composition of the Board
Oversee the Board succession plans
Recommend Director appointments
Oversee governance aspects of the Board and its Committees
Oversee review into the Board’s effectiveness
Consider and update the Schedule of Matters Reserved to the Board and the Terms of Reference of the Board Committees
Monitor external corporate governance activities and keep the Board updated
Oversee the Board Development Programme and the induction process for new Directors.

Key activities in 2013

(in addition to main responsibilities)

 

Recommended the appointment of Roberto Quarta as Chairman Elect
Recommended the appointment of Michael Friedman as a new Non-executive Director
Reviewed and approved new Terms of Reference for Board Committees and new Matters Reserved to the Board
Continued consideration of diversity issues, independence of Non-executive Directors and potential conflicts of interests
Received updates on corporate governance matters.

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present my report on the activities of the Nomination & Governance Committee in 2013. The membership and principal duties of the Committee are set out in the table above. In 2013, we dealt with the following matters:

Appointment of Roberto Quarta as Chairman Elect

In April 2014, I shall have served on the Smith & Nephew plc Board for nine years. The Board agreed therefore that they should commence a search for my replacement during 2013. Richard De Schutter, Senior Independent Director led this search assisted by Brian Larcombe, member of this Committee and by the independent search firm, Russell Reynolds. They interviewed a number of candidates, who also met with Olivier Bohuon, the Chief Executive Officer and other Non-executive Directors. I did not take part in this search, but was kept updated of progress throughout. In October, the Committee recommended the

 

appointment of Roberto Quarta as Non-executive Director and Chairman Elect with effect from 4 December 2013. I shall retire from the Board following the Annual General Meeting and Roberto Quarta will be appointed in my place.

Changes to Board Composition

The Committee recommended the appointment of Michael Friedman as Non-executive Director. He joined the Board on 11 April 2013 bringing exceptional experience of the US Healthcare market with both public and private sector experience.

The Committee reviewed the composition of the Board and recommended that Brian Larcombe replace Richard De Schutter as Senior Independent Director, when he retires following the Annual General Meeting.

The Committee has continued its search for additional Non-executive Directors, focusing, in particular, on the skills, experience, independence and diversity each candidate brings to the Board. We look for candidates who will support the strategic priorities identified by the Board and in 2014 will continue to look for Non-executive Directors with experience within emerging markets or within the US and European healthcare systems.

Our focus on emerging markets experience will be particularly important after the retirement of Ajay Piramel following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014.

Governance Matters

During the year, the Committee also addressed a number of governance matters. We reviewed the Terms of Reference of all the Board Committees in light of new regulations and guidance from the UK Government and the Financial Reporting Council on Executive Remuneration, Narrative Reporting and Audit Committee Reporting. We received updates from the Company Secretary on new developments in corporate reporting in both the UK and Europe. We reviewed the independence of our Non-executive Directors, considered potential conflicts of interest and the diversity of the Board and made recommendations concerning these matters to the Board.

Diversity

As we explained in our 2011 Annual Report, we value diversity in the Boardroom. Our directors come from different backgrounds and each brings unique capabilities and perspectives to our discussions with a wide range of professional and geographical backgrounds. We are committed to maintaining a diverse Board. In 2012, we stated that our expectation would be that by 2015,25% of our Board would be female and we have met this expectation. When appointing new directors, we will continue to appoint on merit whilst valuing diversity in its broadest sense.

Whilst the whole Board remains responsible for ensuring that the Company is governed appropriately, the Committee carries out the more detailed work to support this.

Yours sincerely

 

LOGO

Sir John Buchanan

Chairman of Nomination & Governance Committee

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
56      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Corporate Governance Statement continued

 

Ethics & Compliance Committee

 

Pamela Kirby   LOGO

Membership

 

Pamela Kirby (Chairman) (Independent)
Michael Friedman (Independent) with effect from 4 December 2013
Joseph Papa (Independent)
Richard De Schutter (Independent).

Four Meetings

Main responsibilities

 

Review ethics and compliance programmes
Review policies and training programmes
Review compliance performance based on monitoring, auditing and investigations data
Review allegations of significant compliance failures
Review Group’s internal and external communications relating to ethics and compliance issues
Review external developments and compliance activities
Receive reports from the Group’s ethics and compliance meetings and from the Chief Compliance Officer and the Chief Legal Officer.

Key activities in 2013

(in addition to main responsibilities)

 

Held meetings with independent monitor appointed under the DOJ/SEC settlement to discuss the effectiveness of our Global Compliance programme, review his reports, and consider further enhancements
Continued to review compliance programme for third party sellers and other third parties doing business with the Company
Reviewed development of employee compliance training programmes
Considered compliance implications relating to potential acquisitions, including due diligence findings and integration plans.

 

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present my report on the activities of the Ethics & Compliance Committee in 2013. The membership and the principal duties of the Committee are set out in the table. In 2013, we dealt with the following matters, among others:

Settlement with US Securities and Exchange

Commission and US Department of Justice

During the year, we continued to work closely with the independent monitor appointed as part of our settlement with the SEC and DOJ in 2012. With his help, we have continued to evaluate the effectiveness of our compliance programme and adopt further enhancements to the programme. We met individually with the monitor and collectively as a Committee and discussed our compliance programme with him. In August, the monitor submitted to the SEC, DOJ and our Board a follow-up report to his initial report from 2012. The follow-up report contained additional recommendations and observations regarding implementation of his initial recommendations. It also concluded that Smith & Nephew’s programme is reasonably designed and implemented to detect and prevent violations of the anti-corruption laws and is functioning effectively. The SEC and DOJ concurred in that assessment, and in December 2013 we and the monitor submitted a final, joint report. In January 2014, the SEC and DOJ confirmed that the independent monitorship has terminated. We are now subject to self-reporting and other requirements for the remainder of the settlement agreements (that is, until at least March 2015).

Compliance Programme for Distributors

We continued to review our compliance programme with third party sellers (such as distributors and sales agents), particularly in higher risk markets. This programme includes due diligence, contracts with compliance terms and compliance training. To increase oversight, we are also piloting related monitoring and auditing programmes in 2014. During 2013, we required our distributors to complete expanded due diligence questionnaires and certifications and have continued to work with them to build and enhance their own compliance programmes. We provide all our distributors with a set of resources, which they can customise and brand for their own compliance programmes.

Compliance Programme for Other Third Parties

We have continued to strengthen our controls over other third parties engaged by us to provide services other than selling our products, such as customs, registration and travel agents. In 2014, we will increase our scrutiny on potential higher risk third parties. We have established a policy and process requiring that managers categorise third parties and take appropriate steps, including performing a risk assessment, conducting due diligence and assigning training, based on third party type and risk profile. We previously created Guidance on the Smith & Nephew Code of Conduct and Business Principles for Third Parties to highlight the areas of our Code of Conduct that apply directly to third parties and that we expect them to follow when working on our behalf.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      57  

 

 

Employee Compliance Programme

New employees are trained on our Code of Conduct which sets out the basic legal and ethical principles for carrying out business and applies both to the employees and others who act on the Group’s behalf. It sets out in detail how persons covered by the Code of Conduct are expected to interact ethically with healthcare professionals and government officials. It also covered the broader issues of ethics and compliance throughout the business and includes a code of business principles. A copy of the Code of Conduct can be found on the Group’s website (www.smith-nephew.com).

The Code of Conduct includes our whistle-blowing policy, which enables employees and members of the public to contact us anonymously through an independent provider (where allowed by local law). Individuals can also report a concern to their direct manager or a manager in Compliance, Legal or Human Resources. All calls and contacts are investigated and the appropriate action taken, including reports for senior management or the Board, where warranted. As stated in the Code of Conduct, we also enforce our non-retaliation policy against anyone who makes a report in good faith. The Ethics & Compliance Committee is advised of any potentially significant improprieties which are reported.

In 2013, we reviewed the Group Policies and Procedures (‘GPPs’) supporting the Code of Conduct, and made revisions to policies covering booths at medical meetings, free products, digital media and other areas. We continually work to enhance the employee compliance training programme. New employees receive training on our Code of Conduct, and we assign annual compliance training to employees. People managers also must complete a certification that includes content targeted to their role and the challenges they face. In 2013, we created a refresher course on Preventing Bribery and Corruption and a course on Effective Communication. The preventing bribery model gave employees an opportunity to apply their knowledge in different scenarios.

The annual bonus to senior managers can be negatively impacted if their team members have not completed the requisite training. The compliance training programme continues to evolve to focus more on tailored situations relevant to employees in specific job situations. Further support is provided through a comprehensive set of tools and resources located on our global intranet platform. These tools and resources are regularly reviewed and updated.

Compliance Infrastructure

We are mindful that an effective compliance programme requires both a culture of integrity and investment in the necessary infrastructure to give effect to that culture. As the Company grows in new markets, we continue to expand our global network of Regional Compliance Officers and they work with local management to reinforce the importance of compliance with our employees and third parties around the world. In 2013, we added regional compliance staff in Russia, Brazil, Turkey, Japan and the Middle East.

 

Compliance Implications around Acquisitions

During 2013, there has been increased acquisition activity across the Group, with the acquisition of Plato Grup in Turkey, Sushrut-Adler in India and Politec in Brazil, as well as the announcement of an agreement to acquire Pro Cirurgia Especializada, also in Brazil. We have compliance due diligence reviews and integration plans relating to each of these transactions and we monitor progress against these plans.

Compliance Investigations

Finally, an effective compliance programme must regularly evaluate and address emerging risks and design appropriate controls and take necessary remedial actions. These actions may include investigations about possible improprieties, which we pursue with due care.

Yours sincerely

 

LOGO

Pamela Kirby

Chairman of Ethics & Compliance Committee

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
58      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Audit Committee Report

 

 

Ian Barlow   LOGO

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present the first Audit Committee Report prepared in accordance with the newly revised Corporate Governance Code, in which the role of the Audit Committee and its activities during the year are described in more detail than in previous years.

The role of the Audit Committee is to undertake an independent assessment of the financial affairs of the Company, to review the financial statements and to ensure that there is a sound system of financial control throughout the Group. Whilst the Board as a whole is responsible for approving the financial results, we undertake the detailed work to support that decision.

Composition of the Audit Committee

I am Chairman of the Audit Committee and Brian Larcombe, Richard De Schutter and Joseph Papa are members of the Committee. We are all independent Non-executive Directors and served on the Committee throughout 2013. Richard De Schutter will be retiring from the Board and the Audit Committee following the 2014 Annual General Meeting. The Board has determined that, as a Chartered Accountant and former Senior Partner, London at KPMG, I am the designated financial expert.

Role of the Audit Committee

Our work falls into the following five areas:

 

Financial reporting

–  Reviewing significant financial reporting judgements and accounting policies and compliance with accounting standards

 

–  Ensuring the integrity of the financial statements and their compliance with UK and US statutory requirements

 

–  Ensuring the Annual Report and Accounts are fair, balanced and understandable and recommending their adoption by the Board

 

–  Monitoring announcements relating to the Group’s financial performance.

 

Internal Controls and Risk Management

 

–  Monitoring the effectiveness of internal controls and compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code 2012 and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, specifically sections 302 and 404

 

–  Reviewing the operation of the Group’s risk management processes and the control environment over financial, regulatory and quality risks.

 

 

Fraud and Whistle-blowing

 

–  Receiving reports on the processes in place to prevent fraud and to enable whistle-blowing

 

–  If required, receiving reports of fraud incidents.

Internal Audit

 

–  Agreeing internal audit plans and reviewing reports of internal audit work

 

–  Monitoring the effectiveness of the internal audit function.

 

External Audit

–  Overseeing the Board’s relationship with the external auditor

 

–  Monitoring and reviewing the independence and performance of the external auditor and evaluating their effectiveness

 

–  Making recommendations to the Board for the appointment or re-appointment of the external auditor.

 

The Terms of Reference of the Audit Committee describe our role and responsibilities more fully and can be found on our website at www.smith-nephew.com.

Activities of the Audit Committee in 2013 and since the year end

In 2013, we held five physical meetings and three meetings by telephone. Each meeting was attended by all members of the Committee. The Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Head of Internal Audit, the external auditor and key finance personnel also attended by invitation. We also met the external auditor without management present.

Our programme of work in 2013 is set out below and took the following format: As part of our review of the financial statements and the quarterly announcements, we reviewed management’s judgements applied in a number of areas including the valuation of inventories, liability provisioning, impairment, retirement benefit obligations, trade receivables, taxation and business combinations. The matters of judgement and our processes and conclusions are described in greater detail below.

During the year we received reports from the Group Treasurer, Head of Tax, Chief Information Officer (‘CIO’) and Chief Business Development Officer. All of these were focused on the risk management in these functions. The ClO’s report had a particular emphasis on cyber security. The Committee was satisfied that each function has evaluated the risks it is managing and has effective processes in place to mitigate and respond to those risks. We also had reports from the Heads of Quality Assurance and of Risk Assurance and had two dedicated discussions on the Group’s risk management during the year: first to review the Group’s risk management procedures and risk maps as a basis for sign off on the Annual Report and Accounts; the second in September as part of the Board’s annual strategy meeting to review the Board’s attitude to risk and assessment of the high level strategic risks.

In light of the changes in UK reporting regulations we continued to review the style, format and content of the Annual Report and Accounts paying particular attention to the changes in the Corporate Governance Code and reporting regulations. We also revised our Terms of Reference to take account of these changes.

Since the year end, we have reviewed the Annual Report and Accounts for 2013 and have concluded that taken as a whole they are fair, balanced and understandable and have advised the full Board accordingly. In coming to this conclusion, we have considered the description of the Group’s strategy and key risks, the key elements of the business model which is set out on page 7, and the key performance indicators and their link to the strategy.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      59  

 

 

Significant matters related to the financial statements

We considered the following key areas of judgement in relation to the 2013 accounts and at each reporting quarter end, which we discussed in all cases with management and the external auditor:

 

 

Area of judgement

 

  

 

Our action

 

Valuation of inventories

 

 

A feature of the Advanced Surgical Devices division’s business model (whose finished goods inventory makes up almost 80% of the Group total finished goods inventory) is the high level of product inventory required, some of which is located at customer premises and is available for customers’ immediate use. Complete sets of product, including large and small sizes, have to be made available in this way. These sizes are used less frequently than standard sizes and towards the end of the product life cycle are inevitably in excess of requirements. Adjustments to carrying value are therefore required to be made to orthopaedic inventory to anticipate this situation.

 

 

  

 

At each quarter end we received reports from and discussed with management and the external auditor the level of provisioning and material areas at risk. Provisioning averaged 26% during the year (27% during 2012). We concluded that the proposed levels were appropriate.

Liability provisioning

 

    

 

The recognition of provisions for legal disputes is subject to a significant degree of estimation. Provision is made for loss contingencies when it is considered probable that an adverse outcome will occur and the amount of the loss can be reasonably estimated. In making its estimates, management takes into account the advice of internal and external legal counsel. Provisions are reviewed regularly and amounts updated where necessary to reflect developments in the disputes. The ultimate liability may differ from the amount provided depending on the outcome of court proceedings or settlement negotiations or if new facts come to light.

 

The level of provisioning for contingent and other liabilities is an issue where management and legal judgements are important.

 

  

 

As members of the Board, we receive regular updates from the Chief Legal Officer. These updates form the basis for the level of provisioning. These have not moved materially during the year and we determined that the proposed levels at year end of $86m in 2013 ($80m in 2012) were appropriate in the circumstances.

Impairment

 

 

In carrying out impairment reviews of goodwill, intangible assets and property, plant and equipment, a number of significant assumptions have to be made when preparing cash flow projections. These include the future rate of market growth, discount rates, the market demand for the products acquired, the future profitability of acquired businesses or products, levels of reimbursement and success in obtaining regulatory approvals. If actual results should differ or changes in expectations arise, impairment charges may be required which would adversely impact operating results.

 

 

  

 

We reviewed management’s reports on the key assumptions with respect to goodwill and investment in associates – particularly the forecast future cash flows and discount rates used to make these calculations. We have also considered the disclosure surrounding these reviews and concluded it was appropriate.

Retirement Benefits Obligations

 

 

A number of key judgements have to be made in calculating the fair value of the Group’s defined benefit pension plans. These assumptions affect the balance sheet liability, operating profit and other finance income/costs. The most critical assumptions are the discount rate and mortality assumptions to be applied to future pension plan liabilities. In making these judgements, management takes into account the advice of professional external actuaries and benchmarks its assumptions against external data.

  

 

We received quarterly reports from management setting out the movement in the key assumptions for the principal pension schemes in the Group and the financial impact of these movements. Any significant movement in the assumptions or movement in the underlying scheme assets and liabilities was discussed with management. Details of the assumptions used are set out in Note 18 of the Notes to the Group accounts. Following these discussions we concluded that the assumptions used were appropriate.

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
60      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Audit Committee Report continued

 

 

 

Area of judgement

 

 

 

Our action

 

Trade receivables

 

 

Guidance was issued by the Financial Reporting Council in early 2012 on responding to increased country and currency risk particularly in Southern Europe.

 

 

Each quarter we received reports from management containing key metrics with regard to receivables with additional focus on receivables in Southern Europe. We discussed the risk associated with trade receivables in Southern Europe and the level of provisioning and concluded that the stated values were appropriate.

 

Taxation    

 

Provisioning for potential current tax liabilities and the level of deferred tax asset recognition in relation to accumulated tax losses are underpinned by a range of judgements.

 

 

We annually review our system and principles for management of tax risks. We review quarterly reports from management evaluating existing risks and tax provisions. We also consider reports from our external auditor before determining that the levels of provisions was appropriate.

 

Business combinations

 

 

The Group has identified ‘growth through acquisitions’ as one of its Strategic Priorities and over the past 12 months we have made acquisitions in Turkey, India and Brazil.

 

 

For completed acquisitions, we received a report from management setting out the significant assets and liabilities acquired, details of the provisional fair value adjustments applied, an analysis of the intangible assets acquired, the assumptions behind the valuation of these acquired intangible assets, and the proposed useful economic life of each intangible asset class. These reports were reviewed and, following discussion, approved.

 

 

External Auditor

The independence of our external auditor is critical for the integrity of the audit. We therefore have an Auditor Independence Policy which ensures that this independence is maintained, a copy of which is available on the Company’s website. This governs our approach when we require our external auditor to carry out non-audit services, and all such services are strictly governed by this policy. During 2013, fees paid to Ernst & Young LLP, our external auditor, for non-audit work totalled $3m which equates to 44% of the total audit fees. Full details are shown in Note 3.2 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

The Auditor Independence Policy also governs the policy regarding the audit partner rotation. This year marks the fifth and final year for our audit partner, Les Clifford, who will be replaced for 2014 by Andrew Walton. Partners and senior audit staff may not be recruited by the Group unless two years have expired since their previous involvement with the Group. No such recruitment has occurred. We consider the implementation of this policy helps ensure that auditor objectivity and independence is safeguarded.

We formally reviewed the effectiveness of the external audit process and the quality of the audit. The review covered the following:

 

The audit partners with particular focus on the lead audit engagement partner;

 

The skills and experience of the audit team;

 

The planning and scope of the audit and identification of areas of audit risk;

 

The execution of the audit;

 

The role of management in the audit process;

 

The quality of communication between the external auditor and the audit committee;

 

The quality of their regular reports on accounting matters, governance and control;

 

The support provided by the external auditor to the audit committee;

 

The contribution made by the external auditor towards insights and added value;

 

The reputation and standing of the external auditor;

 

The independence and objectivity of the external auditor; and

 

The quality of the formal report to Shareholders.

We conducted this review as part of the 2013 year-end process. The views of each member of the Audit Committee, the Chief Financial Officer, the Vice President Group Finance and key members of the finance management team at Group and divisional level were sought. We considered the feedback from this process and shared it with the external auditor and with management.

During the year, we considered the inspection reports from the Audit Oversight Boards in the UK and US, specifically the:

 

Financial Reporting Council’s Audit Quality Inspections Annual Report 2012/13 and Public Report on the 2012 inspection of Ernst & Young LLP; and

 

The US based Public Company Accounting Oversight Board’s Report on the 2012 inspection of Ernst & Young LLP.

We also reviewed the fees of the external auditor which benchmarked well against groups of comparable size and complexity.

Our conclusions were that the external audit was carried out effectively, efficiently and with the necessary objectivity and independence.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      61  

 

 

 

 

Tender of External Audit Services

Ernst & Young or its predecessors have been our external auditor since we listed in 1937. We have regularly reviewed the provision of external audit services and because we have been satisfied with the quality and cost of the work undertaken by Ernst & Young, we have not considered it necessary to tender the appointment. We are however mindful of the recent changes introduced by the UK Corporate Governance Code 2012, the prospective new requirements of the Competition Commission to tender regularly, the imminent changes being progressed by the European Parliament for periodic mandatory rotation of auditors and the views of some of our Shareholders regarding the length of tenure of our external auditor. We recognise that now is the time to consider putting the external audit out to tender. We chose not to do this in 2013 given the very recent appointment of Julie Brown as Chief Financial Officer. We have however decided that following the Annual General Meeting in 2014, we will go out to tender in 2014 with a view to appointing a new external auditor, or re-appointing Ernst & Young as external auditor, for the year ending 31 December 2015.

As Chairman of the Audit Committee, I shall lead this process on behalf of the Board supported by Julie Brown and senior members of her financial management. When we have made a decision regarding the appointment of the external auditor, we shall make an appropriate announcement to the market.

Internal Audit

Our Internal Audit function reports directly to the Audit Committee and carries out work in three areas: our financial systems and processes; our systems that ensure compliance with our Code of Conduct, regulation and laws; and our quality managements systems in our manufacturing activities. In all three areas they act as a third line of defence behind operational management’s front line and our own assurance activities. During the year they completed 58 reviews, the results of which were reviewed by the Committee which also oversees the effective and timely remediation of any recommendations. The Committee receives a quarterly report detailing any un-remediated and overdue control recommendations.

We are keen to ensure that this vital function develops with the increasing scale and complexity of the business. With regards to new acquisitions specifically, the function will perform an audit on the Group’s Acquisition Due Diligence process followed by site specific audits on new acquisitions to ensure integration efforts are in line with approved plans. We will continue to monitor Internal Audit’s scope of work and operational methods to ensure it plays a full role in providing assurance of the Group’s identification and management of risk and its associated controls.

Risk Management and Internal Control

On behalf of the Board we reviewed the system of internal financial control and satisfied ourselves that we are meeting required standards both for the year ended 31 December 2013 and up to the date of approval of this Annual Report. No concerns were raised with us in 2013 about possible improprieties in matters of financial reporting or other matters.

In coming to this conclusion:

 

We received regular reports from the internal audit function on their findings from the reviews undertaken throughout the year both from an internal audit perspective and also with regard to compliance with the Sarbanes Oxley Act

 

We requested and reviewed a report mapping Group level risks and related control assurance

 

We requested various reports from management relating to specific risks identified through the risk management process including the progress of the European Process Optimisation project (integration of enterprise reporting systems in Europe) and the risks inherent in our programme of business acquisitions. In addition the Board conducted a workshop on cyber security.

Our Risk Management Framework is underpinned by Business and Functional risk registers that highlight the risks identified and the probability and impact of risk to the Group, as well as mitigation plans. The most significant of these risks are considered by the Group Risk Committee for inclusion on a Group Risk Register. The effectiveness of this Framework is reviewed annually by Internal Audit and our Committee.

Yours sincerely

 

LOGO

Ian Barlow

Chairman of the Audit Committee

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
62      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report

 

 

Our aim is to devise remuneration packages

that drive performance

 

 

 

 

LOGO

Dear Shareholder,

I am pleased to present the first Directors’ remuneration report prepared in accordance with the new regulations. Our remuneration arrangements have essentially remained unchanged from last year, but are now presented in a new format. We have discussed this format with a number of our major Shareholders and are very grateful for their suggestions helping us to improve the clarity of the new remuneration policy table and the remuneration policy report itself.

We made a number of decisions during the year, as follows:

 

Agreed to introduce a third performance measure relating to growth in Emerging & International Markets, into our Performance Share Programme.

 

Determined the incentive plan outcomes for long-term awards made in 2010 and the Annual Incentive Plan 2012, and set the targets and measures for the awards and plans in 2013.

 

Redesigned the Directors’ Remuneration Report in line with the new regulations.
 

 

Compliance statement

We have prepared this Directors’ Remuneration Report (the ‘Report’) in accordance with The Enterprise and Regulatory Reform Act 2012-2013 (clauses 81-84) and The Large and Medium-Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013 (the ‘Regulations’). The Report also meets the relevant requirements of the Financial Conduct Authority (‘FCA’) Listing Rules.

As required by the regulations, the first part of the Report (pages 64 to 72) is the Directors’ Remuneration Policy Report (the ‘Policy Report’). The Policy Report will be put to Shareholders for approval as a binding vote at the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014. The policy report describes our remuneration policy as it relates to the Directors of the Company. Once the policy report has been approved by Shareholders, all payments we make to any Director of the Company will be in accordance with this remuneration policy. We intend that this remuneration policy will remain in place unchanged for at least the next three years and will next be put to Shareholder vote at the Annual General Meeting to be held in 2017. We will bring the policy report back to Shareholders earlier in the event that we make any material change to the remuneration policy or Shareholders do not approve the annual report on remuneration.

The second part of the Report (pages 73 to 85) is the annual report on remuneration (the ‘Implementation Report’). The Implementation Report will be put to Shareholders for approval as an advisory vote at the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014. The Implementation Report explains how the remuneration policy was implemented during 2013 and also how it is currently being implemented in 2014.

Pages 74, 79 to 82 have been audited by Ernst & Young LLP.


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      63

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

in line with our strategy  &

which are simple  &  clear

to understand

 

 

 

As a Remuneration Committee, our aim is to devise remuneration packages that drive a performance in line with our corporate strategy and which are simple and clear to understand both for our Shareholders and for those who participate in our plans. We aim to have a clear line of sight between the performance of the Company and how our Directors and senior executives are paid. We do this by setting the fixed elements of pay, notably base salary and benefits, in line with what our Executive Directors would be paid at another company of a comparable size, complexity and geographical spread. For the variable elements of pay, we select performance measures that are linked to one or more of our Strategic Priorities as detailed on page 10 of the Annual Report as follows:

 

 

 

Measures in our Variable Pay Plans

 

    

 

Link to Strategic Priorities

 

Financial measures in Annual Incentive Plans
Revenue, Trading profit, Cash      We need to generate cash in our Established Markets to be able to invest in Emerging & International Markets, innovation, organic growth and acquisitions in order to continue to grow in the future. Cash flow is therefore important and this in turn is derived from increased revenues and healthy trading profits.
Business objectives in Annual Incentive Plans
Re-investment      We need to release resources from the businesses through improved structures and efficiencies in order to re-invest in our higher growth areas, including emerging markets, innovation, organic growth and acquisitions.
Processes      We need to enhance our business processes in order to operate more effectively and efficiently and to improve our operating model.
People      We need to attract and retain the right people to achieve our strategy through improving our operating model, winning in Established Markets and growing in emerging markets.
Customer      Our mission is to deliver advanced medical technologies that help healthcare professionals, our customers, improve the quality of life of their patients.
Performance measures in our Performance Share Plan
Cash flow      Cash flow from our Established Markets is necessary in order to fund growth in emerging markets, innovation, organic growth and acquisitions.
Revenue in Emerging & International markets      Our long-term strategy depends on our ability to grow in Emerging & International Markets, to innovate for growth and to supplement organic growth through acquisitions. This depends on our ability to develop new products and to expand into new markets both geographically and by product.
TSR      If we execute our strategy successfully, this will lead to an increased return for our Shareholders.

The following pages set out our remuneration policy in greater detail and then explain how we implement that policy. We believe that outstanding performance by our executives should be rewarded by attractive remuneration packages. We do however have measures in place which ensure that plans do not pay out where performance has not met threshold performance and to recover any amounts paid out, where subsequent events show that payments should not have been made.

We have aimed to design a remuneration package that will encourage our Executive Directors to drive performance in line with our strategy, whilst minimising risk, which will in turn deliver a healthy return to our Shareholders. We very much hope that the new style report is clearer for our Shareholders and shows how we have linked the design of our remuneration plans to our strategy.

 

LOGO

Joseph Papa

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
64      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

 

The Policy Report

 

The Remuneration Committee presents the Directors’ remuneration policy report, which will be put to Shareholders as a binding vote at the Annual General Meeting to be held on 10 April 2014 and subject to Shareholder approval, shall take immediate effect.

Future policy table

Executive Directors

The following table and accompanying notes explain the different elements of remuneration we pay to our Executive Directors:

 

 

How the component supports the short-

and long-term strategy of the Company

 

 

How the component operates

 

Base salary and benefits

 

   

Base salary

 

   
We are a FTSE 50 listed company, operating in over 100 countries around the world. Our strategy to generate cash from Established Markets in order to invest for growth in Emerging Markets means that we are competing for international talent and our base salaries therefore need to reflect what our Executive Directors would receive if they were to work in another international company of a similar size, complexity and geographical scope.  

Salaries are normally reviewed annually, with any increase applying from 1 April. Salary levels and increases take account of:

 

–  market movements within a peer group of similarly sized UK listed companies;

 

–  scope and responsibility of the position;

 

–  skill/experience and performance of the individual Director;

 

–  general economic conditions in the relevant geographic market; and

 

–  average increases awarded across the Company, with particular regard to increases in the market in which the Executive is based.

 

Payment in lieu of pension

 

   

In order to attract and retain Executive Directors with the capability of driving our corporate strategy, we need to provide market-competitive retirement benefits similar to the benefits they would receive if they were to work for one of our competitors.

 

At the same time, we seek to avoid exposing the Company to defined benefit pension risks, and where possible will make payments in lieu of providing a pension.

 

 

Current Executive Directors receive an allowance in lieu of membership of a Company-run pension scheme.

 

Base salary is the only component of remuneration that is pensionable.

Benefits

 

   

In order to attract and retain Executive Directors with the capability of driving our corporate strategy, we need to provide a range of market-competitive benefits similar to the benefits they would receive if they were to work for one of our competitors.

 

It is important that our Executive Directors are free to focus on the Company’s business without being diverted by concerns about medical provision, risk benefit cover or, if required, relocation issues.

 

A wide range of benefits may be provided depending on the benefits provided for comparable roles in the location in which the Executive Director is based. These benefits will include, as a minimum, healthcare cover, life assurance, long-term disability, annual medical examinations, company car or car allowance. The Committee retains the discretion to provide additional benefits where necessary or relevant in the context of the Executive’s location.

 

Where applicable, relocation costs may be provided in line with Company’s relocation policy for employees, which may include removal costs, assistance with accommodation, living expenses for self and family and financial consultancy advice. In some cases such payments may be grossed up.

 

All-employee arrangements

 

   

All-employee share plans

 

   
To enable Executive Directors to participate in all-employee share plans on the same basis as other employees.   ShareSave Plans are operated in the UK and 27 other countries internationally. In the US, an Employee Stock Purchase Plan is operated. These plans enable employees to save on a regular basis and then buy shares in the Company. Executive Directors are able to participate in such plans on a similar basis to other employees, depending on where they are located.


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      65

 

 

 

 

 

 

     
  Maximum levels of payment   Framework in which performance is assessed
         
         
   

The base salary of the Executive Directors with effect from 1 April 2014 will be as follows:

 

Olivier Bohuon 1,111,782

 

Julie Brown £514,000

 

The factors noted in the previous column will be taken into consideration when making increases to base salary and when appointing a new Director.

 

In normal circumstances, base salary increases for Executive Directors will relate to the geographic market and peer group. In addition, the average increases for employees across the group will be taken into account. The Remuneration Committee retains the right to approve higher increases when there is a substantial change in the scope of the Executive Director’s role. A full explanation will be provided in the Implementation Report should higher increases be approved in exceptional cases.

  Performance in the prior year is one of the factors taken into account and poor performance is likely to lead to a zero salary increase.
         
 

Up to 30% of base salary.

 

  The level of payment in lieu of a pension paid to Executive Directors is not dependent on performance.
         
   

The policy is framed by the nature of the benefits that the Remuneration Committee is willing to provide to Executive Directors. The maximum amount payable will depend on the cost of providing such benefits to an employee in the location at which the Executive Director is based. Shareholders should note that the cost of providing comparable benefits in different jurisdictions may vary widely.

 

As an indication, the cost of such benefits provided in 2013 was as follows:

 

Olivier Bohuon 80,705

 

Julie Brown £14,400

 

The maximum amount payable in benefits to an Executive Director, in normal circumstances, will not be significantly more than amounts paid in 2013 (or equivalent in local currency). The Remuneration Committee retains the right to pay more than this should the cost of providing the same underlying benefits increase or in the event of a relocation. A full explanation will be provided in the Implementation Report should the cost of benefits provided be significantly higher.

  The level and cost of benefits provided to Executive Directors is not dependent on performance but on the package of benefits provided to comparable roles within the relevant location.
         
         
   

Executive Directors may currently invest up to £250 per month in the UK ShareSave Plan. The Remuneration Committee may exercise its discretion to increase this amount up to the maximum permitted by the HM Revenue & Customs. Similar limits will apply in different locations.

 

  The potential gains from all-employee plans are not based on performance but are linked to growth in the share price.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
66      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

 

Future policy table – Executive Directors continued

 

How the component supports the short-

and long-term strategy of the Company

  How the component operates
Annual incentives    
Annual Incentive Plan – Cash Incentive    

To motivate and reward the achievement of specific annual financial and business objectives related to the Company’s strategy and sustained through a clawback mechanism explained more fully in the notes.

 

The objectives which determine the payment of the annual cash incentive and the level of the annual equity award are linked closely to the Group strategy.

 

The financial measures of revenue, trading profit and cash flow underlie our strategy for growth and the need to generate cash to fund future growth.

 

The business objectives are also linked to the Group strategy. These change from year to year to reflect the evolving strategy, but will typically be linked to the Strategic Priorities set out on page 10 of this Annual Report. The Implementation Report each year will explain how each objective is linked to a specific strategic priority.

 

For example, a Reinvestment objective links to the priority of improving the efficiency of the business model and investment in higher growth segments and geographies and Processes and People objectives link to developing the right organisation.

 

The Annual Incentive Plan comprises a cash and an equity component, both based on the achievement of financial and business objectives set at the start of the year.

 

The cash component is paid in full after the end of the performance year.

 

At the end of the year, the Remuneration Committee determines the extent to which performance against these has been achieved and sets the award level.

Annual Incentive Plan – Equity Incentive    
To drive share ownership and encourage sustained high standards through the application of a ‘malus’ provision over three years, explained more fully in the notes.  

The equity award component comprises conditional share awards (made at the time of the cash award), with vesting phased over the following three years.

 

The equity component vests  1 3 ,  1 3 ,  1 3 on successive award anniversaries, only if performance remains satisfactory over each of these three years; otherwise the award will lapse.

 

Participants will receive an additional number of shares equivalent to the amount of dividend payable per vested share during the relevant performance period.

Long-term incentives (awards actively being made)    
Performance Share Programme    

To motivate and reward longer term performance linked to the long-term strategy and share price of the Company.

 

The performance measures which determine the level of vesting of the Performance Share Awards are linked to our corporate strategy.

 

Our strategy requires the generation of cash in order to invest for growth. Cash flow is therefore a key performance measure in our performance share plan.

 

Growth in our Emerging & International Markets is a key part of our strategy. Revenue in our Emerging & International Markets is therefore included as one of our performance share plan measures.

 

If our strategy succeeds, the total return to our shareholders will also increase and therefore we include a relative TSR measure in our long-term share plan.

 

 

The Performance Share Programme comprises conditional share awards which vest after three years, subject to the achievement of stretching performance targets linked to the Company’s strategy.

 

Awards may be subject to clawback in the event of material financial misstatement or misconduct.

 

Participants will receive an additional number of shares equivalent to the amount of dividend payable per vested share during the relevant performance period.

One-off share awards    
In order to implement our Group strategy, we recognise that it is not always possible to promote from within the Company. In the event that we recruit an Executive Director who is currently employed by another company, we recognise that we might be required to compensate that Executive Director for cash or share awards, they may forfeit on leaving their former employer. Our policy regarding such awards is detailed in the notes.   One-off share awards may be made under the provisions of Listing Rule 9.4.2 to facilitate the appointment of a new Executive Director. Such awards will be made on a case-by-case basis depending on the circumstances at the time to take account of amounts forfeited elsewhere on accepting appointment.


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      67

 

 

 

 

 

 

     
  Maximum levels of payment   Framework in which performance is assessed
         
         
   

The total maximum payable under the Annual Incentive Plan is 215% of base salary (150% Cash Incentive and 65% Equity Incentive).

 

50% salary awarded for threshold performance.

 

 

100% salary awarded for target performance.

 

150% salary awarded for maximum performance.

 

Performance assessed against individual objectives and Group financial targets.

 

The cash and share awards are subject to malus and clawback as detailed in the notes following this table.

 

70% of the cash component is based on financial performance measures, which currently include revenue, trading profit and trading cash. The Remuneration Committee retains the discretion to adopt any financial performance measure that is relevant to the Company.

 

30% of the cash component is based on other business goals linked to the Company’s strategy, which could include financial and non-financial measures.

 

The Remuneration Committee has the discretion to apply a multiplier, adjusting the outcome up or down by 10% to reward or penalise conduct in respect of leadership, corporate reputation, ethics, organisational behaviours and representing the Company both internally and externally.

 

The maximum opportunity shown to the left cannot be exceeded through the application of the multiplier.

         
   

0% of salary awarded for performance below target.

 

50% of salary awarded for target performance.

 

65% of salary awarded for maximum performance.

 

Performance assessed against individual performance which includes an element of Group financial targets.

 

The Remuneration Committee will use their judgement of the individual’s performance in determining the level of equity award that may be awarded within the range of 50% to 65% of salary.

 

The equity component will vest in three equal tranches over a three-year period, provided that the annual performance conditions set at the beginning of each year continue to be met.

         
         
   

Annual awards:

 

47.5% of salary for threshold performance.

 

95% of salary for target performance.

 

190% of salary for maximum performance.

 

Currently:

 

–  50% of the award vests on achievement of a three-year cumulative free cashflow target

 

–  25% of the award vests subject to three-year Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) at median performance relative to industry peers

 

–  25% of the award vests subject to the achievement of revenue targets in Emerging & International Markets

 

–  These measures are described in more detail in the notes and the targets and performance against them will be disclosed in the Implementation Report if appropriate

 

–  The Performance Share Award will vest on the third anniversary of the date of grant, depending on the extent to which the performance conditions are met over the three year period commencing in the year the award was made

 

–  The Remuneration Committee retains the discretion to change the measures and their respective weightings to ensure continuing alignment with the Company’s strategy

 

–  The cash and share awards are subject to malus and clawback as detailed in the notes following this table.

Awards made prior to 2014 were subject to TSR and cash flow targets.

         
   

Each award will be determined on a case-by-case basis. In normal circumstances such awards will be no more beneficial than the value of amounts forfeited by the Executive Director on leaving a previous company to join the Board.

 

  The Remuneration Committee has the discretion to apply performance conditions to one-off awards if appropriate. However, if it is impossible to replicate the vesting conditions applicable to awards granted by other companies, awards may be made without performance conditions.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
68      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

 

Notes to Future policy table – Executive Directors

Changes to remuneration policy

The remuneration policy described in the future policy table – Executive Directors is the same remuneration policy in respect of Executive Directors that has been in force since the beginning of 2012. It is anticipated that this policy will apply at least until the Annual General Meeting in 2017. The only change made has been to introduce a third performance measure to our Performance Share Programme.

Performance measures – Annual Incentive Plan

The performance measures which apply to the Annual Incentive Plan for Executive Directors comprise 70% financial measures and 30% business goals linked to the Company’s strategy, which could include financial and non-financial measures.

The financial measures may differ from year to year to provide continued alignment with the Company strategy. Measures to be used in 2014 are detailed in the Implementation Report. Each year the measures are chosen in order to relate to our Strategic Priorities and in turn to our key performance indicators, which are set out on pages 12 and 13. The performance targets are set by taking into account the strategy of the Company and are designed to be realistic yet stretching.

The business measures will differ from year to year as the evolving corporate strategy means that we will wish to set Executive Directors different business objectives in order to meet the current corporate needs. The business objectives are personal to each Executive Director, and are tailored to reflect their role and responsibilities during the year. These are set at the start of the year and reflect the most important areas of strategic focus for the Company. The Remuneration Committee sets annual measurement criteria (performance targets) that are appropriate to motivate and measure an Executive Director’s performance in any one year. The factors taken into consideration include the three-year strategic plan, prior years’ delivered performance and budgeted performance. In the past, measures have included R&D investment, succession planning, employee engagement, compliance, development of product portfolio, M&A activity and shared services implementation.

Performance measures –

Performance Share Programme

The performance measures which apply to the Performance Share Programme awards made in 2014 relate to cumulative free cash flow, revenue in Emerging & International Markets and Total Shareholder Return. We have chosen three measures which are relevant for the long-term success of the Company.

The free cash flow measure is important for us in a period of growth, when we need to generate cash to fund both organic and inorganic investment.

Revenue in Emerging & International Markets is important for us when we are seeking to generate profitable revenue in new markets and from new products.

The Total Shareholder Return measure, which compares our long-term performance against that of our peers, seeks to align the payout of the Performance Share Programme with the experience of our Shareholders. This helps Executive Directors relate to the Shareholder experience and ensure that vesting is aligned to the out-performance of our sector.

The Remuneration Committee will keep these performance measures under review and retains the discretion to alter the measures or their respective weightings to ensure continuing alignment to the corporate strategy.

Malus and clawback

The Remuneration Committee may determine that an unvested award or part of an award may not vest (regardless of whether or not the performance conditions have been met) or may determine that any cash bonus, vested shares, or their equivalent value in cash be returned to the Company in the event that any of the following matters is discovered:

 

A material misstatement of the Company’s financial results; or

 

A material error in determining the extent to which any performance condition has been satisfied; or

 

A significant adverse change in the financial performance of the Company, or a significant loss at a general level or at the division or function in which a participant worked; or

 

Inappropriate conduct (for example reputational issues), capability or performance by a participant, or within a team business area or profit centre.

These provisions apply to share awards under the Global Share Plan 2010 and cash amounts under the Annual Cash Incentive Plan.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      69  

 

 

Illustrations of the application of the remuneration policy

The following charts show the potential split between the different elements of the Executive Directors’ remuneration under three different performance scenarios:

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

Data for the Chief Executive Officer assumes an exchange rate of 1 = £0.8494.

Policy on recruitment arrangements

Our policy on the recruitment of Executive Directors is to pay a fair remuneration package for the role being undertaken and the experience of the Executive Director appointed. In terms of base salary, we will seek to pay a salary comparable, in the opinion of the Committee, to that which would be paid for an equivalent position elsewhere. The Remuneration Committee will determine a base salary in line with the policy and having regard to the parameters set out on pages 64 and 65. Incoming Executive Directors will be entitled to pension, benefit and incentive arrangements which are the same as provided to existing Executive Directors. On that basis, awards would not exceed 405% of base salary.

We recognise that in the event that we require a new Executive Director to relocate to take up a position with the Company, we will also pay relocation and related costs as described in the Future policy table on pages 64 and 65, which is in line with the relocation arrangements we operate across the Group.

We also recognise that in many cases, an external appointee may forfeit sizeable cash bonuses and share awards if they choose to leave their former employer and join us. The Remuneration Committee therefore believes that we need the ability to compensate new hires for incentive awards they give up on joining us. The Committee will use its discretion in setting any such compensation, which will be decided on a case-by-case basis. We will only provide compensation which is no more beneficial than that given up by the new appointee and we will seek evidence from the previous employer to confirm the full details of bonus or share awards being forfeited. As far as possible, we will seek to replicate forfeited share awards using Smith & Nephew incentive plans or through reliance on 9.4.2 in the Listing Rules, whilst at the same time aiming for simplicity.

If we appoint an existing employee as an Executive Director of the Company, pre-exisiting obligations with respect to remuneration, such as pension, benefits and legacy share awards, will be honoured. Should these differ materially from current arrangements, these will be disclosed in the next Implementation Report.

We will supply details via an announcement to the London Stock Exchange of an incoming Executive Director’s remuneration arrangements at the time of their appointment.

Service contracts

We employ Executive Directors on rolling service contracts with notice periods of up to 12 months from the Company and six months from the Executive Director. On termination of the contract, we may require the Executive Director not to work their notice period and pay them an amount equivalent to the base salary and payment in lieu of pension and benefits they would have received if they had been required to work their notice period.

Under the terms of the Executive Director’s service contract, Executive Directors are restricted for a period of 12 months after leaving the employment of the Company from working for a competitor, soliciting orders from customers and offering employment to employees of Smith & Nephew. The Company retains the right to waive these provisions in certain circumstances. In the event that these provisions are waived and the former Executive Director commences employment earlier than at the end of the notice period, no further payments shall be made in respect of the portion of notice period not worked. Directors’ service contracts are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office: 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA.

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
70      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

 

Policy on payment for loss of office

Our policy regarding termination payments to departing Executive Directors is to limit severance payments to pre-established contractual arrangements. In the event that the employment of an Executive Director is terminated, any compensation payable will be determined in accordance with the terms of the service contract between the Company and the Executive Director, as well as the rules of any incentive plans.

Under normal circumstances (excluding termination for gross misconduct) all leavers are entitled to receive termination payments in lieu of notice equal to base salary, payment in lieu of pension, and benefits. In some circumstances additional benefits may become payable to cover reimbursement of untaken holiday leave, repatriation and outplacement fees, legal and financial advice.

In addition, we may also in exceptional circumstances exercise our discretion to pay the Executive Director a proportion of the annual cash incentive they would have received had they been required to work their notice period. Any entitlement or discretionary payment may be reduced in line with the Executive Director’s duty to mitigate losses, subject to applying our non-compete clause.

We will supply details via an announcement to the London Stock Exchange of a departing Executive Director’s termination arrangements at the time of departure.

In the case of a change of control which results in the termination of an Executive Director or a material alteration to their responsibilities or duties, within 12 months of the event, the Executive Director would be entitled to receive 12 months’ base salary plus payment in lieu of pension and benefits. In addition, the Remuneration Committee has discretion to pay an Executive Director in these circumstances an annual cash incentive. For Directors appointed prior to 1 November 2012, an automatic annual cash incentive is payable at target.

In the event that an Executive Director leaves for reasons of ill-health, death, redundancy or retirement in agreement with the Company, then the vesting of any outstanding annual cash incentive and equity incentive awards will generally depend on the Remuneration Committee’s assessment of performance to date. Performance share awards will be pro-rated for the time worked during the relevant performance period, and will remain subject to performance over the full performance period.

For all other leavers, the annual cash incentive will generally be forfeited and outstanding equity incentive awards and performance share awards will lapse.

One-off awards granted on appointment will normally lapse on leaving except in cases of death, retirement, redundancy, or ill-health. The Remuneration Committee has discretion to permit such awards to vest in other circumstances and will be subject to satisfactorily meeting performance conditions if applicable.

The Remuneration Committee retains discretion to alter these provisions on a case-by-case basis following a review of circumstances and to ensure fairness for both Shareholders and Executive Directors.

We will supply details via an announcement to the London Stock Exchange of an out-going Executive Director’s remuneration arrangements around the time of leaving.

Policy on shareholding requirements

The Remuneration Committee believes that one of the best ways our Executive Directors can have a greater alignment with Shareholders is for them to hold a significant number of shares in the Company. Executive Directors are therefore expected to build up a holding of Smith & Nephew shares worth two-times their base salary. In order to reinforce this expectation, we require them to retain 50% of all shares vesting under the Company share plans (after tax) until this holding has been met recognising that differing international tax regimes affect the pace at which an Executive Director may fulfil the shareholding requirement. When calculating whether or not this requirement has been met, we will include ordinary shares or ADRs held by the Executive Director and their immediate family and the intrinsic value of any vested but unexercised options.

Statement of consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Company and differences to the Executive Director Policy

All employees across the Group including the Executive Directors are incentivised in a similar manner. Although the salary levels and maximum opportunities under bonus and share plans differ, generally speaking the same targets and performance conditions relating to the Company’s strategy apply throughout the organisation.

Executive Director base salaries will generally increase at a rate in line with the average salary increases awarded across the Company. Given the diverse geographic markets within which the Company operates, the Committee will generally be informed by the average salary increase in both the market local to the Executive and the UK, recognising the Company’s place of listing, and will also consider market data periodically.

A range of different pension arrangements operate across the Group depending on location and/or length of service. Executive Directors and Executive Officers either participate in the legacy pension arrangements relevant to their local market or receive a cash payment of 30% of salary in lieu of a pension. Senior Executives who do not participate in a local Company pension plan receive a cash payment of 20% of salary in lieu of pension. Differing amounts apply for lower levels within the Company.

The Company has established a benefits framework under which the nature of benefits varies by geography. Executive Directors participate in benefit arrangements similar to those applied for employees within the applicable location.

All employees are set objectives at the beginning of each year, which link through to the objectives set for the Executive Directors. Annual cash incentives payable to employees across the Company depend on the satisfactory completion of these objectives as well as performance against relevant Group and divisional financial targets relating to revenue, trading profit and trading cash, similar to the financial targets set for the Executive Directors.

Executive Officers and Senior Executives (currently 72) participate in the annual Equity Incentive Programme and the Performance Share Programme. The maximum amounts payable are lower, but the performance conditions are the same as those that apply to the Executive Directors.

No specific consultation with employees has been undertaken relating to Director remuneration. However, regular employee surveys are conducted across the Group, which cover a wide range of issues relating to local employment conditions and an understanding of Group-wide strategic matters. Currently over 4,500 employees in 32 countries participate in one or more of our global share plans.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      71  

 

 

Future policy table

Chairman and Non-executive Directors

The following table and accompanying notes explain the different elements of remuneration we pay to our Chairman and Non-executive Directors. No element of their remuneration is subject to performance. All payments made to the Chairman are determined by the Remuneration Committee, whilst payments made to the Non-executive Directors are determined by the Directors who are not themselves Non-executive Directors, currently the Chairman, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer.

 

 

How the component supports the short-

and long-term strategy of the Company

  How the component operates   Maximum levels of payment

Annual fees

 

       

Basic annual fee

 

       

To attract and retain Directors by setting fees at rates comparable to what would be paid in an equivalent position elsewhere.

 

A proportion of the fees are paid in shares in the third quarter of each year in order to align Non-executive Directors’ fees with the interest of Shareholders.

 

Fees will be reviewed periodically. In future, any increase will be paid in shares until 25% of the total fee is paid in shares.

 

Fees are set in line with market practice for fees paid by similarly sized UK listed companies.

 

Annual fees are set and paid in UK sterling or US dollars depending on the location of the Non-executive Director. If appropriate, fees may be set and paid in alternative currencies.

 

Annual fees are currently as follows:

 

£63,000 in cash plus £3,150 in shares; or

 

$120,000 in cash plus $6,000 in shares.

 

Chairman fee:

 

£400,000 plus £20,000 in shares (to April 2014).

 

£300,000 plus £100,000 in shares (from April 2014).

 

Whilst it is not expected to increase the fees paid to the Non-executive Directors and the Chairman by more than the increases paid to employees generally, in exceptional circumstances, higher fees might become payable.

 

The total maximum aggregate fees payable to the Non-executive Directors will not exceed £1.5m as set out in the Company’s articles of association.

Fee for Senior Independent Director and Committee Chairmen
To compensate Non-executive Directors for the additional time spent as Committee Chairmen or as the Senior Independent Director.   A fixed fee is paid, which is reviewed periodically.  

£15,000 in cash; or

 

$27,000 in cash.

 

Whilst it is not expected that the fees paid to the Senior Independent Director or Committee Chairman will exceed the increases paid to employees generally, in exceptional circumstances, higher fees might become payable.

 

Intercontinental travel fee        
To compensate Non-executive Directors for the time spent travelling to attend meetings in another continent.   A fixed fee is paid, which is reviewed periodically.  

£3,500 in cash; or

 

$7,000 in cash.

 

Whilst it is not expected to increase these fees by more than the increases paid to employees generally, in exceptional circumstances, higher fees might become payable.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
72      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

 

Notes to Future policy table – Non-executive Directors

Changes to remuneration policy

The Board has altered the policy regarding the payment of Non-executive Directors and to the Chairman in one respect in 2013, by introducing the payment of a proportion of the fees in the form of shares. The fees paid to the Non-executive Directors and to the Chairman were reviewed in July 2013 and it was agreed that the basic fee should be increased by 5% (there having been no increase to these fees since August 2011) and that the increase be paid in the form of shares. The amount of the increase less applicable taxes was used to purchase shares in the market on 15 August 2013. Going forward any increase in the level of fees paid to a Non-executive Director will be paid in the form of shares until 25% of the Non-executive Director’s fee is paid in the form of shares. We have made this change in order to align the fees paid to Non-executive Directors with the experience of our Shareholders. With the appointment of Roberto Quarta as Chairman of the Company with effect from the Annual General Meeting, we have taken the opportunity to pay 25% of his fees in the form of shares immediately.

Policy on recruitment arrangements

Any new Non-executive Director shall be paid in accordance with the current fee levels on appointment, in line with the policy set out above. With respect to the appointment of a new Chairman, fee levels will take into account market rates, the individual’s profile and experience, the time required to undertake the role and general business conditions. In addition, the Remuneration Committee retains the right to authorise the payment of relocation assistance or an accommodation allowance in the event of the appointment of a Chairman not based within the UK.

Letters of appointment

The Chairman and Non-executive Directors have letters of appointment which set out the terms under which they provide their services to the Company and are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office: 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA. The appointment of Non-executive Directors is not subject to a notice period, nor is there any compensation payable on loss of office, for example, should they not be re-elected at an Annual General Meeting. The appointment of the Chairman is subject to a notice period of six months.

The Chairman and Non-executive Directors are required to acquire a shareholding in the Company equivalent in value to one times their basic fee within two years of their appointment to the Board.

Statement of consideration of Shareholder views

This policy report sets out the remuneration policy in relation to Executive Directors, which has been in place since 2012. As this policy evolved at the end of 2011 and during 2012, we engaged actively with Shareholders to explain our remuneration arrangements and to discuss their views on our proposals. At the time, Joseph Papa, the Chairman of the Remuneration Committee and members of the Senior Executive Team met with the holders of around 30% of our shares, including collectively with a number of smaller engaged investors, as well as Shareholder advisory bodies. We discussed the structure of our remuneration package, our policies on termination, recruitment, shareholding requirements and the operation of Annual Incentive Plan. The Directors’ remuneration report was approved by 96% of Shareholders who voted at the Annual General Meeting in 2013 and we received feedback from Shareholders around the time of this meeting that they understood and approved of our remuneration arrangements. Although the remuneration policy has remained essentially unchanged as in previous years, given the changes in remuneration reporting, we also conducted an engagement programme with our larger Shareholders in 2013. Joseph Papa met with the holders of around 20% of our shares, and with a number of Shareholder advisory bodies. He has also been available to discuss any aspect of our remuneration programme with Shareholders throughout the year. The Shareholders who have engaged with us have all been supportive of our approach to remuneration, recognising the link between the corporate strategy and executive reward.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      73  

 

 

 

The Implementation Report

The Remuneration Committee presents the Annual report on remuneration, (the ‘Implementation Report’), which together with the annual statement will be put to shareholders as an advisory vote at the Annual General Meeting to be held on 10 April 2014.

 

 

Remuneration Committee

The Chairman of the Remuneration Committee is Joseph Papa and the remaining members of the Remuneration Committee are Baroness Virginia Bottomley, Pamela Kirby, Brian Larcombe and Richard De Schutter, all of whom are independent Non-executive Directors and served throughout the year.

From time to time, other members of the Board attended meetings of the Remuneration Committee by invitation. In addition, the meetings are also attended by Susan Swabey, Company Secretary, Helen Maye, Chief Human Resources Officer and Bob Newcomb, SVP Global Rewards. Members of the Board and the Executive Team left any meeting at which their own remuneration was discussed.

During the year the Remuneration Committee met five times and agreed three matters by written resolution. Our main responsibilities are:

 

Determination of remuneration policy for Executive Directors and senior executives

 

Approval of individual remuneration packages for Executive Directors and Executive Officers at least annually and any major changes to individual packages throughout the year

 

Determination of the use of long-term incentive plans and oversee the use of shares in all executive and all-employee plans

 

Approval of appropriate performance measures for short-term and long-term incentive plans for Executive Directors and senior executives

 

Determination of pay-outs under short-term and long-term incentive plans for Executive Directors and senior executives

 

Approval of Directors’ Remuneration Report ensuring compliance with related governance provisions

 

Continuance of constructive engagement on remuneration issues with Shareholders

 

Consideration of remuneration policies and practices across the Group.

During the year, the Remuneration Committee received information and advice from Towers Watson, an independent executive remuneration consultancy firm appointed by the Remuneration Committee in 2011 following a full tender process. They provided advice on market trends and remuneration issues in general, attended Remuneration Committee meetings, assisted in the review of the Director’s Remuneration Report and in determining the third performance measure for the Performance Share Programme. The fees paid to Towers Watson for Remuneration Committee advice during 2013, charged on a time and expense basis, totalled £59,538. Towers Watson also provided other human resources and compensation advice to the Company for the level below the Board. Towers Watson comply with the Code of Conduct in relation to Executive Remuneration Consulting in the United Kingdom and the Remuneration Committee is satisfied that their advice is objective and independent.

Key activities of the Remuneration Committee in 2013 were:

 

Determination of remuneration packages and termination arrangement for certain Executive Officers

 

Development of revised reporting style on remuneration in line with the new reporting regulations

 

Reviewed Executive service contracts

 

Reviewed and revised the performance measures applying to our Performance Share Programme

 

Monitored the use of shares required for our employee share plans to ensure they remained within the dilution limits

 

Monitored adherence by executives to our shareholding guidelines

 

Approved the remuneration package for Roberto Quarta, our Chairman Elect

 

Reviewed and approved remuneration arrangements for various Executive Officers

 

Amended the terms of reference of the Remuneration Committee to reflect new reporting regulations

 

Met with key Shareholders to discuss remuneration matters.

The Implementation Report sets out both what we have paid our Directors in 2013 and what we intend to pay them in 2014.

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
74      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Single total figure on remuneration – Executive Directors

 

                   Fixed pay          Annual
variable pay
         Hybrid          Long-term variable pay         

Other items in the nature

of remuneration

        
Director   Base salary     Payment in
lieu of
pension
    Taxable
benefits
         Annual
Incentive
Plan – cash
        

Annual
Incentive

Plan – equity

         Performance
Share Plan
   

Share

Option Plan

         All-Employee
Share Plans
    One-off
awards
    Total  

Olivier Bohuon

Appointed 1 April 2011

  

  

                                                                                       
2013     $1,425,559        $427,668        $107,160            $1,793,584            $933,410            $0        $0                          $4,687,381   
2012     $1,394,190        $418,257        $482,815            $1,755,285            $906,224                                            $4,956,771   

Julie Brown

Appointed 4 February 2013

  

  

                                                                                       
2013     $708,450        $212,536        $22,510            $858,978            $390,800                              $5,684        $838,266        $3,037,224   

These figures have been calculated as follows:

Base salary: the actual salary receivable for the year.

Payment in lieu of pension: the value of the salary supplement paid by the Company in lieu of a pension.

Benefits: the gross value of all taxable benefits (or benefits that would be taxable in the UK) received in the year. Prior years are restated to reflect amounts not known at the date of signing the previous annual report.

Annual Incentive Plan – cash: the value of the cash incentive payable for performance in respect of the relevant financial year.

Annual Incentive Plan – equity: the value of the equity element awarded in respect of performance in the relevant financial year, but subject to an ongoing performance test as described on pages 66 and 67 of this report.

Performance Share Plan: the value* of shares vesting that were subject to performance over the three-year period ending on 31 December in the relevant financial year.

Share Option Plan: the embedded gain* of options vesting that were subject to performance over the three-year period ending on 31 December in the relevant financial year.

All-Employee Share Plans: the gain on the date of grant for SAYE awards (these are only subject to an employment condition and therefore the total value is captured in the year of grant), reflecting the 20% discount at which options are granted in the relevant financial year.

One-off awards: the total face value of shares awarded to Julie Brown on appointment in 2013 as described on pages 66 and 67 of this report (these awards are only subject to an employment condition and therefore the total value is captured in the year of award).

Total: the sum of the above elements.

 

* Awards and options granted in 2011 subject to a three-year performance period ending on 31 December 2013 have lapsed.

The amounts have been converted into US$ for ease of comparability using the exchange rates of £ to US$1.5632 and to US$1.3278.


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      75  

 

 

Base salary

With effect from 1 April in each year Executive Directors were paid the following base salaries:

 

     2012     2013

Olivier Bohuon

    1,050,000      €1,081,500

Julie Brown

    N/A      £500,000

In February 2014, we reviewed the base salaries of the Executive Directors, having considered general economic conditions and average salary increases across the rest of the Group, which have averaged at 2.8%. The Remuneration Committee has therefore agreed that the Executive Directors’ base salaries will increase by 2.8% with effect from 1 April 2014 to the following:

 

Olivier Bohuon

  1,111,782

Julie Brown

  £514,000

Payment in lieu of pension

In 2013, both Olivier Bohuon and Julie Brown received a salary supplement of 30% of their basic salary to apply towards their retirement savings, in lieu of membership of one of the Company’s pension schemes. The same arrangement will apply in 2014.

Benefits

In 2013, both Olivier Bohuon and Julie Brown received death in service cover of seven times basic salary, of which four times salary is payable as a lump sum with the balance used to provide for any spouse and dependant persons. They also received health cover for themselves and their families and a car allowance. Olivier Bohuon also received financial consultancy advice and assistance with travel costs between London and Paris. The same arrangements will apply in 2014. The following table summarises the value of benefits on an element-by-element basis in respect of 2012 and 2013.

 

     Olivier Bohuon      Adrian
Hennah
    

Julie Brown

     2012       2013         2012      2013

Health cover

    £16,870          £12,088(i)         £1,439       £1,130
Car and fuel allowance     18,486          €18,050            £21,524       £13,270
Financial consultancy advice     £33,751          €25,577                 

Travel costs

    £15,647          £19,407            N/A       N/A
Relocation costs     £226,893(ii)        £0            N/A       N/A

 

(i) Olivier Bohuon is a member of our international healthcare plan.
(ii) One-off relocation expense relating to relocating Olivier Bohuon from Paris to London. Prior years are restated to reflect amounts not known at the date of signing the previous annual report.

 

Annual Incentive Plan

During 2013, the Annual Incentive Plan for Executive Directors was based in the achievement of specific financial and business objectives as follows:

 

 

Financial objectives

 

 

 

 

 

 

70%

 

 

  

 

Revenue 30%

 

 

Trading profit 30%

 

 

Trading cash 10%

 

 

 

Business objectives

 

 

 

 

 

 

30%

 

 

  

 

R&D investment

 

 

Succession planning

 

 

Employee engagement

 

 

Compliance

 

 

Development of product portfolio (Olivier Bohuon only)

 

 

Shared services (Julie Brown only)

       

At the end of 2013, the Remuneration Committee conducted an assessment of each Executive Director against their financial and business objectives.

Over the period, revenue was $4,351m (ahead of target), trading profit was $987m (ahead of target) and trading cash flow $877m (between target and maximum).

The Board have considered whether it would be in the best interests of the Company and its Shareholders to disclose the precise targets agreed for each of the performance measures in 2013. The targets for each year are set within the context of the Group’s five-year plan, which is updated at least annually. If we were to disclose the precise targets for one year of the plan, this would give information to our competitors about our long-term plans, which they could use to compete against us, for example by re-timing the launch of new products or extension into new growth areas. This could be detrimental to our commercial performance both in 2014 and going forward. The Board has concluded that even though the actual results for 2013 are known and published, it would be commercially sensitive to disclose what the precise targets determined at the beginning of 2013 were.

The Remuneration Committee reviewed the performance of Olivier Bohuon and Julie Brown against their agreed business objectives for 2013. The Committee determined that Olivier Bohuon had an outstanding year. He led the Group strongly forward in both strategic and commercial terms, building and rebalancing the business through investments and acquisitions in areas of higher growth whilst delivering growth and Shareholder value. The Committee determined that Julie Brown also performed to a high standard in 2013. In her first year as Chief Financial Officer, Julie has strengthened the Group’s financial platform, processes and disciplines, introducing new frameworks and methodologies to support the sustained delivery of Smith & Nephew’s strategic priorities. It is not possible to disclose the precise personal targets set as a number of the measurements continue to apply into 2014 and would be commercially sensitive if known by our competitors. The Committee did highlight a number of their achievements as follows:

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
76      

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Commentary on 2013 performance

 

 

Acquisitions and R&D investment

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

  

Julie Brown

 

Significantly increased investment in organic R&D and, through successful M&A, further strengthened the Group’s business and product pipeline. More closely aligned R&D to growth opportunities including meeting the needs of emerging market customers. Increased the rate of innovation to support sustainable growth and maximise long-term value to Shareholders.    Delivered Capital Allocation Framework that ensures highly disciplined use of cash; enabling focused investment in key areas and balance sheet efficiency. Supported the completion of three emerging market deals over the year. Return on investment assessments established for R&D and Capital investments to ensure resources are allocated to areas that generate the best return for business.

 

Succession planning

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

  

Julie Brown

 

Succession plans refreshed for all Executive Officers and top talent identified, developed and retained through significant personal engagement across the Company.    Strengthened finance management team through providing stretching development opportunities for key individuals and placement of top talent. Completed comprehensive Finance Talent Review and established succession plans for all key finance leadership positions.

 

Employee engagement

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

  

Julie Brown

 

Delivered demonstrable improvements from implementation of 2012 Employee Survey actions and initiated Great places to Work in initial tranche of 12 countries.    Increased business knowledge, cross-functional alignment, empowerment and personal development across the finance function, ensured employees embrace objectives in context of Group strategy and pursue stretching goals.

 

Compliance

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

  

Julie Brown

 

Consistently demonstrated the highest personal ethics, held management to these same standards, and reinforced imperative in all employee communications.    Set the tone from the top with the highest personal standards and ensured timely and rigorous enactment of financial controls on all strategic plans, product development and acquisitions.

 

Development of product portfolio

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

  

Julie Brown

 

Delivered high cadence of new products including first portfolios for the emerging markets, major knee platform, Sports Medicine advances and 25 Advanced Wound Management launches.    Not applicable

 

Shared services

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

  

Julie Brown

 

Not applicable    Initiated a Finance Transformation Programme to consolidate shared services globally to leverage efficiency across the Group and strengthen KPI reporting.

 

 

The Remuneration Committee also considered whether to apply the multiplier to the annual incentive assessment of Olivier Bohuon and Julie Brown and agreed that no multiplier was appropriate in respect of 2013. In summary the performance of the Executive Directors against the targets set for 2013 was therefore as follows:

 

     Below
threshold
  Between
threshold
and target
    Between
target
and
maximum
    Above
maximum

Revenue (30%)

                ü       

Trading profit (30%)

                ü       

Trading cash (10%)

                ü       

Business objectives

(30%): Olivier Bohuon

                      ü

Business objectives

(30%): Julie Brown

                ü       

Multiplier (+/- 10%):

Olivier Bohuon

        N/A               

Multiplier (+/- 10%):

Julie Brown

        N/A               

In summary, as a result of the performance described above, the Remuneration Committee determined that the following awards be made under the Annual Incentive Plan in respect of performance in 2013:

 

Executive Director   Cash component           Equity component
     % of salary     Amount           % of salary      Amount

Olivier Bohuon

    125%        1,350,794             65%       702,975

Julie Brown

    110%        £549,500             50%       £250,000

As both Olivier Bohuon and Julie Brown achieved the targets set them in 2013, the first tranche of Equity Incentive Award made in 2013 and the second tranche of the Equity Incentive Award made in 2012 (to Olivier Bohuon only) will vest.

Annual Incentive PIan 2014

The Remuneration Committee has also reviewed the Annual Incentive Plan arrangements for 2014 and has determined that the following performance measures and weightings will apply to the financial objectives as in 2013. The business objectives for the Executive Directors for 2014 will therefore be as follows:

 

 

Financial objectives

 

            
     Olivier Bohuon      Julie Brown

Revenue 30%

    70%       70%

Trading profit 30%

    

Trading cash 10%

    

 

Business objectives

 

            
     Olivier Bohuon      Julie Brown

Reinvestment

    5%       10%

Business

    25%       20%

People

    

Customer

            
 


Table of Contents

 

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      77  

 

 

The Board has determined that the disclosure of performance targets at this time is commercially sensitive. As explained on page 75, these targets are determined within the context of a five-year plan and the disclosure of these targets could give information to our competitors about details of our strategy which would enable them to compete more effectively with us to the detriment of our performance.

For the financial performance measures, ‘Target’ is set at target performance as approved by the Board in the Budget for 2014. ‘Threshold’ and ‘Maximum’ are set at -/+ 3% from the target for revenue and trading profit measures and -/+ 10% for the cash flow measure.

Details of awards made under the Equity Incentive Programme

Details of conditional awards over shares, granted as part of the Annual Equity Incentive Programme to Executive Directors under the rules of the Global Share Plan 2010 in 2013 are shown below. The performance conditions and performance periods applying to these awards are detailed above.

 

Date granted   Number of shares
under award
   Date of vesting

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

7 March 2013

  82,423 ordinary shares   

1/3 on 7 March 2014,

1/3 on 7 March 2015 and

1/3 on 7 March 2016

No awards were made to Julie Brown under the Equity Incentive Programme in 2013, as she was not an employee in 2012 and did not participate in the programme in 2013. The exact awards granted in 2014 in respect of service in 2013 will be disclosed in the 2014 Annual Report.

Performance Share Programme – grants

Performance share awards in 2013 were made to Executive Directors under the Global Share Plan 2010 to a maximum value of 190% of salary (95% for target performance). Performance will be measured over the three financial years beginning in 2013 and will vest subject to performance and continued employment in 2016.

50% of the award will vest based on the Company’s Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance relative to a bespoke peer group of companies in the medical devices sector over a three-year period commencing 1 January 2013 as follows:

 

Relative TSR ranking   Award vesting as % of salary

Below median

  Nil

Median

  23.75%

Upper quartile

  95%

Awards will vest on a straight-line basis between these points. If the Company’s TSR performance is below median, none of this part of the award will vest.

The bespoke peer group for the 2013 awards comprises of the following companies: Arthrocare, Baxter, Becton Dickinson, Boston Scientific, CR Bard, Coloplast, Conmed, Covidien, Edwards LifeSciences, Medtronic, Nobel Biocare, Nuvasive, Orthofix, Stryker, St Jude Medical, Wright Medical and Zimmer.

The Group’s TSR performance and its performance relative to the comparator group is independently monitored and reported to the Remuneration Committee by Towers Watson. TSR is calculated in common currency using a three-month averaging period at the start and end of the performance period. The Committee has established protocols for dealing with companies that cease to be listed or merger and acquisition activity within the peer group.

The remaining 50% of the award is subject to cumulative free cash flow performance. Free cash flow is defined as net cash inflows from operating activities, less capital expenditure. Free cash flow is the most appropriate measure of cash flow performance because it relates to the cash generated to finance additional investment in business opportunities, debt repayments and distributions to Shareholders. This measure includes significant elements of operational and financial performance and helps to align Executive Director awards with shareholder value creation.

The 50% of the 2013 award subject to free cash flow performance will vest as follows:

 

Cumulative free cash flow   Award vesting as % of salary

Below $1.55bn

  Nil

$1.55bn

  23.75%

$1.78bn

  47.5%

$2.01bn or more

  95%

Performance Share Programme 2014

Performance share awards will be made in 2014 to Executive Directors under the Global Share Plan 2010 to a maximum value of 190% of salary (95% for target performance). Performance will be measured over the three financial years beginning in 2014 and will vest subject to performance and continued employment in 2017. Vesting will be subject to three performance measures. 50% of the award will be subject to free cash flow performance, 25% to revenue in Emerging & International Markets and 25% to TSR.

Free cash flow is defined as net cash inflows from operating activities, less capital expenditure. Free cash flow is the most appropriate measure of cash flow performance because it relates to the cash generated to finance additional investment in business opportunities, debt repayments and distributions to Shareholders. This measure includes significant elements of operational and financial performance and helps to align Executive Director awards with Shareholder value creation.

The 50% of the award that will be subject to free cash flow performance will vest as follows:

 

Cumulative free cash flow   Award vesting as % of salary

Below $1.64bn

  Nil

$1.64bn

  23.75%

$1.88bn

  47.5%

$2.12bn or more

  95%

Awards will vest on a straight-line basis between these points.

Revenue in Emerging & International Markets is defined as cumulative revenue over a three-year period commencing 1 January 2014 from our Emerging & International Markets.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
78      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

The 25% of the award that will be subject to revenue in Emerging & International Market performance will vest as follows:

 

Revenue in Emerging &

International Markets

  Award vesting as % of salary

Below Threshold

  Nil

Threshold

  11.875%

Target

  23.750%

Maximum or above

  47.500%

It is not possible to disclose precise targets for revenue growth in Emerging & International Markets, as this will give commercially sensitive information to our competitors concerning our growth plans in Emerging & International Markets, which they could use against us to launch new products and enter new markets. This would be detrimental to our business in the Emerging & International Markets, which are key to our success overall. ‘Target’ is set at target cumulative revenue from Emerging & International Markets in the corporate plan approved by the Board for the three years commencing 1 January 2014. ‘Threshold’ and ‘Maximum’ are set at -/+ 15% from target.

25% of the award will vest based on the Company’s Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance relative to a bespoke peer group of companies in the medical devices sector over a three-year period commencing 1 January 2014 as follows:

 

Relative TSR ranking

  Award vesting as % of salary

Below median

  Nil

Median

  11.875%

Upper quartile

  47.500%

Awards will vest on a straight line basis between these points. If the Company’s TSR performance is below median, none of this part of the award will vest.

The bespoke peer group for the 2014 awards comprises of the following companies: Arthrocare, Baxter, Becton Dickinson, Boston Scientific, CR Bard, Coloplast, Conmed, Covidien, Edwards LifeSciences, Medtronic, Nobel Biocare, Nuvasive, Orthofix, Stryker, St Jude Medical, Wright Medical and Zimmer.

The Group’s TSR performance and its performance relative to the comparator group is independently monitored and reported to the Remuneration Committee by Towers Watson. TSR is calculated in common currency using a three-month averaging period at the start and end of the performance period. The Committee has established protocols for dealing with companies that cease to be listed or merger and acquisition activity within the peer group.

 

Vesting of share options and awards made in 2010

In 2013, the Remuneration Committee also reviewed the vesting of conditional awards made to Executive Directors under the 2004 Performance Share Plan and share options granted under the 2004 Executive Share Option Plan in 2010.

Vesting of the conditional share awards made in 2010 was linked to adjusted EPS (‘EPSA’) growth, and the number of shares could then be increased subject to TSR performance relative to the major companies in the medical devices industry. EPSA growth over the three years ended 31 December 2012 was 18.7% (adjusted for the Bioventus transaction) against the compounded market growth rate of 11.7%. Over the same period, the Company was ranked 10th out of 19 companies in the medical devices comparator group, which meant that the multiplier of one was applied to the number of shares vesting under the EPSA target.

The awards made to Adrian Hennah in 2010 lapsed on his leaving the Company. The award made in 2010 to David Illingworth, a former Executive Director vested on 1 March 2013 at 26%. The current Executive Directors did not receive awards in 2010, which was prior to their appointments to the Board at the Company.

Vesting of the share options were subject to TSR performance relative to the major companies in the medical devices industry. Over the three years ended 31 December 2012, the Company was ranked 10th out of 19 companies in the medical devices comparator group, which meant that the options vested at 33%. The share option granted in 2010 to Adrian Hennah lapsed on his leaving the Company. The share option granted in 2010 to David Illingworth, a former Executive Director, vested on 9 September 2013.

Vesting of share options and awards made in 2011

Since the end of the year, the Remuneration Committee has reviewed the vesting of conditional awards made to Executive Directors under the 2004 Performance Share Plan and share options granted under the 2004 Executive Share Option Plan in 2011.

Vesting of the conditional awards made in 2011 was linked to EPSA growth, and the number of shares could then be increased subject to TSR performance relative to the major companies in the medical devices industry. EPSA growth over the three years ended 31 December 2013 was 4%. This was well below the threshold for awards to vest. Over the same period, the Company was ranked 12th out of 19 companies in the medical devices comparator group, which meant that no multiplier was applied to the number of shares vesting under the EPSA target. The awards made to Adrian Hennah in 2011 lapsed on his leaving the Company. The award made in 2011 to Olivier Bohuon has therefore lapsed.

Vesting of the share options were subject to TSR performance relative to the major companies in the medical devices industry. Over the three years ended 31 December 2013, the Company was ranked 12th out of 19 companies in the medical devices comparator group, which meant that the options lapsed. The share option granted to Adrian Hennah in 2011 lapsed on his leaving the Company. The share option granted in 2011 to Olivier Bohuon has therefore lapsed.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      79  

 

 

Remuneration arrangements for Julie Brown

On appointment as Chief Financial Officer and Director on 4 February 2013, Julie Brown’s salary was set at £500,000 with her other benefits and ongoing incentive opportunities in line with the Smith & Nephew remuneration policy.

In addition to participation in the standard Smith & Nephew incentive plans, the Remuneration Committee made a one-off award over 75,000 shares which were valued at £536,250 on the date of grant. These shares will vest in three equal tranches in February 2014, 2015 and 2016 subject to continued employment. In making this award the Committee was informed by the value of share awards that Julie Brown was forfeiting at her previous employer which had a minimum value of £505,000 and a maximum value of £1,434,000 (excluding any share price movement). The Remuneration Committee felt it was appropriate to align Julie Brown’s interests with those of our Shareholders immediately and to take into account these awards forfeited on joining Smith & Nephew.

Summary of scheme interests awarded during the financial year

 

          Olivier Bohuon             Julie Brown
Basis on which award is made   Number of shares   Face value       Number of shares   Face value
Annual Equity Incentive Award (see pages 66 and 67)                

 

65% base salary at maximum

  82,423   682,500      

 

50% base salary at target

         
Performance Share Award (see pages 66 and 67)                

 

190% base salary at maximum

  240,928   1,995,000     132,866   £950,000

 

95% base salary at target

  120,464   997,500     66,433   £475,000
Share award granted on joining Company in compensation (see pages 66 and 67)

 

Compensation for shares forfeited at former employer

          75,000   £536,250

Please see policy table on pages 66 and 67 for details of how the above plans operate. The number of shares is calculated using the closing share price on the day before the grant which for the awards granted on 7 March 2013 was £7.15.

Details of awards made under the Performance Share Programme

Details of conditional awards over shares, granted to Executive Directors subject to performance conditions are shown below. These awards were granted under the 2004 Performance Share Plan in 2011 and under the Global Share Plan 2010 in 2012 and 2013. The performance conditions and performance periods applying to these awards are detailed on pages 66 and 67.

 

Director   Date granted             Number of ordinary  shares under award                           Date of vesting

Olivier Bohuon

  7 September 2011 (i)   227,547      7 September 2014
  8 March 2012   267,304      8 March 2015
    7 March 2013   240,928      7 March 2016
Julie Brown   7 March 2013   132,866      7 March 2016

 

(i) On 6 February 2014 100% of the award granted to Olivier Bohoun lapsed following completion of the performance period.

Details of option grants under the All-Employee ShareSave Plan

Details of options held by Directors are shown below. These options were granted under the Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2012).

 

Director   Date granted    

Number of shares

under option

    Date of vesting     Exercise period     Option price

Julie Brown

    17 September 2013        2,400 ordinary shares        1 November 2018       
 
1 November 2018 to
30 April 2019
  
  
  £6.25

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
80      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Details of one-off awards

Details of awards granted to Executive Directors on joining to Company to compensate them for shares forfeited on leaving their former companies are shown below. These awards are made under Listing Rule 9. There are no performance conditions attaching to these shares other than continued service.

 

Director   Date granted  

 

Number of shares under award

  Date of vesting

 

Olivier Bohuon

 

 

 

1 April 2011

 

 

 

 

66,666 ordinary shares

 

 

 

1 April 2014

 

 

 

Julie Brown

 

 

 

7 March 2013

 

 

 

25,000 ordinary shares

 

25,000 ordinary shares

 

 

 

 

4 February 2015

 

4 February 2016

Single total figure on remuneration – Chairman and Non-executive Directors

 

Director   Basic annual fee (i)        

Senior Independent

Director/Committee

Chairman fee

        Intercontinental travel fee        

Total

      2012           2013        2012         2013        2012    2013        2012    2013
Sir John Buchanan     £400,000           £420,000        n/a         n/a        £7,000    £0        £407,000    £420,000
Ian Barlow     £63,000           £66,150        £15,000         £15,000        £7,000    £7,000        £85,000    £88,150
Baroness Bottomley     £45,150           £66,150        n/a         n/a        £7,000    £7,000        £52,150    £73,150
Michael Friedman (ii)     n/a           $126,000        n/a         n/a        n/a    $28,000        n/a    $154,000
Pamela Kirby     £63,000           £66,150        £15,000         £15,000        £7,000    £7,000        £85,000    £88,150
Brian Larcombe     £63,000           £66,150        n/a         n/a        £7,000    £7,000        £70,000    £73,150
Joseph Papa     $120,000           $126,000        $27,000         $27,000        $42,000    $28,000        $189,000    $181,000
Ajay Piramal     £63,000           £66,150        n/a         n/a        £10,500    £10,500        £73,500    £76,650
Roberto Quarta (iii)     n/a           £4,846        n/a         n/a        n/a    n/a        n/a    £4,846
Richard De Schutter     $120,000           $126,000        $27,000         $27,000        $42,000    $35,000        $189,000    $188,000

 

(i) The basic annual fee includes shares purchased for the Chairman and Non-executive Directors in lieu of part of their annual fees details of which can be found in the table on page 71.
(ii) Appointed 11 April 2013.
(iii) Appointed 4 December 2013.
(iv) Total Executive and Non-executive Directors’ emoluments for 2013 amounted to $7,368,000 (2012 – $7,838,000).


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      81  

 

 

Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration compared to employees generally

The percentage change in the remuneration of the Chief Executive Officer between 2012 and 2013 compared to that of all employees generally is as follows:

 

                      Base salary                    Benefits                 Annual cash bonus
    % change       % change           % change
     2013       2013           2013
Chief Executive Officer   3.0     -77.8       2.2
Average for all employees*   3.0       N/A           N/A

 

* The average cost of wages and salaries for employees generally rose by 6.86% in 2013 (see Notes 2.4 and 3.1 of the Notes to the Group accounts). Figures for annual cash bonuses are included in the numbers.

Payments made to past Directors

David Illingworth received $230,531 following the vesting of his 2010 Performance Share award on 1 March 2013 and $83,384 following the exercise of his 2010 option which vested on 9 September 2013. No other payments have been made in 2013 to former Directors of the Company.

Payments for loss of office

No payments were made in respect of a Director’s loss of office in 2013.

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
82      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Directors’ interests in ordinary shares

Beneficial interests of the Executive Directors in the ordinary shares of the Company are as follows:

 

     Olivier Bohuon        Julie Brown
    

1 January 2013 (or date
of appointment) if later

 

 

31 December 2013
(or date of retirement)
if earlier

 

    

24 February 2014 (i)

 

      

1 January 2013
(or date of

appointment) if later

 

    

31 December 2013

(or date of retirement)
if earlier

 

    

24 February 2014 (i)

 

Ordinary shares

 

37,015

 

   

 

111,238

 

  

 

  

111,238 (iii)

 

       

 

0

 

  

 

    

 

0

 

  

 

  

25,000 (iv)

 

Share options (v)

 

151,698

 

   

 

151,698

 

  

 

  

0

 

       

 

0

 

  

 

    

 

2,400

 

  

 

  

2,400

 

Performance Share Awards (ii)

 

494,851

 

   

 

735,779

 

  

 

  

508,232

 

       

 

0

 

  

 

    

 

132,866

 

  

 

  

132,866

 

Equity Incentive Awards (ii)

 

91,446

 

   

 

143,387

 

  

 

  

143,387

 

       

 

0

 

  

 

    

 

0

 

  

 

  

0

 

Other awards

 

133,333

 

   

 

66,666

 

  

 

  

66,666

 

       

 

0

 

  

 

    

 

75,000

 

  

 

  

50,000

 

 

(i) The latest practicable date for this Annual Report.
(ii) These share awards are subject to further performance conditions before they may vest, as detailed on pages 66 and 67.
(iii) The ordinary shares held by Olivier Bohuon on 24 February 2014 represents 120% of his base annual salary.
(iv) The ordinary shares held by Julie Brown on 24 February 2014 represents 48% of her base annual salary.
(v) This option was granted under the Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2012).

In addition, Olivier Bohuon holds 50,000 deferred shares. Following the redenomination of ordinary shares into US dollars on 23 January 2006, the Company issued 50,000 deferred shares. These shares are normally held by the Chief Executive Officer and are not listed on any Stock Exchange and have extremely limited rights attached to them.

Beneficial interests of the Chairman and Non-executive Directors in the ordinary shares of the Company are as follows:

 

Director  

1 January 2013 (or date

of appointment) if later

 

   

31 December 2013

(or date of retirement)

if earlier

 

    

24 February 2014 (i)

 

    

Shareholding as % of (annual fee
for Non-executive Directors) (ii)

 

Sir John Buchanan

 

   

 

162,695

 

  

 

   

 

166,337

 

  

 

    

 

166,337

 

  

 

  

380.2

 

Ian Barlow

 

   

 

18,000

 

  

 

   

 

18,232

 

  

 

    

 

18,232

 

  

 

  

264.6

 

Baroness Bottomley

 

   

 

17,500

 

  

 

   

 

17,820

 

  

 

    

 

17,820

 

  

 

  

258.6

 

Michael Friedman

 

   

 

0

 

  

 

   

 

8,624

 

  

 

    

 

8,624

 

  

 

  

109.5

 

Pamela Kirby

 

   

 

15,000

 

  

 

   

 

15,232

 

  

 

    

 

15,232

 

  

 

  

221.1

 

Brian Larcombe

 

   

 

40,000

 

  

 

   

 

40,212

 

  

 

    

 

40,212

 

  

 

  

583.6

 

Joseph Papa

 

   

 

12,500

 

  

 

   

 

12,799

 

  

 

    

 

12,799

 

  

 

  

162.5

 

Ajay Piramal

 

   

 

0

 

  

 

   

 

240

 

  

 

    

 

240

 

  

 

  

3.5

 

Roberto Quarta

 

   

 

0

 

  

 

   

 

0

 

  

 

    

 

0

 

  

 

  

0

 

Richard De Schutter

 

   

 

220,000

 

  

 

   

 

220,299

 

  

 

    

 

220,299

 

  

 

  

1527.6

 

 

(i) The latest practicable date for this Annual Report.
(ii) Calculated using the closing share price of 960p per ordinary shares and $80.00 per ADS on 24 February 2014, and an exchange rate of £1/$1.6631.
(iii) Michael Friedman, Joseph Papa and Richard De Schutter hold some of their shares in the form of ADS.

The total holdings of the Directors represents less than 1% of the ordinary share capital of the Company.

The register of Directors’ interests, which is open to inspection at the Company’s registered office, contains full details of Directors’ shareholdings.


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      83

 

 

Relative importance of spend on pay

The following table sets out the total amounts spent in 2013 and 2012 on remuneration, the attributable profit for each year and the dividends declared and paid in each year:

 

     

 

For the year to 31 December 2013

 

  

 

      

 

For the year to 31 December 2012

 

  

 

      

 

% change

 

  

 

Attributable profit for the year

 

   

 

$556m

 

  

 

      

 

$721m(i)

 

  

 

      

 

-22.88

 

  

 

Dividends paid during the year

 

   

 

$239m

 

  

 

      

 

$186m

 

  

 

      

 

28.49

 

  

 

Share buyback

 

   

 

$226m

 

  

 

      

 

N/A

 

  

 

      

 

N/A

 

  

 

Total Group spend on remuneration

 

   

 

$998m

 

  

 

      

 

$886m

 

  

 

      

 

12.64

 

  

 

 

(i) Attributable profit for 2012 has been restated following the adoption of the revised IAS 19 Employee Benefit standard. See Note 1 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

Total Shareholder Return

A graph of the Company’s TSR performance compared to that of the FTSE100 index is shown below in accordance with Schedule 8 to the Regulations.

 

 

LOGO

However, as we compare the Company’s performance to a tailored sector peer group of medical devices companies (see page 77), when considering TSR performance in the context of the 2004 Performance Share Plan and the Global Share Plan 2010, we feel that the following graph showing the TSR performance of this peer group is also of interest.

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
84      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

Directors’ remuneration report continued

Table of historic data

The following table details information about the pay of the Chief Executive Officer in the previous five years.

 

                         Long-term incentive vesting rates  against
maximum opportunity
Year      Chief Executive Officer   Single figure of
total remuneration
  

Annual cash incentive
payout against maximum

%

  

Performance
shares

%

  

Options

%

2013      Olivier Bohuon   $4,687,381    84    N/A    N/A
2012      Olivier Bohuon   $4,956,771    84    N/A    N/A
2011      Olivier Bohuon (i)(iii)   $7,442,191    68    N/A    N/A
2011      David Illingworth (ii)   $3,595,787    37    27    27
2010      David Illingworth   $4,060,707    57    70    61
2009      David Illingworth   $4,406,485    59    46    59

 

(i) Appointed Chief Executive Officer on 1 April 2011.
(ii) Resigned as Chief Executive Officer on 1 April 2011.
(iii) Includes recruitment award of 1,400,000 cash and a share award over 200,000 shares valued at 1,410,000 on grant.
(iv) Prior years are restated to reflect amounts not known at the date of signing the previous annual report.

 

Implementation of remuneration policy in 2014

The Remuneration Committee proposes to make no changes to the way that the remuneration policy is implemented in 2014 from how it was implemented in 2013, other than increasing base salaries in line with the salary increases across the Group as explained on page 75 and setting new targets for the Annual Incentive Plan and the Performance Share Programme as explained on page 77 to 78.

Statement of voting at Annual General Meeting held in 2013

At the Annual General Meeting held on 11 April 2013, votes cast by proxy and at the meeting and votes withheld in respect of the Directors’ remuneration were as follows:

 

Resolution

 

 

Votes for

 

   

% for

 

    

Votes against

 

    

% against Total votes validly cast

 

    

Votes withheld

 

Approval of the Directors’

remuneration report

 

   

 

613,386,066

 

  

 

   

 

96.5

 

  

 

    

 

22,233,539

 

  

 

    

 

        3.5

 

  

 

    

 

635,619,605

 

  

 

  

14,465,350

 

In future years, voting information will be provided in respect of the votes in respect of the remuneration policy report and the Annual Report on Remuneration (the Implementation Report).

In 2013, Joseph Papa, the Chairman of the Remuneration Committee, met with Shareholders holding 20% of the share capital to discuss remuneration policies and plans. In addition, we contacted a further three Shareholders representing 8% of the share capital summarising the discussions held with the Shareholders we met. Although our remuneration policies and practices have not changed materially since 2012, we wanted to discuss the impact of the new reporting regulations with our investors to ensure that we addressing the issues they wanted us to. We had some useful discussions, as a result of which, we have re-worded some sections to improve clarity. The Shareholders we met were broadly supportive of our remuneration arrangements.


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

      85  

 

 

Other remuneration matters

Senior Management remuneration

The Group’s administrative, supervisory and management body (‘the Senior Management’) is comprised, for US reporting purposes, of Executive Directors and Executive Officers. Details of the current Executive Directors and Executive Officers are given on pages 44 to 47.

In respect of the financial year 2013, the total compensation (excluding pension emoluments but including cash payments under the performance-related incentive plans) paid to the Senior Management for the year was $13,534,000 (2012 – $15,249,000, 2011 – $17,403,000), the total compensation for loss of office was $Nil (2012 – $Nil, 2011 – $1,161,000), the aggregate increase in accrued pension scheme benefits was $257,000 (2012 – increase of $229,000, 2011 – increase of $387,000) and the aggregate amounts provided for under the supplementary schemes was $414,000 (2012 – $537,000, 2011 – $711,000).

During 2013, Senior Management were granted equity incentive awards over 263,538 shares, performance share awards over 747,828 shares and conditional share awards over 140,000 shares under the Global Share Plan 2010 and options over 2,688 shares under the Employee ShareSave Plans. As of 24 February 2014, the Senior Management (10 persons) owned 251,283 shares and 55,904 ADSs, constituting less than 0.1% of the issued share capital of the Company. Senior Management as at this date also held options to purchase 557,858 shares, conditional share awards over 223,466 shares, equity incentive awards over 428,538 shares, performance shares awards over 1,300,234 shares awarded under the Global Share Plan 2010; and awards over 4,262 shares and 1,947 ADSs under the Deferred Bonus Plan.

 

Dilution headroom

The Remuneration Committee ensures that at all times the number of new shares which may be issued under any share based plans, including all-employee plans, does not exceed 10% of the Company’s issued share capital over any rolling 10-year period (of which up to 5% may be issued to satisfy awards under the Company’s discretionary plans). The Company monitors headroom closely when granting awards over shares, taking into account the number of options or shares that might be expected to lapse be forfeited before vesting or exercise. In the event that insufficient new shares are available there are processes in place to purchase shares in the market to satisfy vesting awards and to net-settle option exercises.

Over the previous 10 years (2004 to 2013), the number of new shares issued under our share plans has been as follows:

 

All-employee share plans  

8,028,215 (0.90% of issued share capital

as at 24 February 2014)

Discretionary share plans  

36,627,154 (4.10% of issued share capital

as at 24 February 2014)

By order of the Board, on 26 February 2014

 

LOGO

Joseph Papa

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

      87

 

 

 

 

 

Financial statements

& other information

 

 

Accounts and other information

 

 

Directors’ responsibilities for the accounts

 

  88

Independent auditor’s US reports

 

  91

Independent auditor’s UK report

 

  92

Group accounts

 

  94

Notes to the Group accounts

 

  101

Independent auditor’s report for the Company

 

  150

Company accounts

 

  151

Notes to the Company accounts

 

  152

Group information

 

  155

Other financial information

 

  159

Information for shareholders

 

  168

 

 

 

We are responsive to the needs of our customers

and deliver quality and value, creating confidence

in our performance .

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
88      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Directors’ responsibilities for the accounts

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Group and Company accounts in accordance with applicable UK law and regulations. As a consequence of the Company’s ordinary shares being traded on the New York Stock Exchange (in the form of American Depositary Shares) the Directors are responsible for the preparation and filing of an annual report on Form 20-F with the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

The Directors are required to prepare Group accounts for each financial year, in accordance with the International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’) as adopted by the European Union which present fairly the financial position of the Group and the financial performance and cash flows of the Group for that period. In preparing those Group accounts, the Directors are required to:

 

select suitable accounting policies in accordance with IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors and then apply them consistently;

 

present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information;

 

provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specific requirements in IFRS is insufficient to enable users to understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the Group’s financial position and financial performance; and

 

state that the Group has complied with IFRS, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the accounts.

 

Under UK law the Directors have elected to prepare the Company accounts in accordance with UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (UK Accounting Standards and applicable law), which are required by law to give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Company and of the profit or loss of the Company for that period. In preparing the Company accounts, the Directors are required to:

 

select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

 

make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent;

 

state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the accounts; and

 

prepare the accounts on a going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Company will continue in business.

The Directors confirm that they have complied with the above requirements in preparing the accounts.

The Directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records that disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and the Company and enable them to ensure that the accounts comply with the Companies Act 2006 and, in the case of the Group accounts, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the Group and the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Group’s website. It should be noted that information published on the internet is accessible in many countries with different legal requirements. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of accounts may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

      89  

 

 

Fair, Balanced and Understandable

As required by the UK Corporate Governance Code, the Directors confirm that they consider that the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s performance, business model and strategy. When arriving at this conclusion the Board was assisted by a number of processes including:

 

The Annual Report is drafted and comprehensively reviewed by appropriate senior management with overall co-ordination by the Head of Financial Reporting;

 

An extensive verification process is undertaken to ensure factual accuracy, with third party review by legal advisers; and

 

The final draft is reviewed by the Audit Committee prior to consideration by the Board.

Directors’ responsibility statement pursuant to disclosure and transparency Rule 4

The Directors confirm that, to the best of each person’s knowledge:

 

the Group accounts in this report, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the European Union and those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Group taken as a whole;

 

the Company accounts in this report, which have been prepared in accordance with UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice and the Companies Act 2006, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Company; and

 

the ‘Financial review and principal risks’ section and commentary on pages 36 to 41 contained in the accounts includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the financial position of the Company and the Group taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

 

Going concern

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in the ‘Financial review and principal risks’ section on pages 36 to 41. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described under ‘Commentary on the Group cash flow statement’ section set out on page 99.

In addition, the Notes to the Group accounts include the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposure to credit risk and liquidity risk.

The Group has considerable financial resources and its customers and suppliers are diversified across different geographic areas. As a consequence, the directors believe that the Group is well placed to manage its business risk successfully despite the on-going uncertain economic outlook.

The directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Thus they continue to adopt the going concern basis for accounting in preparing the annual financial statements.

Management also believes that the Group has sufficient working capital for its present requirements.

Directors’ Report

The Directors’ Report has been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

By order of the Board, 26 February 2014

 

LOGO

Susan Swabey

Company Secretary

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
90      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Critical accounting policies

The Group prepares its consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB and IFRS as adopted by the EU, the application of which often requires judgements to be made by management when formulating the Group’s financial position and results. Under IFRS, the Directors are required to adopt those accounting policies most appropriate to the Group’s circumstances for the purpose of presenting fairly the Group’s financial position, financial performance and cash flows.

In determining and applying accounting policies, judgement is often required in respect of items where the choice of specific policy, accounting estimate or assumption to be followed could materially affect the reported results or net asset position of the Group; it may later be determined that a different choice would have been more appropriate.

The Group’s significant accounting policies are set out in Notes 1 to 23 of the Notes to the Group accounts. Of those, the policies which require the most use of management’s judgement are as follows:

Inventories

A feature of the Orthopaedic Reconstruction and Trauma & Extremities franchises (whose finished goods inventory makes up approximately 79% of the Group total finished goods inventory) is the high level of product inventory required, some of which is located at customer premises and is available for customers’ immediate use. Complete sets of products, including large and small sizes, have to be made available in this way. These sizes are used less frequently than standard sizes and towards the end of the product life cycle are inevitably in excess of requirements. Adjustments to carrying value are therefore required to be made to orthopaedic inventory to anticipate this situation. These adjustments are calculated in accordance with a formula based on levels of inventory compared with historical usage. This formula is applied on an individual product line basis and is first applied when a product group has been on the market for two years. This method of calculation is considered appropriate based on experience, but it does involve management judgements on customer demand, effectiveness of inventory deployment, length of product lives, phase-out of old products and efficiency of manufacturing planning systems.

Impairment

In carrying out impairment reviews of goodwill, intangible assets and property, plant and equipment, a number of significant assumptions have to be made when preparing cash flow projections. These include the future rate of market growth, discount rates, the market demand for the products acquired, the future profitability of acquired businesses or products, levels of reimbursement and success in obtaining regulatory approvals. If actual results should differ or changes in expectations arise, impairment charges may be required which would adversely impact operating results.

 

 

 

 

Retirement benefits

A number of key judgements have to be made in calculating the fair value of the Group’s defined benefit pension plans. These assumptions impact the balance sheet liability, operating profit and other finance income/costs. The most critical assumptions are the discount rate and mortality assumptions to be applied to future pension plan liabilities. For example, as of 31 December 2013, a 0.5% increase in discount rate would have reduced the combined UK and US pension plan deficit by $112m whilst a 0.5% decrease would have increased the combined deficit by $123m. A 0.5% increase in discount rate would have increased profit before taxation by $6m whilst a 0.5% decrease would have decreased it by $6m. A one-year increase in the assumed life expectancy of the average 60 year old male pension plan member in both the UK and US would have increased the combined deficit by $42m. In making these judgements, management takes into account the advice of professional external actuaries and benchmarks its assumptions against external data.

The discount rate is determined by reference to market yields on high quality corporate bonds, with currency and term consistent with those of the liabilities. In particular for the UK and US, the discount rate is derived by reference to an AA yield curve derived by the Group’s actuarial advisers.

See Note 18 of the Notes to the Group accounts for a summary of how the assumptions selected in the last five years have compared with actual results.

Contingencies and provisions

The recognition of provisions for legal disputes is subject to a significant degree of estimation. Provision is made for loss contingencies when it is considered probable that an adverse outcome will occur and the amount of the loss can be reasonably estimated. In making its estimates, management takes into account the advice of internal and external legal counsel. Provisions are reviewed regularly and amounts updated where necessary to reflect developments in the disputes. The ultimate liability may differ from the amount provided depending on the outcome of court proceedings and settlement negotiations or if investigations bring to light new facts.

The Group operates in numerous tax jurisdictions around the world. Although it is Group policy to submit its tax returns to the relevant tax authorities as promptly as possible, at any given time the Group has unagreed years outstanding and is involved in disputes and tax audits. Significant issues may take several years to resolve. In estimating the probability and amount of any tax charge, management takes into account the views of internal and external advisers and updates the amount of provision whenever necessary. The ultimate tax liability may differ from the amount provided depending on interpretations of tax law, settlement negotiations or changes in legislation.

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

      91  

 

Independent auditor’s US reports

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm to the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Smith & Nephew plc

We have audited the accompanying Group balance sheets of Smith & Nephew plc as of 31 December 2013 and 2012, and the related Group income statements, Group statements of comprehensive income, Group cash flow statements and Group statements of changes in equity for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2013. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Smith & Nephew plc at 31 December 2013 and 2012, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2013, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), Smith & Nephew plc’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2013, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission (1992 framework) and our report dated 26 February 2014 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.

Ernst & Young LLP

London, England

26 February 2014

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm to the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Smith & Nephew plc

We have audited Smith & Nephew plc’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2013, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission (1992 framework), (the COSO criteria). Smith & Nephew plc’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting included in the accompanying ‘Evaluation of Internal Control Procedures’. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, Smith & Nephew plc maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2013, based on the COSO criteria.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the Group balance sheets of Smith & Nephew plc as of 31 December 2013 and 2012, and the related Group income statements, Group statements of comprehensive income, Group cash flow statements and Group statements of changes in equity for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2013 of Smith & Nephew plc and our report dated 26 February 2014 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.

Ernst & Young LLP

London, England

26 February 2014

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
92      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Independent auditor’s UK report

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

This page has been left blank as the independent auditor’s UK report does not form part of Smith & Nephew’s Annual Report Form 20-F as filed with the SEC.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    93

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

This page has been left blank as the independent auditor’s UK report does not form part of Smith & Nephew’s Annual Report Form 20-F as filed with the SEC.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
94      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Group income statement

 

    

Notes

   

Year ended
        31 December
2013

$ million

   

Year ended
        31 December
2012

Restated(i)

$ million

   

Year ended

        31 December

2011

Restated(i)

$ million

 

Revenue

    2        4,351        4,137        4,270   

Cost of goods sold

            (1,100     (1,070     (1,140

Gross profit

      3,251        3,067        3,130   

Selling, general and administrative expenses

    3        (2,210     (2,050     (2,101

Research and development expenses

    3        (231     (171     (167

Operating profit

    2 & 3        810        846        862   

Interest receivable

    4        14        11        4   

Interest payable

    4        (10     (9     (12

Other finance costs

    4        (11     (11     (13

Share of results of associates

    11        (1     4          

Profit on disposal of net assets held for sale

    21               251          

Profit before taxation

      802        1,092        841   

Taxation

    5        (246     (371     (266

Attributable profit for the year (ii)

            556        721        575   

Earnings per ordinary share (ii)

    6         

Basic

      61.7¢        80.4¢        64.5¢   

Diluted

            61.4¢        80.0¢        64.2¢   

Group statement of comprehensive income

 

    

Notes

   

Year ended
        31 December
2013

$ million

   

Year ended
        31 December
2012

Restated(i)

$ million

   

Year ended

        31 December

2011

Restated(i)

$ million

 

Attributable profit for the year (ii)

      556        721        575   

Other comprehensive income:

       

Items that will not be reclassified to income statement

       

Actuarial gains/(losses) on retirement benefit obligations

    18        12        (5     (63

Taxation on other comprehensive income

    5        (16     20        24   

Total items that will not be reclassified to income statement

      (4     15        (39

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to income statement

       

Cash flow hedges – interest rate swaps

       

– losses arising in the year

                    (1

– losses transferred to income statement for the year

                    1   

Cash flow hedges – forward foreign exchange contracts

       

– gains/(losses) arising in the year

      8        (1     1   

– (gains)/losses transferred to inventories for the year

      (3     (6     13   

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

      (6     36        (32

Exchange on borrowings classified as net investment hedges

                   1        (4

Total items that may be reclassified subsequently to income statement

            (1     30        (22

Other comprehensive (expense)/income for the year, net of taxation

            (5     45        (61

Total comprehensive income for the year (ii)

            551        766        514   

 

(i) Restated for the adoption of the revised IAS 19 Employee Benefits standard , see Note 1.
(ii) Attributable to equity holders of the Company and wholly derived from continuing operations.

The Notes on pages 101 to 149 are an integral part of these accounts.

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    95

 

 

Commentary on the Group income statement and Group statement of comprehensive income

 

Revenue

Group revenue increased by $214m (5% on a reported basis), from $4,137m in 2012 to $4,351m in 2013. The underlying increase is 4% after adjusting for the net impact of 2% on the Healthpoint acquisition and Clinical Therapies disposal and 1% attributable to the unfavourable impact of currency movements.

Cost of goods sold

Cost of goods sold increased by $30m (3% on a reported basis) from $1,070m in 2012 to $1,100m in 2013. The underlying movement is 2% after adjusting for the net impact of 2% on the Healthpoint acquisition and Clinical Therapies disposal and 1% attributable to the favourable impact of currency movements. The movement in underlying costs of goods sold of 2% is largely attributable to the increase in underlying trading.

During 2013, $12m of restructuring and rationalisation expenses (2012 - $3m) and $5m of acquisition related costs (2012 - $nil) were charged to cost of goods sold.

Selling, general and administrative expenses

Selling, general and administrative expenses increased by $160m (8% on a reported basis) from $2,050m in 2012 to $2,210m in 2013. The underlying movement is 6% after adjusting for the net impact of 3% on the Healthpoint acquisition and Clinical Therapies disposal and 1% attributable to the favourable impact of currency movements.

The underlying increase of 6% is due to the continuing investment in Emerging & International Markets, promotion of new products in ASD and AWM and the underlying increase in trading.

In 2013, administrative expenses included $64m of amortisation of other intangible assets (2012 – $51m), $46m of restructuring and rationalisation expenses (2012 – $62m), an amount of $88m relating to amortisation of acquisition intangibles (2012 – $43m) and $26m of acquisition related costs (2012 – $11m).

Research and development expenses

Research and development expenditure as a percentage of revenue increased by 1.2% to 5.3% in 2013 (2012 – 4.1%). Actual expenditure was $231m in 2013 compared to $171m in 2012. The Group continues to invest in innovative technologies and products to differentiate it from competitors. It also continues to invest in HP802-247, currently in Phase III trials, which was acquired as part of the Healthpoint acquisition in December 2012.

Operating profit

Operating profit decreased by $36m to $810m from $846m in 2012. This comprised a decrease of $12m in Advanced Surgical Devices and a decrease of $24m in Advanced Wound Management.

The movement in Advanced Surgical Devices is attributable to the continuing pressure on margins and its investment in the Emerging & International Markets. Advanced Wound Management has continued to invest in new products and new geographic markets throughout the year.

Net interest receivable/(payable)

Net interest receivable increased, by $2m, from net $2m receivable in 2012 to a net receivable of $4m in 2013. This increase is principally a consequence of the interest receivable on the Bioventus LLC (‘Bioventus’) loan note issued following the disposal of the Clinical Therapies business which has been in place for a full year in 2013 compared to eight months in 2012.

Other finance costs

Other finance costs in 2013 remained at $11m and principally relate to costs associated with the Group’s retirement benefit schemes.

Taxation

The taxation charge decreased, by $125m, to $246m from $371m in 2012. The rate of tax was 30.5%, compared with 33.7% in 2012.

After adjusting for specific transactions that management considers affect the Group’s short-term profitability (profit on disposal of the Clinical Therapies business, restructuring and rationalisation expenses, amortisation of acquisition intangibles and acquisition-related costs) the tax rate was 29.2% (2012 – 29.9%).

 

 

 

The financial commentary on this page forms part of the business review and is unaudited.

See pages 164 to 167 for commentary on the 2012 financial year.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
96      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Group balance sheet

 

      Notes    

At
        31 December
2013

$ million

   

At
                31 December
2012

$ million

 

Assets

                       

Non-current assets:

     

Property, plant and equipment

    7        816        793   

Goodwill

    8        1,256        1,186   

Intangible assets

    9        1,054        1,064   

Investments

    10        2        2   

Investments in associates

    11        107        116   

Loans to associates

    11        178        167   

Retirement benefit asset

    18        5        6   

Deferred tax assets

    5        145        164   
              3,563        3,498   

Current assets:

     

Inventories

    12        1,006        901   

Trade and other receivables

    13        1,113        1,065   

Cash at bank

    15        137        178   
              2,256        2,144   

Total assets

            5,819        5,642   
                         

Equity and liabilities

                       

Equity attributable to owners of the Company:

     

Share capital

    19        184        193   

Share premium

      535        488   

Capital redemption reserve

      10          

Treasury shares

    19        (322     (735

Other reserves

      120        121   

Retained earnings

            3,520        3,817   

Total equity

            4,047        3,884   

Non-current liabilities:

     

Long-term borrowings

    15        347        430   

Retirement benefit obligations

    18        230        266   

Other payables

    14        7        8   

Provisions

    17        65        63   

Deferred tax liabilities

    5        50        61   
              699        828   

Current liabilities:

     

Bank overdrafts and loans

    15        44        38   

Trade and other payables

    14        785        656   

Provisions

    17        60        59   

Current tax payable

            184        177   
              1,073        930   

Total liabilities

            1,772        1,758   

Total equity and liabilities

            5,819        5,642   

The accounts were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 26 February 2014 and are signed on its behalf by:

 

Sir John Buchanan   Olivier Bohuon   Julie Brown
Chairman   Chief Executive Officer   Chief Financial Officer

The Notes on pages 101 to 149 are an integral part of these accounts.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    97

 

 

Commentary on the Group balance sheet

 

Non-current assets

Non-current assets increased by $65m to $3,563m in 2013 from $3,498m in 2012. This is principally attributable to the following:

 

Property, plant and equipment increased by $23m from $793m in 2012 to $816m in 2013. Depreciation of $209m was charged during 2013 and assets with a net book value of $12m were disposed of. These movements were offset by $242m of additions relating primarily to instruments and other plant & machinery and $5m of additions arising on acquisitions in Turkey, Brazil and India. The balance relates to unfavourable currency movements totalling $3m

 

Goodwill increased by $70m from $1,186m in 2012 to $1,256m in 2013. Of this movement, $37m arose on acquisitions in Turkey, Brazil and India. An additional $16m arose on finalisation of the Healthpoint opening balance sheet. The remaining balance relates to favourable currency movements totalling $17m

 

Intangible assets decreased by $10m from $1,064m in 2012 to $1,054m in 2013. Intangible assets totalling $64m arose on the acquisition in Turkey, Brazil and India. There was a reduction of $11m on finalisation of the Healthpoint opening balance sheet. Amortisation of $152m was charged during the year and assets with a net book value of $11m were disposed of. A total of $98m relates to the cost of intellectual property, distribution rights and software acquired. The balance relates to favourable currency movements totalling $2m

 

Investment in associates (including a loan to an associate of $178m in 2013, up from $167m in 2012) has increased from $283m in 2012 to $285m in 2013. This movement relates to the interest of $11m arising on the Bioventus loan note which was largely offset from the disposal of the Group’s 49% interest in the Austrian entities Plus Orthopedics GmbH and Intraplant GmbH and its 20% interest in the German entity Intercus GmbH

 

Deferred tax assets decreased by $19m in the year from $164m in 2012 to $145m in 2013.

Current assets

Current assets increased by $112m to $2,256m from $2,144m in 2012. The movement relates to the following:

 

Inventories rose by $105m to $1,006m in 2013 from $901m in 2012. This movement is principally attributable to an increase of $48m in the US due to inventory build prior to the launch of JOURNEY II BCS and an increase of $17m due to inventory build in our Hull factory prior to the transfer of part of our Wound production to China. A further increase of $12m arose on the acquisitions in Turkey, Brazil and India. The movement also includes $6m of unfavourable currency movements

 

The level of trade and other receivables increased by $48m to $1,113m in 2013 from $1,065m in 2012. The movement primarily relates to the increase in underlying revenues and includes $9m of unfavourable currency movements

 

Cash at bank has fallen by $41m to $137m from $178m in 2012.

Non-current liabilities

Non-current liabilities decreased by $129m from $828m in 2012 to $699m in 2013. This movement relates to the following items:

 

Long-term borrowings have decreased from $430m in 2012 to $347m in 2013

 

The Retirement benefit obligation decreased by $36m to $230m in 2013 from $266m in 2012. This was largely due to the Group’s additional pension contributions, together with net actuarial gains for the year

 

Deferred tax liabilities decreased by $11m in the year from $61m in 2012 to $50m in 2013.

Current liabilities

Current liabilities increased by $143m from $930m in 2012 to $1,073m in 2013. This movement is attributable to:

 

Bank overdrafts and current borrowings have increased by $6m from $38m in 2012 to $44m in 2013

 

Trade and other payables have increased by $129m to $785m in 2013 from $656m in 2012. This increase includes $50m largely driven from strong sales performance in the US in quarter four and a $23m increase in Europe associated with promotional activities in Advanced Surgical Devices. A total of $19m of trade and other payables arose on the acquisitions in Turkey, Brazil and India and an amount of $5m is attributable to favourable currency movements.

 

Current tax payable is $184m at the end of 2013 compared to $177m in 2012.

Total equity

Total equity increased by $163m from $3,884m in 2012 to $4,047m in 2013. The principal movements were:

 

    

 

Total equity 
$ million 

 

1 January 2013

  3,884 

Attributable profit

  556 

Currency translation gains

  (6)

Hedging reserves

 

Actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations

  12 

Dividends paid during the year

  (239)

Purchase of own shares

  (231)
Taxation on Other Comprehensive Income and equity items   (16)

Net share-based transactions

  82 

31 December 2013

  4,047 

 

 

 

The financial commentary on this page forms part of the business review and is unaudited.

See pages 164 to 167 for commentary on the 2012 financial year.

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
98      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Group cash flow statement

 

    

Notes

   

Year ended
        31 December
2013

$ million

   

Year ended
        31 December
2012

Restated(i)

$ million

    

Year ended

        31 December

2011

Restated(i)

$ million

 

Cash flows from operating activities

                                

Profit before taxation

      802        1,092         841   

Net interest (receivable)/payable

    4        (4     (2      8   

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment

      361        312         297   
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment, and software       23        12         9   

Share-based payments expense

    23        28        34         30   

Share of results of associates

    11        1        (4        

Dividends received from associates

    11        1        7           

Profit on disposal of net assets held for sale

    21               (251        

Decrease in retirement benefit obligations

      (27     (28      (37

(Increase)/decrease in inventories

      (99     12         40   

Increase in trade and other receivables

      (70     (5      (47
Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables and provisions             122        5         (6

Cash generated from operations (ii) (iii)

      1,138        1,184         1,135   

Interest received

      4        4         4   

Interest paid

      (10     (8      (12

Income taxes paid

            (265     (278      (285

Net cash inflow from operating activities

            867        902         842   

Cash flows from investing activities

                                

Acquisitions (net of $2m of cash received in 2011)

    21        (74     (782      (33

Proceeds on disposal of net assets held for sale

    21               103           

Capital expenditure

    2        (340     (265      (321

Investment in associate

    11               (10        

Cash received on disposal of associate

            7                  

Net cash used in investing activities

            (407     (954      (354

Cash flows from financing activities

                                

Proceeds from issue of ordinary share capital

      48        77         17   

Purchase of own shares

      (231             (6

Proceeds of borrowings due within one year

    20        12        40         78   

Settlement of borrowings due within one year

    20        (6     (296      (330

Proceeds on borrowings due after one year

    20        695        415         92   

Settlement of borrowings due after one year

    20        (779     (1      (232

Proceeds from own shares

      3        6         7   

Settlement of currency swaps

    20        (1     (1      (1

Equity dividends paid

    19        (239     (186      (146

Net cash (used in)/from financing activities

            (498     54         (521

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

      (38     2         (33

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

    20        167        161         195   

Exchange adjustments

    20        (3     4         (1

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

    20        126        167         161   

 

(i) Restated for the adoption of the revised IAS 19 Employee Benefits standard , see Note 1.
(ii) Includes $54m (2012 – $55m, 2011 – $20m) of outgoings on restructuring and rationalisation expenses.
(iii) Includes $25m (2012 – $3m, 2011 – $1m) of acquisition-related costs and $nil (2012 – $nil, 2011 – $3m) of costs unreimbursed by insurers relating to macrotextured knee revisions. In the year ended 31 December 2012 cash outflows included a legal settlement of $22m.

The Notes on pages 101 to 149 are an integral part of these accounts.

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    99

 

 

 

Commentary on the Group cash flow statement

The main elements of the Group’s cash flow and movements in net debt can be summarised as follows:

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash generated from operations in 2013 of $1,138m (2012 – $1,184m, 2011 – $1,135m) is after paying out $25m (2012 – $3m, 2011 – $1m) of acquisition-related costs, $54m (2012 – $55m, 2011 – $20m) of restructuring and rationalisation expenses and $22m in 2012 relating to a legal settlement.

Capital expenditure

The Group’s ongoing capital expenditure and working capital requirements were financed through cash flow generated by business operations and, where necessary, through short-term committed and uncommitted bank facilities. In 2013, capital expenditure on tangible and intangible fixed assets represented approximately 8% of continuing Group revenue (2012 – 6%, 2011 – 8%).

In 2013, capital expenditure amounted to $340m (2012 – $265m, 2011 – $321m). The principal areas of investment were the placement of orthopaedic instruments with customers, patents and licences, plant and equipment and information technology.

At 31 December 2013, $41m (2012 – $4m, 2011 – $9m) of capital expenditure had been contracted but not provided for which will be funded from cash inflows.

Acquisitions and disposals

In the three-year period ended 31 December 2013, $889m was spent on acquisitions, funded from net debt and cash inflows. This comprised, $33m for Tenet Medical Engineering during 2011, $782m for Healthpoint acquired in December 2012 and $74m relating to acquisitions in Turkey, Brazil and India completed in quarter four of 2013.

During 2012, the Group completed the transfer of its Biologics and Clinical Therapies business (‘CT’) to Bioventus for total consideration of $367m. As part of this transaction the Group received a 49% interest in Bioventus with a value of $104m and subsequently invested a further $10m.

Cash proceeds of $7m were received from the disposal of the Group’s 49% interest in the Austrian entities Plus Orthopedics GmbH and Intraplant GmbH and its 20% interest in the German entity Intercus GmbH.

 

Liquidity and capital resources

The Group’s policy is to ensure that it has sufficient funding and facilities in place to meet foreseeable borrowing requirements. In December 2010, the Group entered into a five-year $1bn multi-currency revolving facility with an initial interest of 70 basis points over LIBOR.

At 31 December 2013, the Group held $126m (2012 – $167m, 2011 – $161m) in cash and bank. The Group has committed and uncommitted facilities of $1,008m and $319m respectively. The undrawn committed facilities totalling $672m expire after one year (2012 – $597m expiring within two to five years). Smith & Nephew intends to repay the amounts due within one year by using available cash and drawing down on the longer term facilities. In addition, Smith & Nephew has finance lease commitments of $14m (of which $3m extends beyond five years).

In December 2013, the Group signed a private placement agreement to borrow $325m of long-term debt. The funds, which have an average fixed rate of 3.7% and an average maturity of just over nine years, were drawn down on 21 January 2014 and used to repay existing bank debt.

Subsequent to the balance sheet date, on 3 February 2014 the Group announced the execution of a definitive agreement to acquire 100% of the shares of ArthroCare Corp. for approximately $1.7 billion. The acquisition is subject to customary conditions, including a vote of ArthroCare’s shareholders and governmental clearances. The acquisition is expected to close in mid-2014. The acquisition will be financed through existing debt facilities and cash balances, including the existing $1 billion revolving credit facility and a new two-year $1.4 billion term loan facility, established in February 2014.

The principal variations in the Group’s borrowing requirements result from the timing of dividend payments, acquisitions and disposals of businesses, timing of capital expenditure and working capital fluctuations. Smith & Nephew believes that its capital expenditure needs and its working capital funding for 2014, as well as its other known or expected commitments or liabilities, can be met from its existing resources and facilities. The Group’s net debt decreased from $492m at the beginning of 2011 to $253m at the end of 2013, representing an overall decrease of $239m.

The Group’s planned future contributions are considered adequate to cover the current underfunded position in the Group’s defined benefit plans.

Further disclosure regarding borrowings, related covenants and the liquidity risk exposure is set out in Note 15 of the Notes to the Group accounts. The Group believes that its borrowing facilities do not contain restrictions that would have significant impact on its funding or investment policy for the foreseeable future.

 

 

The financial commentary on this page forms part of the business review and is unaudited.

See pages 164 to 167 for commentary on the 2012 financial year.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
100      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Group statement of changes in equity

 

    

Share
capital

$ million

    Share
premium
$ million
    

Capital
redemption
reserve

$ million

    

Treasury
shares (ii)

$ million

     Other
reserves (iii)
$ million
     Retained
earnings
$ million
    

Total

equity

$ million

 

At 31 December 2010

    191        396                 (778      116         2,848         2,773   

Total comprehensive income (i)

                                   (25      539         514   

Equity dividends declared and paid

                                           (146      (146

Share-based payments recognised

                                           30         30   

Deferred taxation on share-based payments

                                           (2      (2

Purchase of own shares

                           (6                      (6

Cost of shares transferred to beneficiaries

                           18                 (11      7   

Issue of ordinary share capital (iv)

           17                                         17   

At 31 December 2011

    191        413                 (766      91         3,258         3,187   

Total comprehensive income (i)

                                   30         736         766   

Equity dividends declared and paid

                                           (186      (186

Share-based payments recognised

                                           34         34   

Cost of shares transferred to beneficiaries

                           31                 (25      6   

Issue of ordinary share capital (iv)

    2        75                                         77   

At 31 December 2012

    193        488                 (735      121         3,817         3,884   

Total comprehensive income (i)

                                   (1      552         551   

Equity dividends declared and paid

                                           (239      (239

Share-based payments recognised

                                           28         28   

Deferred taxation on share-based payments

                                           3         3   

Purchase of own shares

                           (231                      (231

Cost of shares transferred to beneficiaries

                           21                 (18      3   

Cancellation of treasury shares

    (10             10         623                 (623        

Issue of ordinary share capital (iv)

    1        47                                         48   

At 31 December 2013

    184        535         10         (322      120         3,520         4,047   

 

(i) Attributable to equity holders of the Company and wholly derived from continuing operations.
(ii) Refer to Note 19.2 for further information.
(iii) Other reserves comprises gains and losses on cash flow hedges, foreign exchange differences on translation of foreign operations and the difference arising as a result of translating share capital and share premium at the rate ruling on the date of redenomination instead of the rate at the balance sheet date. The cumulative translation adjustments within Other Reserves at 31 December 2013 were $118m (2012 – $124m, 2011 – $87m).
(iv) Issue of ordinary share capital as a result of options being exercised.

The Notes on pages 101 to 149 are an integral part of these accounts.

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

      101  

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts

1 Basis of preparation

Smith & Nephew plc (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company incorporated in England and Wales. In these accounts, the ‘Group’ means the Company and all its subsidiaries. The principal activities of the Group are to develop, manufacture, market and sell medical devices in the sectors of Advanced Surgical Devices and Advanced Wound Management.

As required by the European Union’s IAS Regulation and the Companies Act 2006, the Group has prepared its accounts in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’) as adopted by the European Union (‘EU’) effective as at 31 December 2013. The Group has also prepared its accounts in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (‘IASB’) effective as at 31 December 2013. IFRS as adopted by the EU differs in certain respects from IFRS as issued by the IASB. However, the differences have no impact for the periods presented.

The preparation of accounts in conformity with IFRS requires management to use estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the accounts and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. The accounting policies requiring management to use significant estimates and assumptions are; inventories, impairment, retirement benefits, contingencies and provisions. These are discussed under Critical accounting policies on page 90. Although these estimates are based on management’s best knowledge of current events and actions, actual results ultimately may differ from those estimates. Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to estimates are recognised prospectively.

The Directors continue to adopt the going concern basis for accounting in preparing the annual financial statements. The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future.

From 1 January 2013, the Group adopted the revised IAS 19 Employee Benefits standard, which was endorsed by the EU in June 2012. The previous method of including the expected income from the plan assets at an estimated asset return is replaced by applying the discount rate used to calculate the net retirement benefit obligation. The change in accounting policy has been applied retrospectively but does not impact the net retirement benefit obligation or retained earnings as at the beginning or during the years ended 31 December 2011 or 2012. The income statement and statement of comprehensive income for the years ended 31 December 2012 and 31 December 2013 have been adjusted for the change in accounting policy. These adjustments have resulted in an increase of $8m in other finance costs and an increase of $8m in actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations recorded within other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2012 and an increase of $7m in other finance costs and an increase of $7m in actuarial gains on retirement benefit obligations recorded within other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2011. Due to the change in other finance costs, basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended 31 December 2012 both decreased by 0.9¢ and for the year ended 31 December 2011 both decreased by 0.8¢.

The Group has also adopted the amendments to IAS 1 Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income , resulting in a change to the presentation of items within other comprehensive income.

In addition, effective 1 January 2013, the Group has adopted the following new IFRS standards and amendments to standards, none of which had a material impact on the Group’s net results, net assets or disclosure; IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements ,

 

IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements , IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities and IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement , along with consequential amendments to IAS 27 Separate Financial Statements and IAS 28 Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures , and amendments to IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures on Offsetting Financial Assets and Liabilities .

A number of new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations are effective for annual periods beginning after 1 January 2013, and have not been applied in preparing these consolidated accounts. None of these is expected to have a significant effect on the consolidated accounts of the Group.

Consolidation

The Group accounts include the accounts of Smith & Nephew plc and its subsidiaries for the periods during which they were members of the Group.

Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. Subsidiaries are consolidated in the Group accounts from the date that the Group obtains control, and continue to be consolidated until the date that such control ceases. Intra-group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated on consolidation. All subsidiaries have year ends which are co-terminus with the Group’s.

When the Group loses control over a subsidiary, it derecognises the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary and any related components of equity. Any resulting gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss. Any retained interest in the former subsidiary is measured at fair value.

Foreign currencies

Functional and presentation currency

The Group accounts are presented in US Dollars, which is the Company’s functional currency.

Foreign currency transactions

Transactions in foreign currencies are translated to the respective functional currencies of Group companies at exchange rates at the dates of the transactions. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated to the functional currency at the exchange rate at the reporting date. Non-monetary items are not retranslated.

Foreign operations

Balance sheet items of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on acquisition are translated into US Dollars on consolidation at the exchange rates at the reporting date. Income statement items and the cash flows of foreign operations are translated at average rates as an approximation to actual transaction rates, with actual transaction rates used for large one-off transactions.

Foreign currency differences are recognised in Other comprehensive income and accumulated in ‘Other reserves’ within equity. These include: exchange differences on the translation at closing rates of exchange of non-US Dollar opening net assets; the differences arising between the translation of profits into US Dollars at actual (or average, as an approximation) and closing exchange rates; to the extent that the hedging relationship is effective, the difference on translation of foreign currency borrowings or swaps that are used to finance or hedge the Group’s net investments in foreign operations; and the movement in the fair value of forward foreign exchange contracts used to hedge forecast foreign exchange cash flows.

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
102      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

1 Basis of preparation continued

The exchange rates used for the translation of currencies into US Dollars that have the most significant impact on the Group results were:

 

      2013    

2012

    

2011

 

Average rates

                        

Sterling

    1.56        1.58         1.60   

Euro

    1.33        1.28         1.39   

Swiss Franc

    1.08        1.07         1.13   

Year-end rates

                        

Sterling

    1.66        1.63         1.55   

Euro

    1.38        1.32         1.29   

Swiss Franc

    1.12        1.09         1.06   

2 Business segment information

For management purposes, the Group is organised into business segments according to the nature of its products and has two reportable business segments – Advanced Surgical Devices and Advanced Wound Management. The types of products and services offered by each business segment are:

 

Smith & Nephew’s Advanced Surgical Devices (‘ASD’) business offers the following products and technologies:

 

  Orthopaedic Reconstruction which includes Hip Implants, Knee Implants and ancillary products such as bone cement and mixing systems used in cemented reconstruction joint surgery

 

  Trauma & Extremities consisting of internal and external devices used in the stabilisation of severe fractures and deformity correction procedures

 

  Sports Medicine Joint Repair, which offers surgeons a broad array of instruments, technologies and implants necessary to perform minimally invasive surgery of the joints

 

  Arthroscopy Enabling Technologies which offer healthcare providers a variety of technologies such as fluid management equipment for surgical access, high definition cameras, digital image capture, scopes, light sources and monitors to assist with visualisation inside the joints, radio frequency wands, electromechanical and mechanical blades, and hand instruments for removing damaged tissue

 

  Other ASD which includes gynaecological instrumentation and the remaining Clinical Therapies geographies which are in the process of being transferred to Bioventus.

 

Smith & Nephew’s Advanced Wound Management (‘AWM’) business offers a range of products:

 

  Advanced Wound Care includes products for the treatment of acute and chronic wounds, including leg, diabetic and pressure ulcers, burns and post-operative wounds

 

  Advanced Wound Devices consists of traditional and single-use Negative Pressure Wound Therapy and hydrosurgery systems

 

  Advanced Wound Bioactives includes biologics and other bioactive technologies that provide unique approaches to debridement and dermal repair/regeneration.

Management monitors the operating results of its business segments separately for the purposes of making decisions about resource allocation and performance assessment. Group financing (including interest receivable and payable) and income taxes are managed on a Group basis and are not allocated to business segments.

 

 

 

 

 

 

The following tables present revenue, profit, asset and liability information regarding the Group’s operating segments. Investments in associates and loans to associates are segmentally allocated to Advanced Surgical Devices.

2.1 Revenue by business segment and geography

 

   

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 

 
   

 

 

Revenue comprises sales of products and services to third parties at amounts invoiced net of trade discounts and rebates, excluding taxes on revenue. Revenue from the sale of products is recognised upon transfer to the customer of the significant risks and rewards of ownership. This is generally when goods are delivered to customers. Sales of inventory located at customer premises and available for customers’ immediate use are recognised when notification is received that the product has been implanted or used. Appropriate provisions for returns, trade discounts and rebates are deducted from revenue. Rebates comprise retrospective volume discounts granted to certain customers on attainment of certain levels of purchases from the Group. These are accrued over the course of the arrangement based on estimates of the level of business expected and adjusted at the end of the arrangement to reflect actual volumes.

 

 

 

     

2013

$ million

   

2012

$ million

    

2011

$ million

 

Revenue by business segment

                        

Advanced Surgical Devices

    3,015        3,108         3,251   

Advanced Wound Management

    1,336        1,029         1,019   
      4,351        4,137         4,270   

There are no material sales between business segments.

 

  

  
      2013
$ million
    2012
$ million
     2011
$ million
 

Revenue by geographic market

                        

United States

    1,862        1,651         1,756   

United Kingdom

    293        297         291   

Other Established Markets

    1,633        1,706         1,769   

Emerging & International Markets

    563        483         454   
      4,351        4,137         4,270   

Revenue has been allocated by basis of destination. No revenue from a single customer is in excess of 10% of the Group’s revenue.

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    103

 

 

 

2.2 Trading and operating profit by business segment

Trading profit is a trend measure which presents the long-term profitability of the Group excluding the impact of specific transactions that management considers affects the Group’s short-term profitability. The Group presents this measure to assist investors in their understanding of trends. The Group has identified the following items, where material, as those to be excluded from operating profit when arriving at trading profit: acquisition and disposal related items including amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments; significant restructuring events; gains and losses arising from legal disputes; and uninsured losses. Operating profit reconciles to trading profit as follows:

 

      Notes    

2013

        $ million

   

2012

Restated

        $ million

   

2011

Restated

        $ million

 

Operating profit

      810        846        862   

Acquisition-related costs

    3        31        11          

Restructuring and rationalisation expenses

    3        58        65        40   

Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments

    9        88        43        36   

Legal provision

    3                      23   

Trading profit

            987        965        961   

Trading profit by business segment

                               

Advanced Surgical Devices

      712        728        714   

Advanced Wound Management

      275        237        247   
              987        965        961   

Operating profit by business segment

reconciled to attributable profit for the year

                               

Advanced Surgical Devices

      620        632        630   

Advanced Wound Management

            190        214        232   

Operating profit

      810        846        862   

Net interest receivable/(payable)

      4        2        (8

Other finance costs

      (11     (11     (13

Share of results of associates

      (1     4          

Profit on disposal on net assets held for sale

             251          

Taxation

      (246     (371     (266

Attributable profit for the year

            556        721        575   

2.3 Assets and liabilities by business segment and geography

 

  

   
              

2013

$ million

   

2012

$ million

   

2011

$ million

 

Balance sheet

                               

Assets:

       

Advanced Surgical Devices

      3,684        3,518        3,396   

Advanced Wound Management

            1,848        1,776        819   

Operating assets by business segment

      5,532        5,294        4,215   

Assets held for sale (relating to Advanced Surgical Devices

  

                  125   

business segment)

       

Unallocated corporate assets

            287        348        407   

Total assets

            5,819        5,642        4,747   

Liabilities:

       

Advanced Surgical Devices

      609        530        526   

Advanced Wound Management

            308        256        169   

Operating liabilities by business segment

      917        786        695   

Liabilities directly associated with assets held for sale

                    19   

(relating to Advanced Surgical Devices business segment)

       

Unallocated corporate liabilities

      855        972        846   

Total liabilities

            1,772        1,758        1,560   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
104      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

2 Business segment information continued

Unallocated corporate assets and liabilities comprise the following:

 

     

2013

    $ million

   

2012

    $ million

    

2011

    $ million

 

Deferred tax assets

    145        164         223   

Retirement benefit asset

    5        6           

Cash at bank

    137        178         184   

Unallocated corporate assets

    287        348         407   

Long-term borrowings

    347        430         16   

Retirement benefit obligations

    230        266         287   

Deferred tax liabilities

    50        61         66   

Bank overdrafts and loans due within one year

    44        38         306   

Current tax payable

    184        177         171   

Unallocated corporate liabilities

    855        972         846   
      
     

2013

    $ million

   

2012

    $ million

    

2011

    $ million

 

Capital expenditure (including acquisitions)

                        

Advanced Surgical Devices

    327        188         334   

Advanced Wound Management

    124        839         31   
      451        1,027         365   

 

Capital expenditure segmentally allocated above comprises:

 

      
     

2013

    $ million

   

2012

    $ million

    

2011

    $ million

 

Additions to property, plant and equipment

    242        197         229   

Additions to intangible assets

    98        68         92   

Capital expenditure (excluding business combinations)

    340        265         321   

Acquisitions – Goodwill

    53        73         44   

Acquisitions – Intangible assets

    53        662           

Acquisitions – Property, plant and equipment

    5        27           

Capital expenditure

    451        1,027         365   
      
     

2013

    $ million

   

2012

    $ million

    

2011

    $ million

 

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment

                        

Advanced Surgical Devices

    268        274         259   

Advanced Wound Management

    93        38         38   
      361        312         297   

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    105

 

 

 

 

Amounts comprise depreciation of property, plant and equipment, amortisation of other intangible assets, impairment of investments and amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments as follows:

 

    

2013

    $ million

   

2012

    $ million

    

2011

    $ million

 

Amortisation of acquisition intangibles

    88        43         36   

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

    209        212         217   

Impairment of goodwill in Austrian associate

           4           

Amortisation of other intangible assets

    64        51         42   

Impairment of investments

           2         2   
      361        312         297   

 

No impairments were recognised within operating profit in 2013 (2012 – $6m, 2011 – $2m, both recognised within the administrative expenses line). In 2012 and 2011, the impairments were segmentally allocated to Advanced Surgical Devices.

 

Geographic

   

  

           

2013

    $ million

     2012
    $ million
 

Assets by geographic location

                        

United States

      2,086         2,122   

United Kingdom

      255         257   

Other Established Markets

      902         895   

Emerging & International Markets

            170         54   

Non-current operating assets by geographic location

            3,413         3,328   

United States

      1,121         999   

United Kingdom

      288         279   

Other Established Markets

      486         528   

Emerging & International Markets

            224         160   

Current operating assets by geographic location

            2,119         1,966   

Unallocated corporate assets (see page 104)

            287         348   

Total assets

            5,819         5,642   

 

2.4 Other business segment information

 

      
    

2013

    $ million

   

2012

    $ million

    

2011

    $ million

 

Other significant expenses recognised within operating profit

      

Advanced Surgical Devices

    51        57         32   

Advanced Wound Management

    38        19         8   
      89        76         40   

 

The $89m incurred in 2013 relates to $58m restructuring and rationalisation expenses and $31m acquisition-related costs (2012 – $65m relates to restructuring and rationalisation expenses and $11m acquisition-related costs, 2011 – $40m relates to restructuring and rationalisation expenses).

 

   

    

2013

    numbers

   

2012

    numbers

    

2011

    numbers

 

Average number of employees

                        

Advanced Surgical Devices

    7,066        7,194         7,611   

Advanced Wound Management

    3,970        3,283         3,132   
      11,036        10,477         10,743   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
106      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

3 Operating profit

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 
 

 

 

Research and development

 

Research expenditure is expensed as occurred. Internal development expenditure is only capitalised if the recognition criteria in IAS 38 Intangible Assets have been satisfied. The Group considers that the regulatory, technical and market uncertainties inherent in the development of new products mean that in most cases development costs should not be capitalised as intangible assets until products receive approval from the appropriate regulatory body.

 

Payments to third parties for research and development projects are accounted for based on the substance of the arrangement. If the arrangement represents outsourced research and development activities the payments are generally expensed except in limited circumstances where the respective development expenditure would be capitalised under the principles established in IAS 38. By contrast, the payments are capitalised if the arrangement represents consideration for the acquisition of intellectual property developed at the risk of the third party.

 

Capitalised development expenditures are amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful economic lives from product launch.

 

Advertising costs

 

Expenditure on advertising costs is expensed as incurred.

 

 

 

                                               
     

 

2013

        $ million

  

  

   

 

2012

        $ million

  

  

   

 

2011

        $ million

  

  

Revenue     4,351        4,137        4,270   
Cost of goods sold (i)(ii)     (1,100     (1,070     (1,140
Gross profit     3,251        3,067        3,130   
Research and development expenses     (231     (171     (167
Selling, general and administrative expenses:      

Marketing, selling and distribution expenses

    (1,535     (1,440     (1,526

Administrative expenses (iii) (iv) (v) (vi)

    (675     (610     (575
      (2,210     (2,050     (2,101
Operating profit     810        846        862   

 

(i) 2013 includes $12m of restructuring and rationalisation expenses (2012 – $3m, 2011 – $7m).
(ii) 2013 includes $5m of acquisition-related costs (2012 – $nil, 2011 – $nil).
(iii) 2013 includes $64m of amortisation of other intangible assets (2012 – $51m, 2011 – $42m).
(iv) 2013 includes $46m of restructuring and rationalisation expenses and $88m of amortisation of acquisition intangibles (2012 – $62m of restructuring and rationalisation expenses and $43m of amortisation of acquisition intangibles, 2011 – $33m of restructuring and rationalisation expenses and $36m of amortisation of acquisition intangibles).
(v) 2013 includes $nil relating to legal provision (2012 – $nil, 2011 – $23m).
(vi) 2013 includes $26m of acquisition-related costs (2012 – $11m, 2011 – $nil).

Note that items detailed in (i), (ii), (iv), (v) and (vi) are excluded from the calculation of trading profit.

Operating profit is stated after charging the following items:

 

                                               
     
 
2013
         $ million
  
  
   
 
2012
        $ million
  
  
   
 
2011
        $ million
  
  
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles     88        43        36   
Amortisation of other intangible assets     64        51        42   
Impairment of goodwill in Austrian associate            4          
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment     209        212        217   
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment and software     23        12        9   
Impairment of investments            2        2   
Minimum operating lease payments for land and buildings     32        29        33   
Minimum operating lease payments for other assets     19        21        32   
Advertising costs     91        74        90   

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    107

 

 

 

3.1 Staff costs

Staff costs during the year amounted to:

 

                                                       
     Notes     2013
$ million
     2012
Restated
$ million
     2011
Restated
$ million
 

Wages and salaries

      998         886         930   

Social security costs

      106         97         99   

Pension costs (including retirement healthcare)

    18        72         72         71   

Share-based payments

    23        28         34         30   
              1,204         1,089         1,130   

 

3.2 Audit Fees – information about the nature and cost of services provided by auditors

 

  

             
 
2013
$ million
  
  
    
 
2012
$ million
  
  
    
 
2011
$ million
  
  

Audit services: Group accounts

      1         1         1   

Other services:

         

Local statutory audit pursuant to legislation

      2         2         2   

Taxation services:

         

Compliance services

      2         1         1   

Advisory services

            1         1         1   

Total auditors’ remuneration

            6         5         5   

Arising:

         

In the UK

      3         2         2   

Outside the UK

            3         3         3   
              6         5         5   

3.3 Acquisition-related costs

Acquisition-related costs of $31m (2012 – $ 11m, 2011 – $nil) were incurred in the twelve month period to 31 December 2013. These costs relate to professional and adviser fees and integration costs in connection with the acquisition of Healthpoint Biotherapeutics completed in 2012 and the acquisitions in Turkey, Brazil and India during 2013.

3.4 Restructuring and rationalisation expenses

Restructuring and rationalisation costs of $58m (2012 – $65m, 2011 – $40m) were incurred in the twelve month period to 31 December 2013. Charges of $58m (2012 – $65m, 2011 – $26m) were incurred, relating mainly to people costs and contract termination costs associated with the structural and process changes announced in August 2011. During 2013, no charges (2012 – $nil, 2011 – $14m) were incurred in relation to the earnings improvement programme which was completed in 2011.

3.5 Legal provision

In 2011, the Group established a provision of $ 23m in connection with the previously disclosed investigation by the US Securities and Exchange Commission (‘SEC’) and Department of Justice (‘DOJ’) into potential violations of the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act in the medical devices industry.

On 6 February 2012, Smith & Nephew announced that it had reached settlement with the SEC and DOJ in connection with this matter. Smith & Nephew paid slightly less than $23m in fines and profit disgorgement and committed to maintain an enhanced compliance programme and appoint an independent monitor for at least 18 months to review and report on its compliance programme. The monitor’s final report was filed in late 2013, and the independent monitorship has now been terminated. The settlement agreements impose detailed reporting, compliance and other requirements on Smith & Nephew for a three-year term. Failure to comply with these requirements, or any other violation of law, could have severe consequences for the Group.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
108      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

4 Interest and other finance costs

4.1 Interest receivable/(payable)

 

                                                           
             
 
2013
$ million
  
  
   
 
2012
$ million
  
  
    

 

2011

$ million

  

  

Interest receivable

      14        11         4   

Interest payable:

        

Bank borrowings

      (8     (7      (6

Other

            (2     (2      (6
              (10     (9      (12

Net interest receivable/(payable)

            4        2         (8

 

4.2 Other finance costs

 

        
      Notes       

 

2013

$ million

  

  

   

 

2012

$ million

  

  

    

 

2011

$ million

  

  

Retirement benefit net interest expense

    18        (11     (11      (14

Other

                           1   

Other finance costs

            (11     (11      (13

Foreign exchange gains or losses recognised in the income statement arose primarily on the translation of intercompany and third party borrowings and amounted to a net $1m gain in 2013 (2012 – net $5m loss, 2011 – net $3m gain). These amounts were fully matched in the income statement by the fair value gains or losses on currency swaps (carried at fair value through profit and loss) held to manage this currency risk.

5 Taxation

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

The charge for current taxation is based on the results for the year as adjusted for items which are non-assessable or disallowed. It is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

 

The Group operates in multiple tax jurisdictions around the world and records provisions for taxation liabilities and tax audits when it is considered probable that a tax charge will arise and the amount can be reliably estimated. Although Group policy is to submit its tax returns to the relevant tax authorities as promptly as possible, at any time the Group has un-agreed years outstanding and is involved in disputes and tax audits. Significant issues may take many years to resolve. In estimating the probability and amount of any tax charge, management takes into account the views of internal and external advisers and updates the amount of the provision whenever necessary. The ultimate tax liability may differ from the amount provided depending on interpretations of tax law, settlement negotiations or changes in legislation.

 

Deferred tax is recognised in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes.

 

Deferred tax is not recognised for: temporary differences related to investments in subsidiaries and associates where the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that this will not reverse in the foreseeable future; on the initial recognition of non-deductible goodwill; and on the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and that, at the time of the transaction, does not affect the accounting or taxable profit.

 

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which they can be used. Deferred tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date.

 

Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis, and at the tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date that are expected to apply in the periods in which the asset or liability is settled. It is recognised in the income statement except when it relates to items credited or charged directly to other comprehensive income or equity, in which case the deferred tax is also recognised within other comprehensive income or equity respectively.

 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority, when the Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis and that authority permits the Group to make a single net payment.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    109

 

 

 

5.1 Taxation charge attributable to the Group

 

                                                     
     
 
2013
$ million
  
  
   
 
2012
$ million
  
  
   
 
2011
$ million
  
  

Current taxation:

     

UK corporation tax at 23.3% (2012 – 24.5%, 2011 – 26.5%)

    50        53        56   

Overseas tax

    229        248        214   

Current income tax charge

    279        301        270   

Adjustments in respect of prior periods

    (5     (17     (16

Total current taxation

    274        284        254   

Deferred taxation:

     

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

    (23     88        18   

Changes in tax rates

    (4     (3     (3

Adjustments to estimated amounts arising in prior periods

    (1     2        (3

Total deferred taxation

    (28     87        12   

Total taxation as per the income statement

    246        371        266   

Deferred taxation in other comprehensive income

    16        (20     (24

Deferred taxation in equity

    (3            2   

Taxation attributable to the Group

    259        351        244   

The tax charge was reduced by $40m as a consequence of restructuring and rationalisation expenses, amortisation of acquisition intangibles and acquisition-related costs. In 2012, the tax charge was increased by $82m as a consequence of the profit on disposal of net assets held for sale after adjusting for acquisition-related costs, restructuring and rationalisation expenses and amortisation of acquisition intangibles. In 2011, the tax charge was reduced by $17m as a consequence of restructuring and rationalisation expenses, amortisation of acquisition intangibles and legal provision.

The applicable tax for the year is based on the UK standard rate of corporation tax of 23.3% (2012 – 24.5%, 2011 – 26.5%). Overseas taxation is calculated at the rates prevailing in the respective jurisdictions. The average effective tax rate differs from the applicable rate as follows:

 

                                                     
     
 
2013
%
  
  
   
 
2012
%
  
  
   
 
2011
%
  
  

UK standard rate

    23.3        24.5        26.5   

Non-deductible/non-taxable items

    (1.0     0.4        (0.5

Prior year items

    (0.5     (1.3     (1.6

Tax losses incurred not relieved

    0.9        0.8        0.3   

Overseas income taxed at other than UK standard rate

    7.8        9.3        6.7   

Total effective tax rate

    30.5        33.7        31.4   

The enacted UK tax rate applicable from 1 April 2013 is 23%. The UK Government have enacted legislation to reduce the tax rate to 21% from 1 April 2014 and 20% from 1 April 2015.

5.2 Deferred taxation

 

     
 
2013
         $ million
  
  
   
 
2012
        $ million
  
  

Deferred tax assets

    145        164   

Deferred tax liabilities

    (50     (61

Net position at 31 December

    95        103   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
110      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

5 Taxation continued

The movement in the year in the Group’s net deferred tax position was as follows:

 

                                                                                               
               2013
$ million
   

2012

$ million

 

At 1 January

        103        157   

Exchange adjustment

        (4       

Movement in income statement – current year

        27        (85

Movement in income statement – prior years

        1        (2

Movement in other comprehensive income

        (16     20   

Movement in shareholders’ equity

        3          

Arising on acquisition

            (19     13   

At 31 December

            95        103   

Movements in the main components of deferred tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

 

                                                                                               
     Retirement
benefit
obligation
$ million
    Macro-
textured
claim
$ million
     Other
$ million
     Total
$ million
 

Deferred tax assets

                                 

At 1 January 2012

    79        52         92         223   

Exchange adjustment

                   1         1   

Movement in income statement – current year

    (4             (85      (89

Movement in income statement – prior years

    2                (4      (2

Movement in other comprehensive income

    17                1         18   

Acquisition

                   13         13   

Transfers

    (9             9           

At 31 December 2012

    85        52         27         164   

Exchange adjustment

                   (3      (3

Movement in income statement – current year

    5                15         20   

Movement in income statement – prior years

                   1         1   

Movement in other comprehensive income

    (32             (2      (34

Charge to equity

                   2         2   

Acquisition

                   (5      (5

At 31 December 2013

    58        52         35         145   

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    111

 

 

 

The Group has unused tax losses of $31m (2012 – $61m) available for offset against future profits. A deferred tax asset has been recognised in respect of $3m (2012 – $1m) of such losses. No deferred tax asset has been recognised on the remaining unused tax losses as these are not expected to be realised in the foreseeable future.

 

                                                                                       
     Accelerated tax
depreciation
$ million
    Intangible
assets
$ million
     Other
$ million
    Total
$ million
 

Deferred tax liabilities

                                

At 1 January 2012

    (28     (27      (11     (66

Exchange adjustment

    (1                    (1

Movement in income statement – current year

    2        6         (4     4   

Movement in other comprehensive income

                   2        2   

At 31 December 2012

    (27     (21      (13     (61

Exchange adjustment

    (1                    (1

Movement in income statement – current year

    3        8         (4     7   

Movement in other comprehensive income

                   18        18   

Charge to equity

                   1        1   

Acquisitions/disposals

                   (14     (14

At 31 December 2013

    (25     (13      (12     (50

6 Earnings per ordinary share

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 
 

 

Earnings per share

 
 

 

 

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity holders by the weighted average number of Ordinary shares in issue during the year, excluding shares held by the Company in the Employees’ Share Trust or as treasury shares.

 
 

 

Adjusted earnings per share

 

 
 

 

Adjusted earnings per share is a trend measure, which presents the long-term profitability of the Group excluding the impact of specific transactions that management considers affects the Group’s short-term profitability. The Group presents this measure to assist investors in their understanding of trends. Adjusted attributable profit is the numerator used for this measure. The Group has identified the following items as those to be excluded when arriving at adjusted attributable profit: acquisition and disposal related items including amortisation of acquisition intangible assets and impairments; significant restructuring events; significant gains and losses arising from legal disputes and significant uninsured losses; and taxation thereon.

 

 

The calculations of the basic, diluted and adjusted earnings per ordinary share are based on the following attributable profit and numbers of shares:

 

                                                                                               
          2013
$ million
    2012
Restated
$ million
    2011
Restated
$ million
 

Earnings

                           

Attributable profit for the year

        556        721        575   

Adjusted attributable profit (see below)

        693        671        657   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
112      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

6 Earnings per ordinary share continued

Attributable profit is reconciled to adjusted attributable profit as follows:

 

             Notes     2013
             $ million
   

2012

Restated
                  $ million

    

2011

Restated
        $ million

 

Attributable profit for the year

      556        721         575   

Acquisition-related costs

    3        31        11           

Restructuring and rationalisation expenses

    3        58        65         40   

Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments

    9        88        43         36   

Profit on disposal of net assets held for sale

    21               (251        

Legal provision

    3                       23   

Taxation on excluded items

    5        (40     82         (17

Adjusted attributable profit

            693        671         657   

 

The numerators used for basic and diluted earnings per ordinary share are the same. The denominators used for all categories of earnings for basic and diluted earnings per ordinary share are as follows:

 

   

                               2013                        2012                       2011  

Number of shares (millions)

                                

Basic weighted number of shares

      901        897         891   

Dilutive impact of share options outstanding

      5        4         4   

Diluted weighted average number of shares

            906        901         895   

Earnings per ordinary share

                    Restated         Restated   

Basic

      61.7¢        80.4¢         64.5¢   

Diluted

      61.4¢        80.0¢         64.2¢   

Adjusted: Basic

      76.9¢        74.8¢         73.7¢   

Adjusted: Diluted

            76.5¢        74.5¢         73.4¢   

Share options not included in the diluted EPS calculation because they were non-dilutive in the period totalled 0.5m (2012 – 8.2m, 2011 – 12.9m).

7 Property, plant and equipment

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 
 

 

Property, plant and equipment

 

 

Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and any accumulated impairment losses.

 

Depreciation is calculated to write off the cost of items of property, plant and equipment less their estimated residual values using the straight-line method over their estimated useful lives, and is generally recognised in profit or loss. Leased assets are depreciated over the shorter of the lease term and their useful lives unless it is reasonably certain that the Group will obtain ownership by the end of the lease term. Freehold land is not depreciated. The estimated useful lives of items of property, plant and equipment is 3–20 years and for buildings is 20–50 years.

 

Assets in course of construction are not depreciated until they are available for use.

 

Depreciation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed at each reporting date and adjusted if appropriate.

 

Finance costs relating to the purchase or construction of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets that take longer than one year to complete are capitalised based on the Group weighted average borrowing costs. All other finance costs are expensed as incurred.

 

Impairment of assets

 

The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may be impaired. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in order to determine the extent of impairment loss. Where it is not possible to estimate the recoverable amount of an individual asset, the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to which it belongs.

 

An asset’s recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s or cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs to sell and its value-in-use. In assessing value-in-use, its estimated future cash flow is discounted to its present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects the current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset.

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    113

 

 

 

 

     Land and buildings           Plant and equipment     Assets in
course of
         
     Freehold
$ million
    Leasehold
$ million
          Instruments
$ million
    Other
$ million
    construction
$ million
    

Total

$ million

 

Cost

                                     

At 1 January 2012

    133        52           1,009        878        42         2,114   

Exchange adjustment

    2                  3        15        1         21   

Acquisitions (see Note 21.4)

    8                         7        12         27   

Additions

           1           122        46        28         197   

Disposals

           (1        (92     (37             (130

Transfers

                              10        (10        

At 31 December 2012

    143        52           1,042        919        73         2,229   

Exchange adjustment

    1        (1        (16     6                (10)   

Acquisitions (see Note 21.1)

           1           2        2                5   

Additions

    2        1           139        23        77         242   

Disposals

    (3               (102     (80     (2      (187

Transfers

                            68        (68        

At 31 December 2013

    143        53             1,065        938        80         2,279   

Depreciation and impairment

                                     

At 1 January 2012

    43        27           688        573                1,331   

Exchange adjustment

    1                  2        11                14   

Charge for the year

    2        3           137        70                212   

Disposals

           (1        (89     (31             (121)   

At 31 December 2012

    46        29             738        623                1,436   

Exchange adjustment

    (1)        (1        (10     5                (7

Charge for the year

    1        3           135        70                209   

Disposals

    (3               (99     (73             (175

At 31 December 2013

    43        31             764        625                1,463   

Net book amounts

           

At 31 December 2013

    100        22             301        313        80         816   

At 31 December 2012

    97        23             304        296        73         793   

Land and buildings includes land with a cost of $15m (2012 – $15m) that is not subject to depreciation. Assets held under finance leases with a net book amount of $10m (2012 – $11m) are included within land and buildings.

Historically, capital expenditure represents the Group’s expected annual investment in property, plant and equipment and other intangible assets. This varies between 6% and 8% (2012 – 7% and 8%) of annual revenue.

Group capital expenditure relating to property, plant and equipment contracted but not provided for amounted to $20m (2012 – $4m).

The amount of borrowing costs capitalised in 2013 and 2012 was minimal.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
114      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

8 Goodwill

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Goodwill is not amortised but is reviewed for impairment annually. Goodwill is allocated to the cash-generating unit (‘CGU’) that is expected to benefit from the acquisition. The recoverable amount of CGUs to which goodwill has been allocated is tested for impairment annually. The CGUs, monitored by management, are at the business segment level, Advanced Surgical Devices and Advanced Wound Management.

 

If the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit is less than its carrying amount then an impairment loss is determined to have occurred. Any impairment losses that arise are recognised immediately in the income statement and are allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of goodwill and then to the carrying amounts of the other assets of the CGU.

 

In carrying out impairment reviews of goodwill a number of significant assumptions have to be made when preparing cash flow projections. These include the future rate of market growth, discount rates, the market demand for the products acquired, the future profitability of acquired businesses or products, levels of reimbursement and success in obtaining regulatory approvals. If actual results should differ, or changes in expectations arise, impairment charges may be required which would adversely impact operating results.

 

 

 

     Notes     2013
         $ million
    2012
        $ million
 

Cost

                       

At 1 January

      1,186        1,096   

Exchange adjustment

      17        17   

Acquisitions (i)

    21        53        73   

At 31 December

            1,256        1,186   

Impairment

                       

At 1 January and 31 December

                     

Net book amounts

            1,256        1,186   

 

(i)    Includes an adjustment of $16m (2012: $nil) following the finalisation of the Healthpoint acquisition balance sheet. See Note 21.4.

 

Each of the Group’s business segments represent a CGU and include goodwill as follows:

 

     
           

2013

        $ million

    2012
        $ million
 

Advanced Surgical Devices

      918        886   

Advanced Wound Management

            338        300   
              1,256        1,186   

In September 2013 and 2012 impairment reviews were performed by comparing the recoverable amount of each CGU with its carrying amount, including goodwill. These are updated during December, taking into account significant events that occurred between September and December.

For each CGU, the recoverable amounts are based on value-in-use which is calculated from pre-tax cash flow projections for five years using data from the Group’s budget and strategic planning process, the results of which are reviewed and approved by the Board. These projections exclude any estimated future cash inflows or outflows expected to arise from future restructurings. The five-year period is in-line with the Group’s strategic planning process.

The calculation of value-in-use for the identified CGUs is most sensitive to discount and growth rates as set out below:

The discount rate reflects management’s assessment of risks specific to the assets of each CGU. The pre-tax discount rate used in the Advanced Surgical Devices business is 10% (2012 – 10%) and for the Advanced Wound Management business it is 10% (2012 – 9%).

In determining the growth rate used in the calculation of the value-in-use, the Group considered the annual revenue growth and trading profit margins. Projections are based on anticipated volume and value growth in the markets served by the Group and assumptions as to market share movements. Each year the projections for the previous year are compared to actual results and variances are factored into the assumptions used in the current year. Growth rates for the five-year period for the Advanced Surgical Devices business vary up to 7% (2012 – 7%) and for the Advanced Wound Management business up to 18% (2012 – 9%).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    115

 

 

 

Specific considerations and strategies taken into account in determining the sales growth and trading profit margin for each CGU are:

 

Advanced Surgical Devices – In the Advanced Surgical Devices CGU management intends to deliver growth through continuing to focus on the customer, high-quality customer service, innovative product development and through continuing to make efficiency improvements

 

Advanced Wound Management – Management intends to develop this CGU by focusing on the higher added value sectors of exudate and infection management through improved wound bed preparation, moist and active healing, NPWT, healing of chronic wounds and tissue repair using bioactives and by continuing to improve efficiency.

A long-term growth rate of 3% for Advanced Surgical Devices business and 5% for the Advanced Wound Management business (2012 – both businesses 4%) in pre-tax cash flows is assumed after five years in calculating a terminal value for the Group’s CGUs. Management considers this to be an appropriate estimate based on the growth rates of the markets in which the Group operates.

Management has considered the following sensitivities:

 

Growth of market and market share – Management has considered the impact of a variance in market growth and market share. The value-in-use calculation shows that if the assumed long-term growth rate was reduced to nil, the recoverable amount of all of the CGUs independently would still be greater than their carrying values

 

Discount rate – Management has considered the impact of an increase in the discount rate applied to the calculation. The value-in-use calculation shows that for the recoverable amount of the CGU to be less than its carrying value, the discount rate would have to be increased to 33% (2012 – 31%) for the Advanced Surgical Devices business and 65% (2012 – 49%) for the Advanced Wound Management business.

9 Intangible assets

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 
 

 

 

Intangible assets

 

Intangible assets acquired separately from a business combination (including purchased patents, know-how, trademarks, licences and distribution rights) are initially measured at cost. The cost of intangible assets acquired in a material business combination (referred to as acquisition intangibles) is the fair value as at the date of acquisition. Following initial recognition, intangible assets are carried at cost less any accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses. All intangible assets are amortised on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful economic lives. The estimated useful economic life of an intangible asset ranges between three and 20 years depending on its nature. Internally generated intangible assets are expensed in the income statement as incurred.

 

Purchased computer software and certain costs of information technology projects are capitalised as intangible assets. Software that is integral to computer hardware is capitalised as plant and equipment.

 

Impairment of intangible assets

 

The carrying values of intangible assets are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may be impaired. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in order to determine the extent of impairment loss. Where it is not possible to estimate the recoverable amount of an individual asset, the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit to which it belongs.

 

An asset’s recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s or cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs to sell and its value-in-use. In assessing value -in-use, its estimated future cash flow is discounted to its present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects the current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset.

 

In carrying out impairment reviews of intangible assets a number of significant assumptions have to be made when preparing cash flow projections. These include the future rate of market growth, discount rates, the market demand for the products acquired, the future profitability of acquired businesses or products, levels of reimbursement and success in obtaining regulatory approvals. If actual results should differ, or changes in expectations arise, impairment charges may be required which would adversely impact operating results.

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
116      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

9 Intangible assets continued

 

 

     Acquisition
        intangibles
$  million
            Software
$ million
    

        Distribution
rights

$ million

    

Patents &
        Intellectual
property

$ million

    

Total

        $ million

 

Cost

                                          

At 1 January 2012

    436        170         60         143         809   

Exchange adjustment

    11        1                 2         14   

Acquisitions (i)

    662                                662   

Additions

           37                 31         68   

Disposals

           (3      (17              (20

At 31 December 2012

    1,109        205         43         176         1,533   

Exchange adjustment

    3                                3   

Acquisitions (ii)

    53                                53   

Additions

           53         27         18         98   

Disposals

           (29                      (29

At 31 December 2013

    1,165        229         70         194         1,658   

Amortisation and impairment

                                          

At 1 January 2012

    234        65         34         53         386   

Exchange adjustment

    6                                6   

Charge for the year

    43        26         10         15         94   

Disposals

                   (17              (17

At 31 December 2012

    283        91         27         68         469   

Exchange adjustment

    1                                1   

Charge for the year

    88        31         14         19         152   

Disposals

           (18                      (18

At 31 December 2013

    372        104         41         87         604   

Net book amounts

                                          

At 31 December 2013

    793        125         29         107         1,054   

At 31 December 2012

    826        114         16         108         1,064   

 

(i) The majority of this balance relates to the acquisition of the product rights for two established Healthpoint products (see Note 21.4). These product rights are amortised over 15 years.
(ii) Includes an adjustment of $11m following the finalisation of the Healthpoint acquisition balance sheet. See Note 21.4.

Group capital expenditure relating to software contracted but not provided for amounted to $21m (2012 – $4m).

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    117

 

 

 

 

 

10 Investments

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Investments, other than those related to associates, are initially recorded at fair value plus any directly attributable transaction costs on the trade date. The Group has an investment in an entity that holds mainly unquoted equity securities, which by their very nature have no fixed maturity date or coupon rate. The investment is classed as ‘available-for-sale’ and carried at fair value. The fair value of the investment is based on the underlying fair value of the equity securities: marketable securities are valued by reference to closing prices in the market; non-marketable securities are estimated considering factors including the purchase price, prices of recent significant private placements of securities of the same issuer and estimates of liquidation value. Changes in fair value are recognised in other comprehensive income except where management considers that there is objective evidence of an impairment of the underlying equity securities. Objective evidence would include a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of the investment below its cost less any impairment loss previously recognised. Impairment losses are recognised by reclassifying the losses accumulated in other reserves to profit or loss.

 

 

 

    

2013

        $ million

   

2012

        $ million

 

At 1 January

    2        4   

Impairment

           (2

At 31 December

    2        2   

11 Investments in associates

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Investments in associates, being those entities over which the Group has a significant influence and which is neither a subsidiary nor a joint venture, are accounted for using the equity method, with the Group recording its share of the associate’s profit and loss and other comprehensive income. The Group’s share of associates profit or loss is included in one separate income statement line and is calculated after deduction of their respective taxes.

 

 

At 31 December 2013 and 31 December 2012, the Group holds 49% of Bioventus LLC (‘Bioventus’). Bioventus is a limited liability company operating as a partnership. The Company’s headquarters is located in Durham, North Carolina, US. The Company focuses its medical product development around its core competencies of orthobiologic therapies and orthopaedic diagnostics from which it develops and markets clinically proven orthopaedic therapies and diagnostic tools, including osteoarthritis pain treatments, bone growth stimulators and ultrasound devices. The Company sells bone stimulation devices and a provider of osteoarthritis injection therapies. The loss after taxation recognised in the income statement relating to Bioventus was $2m (2012 – profit after taxation $4m).

The carrying amount of this investment was reviewed for impairment as at the balance sheet date. For the purposes of impairment testing the recoverable amount of this investment was based on its fair value less cost to sell, estimated using discounted cash flows. The fair value measurement was categorised as a level 3 fair value based on the inputs and valuation technique used. Given the relatively short passage of time between the date of acquisition and the impairment review, the estimated recoverable amount of the investment marginally exceeded its carrying amount. Management has identified that a reasonable possible change in the key assumptions and estimated cash flows could cause the carrying amount to exceed the recoverable amount. However, any such change would not result in the recognition of a material impairment loss.

In addition to its 49% ownership interest in Bioventus, the Group holds a senior secured five year loan note with Bioventus. The loan note was created in May 2012 with a principal amount of $160m and an annual coupon rate of LIBOR plus 5%. The loan note is carried at amortised cost. Interest receivable of $11m was accrued during 2013 (2012: $7m). In accordance with the terms of the agreement $10m of interest receivable has been rolled-up into principal during 2013. As at the balance sheet date, the carrying amount of the loan note and the related interest receivable is neither past due nor impaired.

In 2013, the Group sold its 49% interest in the Austrian entities Plus Orthopedics GmbH and Intraplant GmbH and its 20% interest in the German entity Intercus GmbH. The profit after taxation recognised in the income statement prior to the disposal was $1m (2012 – $nil).

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
118      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

11 Investments in associates continued

The following table summarises the financial position of the Group’s investment in these associates:

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

 

Share of results of associates:

   

Revenue

    113        80   

Operating costs and taxation

    (114     (76

Share of associates (loss)/profit after taxation recognised in the income statement

    (1     4   

Investments in associates at 1 January

    116        13   

Investment of 49% in Bioventus

           104   

Additional investment in Bioventus

           10   

Dividends received

    (1     (7

Impairment of goodwill in Austrian associate

           (4

Disposal of interest in Plus and Intraplant

    (7       

Other non-cash movements

           (4

Investments in associates at 31 December

    107        116   

Investments in associates is represented by:

   

Non-current assets

    315        310   

Current assets

    129        129   

Non-current liabilities

    (194     (167

Current liabilities

    (59     (33

Net assets (100%)

    191        239   

Group’s share of net assets (49%)

    93        117   

Group adjustments (i)

    14        (1

Investment in associate

    107        116   

 

(i)    Group adjustments primarily relate to an adjustment to the useful economic life of intangible assets.

   

Loans to associates:

   

Loan note receivable from Bioventus

    171        160   

Accrued interest on loan note receivable

    7        7   
      178        167   

12 Inventories

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Finished goods and work-in-progress are valued at factory cost, including appropriate overheads, on a first-in first-out basis. Raw materials and bought-in finished goods are valued at purchase price. All inventories are reduced to net realisable value where lower than cost. Inventory acquired as part of a business acquisition is valued at selling price less costs of disposal and a profit allowance for selling efforts.

 

Orthopaedic instruments are generally not sold but provided to customers and distributors for use in surgery. They are recorded as inventory until they are deployed at which point they are transferred to plant and equipment and depreciated over their useful economic lives of between three and five years.

 

A feature of the orthopaedic business is the high level of product inventory required, some of which is located at customer premises and is available for customers’ immediate use (referred to as consignment inventory). Complete sets of product, including large and small sizes, have to be made available in this way. These outer sizes are used less frequently than standard sizes and towards the end of the product life cycle are inevitably in excess of requirements. Adjustments to carrying value are therefore required to be made to orthopaedic inventory to anticipate this situation. These adjustments are calculated in accordance with a formula based on levels of inventory compared with historical or forecast usage. This formula is applied on an individual product line basis and is first applied when a product group has been on the market for two years. This method of calculation is considered appropriate based on experience but it involves management judgements on effectiveness of inventory deployment, length of product lives, phase-out of old products and efficiency of manufacturing planning systems.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    119

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

    

2011

            $ million

 

Raw materials and consumables

    151        138         140   

Work-in-progress

    72        45         24   

Finished goods and goods for resale

    783        718         695   
      1,006        901         859   

Reserves for excess and obsolete inventories were $354m (2012 – $332m, 2011 – $322m). During 2013, $73m was recognised as an expense within cost of goods sold resulting from the write down of excess and obsolete inventory (2012 – $84m, 2011 – $65m). The cost of inventories recognised as an expense and included in cost of goods sold amounted to $958m (2012 – $906m, 2011 – $991m).

Notwithstanding inventory acquired within acquisitions, no inventory is carried at fair value less costs to sell in any year.

13 Trade and other receivables

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Trade and other receivables are carried at amortised cost, less any allowances for uncollectible amounts. They are included in current assets, except for maturities greater than 12 months after the balance sheet date. These are classified as non-current assets.

 

The Group manages credit risk through credit limits which require authorisation commensurate with the size of the limit and which are regularly reviewed. Credit limit decisions are made based on available financial information and the business case. Significant receivables are regularly reviewed and monitored at Group level. The Group has no significant concentration of credit risk, with exposure spread over a large number of customers and geographies. Furthermore the Group’s principal customers are backed by government and public or private medical insurance funding, which historically represent a lower risk of default. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date is the fair value of each class of receivable. The Group does not hold any collateral as security.

 

 

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

   

2011

            $ million

 

Trade receivables

    992        964        936   

Less: provision for bad and doubtful debts

    (57     (49     (36

Trade receivables – net (loans and receivables)

    935        915        900   

Derivatives – forward foreign exchange contracts

    28        12        21   

Other receivables

    60        65        50   

Prepayments and accrued income

    90        73        66   
      1,113        1,065        1,037   

Management considers that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates to the fair value.

The provision for bad and doubtful debts is based on specific assessments of risk and reference to past default experience. The bad debt expense for the year was $15m (2012 – $16m, 2011 – $42m). Amounts due from insurers in respect of the macro textured claim of $138m (2012 – $137m, 2011 – $136m) are included within other receivables and have been provided in full.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
120      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

13 Trade and other receivables continued

The amount of trade receivables that were past due were as follows:

 

    

2013

        $ million

   

2012

        $ million

   

2011

        $ million

 

Past due not more than three months

    206        225        198   

Past due more than three months and not more than six months

    52        52        51   

Past due more than six months and not more than one year

    61        52        59   

Past due more than one year

    70        80        94   
    389        409        402   

Neither past due nor impaired

    603        555        534   

Provision for bad and doubtful debts

    (57     (49     (36

Trade receivables – net (loans and receivables)

    935        915        900   

 

Movements in the provision for bad and doubtful debts were as follows:

     

 

At 1 January

    49        36        49   

Exchange adjustment

    1               (1

Receivables provided for during the year

    15        16        42   

Utilisation of provision

    (8     (3     (34

Provision transferred to assets held for sale

                  (20

At 31 December

    57        49        36   

 

Trade receivables include amounts denominated in the following major currencies:

 

     
    

2013

        $ million

   

2012

        $ million

   

2011

        $ million

 

US Dollar

    293        258        238   

Sterling

    103        100        75   

Euro

    271        276        317   

Other

    268        281        270   

Trade receivables – net (loans and receivables)

    935        915        900   

 

14 Trade and other payables

 

     
           

2013

        $ million

   

2012

        $ million

 

Trade and other payables due within one year

                       

Trade and other payables

      751        646   

Derivatives – forward foreign exchange contracts

      20        10   

Acquisition consideration

            14          
              785        656   

Other payables due after one year:

                       

Acquisition consideration

            7        8   

The acquisition consideration due after more than one year is expected to be payable as follows: $4m in 2015 and $3m in 2016 (2012 – $8m in 2014).

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    121

 

 

 

 

 

15 Cash and borrowings

15.1 Net debt

Net debt comprises borrowings and credit balances on currency swaps less cash at bank.

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

 

Bank overdrafts and loans due within one year

    44        38   

Long-term borrowings

    347        430   

Borrowings

    391        468   

Cash at bank

    (137     (178

Debit balance on derivatives – currency swaps

    (1     (2

Net debt

    253        288   

Borrowings are repayable as follows:

 

    

Within

one year

or on demand

$ million

     Between
one and
two years
$ million
     Between
two and
three years
$ million
     Between
three and
four years
$ million
     Between
four and
five years
$ million
     After
five years
$ million
     Total
$ million
 

At 31 December 2013:

                   

Bank loans

    31         335                                         366   

Bank overdrafts

    11                                                 11   

Finance lease liabilities

    2         2         2         2         3         3         14   
      44         337         2         2         3         3         391   

At 31 December 2012:

                   

Bank loans

    25         1         415                                 441   

Bank overdrafts

    11                                                 11   

Finance lease liabilities

    2         2         2         2         2         6         16   
      38         3         417         2         2         6         468   

15.2 Post balance sheet event

In December 2013, the Group signed a private placement agreement to borrow $325m of long-term debt. The funds, which have a weighted average fixed rate of 3.7% and an average maturity of just over nine years, were drawn down on 21 January 2014 and used to repay existing bank debt.

Subsequent to the balance sheet date, on 3 February 2014 the Group announced the execution of a definitive agreement to acquire 100% of the shares of ArthroCare Corp. for approximately $1.7 billion. The acquisition is subject to customary conditions, including a vote of ArthroCare’s shareholders and governmental clearances. The acquisition is expected to close in mid-2014. The acquisition will be financed through existing debt facilities and cash balances, including the existing $1 billion revolving credit facility and a new two-year $1.4 billion term loan facility, established in February 2014.

15.3 Assets pledged as security

Assets are pledged as security under normal market conditions. Secured borrowings and pledged assets are as follows:

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

 

Finance lease liabilities – due within one year

    2        2   

Finance lease liabilities – due after one year

    12        14   

Total amount of secured borrowings

    14        16   

Total net book value of assets pledged as security:

   

Property, plant and equipment

    10        11   
      10        11   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
122      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

15 Cash and borrowings continued

15.4 Currency swap analysis

All currency swaps are stated at fair value. Gross US Dollar equivalents of $146m (2012 – $175m) receivable and $145m (2012 – $173m) payable have been netted. Currency swaps comprise foreign exchange swaps and were used in 2013 and 2012 to hedge intragroup loans and other monetary items.

Currency swaps mature as follows:

 

                             
At 31 December 2013   Amount receivable
$ million
    Amount payable
Currency  million
 

Within one year:

   

Euro

    28        EUR 20   

Japanese Yen

    13        JPY 1,315   

Chinese Renminbi

    17        CNY 100   

Sterling

    11        GBP 7   
      69           
   
At 31 December 2013   Amount receivable
Currency million
    Amount payable
$ million
 

Within one year:

   

New Zealand Dollar

    NZD 9        7   

Swiss Franc

    CHF 14        16   

Swedish Krona

    SEK 31        5   

Australian Dollar

    AUD 41        36   

Canadian Dollar

    CAD 3        3   

Sterling

    GBP 6        10   
              77   
   
At 31 December 2012   Amount receivable
$ million
    Amount payable
Currency million
 

Within one year:

   

Euro

    76        EUR 58   

Japanese Yen

    19        JPY 1,500   

Canadian Dollar

    17        CAD 17   
      112           
   
At 31 December 2012   Amount receivable
Currency million
    Amount payable
$ million
 

Within one year:

   

New Zealand Dollar

    NZD 1        1   

Swiss Franc

    CHF 35        38   

Swedish Krona

    SEK 33        5   

Australian Dollar

    AUD 14        15   

Japanese Yen

    JPY 335        4   
              63   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    123

 

 

 

15.5 Liquidity risk exposures

The Board has established a set of policies to manage funding and currency risks. The Group uses derivative financial instruments only to manage the financial risks associated with underlying business activities and their financing.

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group is not able to settle or meet its obligations on time or at a reasonable price. The Group’s policy is to ensure that there is sufficient funding and facilities in place to meet foreseeable borrowing requirements. The Group manages and monitors liquidity risk through regular reporting of current cash and borrowing balances and periodic preparation and review of short and medium-term cash forecasts having regard to the maturities of investments and borrowing facilities.

Bank loans and overdrafts represent drawings under total committed facilities of $1,008m (2012 – $1,017m) and total uncommitted facilities of $319m (2012 – $341m). The Group has undrawn committed facilities of $672m (2012 – $597m). Of the undrawn committed facilities, $665m expires after one but within two years (2012 – $ 586m expiring after two but within five). The interest payable on borrowings under committed facilities is at floating rate and is typically based on the LIBOR interest rate relevant to the term and currency concerned.

In December 2010, the Company entered into a five-year $1 billion multi-currency revolving facility with an initial interest rate of 70 basis points over LIBOR. The commitment fee on the undrawn amount of the revolving facility is 24.5 basis points. The Company is subject to restrictive covenants under the facility agreement requiring the Group’s ratio of net debt to EBITDA to not exceed 3.0 to 1 and the ratio of EBITA to net interest to not be less than 3.0 to 1, with net debt, EBITDA, EBITA and net interest all being calculated as defined in the agreement. These financial covenants are tested at the end of each half year for the 12 months ending on the last day of the testing period. As of 31 December 2013, the Company was in compliance with these covenants. The facility is also subject to customary events of default, none of which are currently anticipated to occur.

15.6 Year-end financial liabilities by contractual maturity

The table below analyses the Group’s year-end financial liabilities by contractual maturity date, including interest payments and excluding the impact of netting arrangements:

 

    

Within one
year or on
demand

$ million

   

Between
one and
two years

$ million

    

Between
two and
five years

$ million

    

After
five years

$ million

    Total
$ million
 

At 31 December 2013

                                         

Non-derivative financial liabilities:

           

Bank overdrafts and loans

    42        335                        377   

Trade and other payables

    751                               751   

Finance lease liabilities

    3        3         9         3        18   

Acquisition consideration

    14        4         3                21   

Derivative financial liabilities:

           

Currency swaps/forward foreign exchange contracts – outflow

    1,734                               1,734   

Currency swaps/forward foreign exchange contracts – inflow

    (1,733                            (1,733
      811        342         12         3        1,168   

At 31 December 2012

                                         

Non-derivative financial liabilities:

           

Bank overdrafts and loans

    42        4         418                464   

Trade and other payables

    646                               646   

Finance lease liabilities

    3        3         9         6        21   

Acquisition consideration

           8                        8   

Derivative financial liabilities:

           

Currency swaps/forward foreign exchange contracts – outflow

    1,422                               1,422   

Currency swaps/forward foreign exchange contracts – inflow

    (1,424                            (1,424
      689        15         427         6        1,137   

The amounts in the tables above are undiscounted cash flows, which differ from the amounts included in the balance sheet where the underlying cash flows have been discounted.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
124      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

15 Cash and borrowings continued

15.7 Finance leases

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Leases are classified as finance leases when the terms of the lease transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the Group. All other leases are classified as operating leases.

 

The leased assets are measured initially at an amount equal to the lower of their fair value and the present value of the minimum lease payments. Assets held under finance leases are capitalised as property, plant or equipment and depreciated accordingly. Minimum lease payments are apportioned between the finance expense and the reduction in the outstanding liability. The finance expense is allocated to each period during the lease term so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability.

 

 

Future minimum lease payments under finance leases together with the present value of the minimum lease payments are as follows:

 

                                 
     2013
$ million
    2012
$ million
 

Within one year

    3        3   

After one and within two years

    3        3   

After two and within three years

    3        3   

After three and within four years

    3        3   

After four and within five years

    3        3   

After five years

    3        6   

Total minimum lease payments

    18        21   

Discounted by imputed interest

    (4     (5

Present value of minimum lease payments

    14        16   

Present value of minimum lease payments can be split out as: $2m (2012 – $2m) due within one year, $9m (2012 – $8m) due between one to five years and $3m (2012– $6m) due after five years.

16 Financial instruments and risk management

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

 

Derivative financial instruments

 

Derivative financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently re-measured at their fair value at subsequent balance sheet dates.

 

Changes in the fair value of derivative financial instruments that are designated and effective as cash flow hedges of forecast third party and intercompany transactions are recognised in other comprehensive income until the associated asset or liability is recognised. Amounts taken to other comprehensive income are transferred to the income statement in the period in which the hedged transaction affects profit and loss. Where the hedged item is the cost of a non-financial asset, the amounts taken to other comprehensive income are transferred to the initial carrying value of the asset.

 

Currency swaps to match foreign currency net assets with foreign currency liabilities are fair valued at year-end. Changes in the fair values of currency swaps that are designated and effective as net investment hedges are matched in other comprehensive income against changes in value of the related net assets.

 

Interest rate swaps transacted to fix interest rates on floating rate borrowings are accounted for as cash flow hedges and changes in the fair values resulting from changes in market interest rates are recognised in other comprehensive income. Amounts taken to other comprehensive income are transferred to the income statement when the hedged transaction affects profit and loss.

 

Any ineffectiveness on hedging instruments and changes in the fair value of derivative financial instruments that do not qualify for hedge accounting are recognised in the income statement within other finance income/(costs) as they arise.

 

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. At that point in time, any cumulative gain or loss on the hedging instrument recognised in other comprehensive income is retained there until the forecast transaction occurs. If a hedged transaction is no longer expected to occur, the net cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is transferred to the income statement for the period.

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    125

 

 

 

16.1 Foreign exchange exposures

The Group operates in over 90 countries and as a consequence has transactional and translational foreign exchange exposure. It is Group policy for operating units not to hold material unhedged monetary assets or liabilities other than in their functional currencies.

Foreign exchange variations affect trading results in two ways. Firstly, on translation of overseas sales and profits into US Dollars and secondly, transactional exposures arising where some or all of the costs of sale are incurred in a different currency from the sale. The principal transactional exposures arise as the proportion of costs in US Dollars, Sterling and Swiss Francs exceed the proportion of sales in each of these currencies and correspondingly the proportion of sales in Euros exceeds the proportion of costs in Euros.

The impact of currency movements on the cost of purchases is partly mitigated by the use of forward foreign exchange contracts. The Group uses forward foreign exchange contracts, designated as cash flow hedges, to hedge forecast third party and intercompany trading cash flows for forecast foreign currency inventory purchases for up to one year. When a commitment is entered into, forward foreign exchange contracts are normally used to increase the hedge to 100% of the exposure. Cash flows relating to cash flow hedges are expected to occur within 12 months of inception and profits and losses on hedges are expected to enter into the determination of profit (within cost of goods sold) within a further 12-month period. The principal currencies hedged by forward foreign exchange contracts are US Dollars, Euros and Sterling. At 31 December 2013, the Group had contracted to exchange within one year the equivalent of $1.6bn (2012 – $1.3bn).

Based on the Group’s net borrowings as at 31 December 2013, if the US Dollar were to weaken against all currencies by 10%, the Group’s net borrowings would decrease by $2m (2012 – decrease by $8m) as the Group held a higher amount of foreign denominated cash than foreign denominated borrowings. In respect of borrowings held in a different currency to the relevant reporting entity, if the US Dollar were to weaken by 10% against all other currencies, the Group’s borrowings would increase by $4m (2012 – decrease by $4m).

If the US Dollar were to weaken by 10% against all other currencies, then the fair value of the forward foreign exchange contracts as at 31 December 2013 would have been $34m lower (2012 – $23m). Similarly, if the Euro were to weaken by 10% against all other currencies, then the fair value of the forward foreign exchange contracts as at 31 December 2013 would have been $27m higher (2012 – $30m). Movements in the fair value of forward foreign exchange contracts would be recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in the hedging reserve.

A 10% strengthening of the US Dollar or Euro against all other currencies at 31 December 2013 would have had the equal but opposite effect to the amounts shown above, on the basis that all other variables remain constant.

The Group’s policy to hedge all actual foreign exchange exposures and the Group’s forward foreign exchange contracts are designated as cash flow hedges. The net impact of transaction related foreign exchange on the income statement from a movement in exchange rates on the value of forward foreign exchange contracts is not significant. In addition, the movements in the fair value of other financial instruments used for hedging such as currency swaps for which hedge accounting is not applied, offset movements in the values of assets and liabilities and are recognised through the income statement.

16.2 Interest rate exposures

The Group is exposed to interest rate risk on cash, borrowings and certain currency swaps which are all at floating rates. When required the Group uses interest rate swaps to meet its objective of protecting borrowing costs within parameters set by the Board. Interest rate swaps are accounted for as cash flow hedges and, as such, changes in fair value resulting from changes in market interest rates are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in the hedging reserve, with the fair value of the interest rate swaps recorded in the balance sheet. The cash flows resulting from interest rate swaps match cash flows on the underlying borrowings so that there is no net cash flow from movements in market interest rates on the hedged items. During 2013 and 2012 the Group was not exposed to significant interest rate risk. As a result, interest rate swaps were not utilised in accordance with the Board approved policy.

Based on the Group’s gross borrowings as at 31 December 2013, if interest rates were to increase by 100 basis points in all currencies then the annual net interest charge would increase by $4m (2012 – $5m). A decrease in interest rates by 100 basis points in all currencies would have an equal but opposite effect to the amounts shown above.

16.3 Credit risk exposures

The Group limits exposure to credit risk on counterparties used for financial instruments through a system of internal credit limits which, with certain minor exceptions due to local market conditions, require counterparties to have a minimum ‘A’ rating from one of the major ratings agencies. The financial exposure of a counterparty is determined as the total of cash and deposits, plus the risk on derivative instruments, assessed as the fair value of the instrument plus a risk element based on the nominal value and the historic volatility of the market value of the instrument. The Group does not anticipate non-performance of counterparties and believes it is not subject to material concentration of credit risk as the Group operates within a policy of counterparty limits designed to reduce exposure to any single counterparty.

The maximum credit risk exposure on derivatives at 31 December 2013 was $29m (2012 – $14m), being the total debit fair values on forward foreign exchange contracts and currency swaps. The maximum credit risk exposure on cash at bank at 31 December 2013 was $137m (2012 – $178m). The Group’s exposure to credit risk is not material as the amounts are held in a wide number of banks in a number of different countries.

Credit risk on trade receivables is detailed in Note 13.

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
126      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

16 Financial instruments and risk management continued

16.4 Currency and interest rate profile of interest bearing liabilities and assets

Short-term debtors and creditors are excluded from the following disclosures.

Currency and Interest Rate Profile of Interest Bearing Liabilities:

 

                                            Fixed rate liabilities  
     Gross
borrowings
$ million
   

Currency
swaps

$ million

     Total
liabilities
$ million
     Floating
rate liabilities
$ million
     Fixed
rate liabilities
$ million
     Weighted
average
Interest
rate %
     Weighted
average time
for which
rate is fixed
Years
 

At 31 December 2013:

                                                            

US Dollar

    297        77         374         360         14         7.1         4   

Euro

    59        28         87         87                           

Other

    35        40         75         75                           

Total interest bearing liabilities

    391        145         536         522         14                     

At 31 December 2012:

                                                            

US Dollar

    432        62         494         478         16         7.1         4   

Euro

    7        76         83         83                           

Other

    29        35         64         64                           

Total interest bearing liabilities

    468        173         641         625         16                     

At 31 December 2013, $14m (2012 – $16m) of fixed rate liabilities relate to finance leases. In 2013, the Group also had liabilities due for deferred acquisition consideration (denominated in US Dollars and Brazilian Real) totalling $21m (2012 – $8m, 2011 – $11m) on which no interest was payable (see Note 14). There are no other significant interest bearing financial liabilities.

Floating rates on liabilities are typically based on the one or three-month LIBOR interest rate relevant to the currency concerned. The weighted average interest rate on floating rate borrowings as at 31 December 2013 was 1% (2012 – 1%).

Currency and Interest Rate Profile of Interest Bearing Assets:

 

    

Cash

at bank

                $ million

   

Currency

swaps

                $ million

    

Total assets

            $ million

    

Floating

rate assets

            $ million

 

At 31 December 2013:

                                 

US Dollars

    8        69         77         77   

Other

    129        77         206         206   

Total interest bearing assets

    137        146         283         283   

At 31 December 2012:

                                 

US Dollars

    59        113         172         172   

Other

    119        62         181         181   

Total interest bearing assets

    178        175         353         353   

Floating rates on assets are typically based on the short-term deposit rates relevant to the currency concerned. There were no fixed rate assets at 31 December 2013 or 31 December 2012.

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    127

 

 

 

16.5 Fair value of financial assets and liabilities

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 

 
 

 

Measurement of fair values

 

A number of the Group’s accounting policies and disclosures require the measurement of fair values, for both financial assets and liabilities and non-financial assets acquired in a business combination (see Note 21).

 

When measuring the fair value of an asset or liability, the Group uses market observable data as far as possible. Fair values are categorised into different levels in the fair value hierarchy based on the inputs used in the valuation techniques as follows: Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities; Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included in Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable data (unobservable inputs).

 

The Group recognises transfers between the levels of the fair value hierarchy at the end of the reporting period during which the change has occurred.

 

 

The following table shows the carrying amounts and fair values of financial assets and financial liabilities, including their levels in the fair value hierarchy. It does not include fair value information for financial assets and financial liabilities not measured at fair value if the carrying amount is a reasonable approximation of fair value.

 

 

     Carrying amount          Fair value  
At 31 December 2013  

Designated
at fair
value

$ million

    Fair value –
hedging
instruments
$ million
    

Loans

and
receivables
$ million

    

Available
for sale

$ million

     Other
financial
liabilities
$ million
    

Total

$ million

         Level 2
$ million
     Level 3
$ million
     Total
$ million
 
Financial assets measured at fair value                           
Forward foreign exchange contracts            28                                 28           28                 28   
Investments                            2                 2                   2         2   
Currency swaps     1                                        1           1                 1   

 

   

 

 
    1        28                 2                 31           29         2         31   

 

   

 

 
Financial liabilities measured at fair value                           
Acquisition consideration     (21                                     (21                (21      (21
Forward foreign exchange contracts            (20                              (20        (20              (20

 

   

 

 
    (21     (20                              (41        (20      (21      (41

 

   

 

 
Financial assets not measured at fair value                           
Trade and other receivables                    1,085                         1,085              
Cash at bank                    137                         137              

 

            
                   1,222                         1,222              

 

            
Financial liabilities not measured at fair value                           
Bank overdrafts                                    (11      (11           
Bank loans                                    (366      (366           
Finance lease liabilities                                    (14      (14           
Trade and other payables                                    (751      (751           

 

            
                                   (1,142      (1,142           

 

            

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
128      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

16 Financial instruments and risk management continued

 

     Carrying amount           Fair value  
At 31 December 2012  

Designated
at fair
value

$ million

    Fair value –
hedging
instruments
$ million
    

Loans

and
receivables
$ million

    

Available
for sale

$ million

     Other
financial
liabilities
$ million
    

Total

$ million

          Level 2
$ million
     Level 3
$ million
     Total
$ million
 

Financial assets

measured at fair value

                           

Forward foreign exchange contracts

           12                                 12            12                 12   

Investments

                           2                 2                    2         2   

Currency swaps

    2                                        2            2                 2   
      2        12                 2                 16            14         2         16   

Financial liabilities

measured at fair value

                           

Acquisition consideration

    (8                                     (8                 (8      (8

Forward foreign exchange contracts

           (10                              (10         (10              (10
      (8     (10                              (18         (10      (8      (18

Financial assets not

measured at fair value

                           

Trade and other receivables

                   1,053                         1,053               

Cash at bank

                   178                         178               
                     1,231                         1,231               

Financial liabilities not

measured at fair value

                           

Bank overdrafts

                                   (11      (11            

Bank loans

                                   (441      (441            

Finance lease liabilities

                                   (16      (16            

Trade and other payables

                                   (646      (646            
                                     (1,114      (1,114            

The Group enters into derivative financial instruments with financial institutions with investment grade credit ratings. The fair value of forward foreign exchange contracts is calculated by reference to quoted market forward exchange rates for contracts with similar maturity profiles. The fair value of currency swaps is determined by reference to quoted market spot rates. As a result, foreign forward exchange contracts and currency swaps are classified as Level 2 within the fair value hierarchy.

As at 31 December 2013 and 31 December 2012, the fair value of derivatives is net of a credit valuation adjustment attributable to derivative counterparty default risk. The changes in counterparty credit risk had no material effect on the hedge effectiveness for derivatives designated in hedge relationships and other financial instruments recognised at fair value.

The fair value of contingent consideration is estimated using a discounted cash flow model. The valuation model considers the present value of expected payment, discounted using a risk-adjusted discount rate. The expected payment is determined by considering the possible scenarios, which relate to the achievement of established milestones and targets, the amount to be paid under each scenario and the probability of each scenario. As a result, contingent consideration is classified as Level 3 within the fair value hierarchy.

There were no transfers between level 1, 2 and 3 during 2013 and 2012.

For cash and cash equivalents, short-term loans and receivables, overdrafts and other short-term liabilities which have a maturity of less than three months the book values approximate the fair values because of their short-term nature.

Long-term borrowings are measured in the balance sheet at amortised cost. As the Group’s long-term borrowings are not quoted publicly and as market prices are not available their fair values are estimated by discounting future contractual cash flows to net present values at the current market interest rates available to the Group for similar financial instruments as at the year-end. At 31 December 2013 and 31 December 2012, the fair value of the Group’s long-term borrowing was not materially different from amortised cost.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

 

    129

 

 

 

17 Provisions and contingencies

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

In the normal course of business the Group is involved in various legal disputes. Provision is made for loss contingencies when it is deemed probable that an adverse outcome will occur and the amount of the loss can be reasonably estimated. Where the Group is the plaintiff in pursuing claims against third parties legal and associated expenses are charged to the income statement as incurred.

 

The recognition of provisions for legal disputes is subject to a significant degree of estimation. In making its estimates management takes into account the advice of internal and external legal counsel. Provisions are reviewed regularly and amounts updated where necessary to reflect developments in the disputes. The ultimate liability may differ from the amount provided depending on the outcome of court proceedings or settlement negotiations or as new facts emerge.

 

A provision for onerous contracts is recognised when the expected benefits to be derived by the Group from a contract are lower than the unavoidable cost of meeting its obligations under the contract. For the purpose of calculating any onerous lease provision, the Group has taken the discounted future lease payments, net of expected rental income. Before a provision is established, the Group recognises any impairment loss on the assets associated with that contract.

 

A provision for rationalisation is recognised when the Group has approved a detailed and formal restructuring plan, and the restructuring either has commenced or has been announced publicly. Future operating losses are not provided for.

 

 

17.1 Provisions

 

    

 

Rationalisation
provisions
$ million

 

   

 

Legal and other
provisions
$ million

 

    

Total
$ million

 

 

At 1 January 2012

    26        97         123   

Charge to income statement

    29        21         50   

Provision arising on acquisition

           13         13   

Utilised

    (30     (34      (64

At 31 December 2012

    25        97         122   

Charge to income statement

    15        22         37   

Utilised

    (22     (12      (34

At 31 December 2013

    18        107         125   

Provisions – due within one year

    18        42         60   

Provisions – due after one year

           65         65   

At 31 December 2013

    18        107         125   

Provisions – due within one year

    25        34         59   

Provisions – due after one year

           63         63   

At 31 December 2012

    25        97         122   

The principal provisions within rationalisation provisions relate to the rationalisation of operational sites (mainly severance and legal costs) arising from the legacy earnings improvement programme and people costs associated with the structural and process changes announced in August 2011.

Included within the legal and other provisions are:

 

$16m (2012 – $17m) relating to the declination of insurance coverage for macrotextured knee revisions (see Note 17.2)

 

A provision of $15m (2012 – $13m) relating to the acquisition and integration of Healthpoint Biotherapeutics (see Note 21.4)

 

The remaining balance largely represents provisions for various patent disputes and other litigation.

All provisions are expected to be substantially utilised within three years of 31 December 2013 and none are treated as financial instruments.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
130      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

17 Provisions and contingencies continued

17.2 Contingencies

The Company and its subsidiaries are parties to various legal proceedings, some of which include claims for substantial damages. The outcome of these proceedings cannot readily be foreseen, but management believes none of them are likely to result in a material adverse effect on the financial position of the Group. The Group provides for outcomes that are deemed to be probable and can be reliably estimated. There is no assurance that losses will not exceed provisions or will not have a significant impact on the Group’s results of operations in the period in which they are realised.

In August 2003, the Group withdrew voluntarily from all markets the macrotextured versions of its OXINIUM femoral knee components. A number of related claims have been filed, most of which have been settled. The aggregate cost at 31 December 2013 related to this matter is approximately $215m. The Group has sought recovery from its primary and excess insurers for costs of resolving the claims. The primary insurance carrier has paid $60m in full settlement of its policy liability. However, the excess carriers have denied coverage, citing defences relating to the wording of the insurance policies and other matters. In December 2004, the Group brought suit against them in the US district court for the Western District of Tennessee. Trial has not yet begun. An additional $22m was received during 2007 from a successful settlement with a third party.

A charge of $154m was recorded in 2004 for anticipated expenses in connection with macrotexture claims. Most of that amount has since been applied to settlements of such claims. Management believes that the $16m (2012 – $17m) provision remaining is adequate to cover remaining claims. Given the uncertainty inherent in such matters, there can be no assurance on this point.

17.3 Legal proceedings

Product liability claims

The Group faces other claims from time to time for alleged defects in its products and has on occasion recalled or withdrawn products from the market. Such claims are endemic to the orthopaedic device industry. The Group maintains product liability insurance subject to limits and deductibles that management believes are reasonable. All policies contain exclusions and limitations, however, and there can be no assurance that insurance will be available or adequate to cover all claims.

In recent years, there has been heightened concern about possible adverse effects of hip implant products with metal- on-metal bearing surfaces, and the Group has incurred and will continue to incur expenses to defend claims in this area. As of February 2014 approximately 650 such claims had been notified to the Group around the world, of which 310 had given rise to pending legal proceedings. Most of the pending legal proceedings are in the United States. Most claims relate to the Group’s Birmingham Hip Resurfacing (‘BHR’) product and the Birmingham Hip Modular Head (‘BHMH’) and R3 Metal Liner (‘R3ML’) components. In 2012, the Group restricted instructions for use of the BHMH and ceased offering the R3ML. In 2013, the Group’s US subsidiary agreed with lawyers representing metal-on-metal claimants to consolidate pre-trial proceedings (such as discovery) in their lawsuits in a state court in Memphis, Tennessee, and those lawsuits account for most of the US proceedings. The Group takes care to monitor the clinical evidence relating to its metal hip implant products and ensure that its product offerings and training are designed to serve patients’ interests.

Business practice investigations

Business practices in the healthcare industry are subject to regulation and review by various government authorities. From time to time authorities undertake investigations of the Group’s activities to verify compliance. In September 2007, the SEC notified the Group that it was conducting an informal investigation of companies in the medical devices industry, including the Group, regarding possible violations of the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (‘FCPA’) in connection with the sale of products in certain countries outside of the US. The US Department of Justice (‘DOJ’) subsequently joined the SEC’s request.

On 6 February 2012, Smith & Nephew announced that it had reached settlement with the SEC and DOJ in connection with this matter. Smith & Nephew paid slightly less than $23m in fines and profit disgorgement and committed to maintain an enhanced compliance programme and appoint an independent monitor for at least 18 months to review and report on its compliance programme. The monitor’s final report was filed in late 2013, and the independent monitorship has now been terminated. The settlement agreements impose detailed reporting, compliance and other requirements on Smith & Nephew for a three-year term. Failure to comply with these requirements, or any other violation of law, could have severe consequences for the Group.

Intellectual property disputes

The Group is engaged, as both plaintiff and defendant, in litigation with various competitors and others over claims of patent infringement and other intellectual property matters. These disputes are being heard in courts in the US and other jurisdictions and also before agencies that examine patents. Outcomes are rarely certain and costs are often significant.

The Group has won a jury verdict in the US district court for Oregon against Arthrex Inc. for infringement of the Group’s patents relating to suture anchors. The verdict was initially overturned by the district court but then (in January 2013) reinstated on appeal. Arthrex continues to appeal the amount of the damages award.

Other matters

In April 2009, the Group was served with a subpoena by the US Department of Justice in Massachusetts requiring the production of documents from 1995 to 2009 associated with the marketing and sale of the Group’s EXOGEN bone growth stimulator. Similar subpoenas have been served on a number of competitors in the bone growth stimulator market. Around the same time a qui tam or ‘whistle-blower’ complaint concerning the industry’s sales and marketing of those products, originally filed in 2005 against the primary manufacturers of bone growth stimulation products (including Smith & Nephew), was unsealed in federal court in Boston, Massachusetts. A motion to dismiss that complaint was denied in December 2010.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    131

 

 

 

The Group is subject to country of origin requirements under the US Buy American and Trade Agreements Acts with regard to sales to certain US government customers. The Group has voluntarily disclosed to the US Veterans Administration and the US Department of Defense that a small percentage of the products sold to the US government in the past, primarily from the orthopaedics business, may have originated from countries that are not eligible for such sales except with government consent. Government auditors subsequently conducted an on-site visit at the Group’s orthopaedics business. In December 2008, three months after Smith & Nephew’s initial voluntary disclosure, a whistle-blower suit was filed in the US district court for the Western District of Tennessee alleging these violations. Smith & Nephew’s motion to dismiss the suit was denied in November 2010.

18 Retirement benefit obligations

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

The Group’s major pension plans are of the defined benefit type. A defined benefit pension plan defines an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on retirement, which is dependent on various factors such as age, years of service and final salary. The Group’s obligation is calculated separately for each plan by discounting the estimated future benefit that employees have earned in return for their service in the current and prior periods. The fair value of any plan assets is deducted to arrive at the net liability.

 

The calculation of the defined benefit obligation is performed annually by external actuaries using the projected unit credit method. Re-measurements arising from defined benefit plans comprise actuarial gains and losses and the return on the plan assets net of the costs of managing the plan assets. The Group recognises these immediately in other comprehensive income (‘OCI’) and all other expenses, such as service cost, net interest cost, administration costs and taxes, are recognised in the income statement.

 

A number of key assumptions are made when calculating the fair value of the Group’s defined benefit pension plans. These assumptions impact the balance sheet asset and liabilities, operating profit and finance income/costs. The most critical assumptions are the discount rate, the rate of inflation and mortality assumptions to be applied to future pension plan liabilities. The discount rate is based on the yield at the reporting date on bonds that have a credit rating of AA, denominated in the currency in which the benefits are expected to be paid and have a maturity profile approximately the same as the Group’s obligations. In determining these assumptions management take into account the advice of professional external actuaries and benchmarks its assumptions against external data.

 

The Group determines the net interest expense/(income) on the net defined benefit liability/(asset) for the period by applying the discount rate used to measure the defined benefit obligation at the beginning of the annual period to the net defined benefit liability/(asset).

 

The Group also operates a number of defined contribution plans. A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which the Group and employees pay fixed contributions to a third party financial provider. The Group has no further payment obligations once the contributions have been paid. Contributions are recognised as an employee benefit expense when they are due.

 

 

18.1 Retirement benefit net (assets)/obligations

The Group’s retirement benefit obligations comprise:

 

     2013 $ million     2012 $ million  

Funded plans:

   

UK Plan

    50        (6)   

US Plan

    65        147   

Other Plans

    28        38   
    143        179   

Unfunded Plans:

   

Other Plans

    39        36   

Retirement Healthcare

    43        45   
      225        260   

Amount recognised on the balance sheet - liability

    230        266   

Amount recognised on the balance sheet - asset

    (5)        (6)   

The Group sponsors pension plans for its employees in 16 countries and these are established under the laws of the relevant country. Funded plans are funded by the payment of contributions and the assets are held by separate trust funds or insurance companies. In countries where there is no Company-sponsored pension plan, state benefits are considered by management to be adequate. Employees’ retirement benefits are the subject of regular management review. The Group’s defined benefit plans provide employees with an entitlement to retirement benefits varying between 1.3% and 66.7% of final salary on attainment of retirement rage. The level of entitlement is dependent on the year of service of the employee.

The Group’s two major defined benefit pension plans are in the UK and US. Both these plans were closed to new employees in 2003 and defined contribution plans are offered to new joiners.

The UK Plan operates under trust law and responsibility for its governance lies with a Board of Trustees. This Board is composed of representatives of the Group, plan participants and an independent trustee who act on behalf of members in accordance with the terms of the Trust Deed and Rules and relevant legislation. The UK Plan’s assets are held by the trust. Annual increases on benefits in payment are dependent on inflation. The main uncertainties affecting the level of benefits payable under the UK Plan are future inflation levels (including the impact of inflation on future salary increase) and the actual longevity of the membership.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
132      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

18 Retirement benefit obligations continued

The US Plan is governed by a US Pension Committee which is composed of both plan participants and representatives of the Group. In the US, the Pension Protection Act (2006) established both a minimum required contribution and a maximum deductible contribution. Failure to contribute at least the minimum required amount will subject the Company to significant penalties and contributions in excess of the maximum deductible have negative tax consequences. The minimum funding requirement is intended to fully fund the present value of accrued benefits over seven years.

18.2 Reconciliation of benefit obligations and pension assets

The movement in the Group’s pension benefit obligation and pension assets is as follows:

 

    

2013

           2012  
     Obligation
$ million
   

Asset

$ million

    

Total

$ million

           Obligation
$ million
     Asset
$ million
    

Total

$ million

 

Amounts recognised on the balance sheet at beginning of the period

    (1,487)        1,227         (260)              (1,350)         1,063         (287)   

Income statement expense:

                  

Current service cost

    (29)                (29)            (29)                 (29)   

Net interest (expense)/income, administration costs and taxes

    (62)        51         (11)              (63)         52         (11)   

Costs recognised in Income statement

    (91)        51         (40)              (92)         52         (40)   

Re-measurements:

                  

Actuarial gain due to liability experience

    1                1            18                 18   

Actuarial gain/(loss) due to financial assumptions change

    16                16            (51)                 (51)   

Actuarial loss due to demographic assumptions

    (42)                (42)            (13)                 (13)   

Return on plan assets greater than discount rate

           37         37                      41         41   

Re-measurements recognised in OCI

    (25)        37         12              (46)         41         (5)   

Cash:

                  

Employer contributions

           67         67                    73         73   

Employee contributions

    (4)        4                    (4)         4           
Benefits paid directly by the Group, taxes and administration costs paid from scheme assets     3        (3)                    1                 1   

Benefits paid

    45        (45)                      44         (44)           

Net cash

    44        23         67              41         33         74   

Exchange rates

    (22)        18         (4)              (40)         38         (2)   

Amount recognised on the balance sheet

    (1,581)        1,356         (225)              (1,487)         1,227         (260)   

Amount recognised on the balance sheet - liability

    (1,548)        1,318         (230)              (749)         483         (266)   

Amount recognised on the balance sheet - asset

    (33)        38         5              (738)         744         6   

Represented by:

 

                  
       
    2013            2012   
     
 
Obligation
$ million
  
  
   
 
Asset
$ million
  
  
    

 

Total

$ million

  

  

         
 
Obligation
$ million
  
  
    
 
Asset
$ million
  
  
    
 
Total
$ million
  
  

UK Plan

    (855)        805         (50)            (738)         744         6   

US Plan

    (482)        417         (65)            (506)         359         (147)   

Other Plans

    (244)        134         (110)              (243)         124         (119)   

Total

    (1,581)        1,356         (225)              (1,487)         1,227         (260)   

All benefits are vested at the end of each reporting period. The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation at the end of the reporting period is 20 years and 16 years for the UK and US plans respectively. For 2012, this was 19 years for the UK Plan and 17 years for the US Plan.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    133

 

 

 

18.3 Plan assets

The market value of the US, UK and Other Plans assets are as follows:

 

     2013 $ million     2012 $ million      2011 $ million  

UK Plan:

      

Assets with a quoted market price:

      

Cash and cash equivalents

    8        11         6   

Equity securities

    220        249         248   

Government bonds – fixed interest

    61        92         88   

                                 – index linked

    109        282         265   

Diversified growth funds

    159        110         49   
    557        744         656   

Other assets:

      

Insurance contract

    248                  

Market value of assets

    805        744         656   

US Plan:

      

Assets with a quoted market price:

      

Cash and cash equivalents

    6        1         5   

Equity securities

    181        242         195   

Government bonds – fixed interest

    64        106         88   

Corporate bonds

    151                  

Hedge funds

    15        10         10   

Market value of assets

    417        359         298   

Other Plans:

      

Assets with a quoted market price:

      

Cash and cash equivalents

    6        5         5   

Equity securities

    32        26         24   

Government bonds – fixed interest

    9        7         6   

                                 – index linked

    11        34         33   

Corporate bonds

    13        2         2   

Insurance contracts

    24                  

Property

    6        5         5   

Other quoted securities

    3        11         11   
    104        90         86   

Other assets:

      

Equities

           2         2   

Insurance contracts

    29        31         20   

Investment property

    1        1         1   

Market value of assets

    134        124         109   

Total market value of assets

    1,356        1,227         1,063   

No plans invest directly in property occupied by the Group or in financial securities issued by the Group.

The US and UK plan assets are invested in a diversified range of industries across a broad range of geographies. These assets include liability matching assets and annuity policies purchased by the trustees of each plan, which aim to match the benefits to be paid to certain members from the plan and therefore remove the investment, inflation and demographic risks in relation to those liabilities.

In January 2013, the UK Plan, in order to minimise longevity and interest risk, purchased an insurance contract with Rothesay Life covering a subset of the UK Plan pensioner liabilities. The terms of this policy means that it exactly matches the amount and timing of the pensioner obligations covered by the contract.

In accordance with IAS19, the fair value of the insurance contract is deemed to be the present value of the related obligations which is discounted at the AA corporate bond rate.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
134      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

18 Retirement benefit obligations continued

18.4 Expenses recognised in the income statement

The total expense relating to retirement benefits recognised for the year is $72m (2012 – $72m, 2011 – $71m). Of this cost recognised for the year, $40 million (2012 – $40m, 2011 – $42m) relates to the defined benefit plan and $32m (2012 – $32m, 2011 – $29m) relates to defined contributions.

The cost charged in respect of the Group’s defined contribution plans represents contributions payable to these plans by the Group at rates specified in the rules of the plans. These were charged to operating profit in selling, general and administrative expenses. There were $nil outstanding payments as at 31 December 2013 due to be paid over to the plans (2012 – $nil, 2011 – $nil).

Defined benefit plan costs comprise service cost which is charged to operating profit in selling, general and administrative expenses and net interest cost and administration costs and taxes which are reported as other finance costs.

The defined benefit pension costs charged for the UK and US plans are:

 

    

2013

 

    

2012

 

    

2011

 

 
     
 

 

UK Plan
            $  million

 

  
  

 

   
 

 

US Plan
            $  million

 

  
  

 

    
 

 

UK Plan
            $ million

 

  
  

 

    
 

 

US Plan
            $ million

 

  
  

 

    
 

 

UK Plan
            $ million

 

  
  

 

    
 

 

US Plan
            $ million

 

  
  

 

Service cost

    7        10         8         11         10         9   

Net interest cost, administration and taxes

    1        7         1         7         3         6   
      8        17         9         18         13         15   

18.5 Principal actuarial assumptions

The following are the principal financial actuarial assumptions used at the reporting date to determine the UK and US defined benefit obligations and expense.

 

    

2013

        % per annum

   

2012

        % per annum

    

2011

        % per annum

 

UK Plan:

      

Discount rate

    4.4        4.5         4.9   

Future salary increases

    3.9        3.5         5.1   

Future pension increases

    3.4        3.0         3.1   

Inflation (RPI)

    3.4        3.0         3.1   

Inflation (CPI)

    2.4        2.2         2.1   

US Plan:

      

Discount rate

    4.9        4.0         4.6   

Future salary increases

    3.0        3.0         4.5   

Inflation

    2.5        2.5         2.5   

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    135

 

 

 

 

Actuarial assumptions regarding future mortality are based on mortality tables. The UK uses the S1NA with projections in line with the CMI 2011 table and the US uses the RP2000 table with scale AA. The current longevities underlying the values of the obligations in the defined benefit plans are as follows:

 

    

2013

years

   

2012

years

   

2011

years

 

Life expectancy at age 60

                       

UK Plan:

     

Males

    29.3        28.7        28.6   

Females

    31.1        30.2        30.2   

US Plan:

     

Males

    23.8        22.9        22.8   

Females

    25.5        25.0        25.0   

Life expectancy at age 60 in 20 years’ time

                       

UK Plan:

     

Males

    32.2        31.2        31.0   

Females

    33.2        31.9        31.8   

US Plan:

     

Males

    23.8        24.6        24.5   

Females

    25.5        25.0        25.0   

18.6 Sensitivity analysis

The calculation of the defined benefit obligation is sensitive to the assumptions used. The following table summarises the increase/decrease on the UK and US defined benefit obligation and pension costs as a result of reasonably possible changes in some of the assumptions while holding all other assumptions consistent. The sensitivity to the inflation assumption change includes corresponding changes to the future salary increases and future pension increase assumptions. The analysis does not take into account the full distribution of cash flows expected under the plan.

 

     Increase in pension obligation           Increase in pension cost  

$ million

    +50bps/+1yr        -50bps/-1yr             +50bps/+1 yr         -50bps/-1yr   

UK Plan:

           

Discount rate

    -77        +88           -4         +4   

Inflation

    +87        -75           +5         -4   

Mortality

    +29        -29           +1         -1   

US Plan:

           

Discount rate

    -35        +35           -2         +2   

Inflation

    +5        -5           +1         -1   

Mortality

    +13        -13             +1         -1   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
136      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

18 Retirement benefit obligations continued

18.7 Risk

The pension plans expose the Group to the following risks:

 

 

 

Interest rate risk

 

 

Volatility in financial markets can change the calculations of the obligation dramatically as the calculation of the obligation is linked to yields on AA-rated corporate bonds. A decrease in the bond yield will increase the measure of plan liabilities, although this will be partially offset by increases in the value of matching plan assets such as bonds and insurance contracts.

Inflation risk   The UK Plan is linked to inflation. A high rate of inflation will lead to a higher liability. This risk is managed by holding inflation-linked bonds and an inflation-linked insurance contract in respect of some of the obligation.
Investment risk  

If the return on plan assets is below the discount rate, all else being equal, there will be an increase in the plan deficit.

 

In the UK, this risk is partially managed by holding bonds and a bulk annuity, together with a dynamic de-risking policy to switch growth assets into bonds over time.

 

In 2013, the US Pension committee implemented a dynamic de-risking policy to shift plan assets into longer term stable asset classes. The policy established ten pre-determined funded status levels and when each trigger point is reached, the plan assets are re-balanced accordingly.

Longevity risk  

The present value of the plans defined benefit liability is calculated by reference to the best estimate of the mortality of the plan participants both during and after their employment. An increase in the life expectancy of plan participants above that assumed will increase the benefit obligation.

 

The UK Plan, in order to minimise longevity risk, entered into an insurance contract which covers a portion of pensioner obligations.

Salary risk   The calculation of the defined benefit obligation uses the future estimated salaries of plan participants. Increases in the salary of plan participants above that assumed will increase the benefit obligation.

18.8 Funding

A full valuation is performed by actuaries for the Trustees of each plan to determine the level of funding required. Employer contributions rates, based on these full valuations, are agreed between the trustees of each plan and the Group. The assumptions used in the funding actuarial valuations may differ from those assumptions above. Employees are required to contribute to the plans.

UK Plan

The most recent full actuarial valuation of the UK Plan was undertaken as at 30 September 2012. These valuations are performed every two years with the next scheduled for 30 September 2014. Contributions to the UK Plan in 2013 were $37m (2012 – $39m, 2011 – $37m). This included supplementary payments of $31m (2012 – $30m, 2011 – $29m).

The Group has agreed to pay the supplementary payments each year until 2017. The agreed supplementary contributions for 2014 are $31m.

US Plan

Full actuarial valuations are performed annually for the US Plan with the last undertaken as at 20 September 2013. Contributions to the US Plan were $20m (2012 – $27m, 2011 – $30m) which included supplementary payments of $17m. The agreed contributions for 2014 are $26m.

18.9 Post balance sheet event

On 7 February 2014, the Group announced its intention to close the US Pension Plan to future accrual with effect from 31 March 2014. The Group expects to recognise a gain in 2014 as a result of the closure, but due to the member consultation period currently underway, is unable to calculate the precise past service cost adjustment. However, it is estimated that the gain will not be material. The effect of the closure has not been recognised as at 31 December 2013.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    137

 

 

 

 

 

19 Equity

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of ordinary shares, net of any tax effects, are recognised as a deduction from equity.

 

When shares recognised as equity are repurchased, the amount of the consideration paid, which includes directly attributable costs, net of any tax effects, is recognised as a deduction from equity. Repurchased shares are classified as treasury shares and are presented in the treasury share reserve. When treasury shares are sold or reissued subsequently, the amount received is recognised as an increase in equity and the resulting surplus or deficit on the transaction is presented within share premium.

 

 

19.1 Share capital

 

    

Ordinary shares (20¢)

 

         

Deferred Shares (£1.00)

 

         

Total

$ million

 
     Thousand     $ million           Thousand      $ million          

Authorised

                

At 31 December 2011

    1,223,591        245           50                   245   

At 31 December 2012

    1,223,591        245           50                   245   

At 31 December 2013

    1,223,591        245           50                   245   

Allotted, issued and fully paid

                

At 1 January 2011

    952,837        191           50                   191   

Share options

    1,991                                          

At 31 December 2011

    954,828        191           50                   191   

Share options

    8,752        2                                 2   

At 31 December 2012

    963,580        193           50                   193   

Share options

    5,587        1                             1   

Shares cancelled

    (51,000     (10                              (10

At 31 December 2013

    918,167        184             50                     184   

The deferred shares were issued in 2006 in order to comply with English Company law. They are not listed on any stock exchange and have extremely limited rights and effectively have no value. These rights are summarised as follows:

 

The holder shall not be entitled to participate in the profits of the Company;

 

The holder shall not have any right to participate in any distribution of the Company’s assets on a winding up or other distribution except that after the return of the nominal amount paid up on each share in the capital of the Company of any class other than the deferred shares and the distribution of a further $1,000 in respect of each such share there shall be distributed to a holder of a deferred share (for each deferred share held by him) an amount equal to the nominal value of the deferred share;

 

The holder shall not be entitled to receive notice, attend, speak or vote at any general meeting of the Company; and

 

The Company may create, allot and issue further shares or reduce or repay the whole or any part of its share capital or other capital reserves without obtaining the consent of the holders of the deferred shares.

The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to ensure the Group has adequate funds to continue as a going concern and sufficient flexibility within the capital structure to fund the ongoing growth of the business and to take advantage of business development opportunities including acquisitions.

The Group determines the amount of capital taking into account changes in business risks and future cash requirements. The Group reviews its capital structure on an ongoing basis and uses share buy-backs, dividends and the issue of new shares to adjust the retained capital.

The Group considers the capital that it manages to be as follows:

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

    

2011

            $ million

 

Share capital

    184        193         191   

Share premium

    535        488         413   

Capital redemption reserve

    10                  

Treasury shares

    (322     (735      (766

Retained earnings and other reserves

    3,640        3,938         3,349   
      4,047        3,884         3,187   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
138      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

19 Equity continued

19.2 Treasury shares

Treasury shares represents the holding of the Company’s own shares in respect of the Smith & Nephew Employee’s Share Trust and shares bought back as part of the share buy-back programme. On 2 May 2013, as part of the new Capital Allocation Framework, the Group announced the start of a new share buy-back programme to return $300m of surplus capital to its Shareholders. The programme has now been suspended as a result of our agreement to acquire ArthroCare Corp. announced on 3 February 2014. As at 31 December 2013, a total of 18.2m ordinary shares (2.0%) had been purchased at a cost of $226m and 51.0m ordinary shares (5.7%) had been cancelled. The maximum number of ordinary shares held in treasury during 2013 was 65.2m (7.3%) with a nominal value of $13.0m.

The Smith & Nephew 2004 Employees’ Share Trust (‘Trust’) was established to hold shares relating to the long-term incentive plans referred to in the ‘Directors’ Remuneration Report’. The Trust is administered by an independent professional trust company resident in Jersey and is funded by a loan from the Company. The cost of the Trust is charged to the income statement as it accrues. A partial dividend waiver is in place in respect of those shares held under the long-term incentive plans. The trust only accepts dividends in respect of nil-cost options and deferred bonus plan shares. The waiver represents less than 1% of the total dividends paid.

The movements in Treasury shares and the Employees’ Share Trust are as follows:

 

    

Treasury

$ million

 

   

 

Employees’

Share Trust

$ million

 

    

Total

$ million

 

 

At 1 January 2012

    750        16         766   

Shares transferred from treasury

    (10     10           

Shares transferred to Group beneficiaries

    (10     (21      (31

At 31 December 2012

    730        5         735   

Shares purchased

    226        5         231   

Shares transferred from treasury

    (8     8           

Shares transferred to Group beneficiaries

    (7     (14      (21

Shares cancelled

    (623             (623

At 31 December 2013

    318        4         322   
      
    

No of shares

million

 

   

 

No of shares

million

 

    

No of shares
million

 

 

At 1 January 2012

    61.2        1.4         62.6   

Shares transferred from treasury

    (0.9     0.9           

Shares transferred to Group beneficiaries

    (0.8     (1.8      (2.6

At 31 December 2012

    59.5        0.5         60.0   

Shares purchased

    18.2        0.4         18.6   

Shares transferred from treasury

    (0.6     0.6           

Shares transferred to Group beneficiaries

    (0.6     (1.2      (1.8

Shares cancelled

    (51.0             (51.0

At 31 December 2013

    25.5        0.3         25.8   

 

19.3 Dividends

 

      
    

2013

$ million

 

   

 

2012

$ million

 

    

2011

$ million

 

 

The following dividends were declared and paid in the year:

      

Ordinary final of 16.20¢ for 2012 (2011 – 10.80¢, 2010 – 9.82¢)

paid 8 May 2013

    146        97         88   

Ordinary interim of 10.40¢ for 2013 (2012 – 9.90¢, 2011 – 6.60¢)

paid 29 October 2013

    93        89         58   
      239        186         146   

A final dividend for 2013 of 17.0 US cents per ordinary share was proposed by the Board on 5 February 2014 and will be paid, subject to shareholder approval, on 7 May 2014 to shareholders on the Register of Members on 22 April 2014. The estimated amount of this dividend on 24 February 2014 is $152m.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    139

 

 

 

 

 

20 Cash flow statement

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

In the Group cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents includes cash at bank, other short-term liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less and bank overdrafts. In the Group balance sheet, bank overdrafts are shown within bank overdrafts and loans under current liabilities.

 

 

Analysis of net debt

 

    

 

Borrowings

 

 
    

Cash
$ million

 

   

Overdrafts
$ million

 

    

 

Due within
one year
$ million

 

    

Due after
one year
$ million

 

    

Net currency
swaps
$ million

 

    

Total
$ million

 

 

At 1 January 2011

    207        (12      (45      (642              (492

Net cash flow

    (21     (12      252         140         1         360   

Other non-cash changes

                   (517      517                   

Exchange adjustment

    (2     1         27         (31      (1      (6

At 31 December 2011

    184        (23      (283      (16              (138

Net cash flow

    (10     12         256         (414      1         (155

Exchange adjustment

    4                                1         5   

At 31 December 2012

    178        (11      (27      (430      2         (288

Net cash flow

    (38             (6      84         1         41   

Exchange adjustment

    (3                     (1      (2      (6

At 31 December 2013

    137        (11      (33      (347      1         (253

Reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net debt

 

    

 

2013
            $ million

 

   

 

2012
            $ million

 

   

 

2011
            $ million

 

 

Net cash flow from cash net of overdrafts

    (38     2        (33

Settlement of currency swaps

    1        1        1   

Net cash flow from borrowings

    78        (158     392   

Change in net debt from net cash flow

    41        (155     360   

Exchange adjustment

    (6     5        (6

Change in net debt in the year

    35        (150     354   

Opening net debt

    (288     (138     (492

Closing net debt

    (253     (288     (138

Cash and cash equivalents

 

For the purposes of the Group Cash Flow Statement cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2013 comprise cash at bank net of bank overdrafts.

 

  

  

    

 

2013
            $ million

 

   

 

2012
            $ million

 

   

 

2011
            $ million

 

 

Cash at bank

    137        178        184   

Bank overdrafts

    (11     (11     (23

Cash and cash equivalents

    126        167        161   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
140      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

21 Acquisitions and disposals

 

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

The Group accounts for business combinations using the acquisition method when control is transferred to the Group. The consideration transferred in the acquisition is measured at fair value, as are the identifiable net assets acquired. Any goodwill that arises is tested annually for impairment. Any gain on a bargain purchase is recognised in profit or loss immediately. Transaction costs are expensed as incurred, except if related to the issue of debt or equity securities.

 

Any contingent consideration payable is measured at fair value at the acquisition date. If the contingent consideration is classified as equity, then it is not re-measured and settlement is accounted for within equity. Otherwise, subsequent changes in the fair value of the contingent consideration are recognised in profit or loss.

 

 

21.1 Acquisitions

Year ended 31 December 2013

On 30 September 2013, the Group acquired certain assets and liabilities in respect of a Turkish business, which distributes products related to orthopaedic reconstruction, trauma, sports medicine and arthroscopic technologies.

The acquisition is deemed to be a business combination within the scope of IFRS 3.

The estimated fair value of the consideration is $63m and includes $12m of contingent consideration in respect of agreed milestones and $36m through the settlement of working capital commitments. The fair values shown below are provisional. If new information is obtained within the measurement period about facts and circumstances that existed at the acquisition date, the acquisition accounting will be revised.

The provisional estimate of goodwill arising on the acquisition is $12m. It is attributable to the additional economic benefits expected from the transaction, including the assembled workforce, which has been transferred as part of the acquisition. The goodwill recognised is expected to be deductible for tax purposes.

The following table summarises the consideration transferred, and the recognised amounts of assets acquired and liabilities assumed at the acquisition date.

 

                  $ million  

Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed

 

Property, plant and equipment

    4   

Inventories

    8   

Trade receivables and prepayments

    24   

Identifiable intangible assets

    17   

Payables and accruals

    (2

Net assets

    51   

Goodwill

    12   

Cost of acquisition

    63   

The Group incurred acquisition-related costs of $4m, primarily related to external legal fees and due diligence costs. These costs have been recognised in administrative expenses in the Group’s income statement.

In 2013, the contribution to revenue and attributable profit from the acquisition was immaterial. If the acquisition had occurred at the beginning of the year the contribution to revenue and attributable profit would have also been immaterial.

Other acquisitions

During the year ended 31 December 2013, the Group acquired a Brazilian distributor of its advanced wound management products and a business based in India primarily engaged in the manufacture and distribution of trauma products. These acquisitions are deemed to be business combinations within the scope of IFRS 3.

The aggregated total estimated fair value of the consideration is $63m and includes $2m of contingent consideration and $2m through the settlement of working capital commitments. The fair values shown below are provisional. If new information is obtained within the measurement period about facts and circumstances that existed at the acquisition date, the acquisition accounting will be revised.

As at the acquisition date, the aggregated value of the net assets acquired was $38 million, which included property, plant and equipment of $1 million, inventory of $4 million, trade receivables and prepayments of $3 million, identifiable intangible assets of $47 million, payables and accruals of $3 million and deferred tax liabilities of $14 million.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    141

 

 

 

The provisional aggregated estimate of goodwill arising on the acquisitions is $25m. This is attributable to the additional economic benefits expected from the transactions, including the assembled workforces, which have been transferred as part of the acquisitions. The goodwill recognised is not expected to be deductible for tax purposes.

In 2013, the contribution to revenue and attributable profit from these acquisitions is immaterial. If these acquisitions had occurred at the beginning of the year their contribution to revenue and attributable profit would have also been immaterial.

21.2 Post balance sheet event

Subsequent to the balance sheet date, on 3 February 2014 the Group announced the execution of a definitive agreement to acquire 100% of the shares of ArthroCare Corp. for approximately $1.7 billion. The acquisition is subject to customary conditions, including a vote of ArthroCare’s shareholders and governmental clearances. The acquisition is expected to close in mid-2014. The acquisition will be financed through existing debt facilities and cash balances, including the existing $1 billion revolving credit facility and a new two-year $1.4 billion term loan facility, established in February 2014. Information regarding the assets and liabilities acquired will not be available until after completion.

21.3 Commitment

On 26 March 2013, the Group entered into an agreement to acquire the assets related to the distribution business for its sport medicine, orthopaedic reconstruction, and trauma products in Brazil. This acquisition is expected to close in the first half of 2014 subject to the satisfaction of conditions required for closing. The final consideration for this acquisition is subject to change based on the terms and conditions of the agreement and is not expected to be material. As at 31 December 2013 and the date of approval of these financial statements, the Group does not hold any legal ownership in, or control this business.

21.4 Year ended 31 December 2012

On 21 December 2012 the Group acquired substantially all the assets of Healthpoint Biotherapeutics (‘Healthpoint’), a leader in bioactive debridement, dermal repair and regeneration wound care treatments.

The acquisition is deemed to be a business combination within the scope of IFRS 3. Consideration was in the form of a single payment of $782m. The accounting for the acquisition was completed during 2013. The fair values shown below include measurement period adjustments recognised during the period.

The goodwill arising on the acquisition is $89m. It is attributable to the additional economic benefits expected from the transaction, including revenue synergies and the assembled workforce, which has been transferred as part of the acquisition. The goodwill recognised is deductible for tax purposes.

The following table summarises the consideration transferred, and the recognised amounts of assets acquired and liabilities assumed at the acquisition date.

 

     Provisional
values
$ million
    Adjustment
$ million
     Revised
values
$ million
 

Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed

      

Property, plant and equipment

    27                27   

Inventories

    46                46   

Trade receivables

    31                31   

Identifiable intangible assets

    662        (11      651   

Deferred tax assets

    5        (5        

Payables and accruals

    (49             (49

Provisions

    (13             (13

Net assets

    709        (16      693   

Goodwill

    73        16         89   

Cost of acquisition

    782                782   

In 2012, the Group incurred acquisition-related costs of $11m related to professional and adviser fees. These costs have been recognised in administrative expenses in the income statement. No acquisition-related costs were incurred in 2011.

In 2012, since the date of acquisition, the contribution to attributable profit from Healthpoint products was immaterial. The unaudited revenues from Healthpoint products during 2012 were $190m.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
142      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

21 Acquisitions continued

21.5 Disposal of business

Year ended 31 December 2012

In January 2012, the Group announced its intention to sell the Clinical Therapies business to Bioventus. This was completed during May 2012 for a total consideration of $367m and resulted in a profit on disposal before taxation of $251m. The revenue of the Clinical Therapies business in the four-month period to disposal was $69m and profit before taxation was $12m. The details of the transaction are set out below.

 

     $ million  

Loan note receivable

    160   

Investment in associate

    104   

Cash

    103   

Total consideration

    367   

Net assets of business disposed and disposal transaction costs

    (116

Profit before taxation

    251   

22 Operating leases

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Leases are classified as finance leases when the terms of the lease transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the Group. All other leases are classified as operating leases.

 

Payments under operating leases are expensed in the income statement on a straight line basis over the term of the lease. Lease incentives received are recognised as an integral part of the total lease expense, over the term of the lease.

 

 

Future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases fall due as follows:

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

 

Land and buildings:

   

Within one year

    30        30   

After one and within two years

    22        24   

After two and within three years

    16        17   

After three and within four years

    13        14   

After four and within five years

    7        8   

After five years

    5        4   
      93        97   

Other assets:

   

Within one year

    15        15   

After one and within two years

    9        10   

After two and within three years

    4        4   

After three and within four years

    2        1   
      30        30   

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    143

 

 

 

23 Other Notes to the accounts

23.1 Share-based payments

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

The Group operates a number of equity-settled executive and employee share plans. For all grants of share options and awards, the fair value at the grant date is calculated using appropriate option pricing models. The grant date fair value is recognised over the vesting period as an expense, with a corresponding increase in retained earnings.

 

 

 

Employee plans

The Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2002) (adopted by Shareholders on 3 April 2002) (the Save As You Earn (‘SAYE’) plan), the Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2002), Smith & Nephew France Sharesave Plan (2002), Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2012) (the Save As You Earn (‘SAYE 2012’) plan) (adopted by Shareholders on 12 April 2012), Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2012) (adopted by Shareholders on 12 April 2012) and Smith & Nephew France Sharesave Plan (2012) (adopted by Shareholders on 12 April 2012) are together termed the “Employee Plans”.

The SAYE and SAYE 2012 plans are available to all employees in the UK employed by participating Group companies, subject to three months’ service. The schemes enable employees to save up to £250 per month and give them an option to acquire shares based on the committed amount to be saved. The option price is not less than 80% of the average of middle market quotations of the ordinary shares on the three dealing days preceding the date of invitation. The Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2002) and Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2012) are available to employees in Australia, Austria, Belgium, Canada, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Hong Kong, India, Ireland, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, the Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Singapore, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland and the United Arab Emirates. Employees in China and France participated in these plans for the first time in 2013. Puerto Rico participants were eligible to receive options under the International Plans up to 2011 and were eligible to receive phantom options in 2013. The Smith & Nephew France Sharesave Plans were available to all employees in France up to 2012. The International and French plans operate on a substantially similar basis to the SAYE plans.

Employees in the US are able to participate in the Employee Stock Purchase Plan, which gives them the opportunity to acquire shares, in the form of ADSs, at a discount of 15% (or more if the shares appreciate in value during the plan’s quarterly purchase period) to the market price, through a regular savings plan.

Executive plans

The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan, the Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan, the Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan (adopted by Shareholders on 4 April 2001), the Smith & Nephew 2004 Executive Share Option Plan (adopted by Shareholders on 6 May 2004) and the Smith & Nephew Global Share Plan 2010 (adopted by shareholders on 6 May 2010) are together termed the ‘Executive Plans’.

Under the terms of the Executive Plans, the Remuneration Committee, consisting of Non-Executive Directors, may at their discretion approve the grant of options to employees of the Group to acquire ordinary shares in the Company. Options granted under the Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan (the ‘US Plan’) and the Smith & Nephew 2004 Executive Share Option Plan are to acquire ADSs or ordinary shares. For Executive Plans adopted in 2001 and 2004, the market value is the average quoted price of an ordinary share for the three business days preceding the date of grant or the average quoted price of an ADS or ordinary share, for the three business days preceding the date of grant or the quoted price on the date of grant if higher. For the Global Share Plan adopted in 2010 the market value is the closing price of an ordinary share or ADS on the last trading day prior to the grant date. With the exception of options granted under the 2001 US Plan and the Global Share Plan 2010, the vesting of options granted from 2001 is subject to achievement of a performance condition. Options granted under the 2001 US Plan and the Global Share Plan 2010 are not subject to any performance conditions. Prior to 2008, the 2001 US Plan options became cumulatively exercisable as to 10% after one year, 30% after two years, 60% after three years and the remaining balance after four years. With effect from 2008, options granted under the 2001 US Plan became cumulatively exercisable as to 33.3% after one year, 66.7% after two years and the remaining balance after the third year. The 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan was open to certain employees outside the US and the US Plan is open to certain employees in the US, Canada, Mexico and Puerto Rico. The Global Share Plan 2010 is open to employees globally. The 2004 Plan was open to Senior Executives only.

The maximum term of options granted, under all plans, is 10 years from the date of grant. All share option plans are settled in shares.

From 2012 onwards Senior Executives were granted share awards instead of share options and from 2013 executives were granted conditional share awards instead of share options. The awards vest 33.3% after one year, 66.7% after two years and the remaining balance after the third year subject to continued employment. There are no performance conditions for executives. Vesting for senior executives is subject to personal performance levels. The market value used to calculate the number of awards is the closing price of an ordinary share on the last trading day prior to the grant date.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
144      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

23 Other Notes to the accounts continued

23.1 Share based payments continued

At 31 December 2013 13,601,000 (2012 – 19,690,000, 2011 – 27,316,000) options were outstanding under share option plans as follows:

 

     Number of
shares
Thousand
    Range of option
exercise  prices
Pence
     Weighted average
exercise  price
Pence
 

Employee Plans:

      

Outstanding at 1 January 2011

    3,358        348.0-640.0         430.1   

Granted

    1,090        452.0-585.0         454.8   

Forfeited

    (122     348.0-609.0         427.6   

Exercised

    (602     348.0-576.5         454.7   

Expired

    (144     380.0-609.0         450.7   

Outstanding at 31 December 2011

    3,580        348.0-640.0         432.8   

Granted

    947        535.0-535.0         535.0   

Forfeited

    (402     348.0-609.0         434.5   

Exercised

    (925     348.0-609.0         396.0   

Expired

    (38     348.0-640.0         496.2   

Outstanding at 31 December 2012

    3,162        380.0-609.0         473.1   

Granted

    1,178        625.0         625.0   

Forfeited

    (174     380.0-625.0         488.2   

Exercised

    (751     380.0-609.0         453.8   

Expired

    (128     380.0-625.0         490.0   

Outstanding at 31 December 2013

    3,287        380.0-625.0         530.5   

Options exercisable at 31 December 2013

    71        461.0-556.0         467.8   

Options exercisable at 31 December 2012

    152        380.0-609.0         400.8   

Options exercisable at 31 December 2011

    122        348.0-640.0         470.8   

Executive Plans:

      

Outstanding at 1 January 2011

    22,395        409.5-680.5         544.9   

Granted

    5,706        580.0-703.0         599.4   

Forfeited

    (763     479.0-637.8         565.5   

Exercised

    (2,369     445.0-680.5         536.6   

Expired

    (1,233     445.0-637.8         549.7   

Outstanding at 31 December 2011

    23,736        409.5-703.0         561.2   

Granted

    3,046        642.0-650.0         650.0   

Forfeited

    (954     479.0-703.0         569.0   

Exercised

    (8,740     434.0-651.0         547.7   

Expired

    (560     435.5-637.8         588.7   

Outstanding at 31 December 2012

    16,528        409.5-680.5         583.3   

Forfeited

    (118     514.0-650.0         618.8   

Exercised

    (5,540     435.5-671.0         568.0   

Expired

    (556     435.5-650.0         582.3   

Outstanding at 31 December 2013

    10,314        409.5-680.5         591.1   

Options exercisable at 31 December 2013

    6,631        409.5-680.5         571.1   

Options exercisable at 31 December 2012

    8,512        409.5-680.5         562.7   

Options exercisable at 31 December 2011

    7,979        409.5-680.5         595.6   

The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at 31 December 2013 was 6.2 years (2012 – 6.6 years, 2011 – 6.6 years) for Executive Plans and 2.5 years (2012 – 2.6 years, 2011 – 2.6 years) for Employee Plans.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    145

 

 

 

 

    

2013

                     pence

   

2012

                    pence

    

2011

        pence

 

Weighted average share price

    764.7        640.5         639.9   

Options granted during the year were as follows:

 

    

Options
granted
Thousand

 

   

Weighted
average fair
value per
option at
grant date
Pence

 

    

Weighted
average
share price at
grant date
Pence

 

    

Weighted
average
exercise
price
Pence

 

    

Weighted
average
option life
Years

 

 

Employee Plans

    1,178        203.9         792.5         625.0         3.8   

The weighted average fair value of options granted under Employee Plans during 2012 was 184.0p (2011 – 189.2p) and those under Executive Plans during 2012 was 148.7p (2011 – 176.1p).

Options granted under Employee Plans are valued using the Black-Scholes option model as management consider that options granted under these plans are exercised within a short period of time after the vesting date.

For all plans the inputs to the option pricing models are reassessed for each grant. The following assumptions were used in calculating the fair value of options granted:

 

    

Employee plans

 

          

Executive plans

 

 
    

2013

 

   

2012

 

    

2011

 

          

2013

 

    

2012

 

    

2011

 

 

Dividend yield %

    2.0        1.5         1.5                    1.5         1.5   

Expected volatility % (i)

    25.0        25.0         30.0                    25.0         30.0   

Risk free interest rate % (ii)

    1.3        1.3         2.0                    1.2         2.0   

Expected life in years

    3.8        3.8         3.9                      10.0         10.0   

 

(i) Volatility is assessed on a historic basis primarily based on past share price movements over the expected life of the options.
(ii) The risk free interest rate reflects the yields available on zero coupon government bonds over the option term and currency.

Summarised information about options outstanding under the share option plans at 31 December 2013 is as follows:

 

     Number
outstanding
Thousand
 

Weighted average   

    remaining contract life   

Years   

Employee Plans:

   

380.0p to 764.7p (i)

  3,287   2.5   

Executive Plans:

   

409.5p to 764.7p (i)

  10,314   6.2   

 

(i) The split has been determined based on the weighted average share price of 764.7p.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
146      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

23 Other Notes to the accounts continued

23.1 Share based payments continued

Share-based payments – long-term incentive plans

In 2004, a share-based incentive plan was introduced for Executive Directors, Executive Officers and the next level of Senior Executives. The plan included a Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’) and a Bonus Co-Investment Plan (‘CIP’).

Vesting of the PSP awards is dependent upon performance relative to the FTSE 100 and an index based on major international companies in the medical devices industry.

Under the CIP, participants could elect to use up to a maximum of one-half of their annual bonus to purchase shares. If the shares are held for three years and the Group’s EPSA growth targets are achieved participants receive an award of matching shares for each share purchased.

From 2009, the CIP was replaced by the Deferred Bonus Plan. This plan was designed to encourage Executives to build up and maintain a significant shareholding in the Company. Under the plan, up to one-third of any bonus earned at target level or above by an eligible employee was compulsorily deferred into shares which vested, subject to continued employment, in equal annual tranches over three years (ie one-third each year). No further performance conditions applied to the deferred shares.

From 2010, Performance Share awards were granted under the Global Share Plan 2010 for all Executives other than Executive Directors. Awards granted under both plans are combined to provide the figures below.

From 2012, Deferred Bonus Plan and GSP 2010 options for Executive Directors, Executive Officers and the next level of Senior Executives were replaced by Equity Incentive Awards (‘EIA’). EIA are designed to encourage Executives to build up and maintain a significant shareholding in the Company. EIA will vest, in equal annual tranches over three years (ie one-third each year), subject to continued employment and personal performance. No further performance conditions apply to the EIA.

The fair values of awards granted under long-term incentive plans are calculated using a binomial model. Performance Share awards under both the PSP and Global Share Plan 2010 contain vesting conditions based on TSR versus a comparator group which represent market-based performance conditions for valuation purposes and an assessment of vesting probability is therefore factored into the award date calculations. The assumptions include the volatilities for the comparator groups. A correlation of 40% (2012 – 35%, 2011 – 40%) has also been assumed for the companies in the medical devices sector as they are impacted by similar factors. The Performance Target for the Global Share Plan 2010 is a combination of Free Cash Flow growth and the Group’s TSR performance over the three-year performance period.

The other assumptions used are consistent with the Executive scheme assumptions disclosed in Note 23.1.

At 31 December 2013 the maximum number of shares that could be awarded under the Group’s long-term incentive plans was:

 

        Number of shares in Thousands  
       

Other

            Awards

                 EIA                  PSP                  CIP     

Deferred

            Bonus Plan

                 Total  

Outstanding at January 2011

                       6,012         197         522         6,731   

Awarded

       838                 2,282                 351         3,471   

Vested

       (44              (366              (375      (785

Forfeited

                       (1,660      (197      (6      (1,863

Outstanding at 31 December 2011

       794                 6,268                 492         7,554   

Awarded

       187         1,060         2,190                         3,437   

Vested

       (263      (49      (1,785              (287      (2,384

Forfeited

               (82      (1,431              (41      (1,554

Outstanding at 31 December 2012

       718         929         5,242                 164         7,053   

Awarded

       1,179         785         1,963                         3,927   

Vested

       (437      (379      (411              (115      (1,342

Forfeited

       (11      (51      (1,597              (5      (1,664

Outstanding at 31 December 2013

       1,449         1,284         5,197                 44         7,974   

Other awards mainly comprises conditional share awards granted under the Global Share Plan 2010.

The weighted average remaining contractual life of awards outstanding at 31 December 2013 was 1.4 years (2012 – 0.8 years, 2011 – 1.2 years) for the PSP, 0.2 years (2012 – 0.9 years, 2011 – 1.7 years) for the Deferred Bonus Plan, 1.8 years (2012 – 2.2 years) for the EIA and 2.1 years (2012 – 0.9 years, 2011 – 1.5 years) for the other awards. There were no awards outstanding under the CIP in 2013, 2012 or 2011.

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    147

 

 

 

Share-based payments – charge to income statement

The expense charged to the income statement for share-based payments is as follows:

 

     2013
$ million
    2012
$ million
     2011
$ million
 

Granted in current year

    10        9         9   

Granted in prior years

    18        25         21   

Total share-based payments expense for the year

    28        34         30   

 

Under the Executive Plans, PSP, EIA and CIP the number of ordinary shares over which options and share awards may be granted is limited so that the number of ordinary shares issued or that may be issued during the 10 years preceding the date of grant shall not exceed 5% of the ordinary share capital at the date of grant. The total number of ordinary shares which may be issuable in any 10-year period under all share plans operated by the Company may not exceed 10% of the ordinary share capital at the date of grant.

 

23.2 Related party transactions

 

Trading transactions

In the course of normal operations, the Group traded with its associates detailed in Note 11. The aggregated transactions, which have not been disclosed elsewhere in the financial statements, are summarised below:

 

    

  

  

   

     2013
$ million
    2012
$ million
     2011
$ million
 

Sales to the associates

    5        14         8   

Purchases from the associates

    2        8         4   

 

All sale and purchase transactions occur on an arm’s length basis.

 

Key management personnel

The remuneration of executive officers (including Non-executive Directors) during the year is summarised below:

 

  

  

  

     2013
$ million
    2012
$ million
     2011
$ million
 

Short-term employee benefits

    15        16         19   

Share-based payments expense

    11        10         9   

Pension and post-employment benefit entitlements

    1        1         1   

Termination benefits

                   1   
      27        27         30   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
148      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Group accounts continued

23 Other Notes to the accounts continued

23.3 Principal subsidiary undertakings

The information provided below is given for principal trading and manufacturing subsidiary undertakings, all of which are 100% owned, in accordance with Section 410 of the Companies Act 2006. A full list will be appended to Smith & Nephew’s next annual return to Companies House:

 

 

Company Name

 

 

 

Activity

 

 

 

Country of operation and incorporation

 

UK:

   

Smith & Nephew Healthcare Limited

  Medical Devices   England & Wales

Smith & Nephew Medical Limited

  Medical Devices   England & Wales

T. J. Smith & Nephew, Limited

  Medical Devices   England & Wales

Continental Europe:

   

Smith & Nephew GmbH

  Medical Devices   Austria

Smith & Nephew SA-NV

  Medical Devices   Belgium

Smith & Nephew A/S

  Medical Devices   Denmark

Smith & Nephew Oy

  Medical Devices   Finland

Smith & Nephew SAS

  Medical Devices   France

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics GmbH

  Medical Devices   Germany

Smith & Nephew GmbH

  Medical Devices   Germany

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics Hellas SA

  Medical Devices   Greece

Smith & Nephew Limited

  Medical Devices   Ireland

Smith & Nephew Srl

  Medical Devices   Italy

Smith & Nephew Nederland CV

  Medical Devices   Netherlands

Smith & Nephew A/S

  Medical Devices   Norway

Smith & Nephew Sp Zoo

  Medical Devices   Poland

Smith & Nephew Lda

  Medical Devices   Portugal

Smith & Nephew SAU

  Medical Devices   Spain

Smith & Nephew AB

  Medical Devices   Sweden

Smith & Nephew Manufacturing AG

  Medical Devices   Switzerland

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics AG

  Medical Devices   Switzerland

US:

   

Smith & Nephew Inc.

  Medical Devices   United States

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    149

 

 

 

 

 

Company Name

 

  

 

Activity

 

 

 

Country of operation and incorporation

 

Africa, Asia, Australasia and Other America:

    

Smith & Nephew Pty Limited

   Medical Devices   Australia

Smith & Nephew do Brasil Participacoes S.A.

   Medical Devices   Brazil

Smith & Nephew Inc.

   Medical Devices   Canada

Smith & Nephew (Alberta) Inc.

   Medical Devices   Canada

Tenet Medical Engineering Inc.

   Medical Devices   Canada

Smith & Nephew Medical (Shanghai) Limited

   Medical Devices   China

Smith & Nephew Medical (Suzhou) Limited

   Medical Devices   China

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics (Beijing) Limited

   Medical Devices   China

Smith & Nephew Limited

   Medical Devices   Hong Kong

Adler Mediequip Private Limited

   Medical Devices   India

Smith & Nephew Healthcare Private Limited

   Medical Devices   India

Smith & Nephew KK

   Medical Devices   Japan

Smith & Nephew Limited

   Medical Devices   Korea

Smith & Nephew Healthcare Sdn Berhad

   Medical Devices   Malaysia

Smith & Nephew SA de CV

   Medical Devices   Mexico

Smith & Nephew Limited

   Medical Devices   New Zealand

Smith & Nephew Inc.

   Medical Devices   Puerto Rico

LLC Smith & Nephew

   Medical Devices   Russia

Smith & Nephew Pte Limited

   Medical Devices   Singapore

Smith & Nephew (Pty) Limited

   Medical Devices   South Africa

Smith & Nephew Limited

   Medical Devices   Thailand

Smith ve Nephew Medikal Cihazlar Ticaret Limited Sirketi

   Medical Devices   Turkey

Smith & Nephew FZE

   Medical Devices   United Arab Emirates

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
150      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Independent auditor’s report for the Company

 

Independent Auditor’s Report to the members of Smith & Nephew plc

We have audited the Parent Company financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc for the year ended 31 December 2013 which comprise the Parent Company balance sheet and the related Notes 1 to 9. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and UK accounting standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Respective responsibilities of Directors and auditor

As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibility statement set out on pages 88 and 89, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the Parent Company financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the Parent Company financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s (APB’s) Ethical Standards for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements

An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Parent Company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors; and the overall presentation of the financial statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the annual report to identify material inconsistencies with the audited financial statements. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.

Opinion on accounts

In our opinion the Parent Company financial statements:

 

give a true and fair view of the state of the Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2013;

 

have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and

 

have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion:

 

the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and

 

the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the parent company financial statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:

 

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

 

the Parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

 

certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

 

we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

Other matter

We have reported separately on the Group financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc for the year ended 31 December 2013.

Les Clifford (Senior statutory auditor)

for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor

London

26 February 2014

 

 

The Parent Company financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc on pages 151 to 154 do not form part of the Smith & Nephew’s Annual Report on Form 20-F as filed with the SEC.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    151

 

 

Company balance sheet

 

    

Notes

 

   

At 31 December
2013
$ million

 

   

At 31 December
2012
$ million

 

 

Fixed assets:

     

Investments

    3        3,597        3,597   

Current assets:

     

Debtors

    4        2,140        2,679   

Cash and bank

    6        6        20   
      2,146        2,699   

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year:

     

Borrowings

    6        (2     (1

Other creditors

    5        (1,590     (1,871
      (1,592     (1,872

Net current assets

            554        827   

Total assets less current liabilities

            4,151        4,424   

Creditors: amounts falling due after one year:

     

Borrowings

    6        (335     (415

Total assets less total liabilities

            3,816        4,009   

Equity shareholders’ funds:

     

Called up equity share capital

    7        184        193   

Share premium account

    7        535        488   

Capital redemption reserve

    7        10          

Capital reserve

    7        2,266        2,266   

Treasury shares

    7        (322     (735

Exchange reserve

    7        (52     (52

Profit and loss account

    7        1,195        1,849   

Shareholders’ funds

            3,816        4,009   

The accounts were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 26 February 2014 and signed on its behalf by:

 

Sir John Buchanan       Olivier Bohuon       Julie Brown
Chairman        Chief Executive Officer        Chief Financial Officer

 

The Parent Company financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc on pages 151 to 154 do not form part of the Smith & Nephew’s Annual Report on Form 20-F as filed with the SEC.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
152      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Company accounts

1 Basis of preparation

Smith & Nephew plc (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company incorporated in England and Wales.

The separate accounts of the Company are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006. The accounts have been prepared under the historical cost convention, modified to include revaluation to fair value of certain financial instruments as described below, and in accordance with applicable UK accounting standards. As consolidated financial information has been disclosed under IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures, the Company is exempt from FRS 29 Financial Instruments: Disclosures. The Group accounts have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union and are presented on pages 94 to 149.

The Company has taken advantage of the exemption in FRS 8 Related Party Disclosures not to present its related party disclosures as the Group accounts contain these disclosures. In addition, the Company has taken advantage of the exemption in FRS 1 Cash Flow Statements not to present its own cash flow statement as the Group accounts contain a consolidated cash flow.

In applying these policies management is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the accounts and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Although these estimates are based on management’s best knowledge of current events and actions, actual results ultimately may differ from those estimates.

Foreign currencies

Transactions in foreign currencies are initially recorded at the exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. All exchange differences are dealt with in arriving at profit before taxation.

Deferred taxation

Deferred taxation is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date where transactions or events have occurred at that date that will result in an obligation to pay more, or a right to pay less or to receive more, tax.

Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which timing differences are expected to reverse. These are based on tax rates and laws substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

2 Results for the year

As permitted by Section 408(4) of the Companies Act 2006, the Company has not presented its own profit and loss account. Profit for the year was $198m (2012 – $167m).

3 Investments

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less provision for impairment.

 

 

 

 

       

2013

$ million

    

2012

$ million

 

At 1 January

       3,597         3,598   

Impairment

               (1

At 31 December

       3,597         3,597   

 

Investments represent holdings in subsidiary undertakings.

 

The information provided below is given for the principal direct subsidiary undertakings, all of which are 100% owned and, in accordance with Section 410 of the Companies Act 2006, a full list will be appended to Smith & Nephew’s next annual return to Companies House.

 

  

   

        Activity      Country of operation
and incorporation
 

Company Name

       

Smith & Nephew UK Limited

       Holding Company         England & Wales   

Smith & Nephew (Overseas) Limited

       Holding Company         England & Wales   

Refer to Note 23.3 of the Notes to the Group accounts for the principal trading and manufacturing subsidiary undertakings of the Group.

 

 

The Parent Company financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc on pages 151 to 154 do not form part of the Smith & Nephew’s Annual Report on Form 20-F as filed with the SEC.

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

    153

 

 

 

 

4 Debtors

 

    

2013

            $ million

    

2012

            $ million

 

Amounts falling due within one year:

    

Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings

    2,091         2,628   

Prepayments and accrued income

    3         7   

Current asset derivatives – forward foreign exchange contracts

    45         20   

Current asset derivatives – currency swaps

    1         2   

Current taxation

            22   
      2,140         2,679   

5 Other creditors

 

    

2013

            $ million

    

2012

            $ million

 

Amounts falling due within one year:

    

Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings

    1,533         1,832   

Other creditors

    10         19   

Current taxation

    2           

Current liability derivatives – forward foreign exchange contracts

    45         20   
      1,590         1,871   

6 Cash and borrowings

 

 

 

ACCOUNTING POLICY

 
 

 

Financial instruments

 

Currency swaps are used to match foreign currency net assets with foreign currency liabilities. They are initially recorded at fair value and then for reporting purposes remeasured to fair value at exchange rates and interest rates at subsequent balance sheet dates.

 

 

Changes in the fair value of derivative financial instruments are recognised in the profit and loss account as they arise.

 

    

2013

            $ million

   

2012

            $ million

 

Bank loans and overdrafts due within one year or on demand

    2        1   

Bank loans due after one year

    335        415   

Borrowings

    337        416   

Cash and bank

    (6     (20

Debit balance on derivatives – currency swaps

    (1     (2

Net debt

    330        394   

All currency swaps are stated at fair value. Gross US Dollar equivalents of $146m (2012 – $175m) receivable and $145m (2012 – $173m) payable have been netted. Currency swaps comprise foreign exchange swaps and were used in 2013 and 2012 to hedge intragroup loans.

 

 

 

The Parent Company financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc on pages 151 to 154 do not form part of the Smith & Nephew’s Annual Report on Form 20-F as filed with the SEC.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
154      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

 

Notes to the Company accounts continued

7 Equity and reserves

 

                                                            2013      2012  
     Share
capital
$ million
    Share
premium
$ million
     Capital
redemption
reserve
$ million
     Capital
reserves
$ million
     Treasury
shares
$ million
     Exchange
reserves
$ million
     Profit and
loss account
$ million
     Total
shareholders’
funds
$ million
     Total
shareholders’
funds
$ million
 

At 1 January

    193        488                 2,266         (735      (52      1,849         4,009         3,911   

Attributable profit for the year

                                                   198         198         167   

Equity dividends paid in the year

                                                   (239      (239      (186

Share-based payments recognised

                                                   28         28         34   

Cost of shares transferred to beneficiaries

                                   21                 (18      3         6   

New shares issued on exercise of share options

    1        47                                                 48         77   

Cancellation of treasury shares

    (10             10                 623                 (623                

Treasury shares purchased

                                   (231                      (231        

At 31 December

    184        535         10         2,266         (322      (52      1,195         3,816         4,009   

Further information on the share capital of the Company can be found in Note 19.1 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

The total distributable reserves of the Company are $821m (2012 – $1,062m). In accordance with the exemption permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company has not presented its own profit and loss account. The attributable profit for the year dealt with in the accounts of the Company is $198m (2012 – $167m).

Fees paid to Ernst & Young LLP for audit and non-audit services to the Company itself are not disclosed in the individual accounts because Group financial statements are prepared which are required to disclose such fees on a consolidated basis. The fees for the consolidated Group are disclosed in Note 3.2 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

8 Share-based payments

The Company operates a number of equity-settled executive and employee share plans. For all grants of share options and awards, the fair value as at the date of grant is calculated using an appropriate option pricing model and the corresponding expense is recognised over the vesting period. Subsidiary companies are recharged for the fair value of share options that relate to their employees.

The disclosure relating to the Company is detailed in Note 23.1 of the Notes to the Group accounts.

9 Contingencies

 

     2013
$ million
    2012
$ million
 

Guarantees in respect of subsidiary undertakings

    25        37   

The Company has given guarantees to banks to support liabilities under foreign exchange and other contracts and cross guarantees to support overdrafts. Such guarantees are not considered to be liabilities as all subsidiary undertakings are trading as going concerns.

The Company operated defined benefit pension plans in 2004 but at the end of 2005 its pension plan obligations were transferred to Smith & Nephew UK Limited. The Company has provided guarantees to the trustees of the pension plans to support future amounts due from participating employers (see Note 18 of the Notes to the Group accounts).

The Parent Company financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc on pages 151 to 154 do not form part of the Smith & Nephew’s Annual Report on Form 20-F as filed with the SEC.

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP INFORMATION

 

 

    155

 

 

Group information

Business overview and Group history

Smith & Nephew’s operations are organised into two primary divisions that operate globally: Advanced Surgical Devices and Advanced Wound Management.

The Group has a history dating back over 150 years to the family enterprise of Thomas James Smith who opened a small pharmacy in Hull, UK in 1856. Following his death in 1896, his nephew Horatio Nelson Smith took over the management of the business.

By the late 1990s, Smith & Nephew had expanded into being a diverse healthcare conglomerate with operations across the globe, producing various medical devices, personal care products and traditional and advanced wound care treatments. In 1998, Smith & Nephew announced a major restructuring to focus management attention and investment on three global business units – Advanced Wound Management, Endoscopy and Orthopaedics – which offered high growth and margin opportunities. In 2011, the Endoscopy and Orthopaedics businesses were brought together to create an Advanced Surgical Devices division.

Smith & Nephew was incorporated and listed on the London Stock Exchange in 1937 and in 1999 the Group was also listed on the New York Stock Exchange. In 2001, Smith & Nephew became a constituent member of the FTSE-100 index in the UK. This means that Smith & Nephew is included in the top 100 companies traded on the London Stock Exchange measured in terms of market capitalisation.

Today, Smith & Nephew is a public limited company incorporated and headquartered in the UK and carries out business around the world.

Property, plant and equipment

The table below summarises the main properties which the Group uses and their approximate areas.

 

    

Approximate area
(square feet 000’s)

 

 

Group head office in London, UK

    20   

Group research facility in York, UK

    84   

Advanced Surgical Devices headquarters in Andover, Massachusetts, US

    144   

Advanced Wound Management headquarters and manufacturing facility in Hull, UK

    473   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facilities in Memphis, Tennessee, US

    971   

Advanced Surgical Devices distribution facility in Memphis, Tennessee, US

    210   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facility in Aarau, Switzerland

    121   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facility in Beijing, China

    192   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing and warehouse facility in Warwick, UK

    90   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing and warehouse facility in Tuttlingen, Germany

    64   

Advanced Surgical Devices distribution facility and European headquarters in Baar, Switzerland

    67   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facility in Mansfield, Massachusetts, US

    98   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facility in Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, US

    155   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facility in Calgary, Canada

    17   

Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facility in Sangameshwar, India

    39   

Advanced Wound Management manufacturing facility in Gilberdyke, UK

    51   

Advanced Wound Management manufacturing facility in Suzhou, China

    288   

Advanced Wound Management manufacturing facility in Fort Saskatchewan, Canada

    76   

Advanced Wound Management US headquarters in St. Petersburg, Florida, US

    44   

Advanced Wound Bioactives headquarters and laboratory space in Texas, US

    105   

Advanced Wound Bioactives manufacturing facility in Curaçao, Dutch Caribbean

    16   

The Group Global Operations strategy includes ongoing assessment of the optimal facility footprint. The Advanced Surgical Devices manufacturing facilities in Memphis, Tennessee are largely freehold, a portion of Tuttlingen and the Advanced Wound Management facilities in Hull and Gilberdyke are freehold while other principal locations are leasehold. The Group has freehold and leasehold interests in real estate in other countries throughout the world, but no other is individually significant to the Group. Where required, the appropriate governmental authorities have approved the facilities.

Off-balance sheet arrangements

Management believes that the Group does not have any off-balance sheet arrangements, as defined by the SEC in item 5E of Form 20-F, that have or are reasonably likely to have a current or future effect on the Group’s financial condition, changes in financial condition, revenues or expenses, results of operations, liquidity, capital expenditures or capital resources that is material to investors.

Related party transactions

Except for transactions with associates (see Note 23.2 of Notes to the Group accounts), no other related party had material transactions or loans with Smith & Nephew over the last three financial years.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
156      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP INFORMATION

 

 

Group information continued

Risk factors

There are known and unknown risks and uncertainties relating to Smith & Nephew’s business. The factors listed below could cause the Group’s business, financial position and results of operations to differ materially and adversely from expected and historical levels. In addition, other factors not listed here that Smith & Nephew cannot presently identify or does not believe to be equally significant could also materially adversely affect Smith & Nephew’s business, financial position or results of operations.

Highly competitive markets

The Group’s business segments compete across a diverse range of geographic and product markets. Each market in which the business segments operate contains a number of different competitors, including specialised and international corporations. Significant product innovations, technical advances or the intensification of price competition by competitors could adversely affect the Group’s operating results.

Some of these competitors may have greater financial, marketing and other resources than Smith & Nephew. These competitors may be able to initiate technological advances in the field, deliver products on more attractive terms, more aggressively market their products or invest larger amounts of capital and research and development (‘R&D’) into their businesses.

There is a possibility of further consolidation of competitors, which could adversely affect the Group’s ability to compete with larger companies due to insufficient financial resources. If any of the Group’s businesses were to lose market share or achieve lower than expected revenue growth, there could be a disproportionate adverse impact on the Group’s share price and its strategic options.

Competition exists among healthcare providers to gain patients on the basis of quality, service and price. There has been some consolidation in the Group’s customer base and this trend is expected to continue. Increased competition and unanticipated actions by competitors or customers could lead to downward pressure on prices and/or a decline in market share in any of the Group’s business areas, which could adversely affect Smith & Nephew’s results of operations and hinder its growth potential.

Continual development and introduction of new products

The medical devices industry has a rapid rate of new product introduction. In order to remain competitive, each of the Group’s business segments must continue to develop innovative products that satisfy customer needs and preferences or provide cost or other advantages. Developing new products is a costly, lengthy and uncertain process. The Group may fail to innovate due to low R&D investment, a R&D skills gap or poor product development. A potential product may not be brought to market or not succeed in the market for any number of reasons, including failure to work optimally, failure to receive regulatory approval, failure to be cost-competitive, infringement of patents or other intellectual property rights and changes in consumer demand. The Group’s products and technologies are also subject to marketing attack by competitors. Furthermore, new products that are developed and marketed by the Group’s competitors may affect price levels in the various markets in which the Group’s business segments operate. If the Group’s new products do not remain competitive with those of competitors, the Group’s revenue could decline.

The Group maintains reserves for excess and obsolete inventory resulting from the potential inability to sell its products at prices in excess of current carrying costs. Marketplace changes resulting from the introduction of new products or surgical procedures may cause some of the Group’s products to become obsolete. The Group makes estimates regarding the future recoverability of the costs of these products and records a provision for excess and obsolete inventories based on historical experience, expiration of sterilisation dates and expected future trends. If actual product life cycles, product demand or acceptance of new product introductions are less favourable than projected by management, additional inventory write-downs may be required.

Dependence on government and other funding

In most Established Markets throughout the world, expenditure on medical devices is ultimately controlled to a large extent by governments. Funds may be made available or withdrawn from healthcare budgets depending on government policy. The Group is therefore largely dependent on future governments providing increased funds commensurate with the increased demand arising from demographic trends.

Pricing of the Group’s products is largely governed in most Established Markets by governmental reimbursement authorities. Initiatives sponsored by government agencies, legislative bodies and the private sector to limit the growth of healthcare costs, including price regulation, excise taxes and competitive pricing, are ongoing in markets where the Group has operations. This control may be exercised by determining prices for an individual product or for an entire procedure. The Group is exposed to government policies favouring locally sourced products. The Group is also exposed to changes in reimbursement policy, tax policy and pricing which may have an adverse impact on revenue and operating profit. In particular, changes to the healthcare legislation in the US have imposed significant taxes on medical device manufacturers from 2013. There may be an increased risk of adverse changes to government funding policies arising from the deterioration in macro-economic conditions in some of the Group’s markets.

The Group must adhere to the rules laid down by government agencies that fund or regulate healthcare, including extensive and complex rules in the US. Failure to do so could result in fines or loss of future funding.

World economic conditions

Demand for the Group’s products is driven by demographic trends, including the ageing population and the incidence of osteoporosis and obesity. Supply of, use of and payment for the Group’s products are also influenced by world economic conditions which could place increased pressure on demand and pricing, adversely impacting the Group’s ability to deliver revenue and margin growth. The conditions could favour larger, better capitalised groups, with higher market shares and margins. As a consequence, the Group’s prosperity is linked to general economic conditions and there is a risk of deterioration of the Group’s performance and finances during adverse macro-economic conditions.

During 2013, economic conditions worldwide continued to create several challenges for the Group, including deferrals of joint replacement procedures, heightened pricing pressure, significant declines in capital equipment expenditures at hospitals and increased uncertainty over the collectability of European government debt, particularly those in certain parts of southern Europe. These factors tempered the overall growth of the Group’s global markets and could have an increased impact on growth in the future.

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP INFORMATION

 

 

    157

 

 

 

Political uncertainties

The Group operates on a worldwide basis and has distribution channels, purchasing agents and buying entities in over 90 countries. Political upheaval in some of those countries or in surrounding regions may impact the Group’s results of operations. Political changes in a country could prevent the Group from receiving remittances of profit from a member of the Group located in that country or from selling its products or investments in that country. Furthermore, changes in government policy regarding import quotas, taxation or other matters could adversely affect the Group’s revenue and operating profit. War, terrorist activities or other conflict could also adversely impact the Group.

Currency fluctuations

Smith & Nephew’s results of operations are affected by transactional exchange rate movements in that they are subject to exposures arising from revenue in a currency different from the related costs and expenses. The Group’s manufacturing cost base is situated principally in the US, the UK, China and Switzerland, from which finished products are exported to the Group’s selling operations worldwide. Thus, the Group is exposed to fluctuations in exchange rates between the US Dollar, Sterling and Swiss Franc and the currency of the Group’s selling operations, particularly the Euro, Australian Dollar and Japanese Yen. If the US Dollar, Sterling or Swiss Franc should strengthen against the Euro, Australian Dollar and the Japanese Yen, the Group’s trading margin could be adversely affected.

The Group manages the impact of exchange rate movements on revenue and cost of goods sold by a policy of transacting forward foreign currency commitments when firm purchase orders are placed. In addition, the Group’s policy is for forecast transactions to be covered between 50% and 90% for up to one year.

The Group uses the US Dollar as its reporting currency and the US Dollar is the functional currency of Smith & Nephew plc. The Group’s revenues, profits and earnings are also affected by exchange rate movements on the translation of results of operations in foreign subsidiaries for financial reporting purposes. See ‘Liquidity and capital resources’ on page 99.

Manufacturing and supply

The Group’s manufacturing production is concentrated at 14 main facilities in Memphis, Mansfield and Oklahoma City in the US, Hull, Warwick and Gilberdyke in the UK, Aarau in Switzerland, Tuttlingen in Germany, Fort Saskatchewan and Calgary in Canada, Sangameshwar in India, Suzhou and Beijing in China and Curaçao. If major physical disruption took place at any of these sites, it could adversely affect the results of operations. Physical loss and consequential loss insurance is carried to cover such risks but is subject to limits and deductibles and may not be sufficient to cover catastrophic loss. Management of orthopaedic inventory is complex, particularly forecasting and production planning. There is a risk that failures in operational execution could lead to excess inventory or individual product shortages.

Each of the business segments is reliant on certain key suppliers of raw materials, components, finished products and packaging materials or in some cases on a single supplier. These suppliers must provide the materials and perform the activities to the Group’s standard of quality requirements. If any of these suppliers is unable to meet the Group’s needs, compromises on standards of quality or substantially increases its prices, Smith & Nephew would need to seek alternative suppliers. There can be no assurance that alternative suppliers would provide the necessary raw materials on favourable or cost-effective terms at the desired quality.

Consequently, the Group may be forced to pay higher prices to obtain raw materials, which it may not be able to pass on to its customers in the form of increased prices for its finished products. In addition, some of the raw materials used may become unavailable, and there can be no assurance that the Group will be able to obtain suitable and cost-effective substitutes. Any interruption of supply caused by these or other factors could negatively impact Smith & Nephew’s revenue and operating profit.

The Group will, from time to time, outsource the manufacture of components and finished products to third parties and will periodically relocate the manufacture of product and/or processes between existing facilities. While these are planned activities, with these transfers there is a risk of disruption to supply.

Attracting and retaining key personnel

The Group’s continued development depends on its ability to hire and retain highly-skilled personnel with particular expertise. This is critical, particularly in general management, research, new product development and in the sales forces. If Smith & Nephew is unable to retain key personnel in general management, research and new product development or if its largest sales forces suffer disruption or upheaval, its revenue and operating profit would be adversely affected. Additionally, if the Group is unable to recruit, hire, develop and retain a talented, competitive workforce, it may not be able to meet its strategic business objectives.

Proprietary rights and patents

Due to the technological nature of medical devices and the Group’s emphasis on serving its customers with innovative products, the Group has been subject to patent infringement claims and is subject to the potential for additional claims.

Claims asserted by third parties regarding infringement of their intellectual property rights, if successful, could require the Group to expend time and significant resources to pay damages, develop non-infringing products or obtain licences to the products which are the subject of such litigation, thereby affecting the Group’s growth and profitability. Smith & Nephew attempts to protect its intellectual property and regularly opposes third party patents and trademarks where appropriate in those areas that might conflict with the Group’s business interests. If Smith & Nephew fails to protect and enforce its intellectual property rights successfully, its competitive position could suffer, which could harm its results of operations.

Product liability claims and loss of reputation

The development, manufacture and sale of medical devices entail risk of product liability claims or recalls. Design and manufacturing defects with respect to products sold by the Group or by companies it has acquired could damage, or impair the repair of, body functions. The Group may become subject to liability, which could be substantial, because of actual or alleged defects in its products. In addition, product defects could lead to the need to recall from the market existing products, which may be costly and harmful to the Group’s reputation.

There can be no assurance that customers, particularly in the US, the Group’s largest geographical market, will not bring product liability or related claims that would have a material adverse effect on the Group’s financial position or results of operations in the future, or that the Group will be able to resolve such claims within insurance limits.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
158      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

GROUP INFORMATION

 

 

Group information continued

Regulatory standards and compliance in the healthcare industry

Business practices in the healthcare industry are subject to regulation and review by various government authorities. In general, the trend in many countries in which the Group does business is towards higher expectations and increased enforcement activity by governmental authorities. While the Group is committed to doing business with integrity and welcomes the trend to higher standards in the healthcare industry, the Group and other companies in the industry have been subject to investigations and other enforcement activity that have incurred and may continue to incur significant expense. See Note 17 to the Group accounts. Under certain circumstances, if the Group were found to have violated the law, its ability to sell its products to certain customers could be restricted.

International regulation

The Group operates across the world and is subject to legislation, including anti-bribery and corruption and data protection, in each country in which we operate. Our international operations are governed by the UK Bribery Act and the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA) which prohibit us or our agents from making, or offering, improper payments to foreign governments and their officials for the purpose of obtaining or maintaining business or product approvals. Enforcement of such legislation has increased in recent years with significant fines and penalties being imposed on companies and individuals. Our international operations, particularly in the emerging markets, expose the Group to the risk that our employees or agents will engage in prohibited activities.

Regulatory approval

The international medical device industry is highly regulated. Regulatory requirements are a major factor in determining whether substances and materials can be developed into marketable products and the amount of time and expense that should be allotted to such development.

National regulatory authorities administer and enforce a complex series of laws and regulations that govern the design, development, approval, manufacture, labelling, marketing and sale of healthcare products. They also review data supporting the safety and efficacy of such products. Of particular importance is the requirement in many countries that products be authorised or registered prior to manufacture, marketing or sale and that such authorisation or registration be subsequently maintained. The major regulatory agencies for Smith & Nephew’s products include the Food and Drug Administration (‘FDA’) in the US, the Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency in the UK, the Ministry of Health, Labour and Welfare in Japan and the China Food and Drug Administration. At any time, the Group is awaiting a number of regulatory approvals which, if not received, could adversely affect results of operations.

The trend is towards more stringent regulation and higher standards of technical appraisal. Such controls have become increasingly demanding to comply with and management believes that this trend will continue.

Regulatory requirements may also entail inspections for compliance with appropriate standards, including those relating to Quality Management Systems or Good Manufacturing Practices regulations. All manufacturing and other significant facilities within the Group are subject to regular internal and external audit for compliance with national and Group medical device regulation and policies.

Payment for medical devices may be governed by reimbursement tariff agencies in a number of countries. Reimbursement rates may be set in response to perceived economic value of the devices, based on clinical and other data relating to cost, patient outcomes and comparative effectiveness. They may also be affected by overall government budgetary considerations. The Group believes that its emphasis on innovative products and services should contribute to success in this environment.

Failure to comply with these regulatory requirements could have a number of adverse consequences, including withdrawal of approval to sell a product in a country, temporary closure of a manufacturing facility, fines and potential damage to company reputation.

Failure to make successful acquisitions

A key element of the Group’s strategy for continued growth is to make acquisitions or alliances to complement its existing business. Failure to identify appropriate acquisition targets or failure to conduct adequate due diligence or to integrate them successfully would have an adverse impact on the Group’s competitive position and profitability. This could result from the diversion of management resources towards the acquisition or integration process, challenges of integrating organisations of different geographic, cultural and ethical backgrounds, as well as the prospect of taking on unexpected or unknown liabilities. In addition, the availability of global capital may make financing less attainable or more expensive and could result in the Group failing in its strategic aim of growth by acquisition or alliance.

Relationships with healthcare professionals

The Group seeks to maintain effective and ethical working relationships with physicians and medical personnel who assist in the research and development of new products or improvements to our existing product range or in product training and medical education. If we are unable to maintain these relationships our ability to meet the demands of our customers could be diminished and our revenue and profit could be materially adversely affected.

Reliance on sophisticated information technology

The Group uses a wide variety of information systems, programmes and technology to manage our business. Our systems are vulnerable to a cyber-attack, malicious intrusion, loss of data privacy or any other significant disruption. Our systems have been and will continue to be the target of such threats. We have systems in place to minimise the risk and disruption of these intrusions and to monitor our systems on an ongoing basis for current or potential threats. There can be no assurance that these measures will prove effective in protecting Smith & Nephew from future interruptions and as a result the performance of the Group could be materially adversely affected.

Other risk factors

Smith & Nephew is subject to a number of other risks, which are common to most global medical technology groups and are reviewed as part of the Group’s risk management process.

Factors affecting Smith & Nephew’s results of operations

Government economic, fiscal, monetary and political policies are all factors that materially affect the Group’s operation or investments of shareholders. Other factors include sales trends, currency fluctuations and innovation. Each of these factors is discussed further in the ‘Our Marketplace’ on pages 16 to 18, ‘Segment performance’ on pages 24 to 33 and ‘Taxation information for shareholders’ on pages 175 and 176.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    159

 

 

Other financial information

Selected financial data

 

     
 
2013
         $ million
 
  
   
 
 
2012(i)
        Restated
$  million
 
 
  
    
 
 
2011(i)
        Restated
$  million
 
 
  
    
 
 
2010(i)
        Restated
$  million
 
 
  
    
 
 
2009(i)
        Restated
$  million
 
 
  

Income statement

            

Revenue

    4,351        4,137         4,270         3,962         3,772   

Cost of goods sold

    (1,100     (1,070      (1,140      (1,031      (1,030

Gross Profit

    3,251        3,067         3,130         2,931         2,742   

Selling, general and administrative expenses

    (2,210     (2,050      (2,101      (1,860      (1,864

Research and development expenses

    (231     (171      (167      (151      (155

Operating profit

    810        846         862         920         723   

Net interest receivable/(payable)

    4        2         (8      (15      (40

Other finance (costs)/income

    (11     (11      (13      (16      (21

Share of results of associates

    (1     4                         2   

Profit on disposal of net assets held for sale

           251                           

Profit before taxation

    802        1,092         841         889         664   

Taxation

    (246     (371      (266      (280      (198

Attributable profit for the year

    556        721         575         609         466   

Earnings per ordinary share

                                          

Basic

    61.7¢        80.4¢         64.5¢         68.6¢         52.7¢   

Diluted

    61.4¢        80.0¢         64.2¢         68.5¢         52.7¢   

Adjusted attributable profit

                                          

Attributable profit for the year

    556        721         575         609         466   

Acquisition-related costs

    31        11                         26   

Restructuring and rationalisation expenses

    58        65         40         15         42   

Legal settlement

                   23                   

Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments

    88        43         36         34         66   

Profit on disposal of net assets held for sale

           (251                        

Taxation on excluded items

    (40     82         (17      (10      (26

Adjusted attributable profit

    693        671         657         648         574   

Adjusted basic earnings per ordinary share (‘EPSA’) (ii)

    76.9¢        74.8¢         73.7¢         73.0¢         64.9¢   

Adjusted diluted earnings per ordinary share (iii)

    76.5¢        74.5¢         73.4¢         72.9¢         64.9¢   

 

(i) The prior periods have been restated following adoption of the revised IAS 19 Employee Benefits standard.

 

(ii) Adjusted basic earnings per ordinary share is calculated by dividing adjusted attributable profit by the average number of shares.

 

(iii) Adjusted diluted earnings per ordinary share is calculated by dividing adjusted attributable profit by the diluted number of shares

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
160      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Other financial information continued

 

     
 
2013
         $ million
 
  
   
 
2012
        $ million
 
  
    
 
2011
        $ million
 
  
    
 
2010
        $ million
 
  
    
 
2009
        $ million
 
  

Group balance sheet

                                          

Non-current assets

    3,563        3,498         2,542         2,579         2,480   

Current assets

    2,256        2,144         2,080         2,154         2,071   

Assets held for sale

                   125                 14   

Total assets

    5,819        5,642         4,747         4,733         4,565   

Share capital

    184        193         191         191         190   

Share premium

    535        488         413         396         382   

Capital redemption reserve

    10                                  

Treasury shares

    (322     (735      (766      (778      (794

Retained earnings and other reserves

    3,640        3,938         3,349         2,964         2,401   

Total equity

    4,047        3,884         3,187         2,773         2,179   

Non-current liabilities

    699        828         422         1,046         1,523   

Current liabilities

    1,073        930         1,119         914         863   

Liabilities directly associated with assets held for sale

                   19                   

Total liabilities

    1,772        1,758         1,560         1,960         2,386   

Total equity and liabilities

    5,819        5,642         4,747         4,733         4,565   

Group cash flow statement

                                          

Cash generated from operations

    1,138        1,184         1,135         1,111         1,030   

Net interest paid

    (6     (4      (8      (17      (41

Income taxes paid

    (265     (278      (285      (235      (270

Net cash inflow from operating activities

    867        902         842         859         719   

Capital expenditure (including trade investments and net of disposals

            

of property, plant and equipment)

    (340     (265      (321      (307      (318

Acquisitions and disposals

    (67     (782      (33              (25

Proceeds on disposal of net assets held for sale

           103                           

Investment in associate

           (10                        

Cash received from Plus settlement

                                   137   

Proceeds from own shares

    3        6         7         8         10   

Equity dividends paid

    (239     (186      (146      (132      (120

Issue of ordinary capital and treasury shares purchased

    (183     77         11         10         7   
    41        (155      360         438         410   

Exchange adjustments

    (6     5         (6      13         (21

Opening (net debt)/net cash

    (288     (138      (492      (943      (1,332

Closing net debt

    (253     (288      (138      (492      (943

Selected financial ratios

                                          

Gearing (closing net debt as a percentage of total equity)

    6%        7%         4%         18%         43%   

Dividends per ordinary share (i)

    27.40¢        26.10¢         17.40¢         15.82¢         14.39¢   

Research and development costs to Revenue

    5.3%        4.1%         3.9%         3.8%         4.1%   

Capital expenditure (including intangibles but excluding goodwill) to revenue

    7.8%        6.4%         7.5%         7.7%         8.4%   

 

(i) The Board has proposed a final dividend of 17.0 US cents per share which together with the first interim dividend of 10.4 US cents makes a total for 2013 of 27.4 US cents.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    161

 

 

 

Non-GAAP Financial Information

Revenue

‘Underlying growth in revenue’ is used to compare the revenue in a given year to the previous year on a like-for-like basis. This is achieved by adjusting for the impact of sales of products acquired in material business combinations and for movements in exchange rates. Underlying growth in revenue is not presented in the accounts prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’) and is therefore a measure not in accordance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (a ‘non-GAAP’ measure).

The Group believes that the tabular presentation and reconciliation of reported revenue growth to underlying revenue growth assists investors in their assessment of the Group’s performance in each business segment and for the Group as a whole.

Underlying growth in revenue is considered by the Group to be an important measure of performance in terms of local functional currency since it excludes those items considered to be outside the influence of local management. The Group’s management uses this non-GAAP measure in its internal financial reporting, budgeting and planning to assess performance on both a business segment and a consolidated Group basis. Revenue growth at constant currency is important in measuring business performance compared to competitors and compared to the growth of the market itself.

The Group considers that revenue from sales of products acquired in material business combinations results in a step-up in growth in revenue in the year of acquisition that cannot be wholly attributed to local management’s efforts with respect to the business in the year of acquisition. Depending on the timing of the acquisition, there will usually be a further step change in the following year. A measure of growth excluding the effects of business combinations also allows senior management to evaluate the performance and relative impact of growth from the existing business and growth from acquisitions. The process of making business acquisitions is directed, approved and funded from the Group corporate centre in line with strategic objectives.

The material limitation of the underlying growth in revenue measure is that it excludes certain factors, described above, which ultimately have a significant impact on total revenues. The Group compensates for this limitation by taking into account relative movements in exchange rates in its investment, strategic planning and resource allocation. In addition, as the evaluation and assessment of business acquisitions is not within the control of local management, performance of acquisitions is monitored centrally until the business is integrated.

The Group’s management considers that the non-GAAP measure of underlying growth in revenue and the GAAP measure of growth in revenue are complementary measures, neither of which management uses exclusively.

‘Underlying growth in revenue’ reconciles to growth in revenue reported, the most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS by making two adjustments, the ‘constant currency exchange effect’ and the ‘acquisitions and disposals effect’, described below.

The ‘constant currency exchange effect’ is a measure of the increase/decrease in revenue resulting from currency movements on non-US Dollar sales. This is measured as the difference between the increase in revenue translated into US Dollars on a GAAP basis (i.e. current year revenue translated at the current year average rate, prior year revenue translated at the prior year average rate) and the increase measured by translating current and prior year revenue into US Dollars using the prior year closing rate.

The ‘acquisitions and disposals effect’ is the measure of the impact on revenue from newly acquired business combinations. This is calculated by comparing the current year, constant currency actual revenue (which include acquisitions and exclude disposals from the relevant date of completion) with prior year, constant currency actual revenue, adjusted to include the results of acquisitions and exclude disposals for the commensurate period in the prior year. These sales are separately tracked in the Group’s internal reporting systems and are readily identifiable.

Reported revenue growth, the most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS, reconciles to underlying growth in revenue as follows:

 

     
 
2013
%
  
  
   
 
2012
%
  
  
    
 
2011
%
  
  

Reported revenue growth

    5        (3      8   

Constant currency exchange effect

    1        2         (4

Acquisition/Disposals effect

    (2     3           

Underlying revenue

    4        2         4   

A reconciliation of reported revenue growth to underlying revenue growth, by business segment, can be found on page 37.

Trading profit

Trading profit is a trend measure which presents the long-term profitability of the Group excluding the impact of specific transactions that management considers affects the Group’s short-term profitability. The Group presents this measure to assist investors in their understanding of trends. The Group has identified the following items, where material, as those to be excluded from operating profit when arriving at trading profit: acquisition and disposal related items including amortisation of acquisition intangible assets and impairments; significant restructuring events; acquisition costs; and gains and losses resulting from legal disputes and uninsured losses.

Growth in ‘trading profit’ and ‘trading profit margin’ (trading profit expressed as a percentage of revenue) are measures which present the growth trend in the long-term profitability of the Group excluding the impact of specific transactions or events that management considers affect the Group’s short-term profitability. The Group presents these measures to assist investors in their understanding of the trends. The Group’s international financial reporting (budgets, monthly reporting, forecasts, long-term planning and incentive plans) focuses primarily on profit and earnings before these items. Trading profit and trading profit margin are not recognised measures under IFRS and are therefore non-GAAP financial measures.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
162      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Other financial information continued

 

Operating profit, the most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS, reconciles to trading profit as follows:

 

    

2013

$million

   

2012

$million

    

2011

$million

 

Operating profit

    810        846         862   

Acquisition-related costs

    31        11           
Restructuring and rationalisation costs     58        65         40   
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments     88        43         36   

Legal claim (see page 130)

                   23   

Trading profit

    987        965         961   

A reconciliation of operating profit to trading profit, by business segment, can be found on page 38.

Adjusted earnings per ordinary share

Growth in ‘adjusted earnings per ordinary share (‘EPSA’)’ is another measure which presents the trend in the long-term profitability of the Group. EPSA is not a recognised measure under IFRS and is therefore a non-GAAP financial measure. The most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS is earnings per ordinary share.

EPSA excludes the same impact of specific transactions or events that management considers affect the Group’s short-term profitability, is used by the Group for similar purposes, and is subject to the same material limitations, as set out and discussed in the above section on trading profit.

Adjusted attributable profit represents the numerator used in the EPSA calculation. Adjusted attributable profit is reconciled to attributable profit, the most directly comparable financial measure in accordance with IFRS, as follows:

 

    

2013

$million

   

2012

Restated

$million

   

2011

Restated

$million

 

Attributable profit for the year

    556        721        575   
Acquisition-related costs     31        11          
Restructuring and rationalisation expenses     58        65        40   
Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments     88        43        36   
Profit on disposal of net assets held for sale            (251       
Legal claim (see page 130)                   23   
Taxation on excluded items      

(see page 109)

    (40     82        (17

Adjusted attributable profit

    693        671        657   

The material limitation of these measures is that they exclude significant income and costs that have a direct impact on current and prior years’ profit attributable to shareholders. They do not, therefore, measure the overall performance of the Group presented by the GAAP financial measure of operating profit. The Group considers that no single measure enables it to assess overall performance and therefore it compensates for the limitation of the trading profit measure by considering it in conjunction with its GAAP equivalent. The gains or losses which are identified separately arise from irregular events or transactions. Such events or transactions are authorised centrally and require a strategic assessment which includes consideration of financial returns and generation of shareholder value. Amortisation of acquisition intangibles will occur each year, whilst other excluded items arise irregularly depending on the events that give rise to such items.

 

Earnings per Ordinary Share   2013    

2012

Restated

    

2011

Restated

 

Basic

    61.7¢        80.4¢         64.5¢   

Diluted

    61.4¢        80.0¢         64.2¢   

Adjusted: Basic

    76.9¢        74.8¢         73.7¢   

Adjusted: Diluted

    76.5¢        74.5¢         73.4¢   

Trading cash flow and trading profit to cash conversion ratio

Growth in trading cash flow and improvement in the trading profit to cash conversion ratio are measures which present the trend growth in the long-term cash generation of the Group excluding the impact of specific transactions or events that management considers affect the Group’s short-term performance.

Trading cash flow is defined as cash generated from operations less net capital expenditure but before acquisition-related cash flows, restructuring and rationalisation cash flows and cash flows arising from legal disputes and uninsured losses. Trading profit to cash conversion ratio is trading cash flow expressed as a percentage of trading profit. The nature and material limitations of these adjusted items are discussed above.

The Group presents those measures to assist investors in their understanding of trends. The Group’s internal financial reporting (budgets, monthly reporting, forecasts, long-term planning and incentive plans) focuses on cash generation before these items. Trading cash flow and trading profit to cash conversion ratio are not recognised measures under IFRS and are therefore considered non-GAAP financial measures.

The material limitation of this measure is that it could exclude significant cash flows that have had a direct impact on the current and prior years’ financial performance of the Group. It does not, therefore, measure the financial performance of the Group presented by the GAAP measure of cash generated from operations. The Group considers that no single measure enables it to assess financial performance and therefore it compensates for the limitation of the trading cash flow measure by considering it in conjunction with the GAAP equivalents. Cash flows excluded relate to irregular events or transaction costs and cash flows arising from legal disputes and uninsured losses.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    163

 

 

 

Trading cash flow reconciles to cash generated from operations, the most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS, as follows:

 

     
 
2013
$million
  
  
   
 
2012
$million
  
  
    
 
2011
$million
  
  
Cash generated from operations     1,138        1,184         1,135   
Less: Capital expenditure     (340     (265      (321
Add: Cash received on disposal of fixed assets                      
Add: Acquisition-related costs     25        3         1   
Add: Restructuring and rationalisation related expenditure     54        55         20   
Add: Legal settlement            22           
Add: Macrotexture expenditure                    3   
Trading cash flow     877        999         838   
Trading profit     987        965         961   
Trading profit to cash conversion ratio     89%        104%         87%   

Transactional and translational exchange

The Group’s principal markets outside the US are, in order of significance, Continental Europe, UK, Australia and Japan. Revenues in these markets fluctuate when translated into US Dollars on consolidation. During the year, the average rates of exchange against the US Dollar used to translate revenues and profits arising in these markets changed compared to the previous year as follows: the Euro strengthened from $1.28 to $1.33 (+3%), Sterling weakened from $1.58 to $1.56 (-1%), the Swiss Franc strengthened from $1.07 to $1.08 (1%), the Australian Dollar weakened from $1.04 to $0.96 (-7%) and the Japanese Yen weakened from ¥79.8 to ¥97.6 (-22%).

The Group’s principal manufacturing locations are in the US (Advanced Surgical Devices), Switzerland (Advanced Surgical Devices), UK (Advanced Wound Management and Advanced Surgical Devices) and China (Advanced Surgical Devices and Advanced Wound Management). The majority of the Group’s selling and distribution subsidiaries around the world purchase finished products from these locations. As a result of currency movements compared with the previous year, sales from the US became relatively more profitable to all of these countries. The Group’s policy of purchasing forward a proportion of its currency requirements and the existence of an inventory pipeline reduce the short-term impact of currency movements.

 

Contractual obligations

Contractual obligations at 31 December 2013 were as follows:

 

                  

Payments due by period

 

 
     Total
$ million
    Less than
1 year
$ million
    1–3 years
$ million
    3–5 years
$ million
    More than
5 years
$ million
 
Debt obligations     377        42        335                 
Finance lease obligations     14        2        4        5        3   
Operating lease obligations     123        45        51        22        5   
Retirement benefit obligation     72        72                        
Purchase obligations                                   
Capital expenditure     41        41                        

Other

    41        34        7                 
      668        236        397        27        8   

Other contractual obligations represent $20m of foreign exchange contracts and $21m of acquisition consideration. Provisions that do not relate to contractual obligations are not included in the above table.

The agreed contributions for 2014 in respect of the Group’s defined benefits plans are: $39m for the UK (including $31m of supplementary payments), $26m for the US Plan and $7m for other funded defined benefit plans. The table above does not include amounts payable in respect of 2015 and beyond as these are subject to future agreement and amounts cannot be reasonably estimated.

There are a number of agreements that take effect, alter or terminate upon a change in control of the Company or the Group following a takeover, such as bank loan agreements and Company share plans. None of these are deemed to be significant in terms of their potential impact on the business of the Group as a whole. In addition, there are service contracts between the Company and its Executive Directors which provide for the automatic payment of a bonus following loss of office or employment occurring because of a successful takeover bid. Further details are set out on page 70.

The Company does not have contracts or other arrangements which individually are essential to the business.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
164      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Other financial information continued

2012 Financial highlights

Revenue

Group revenue decreased by $133m (-3%) from $4,270m in 2011 to $4,137m in 2012. Underlying revenue growth was 2% of which -2% growth was attributable to unfavourable currency translation and -3% was attributable to the effect of disposing of the Clinical Therapies business. Advanced Surgical Devices revenues decreased by $143m (-4%), underlying growth of 2% was offset by -2% unfavourable currency movements and -4% due to the disposal of the Clinical Therapies business. Advanced Wound Management revenues increased by $10m (1%), underlying growth was 4% with -3% due to unfavourable currency translation.

Cost of goods sold

Cost of goods sold decreased by $70m to $1,070m from $1,140m in 2011, which represents a 6% decrease. Of this movement, 1% is due to favourable currency translation movements. The remaining movement is largely attributable to the continued focus on costs, and partly attributable to the sale of the Clinical Therapies business in May 2012 which impacted both revenue and cost of sales.

Marketing, selling and distribution expenses

Marketing, selling and distribution expenses decreased by $86m (-6%) to $1,440m from $1,526m in 2011. The underlying movement of -4% is after adjusting for favourable currency movement of -2%. Increased cost savings in Established Markets were partly offset by investment in Emerging & International Markets and promotion of new products particularly in Advanced Wound Management.

Administrative expenses

Administrative expenses increased by $35m (6%) to $610m from $575m in 2011. Favourable currency movements offset 2% of this increase. The main factors contributing to the underlying movement of 8% were an increase of $16m in amortisation on acquisition costs.

Research and development expenses

Expenditure as a percentage of revenue increased by 0.2% to 4.1% in 2012 (2011 – 3.9%). Actual expenditure was $171m in 2012 compared to $167m in 2011. The Group continues to invest in innovative technologies and products to differentiate it from competitors.

Operating profit

Operating profit decreased by $16m to $846m from $862m in 2011. This comprised an increase of $2m in Advanced Surgical Devices and a decrease of $18m in Advanced Wound Management. Advanced Surgical Devices started to see the benefits of its focus on costs (more than offsetting the additional restructuring expense) whilst Advanced Wound Management has continued to invest in new products throughout the year and also acquired Healthpoint Biotherapeutics in December 2012, both increasing costs.

Net interest receivable/(payable)

Net interest payable reduced by $10m from $8m payable in 2011 to a receivable of $2m in 2012. This is a consequence of the overall reduction of borrowings within the Group, a reduction in the applicable interest rates and the $7m interest receivable on the Bioventus loan note issued following the disposal of the Clinical Therapies business.

Other finance cost

Other finance costs, restated for the revised IAS 19 Employee Benefits accounting standard, in 2012 were $11m compared to $13m in 2011. This decrease is attributable to an increase in the expected return on pension plan assets.

Taxation

The taxation charge increased by $105m to $371m from $266m in 2011. The rate of tax was 33.7%, compared with 31.4% in 2011.

The tax charge increased by $82m in 2012 (2011 – $17m reduction) as result of the profit on disposal of the Clinical Therapies business partially offset by an increase in restructuring and rationalisation expenses, amortisation of acquisition intangibles and acquisition-related costs. The tax rate was 29.9% (2011 – 29.9%) after adjusting for these items and the tax thereon.

Group balance sheet

The following table sets out certain balance sheet data as at 31 December of the years indicated:

 

     
 
2012
$million
  
  
   
 
2011
$million
  
  

Non-current assets

    3,498        2,542   

Current assets

    2,144        2,080   

Assets held for sale

           125   

Total assets

    5,642        4,747   

Non-current liabilities

    828        422   

Current liabilities

    930        1,119   
Liabilities directly associated with assets held for sale            19   

Total liabilities

    1,758        1,560   

Total equity

    3,884        3,187   

Total equity and liabilities

    5,642        4,747   

Non-current assets

Non-current assets increased by $956m to $3,498m in 2012 from $2,542m in 2011. This is principally attributable to the following:

 

Goodwill increased by $90m from $1,096m in 2011 to $1,186m in 2012. Of this movement $73m arose on the acquisition of Healthpoint. The balance relates to favourable currency movements totalling $17m

 

Intangible assets increased by $641m from $423m in 2011 to $1,064m in 2012. Intangible assets totalling $662m arose on the Healthpoint acquisition. Amortisation of $94m was charged during the year and assets with a net book value of $3m were written-off. A total of $68m relates to the cost of intellectual property and software acquired. The balance relates to favourable currency movements totalling $8m

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    165

 

 

 

 

Property, plant and equipment increased by $10m from $783m in 2011 to $793m in 2012. Depreciation of $212m was charged during 2012 and assets with a net book value of $9m were written-off. These movements were largely offset by $197m of additions relating primarily to instruments and other plant and machinery and $27m of additions arising on the Healthpoint acquisition. The balance relates to favourable currency movements totalling $7m

 

Deferred tax assets decreased by $59m in the year

 

The total investment in associates has increased from $13m in 2011 to $283m in 2012. This movement predominately relates to the acquisition of Bioventus during the year totalling $114m plus $160m in the form of a loan note to Bioventus.

Current assets

Current assets increased by $64m to $2,144m from $2,080m in 2011. The movement relates to the following:

 

Inventories rose by $42m to $901m in 2012 from $859m in 2011. Of this movement, $46m arose on the Healthpoint acquisition and it includes $9m relating to favourable currency movements

 

The level of trade and other receivables increased by $28m to $1,065m in 2012 from $1,037m in 2011. This movement includes $31m arising on the Healthpoint acquisition and $8m related to favourable currency movements

 

Cash and cash equivalents have fallen by $6m to $178m from $184m in 2011.

Non-current liabilities

Non-current liabilities increased by $406m from $422m in 2011 to $828m in 2012. This movement relates to the following items:

 

Long-term borrowings have risen from $16m in 2011 to $430m in 2012. This increase of $414m is attributable to the acquisition of Healthpoint for $728m cash in December 2012

 

The net retirement benefit obligation decreased by $21m to $266m in 2012 from $287m in 2011. This was largely due to the Group’s additional pension contributions which were partially offset by net actuarial losses for the year

 

Deferred acquisition consideration remains at $8m at the end of 2012. This relates to the acquisition of Tenet Medical Engineering during 2011

 

Provisions increased from $45m in 2011 to $63m in 2012. The principal component of this movement is $13m arising on the Healthpoint acquisition

 

Deferred tax liabilities decreased by $5m in the year.

Current liabilities

Current liabilities decreased by $189m from $1,119m in 2011 to $930m in 2012. This movement is attributable to:

 

Bank overdrafts and current borrowings have decreased by $268m from $306m in 2011 to $38m in 2012

 

Trade and other payables have increased by $92m to $656m in 2012 from $564m in 2011. The primary cause of this increase is the acquisition of Healthpoint which increased trade and other payables by $49m

 

Provisions have decreased by $19m from $78m in 2011 to $59m in 2012. The most significant item contributing to this decrease is the payment of $22m to settle the legal provision (see Note 3 of the Notes to the Group accounts)

 

Current tax payable is $177m at the end of 2012 compared to $171m in 2011.

 

Total equity

Total equity increased by $697m from $3,187m in 2011 to $3,884m in 2012. The principal movements were:

 

     
 

 

Total equity
$million

 

 
  

 

1 January 2012

    3,187   

Attributable profit

    729   

Currency translation gains

    37   

Hedging reserves

    (7

Actuarial loss on retirement benefit obligations

    (13

Dividends paid during the year

    (186
Taxation benefits on Other Comprehensive Income and equity items     20   

Net share-based transactions

    117   

31 December 2012

    3,884   

2012 Financial performance by business segment

Advanced Surgical Devices

Advanced Surgical Devices revenue decreased by -4% to $3,108m from $3,251m in 2011. Of this decrease, underlying growth of 2% is offset by -2% unfavourable currency movements and -4% due to the disposal of the Clinical Therapies business.

The underlying increase in ASD revenue reconciles to reported growth, the most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS, as follows:

 

     
 
2012
%
  
  
   
 
2011
%
  
  

Reported growth

    (4     8   

Constant currency exchange effect

    2        (4

Disposal effect

    4          

Underlying growth

    2        4   

In the Established Markets, revenue decreased by $163m to $2,747m (-6%).

In the US revenue decreased by $118m to $1,449m ( -8%). This movement is attributable to underlying growth of 1% and -9% due to the effect of the disposal of the Clinical Therapies business. In the Established Markets outside of the US revenue decreased by $45m to $1,298m (-3%). Underlying growth was 1% with -4% due to unfavourable currency movements.

In Emerging & International Markets, revenue increased by $20m to $361m (6%). Underlying growth was 10% with -4% due to unfavourable currency.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
166      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Other financial information continued

Franchises

Underlying revenue growth for key product lines are:

 

     
 
2012
%
  
  
   
 
2011
%
  
  

Reconstruction

   

– Knee implants

    3        5   

– Hip implants

    (3)        (1)   

Sports Medicine

    8        11   

Arthroscopic Enabling Technologies

    (2)          

Trauma

    3        3   

Both the knee and hip implant markets continue to experience economic pressure. Knee implant franchise revenue increased by 1% to $874m in 2012, which represented an underlying revenue growth of 3% and unfavourable foreign currency translation of -2%. This compared to a market growth rate of 3%. Growth slowed in the second half of 2012 as a result of a weakening of the overall knee market in Europe and the division’s knee product cycle. Between 2009 and 2011, when the division materially outperformed the knee market, it benefited from the launch of VERILAST Technology and VISIONAIRE Patient Matched Instrumentation. This benefit has now been annualised.

In the global Hip implant franchise revenue decreased by $39m to $666m (-6%) in 2012, representing a -3% underlying revenue decline in the face of the continuing metal-on-metal headwinds and -2% due to unfavourable foreign currency translation. The Hip implant franchise, led by the ANTHOLOGY Hip with VERILAST Technology, has also continued to perform well in its focus product areas.

Sales of our BIRMINGHAM Hip Resurfacing system continued to decline during the year. The BIRMINGHAM Hip Resurfacing System is a clinically proven system for hip resurfacing which preserves bone and is particularly suited for younger, more active male patients.

Global Trauma revenue increased by $5m to $462m (1%), representing underlying revenue growth of 3% and -2% unfavourable foreign currency translation.

Global revenue from Sports Medicine Joint Repair increased by $30m to $521m (6%), of which 8% was underlying growth and -2% unfavourable foreign currency translation.

AET revenue decreased by $16m to $409m (-4%) in 2012, which represented an underlying revenue decline of -2% and -2% of unfavourable foreign currency translation.

The revenue in this Other franchise (excluding Clinical Therapies) increased by $2m to $69m (5%), which represented an underlying revenue growth of 7% and -2% of unfavourable foreign currency translation.

 

 

Trading and operating profit

Trading profit increased by $14m (2%) to $728m from $714m in 2011. Trading profit margin increased from 21.9% to 23.4%. These increases reflect the early benefits of implementing the Strategic Priorities, in particular, restructuring the Group to provide the right commercial models and cost structure.

Operating profit increased by $2m from $630m in 2011 to $632m in 2012. This comprises the increase in trading profit of $14m discussed above and the recognition of a legal claim of $23m in 2011, offset by an increase of $10m in the amortisation of acquisition intangibles and a $25m increase in restructuring and rationalisation costs.

Operating profit, the most directly comparable financial measure in accordance with IFRS, reconciles to trading profit as follows:

 

     
 
2012
$million
  
  
   
 
2011
$million
  
  

Operating profit

    632        630   

Restructuring and rationalisation costs

    57        32   

Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments

    39        29   

Legal settlement

           23   

Trading profit

    728        714   

Advanced Surgical Devices trading profit and operating profit as a percentage of Group trading profit and operating profit was as follows:

 

     
 
2012
%
  
  
   
 
2011
%
  
  

Trading profit

    75        74   

Operating profit

    75        73   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    167

 

 

 

Advanced Wound Management

Advanced Wound Management continues to outperform the market, with revenue growing at 4% in 2012 on an underlying basis (excluding a -3% unfavourable currency impact) to $1,029m. Management estimates the market grew at 1%.

Underlying growth in Advanced Wound Management revenue reconciles to reported growth, the most directly comparable financial measure calculated in accordance with IFRS, as follows:

 

     
 
2012
%
  
  
   
 
2011
%
  
  

Reported growth

    1        12   

Constant currency exchange effect

    3        (5

Underlying growth

    4        7   

In Established Markets, revenue increased from $906m to $907m in 2012. This represents an underlying growth of 4% which was offset by unfavourable currency movements of -3%.

In the US, revenue increased by 7% from $189m to $202m. In the Established Markets outside of the US, revenues decreased – 2% from $717m in 2011 to $705m in 2012. This represents an underlying growth of 2% after adjusting for -4% of unfavourable currency movements.

Franchises

Underlying revenue growth for key product lines are:

 

     
 
2012
%
  
  
   
 
2011
%
  
  

Exudate management

    1        2   

Infection management

    (2     4   

Other AWM

    7        10   

Revenue in the Emerging & International Markets increased from $113m in 2011 to $122m in 2012 (8%). The underlying movement was 11% offset by -3% of unfavourable currency movements.

Exudate management revenues decreased by -2% from $275m in 2011 to $269m in 2012. This represents an underlying growth of 1% offset by -3% in unfavourable currency exchange.

Infection management revenues have fallen from $133m in 2011 to $127m in 2012 (-5%). This also represents an underlying decline of -2% along with 3% of unfavourable currency exchange.

Trading and operating profit

Trading profit reduced by $10m to $237m from $247m and trading profit margin decreased 24.3% to 23.1%. The decrease in the year is primarily attributable to the additional costs arising from investment in new products throughout the year.

Operating profit decreased by $18m to $214m in 2012. This comprises the decrease in trading profit of $10m discussed above and an increase of $11m in connection with the acquisition-related costs on the purchase of Healthpoint. These costs were partially offset by a reduction of $3m in the amortisation of acquisition intangibles.

Operating profit, the most directly comparable financial measure in accordance with IFRS, reconciles to trading profit as follows:

 

     
 
2012
$million
  
  
   
 
2011
$million
  
  

Operating profit

    214        232   

Acquisition-related costs

    11          

Restructuring and rationalisation costs

    8        8   

Amortisation of acquisition intangibles and impairments

    4        7   

Trading profit

    237        247   

Advanced Wound Management trading profit and operating profit as a percentage of Group trading profit and operating profit was as follows:

 

     
 
2012
%
  
  
   
 
2011
%
  
  

Trading profit

    25        26   

Operating profit

    25        27   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
168      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Information for shareholders

Financial calendar

 

Annual General Meeting

   10 April 2014

Quarter One results

   1 May 2014

Payment of 2013 final dividend

   7 May 2014

Half year results announced

   1 August 2014 (i)

Quarter Three results announced

   30 October 2014

Payment of 2014 first interim dividend

   November 2014

Full year results announced

   February 2015 (i)

Annual Report available

   February/March 2015

Annual General Meeting

   April 2015

 

(i) Dividend declaration dates.

Ordinary Shareholders

Registrar

All general enquiries concerning shareholdings, dividends, changes to Shareholders’ personal details and the AGM should be addressed to:

Equiniti, Aspect House, Spencer Road, Lancing, West Sussex BN99 6DA

Tel: 0871 384 2081 *

Tel: +44 (0) 121 415 7072 from outside the UK

Website: www.shareview.co.uk

 

* Calls to this number are charged at 8p per minute (excluding VAT) plus network extras. Lines are open from 8.30am to 5.30pm Monday to Friday, excluding UK public holidays.

Shareholder facilities

Shareview

Equiniti’s on-line enquiry and portfolio management service for Shareholders. To view information about your shareholdings on-line, register at www.shareview.co.uk. Once registered for Shareview, you will also be able to elect to receive future Shareholder communications via the Company’s website (www.smith-nephew.com), update your address details or dividend payment instructions and register your proxy instructions on-line.

E-communications

We encourage Shareholders to elect to receive communications via e-mail as this has significant environmental and cost benefits. Shareholders may register for this service through Equiniti, at www.shareview.co.uk. Shareholders will receive a confirmation letter from Equiniti at their registered address, containing an Activation Code for future use.

Payment of dividends direct to your bank or building society account

Shareholders who wish to avoid the risk of their dividend payments getting lost or mislaid can arrange to have their cash dividends paid directly to a bank or building society account. This facility is available to UK resident Shareholders who receive Sterling dividends. If you do not live in the UK you may be able to register for the overseas payment service. Further information is available at www.shareview.co.uk or by contacting Equiniti (UK and overseas helpline numbers as above).

 

Duplicate accounts

Shareholders who have more than one account due to inconsistency in account details may avoid duplicate mailings by contacting Equiniti and requesting an amalgamation of their share accounts.

Keep your personal details up to date

Please remember to tell Equiniti if you move house or change bank details or there is any other change in your account information. You can update your information on-line via the Shareview portfolio if you are a Smith & Nephew Shareview member. If you do not have a portfolio you will need to write to Equiniti or complete a change of address form which can be downloaded from Shareview. If you hold 2,500 shares or fewer, you can also change your address or update your bank details quickly and easily over the phone using the contact details provided.

Dividend reinvestment plan (‘DRIP’)

The Company offers Shareholders (except those in North America) the opportunity to participate in a DRIP. This enables Shareholders to reinvest their cash dividends in further ordinary shares of Smith & Nephew plc. These are purchased in the market at competitive dealing costs. For further details plus an application form to reinvest future dividends, contact Equiniti.

Individual savings account (‘ISA’)

Shareholders who are UK resident may hold Smith & Nephew plc shares in an Individual Savings Account, which is administered by the Company’s registrar. For information about this service please contact Equiniti.

Shareholder communications

The Company makes quarterly financial announcements which are made available through Stock Exchange announcements and on the Group’s website (www.smith-nephew.com). Copies of recent Annual Reports, press releases, institutional presentations and audio webcasts are also available on the website.

The Company sends paper copies of the Notice of Annual General Meeting and Annual Report only to those Shareholders and ADS holders that have elected to receive Shareholder documentation by post. Electronic copies of the Annual Report and Notice of Annual General Meeting are available on the Group’s website at www.smith-nephew.com. Both ordinary Shareholders and ADS holders can request paper copies of the Annual Report, which the Company provides free of charge. The Company will continue to send to ordinary Shareholders by post the Form of Proxy and an accompanying letter notifying them of the availability of the Annual Report and Notice of Annual General Meeting on the Group’s website. Shareholders who elect to receive the Annual Report and Notice of Annual General Meeting electronically are informed by e-mail of the documents’ availability on the Group’s website. ADS holders receive the Form of Proxy by post but will not receive a paper copy of the Notice of Annual General Meeting.

Investor communications

The Company maintains regular dialogue with individual institutional Shareholders, together with results presentations. To ensure that all members of the Board develop an understanding of the views of major investors, the Executive Directors review significant issues raised by investors with the Board. Non-executive Directors are sent copies of analysts’ and brokers’ briefings. There is an opportunity for individual Shareholders to question the Directors at the Annual General Meeting and the Company regularly responds to letters from Shareholders on a range of issues.

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    169

 

 

 

UK capital gains tax

For the purposes of UK capital gains tax the price of the Company’s ordinary shares on 31 March 1982 was 35.04p.

Smith & Nephew share price

The Company’s ordinary shares are quoted on the London Stock Exchange under the symbol SN. The Company’s share price is available on the Smith & Nephew website www.smith- nephew.com and at www.londonstockexchange.com where the live financial data is updated with a 15-minute delay.

ShareGift

Shareholders with only a small number of shares, which would cost more to sell than they are worth, may wish to consider donating them to the charity ShareGift (registered charity 1052686) which specialises in accepting such shares as donations. There may be no implications for Capital Gains Tax purposes (no gain or loss) and it may also be possible to obtain income tax relief. The relevant stock transfer form may be obtained from Equiniti at the address given on page 168.

Further information about ShareGift is available at www.sharegift.org or by contacting ShareGift at:

ShareGift, 17 Carlton House Terrace, London SW1Y 5AH

Tel: (+44) (0) 20 7930 3737

Unauthorised brokers (boiler room scams)

Shareholders are advised to be very wary of any unsolicited advice, offers to buy shares at a discount or offers of free company reports. These are typically from overseas-based ‘brokers’ who target UK Shareholders offering to sell them what often turn out to be worthless or high-risk shares in US or UK investments. These operations are commonly known as ‘boiler rooms’.

If you deal with an unauthorised firm, you will not be eligible to receive payment under the Financial Services Compensation Scheme if things go wrong. If you receive any unsolicited investment advice, obtain the correct name of the person and organisation and check that they are properly authorised by the FCA by visiting www.fca.org.uk/register/.

If you think you have been approached by an unauthorised firm you should contact the FCA consumer helpline on 0800 111 6768 or e-mail consumer.queries@fca.org.uk.

More detailed information can be found on the FCA website at www.fca.org.uk/consumers/protect-yourself/unauthorised-firms.

Social media

Smith & Nephew has a presence across a range of social media channels, including Twitter, Facebook and LinkedIn, which are linked below. Information provided by Smith & Nephew through social media channels is not incorporated by reference herein and does not from part of our annual report on Form 20-F.

LOGO https://twitter.com/SmithNephewPLC

LOGO www.facebook.com/SmithNephewPlc

LOGO http://www.linkedin.com/company/smith-&-nephew

American Depositary Shares (ADSs) and American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)

In the US, the Company’s ordinary shares are traded in the form of ADSs, evidenced by ADRs, on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol SNN. Each American Depositary Share represents five ordinary shares. The Bank of New York Mellon is the authorised depositary bank for the Company’s ADR programme.

ADS enquiries

All enquiries regarding ADS holder accounts and payment of dividends should be addressed to:

BNY Mellon Depositary Receipts, P.O. Box 43006, Providence, RI 02940-3006, US

Tel: +1-866-259-2287 inside the US (toll free)

Tel: +1-201-680-6825 internationally

E-mail: shrrelations@cpushareownerservices.com

A Global Buy DIRECT plan is available for US residents, enabling investment directly in ADSs with reduced brokerage commissions and service costs. For further information on Global Buy DIRECT contact; The Bank of New York Mellon (as above) or visit www.bnymellon.com/shareowner.

The Company provides The Bank of New York Mellon, as depositary, with copies of Annual Reports containing consolidated financial statements and the opinion expressed thereon by its independent auditors. Such financial statements are prepared under IFRS. The Bank of New York Mellon will send these reports to recorded ADS holders who have elected to receive paper copies. The Company also provides to The Bank of New York Mellon all notices of Shareholders’ meetings and other reports and communications that are made generally available to Shareholders of the Company. The Bank of New York Mellon makes such notices, reports and communications available for inspection by recorded holders of ADSs and sends voting instruction forms by post to all recorded holders of ADSs.

Smith & Nephew ADS price

The Company’s ADS price can be obtained from the official New York Stock Exchange website at www.nyse.com, the Smith & Nephew website www.smith-nephew.com and is quoted daily in the Wall Street Journal where the live financial data is updated with a 15-minute delay.

ADS payment information

The Company hereby discloses ADS payment information for the year ended 31 December 2013 in accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission rules 12.D.3 and 12.D.4 relating to Form 20-F filings by foreign private issuers. The depositary collects its fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal or from intermediaries acting for them. The depositary collects fees for making distributions to investors, including payment of dividends by the Company by deducting those fees from the amounts distributed or by selling a portion of distributable property to pay the fees. The depositary may collect its annual fee for depository services by deductions from cash distributions or by directly billing investors or by charging the book-entry system accounts of participants acting for them. The depositary may generally refuse to provide fee-attracting services until its fee for those services are paid.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
170      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Information for shareholders continued

 

 

Persons depositing or withdrawing shares must pay:

 

  

 

For:

 

$5.00 (or less) per 100 ADSs (or portion of 100 ADSs)   
  
  
$0.02 (or less) per ADS   
A fee equivalent to the fee that would be payable if securities distributed to holders had been shares and the shares had been deposited for issuance of ADSs    Distribution of securities distributed to holders of deposited securities which are distributed by the depositary to ADS registered holders
$0.02 (or less) per ADS per calendar year    Depositary services
Registration or transfer fees    Transfer and registration of shares on our share register to or from the name of the depositary or its agent when shares are deposited or withdrawn
Taxes and other governmental charges the depositary or the custodian have to pay on any ADS or share underlying an ADS, for example, stock transfer taxes, stamp duty or withholding taxes    As necessary
Any charges incurred by the depositary or its agents for servicing the deposited securities    As necessary

A fee of two US cents per ADS was paid on the 2012 final dividend and a fee of one US cent per ADS was deducted from the 2013 first interim dividend paid in October. In the period 1 January 2013 to 24 February 2014 the total reimbursed by The Bank of New York Mellon was $134,298.50.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    171

 

 

 

Dividend history

Smith & Nephew has paid dividends on its ordinary shares in every year since 1937. Following the capital restructuring and dividend reduction in 2000 the Group adopted a policy of increasing its dividend cover (the ratio of EPSA, as set out in the ‘Selected financial data’, to ordinary dividends declared for the year). This was intended to increase the financing capability of the Group for acquisitions and other investments. From 2000 to 2004 the dividend increased in line with inflation and, in 2004, dividend cover stood at 4.1 times. Having achieved this level of dividend cover the Board changed its policy, from that of increasing dividends in line with inflation, to that of increasing dividends for 2005 and after by 10%. Following the redenomination of the Company’s share capital into US Dollars the Board re-affirmed its policy of increasing the dividend by 10% a year in US Dollar terms.

On 2 August 2012, the Board announced its intention to pursue a progressive dividend policy, with the aim of increasing the US Dollar value of ordinary dividends over time broadly based on the Group’s underlying growth in earnings, while taking into account capital requirements and cash flows.

From 2013, the Board will review at the time of the full year results, the appropriate level of total annual dividend each year. The Board intends that the interim dividend will be set by a formula and will be equivalent to 40% of the total dividend for the previous year. Dividends will continue to be declared in US Dollars with an equivalent amount in Sterling payable to those Shareholders whose registered address is in the UK, or who have validly elected to receive Sterling dividends.

An interim dividend in respect of each fiscal year is normally declared in August and paid in November. A final dividend will be recommended by the Board of Directors and paid subject to approval by Shareholders at the Company’s Annual General Meeting.

Future dividends of Smith & Nephew will be dependent upon: future earnings; the future financial condition of the Group; the Board’s dividend policy; and the additional factors that might affect the business of the Group set out in ‘Special note regarding forward-looking statements’ and ‘Risk Factors’.

Dividends per share

The table below sets out the dividends per ordinary share in the last five years.

 

                         

Years ended 31 December

 

 
    

2013

 

   

2012

 

   

2011

 

   

2010

 

   

2009

 

 

Pence per share:

         

Interim

    7.211        6.811        4.639        4.233        3.650   

Final/Second interim (ii)

    11.358 (i)        11.778        7.444        6.639        6.494   

Total

    18.569        18.589        12.083        10.872        10.144   

US cents per share:

         

Interim

    11.556        11.000        7.333        6.667        6.067   

Final/Second interim (ii)

    18.889        18.000        12.000        10.911        9.922   

Total

    30.445        29.000        19.333        17.578        15.989   

 

(i) Translated at the Bank of England rate on 24 February 2014.
(ii) 2009 Second interim, 2010 to 2013 Final.

Dividends above include the associated UK tax credit of 10%, but exclude the deduction of withholding taxes. All dividends, up to the second interim dividend for 2005, were declared in pence per ordinary share and translated into US cents per ordinary share at the Noon Buying Rate on the payment date. Since the second interim dividend for 2005 all dividends have been declared in US cents per Ordinary Share.

The 2013 final dividend will be payable on 7 May 2014, subject to Shareholder approval.

In respect of the proposed final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2013 of 17.0 US cents per ordinary share, the record date will be 22 April 2014 and the payment date will be 7 May 2014. The Sterling equivalent per ordinary share will be set following the record date. Shareholders may elect to receive their dividend in either Sterling or US Dollars and the last day for election will be 22 April 2014. The ordinary shares will trade ex-dividend on both the London and New York Stock Exchanges from 16 April 2014.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
172      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Information for shareholders continued

Share prices

The table below sets out, for the periods indicated, the highest and lowest middle market quotations for the Company’s ordinary shares (as derived from the Daily Official List of the UK Listing Authority) and the highest and lowest sales prices of its ADSs (as reported on the New York Stock Exchange composite tape).

 

     Ordinary shares           ADSs  
                High                 Low                      High                  Low  
     £     £           US$      US$  

Year ended 31 December:

           

2009

    6.42        4.20           51.38         30.57   

2010

    6.97        5.38           53.94         41.29   

2011

    7.42        5.21           60.19         42.17   

2012

    6.93        5.80           56.13         45.13   

2013

    8.68        6.80             71.85         52.90   

Quarters in the year ended 31 December:

                                     

2012:

           

1st Quarter

    6.43        5.95           51.13         45.57   

2nd Quarter

    6.40        5.80           51.23         45.13   

3rd Quarter

    6.93        6.38           56.13         49.50   

4th Quarter

    6.92        6.38             55.77         51.01   

2013:

           

1st Quarter

    7.60        6.80           58.00         52.90   

2nd Quarter

    7.95        7.18           60.17         54.83   

3rd Quarter

    8.00        7.30           63.06         56.01   

4th Quarter

    8.68        7.48             71.85         60.05   

2014:

           

1st Quarter (to 24 February 2014)

    9.60        8.57             80.18         70.84   

Last six months:

                                     

August 2013

    8.00        7.50           61.58         58.26   

September 2013

    7.89        7.61           63.06         59.19   

October 2013

    8.03        7.48           65.30         60.05   

November 2013

    8.16        8.01           66.88         64.41   

December 2013

    8.68        8.13           71.85         67.20   

January 2014

    8.96        8.57           74.81         70.84   

February 2014 (to 24 February 2014)

    9.60        8.74             80.18         71.69   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    173

 

 

 

 

Share capital

The principal trading market for the ordinary shares is the London Stock Exchange. The ordinary shares were listed on the New York Stock Exchange on 16 November 1999, trading in the form of ADSs evidenced by ADRs. Each ADS represents five ordinary shares. The ADS facility is sponsored by The Bank of New York Mellon acting as depositary.

All the ordinary shares, including those held by Directors and Executive Officers, rank pari passu with each other. On 23 January 2006 the ordinary shares of 12 2/9 pence were redenominated as ordinary shares of US 20 cents (following approval by Shareholders at the extraordinary general meeting in December 2005). The new US dollar ordinary shares carry the same rights as the previous ordinary shares. The share price continues to be quoted in Sterling and the ADSs continue to represent five ordinary shares. In 2006 the Company issued £50,000 of shares in Sterling in order to comply with English law. These were issued as deferred shares, which are not listed on any stock exchange. They have extremely limited rights and therefore effectively have no value. These shares were allotted to the Chief Executive Officer, although the Board reserves the right to transfer them to another member of the Board should it so wish.

As at 24 February 2014, to the knowledge of the Group, there were 18,188 registered holders of ordinary shares, of whom 89 had registered addresses in the US and held a total of 172,541 ordinary shares (0.02% of the total issued). Because certain ordinary shares are registered in the names of nominees, the number of Shareholders with registered addresses in the US is not representative of the number of beneficial owners of ordinary shares resident in the US.

Shareholdings

As at 24 February 2014, 7,837,412 ADSs equivalent to 39,187,060 ordinary shares or approximately 4.4% of the total ordinary shares in issue, were outstanding and were held by 88 registered holders.

Major Shareholders

As far as is known to Smith & Nephew, the Group is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled by another corporation or by any government and the Group has not entered into arrangements, the operation of which may at a subsequent date result in a change in control of the Group.

As at 24 February 2014, no persons are known to Smith & Nephew to have any interest (as defined in the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the FCA) in 3% or more of the ordinary shares, other than as shown below. The following tables show changes over the last three years in the percentage and numbers of the issued share capital owned by Shareholders holding 3% or more of ordinary shares, as notified to the Company under the Disclosure and Transparency Rules:

 

 

                                                                                                               
    

As at 31 December

 

 
     24 February 2014
%
   

2013

%

    

2012

%

    

2011

%

 

Invesco

    7.5        12.1         11.9         5.0   

BlackRock, Inc.

    4.8        4.7         5.0         5.0   

Newton Investment Management Limited

                   4.9         5.0   

Legal & General Group plc

                   3.0         4.0   

Capital Group of Companies Inc.

                           0.7   
    

As at 31 December

 

 
     24 February 2014
‘000
    2013
‘000
     2012
’000
     2011
’000
 

Invesco

    66,740        107,823         107,823         44,901   

BlackRock, Inc.

    42,621        41,870         44,811         44,811   

Newton Investment Management Limited

                   8,432         44,337   

Legal & General Group plc

                   26,906         35,676   

Capital Group of Companies Inc.

                           6,138   

In addition to the above, the Company is aware that Walter Scott & Partners Limited held approximately 37.7 million ordinary shares (4.2%) at 24 February 2014.

The Company is not aware of any person who has a significant direct or indirect holding of securities in the Company, and is not aware of any persons holding securities which may control the Company. There are no securities in issue which have special rights as to the control of the Company.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
174      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Information for shareholders continued

Purchase of ordinary shares on behalf of the Company

At the AGM, the Company will be seeking a renewal of its current permission from Shareholders to purchase up to 10% of its own shares. On 2 May 2013, the Company announced its intention to purchase up to $300m of its own ordinary shares. The Company has purchased 18,210,000 ordinary shares at a cost of $226m for the year to 31 December 2013.

 

                                                                                                               
    

Total shares
purchased
(000s)

 

   

Average price
paid per share
(p)

 

    

Total number of
shares purchased as
part of publicly
announced plans or
programmes

 

    

Approximate US$
value of shares that
may yet be purchased
under the plan

 

 

2 May 2013

            300,000,000   

7-31 May 2013

    2,434,000        773.9220         2,434,000         271,072,938   

3-24 June 2013

    3,970,000        750.9677         6,404,000         224,546,903   

2-29 August 2013

    2,750,000        782.7249         9,154,000         190,975,094   

2-25 September 2013

    3,385,000        773.9235         12,539,000         149,054,820   

1-29 November 2013

    3,791,000        806.5939         16,330,000         99,483,166   

2-17 December 2013

    1,880,000        836.7099         18,210,000         73,647,255   

The shares were purchased in the open market by JP Morgan Cazenove Limited and UBS Limited on behalf of the Company.

 

Exchange controls and other limitations affecting security holders

There are no UK governmental laws, decrees or regulations that restrict the export or import of capital or that affect the payment of dividends, interest or other payments to non-resident holders of Smith & Nephew’s securities, except for certain restrictions imposed from time to time by Her Majesty’s Treasury of the United Kingdom pursuant to legislation, such as the United Nations Act 1946 and the Emergency Laws Act 1964, against the government or residents of certain countries.

There are no limitations, either under the laws of the UK or under the Articles of Association of Smith & Nephew, restricting the right of non-UK residents to hold or to exercise voting rights in respect of ordinary shares, except that where any overseas Shareholder has not provided to the Company a UK address for the service of notices, the Company is under no obligation to send any notice or other document to an overseas address. It is, however, the current practice of the Company to send every notice or other document to all Shareholders regardless of the country recorded in the register of members, with the exception of details of the Company’s dividend reinvestment plan, which are not sent to Shareholders with recorded addresses in the US and Canada.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    175

 

 

 

Taxation information for Shareholders

The comments below are of a general and summary nature and are based on the Group’s understanding of certain aspects of current UK and US federal income tax law and practice relevant to the ADSs and ordinary shares not in ADS form. The comments address the material US and UK tax consequences generally applicable to a person who is the beneficial owner of ADSs or ordinary shares and who, for US federal income tax purposes, is a citizen or resident of the US, a corporation (or other entity taxable as a corporation) created or organised in or under the laws of the US, or an estate or trust the income of which is included in gross income for US federal income tax purposes regardless of its source (each a ‘US Holder’). The comments set out below do not purport to address all tax consequences of the ownership of ADSs or ordinary shares which may be material to a particular holder and in particular do not deal with the position of Shareholders who directly or indirectly own 10% or more of the Company’s issued ordinary shares. This discussion does not apply to (i) persons whose holding of ADSs or ordinary shares is effectively connected with or pertains to either a permanent establishment in the UK through which a US Holder carries on a business in the UK or a fixed base from which a US Holder performs independent personal services in the UK, or (ii) persons whose registered address is inside the UK. This discussion does not apply to certain investors subject to special rules, such as certain financial institutions, tax-exempt entities, insurance companies, broker-dealers, traders in securities that elect to use the mark to market method of tax accounting, partnerships or other entities treated as partnerships for US federal income tax purposes, US Holders holding ADSs or ordinary shares as part of a hedging, conversion or other integrated transaction or whose functional currency for US federal income tax purposes is other than the US dollar and US Holders liable for alternative minimum tax. In addition, the comments below do not address the potential application of the provisions of the United States Internal Revenue Code, known as the Medicare contribution tax, or any US state, local or non-US (other than UK) taxes. The summary deals only with US Holders who hold ADSs or ordinary shares as capital assets. The summary is based on current UK and US law and practice which is subject to change, possibly with retroactive effect. US Holders are recommended to consult their own tax advisers as to the particular tax consequences to them of the ownership of ADSs or ordinary shares. The Company believes, and this discussion assumes, that the Company was not a passive foreign investment company for its taxable year ended 31 December 2013.

This discussion is based in part on representations by the depositary and assumes that each obligation under the deposit agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms. For purposes of US federal income tax law, US Holders of ADSs will generally be treated as owners of the ordinary shares represented by the ADSs. However, the US Treasury has expressed concerns that parties to whom depositary shares are released before shares are delivered to the depositary (‘pre-released’) may be taking actions that are inconsistent with the claiming of foreign tax credits by owners of depositary shares. Such actions would also be inconsistent with the claiming of the reduced rate of tax, described below, applicable to dividends received by certain non-corporate US Holders. Accordingly, the availability of the reduced tax rate for dividends received by certain non-corporate US Holders of ADSs could be affected by actions that may be taken by parties to whom ADSs are pre-released.

 

Taxation of dividends in the UK and the US

The UK does not currently impose a withholding tax on dividends paid by a UK corporation, such as the Company.

Distributions paid by the Company will be treated for US federal income tax purposes as foreign source ordinary dividend income to a US Holder to the extent paid out of the Company’s current or accumulated earnings and profits as determined for US federal income tax purposes. Such dividends will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to corporate US Holders.

Dividends paid to certain non-corporate US Holders of ordinary shares or ADSs may be subject to US federal income tax at lower rates than those applicable to other types of ordinary income if certain conditions are met. Non- corporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at these favourable rates.

Taxation of capital gains

US Holders, who are not resident or ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the UK, will not generally be liable for UK capital gains tax on any capital gain realised upon the sale or other disposition of ADSs or ordinary shares unless the ADSs or ordinary shares are held in connection with a trade carried on in the UK through a permanent establishment (or in the case of individuals, through a branch or agency). Furthermore, UK resident individuals who acquire ADSs or ordinary shares before becoming temporarily non-UK residents may remain subject to UK taxation of capital gains on gains realised while non-resident.

For US federal income tax purposes, gains or losses realised upon a taxable sale or other disposition of ADSs or ordinary shares by US Holders generally will be US source capital gains or losses and will be long-term capital gains or losses if the ADSs or ordinary shares were held for more than one year. The amount of a US Holder’s gain or loss will be equal to the difference between the amount realised on the sale or other disposition and such holder’s tax basis in the ADSs, or ordinary shares, determined in US dollars.

Inheritance and estate taxes

The HM Revenue & Customs imposes inheritance tax on capital transfers which occur on death, and in the seven years preceding death. The HM Revenue & Customs considers that the US/UK Double Taxation Convention on Estate and Gift Tax applies to inheritance tax. Consequently, a US citizen who is domiciled in the US and is not a UK national or domiciled in the UK will not be subject to UK inheritance tax in respect of ADSs and ordinary shares. A UK national who is domiciled in the US will be subject to both UK inheritance tax and US federal estate tax but will be entitled to a credit for US federal estate tax charged in respect of ADSs and ordinary shares in computing the liability to UK inheritance tax. Conversely, a US citizen who is domiciled or deemed domiciled in the UK will be entitled to a credit for UK inheritance tax charged in respect of ADSs and ordinary shares in computing the liability for US federal estate tax. Special rules apply where ADSs and ordinary shares are business property of a permanent establishment of an enterprise situated in the UK.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
176      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Information for shareholders continued

US information reporting and backup withholding

A US Holder may be subject to US information reporting and backup withholding on dividends paid on or the proceeds of sales of ADSs or ordinary shares made within the US or through certain US-related financial intermediaries, unless the US Holder is an exempt recipient or, in the case of backup withholding, provides a correct US taxpayer identification number and certain other conditions are met. US backup withholding may apply if there has been a notification from the US Internal Revenue Service of a failure to report all interest or dividends.

Any backup withholding deducted may be credited against the US Holder’s US federal income tax liability, and, where the backup withholding exceeds the actual liability, the US Holder may obtain a refund by timely filing the appropriate refund claim with the US Internal Revenue Service.

Certain US Holders who are individuals (and under proposed Treasury regulations, certain entities) may be required to report information relating to securities issued by a non-US person (or foreign accounts through which the securities are held), subject to certain exceptions (including an exception for securities held in accounts maintained by US financial institutions). US Holders should consult their tax advisers regarding their reporting obligations with respect to the ordinary shares or ADSs.

UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax

UK stamp duty is charged on documents and in particular instruments for the transfer of registered ownership of ordinary shares. Transfers of ordinary shares in certificated form will generally be subject to UK stamp duty at the rate of  1 2 % of the consideration given for the transfer with the duty rounded up to the nearest £5.

UK stamp duty reserve tax (‘SDRT’) arises when there is an agreement to transfer shares in UK companies ‘for consideration in money or money’s worth’, and so an agreement to transfer ordinary shares for money or other consideration may give rise to a charge to SDRT at the rate of  1 2 % (rounded up to the nearest penny). The charge of SDRT will be cancelled, and any SDRT already paid will be refunded, if within six years of the agreement an instrument of transfer is produced to HM Revenue & Customs and the appropriate stamp duty paid.

Transfers of ordinary shares into CREST (an electronic transfer system) are exempt from stamp duty so long as the transferee is a member of CREST who will hold the ordinary shares as a nominee for the transferor and the transfer is in a form that will ensure that the securities become held in uncertificated form within CREST. Paperless transfers of ordinary shares within CREST for consideration in money or money’s worth are liable to SDRT rather than stamp duty. SDRT on relevant transactions will be collected by CREST at  1 2 %, and this will apply whether or not the transfer is effected in the UK and whether or not the parties to it are resident or situated in the UK.

 

 

 

 

 

 

A charge of stamp duty or SDRT at the rate of 1  1 2 % of the consideration (or, in some circumstances, the value of the shares concerned) will arise on a transfer or issue of ordinary shares to the depositary or to certain persons providing a clearance service (or their nominees or agents) for the conversion into ADRs and will generally be payable by the depositary or person providing clearance service. In accordance with the terms of the Deposit Agreement, any tax or duty payable by the depositary on deposits of ordinary shares will be charged by the depositary to the party to whom ADRs are delivered against such deposits.

No liability for stamp duty or SDRT will arise on any transfer of, or agreement to transfer, an ADS or beneficial ownership of an ADS, provided that the ADS and any instrument of transfer or written agreement to transfer remains at all times outside the UK, and provided further that any instrument of transfer or written agreement to transfer is not executed in the UK and the transfer does not relate to any matter or thing done or to be done in the UK (the location of the custodian as a holder of ordinary shares not being relevant in this context). In any other case, any transfer of, or agreement to transfer, an ADS or beneficial ownership of an ADS could, depending on all the circumstances of the transfer, give rise to a charge to stamp duty or SDRT.

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    177

 

 

 

 

Articles of Association

The following summarises certain material rights of holders of the Company’s ordinary shares under the material provisions of the Company’s Articles of Association and English law. This summary is qualified in its entirety by reference to the Companies Act and the Company’s Articles of Association. In the following description, a ‘Shareholder’ is the person registered in the Company’s register of members as the holder of an ordinary share.

The Company is incorporated under the name Smith & Nephew plc and is registered in England and Wales with registered number 324357.

The Company’s ordinary shares may be held in certificated or uncertificated form. No holder of the Company’s shares will be required to make additional contributions of capital in respect of the Company’s shares in the future. In accordance with English law the Company’s ordinary shares rank equally.

Directors

Under the Company’s Articles of Association, a Director may not vote in respect of any contract, arrangement, transaction or proposal in which he, or any person connected with him, has any material interest other than by virtue of his interests in securities of, or otherwise in or through, the Company. This is subject to certain exceptions relating to proposals (a) indemnifying him in respect of obligations incurred on behalf of the Company, (b) indemnifying a third party in respect of obligations of the Company for which the Director has assumed responsibility under an indemnity or guarantee, (c) relating to an offer of securities in which he will be interested as an underwriter, (d) concerning another body corporate in which the Director is beneficially interested in less than 1% of the issued shares of any class of shares of such a body corporate, (e) relating to an employee benefit in which the Director will share equally with other employees and (f) relating to any insurance that the Company is empowered to purchase for the benefit of Directors of the Company in respect of actions undertaken as Directors (and/or officers) of the Company.

A Director shall not vote or be counted in any quorum present at a meeting in relation to a resolution on which he is not entitled to vote.

The Directors are empowered to exercise all the powers of the Company to borrow money, subject to the limitation that the aggregate amount of all monies borrowed after deducting cash and current asset investments by the Company and its subsidiaries shall not exceed the sum of $6,500,000,000.

Any Director who has been appointed by the Directors since the previous Annual General Meeting of Shareholders, either to fill a casual vacancy or as an additional Director holds office only until the conclusion of the next Annual General Meeting and then shall be eligible for re-election by the Shareholders. The other Directors retire and are eligible for re-appointment at the third Annual General Meeting after the meeting at which they were last re-appointed. If not re-appointed a Director retiring at a meeting shall retain office until the meeting appoints someone in his place, or if it does not do so, until the conclusion of the meeting. The Directors are subject to removal with or without cause by the Board or the Shareholders. Directors are not required to hold any shares of the Company by way of qualification.

Under the Company’s Articles of Association and English law, a Director may be indemnified out of the assets of the Company against liabilities he may sustain or incur in the execution of his duties.

Rights attaching to ordinary shares

Under English law, dividends are payable on the Company’s ordinary shares only out of profits available for distribution, as determined in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the UK and by the Companies Act 2006. Holders of the Company’s ordinary shares are entitled to receive final dividends as may be declared by the Directors and approved by the Shareholders in general meeting, rateable according to the amounts paid up on such shares, provided that the dividend cannot exceed the amount recommended by the Directors.

The Company’s Board of Directors may declare such interim dividends as appear to them to be justified by the Company’s financial position. If authorised by an ordinary resolution of the Shareholders, the Board may also direct payment of a dividend in whole or in part by the distribution of specific assets (and in particular of paid up shares or debentures of the Company).

Any dividend unclaimed after 12 years from the date the dividend was declared, or became due for payment, will be forfeited and will revert to the Company.

There were no material modifications to the rights of Shareholders under the Articles during 2012.

Voting rights of ordinary shares

Voting at any general meeting of Shareholders is by a show of hands unless a poll, which is a written vote, is duly demanded and held. On a show of hands, every Shareholder who is present in person at a general meeting has one vote regardless of the number of shares held. On a poll, every Shareholder who is present in person or by proxy has one vote for each ordinary share held by that Shareholder. A poll may be demanded by any of the following:

 

the chairman of the meeting;

 

at least five Shareholders present or by proxy entitled to vote on the resolution;

 

any Shareholder or Shareholders representing in the aggregate not less than one-tenth of the total voting rights of all Shareholders entitled to vote on the resolution; or

 

any Shareholder or Shareholders holding shares conferring a right to vote on the resolution on which there have been paid-up sums in aggregate equal to not less than one-tenth of the total sum paid up on all the shares conferring that right.

A form of proxy will be treated as giving the proxy the authority to demand a poll, or to join others in demanding one, as above.

The necessary quorum for a general meeting is two Shareholders present in person or by proxy carrying the right to vote upon the business to be transacted.

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
178      

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Information for shareholders continued

Matters are transacted at general meetings of the Company by the processing and passing of resolutions of which there are two kinds; ordinary or special resolutions:

 

Ordinary resolutions include resolutions for the re-election of Directors, the approval of financial statements, the declaration of dividends (other than interim dividends), the appointment and re-appointment of auditors or the grant of authority to allot shares. An ordinary resolution requires the affirmative vote of a majority of the votes of those persons voting at the meetings at which there is a quorum

 

Special resolutions include resolutions amending the Company’s Articles of Association, dis-applying statutory pre-emption rights or changing the Company’s name; modifying the rights of any class of the Company’s shares at a meeting of the holders of such class or relating to certain matters concerning the Company’s winding up. A special resolution requires the affirmative vote of not less than three-quarters of the votes of the persons voting at the meeting at which there is a quorum.

Annual General Meetings must be convened upon advance written notice of 21 days. Other general meetings must be convened upon advance written notice of at least 14 clear days. The days of delivery or receipt of notice are not included. The notice must specify the nature of the business to be transacted. Meetings are convened by the Board of Directors. Members with 5% of the ordinary share capital of the Company may requisition the Board to convene a meeting.

Variation of rights

If, at any time, the Company’s share capital is divided into different classes of shares, the rights attached to any class may be varied, subject to the provisions of the Companies Act, with the consent in writing of holders of three-quarters in nominal value of the issued shares of that class or upon the adoption of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class. At every such separate meeting, all the provisions of the articles of association relating to proceedings at a general meeting apply, except that the quorum is to be the number of persons (which must be two or more) who hold or represent by proxy not less than one-third in nominal value of the issued shares of the class and at any such meeting a poll may be demanded in writing by any person or their proxy who hold shares of that class. Where a person is present by proxy or proxies, he is treated as holding only the shares in respect of which the proxies are authorised to exercise voting rights.

Rights in a winding up

Except as the Company’s Shareholders have agreed or may otherwise agree, upon the Company’s winding up, the balance of assets available for distribution:

 

after the payment of all creditors including certain preferential creditors, whether statutorily preferred creditors or normal creditors; and

 

subject to any special rights attaching to any other class of shares;

 

is to be distributed among the holders of ordinary shares according to the amounts paid-up on the shares held by them. This distribution is generally to be made in US dollars. A liquidator may, however, upon the adoption of any extraordinary resolution of the Shareholders and any other sanction required by law, divide among the Shareholders the whole or any part of the Company’s assets in kind.

 

 

 

 

Limitations on voting and shareholding

There are no limitations imposed by English law or the Company’s Articles of Association on the right of non-residents or foreign persons to hold or vote the Company’s ordinary shares or ADSs, other than the limitations that would generally apply to all of the Company’s Shareholders.

Transfers of shares

The Board may refuse to register the transfer of shares held in certificated form which:

 

are not fully paid (provided that it shall not exercise this discretion in such a way as to prevent stock market dealings in the shares of that class from taking place on an open and proper basis);

 

are not duly stamped or duly certified or otherwise shown to the satisfaction of the Board to be exempt from stamp duty, lodged at the Transfer Office or at such other place as the Board may appoint and (save in the case of a transfer by a person to whom no certificate was issued in respect of the shares in question) accompanied by the certificate for the shares to which it relates, and such other evidence as the Board may reasonably require to show the right of the transferor to make the transfer and, if the instrument of transfer is executed by some other person on his behalf, the authority of that person so to do;

 

are in respect of more than one class of shares; or

 

are in favour of more than four transferees.

Deferred shares

Following the re-denomination of share capital on 23 January 2006 the ordinary shares’ nominal value became 20 US cents each. There were no changes to the rights or obligations of the ordinary shares. In order to comply with the Companies Act 2006, a new class of sterling shares was created, deferred shares, of which £50,000 were issued and allotted in 2006 as fully paid to the Chief Executive Officer though the Board reserves the right to transfer them to another member of the Board should it so wish. These deferred shares have no voting or dividend rights and on winding up only are entitled to repayment at nominal value only if all ordinary Shareholders have received the nominal value of their shares plus an additional $1,000 each.

Amendments

The Company does not have any special rules about amendments to its Articles of Association beyond those imposed by law.

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    179

 

 

Cross Reference to Form 20-F

This table provides a cross reference from the information included in this Annual Report to the requirements of Form 20-F.

 

 

Part I

 

      

 

Page

 

Item 1

  Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers   n/a

Item 2

  Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable   n/a

Item 3

  Key Information    
    A – Selected Financial Data   159-160
    B – Capitalisation and Indebtedness   n/a
    C – Reason for the Offer and Use of Proceeds   n/a
    D – Risk Factors   156-158

Item 4

  Information on the Company    
    A – History and Development of the Company   155
    B – Business Overview  

1, 60-13, 16-33, 102-105,

156-158, 164-167

    C – Organisational Structure   8-9, 117-118, 148-149
    D – Property, Plant and equipment   155

Item 4A

  Unresolved Staff Comments   None

Item 5

  Operating and Financial Review and Prospects    
    A – Operating results  

7-13, 24-33, 36-41, 95, 97,

99, 164-167

    B – Liquidity and Capital Resources   99, 121-126, 139
    C – Research and Development, patents and licences, etc.   13, 19-20
    D – Trend information   16-18, 90
    E – Off Balance Sheet Arrangements   155
    F – Tabular Disclosure of Contractual Obligations   163
    G – Safe Harbor   184

Item 6

  Directors, Senior Management and Employees    
    A – Directors and Senior Management   44-47, 49
    B – Compensation   62-85
    C – Board Practices   44-61
    D – Employees   9, 22-23, 105
    E – Share Ownership   82, 143-147

Item 7

  Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions    
    A – Major Shareholders   173
        – Host Country Shareholders   173
    B – Related Party Transactions   147, 155
    C – Interests of experts and counsel   n/a

Item 8

  Financial information    
    A – Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information   87-149
        – Legal Proceedings   129-131
        – Dividends   171
    B – Significant Changes   None

Item 9

  The Offer and Listing    
    A – Offer and Listing Details   172-173
    B – Plan and Distribution   n/a
    C – Markets   173
    D – Selling Shareholders   n/a
    E – Dilution   n/a
   

F – Expenses of the Issue

 

 

n/a

 

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
180      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Cross Reference to Form 20-F continued

 

         

 

Page

 

Item 10

  Additional Information    
    A – Share capital   n/a
    B – Memorandum and Articles of Association   177-178
    C – Material Contracts   11, 99, 121
    D – Exchange Controls   174
    E – Taxation   175-176
    F – Dividends and Paying Agents   n/a
    G – Statement by Experts   n/a
    H – Documents on Display   184
    I – Subsidiary Information   148-149

Item 11

  Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk   121-128, 156-158

Item 12

  Description of Securities Other than Equity Securities   n/a

Item 12D

  American Depository shares   169-170

Part II

       

Item 13

  Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies   None

Item 14

  Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds   None

Item 15

  Controls and Procedures   53, 58-61, 91

Item 16

  (Reserved)   n/a

Item 16A

  Audit Committee Financial Expert   58

Item 16B

  Code of Ethics   52

Item 16C

  Principal Accountant Fees and Services   54, 60-61, 107

Item 16D

  Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committee   n/a

Item 16E

  Purchase of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchase   138, 174

Item 16F

  Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant   None

Item 16G

  Corporate Governance   49

Item 16H

  Mine Safety Disclosure   n/a

Part III

       

Item 17

  Financial Statements   n/a

Item 18

  Financial Statements   87-149

Item 19

 

 

Exhibits

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    181

 

 

Glossary of terms

Unless the context indicates otherwise, the following terms have the meanings shown below:

 

 

Term

 

 

 

Meaning

 

ADR   In the US, the Company’s Ordinary Shares are traded in the form of ADSs evidenced by American Depository Receipts (‘ADRs’).
ADS   In the US, the Company’s Ordinary Shares are traded in the form of American Depositary Shares (‘ADSs’).
Advanced Surgical Devices   A product group comprising products for orthopaedic replacement and reconstruction, endoscopy devices and trauma devices. Products for orthopaedic replacement include systems for knees, hips, and shoulders. Endoscopy devices comprise of support products for orthopaedic surgery such as computer assisted surgery and minimally invasive surgery techniques using specialised viewing and access devices, surgical instruments and powered equipment. Orthopaedics trauma devices are used in the treatment of bone fractures including rods, pins, screws, plates and external frames.
Advanced Wound Management   A product group comprising products associated with the treatment of skin wounds, ranging from products that provide moist wound healing using breathable films and polymers to products providing active wound healing by biochemical or cellular action.
AET   Arthroscopic Enabling Technologies. Franchise offering healthcare providers a variety of technologies such as fluid management equipment for surgical access, high definition cameras, digital image capture, scope, light sources and monitors, radio frequency probes, electromechanical and mechanical blades and hand instruments for removing damaged tissue.
AGM   Annual General Meeting of the Company.
Arthroscopy   Endoscopy of the joints is termed ‘arthroscopy’, with the principal applications being the knee and shoulder.
ASD   Advanced Surgical Devices division.
AWM   Advanced Wound Management division.
Basis Point   One hundredth of one percentage point.
Chronic wounds   Chronic wounds are those with long or unknown healing times including leg ulcers, pressure sores and diabetic foot ulcers.
COGS   Cost of Goods Sold
Company   Smith & Nephew plc or, where appropriate, the Company’s Board of Directors, unless the context otherwise requires.
Companies Act   Companies Act 2006, as amended, of England and Wales.
DOJ   US Department of Justice
EBITA   Earnings before interest, tax and amortisation.
EBITDA   Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation.
Emerging markets   Emerging markets include Greater China, India, Brazil and Russia.
EPSA   Adjusted Earnings Per Share is a trend measure which presents the long-term profitability of the Group excluding the impact of specific transactions that management considers affects the Group’s short-term profitability. The Group presents this measure to assist investors in their understanding of trends. Adjusted attributable profit is the numerator used for this measure.
Endoscopy   Through a small incision, surgeons are able to see inside the body using a monitor and identify and repair defects.
Established Markets   Established Markets include United States of America, Europe, Australia, New Zealand, Canada and Japan.
Euro or €   References to the common currency used in the majority of the countries of the European Union.
FCA   Financial Conduct Authority
FDA   US Food and Drug Administration.
Financial statements   Refers to the consolidated Group Accounts of Smith & Nephew plc.
FTSE 100   Index of the largest 100 listed companies on the London Stock Exchange by market capitalisation.
GMP   Good manufacturing practice or ‘GMP’ is the guidance that outlines the aspects of production and testing that can impact the quality of a product.
Group or Smith & Nephew   Used for convenience to refer to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries, unless the context otherwise requires.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
182      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

Glossary of terms continued

 

 

Term

 

 

 

Meaning

 

IFRS   International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the EU and as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.
International markets   International Markets include Middle East, North Africa, Southern Africa, Latin America, ASEAN, South Korea and Eastern Europe.
LIBOR   London Interbank Offered Rate
LSE   London Stock Exchange.
Metal-on-metal hip resurfacing   A less invasive surgical approach to treating arthritis in certain patients whereby only the surfaces of the hip joint are replaced leaving the hip head substantially preserved.
Negative Pressure Wound Therapy   A technology used to treat chronic wounds such as diabetic ulcers, pressure sores and post-operative wounds through the application of sub-atmospheric pressure to an open wound.
NYSE   New York Stock Exchange.
Orthopaedic products   Orthopaedic reconstruction products include joint replacement systems for knees, hips and shoulders and support products such as computer-assisted surgery and minimally invasive surgery techniques. Orthopaedic trauma devices are used in the treatment of bone fractures including rods, pins, screws, plates and external frames. Clinical therapies products include joint fluid therapy for pain reduction of the knee and an ultrasound treatment to accelerate the healing of bone fractures.
OSHA   US Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OXINIUM   OXINIUM material is an advanced load bearing technology. It is created through a proprietary manufacturing process that enables zirconium to absorb oxygen and transform to a ceramic on the surface, resulting in a material that incorporates the features of ceramic and metal. Management believes that OXINIUM material used in the production of components of knee and hip implants exhibits unique performance characteristics due to its hardness, low-friction and resistance to roughening and abrasion.
Parent Company   Smith & Nephew plc.
Pound Sterling, Sterling, £, pence or p   References to UK currency. 1p is equivalent to one hundredth of £1.
Repair   A product group within ASD comprising specialised devices, fixation systems and bio-absorbable materials to repair joints and associated tissue.
Resection   Products that cut or ablate tissue within ASD comprising mechanical blades, radio frequency wands, electromechanical and hand instruments for resecting tissue.
SEC   US Securities and Exchange Commission
SKUs   Stock Keeping Units
Trading profit   Trading profit is a trend which presents the long-term profitability of the Group excluding the impact of specific transactions that management considers affects the Group’s short- term profitability. The Group presents this measure to assist investors in their understanding of trends. The Group has identified the following items, where material, as those to be excluded from operating profit when arriving at trading profit: acquisition and disposal related items including amortisation of acquisition intangible assets and impairments; significant restructuring events; acquisition costs; and gains and losses resulting from legal disputes and uninsured losses.
UK   United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.
UK GAAP   Accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom.
US   United States of America.
US Dollars, US $ or cents   References to US currency. 1 cent is equivalent to one hundredth of US$1.
US GAAP   Accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
Visualisation   Products within ASD comprising digital cameras, light sources, monitors, scopes, image capture, central control and multimedia broadcasting systems for use in endoscopic surgery with visualisation.
Wound bed   An area of healthy dermal and epidermal tissue of a wound.

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

    183

 

 

Index

 

2012 Financial highlights

    164   

2013 Financial highlights

    4   

Accounting Policies

    101   

Accounts Presentation

    184   

Acquisitions and disposals

    140   

Acquisition related costs

    107   
Advanced Surgical Devices – segment performance     24   
Advanced Wound Management – segment performance     29   

American Depository Shares

    169   

Articles of Association

    177, 178   

Audit fees

    107   

Board of Directors

    44   

Business overview

    19   

Business segment information

    102   

Cash and borrowings

    121   

Chairman’s statement

    5   

Chief Executive Officer’s review of strategy

    10   

Company auditor’s report

    150   

Company balance sheet

    151   

Contingencies

    129   

Contractual obligations

    163   

Corporate Governance Statement

    48   

Critical accounting policies

    90   

Cross Reference to Form 20-F

    179   

Currency fluctuations

    157   

Currency translation

    101   

Deferred taxation

    109   

Directors’ remuneration report

    62   

Directors’ responsibilities for the accounts

    88   

Directors’ responsibility statement

    89   

Dividends

    138   

Earnings per share

    111   

Employees/People

    9, 22, 105   

Employees’ Share Trust

    138   

Executive Officers

    46   

Financial instruments

    124   

Glossary of terms

    181   

Goodwill

    114   

Governance and policy

    43   

Group balance sheet

    96   

Group cash flow statement

    98   

Group history

    155   

Group income statement

    94   

Group overview

    8   

Group statement of changes in equity

    100   

Group statement of comprehensive income

    94   

Independent auditor’s reports

    91, 92, 93   

Information for Shareholders

    168   

Intangible assets

    115   

Intellectual property

    20   

Interest

    95, 108   

 

Internal control framework

    53   

Inventories

    59, 90, 118   

Investments

    117   

Investment in associates

    117, 118   

Investor information

    168   

Key Performance Indicators

    12   

Leases

    124, 142   

Legal proceedings

    130   

Liquidity and capital resources

    99   

Manufacturing, supply and distribution

    21, 157   

Marketplace

    16   

New accounting standards

    101   

Notes to the Company accounts

    152   

Notes to the Group Accounts

    101   

Off-balance sheet arrangements

    155   

Operating profit

   

 

38, 95,

103, 106

 

  

Other finance (costs)/income

    108   

Outlook and trend information

    15, 16   

Parent Company accounts

    151   

Payables

    120   

People/Employees

    9, 22, 105   

Principal subsidiary undertakings

    148   

Provisions

    129   

Property, plant and equipment

    112, 155   

Receivables

    60, 119   

Regulation

   

 

17, 20, 41,

158

 

  

Related party transactions

    147, 155   

Research and development

   

 

19, 95,

106, 164

 

  

Restructuring and rationalisation expenses

    107   

Retirement benefit obligation

    59, 90, 131   

Risk factors

    156   

Risk management

    38, 61, 124   

Sales and marketing

    22   

Selected financial data

    159   

Share based payments

    143   

Share buy-back

    15, 138, 174   

Share capital

   

 

52, 137,

154, 173

 

  

Shareholder return

    83   

Strategy

    10   

Sustainability

    34   

Taxation

    60, 95, 108   

Taxation information for Shareholders

    175   

Treasury shares

    138, 154   

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
184      

 

SMITH & NEPHEW ANNUAL REPORT 2013

OTHER FINANCIAL INFORMATION

 

 

 

About Smith & Nephew

The Smith & Nephew Group (the ‘Group’) is a global medical devices business operating in the markets for advanced surgical devices comprising orthopaedic reconstruction, trauma and sports medicine and advanced wound management, with revenue of approximately $4 billion in 2013. Smith & Nephew plc (the ‘Company’) is the parent company of the Group. It is an English public limited company with its shares listed on the premium list of the UK Listing Authority and traded on the London Stock Exchange. Shares are also traded on the New York Stock Exchange in the form of American Depositary Shares (‘ADSs’).

This is the Annual Report of Smith & Nephew plc for the year ended 31 December 2013. It comprises, in a single document, the Annual Report and Accounts of the Company in accordance with UK requirements and the Annual Report on Form 20-F in accordance with the regulations of the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (‘SEC).

Smith & Nephew operates on a worldwide basis and has distribution channels in over 90 countries. In the more established countries by revenue, the Group’s business operations are organised by divisions. In the majority of the remaining markets, operations are managed by country managers who are responsible for sales and distribution of the Group’s entire product range. These comprise the Emerging Markets & International Markets.

Smith & Nephew’s corporate website, www.smith-nephew.com, gives additional information on the Group, including an electronic version of this Annual Report. Information made available on this website, or other websites mentioned in this Annual Report, are not, and should not be regarded as being, part of or incorporated into this Annual Report.

For the convenience of the reader, a Glossary of technical and financial terms used in this document is included on pages 181 to 182. The product names referred to in this document are identified by use of capital letters and the 0 symbol (on first occurence) and are trademarks owned by or licensed to members of the Group.

Presentation

The Group’s fiscal year end is 31 December. References in this Annual Report to a particular year are to the fiscal year unless otherwise indicated. Except as the context otherwise requires, ‘Ordinary Share’ or ‘share’ refer to the Ordinary Shares of Smith & Nephew plc of 20 US cents each.

The Group Accounts of Smith & Nephew in this Annual Report are presented in US Dollars. Solely for the convenience of the reader, certain parts of this Annual Report contain translations of amounts in US Dollars into Sterling at specified rates. These translations should not be construed as representations that the US Dollar amounts actually represent such Sterling amounts or could be converted into Sterling at the rate indicated.

Unless stated otherwise, the translation of US Dollars and cents to Sterling and pence in this Annual Report has been made at the Bank of England exchange rate on the date indicated. On 24 February 2014, the Bank of England rate was US$1.6631 per £1.

The results of the Group, as reported in US Dollars, are affected by movements in exchange rates between US Dollars and other currencies. The Group applied the average exchange rates prevailing during the year to translate the results of companies with functional currency other than US Dollars. The currencies which most influenced these translations in the years covered by this report were Sterling, Swiss Franc and the Euro.

The Accounts of the Group in this Annual Report are presented in millions (‘m’) unless otherwise indicated.

Special note regarding forward-looking statements

The Group’s reports filed with, or furnished to, the US Securities and Exchange Commission (‘SEC’), including this document and written information released, or oral statements made, to the public in the future by or on behalf of the Group, contain ‘forward-looking statements’ within the meaning of the US Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, that may or may not prove accurate. For example, statements regarding expected revenue growth and trading profit margins discussed under ‘Outlook’, ‘Global Outlook’ and Strategic performance’, market trends and our product pipeline are forward-looking statements. Phrases such as ‘aim’, ‘plan’, ‘intend’, ‘anticipate’, ‘well-placed’, ‘believe’, ‘estimate’, ‘expect’, ‘target’, ‘consider’ and similar expressions are generally intended to identify forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks, uncertainties and other important factors that could cause actual results, to differ materially from what is expressed or implied by the statements.

For Smith & Nephew, these factors include: economic and financial conditions in the markets we serve, especially those affecting health care providers, payers and customers; price levels for established and innovative medical devices; developments in medical technology; regulatory approvals, reimbursement decisions or other government actions; product defects or recalls; litigation relating to patent or other claims; legal compliance risks and related investigative, remedial or enforcement actions; strategic actions, including acquisitions and dispositions and our success in performing due diligence, valuing and integrating acquired businesses; disruption that may result from transactions or other changes we make in our business plans or organisation to adapt to market developments and numerous other matters that affect us or our markets, including those of a political, economic, business; competitive or reputational nature; relationships with healthcare professionals; reliance on information technology. Specific risks faced by the Group are described under ‘Risk factors’ on pages 156 to 158 of this Annual Report. Any forward-looking statement is based on information available to Smith & Nephew as of the date of the statement. All written or oral forward-looking statements attributable to Smith & Nephew are qualified by this caution. Smith & Nephew does not undertake any obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statement to reflect any change in circumstances or in Smith & Nephew’s expectations.

Division data

Division data and division share estimates throughout this report are derived from a variety of sources including publicly available competitors’ information, internal management information and independent market research reports.

Documents on display

It is possible to read and copy documents referred to in this Annual Report at the Registered Office of the Company. Documents referred to in this Annual Report that have been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission in the US may be read and copied at the SEC’s public reference room located at 450 Fifth Street, NW, Washington DC 20549. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference rooms and their copy charges. The SEC also maintains a web site at www.sec.gov that contains reports and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC. This Annual Report and some of the other information submitted by the Group to the SEC may be accessed through the SEC website.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

The inks used are renewable, biodegradable and emit fewer Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) than mineral-oil inks.

They are based on high levels of renewable raw materials such as vegetable oils and naturally occurring resin.

The inks do not contain any toxic heavy metals and therefore, do not pose a problem if placed in landfill.

 

Designed by Radley Yeldar.

Printed by RR Donnelley 472599.


Table of Contents

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Smith & Nephew plc

15 Adam Street

London WC2N 6LA

United Kingdom

T  +44 (0) 20 7401 7646

F  +44 (0) 20 7960 2356

www.smith-nephew.com

 

 

 


Table of Contents

SIGNATURE

The Registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this Annual Report on its behalf.

 

 

Smith & Nephew plc

(Registrant)

By:   /s/ Susan Swabey
 

Susan Swabey

Company Secretary

London, England

March 6, 2014


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit No.      Description of Document    Incorporated Herein by Reference To    Filed
Herewith
  1      Articles of Association    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2011 filed on March 1, 2012 (File No. 1-14978)   
  2      Smith & Nephew plc is not party to any single instrument relating to long-term debt pursuant to which a total amount of securities exceeding 10% of Smith & Nephew plc’s total assets (on a consolidated basis) is authorized to be issued. Smith & Nephew plc hereby agrees to furnish to the SEC, upon its request, a copy of any instrument defining the rights of holders of its long-term debt or the rights of holders of the long-term debt of any of its subsidiaries for which consolidated or unconsolidated financial statements are required to be filed with the SEC.      
  4     (a) (i)       Material Contract: Facility Agreement and Appendices dated 9 December 2010 by and among Barclays Capital, BNP Paribas SA, Deutsche Bank AG, JP Morgan Chase, Lloyds Banking Group, Royal Bank of Scotland, Société Générale SA and Smith & Nephew plc    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2010 filed on March 3, 2011 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (ii)       Material contract: Share Purchase Agreement and Appendices dated 12 March 2007 by and among Hyos Invest Holding AG, Dr. U Sigg, Dr. R Riedweg, Active Investor AG, and Smith & Nephew International BV and Smith & Nephew plc    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2006 filed on March 28, 2007 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (iii)*        Material contract: Transaction agreement dated November 27, 2012 by and among Smith & Nephew, Inc., Smith & Nephew Inc., Smith & Nephew Inc., Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics AG, Sudbury Acquisitions N.V., DFB Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Healthpoint, Ltd., Healthpoint International, LLC, DFB Biotech of Curaçao, N.V. and Healthpoint Canada ULC.    Form 20-F/A for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on May 21, 2013 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (iv)*       Material Contract: Amendment to the transaction agreement dated December 21, 2012 by and among DFB Pharmaceuticals, Inc. and Smith & Nephew, Inc.    Form 20-F/A for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on May 21, 2013 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (v)       Material contract: Agreement and Appendices dated 3 February 2014 by and among Smith & Nephew plc, Barclays Bank Plc, J.P. Morgan Limited and J.P. Morgan Europe Limited.       X
    (vi)       Material contract: Agreement and Plan of Merger dated 2 February 2014 by and among Arthrocare Corporation, Smith & Nephew, Inc., Rosebud Acquisition Corporation and Smith & Nephew plc.       X

 

* Confidential treatment has been requested. Confidential material has been redacted and filed separately with the SEC.
  The exhibits and schedules to this agreement have been omitted from the filing. Smith & Nephew plc has agreed to furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission, upon its request, a copy of any such omitted exhibits and schedules.


Table of Contents
Exhibit
No.
     Description of Document    Incorporated Herein by Reference To    Filed
Herewith
  4     (c) (i)       Service Agreement of Olivier Bohuon    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2010 filed on March 3, 2011 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (ii)       Retirement provisions for David J Illingworth    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2010 filed on March 3, 2011 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (iii)       Service Agreement of Julie Brown    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on February 28, 2013 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (iv)       Side Letter to the Service Agreement of Julie Brown    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on February 28, 2013 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (v)       Letter of Appointment of Ian Barlow    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2009 filed on March 26, 2010 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (vi)       Letter of Appointment of The Rt. Hon Baroness Virginia Bottomley    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on February 28, 2013 (File No.1-14978)   
    (vii)       Letter of Appointment of Michael Friedman    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on February 28, 2013 (File No.1-14978)   
    (viii)       Letter of Appointment of Ajay Piramal    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2011 filed on March 1, 2012 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (ix)       Letter of Re-Appointment of Rolf Stomberg    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on February 28, 2013 (File No.1-14978)   
    (x)       Letter of Re-Appointment of Richard De Schutter       X
    (xi)       Letter of Re-Appointment of Pamela Kirby       X
    (xii)       Letter of Re-Appointment of Brian Larcombe       X
    (xiii)       Letter of Re-Appointment of Joseph Papa       X
    (xiv)       Letter of Appointment of Roberto Quarta       X


Table of Contents
Exhibit No.      Description of Document    Incorporated Herein by Reference To    Filed
Herewith
  4     (c) (xv)       The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Approved Share Option Plan    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2004 filed on March 16, 2005 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xvi)       The Smith & Nephew 2001 UK Unapproved Share Option Plan    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2004 filed on March 16, 2005 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xvii)       The Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan    Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 333-13694 filed on July 9, 2001 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xviii)       The Smith & Nephew Sharesave Plan (2002)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xix)       The Smith & Nephew International Sharesave Plan (2002)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2004 filed on March 16, 2005 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xx)       The Smith & Nephew Italian Sharesave Plan (2002)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxi)       The Smith & Nephew Dutch Sharesave Plan (2002)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed in April 25, 2003 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxii)       The Smith & Nephew Belgian Sharesave Plan (2002)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxiii)       The Smith & Nephew French Sharesave Plan (2002)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2002 filed on April 25, 2003 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxiv)       Smith & Nephew Irish Employee Share Option Scheme    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2003 filed on March 26, 2004 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxv)       Smith & Nephew 2004 Executive Share Option Scheme    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-122801 filed on February 14, 2005 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxvi)       Smith & Nephew 2004 Performance Share Plan    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-122801 filed on February 14, 2005 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxvii)       Smith & Nephew 2004 Co-investment Plan    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-122801 filed on February 14, 2005 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxviii)       Smith & Nephew U.S. Employee Stock Purchase Plan    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-12052 filed on May 30, 2000 (File No. 1-14978)   


Table of Contents
Exhibit No.      Description of Document    Incorporated Herein by Reference To    Filed
Herewith
  4     (c) (xxix)       Smith & Nephew Long Service Award Scheme    Registration Statement on Form S-8 No. 33-39814 filed on April 5, 1991 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxx)       Smith & Nephew 2004 Performance Share Plan    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-155172 filed on November 7, 2008 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxxi)       Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-155173 filed on November 7, 2008 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxxii)       Smith & Nephew plc Deferred Bonus Plan    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-158239 filed on March 27, 2009 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxxiii)       Smith & Nephew plc Global Share Plan 2010    Registration statement on Form S-8 No. 333-168544 filed on August 5, 2010 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxxiv)       Smith & Nephew ShareSave Plan (2012)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on February 28, 2013 (File No. 1-14978)   
    (xxxv)       Smith & Nephew International ShareSave Plan (2012)    Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2012 filed on February 28, 2013 (File No. 1-14978)   
  8      Principal Subsidiaries       X
12     (a)       Certification of Olivier Bohuon, filed pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 13a -14(a)       X
    (b)       Certification of Julie Brown filed pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 13a -14(a)       X
13     (a)       Certification of Olivier Bohuon and Julie Brown furnished pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 13a -14(b)       X
15.1      Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm       X

Exhibit 4(a)(v)

DATED 3 FEBRUARY 2014

SMITH & NEPHEW PLC

Arranged by

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

and J.P. MORGAN LIMITED

With

J.P. MORGAN EUROPE LIMITED

(as Facility Agent )

 

 

FACILITY AGREEMENT

U.S. $1,400,000,000

 

 

 

LOGO

Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer LLP

65 Fleet Street

London EC4Y 1HS


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

CONTENTS

 

CLAUSE         PAGE  

1.

  

INTERPRETATION

     1   

2.

  

FACILITIES

     15   

3.

  

PURPOSE

     17   

4.

  

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

     18   

5.

  

UTILISATION

     18   

6.

  

REPAYMENT

     19   

7.

  

PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

     19   

8.

  

INTEREST

     23   

9.

  

TERMS

     25   

10.

  

MARKET DISRUPTION

     25   

11.

  

TAXES

     27   

12.

  

INCREASED COSTS

     36   

13.

  

MITIGATION

     37   

14.

  

PAYMENTS

     38   

15.

  

GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

     40   

16.

  

REPRESENTATIONS

     43   

17.

  

INFORMATION COVENANTS

     45   

18.

  

FINANCIAL COVENANTS

     47   

19.

  

GENERAL COVENANTS

     51   

20.

  

DEFAULT

     54   

21.

  

THE ADMINISTRATIVE PARTIES

     58   

22.

  

EVIDENCE AND CALCULATIONS

     64   

23.

  

FEES

     64   

24.

  

INDEMNITIES AND BREAK COSTS

     65   

25.

  

EXPENSES

     66   

26.

  

AMENDMENTS AND WAIVERS

     67   

27.

  

CHANGES TO THE PARTIES

     69   

28.

  

CONFIDENTIALITY

     75   

29.

  

SET OFF

     78   

30.

  

PRO RATA SHARING

     78   

31.

  

SEVERABILITY

     79   

32.

  

COUNTERPARTS

     79   

33.

  

NOTICES

     80   

 

Page I


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

34.

  

LANGUAGE

     82   

35.

  

GOVERNING LAW

     82   

36.

  

ENFORCEMENT

     82   

SCHEDULE 1 ORIGINAL LENDERS

     84   

SCHEDULE 2 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT DOCUMENTS

     85   

P ART  A T O B E D ELIVERED B EFORE T HE F IRST R EQUEST

     85   

P ART  B F OR A N A DDITIONAL G UARANTOR

     86   

SCHEDULE 3 REQUESTS

     88   

P ART  A F ORM OF R EQUEST

     88   

P ART  B F ORM OF S ELECTION N OTICE

     89   

SCHEDULE 4 FORM OF TRANSFER CERTIFICATE

     90   

SCHEDULE 5 FORM OF ACCESSION AGREEMENT

     93   

SCHEDULE 6 FORM OF RESIGNATION REQUEST

     94   

SCHEDULE 7 FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

     95   

SCHEDULE 8 FORM OF INCREASE CONFIRMATION

     96   

SCHEDULE 9 TIMETABLE

     99   

 

Page II


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

THIS AGREEMENT is dated 3 February 2014

BETWEEN:

 

(1) SMITH & NEPHEW PLC (the Company );

 

(2) BARCLAYS BANK PLC and J.P. MORGAN LIMITED as bookrunners and arrangers (whether acting individually or together the Mandated Lead Arrangers );

 

(3) THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS listed in Schedule 1 ( Original Lenders ) as original lenders (the Original Lenders );

 

(4) BARCLAYS BANK PLC and JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A. as underwriters (in this capacity, whether acting individually or together, the Underwriters ); and

 

(5) J.P. MORGAN EUROPE LIMITED as facility agent (in this capacity the Facility Agent ).

IT IS AGREED as follows:

 

1. INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Definitions

In this Agreement:

Acceptable Bank means a bank or financial institution which has a rating for its long-term unsecured and non credit-enhanced debt obligations of A- or higher by Standard & Poor’s or Fitch or A3 or higher by Moody’s or a comparable rating from an internationally recognised credit rating agency.

Accession Agreement means a letter, substantially in the form of Schedule 5 ( Form of Accession Agreement ), with such amendments as the Facility Agent and the Company may agree.

Acquisition means the acquisition effected by merger of the Target pursuant to the Merger Agreement.

Additional Guarantor means a member of the Group which becomes a Guarantor after the date of this Agreement in accordance with Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties ).

Administrative Party means a Mandated Lead Arranger or the Facility Agent.

Affiliate means a Subsidiary or a Holding Company of a person or any other Subsidiary of that Holding Company.

Agent’s Dollar Rate of Exchange means the Facility Agent’s spot rate of exchange for the purchase of the relevant currency in the London foreign exchange market with U.S. Dollars at or about 11.00 a.m. on a particular day.

Anti-Corruption Laws means all laws, rules and regulations of any jurisdiction applicable to the Borrower or its Subsidiaries from time to time concerning or relating to bribery or corruption.

Availability Period means the period from and including the date of this Agreement to and including the earlier of:

 

(a) the date falling nine months after the date of this Agreement;

 

(b) the date upon which the Company notifies the Facility Agent in writing that it has decided not to pursue the Acquisition; and

 

Page 1


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(c) the date upon which the Merger Agreement expires without the Acquisition having taken place.

Available Commitment means a Lender’s Commitment minus:

 

(a) the Dollar Amount of its participation in any outstanding Loans; and

 

(b) in relation to any proposed Utilisation, the Dollar Amount of its participation in any Loans that are due to be made on or before the proposed Utilisation Date,

other than that Lender’s participation in any other Loans that are due to be repaid or prepaid on or before the proposed Utilisation Date.

Available Facility means the aggregate for the time being of each Lender’s Available Commitment.

Borrower means the Company.

Break Costs means the amount (if any) which a Lender is entitled to receive under this Agreement as compensation if any part of a Loan or overdue amount is prepaid as calculated pursuant to the terms of Clause 24.3 ( Break Costs ).

Business Day means a day (other than a Saturday or a Sunday) on which banks are open for general business in London and New York.

Clean-Up Date means the date falling three months after the Closing Date.

Clean-Up Default means an Event of Default to the extent it relates to members of the Target Group.

Clean-Up Representation means any of the representations and warranties under Clause 16 ( Representations ) to the extent they relate to members of the Target Group.

Clean-Up Undertaking means any of the undertakings specified in Clauses 17 ( Information Covenants ) and 19 ( General Covenants ) to the extent they relate to members of the Target Group.

Closing Date means the date upon which the Acquisition is consummated pursuant to the terms of the Merger Agreement.

Code means the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (or any successor legislation thereto), as amended from time to time, and the regulations promulgated and the rulings issued thereunder, all as the same may be in effect at such date.

Commitment means:

 

(a) for an Original Lender, the amount set opposite its name in Schedule 1 ( Original Lenders ) under the heading Commitment and the amount of any other Commitment transferred to it in accordance with this Agreement or assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 ( Increase ); and

 

(b) for any other Lender, the amount of any Commitment transferred to it in accordance with this Agreement or assumed by it in accordance with Clause 2.2 ( Increase ),

to the extent not cancelled, transferred or reduced under this Agreement.

Compliance Certificate has the meaning given to it in Clause 17.2 ( Compliance Certificate ).

 

Page 2


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

Confidential Information means all information relating to the Company, any Obligor, the Group, the Finance Documents or the Facility of which a Finance Party becomes aware in its capacity as, or for the purpose of becoming, a Finance Party or which is received by a Finance Party in relation to, or for the purpose of becoming a Finance Party under, the Finance Documents or a Facility from either:

 

(a) any member of the Group or any of its advisers; or

 

(b) another Finance Party, if the information was obtained by that Finance Party directly or indirectly from any member of the Group or any of its advisers,

in whatever form, and includes information given orally, any document, electronic file or any other way of representing or recording information which contains or is derived or copied from such information, any Funding Rate or Reference Bank Quotation but excludes information that:

 

  (i) is or becomes public information other than as a direct or indirect result of any breach by that Finance Party of Clause 28 ( Confidentiality ); or

 

  (ii) is identified in writing at the time of delivery as non-confidential by any member of the Group or any of its advisers; or

 

  (iii) is known by that Finance Party before the date the information is disclosed to it in accordance with paragraphs (a) or (b) above or is lawfully obtained by that Finance Party after that date, from a source which is, as far as that Finance Party is aware, unconnected with the Group and which, in either case, as far as that Finance Party is aware, has not been obtained in breach of, and is not otherwise subject to, any obligation of confidentiality.

Confidentiality Undertaking means a confidentiality undertaking substantially in the recommended form of the LMA or in any other form agreed between the Company and the Facility Agent.

Default means:

 

(a) an Event of Default; or

 

(b) an event referred to in Clause 20 ( Default ) which would be (with the expiry of a grace period or the giving of notice under the Finance Documents or any combination of them) an Event of Default.

Defaulting Lender means any Lender:

 

(a) which has failed to make its participation in a Loan available or has notified the Facility Agent that it will not make its participation in a Loan available by the Utilisation Date of that Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4 ( Advance of Loan );

 

(b) which has otherwise rescinded or repudiated a Finance Document; or

 

(c) with respect to which an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing,

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (A) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (B) a Disruption Event; and,

payment is made within three Business Days of its due date; or

 

Page 3


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (ii) the Facility Agent is an Impaired Agent and the Company has failed to notify the Lenders by giving not less than three Business Days’ prior notice of alternative arrangements for that payment; or

 

  (iii) the Lender is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Disruption Event means either or both of:

 

(a) a material disruption to those payment or communications systems or to those financial markets which are, in each case, required to operate in order for payments to be made in connection with the Facility (or otherwise in order for the transactions contemplated by the Finance Documents to be carried out) which disruption is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, any of the Parties; or

 

(b) the occurrence of any other event which results in a disruption (of a technical or systems-related nature) to the treasury or payments operations of a Party preventing that, or any other Party:

 

  (i) from performing its payment obligations under the Finance Documents; or

 

  (ii) from communicating with other Parties in accordance with the terms of the Finance Documents,

and which (in either such case) is not caused by, and is beyond the control of, the Party whose operations are disrupted.

Dollar Amount means the amount in U.S. Dollars of a relevant Loan.

ERISA means, at any date, the United States Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (or any successor legislation thereto), as amended from time to time, and the regulations promulgated and the rulings issued thereunder, all as the same may be in effect at such date.

ERISA Affiliate means any person that for the purposes of Title IV of ERISA and Section 412 of the Code would be deemed at any relevant time to be a single employer with an Obligor, pursuant to Section 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code or Section 4001 of ERISA.

ERISA Event means:

 

(a) any reportable event, as defined in Section 4043(c) of ERISA, with respect to a Plan, as to which PBGC has not by regulation waived the requirement of Section 4043(a) of ERISA that it be notified of such event;

 

(b) the filing of a notice of intent to terminate any Plan, if such termination would require material additional contributions in order to be considered a standard termination within the meaning of Section 4041(b) of ERISA, the filing under Section 4041(c) of ERISA of a notice of intent to terminate any Plan or the termination of any Plan under Section 4041(c) of ERISA;

 

(c) the institution of proceedings under Section 4042 of ERISA by PBGC for the termination of, or the appointment of a trustee to administer, any Plan;

 

(d) any failure by any Plan to satisfy the minimum funding requirements of Section 412 and 430 of the Code or Section 302 of ERISA applicable to such Plan, in each case whether or not waived;

 

Page 4


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(e) the failure to make a required contribution to any Plan that would result in the imposition of an encumbrance under Section 412 or 430 of the Code, or at any time prior to the date hereof, a filing under Section 412 of the Code or Section 302 of ERISA of any request for a minimum funding variance with respect to any Plan;

 

(f) an engagement in a non-exempt prohibited transaction within the meaning of Section 4975 of the Code or Section 406 of ERISA;

 

(g) the complete or partial withdrawal of any Obligor or any ERISA Affiliate from a Multiemployer Plan; and

 

(h) a determination that any Plan is, or is reasonably expected to be, in “at risk” status (as defined in Section 303(i)(4) of ERISA or Section 430(i)(4) of the Code).

Event of Default means an event specified as such in this Agreement.

Existing Facility Agreement means the U.S.$1,000,000,000 revolving credit facility entered into by the Company as borrower and, amongst others, The Royal Bank of Scotland PLC as facility agent on 9 December 2010.

Facility means the term loan facility referred to in Clause 2.1 ( The Facility ).

Facility Office means the office(s) notified by a Lender to the Facility Agent:

 

(a) on or before the date it becomes a Lender; or

 

(b) by not less than five Business Days’ written notice,

as the office(s) through which it will perform its obligations under this Agreement.

FATCA means:

 

(a) sections 1471 to 1474 of the Code or any associated regulations or other official guidance;

 

(b) any treaty, law, regulation or other official guidance enacted in any other jurisdiction, or relating to an intergovernmental agreement between the US and any other jurisdiction, which (in either case) facilitates the implementation of paragraph (a); or

 

(c) any agreement pursuant to the implementation of paragraphs (a) or (b) above with the US Internal Revenue Service, the US government or any governmental or taxation authority in any other jurisdiction.

FATCA Application Date means:

 

(a) in relation to a withholdable payment described in section 1473(1)(A)(i) of the Code (which relates to payments of interest and certain other payments from sources within the US), 1 July 2014;

 

(b) in relation to a withholdable payment described in section 1473(1)(A)(ii) of the Code (which relates to gross proceeds from the disposition of property of a type that can produce interest from sources within the US), 1 January 2017; or

 

(c)

in relation to a passthru payment described in section 1471(d)(7) of the Code not falling within paragraphs (a) or (b) above, 1 January 2017,

 

Page 5


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  or, in each case, such other date from which such payment may become subject to a deduction or withholding required by FATCA as a result of any change in FATCA after the date of this Agreement.

FATCA Deduction means a deduction or withholding from a payment under a Finance Document required by FATCA.

FATCA Exempt Party means a Party that is entitled to receive payments free from any FATCA Deduction.

Fee Letter means any letter entered into by reference to this Agreement between one or more Administrative Parties and the Company setting out the amount of certain fees referred to in this Agreement.

Final Maturity Date means the date falling 24 months after the Signing Date.

Finance Document means:

 

(a) this Agreement;

 

(b) any Fee Letter;

 

(c) the Mandate Letter;

 

(d) any Transfer Certificate;

 

(e) any Accession Agreement;

 

(f) any Resignation Request;

 

(g) any Increase Confirmation; and

 

(h) any other document designated as such by the Facility Agent and the Company.

Finance Party means a Lender, an Underwriter or an Administrative Party.

Financial Indebtedness means any indebtedness (without double counting) for or in respect of:

 

(a) moneys borrowed;

 

(b) any amount raised by acceptance under any acceptance credit facility (or dematerialised equivalent);

 

(c) any bond, note, debenture, loan stock or other similar instrument;

 

(d) any finance or capital lease as defined in accordance with the accounting principles applied in connection with the Original Financial Statements;

 

(e) receivables sold or discounted (otherwise than on a non recourse basis);

 

(f) the acquisition cost of any asset to the extent payable after its acquisition or possession by the party liable where the deferred payment is arranged primarily as a method of raising finance or financing the acquisition of that asset;

 

(g)

any derivative transaction protecting against or benefiting from fluctuations in any rate or price (and at any time the then marked to market value of the derivative transaction will be

 

Page 6


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  used to calculate its amount, such marked to market value being determined by reference to the documentation of that transaction or, if there is no such provision in the documentation, determined by the Company acting reasonably and on the basis of quotations from the relevant counterparty);

 

(h) any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) which has the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

(i) any counter indemnity obligation in respect of any guarantee, indemnity, bond, letter of credit or any other instrument issued by a bank or financial institution; or

 

(j) any guarantee, indemnity or similar assurance against financial loss of any person in respect of any item referred to in paragraphs (a) to (i) above,

provided that the definition of Financial Indebtedness does not include any indebtedness owing from a member of the Group to another member of the Group.

Fitch means Fitch Ratings Limited or Fitch Ratings Inc. (as appropriate), or any successor to its ratings business.

Fund Raising Proceeds means the cash proceeds received by the Group following a Relevant Fund Raising, net of Tax and less any costs and expenses reasonably incurred in connection with the Relevant Fund Raising.

Funding Rate means any rate notified to the Facility Agent by a Lender pursuant to paragraph (c)(ii) of Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ).

Group means the Company and its Subsidiaries.

Guarantor means the Company or an Additional Guarantor.

Holding Company means a holding company within the meaning of section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006.

Impaired Agent means the Facility Agent at any time when:

 

(a) it has failed to make (or has notified a Party that it will not make) a payment required to be made by it under the Finance Documents by the due date for payment;

 

(b) the Facility Agent otherwise rescinds or repudiates a Finance Document;

 

(c) (if the Facility Agent is also a Lender) it is a Defaulting Lender under paragraph (a) or (b) of the definition of Defaulting Lender ; or

 

(d) an Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing with respect to the Facility Agent;

unless, in the case of paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) its failure to pay is caused by:

 

  (A) administrative or technical error; or

 

  (B) a Disruption Event; and

payment is made within three Business Days of its due date; or

 

Page 7


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (ii) the Facility Agent is disputing in good faith whether it is contractually obliged to make the payment in question.

Increase Confirmation means a confirmation substantially in the form set out in Schedule 8 ( Form of Increase Confirmation ).

Increase Lender has the meaning given to that term in Clause 2.2 ( Increase ).

Increased Cost means:

 

(a) an additional or increased cost;

 

(b) a reduction in the rate of return under a Finance Document or on the overall capital of a Finance Party or any of its Affiliates; or

 

(c) a reduction of an amount due and payable under any Finance Document,

which is incurred or suffered by a Finance Party or any of its Affiliates but only to the extent attributable to that Finance Party having entered into any Finance Document or funding or performing its obligations under any Finance Document.

Insolvency Event in relation to a Finance Party means that the Finance Party:

 

(a) is dissolved (other than pursuant to a consolidation, amalgamation or merger);

 

(b) becomes insolvent or is unable to pay its debts in each case, under the laws of any relevant jurisdiction applicable to that Finance Party or fails or admits in writing its inability generally to pay its debts as they become due;

 

(c) has a resolution passed for its winding-up, official management or liquidation (other than pursuant to a consolidation, amalgamation or merger);

 

(d) seeks or becomes subject to the appointment of an administrator, provisional liquidator, conservator, receiver, trustee, custodian or other similar official for it or for all or substantially all its assets;

 

(e) has a secured party take possession of all or substantially all its assets or has a distress, execution, attachment, sequestration or other legal process levied, enforced or sued on or against all or substantially all its assets and such secured party maintains possession, or any such process is not dismissed, discharged, stayed or restrained, in each case within 30 days thereafter; or

 

(f) causes or is subject to any event with respect to it which, under the applicable laws of any jurisdiction, has an analogous effect to any of the events specified in paragraphs (a) to (e) above.

Interpolated Screen Rate means, in relation to LIBOR for any Loan, the rate (rounded to the same number of decimal places as the two relevant Screen Rates) which results from interpolating on a linear basis between:

 

(a) the applicable Screen Rate for the longest period (for which that Screen Rate is available) which is less than the Term of that Loan; and

 

(b) the applicable Screen Rate for the shortest period (for which that Screen Rate is available) which exceeds the Term of that Loan,

 

Page 8


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

each as of the Specified Time on the Rate Fixing Day for that Loan.

Lender means:

 

(a) an Original Lender; or

 

(b) any bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity which has become a Party in accordance with Clause 2.2 ( Increase ) or Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties ).

LIBOR means for a Term of any Loan:

 

(a) the applicable Screen Rate;

 

(b) (if no Screen Rate is available for the Term of that Loan) the Interpolated Screen Rate for that Loan; or

 

(c) if:

 

  (i) no Screen Rate is available for that Term of that Loan; and

 

  (ii) it is not possible to calculate an Interpolated Screen Rate for that Loan,

the Reference Bank Rate,

as of, in the case of paragraphs (a) and (c) above, the Specified Time on the Rate Fixing Day for the currency of that Loan and for a period equal in length to the Term of that Loan.

Loan means, unless otherwise stated in this Agreement, the principal amount of each borrowing under this Agreement or the principal amount outstanding of that borrowing.

Majority Lenders means, at any time, Lenders:

 

(a) whose share in the outstanding Loans and whose undrawn Commitments then aggregate 60 per cent. or more of the aggregate of all the Loans and the undrawn Commitments of all the Lenders;

 

(b) if there is no Loan then outstanding, whose undrawn Commitments then aggregate 60 per cent. or more of the Total Commitments; or

 

(c) if there is no Loan then outstanding and the Total Commitments have been reduced to zero, whose Commitments aggregated 60 per cent. or more of the Total Commitments immediately before the reduction.

Mandate Letter means the mandate letter dated on or about the date of this Agreement between, among others, the Mandated Lead Arrangers, the Underwriters and the Company.

Margin has the meaning set out in Clause 8.3 ( Margin adjustments ).

Margin Regulations means Regulations T, U and X issued by the Board of Governors of the United States Federal Reserve System.

Margin Stock means “margin stock” or “margin securities” as defined in the Margin Regulations.

Material Adverse Effect means a material adverse effect on the ability of an Obligor to comply with its payment obligations under this Agreement or the ability of the Company to comply with its obligations under Clause 18.3 ( Gearing ) or Clause 18.4 ( Interest cover ).

 

Page 9


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

Material Subsidiary means, at any time, a Subsidiary of the Company:

 

(a) whose gross assets (excluding intra Group items) then equal or exceed 15 per cent. of the gross assets of the Group; or

 

(b) whose earnings before interest and tax (excluding intra Group items) then equal or exceed 15 per cent. of the earnings before interest and tax of the Group.

For this purpose:

 

  (i) the gross assets or earnings before interest and tax of a Subsidiary of the Company will be determined from its financial statements (consolidated if it has Subsidiaries) upon which the latest audited financial statements of the Group have been based;

 

  (ii) if a Subsidiary of the Company becomes a member of the Group after the date on which the latest audited financial statements of the Group have been prepared, the gross assets or earnings before interest and tax of that Subsidiary will be determined from its latest financial statements;

 

  (iii) the gross assets or earnings before interest and tax of the Group will be determined from its latest audited financial statements, adjusted (where appropriate) to reflect the gross assets or earnings before interest and tax of any company or business subsequently acquired or disposed of; and

 

  (iv) if a Material Subsidiary disposes of all or substantially all of its assets to another Subsidiary of the Company, it will immediately cease to be a Material Subsidiary and the other Subsidiary (if it is not already) will immediately become a Material Subsidiary; the subsequent financial statements of those Subsidiaries and the Group will be used to determine whether those Subsidiaries are Material Subsidiaries or not.

If there is a dispute as to whether or not a member of the Group is a Material Subsidiary, a certificate of the auditors of the Company will be, in the absence of manifest error, conclusive.

Merger Agreement means an agreement and plan of merger pursuant to which the Acquisition will be effected.

Moody’s means Moody’s Investors Service Limited or any successor to its ratings business.

Multiemployer Plan means a “multiemployer plan” (as defined in Section 3(37) of ERISA) that is subject to Title IV of ERISA to which an Obligor or any ERISA Affiliate is required to contribute.

New Lender has the meaning given to that term in Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties ).

Obligor means a Borrower or a Guarantor.

Original Financial Statements means the audited consolidated financial statements of the Company for the year ended 31 December 2012.

Party means a party to this Agreement.

PBGC means the United States Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation referred to and defined in ERISA.

Plan means an employee benefit plan as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA that is subject to Title IV of ERISA (other than a Multiemployer Plan):

 

Page 10


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(a) maintained by any Obligor or any ERISA Affiliate; or

 

(b) to which any Obligor or any ERISA Affiliate is required to make any payment or contribution.

Pro Rata Share means:

 

(a) for the purpose of determining a Lender’s participation in a Utilisation, the proportion which its Available Commitment bears to the Available Facility; and

 

(b) for any other purpose at any time:

 

  (i) the proportion which a Lender’s share of the Loans (if any) bears to all the Loans;

 

  (ii) if there is no Loan outstanding at the relevant time, the proportion which its Commitment bears to the Total Commitments at that time; or

 

  (iii) if there is no Loan outstanding and the Total Commitments have been cancelled at the relevant time, the proportion which its Commitments bore to the Total Commitments immediately before being cancelled.

Rate Fixing Day means the second Business Day before the first day of a Term for a Loan, unless market practice differs in the London interbank market for U.S. Dollars, in which case the Rate Fixing Day will be determined by the Facility Agent in accordance with market practice in the London interbank market (and if quotations would normally be given by leading banks in the London interbank market on more than one day, the Rate Fixing Day will be the last of those days).

Reference Bank Quotation means any quotation supplied to the Facility Agent by a Reference Bank.

Reference Bank Rate means the arithmetic mean of the rates (rounded upwards to four decimal places) as supplied to the Facility Agent at its request by the Reference Banks as the rate at which the relevant Reference Bank could borrow funds in the London interbank market for the relevant period, were it to do so by asking for and then accepting interbank offers for deposits in reasonable market size for that period.

Reference Banks means JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. and any other bank or financial institution agreed by the Facility Agent and the Company under this Agreement.

Relevant Fund Raising means a fund raising conducted after the date of this Agreement: (i) by any member of the Group by way of a bond issuance or U.S. private placement raised in the international capital markets or (ii) by the Company by way of term debt from banks or financial institutions.

Repeating Representations means the representations that are deemed to be repeated under this Agreement.

Representative means any delegate, agent, manager, administrator, nominee, attorney, trustee or custodian.

Request means a request for a Loan, substantially in the form of Part A of Schedule 3 ( Form of Request ).

Resignation Request has the meaning given to that term in Clause 27.7 ( Resignation of an Obligor (other than the Company) ).

 

Page 11


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

Sanctioned Country means, at any time, a country or territory which is itself subject to a general export, import, financial or investment embargo under any Sanctions (at the time of this Agreement, Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan and Syria).

Sanctioned Person means, at any time:

 

(a) any person listed in any Sanctions-related list of designated persons maintained by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of the Treasury or the U.S Department of State, or by the United Nations Security Council, the European Union or any EU member state;

 

(b) any person owned or controlled by any such person or persons; or

 

(c) any person operating, organised or located in a Sanctioned Country.

Sanctions means economic or financial sanctions or trade embargoes imposed, administered or enforced from time to time by:

 

(a) the U.S. government, including those administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of the Treasury or the U.S. Department of State; or

 

(b) by the United Nations Security Council, the European Union or Her Majesty’s Treasury of the United Kingdom.

Screen Rate means the London interbank offered rate administered by the British Bankers’ Association or ICE Benchmark Administration Limited (or any other person which takes over the administration of that rate) for U.S. Dollars and for the relevant period displayed either (a) on pages LIBOR01 or LIBOR02 of the Reuters screen (or any replacement Reuters page which displays that rate); or (b) on the appropriate page of such other information service which publishes that rate from time to time in place of Reuters. If such page or service ceases to be available, the Facility Agent may specify another page or service displaying the London interbank rate after consultation with the Company.

Security Interest means any mortgage, pledge, lien, charge, assignment, hypothecation or security interest.

Selection Notice means a notice substantially in the form set out in Part B of Schedule 3 ( Form of Selection Notice ).

Signing Date means the date of this Agreement.

Specified Time means a time determined in accordance with Schedule 9 ( Timetable ).

Standard & Poor’s means Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services, a division of The McGraw-Hill Companies Inc., or any successor to its ratings business.

Subsidiary means:

 

(a) a subsidiary within the meaning of section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006; and

 

(b) for the purposes of Clause 18 ( Financial covenants ), unless the context otherwise requires, a subsidiary undertaking within the meaning of section 1162 of the Companies Act 2006.

TARGET2 means the Trans-European Automated Real-time Gross Settlement Express Transfer payment system which utilises a single shared platform and which was launched on 19 November 2007.

 

Page 12


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

TARGET Day means any day on which TARGET2 is open for the settlement of payments in euro.

Target means ArthroCare Corporation, a corporation incorporated in Delaware.

Target Group means the Target and its Subsidiaries.

Tax means any tax, levy, impost, duty or other charge or withholding of a similar nature (including any penalty or interest payable in connection with any failure to pay or any delay in paying any of the same).

Tax Payment means a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party in any way relating to a Tax Deduction, including an increase in a payment made by an Obligor to a Finance Party under Clause 11.2 ( Tax Gross-up ) or a payment under Clause 11.3 ( Tax indemnity ).

Term means each period determined under this Agreement by reference to which interest on a Loan or an overdue amount is calculated.

Total Commitments means the aggregate of the Commitments, being U.S.$1,400,000,000 at the Signing Date.

Transfer Certificate means a certificate in the form of Schedule 4 ( Form of Transfer Certificate ) with such amendments as the Facility Agent may approve or reasonably require or any other form agreed between the Facility Agent and the Company.

Transfer Date means, in relation to an assignment or a transfer, the later of:

 

(a) the proposed Transfer Date specified in the relevant Transfer Certificate; and

 

(b) the date on which the Facility Agent executes the relevant Transfer Certificate.

U.K. means the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

U.K. Tax means any Tax imposed under the laws of the U.K.

U.S. means the United States of America including any state of the United States of America and the District of Colombia.

U.S. Dollars or U.S.$ means the lawful currency for the time being of the United States of America.

Utilisation means a utilisation of the Facility.

Utilisation Date means the date on which the Facility is utilised.

VAT means:

 

(a) any Tax imposed in compliance with Council Directive of 28 November 2006 on the common system of value added tax (EC Directive 2006/112); and

 

(b) any other Tax of a similar nature whether imposed in a member state of the European Union in substitution for, or levied in addition to, any Tax referred to in paragraph (a) above, or imposed elsewhere.

 

1.2 Construction

 

(a) The following definitions have the meanings given to them in Clause 18 ( Financial covenants ):

 

Page 13


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) Consolidated Total Net Borrowings;

 

  (ii) Consolidated EBITDA; and

 

  (iii) Consolidated Net Interest Payable.

 

(b) In this Agreement, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference to:

 

  (i) an amendment includes a supplement, novation, extension, (whether of maturity or otherwise), restatement, re-enactment or replacement (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) and amended is to be construed accordingly;

 

  (ii) assets includes present and future properties, revenues and rights of every description;

 

  (iii) an authorisation includes an authorisation, consent, approval, resolution, permit, licence, exemption, filing, registration or notarisation;

 

  (iv) the Facility Agent , the Arranger , any Finance Party , any Lender , any Obligor or any Party shall be construed so as to include its successors in title, permitted assigns and permitted transferees;

 

  (v) indebtedness includes any obligation (whether incurred as principal or as surety) for the payment or repayment of money, whether present or future, actual or contingent;

 

  (vi) “know your customer” checks are to the identification checks that a Finance Party requests to meet its obligations under any applicable law or regulation to identify a person who is (or is to become) its customer;

 

  (vii) a person includes any individual, firm, company, corporation, government, state or agency of a state or any unincorporated association or body (including a partnership, trust, joint venture or consortium), agency, organisation or other entity (whether or not having separate legal personality);

 

  (viii) a regulation includes any regulation, rule, official directive, request or guideline (whether or not having the force of law but, if not having the force of law, being of a type with which any person to which it applies is accustomed to comply) of any governmental, intergovernmental or supranational body, agency, department or of any regulatory, self-regulatory or other authority or organisation;

 

  (ix) a currency is a reference to the lawful currency for the time being of the relevant country;

 

  (x) a Default being outstanding means that it has not been remedied or waived;

 

  (xi) a provision of law is a reference to that provision as extended, applied, amended or re enacted and includes any subordinate legislation;

 

  (xii) a Clause or a Schedule is a reference to a clause of, or a schedule to, this Agreement;

 

  (xiii) a person includes its successors in title, permitted assigns and permitted transferees;

 

  (xiv) a Finance Document or any other agreement or instrument is a reference to that Finance Document or other agreement or instrument as amended, novated, supplemented, extended or restated; and

 

Page 14


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (xv) a time of day is a reference to London time.

 

(c) Unless the contrary intention appears, a reference to a month or months is a reference to a period starting on one day in a calendar month and ending on the numerically corresponding day in the next calendar month or the calendar month in which it is to end, except that (in relation only to the last month of any period):

 

  (i) if the numerically corresponding day is not a Business Day, the period will end on the next Business Day in that month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not);

 

  (ii) if there is no numerically corresponding day in that month, that period will end on the last Business Day in that month; and

 

  (iii) notwithstanding sub paragraph (i) above, a period which commences on the last Business Day of a month will end on the last Business Day in the calendar month in which it is to end.

 

(d)     

 

  (i) Unless expressly provided to the contrary in a Finance Document, a person who is not a party to a Finance Document has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce or to enjoy the benefit of any term of that Finance Document.

 

  (ii) Notwithstanding any term of any Finance Document, the consent of any person who is not a party to a Finance Document is not required to rescind, vary (including release or compromise any liability under) or terminate of that Finance Document at any time.

 

(e) A reference to a Party will not include that Party if it has ceased to be a Party under this Agreement.

 

(f) Unless the contrary intention appears:

 

  (i) a term used in any other Finance Document or in any notice given in connection with any Finance Document has the same meaning in that Finance Document or notice as in this Agreement;

 

  (ii) any non-payment obligation of an Obligor under the Finance Documents remains in force for so long as any payment obligation is or may be outstanding or any Commitment is in force under the Finance Documents; and

 

  (iii) the headings in this Agreement do not affect its interpretation.

 

2. FACILITIES

 

2.1 The Facility

Subject to the terms of this Agreement, the Lenders make available to the Borrower a U.S. Dollar term loan facility in an aggregate amount equal to the Total Commitments.

 

2.2 Increase

 

(a) The Company may by giving prior notice to the Facility Agent no later than 30 Business Days after the effective date of a cancellation of:

 

Page 15


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) the Available Commitments of a Defaulting Lender in accordance with Clause 7.10 ( Right of cancellation in relation to a Defaulting Lender ); or

 

  (ii) the Commitments of a Lender in accordance with

 

  (A) Clause 7.1 ( Mandatory prepayment - illegality ); or

 

  (B) Clause 7.9 (Right of replacement or repayment and cancellation in relation to a single Lender),

request that the Total Commitments be increased (and the Total Commitments shall be so increased) in an aggregate amount in U.S. Dollars of up to the amount of the Available Commitments or Commitments so cancelled as follows:

 

  (iii) the increased Commitments will be assumed by one or more Lenders or other banks, financial institutions, trusts, funds or other entities (each an Increase Lender ) selected by the Company (each of which shall not be a member of the Group and which is further acceptable to the Facility Agent (acting reasonably)) and each of which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations of a Lender corresponding to that part of the increased Commitments which it is to assume, as if it had been an Original Lender;

 

  (iv) each of the Obligors and any Increase Lender shall assume obligations towards one another and/or acquire rights against one another as the Obligors and the Increase Lender would have assumed and/or acquired had the Increase Lender been an Original Lender;

 

  (v) each Increase Lender shall become a Party as a Lender and any Increase Lender and each of the other Finance Parties shall assume obligations towards one another and acquire rights against one another as that Increase Lender and those Finance Parties would have assumed and/or acquired had the Increase Lender been an Original Lender;

 

  (vi) the Commitments of the other Lenders shall continue in full force and effect; and

 

  (vii) any increase in the Total Commitments shall take effect on the date specified by the Company in the notice referred to above or any later date on which the conditions set out in paragraph (b) below are satisfied.

 

(b) An increase in the Total Commitments will only be effective on:

 

  (i) the execution by the Facility Agent of an Increase Confirmation from the relevant Increase Lender; and

 

  (ii) in relation to an Increase Lender which is not a Lender immediately prior to the relevant increase the performance by the Facility Agent of all necessary “know your customer” or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to the assumption of the increased Commitments by that Increase Lender, the completion of which the Facility Agent shall promptly notify to the Company and the Increase Lender. The Facility Agent shall promptly notify the Company and the Increase Lender upon being so satisfied.

 

(c)

Each Increase Lender, by executing the Increase Confirmation, confirms (for the avoidance of doubt) that the Facility Agent has authority to execute on its behalf any amendment or waiver

 

Page 16


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  that has been approved by or on behalf of the requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the date on which the increase becomes effective.

 

(d) Unless the Facility Agent otherwise agrees or the increased Commitment is assumed by an existing Lender, the Company shall, on the date upon which the increase takes effect, pay to the Facility Agent (for its own account) a fee of U.S. $2,000 and the Company shall promptly on demand pay the Facility Agent the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by it in connection with any increase in Commitments under this Clause.

 

(e) The Company may pay to the Increase Lender a fee in the amount and at the times agreed between the Company and the Increase Lender in a letter between the Company and the Increase Lender setting out that fee. A reference in this Agreement to a Fee Letter shall include any letter referred to in this paragraph.

 

(f) Clause 27.4 ( Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lender ) shall apply mutatis mutandis in this Clause in relation to an Increase Lender as if references in that Clause to:

 

  (i) an Existing Lender were references to all the Lenders immediately prior to the relevant increase;

 

  (ii) the New Lender were references to that Increase Lender; and

 

  (iii) a re-transfer and re-assignment were references to respectively a transfer and assignment .

 

2.3 Nature of a Finance Party’s rights and obligations

Unless otherwise agreed by all the Finance Parties:

 

(a) the obligations of a Finance Party under the Finance Documents are several. Failure by a Finance Party to perform its obligations does not affect the obligations of any other Party under the Finance Documents; no Finance Party is responsible for the obligations of any other Finance Party under the Finance Documents; and

 

(b) the rights of a Finance Party under the Finance Documents are separate and independent rights, and a debt arising under the Finance Documents to a Finance Party is a separate and independent debt; a Finance Party may, except as otherwise stated in the Finance Documents, separately enforce those rights.

 

3. PURPOSE

 

3.1 Loan

The Borrower shall apply all amounts borrowed under the Facility towards:

 

(a) funding the cash consideration payable by the Company under the Acquisition;

 

(b) funding the payment of any costs and expenses incurred by the Company or a member of the Group in connection with the Acquisition; and

 

(c) the refinancing of certain existing indebtedness of the Target Group.

 

3.2 No obligation to monitor

No Finance Party is bound to monitor or verify the utilisation of the Facility.

 

Page 17


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

4. CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

4.1 Conditions precedent documents

A Request may not be given until the Facility Agent has notified the Company and the Lenders that it has received all of the documents and evidence set out in Part A of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent documents ) in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent. The Facility Agent must give this notification as soon as reasonably practicable.

 

4.2 Further conditions precedent

Subject to Clause 20.14 ( Clean-Up Period ), the obligations of each Lender to participate in any Loan are subject to the further conditions precedent that on both the date of the Request and the Utilisation Date for that Loan:

 

(a) the Repeating Representations are correct in all material respects; and

 

(b) no Event of Default is outstanding or would result from the Loan.

 

4.3 Maximum number

Unless the Facility Agent agrees, a Request may not be given if, as a result, there would be more than 10 Loans outstanding.

 

5. UTILISATION

 

5.1 Giving of Requests

 

(a) The Borrower may borrow a Loan by giving to the Facility Agent a duly completed Request not later than the Specified Time.

 

(b) Each Request is irrevocable.

 

5.2 Completion of Requests

A Request will not be regarded as having been duly completed unless:

 

(a) it identifies the Borrower;

 

(b) the Utilisation Date is a Business Day falling within the Availability Period; and

 

(c) the proposed amount and Term comply with this Agreement.

Up to 10 Loans may be requested in a Request.

 

5.3 Amount of Loan

 

(a) Unless agreed otherwise by the Facility Agent and except as provided below, the amount of the Loan must be a minimum of U.S.$5,000,000 and an integral multiple of U.S.$1,000,000.

 

(b) The amount of the Loan may also be the balance of the relevant undrawn Commitments in respect of the Facility or such other amount as the Facility Agent or the Lenders may agree.

 

(c) The amount of each Lender’s share of the Loan will be its Pro Rata Share on the proposed Utilisation Date.

 

Page 18


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

5.4 Advance of Loan

 

(a) The Facility Agent must promptly on the date that it receives a Request notify each Lender of the details of the requested Loan and the amount of its share in that Loan.

 

(b) No Lender is obliged to participate in a Loan if as a result:

 

  (i) its share in the Loans under the Facility would exceed its Commitment for the Facility; or

 

  (ii) the Loans would exceed the Total Commitments.

 

(c) If the conditions set out in this Agreement have been met, each Lender must make its share in the Loan available to the Facility Agent for the Borrower on the Utilisation Date.

 

6. REPAYMENT

 

(a) The Borrower must repay each Loan made to it in full on the Final Maturity Date.

 

(b) The Borrower may not reborrow any part of the Facility which is repaid.

 

7. PREPAYMENT AND CANCELLATION

 

7.1 Mandatory prepayment - illegality

 

(a) A Lender must notify the Company promptly if it becomes aware that it is unlawful in any jurisdiction for that Lender to perform any of its obligations under a Finance Document or to fund or maintain its share in any Loan.

 

(b) After notification under paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) the Borrower must repay or prepay the share of that Lender in each Loan utilised by it on the date specified in paragraph (c) below; and

 

  (ii) the Commitments of that Lender will be immediately cancelled.

 

(c) The date for repayment or prepayment of a Lender’s share in a Loan will be the earlier of:

 

  (i) the latest date allowed by law; and

 

  (ii) the last day of the current Term of that Loan.

 

7.2 Mandatory prepayment - change of control

 

(a) The Company must promptly notify the Facility Agent if it becomes aware of any person or group of persons acting in concert which acquires control of the Company.

 

(b) After notification under paragraph (a) above, each Lender may by notice to the Company:

 

  (i) cancel its Commitments; and

 

  (ii) demand that its participation in all outstanding Loans, together with accrued interest and all other amounts accrued under the Finance Documents be immediately due and payable.

Any such notice will take effect in accordance with its terms.

 

Page 19


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(c) In paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) control has the meaning given to it in sections 450 and 451 of the Corporation Tax Act 2010; and

 

  (ii) acting in concert has the meaning given to it in the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers.

 

7.3 Mandatory prepayment – effectiveness of Finance Documents

 

(a) Unless the Facility Agent has already been so notified by another Obligor, each Obligor must notify the Facility Agent promptly if either:

 

  (i) it is or becomes unlawful for any Obligor (other than the Company) to perform any of its obligations under the Finance Documents; or

 

  (ii) any Obligor (other than the Company) repudiates a Finance Document or purports to repudiate a Finance Document.

 

(b) After notification under paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) the Obligors must repay or prepay each Loan on the date specified in paragraph (c) below; and

 

  (ii) the Commitments will be immediately cancelled.

 

(c) The date for repayment or prepayment of a Lender’s share in a Loan will be:

 

  (i) within three Business Days following receipt by the Company of notice from the Facility Agent; or

 

  (ii) if allowed by the relevant law, the last day of the current Term of that Loan.

 

7.4 Mandatory prepayment – Class 1 disposals

 

(a) The Company must promptly notify the Facility Agent if it (or a member of its Group) makes a disposal which would be deemed to be a class 1 transaction under the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority.

 

(b) After notification of a disposal under paragraph (a) above, the Borrower must apply the proceeds of any such disposal (net of Tax and less any costs and expenses reasonably incurred) in prepayment pro rata of each outstanding Loan on the last day of the then current Term.

 

7.5 Mandatory prepayment – Fund Raising

 

(a) The Company must promptly notify the Facility Agent if it (or a member of its Group) undertakes a Relevant Fund Raising.

 

(b) After notification under paragraph (a) above, the Borrower must apply the Fund Raising Proceeds in prepayment pro rata of each outstanding Loan on the last day of the then current Term.

 

Page 20


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

7.6 Voluntary prepayment

 

(a) The Company may, by giving not less than five Business Days’ prior notice to the Facility Agent, prepay (or ensure that the Borrower prepays) any Loan made to the relevant Obligor at any time in whole or in part.

 

(b) A Loan may only be prepaid after the last day of the Availability Period (or, if earlier, the day on which the Available Commitment is zero).

 

(c) A prepayment of part of a Loan must be in a minimum amount of U.S.$5,000,000 and an integral multiple of U.S.$1,000,000.

 

7.7 Automatic cancellation

The Commitment of each Lender will be automatically cancelled in full:

 

(a) at the close of business on the last day of the Availability Period; and

 

(b) on the date on which the Syndication Lenders (as defined in the Mandate Letter) become party to the agreement pursuant to which the Refinancing Facilities (as defined in the Mandate Letter) are provided.

 

7.8 Voluntary cancellation

 

(a) The Company may, by giving not less than five Business Days’ prior notice to the Facility Agent, cancel the unutilised amount of the Commitments in whole or in part.

 

(b) Partial cancellation of the Commitments must be in a minimum amount of U.S.$5,000,000 and an integral multiple of U.S.$1,000,000.

 

(c) Any cancellation in part will be applied against the Commitment of each Lender pro rata.

 

7.9 Right of replacement or repayment and cancellation in relation to a single Lender

 

(a) If:

 

  (i) any sum payable to any Lender by an Obligor is required to be increased under paragraph (c) of Clause 11.2 ( Tax gross-up ); or

 

  (ii) any Lender claims indemnification from the Company under Clause 11.3 ( Tax Indemnity ) or 12.1 ( Increased costs ),

the Company may, while the circumstance giving rise to the requirement for that increase or indemnification continues, give notice to the Facility Agent requesting prepayment and cancellation in respect of that Lender or give the Facility Agent notice of its intention to replace that Lender in accordance with paragraph (d) below.

 

(b) After notification under paragraph (a) above:

 

  (i) the Borrower must repay or prepay that Lender’s share in each Loan drawn by it on the date specified in paragraph (c) below; and

 

  (ii) the Commitments of that Lender will be immediately cancelled and reduced to zero.

 

(c) The date for repayment or prepayment of a Lender’s share in a Loan will be the last day of the current Term for that Loan or, if earlier, the date specified by the Company in its notification.

 

Page 21


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(d) The Company may, in the circumstances set out in paragraph (a) above, on five Business Days’ prior notice to the Facility Agent and that Lender, replace that Lender by requiring that Lender to (and, to the extent permitted by law, that Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity selected by the Company which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations of the transferring Lender in accordance with Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties ) for a purchase price in cash payable at the time of the transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Loans and all accrued interest (to the extent that the Facility Agent has not given a notification under Clause 27.13 ( Pro rata interest settlement )), Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

(e) The replacement of a Lender pursuant to paragraph (d) above shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Company shall have no right to replace the Facility Agent;

 

  (ii) neither the Facility Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation to find a replacement Lender; and

 

  (iii) in no event shall the Lender replaced under paragraph (d) above be required to pay or surrender any of the fees received by such Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents; and

 

  (iv) the Lender shall only be obliged to transfer it rights and obligations pursuant to paragraph (d) above once it is satisfied that it has complied with all necessary know your customer or other similar checks under all applicable laws and regulations in relation to that transfer.

 

7.10 Right of cancellation in relation to a Defaulting Lender

 

(a) If any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, the Company may, at any time whilst the Lender continues to be a Defaulting Lender, give the Facility Agent ten Business Days’ notice of cancellation of the Available Commitment of that Lender.

 

(b) On the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above becoming effective, the Available Commitment of the Defaulting Lender shall immediately be reduced to zero.

 

(c) The Facility Agent shall as soon as practicable after receipt of a notice referred to in paragraph (a) above, notify all the Lenders.

 

7.11 Reborrowing of Loans

The Borrower may not reborrow any part of the Facility which is prepaid.

 

7.12 Miscellaneous provisions

 

(a) Any notice of prepayment and/or cancellation under this Agreement is irrevocable and must specify the relevant date(s) and the affected Loans and Commitments. The Facility Agent must notify the Lenders promptly of receipt of any such notice.

 

(b) All prepayments under this Agreement must be made with accrued interest on the amount prepaid. No premium or penalty is payable in respect of any prepayment except for Break Costs.

 

Page 22


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(c) The Facility Agent may agree a shorter notice period for a voluntary prepayment or a voluntary cancellation.

 

(d) No prepayment or cancellation is permitted except in accordance with the express terms of this Agreement.

 

(e) Subject to Clause 2.2 ( Increase ), no amount of the Total Commitments cancelled under this Agreement may subsequently be reinstated.

 

(f) If all or part of a Loan is repaid or prepaid, an amount of the Commitments (equal to the Dollar Amount of the amount of the Loan which is repaid or prepaid) will be deemed to be cancelled on the date of repayment or prepayment. Any cancellation under this paragraph (f) shall reduce the Commitments of the Lenders rateably.

 

8. INTEREST

 

8.1 Calculation of interest

The rate of interest on each Loan for each Term is the percentage rate per annum equal to the aggregate of the applicable:

 

(a) Margin; and

 

(b) LIBOR.

 

8.2 Payment of interest

Except where it is provided to the contrary in this Agreement, the Borrower must pay accrued interest on each Loan made to it on the last day of each Term and also, if the Term is longer than six months, on the dates falling at six monthly intervals after the first day of that Term.

 

8.3 Margin adjustments

 

(a) Subject to any applicable calculation of the Margin carried out in accordance with paragraph (b), the Margin shall be as follows:

 

  (i) until the date falling six months after the first Utilisation Date, 0.50 per cent. per annum;

 

  (ii) from the date falling six months after the first Utilisation Date until the date falling 12 months after the first Utilisation Date, 0.60 per cent. per annum;

 

  (iii) from the date falling 12 months after the first Utilisation Date until the date falling 18 months after the first Utilisation Date, 0.70 per cent. per annum; and

 

  (iv) from the date falling 18 months after the first Utilisation Date until the Final Maturity Date, 0.85 per cent. per annum.

 

(b) Provided that there is no Event of Default outstanding, the Margin will, from the delivery of a Compliance Certificate pursuant to Clause 17.2 ( Compliance Certificate ), be increased above the relevant rate set out in paragraph (a) above by the percentage rate per annum set out in the relevant row of column 2 in the table below:

 

Page 23


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

Column 1

Ratio of Consolidated Total Net Borrowings to Consolidated EBITDA

   Column 2
per cent. per annum
 

Greater than 2.25:1

     0.30   

Less than or equal to 2.25:1 but greater than 1.50:1

     0.15   

Less than or equal to 1.50:1

     0.00   

 

(c) For so long as:

 

  (i) the Company is in default of its obligation under this Agreement to provide a Compliance Certificate; or

 

  (ii) an Event of Default is outstanding,

the Margin will be increased by 0.30 per cent. per annum above the relevant rate set out in paragraph (a) above, (for the avoidance of doubt not above the relevant rate set out in column 2 in the table above in paragraph (b) above).

 

(d) Any change to the Margin under this Clause will take effect in relation to a Loan on the second Business Day after delivery of the relevant Compliance Certificate.

 

8.4 Interest on overdue amounts

 

(a) If an Obligor fails to pay any amount payable by it under the Finance Documents, it must immediately on demand by the Facility Agent pay interest on the overdue amount from its due date up to the date of actual payment, both before and after judgment.

 

(b) Interest on an overdue amount is payable in U.S. Dollars at a rate determined by the Facility Agent to be 1 per cent. per annum above the rate which would have been payable if the overdue amount had, during the period of non payment, constituted a Loan under the Facility to which the overdue amount relates. For this purpose, the Facility Agent may (acting reasonably):

 

  (i) select successive Terms of any duration of up to three months; and

 

  (ii) determine the appropriate Rate Fixing Day for that Term.

 

(c) Notwithstanding paragraph (b) above, if the overdue amount is a principal amount of a Loan and becomes due and payable prior to the last day of its current Term, then:

 

  (i) the first Term for that overdue amount will be the unexpired portion of that Term; and

 

  (ii) the rate of interest on the overdue amount for that first Term will be 1 per cent. per annum above the rate then payable on that Loan.

After the expiry of the first Term for that overdue amount, the rate on the overdue amount will be calculated in accordance with paragraph (b) above.

 

(d) Default interest (if unpaid) on an overdue amount will be compounded with that overdue amount at the end of each of its Terms but will remain immediately due and payable.

 

Page 24


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

8.5 Notification of rates of interest

The Facility Agent must promptly on the date determined notify each relevant Party of the determination of a rate of interest under this Agreement.

 

9. TERMS

 

9.1 Selection of Terms

 

(a) The Borrower may select the Term for a Loan in the relevant Request for that Loan or (if the Loan has already been borrowed) in a Selection Notice.

 

(b) Each Selection Notice for a Loan is irrevocable and must be delivered to the Facility Agent by the Borrower not later than the Specified Time.

 

(c) If the Borrower fails to deliver a Selection Notice to the Facility Agent in accordance with paragraph (b) above, the relevant Term will be one month.

 

(d) Subject to the other provisions of this Clause 9, three Business Days prior to the expiry of any Term the Borrower may select the next Term for that Loan which shall be of one, two, three or six months or any other period agreed by the Borrower (or the Company on its behalf) and the Lenders.

 

9.2 No overrunning the Final Maturity Date

If a Term would otherwise overrun the Final Maturity Date, it will be shortened so that it ends on the Final Maturity Date.

 

9.3 Other adjustments

The Facility Agent and the Company may enter into such other arrangements as they may agree for the adjustment of Terms and the consolidation and/or splitting of Loans.

 

9.4 Notification

The Facility Agent must notify each relevant Party of the duration of each Term promptly after ascertaining it.

 

10. MARKET DISRUPTION

 

10.1 Failure of a Reference Bank to supply a rate

If LIBOR is to be calculated by reference to the Reference Banks but a Reference Bank does not supply a rate by the Specified Time on a Rate Fixing Day, LIBOR will, subject as provided below, be calculated on the basis of the rates of the remaining Reference Banks.

 

10.2 Market disruption

 

(a) In this Clause, each of the following events is a market disruption event :

 

  (i) LIBOR is to be calculated by reference to the Reference Banks but no, or only one, Reference Bank supplies a rate by 12.00 noon (local time) on the Rate Fixing Day; or

 

  (ii)

the Facility Agent receives by close of business on the Rate Fixing Day notification from Lenders whose shares in the relevant Loan exceed 40 per cent. of that Loan that

 

Page 25


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  the cost to them of obtaining matching deposits in the relevant interbank market is in excess of LIBOR for the relevant Term.

 

(b) The Facility Agent must promptly notify the Company and the Lenders of a market disruption event.

 

(c) After notification under paragraph (b) above, the rate of interest on each Lender’s share in the affected Loan for the relevant Term will be the aggregate of the applicable:

 

  (i) Margin; and

 

  (ii) rate notified to the Facility Agent by that Lender as soon as practicable to be that which expresses as a percentage rate per annum the cost to that Lender of funding its share in that Loan from whatever source it may reasonably select.

 

10.3 Confidentiality of Funding Rates and Reference Bank Quotations

 

(a) The Facility Agent and each Obligor agree to keep each Funding Rate (and, in the case of the Facility Agent, each Reference Bank Quotation) confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) below.

 

(b) The Facility Agent may disclose:

 

  (i) any Funding Rate (but not, for the avoidance of doubt, any Reference Bank Quotation) to the Company pursuant to Clause 8.5 ( Notification of rates of interest ); and

 

  (ii) any Funding Rate or any Reference Bank Quotation to any person appointed by it to provide administration services in respect of one or more of the Finance Documents to the extent necessary to enable such service provider to provide those services if the service provider to whom that information is to be given has entered into a confidentiality agreement substantially in the form of the LMA Master Confidentiality Undertaking for Use With Administration/Settlement Service Providers or such other form of confidentiality undertaking agreed between the Facility Agent and the relevant Lender or Reference Bank, as the case may be.

 

(c) The Facility Agent may disclose any Funding Rate or any Reference Bank Quotation, and each Obligor may disclose any Funding Rate, to:

 

  (i) any of its Affiliates and any of its or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers, auditors, partners and Representatives if any person to whom that Funding Rate or Reference Bank Quotation is to be given pursuant to this paragraph (i) is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that it may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of that Funding Rate or Reference Bank Quotation or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to it;

 

  (ii)

any person to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any court of competent jurisdiction or any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation if the person to whom that Funding Rate or Reference Bank Quotation is to be given is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that it may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no requirement to so

 

Page 26


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  inform if, in the opinion of the Facility Agent or the relevant Obligor, as the case may be, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances;

 

  (iii) any person to whom information is required to be disclosed in connection with, and for the purposes of, any litigation, arbitration, administrative or other investigations, proceedings or disputes if the person to whom that Funding Rate or Reference Bank Quotation is to be given is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that it may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no requirement to so inform if, in the opinion of the Facility Agent or the relevant Obligor, as the case may be, it is not practicable to do so in the circumstances; and

 

  (iv) any person with the consent of the relevant Lender or Reference Bank, as the case may be.

 

(d) The Facility Agent’s obligations in this Clause 10.3 relating to Reference Bank Quotations are without prejudice to its obligations to make notifications under Clause 8.5 ( Notification of rates of interest ) provided that (other than pursuant to paragraph (b)(i) above) the Facility Agent shall not include the details of any individual Reference Bank Quotation as part of any such notification.

 

(e) The Facility Agent and each Obligor acknowledge that each Funding Rate (and, in the case of the Facility Agent, each Reference Bank Quotation) is or may be price-sensitive information and that its use may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and the Facility Agent and each Obligor undertake not to use any Funding Rate or, in the case of the Facility Agent, any Reference Bank Quotation for any unlawful purpose.

 

(f) The Facility Agent and each Obligor agree (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform the relevant Lender or Reference Bank, as the case may be:

 

  (i) of the circumstances of any disclosure made pursuant to paragraph (c)(ii) above except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

  (ii) upon becoming aware that any information has been disclosed in breach of this Clause 10.3.

 

10.4 Alternative basis of interest or funding

 

(a) If a market disruption event occurs and the Facility Agent or the Company so requires, the Company and the Facility Agent must enter into negotiations in good faith for a period of not more than thirty (30) days with a view to agreeing an alternative basis for determining the rate of interest and/or funding for the affected Loan and any future Loan.

 

(b) Any alternative basis agreed will be, with the prior consent of all the Lenders, binding on all the Parties.

 

11. TAXES

 

11.1 General

In this Clause:

Borrower DTTP Filing means an HMRC Form DTTP2 duly completed and filed by the Borrower, which:

 

Page 27


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(a) where it relates to a Treaty Lender that is an Original Lender, contains the scheme reference number and jurisdiction of tax residence stated opposite that Lender’s name in Schedule 1 ( The Original Lenders ), and is filed with HMRC within 30 days of the date of this Agreement; or

 

(b) where it relates to a Treaty Lender that is a New Lender or an Increase Lender, contains the scheme reference number and jurisdiction of tax residence stated in respect of that Lender in the relevant Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation, and is filed with HMRC within 30 days of that Transfer Date or the Relevant Increase Date.

CTA means the Corporation Tax Act 2009.

HMRC means Her Majesty’s Revenue & Customs.

ITA means the Income Tax Act 2007.

Qualifying Lender means:

 

(a) a Lender which is beneficially entitled to interest payable to that Lender in respect of an advance under a Finance Document and is:

 

  (i) a Lender:

 

  (A) which is a bank (as defined for the purpose of section 879 of the ITA) making an advance under a Finance Document and is within the charge to U.K. corporation tax as respects any payments of interest made in respect of that advance or would be within such charge as respects such payments apart from section 18A of the CTA; or

 

  (B) in respect of an advance made under a Finance Document by a person that was a bank (as defined for the purpose of section 879 of the ITA) at the time that that advance was made and within the charge to U.K. corporation tax as respects any payments of interest made in respect of that advance; or

 

  (ii) a Lender which is:

 

  (A) a company resident in the U.K. for U.K. tax purposes;

 

  (B) a partnership each member of which is:

 

  (I) a company so resident in the U.K.; or

 

  (II) a company not so resident in the U.K. which carries on a trade in the U.K. through a permanent establishment and which brings into account in computing its chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) the whole of any share of interest payable in respect of that advance that falls to it by reason of Part 17 of the CTA; or

 

  (C) a company not so resident in the U.K. which carries on a trade in the U.K. through a permanent establishment and which brings into account interest payable in respect of that advance in computing the chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) of that company; or

 

  (iii) a Treaty Lender; or

 

Page 28


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(b) a Lender which is a building society (as defined for the purpose of section 880 of the ITA) making an advance under a Finance Document.

Relevant Increase Date means the date on which the increase in Total Commitments described in the relevant Increase Confirmation takes effect.

Tax Confirmation means a confirmation by a Lender that the person beneficially entitled to interest payable to that Lender in respect of an advance under a Finance Document is either:

 

(a) a company resident in the U.K. for U.K. tax purposes;

 

(b) a partnership each member of which is:

 

  (i) a company so resident in the U.K.; or

 

  (ii) a company not so resident in the U.K. which carries on a trade in the U.K. through a permanent establishment and which brings into account in computing its chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) the whole of any share of interest payable in respect of that advance that falls to it by reason of Part 17 of the CTA; or

 

(c) a company not so resident in the U.K. which carries on a trade in the U.K. through a permanent establishment and which brings into account interest payable in respect of that advance in computing the chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) of that company.

Tax Credit means a credit against any Tax or any relief or remission for, or repayment of, any Tax.

Tax Deduction means a deduction or withholding for or on account of Tax from a payment under a Finance Document, other than a FATCA Deduction.

Transfer Date has the meaning given to that term in Clause 1.1 ( Definitions ).

Treaty Lender means a Lender which is beneficially entitled to interest payable to that Lender in respect of an advance under a Finance Document and which:

 

(a) is treated as a resident of a Treaty State for the purposes of the Treaty;

 

(b) does not carry on a business in the U.K. through a permanent establishment with which that Lender’s participation in the Loan is effectively connected; and

 

(c) meets all other conditions in the relevant Treaty for full exemption from Tax imposed by the U.K. on interest, except that for this purpose it shall be assumed that the following are satisfied:

 

  (i) any condition which relates (expressly or by implication) to there not being a special relationship between the Borrower and a Lender or between both of them and another person, or to the amounts or terms of any Loan or the Finance Documents; and

 

  (ii) any necessary procedural formalities.

Treaty State means a jurisdiction having a double taxation agreement (a Treaty ) with the U.K. which makes provision for full exemption from tax imposed by the U.K. on interest.

 

Page 29


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

U.K. Non-Bank Lender means, where a Lender becomes a Party after the day on which this Agreement is entered into, a Lender which gives a Tax Confirmation in the Transfer Certificate which it executes on becoming a Party.

 

11.2 Tax gross up

 

(a) Each Obligor must make all payments to be made by it under the Finance Documents without any Tax Deduction, unless a Tax Deduction is required by law.

 

(b) If:

 

  (i) a Lender is not, or ceases to be, a Qualifying Lender; or

 

  (ii) an Obligor or a Lender is aware that an Obligor must make a Tax Deduction (or that there is a change in the rate or the basis of a Tax Deduction),

it must promptly notify the Facility Agent. The Facility Agent must then promptly notify the affected Parties.

 

(c) Except as provided below, if a Tax Deduction is required by law to be made by an Obligor or the Facility Agent, the amount of the payment due from the Obligor will be increased to an amount which (after making the Tax Deduction) leaves an amount equal to the payment which would have been due if no Tax Deduction had been required.

 

(d) An Obligor is not required to make an increased payment under paragraph (c) above by reason of a Tax Deduction if on the date on which the payment falls due:

 

  (i) the payment could have been made to the relevant Lender without a Tax Deduction if it was a Qualifying Lender, but on that date that Lender is not or has ceased to be a Qualifying Lender in respect of that payment, unless the altered status results from any change after the later of the date of this Agreement or the date that such Lender becomes a party to this Agreement in (or in the interpretation, administration, or application of) any law or Treaty agreement or any published practice or concession of any relevant taxing authority; or

 

  (ii) the relevant Lender is a Qualifying Lender solely by virtue of paragraph (a)(ii) of the definition of Qualifying Lender; and

 

  (A) an officer of HMRC has given (and not revoked) a direction (a Direction ) under section 931 of the ITA which relates to the payment and that Lender has received from the Obligor making the payment or from the Company a certified copy of that Direction; and

 

  (B) the payment could have been made to the Lender without any Tax Deduction if that Direction had not been made; or

 

  (iii) the relevant Lender is a Qualifying Lender solely by virtue of paragraph (a)(ii) of the definition of Qualifying Lender and:

 

  (A) the relevant Lender has not given a Tax Confirmation to the Company; and

 

  (B)

the payment could have been made to the Lender without any Tax Deduction if the Lender had given a Tax Confirmation to the Company, on the basis that the Tax Confirmation would have enabled the Company to have formed a

 

Page 30


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  reasonable belief that the payment was an “excepted payment” for the purpose of section 930 of the ITA; or

 

  (iv) the Obligor is able to demonstrate that (subject to completion of any necessary formalities by the Borrower) the Tax Deduction would not have been made if the Lender had complied with its obligations under paragraph (g) or (h) (as applicable) below.

 

(e) If an Obligor is required to make a Tax Deduction, it must make the minimum Tax Deduction and must make any payment required in connection with that Tax Deduction within the time allowed by law.

 

(f) Within thirty (30) days of making either a Tax Deduction or a payment required in connection with a Tax Deduction, the Obligor must deliver to the Facility Agent for the relevant Finance Party entitled to the payment a statement under section 975 of the ITA or other evidence satisfactory to that Finance Party (acting reasonably) that the Tax Deduction has been made or (as applicable) the appropriate payment has been paid to the relevant taxing authority.

 

(g)     

 

  (i) Subject to paragraph (ii) below, a Lender must co-operate with each Obligor in completing any procedural formalities necessary for that Obligor to obtain authorisation to make that payment without a Tax Deduction.

 

  (ii)     

 

  (A) A Treaty Lender which becomes a Party on the day on which this Agreement is entered into that holds a passport under the HMRC DT Treaty Passport scheme, and which wishes that scheme to apply to this Agreement, shall confirm its scheme reference number and its jurisdiction of tax residence opposite its name in Schedule 1 ( Original Lenders ); and

 

  (B) a New Lender or Increase Lender that is a Treaty Lender that holds a passport under the HMRC DT Treaty Passport scheme, and which wishes that scheme to apply to this Agreement, shall confirm its scheme reference number and its jurisdiction of tax residence in the Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation which it executes,

and, having done so, that Lender shall be under no obligation pursuant to paragraph (i) above.

 

(h) If a Lender has confirmed its scheme reference number and its jurisdiction of tax residence in accordance with paragraph (g)(ii) above and:

 

  (i) the Borrower making a payment to that Lender has not made a Borrower DTTP Filing in respect of that Lender; or

 

  (ii) the Borrower making a payment to that Lender has made a Borrower DTTP Filing in respect of that Lender but:

 

  (A) that Borrower DTTP Filing has been rejected by HMRC; or

 

  (B) HMRC has not given the Borrower authority to make payments to that Lender without a Tax Deduction within 60 days of the date of the Borrower DTTP Filing,

 

Page 31


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

and in each case, the Borrower has notified that Lender in writing, that Lender and the Borrower shall co-operate in completing any additional procedural formalities necessary for the Borrower to obtain authorisation to make that payment without a Tax Deduction.

 

(i) If a Lender has not confirmed its scheme reference number and jurisdiction of tax residence in accordance with paragraph (g)(ii) above, no Obligor shall make a Borrower DTTP Filing or file any other form relating to the HMRC DT Treaty Passport scheme in respect of that Lender’s Commitment or its participation in any Loan unless the Lender otherwise agrees.

 

(j) The Borrower shall, promptly on making a Borrower DTTP Filing, deliver a copy of that Borrower DTTP Filing to the Facility Agent for delivery to the relevant Lender.

 

(k) A UK Non-Bank Lender which becomes a Party on the day on which this Agreement is entered into gives a Tax Confirmation to the Company by entering into this Agreement.

 

(l) A UK Non-Bank Lender shall promptly notify the Company and the Facility Agent if there is any change in the position from that set out in the Tax Confirmation.

 

11.3 Tax indemnity

 

(a) Except as provided below, the Company must indemnify a Finance Party against any loss, liability or cost which that Finance Party suffers, or has suffered, directly for or on account of Tax by that Finance Party in respect of a Finance Document.

 

(b) Paragraph (a) above does not apply to:

 

  (i) any Tax assessed on a Finance Party if that Tax is imposed on or calculated by reference to the net income received or receivable by that Finance Party. However, any payment deemed to be received or receivable, including any amount treated as income but not actually received by the Finance Party, such as a Tax Deduction, will not be treated as net income received or receivable for this purpose;

 

  (ii) any Tax arising under, or attributable to the implementation or application of, or compliance with, the bank levy imposed by the UK Government as set out in the Finance Act 2011 as amended from time to time, or any levy or Tax of a similar nature imposed in, or by the government of, any jurisdiction, or any other law or regulation which implements such bank levy or any levy or Tax of a similar nature imposed in, or by the government of, any jurisdiction, or any Tax imposed on a Finance Party by virtue of its status as a bank;

 

  (iii) any amount compensated for under Clause 11.2 ( Tax gross-up ) above, or which would have been compensated for under Clause 11.2 ( Tax gross-up ) above but for an exception to that Clause; or

 

  (iv) any loss, liability or cost that relates to a FATCA Deduction required to be made by a party.

 

(c) A Finance Party making, or intending to make, a claim under paragraph (a) above must promptly notify the Company of the event which gives, or has given, rise to the claim.

 

(d) A Finance Party shall, on receiving payment from the Company under this Clause 11.3, notify the Facility Agent.

 

Page 32


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

11.4 Tax Credit

 

(a) If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party determines that:

 

  (i) a Tax Credit is attributable to an increased payment of which that Tax Payment forms part, to that Tax Payment or to a Tax Deduction in consequence of which that Tax Payment was required; and

 

  (ii) the relevant Finance Party has used that Tax Credit,

the Finance Party must pay an amount to the Obligor which that Finance Party determines will leave it (after that payment) in the same after tax position as it would have been in if the Tax Payment had not been required to be made by the Obligor.

 

(b) If an Obligor makes a Tax Payment and the relevant Finance Party is a Treaty Lender, that Finance Party shall, in the ordinary course of its dealings with HMRC, take reasonable steps to obtain from HMRC payment of any amounts to which it may be entitled under the terms of any applicable Treaty in respect of any Tax Deduction from payments to it under any Finance Document and that Finance Party shall pay to the Obligor an amount equal to any such payment received from HMRC (after deducting any reasonable expenses incurred in obtaining it).

 

(c) No Finance Party shall be obliged to take any such steps as a referred to in paragraph (b) above which may prejudice its right to obtain any other relief or allowance otherwise available to it or to disclose to any party to a Finance Document any information regarding its Tax affairs and computations.

 

11.5 Lender Status Confirmation

Each Lender which becomes a Party to this Agreement after the date of this Agreement shall indicate, in the Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation which it executes on becoming a Party, which of the following categories it falls in:

 

(a) not a Qualifying Lender;

 

(b) a Qualifying Lender (other than a Treaty Lender); or

 

(c) a Treaty Lender.

If a New Lender fails to indicate its status in accordance with this Clause 11.5 then such New Lender shall be treated for the purposes of this Agreement (including by each Obligor) as if it is not a Qualifying Lender until such time as it notifies the Facility Agent which category applies (and the Facility Agent, upon receipt of such notification, shall inform the Company). For the avoidance of doubt, a Transfer Certificate shall not be invalidated by any failure of a Lender to comply with this Clause 11.5.

 

11.6 Stamp taxes

The Company must pay and indemnify each Finance Party against any U.K. stamp duty, U.K. registration Tax or other similar U.K. Tax payable in connection with the entry into, performance or enforcement of any Finance Document, except for any such U.K. Tax payable in connection with the entry into of a Transfer Certificate by a Lender.

 

Page 33


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

11.7 Value added taxes

 

(a) All amounts expressed to be payable under a Finance Document by any Party to a Finance Party which (in whole or in part) constitute the consideration for any supply for VAT purposes are deemed to be exclusive of any VAT which is chargeable on that supply and, accordingly, subject to paragraph (b) below, if VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document and such Finance Party is required to account to the relevant tax authority for the VAT, that Party must pay to such Finance Party (in addition to and at the same time as paying any other consideration for such supply) an amount equal to the amount of the VAT (and such Finance Party must promptly provide an appropriate VAT invoice to that Party).

 

(b) If VAT is or becomes chargeable on any supply made by any Finance Party (the Supplier ) to any other Finance Party (the Recipient ) under a Finance Document, and any Party other than the Recipient (the Relevant Party ) is required by the terms of any Finance Document to pay an amount equal to the consideration for that supply to the Supplier (rather than being required to reimburse or indemnify the Recipient in respect of that consideration):

 

  (i) (where the Supplier is the person required to account to the relevant tax authority for the VAT) the Relevant Party must also pay to the Supplier (at the same time as paying that amount) an additional amount equal to the amount of the VAT. The Recipient must (where this paragraph (i) applies) promptly pay to the Relevant Party an amount equal to any credit or repayment the Recipient receives from the relevant tax authority which the Recipient reasonably determines relates to the VAT chargeable on that supply; and

 

  (ii) (where the Recipient is the person required to account to the relevant tax authority for the VAT) the Relevant Party must promptly, following demand from the Recipient, pay to the Recipient an amount equal to the VAT chargeable on that supply but only to the extent that the Recipient reasonably determines that it is not entitled to credit or repayment from the relevant tax authority in respect of that VAT.

 

(c) Where a Finance Document requires any Party to reimburse or indemnify a Finance Party for any cost or expense, that Party shall reimburse or indemnify (as the case may be) such Finance Party for the full amount of such cost or expense, including such part thereof as represents VAT, save to the extent that such Finance Party reasonably determines that it is entitled to credit or repayment in respect of such VAT from the relevant tax authority.

 

(d) Any reference in this Clause 11.7 to any Party shall, at any time when such Party is treated as a member of a group for VAT purposes, include (where appropriate and unless the context otherwise requires) a reference to the representative member of such group at such time (the term “representative member” to have the same meaning as in the Value Added Tax Act 1994).

 

(e) In relation to any supply made by a Finance Party to any Party under a Finance Document, if reasonably requested by such Finance Party, that Party must promptly provide such Finance Party with details of that Party’s VAT registration and such other information as is reasonably requested in connection with such Party’s VAT reporting requirements in relation to such supply.

 

11.8 FATCA Information

 

(a) Subject to paragraph (c) below, each Finance Party shall, within ten Business Days of a reasonable request by another Party:

 

Page 34


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) confirm to that other Party and the Facility Agent whether it is:

 

  (A) a FATCA Exempt Party; or

 

  (B) not a FATCA Exempt Party; and

 

  (ii) supply to that other Party and the Facility Agent such forms, documentation and other information relating to its status under FATCA (including its applicable passthru payment percentage or other information required under the US Treasury Regulations or other official guidance including intergovernmental agreements) as that other Party reasonably requests for the purposes of that other Party’s compliance with FATCA.

 

(b) If a Finance Party confirms to another Party pursuant to paragraph (a)(i) above that it is a FATCA Exempt Party and it subsequently becomes aware that it is not, or has ceased to be a FATCA Exempt Party, that Finance Party shall notify that other Party and the Facility Agent reasonably promptly.

 

(c) Paragraph (a) above shall not oblige any Finance Party to do anything which would or might in its reasonable opinion constitute a breach of:

 

  (i) any law or regulation;

 

  (ii) any fiduciary duty; or

 

  (iii) any duty of confidentiality.

 

(d) If a Finance Party fails to confirm its status or to supply forms, documentation or other information requested in accordance with paragraph (a) above (including, for the avoidance of doubt, where paragraph (c) above applies), then:

 

  (i) if that Finance Party failed to confirm whether it is (and/or remains) a FATCA Exempt Party then such Finance Party shall be treated for the purposes of the Finance Documents as if it is not a FATCA Exempt Party; and

 

  (ii) if that Finance Party failed to confirm its applicable passthru payment percentage then such Finance Party shall be treated for the purposes of the Finance Documents (and payments made thereunder) as if its applicable passthru payment percentage is 100%,

until (in each case) such time as the Finance Party in question provides the requested confirmation, forms, documentation or other information.

 

11.9 FATCA Deduction

 

(a) Each Party may make any FATCA Deduction it is required to make by FATCA, and any payment required in connection with that FATCA Deduction, and no Party shall be required to increase any payment in respect of which it makes such a FATCA Deduction or otherwise compensate the recipient of the payment for that FATCA Deduction.

 

(b) Each Party shall promptly, upon becoming aware that it must make a FATCA Deduction (or that there is any change in the rate or the basis of such FATCA Deduction) notify the Party to whom it is making the payment and, in addition, shall notify the Company, the Facility Agent and the other Finance Parties.

 

Page 35


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

12. INCREASED COSTS

 

12.1 Increased Costs

Except as provided below in this Clause, the Company must pay to a Finance Party the amount of any Increased Cost incurred by that Finance Party or any of its Affiliates as a result of:

 

(a) the introduction of, or any change in, or any change in the interpretation, administration or application of, any law or regulation; or

 

(b) compliance with any law or regulation,

in each case made after the date of this Agreement; or

 

(c) the implementation or application of or compliance with Basel III or any other law or regulation which implements Basel III (whether such implementation, application or compliance is by a government, regulator, Finance Party or any of its Affiliates).

 

12.2 Exceptions

The Company need not make any payment for an Increased Cost to the extent that the Increased Cost is:

 

(a) attributable to a Tax Deduction required by law to be made by an Obligor;

 

(b) attributable to a FATCA Deduction required to be made by a Party;

 

(c) compensated for under another Clause, or would have been but for an exception to that Clause;

 

(d) a tax on the overall net income of a Finance Party or any of its Affiliates;

 

(e) attributable to a Finance Party or its Affiliates wilfully or grossly negligently failing to comply with any law or regulation;

 

(f) not claimed in the manner set out in Clause 12.3 ( Claims ) below; or

 

(g) attributable to the implementation or application of or compliance with the “International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards, a Revised Framework” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in June 2004 in the form existing on the date of this Agreement (but excluding any amendment arising out of Basel III (other than as excluded under Clause 12.4 ( Basel III Costs ) below) ( Basel II ).

 

12.3 Claims

A Finance Party intending to make a claim for an Increased Cost must, within 180 days of becoming aware of the circumstances giving rise to such a claim, notify the Company in writing of such circumstances setting out in detail the basis of calculation of such a claim.

 

12.4 Basel III Costs

The Company need not make any payment for a Basel III Cost unless the claiming Finance Party:

 

(a)

provides reasonable detail of the basis of calculation of such Basel III Costs provided that this obligation to provide reasonable detail does not extend to information and detail that a Finance Party is not legally allowed to disclose, is confidential to third parties (including any

 

Page 36


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  information that is confidential to a Finance Party’s organisation or affairs) or price-sensitive in relation to listed shares or other instruments issued by that Finance Party or any of its Affiliates;

 

(b) confirms to the Company that it is the Finance Party’s policy to claim Basel III Costs to a similar extent from similar borrowers in relation to similar facilities; and

 

(c) confirms to the Company that it is making a claim for Basel III Costs within 180 days of incurring them.

For the purpose of this Clause 12:

Basel III means:

 

(a) the agreements on capital requirements, a leverage ratio and liquidity standards contained in “Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems”, “Basel III: International framework for liquidity risk measurement, standards and monitoring” and “Guidance for national authorities operating the countercyclical capital buffer” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in December 2010, each as amended, supplemented or restated;

 

(b) the rules for global systemically important banks contained in “Global systemically important banks: assessment methodology and the additional loss absorbency requirement – Rules text” published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in November 2011, as amended, supplemented or restated; and

 

(c) any further guidance or standards published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision relating to “Basel III”.

Basel III Cost means any Increased Cost attributable to the implementation or application of or compliance with Basel III.

 

13. MITIGATION

 

13.1 Mitigation

 

(a) Each Finance Party must, in agreement with the Company, take all reasonable steps to mitigate any circumstances which arise and which result or would result in:

 

  (i) any Tax Payment or any claim under Clause 12.1 ( Increased Costs ) being payable to that Finance Party; or

 

  (ii) that Finance Party being able to exercise any right of prepayment and/or cancellation under this Agreement by reason of any illegality,

including transferring its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents to an Affiliate or changing its Facility Office.

 

(b) The Company must indemnify each Finance Party for all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by that Finance Party as a result of any step taken by it under this Clause.

 

(c) A Finance Party is not obliged to take any step under this Clause if, in the opinion of that Finance Party (acting reasonably), to do so might be prejudicial to it.

 

Page 37


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

13.2 Conduct of business by a Finance Party

No term of this Agreement will:

 

(a) interfere with the right of any Finance Party to arrange its affairs (Tax or otherwise) in whatever manner it thinks fit;

 

(b) subject to Clause 11.4(b) ( Tax Credit ), oblige any Finance Party to investigate or claim any credit, relief, remission or repayment available to it in respect of Tax or the extent, order and manner of any claim; or

 

(c) oblige any Finance Party to disclose any information relating to its affairs (Tax or otherwise) or any computation in respect of Tax.

 

14. PAYMENTS

 

14.1 Place

Unless a Finance Document specifies that payments under it are to be made in another manner, all payments by a Party (other than the Facility Agent) under the Finance Documents must be made to the Facility Agent to its account at such office or bank in the principal financial centre of the U.S. as it may notify to that Party for this purpose by not less than five Business Days’ prior notice.

 

14.2 Funds

Payments under the Finance Documents to the Facility Agent must be made for value on the due date at such times and in such funds as the Facility Agent may specify to the Party concerned as being customary at the time for the settlement of transactions in U.S. Dollars in the place for payment.

 

14.3 Currency

Unless a Finance Document specifies that payments under it are to be made in a different manner, the currency of each amount payable under the Finance Documents shall be U.S. Dollars.

 

14.4 Distribution

 

(a) Each payment received by the Facility Agent under the Finance Documents for another Party must, except as provided below, be made available by the Facility Agent to that Party by payment (as soon as practicable after receipt) to its account with an office or bank in New York.

 

(b) The Facility Agent may (with the consent and at the expense of the relevant Obligor) apply any amount received by it for an Obligor in or towards payment (as soon as practicable after receipt) of any amount due from that Obligor under the Finance Documents.

 

(c) Where a sum is paid to the Facility Agent under this Agreement for another Party, the Facility Agent is not obliged to pay that sum to that Party until it has established that it has actually received it. However, the Facility Agent may assume that the sum has been paid to it, and, in reliance on that assumption, make available to that Party a corresponding amount. If it transpires that the sum had not been made available, that Party must immediately on demand by the Facility Agent refund any corresponding amount made available to it together with interest on that amount from the date of payment to the date of receipt by the Facility Agent at a rate calculated by the Facility Agent to reflect its cost of funds.

 

Page 38


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

14.5 No set off or counterclaim

All payments made by an Obligor under the Finance Documents must be made without set off or counterclaim.

 

14.6 Business Days

 

(a) If a payment under the Finance Documents is due on a day which is not a Business Day, the due date for that payment will instead be the next Business Day in the same calendar month (if there is one) or the preceding Business Day (if there is not).

 

(b) During any extension of the due date for payment of any principal under this Agreement interest is payable on that principal at the rate payable on the original due date.

 

14.7 Impaired Agent

 

(a) If, at any time, the Facility Agent becomes an Impaired Agent, an Obligor or a Lender which is required to make a payment under the Finance Documents to the Facility Agent in accordance with Clause 14.1 ( Place ) may instead either pay that amount direct to the required recipient or pay that amount to an interest-bearing account held with an Acceptable Bank and in relation to which no Insolvency Event has occurred and is continuing, in the name of the Obligor or the Lender making the payment and designated as a trust account for the benefit of the Party or Parties beneficially entitled to that payment under the Finance Documents. In each case such payments must be made on the due date for payment under the Finance Documents.

 

(b) All interest accrued on the amount standing to the credit of the trust account shall be for the benefit of the beneficiaries of that trust account pro rata to their respective entitlements.

 

(c) A Party which has made a payment in accordance with this Clause shall be discharged of the relevant payment obligation under the Finance Documents and shall not take any credit risk with respect to the amounts standing to the credit of the trust account.

 

(d) Promptly upon the appointment of a successor Facility Agent in accordance with Clause 21.14 ( Replacement of the Facility Agent ), each Party which has made a payment to a trust account in accordance with this Clause shall give all requisite instructions to the bank with whom the trust account is held to transfer the amount (together with any accrued interest) to the successor Facility Agent for distribution in accordance with Clause 14.4 ( Distribution ).

 

14.8 Partial payments

 

(a) If the Facility Agent receives a payment insufficient to discharge all the amounts then due and payable by the Obligors under the Finance Documents, the Facility Agent must apply that payment towards the obligations of the Obligors under the Finance Documents in the following order:

 

  (i) first, in or towards payment pro rata of any unpaid fees, costs and expenses of the Facility Agent under the Finance Documents;

 

  (ii) secondly, in or towards payment pro rata of any accrued interest or fee due but unpaid under this Agreement;

 

  (iii) thirdly, in or towards payment pro rata of any principal amount due but unpaid under this Agreement; and

 

Page 39


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (iv) fourthly, in or towards payment pro rata of any other sum due but unpaid under the Finance Documents.

 

(b) The Facility Agent must, if so directed by all the Lenders, vary the order set out in sub paragraphs (a)(ii) to (iv) above.

 

(c) This Clause will override any appropriation made by an Obligor.

 

14.9 Timing of payments

If a Finance Document does not provide for when a particular payment is due, that payment will be due within three Business Days of demand by the relevant Finance Party.

 

15. GUARANTEE AND INDEMNITY

 

15.1 Guarantee and indemnity

Each Guarantor jointly and severally (if there is more than one Guarantor) and irrevocably and unconditionally:

 

(a) guarantees to each Finance Party punctual performance by each Obligor of all its payment obligations under the Finance Documents;

 

(b) undertakes with each Finance Party that, whenever an Obligor does not pay any amount when due under any Finance Document, that Guarantor must immediately on demand by the Facility Agent pay that amount as if it were the principal obligor;

 

(c) agrees with each Finance Party that if any obligation guaranteed by it is or becomes unenforceable, invalid or illegal, it will, as an independent and primary obligation, indemnify that Finance Party immediately on demand against any cost, loss or liability it incurs as a result of an Obligor not paying any amount which would, but for such unenforceability, invalidity or illegality, have been payable by it under any Finance Document on the date when it would have been due. The amount payable by a Guarantor under this indemnity will not exceed the amount it would have had to pay under this Clause 15 if the amount claimed had been recoverable on the basis of a guarantee; and

 

(d) agrees that:

 

  (i) this is a guarantee of payment and not a guarantee of collection;

 

  (ii) its obligations under this guarantee are independent of the validity or enforceability of any or all of the obligations of any or all of the Obligors; and

 

  (iii) a separate action may be brought and prosecuted against that Guarantor whether or not any action is brought against any or all of the Obligors.

 

15.2 Continuing guarantee

This guarantee is a continuing guarantee and will extend to the ultimate balance of all sums payable by any Obligor under the Finance Documents, regardless of any intermediate payment or discharge in whole or in part. This guarantee will enure to the benefit of any New Lender (as defined in Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties )) to which has been assigned or transferred (including by way of novation) any or all of the rights and/or obligation of a Lender under this Agreement.

 

Page 40


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

15.3 Reinstatement

If any discharge, release or arrangement (whether in respect of the obligations of any Obligor or any security for those obligations or otherwise) is made by a Finance Party in whole or in part on the basis of any payment, security or other disposition which is avoided or must be restored on insolvency, liquidation, administration or otherwise, without limitation, then the liability of each Guarantor under this Clause 15 will continue or be reinstated as if the discharge, release or arrangement had not occurred.

 

15.4 Waiver of defences

The obligations of each Guarantor under this Clause will not be affected by any act, omission or thing which, but for this provision, would reduce, release or prejudice any of its obligations under this Clause (whether or not known to it or any Finance Party). This includes:

 

(a) any time or waiver granted to, or composition with, any person;

 

(b) any release of any person under the terms of any composition or arrangement;

 

(c) the taking, variation, compromise, exchange, renewal or release of, or refusal or neglect to perfect, take up or enforce, any rights against, or security over assets of, any person;

 

(d) any non-presentation or non-observance of any formality or other requirement in respect of any instrument or any failure to realise the full value of any security;

 

(e) any incapacity or lack of power, authority or legal personality of or dissolution or change in the members or status of any person;

 

(f) any amendment, novation, supplement, extension, restatement (however fundamental and whether or not more onerous) or replacement of a Finance Document or any other document or security, including without limitation, any change in the purpose of, any extension of or increase in any facility or the addition of any new facility under any Finance Document or other document or security;

 

(g) any unenforceability, illegality, invalidity or non-provability of any obligation of any person under any Finance Document or any other document or security; or

 

(h) any insolvency or similar proceeding relating to any Obligor.

 

15.5 Guarantor intent

Without prejudice to the generality of Clause 15.4 ( Waiver of defences ), each Guarantor expressly confirms that it intends that this guarantee shall extend from time to time to any (however fundamental) variation, increase, extension or addition of or to any of the Finance Documents and/or any facility or amount made available under any of the Finance Documents for the purposes of or in connection with any of the following: business acquisitions of any nature; increasing working capital; enabling investor distributions to be made; carrying out restructurings; refinancing existing facilities; refinancing any other indebtedness; making facilities available to new borrowers; any other variation or extension of the purposes for which any such facility or amount might be made available from time to time; and any fees, costs and/or expenses associated with any of the foregoing.

 

Page 41


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

15.6 Immediate recourse

Each Guarantor waives any right it may have of first requiring any Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) to proceed against or enforce any other right or security or claim payment from any person before claiming from that Guarantor under this Clause.

 

15.7 Appropriations

Until all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full, each Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) may without affecting the liability of any Guarantor under this Clause:

 

(a) refrain from applying or enforcing any other moneys, security or rights held or received by that Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf) in respect of those amounts; or

 

(b) apply and enforce them in such manner and order as it sees fit (whether against those amounts or otherwise); and

 

(c) hold in an interest-bearing suspense account any moneys received from any Guarantor or on account of that Guarantor’s liability under this Clause.

 

15.8 Non-competition

Unless:

 

(a) all amounts which may be or become payable by the Obligors under the Finance Documents have been irrevocably paid in full; or

 

(b) the Facility Agent otherwise directs,

no Guarantor will, after a claim has been made or by virtue of any payment or performance by it under this Clause:

 

  (i) be subrogated to any rights, security or moneys held, received or receivable by any Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf);

 

  (ii) be entitled to any right of contribution or indemnity in respect of any payment made or moneys received on account of that Guarantor’s liability under this Clause;

 

  (iii) claim, rank, prove or vote as a creditor of any Obligor or its estate in competition with any Finance Party (or any trustee or agent on its behalf); or

 

  (iv) receive, claim or have the benefit of any payment, distribution or security from or on account of any Obligor, or exercise any right of set-off as against any Obligor.

Each Guarantor must hold in trust for and immediately pay or transfer to the Facility Agent for the Finance Parties any payment or distribution or benefit of security received by it contrary to this Clause or in accordance with any directions given by the Facility Agent under this Clause.

 

15.9 Additional security

This guarantee is in addition to and is not in any way prejudiced by any other security now or subsequently held by any Finance Party.

 

Page 42


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

16. REPRESENTATIONS

 

16.1 Representations

The representations set out in Clauses 16.2 (Status) to 16.14 ( Sanctions ) are made by each Obligor or (if it so states) the Company to each Finance Party.

 

16.2 Status

 

(a) It is a limited liability company, duly incorporated and validly existing under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

(b) It and each of its Subsidiaries has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted.

 

16.3 Powers and authority

It has the power to enter into and perform, and has taken all necessary corporate action to authorise the entry into and performance of, the Finance Documents to which it is or will be a party.

 

16.4 Legal validity

Subject to any general principles of law limiting its obligations and referred to in any legal opinion required under this Agreement, each Finance Document to which it is a party is its legally binding, valid and enforceable obligation.

 

16.5 Non conflict

The entry into and performance by it of the Finance Documents do not conflict with:

 

(a) any law or regulation applicable to it; or

 

(b) its constitutional documents; or

 

(c) at the date of this Agreement, any document which is binding upon it or any of its Material Subsidiaries or any of its or its Material Subsidiaries’ assets.

 

16.6 No default

 

(a) No Event of Default is outstanding or will result from the execution of, or the performance of any transaction contemplated by, any Finance Document; and

 

(b) no other event is outstanding which constitutes a default under any document which is binding on it or any of its Subsidiaries or any of its or its Subsidiaries’ assets to an extent or in a manner which is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.7 Authorisations

All authorisations required by it in connection with the entry into, performance, validity and enforceability of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents have been or will have been by the date of delivery of the first Request, obtained or effected (as appropriate) and are, or will be by the date of delivery of the first Request, in full force and effect.

 

Page 43


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

16.8 Financial statements

In the case of each Obligor which has provided audited consolidated financial statements pursuant to Clause 17.1 ( Financial statements ), those financial statements most recently delivered to the Facility Agent (which, at the date of this Agreement, are the Original Financial Statements):

 

(a) have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles and practices generally accepted in its jurisdiction of incorporation, consistently applied; and

 

(b) give a true and fair view of its consolidated financial condition as at the date to which they were drawn up,

except, in each case, as disclosed to the contrary in those financial statements.

 

16.9 No material adverse change

In the case of the Company only, as at the date of this Agreement, there has been no material adverse change in its consolidated financial condition since the date to which the Original Financial Statements were drawn up which is likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.10 Litigation

No litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings are current or, to its knowledge, pending or threatened in writing, which are reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.11 Information

 

(a) All material factual information supplied by the Company to any Finance Party in writing was accurate in all material respects as at the date to which it was prepared;

 

(b) as at its date and to the best of its knowledge, the opinions, projections and forecasts supplied by the Company to any Finance Party and the assumptions on which they were based were arrived at after due and careful consideration and genuinely represented its views; and

 

(c) to the best of its knowledge there are no material facts or circumstances which have not been disclosed to the parties to this Agreement by the Company prior to the date of this Agreement and which would make any of the information, opinions, projections, forecasts or assumptions supplied by the Company inaccurate or misleading in any material respect.

 

16.12 ERISA

No ERISA Events have occurred with respect to any Obligor or any of its ERISA Affiliates, except as would not reasonably be likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

16.13 Margin Stock

 

(a) No part of the Loan, or any proceeds of any extension of credit hereunder, will be used immediately, directly, indirectly, incidentally or ultimately for any purpose that entails a violation (including on the part of any Finance Party) of, or that is inconsistent with, the provisions of the Margin Regulations.

 

(b)

After applying the proceeds of any Loan or other extension of credit hereunder, not more than 25 per cent. of the value of the assets (as determined by the Company using reasonable methods within the purview of the Margin Regulations) of the Company and its Subsidiaries that are subject to the provisions of Clause 7.4 ( Mandatory prepayment – Class 1 disposals ), Clause 19.7 ( Negative pledge ) or Clause 19.8 ( Disposals ), or otherwise subject to any similar

 

Page 44


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  restriction contained in any agreement or instrument between the Borrower and a Lender, or any Affiliate of any Lender relating to Financial Indebtedness, consists of Margin Stock.

 

16.14 Sanctions

None of the Obligors, any Subsidiary thereof or any of their respective directors or officers is a Sanctioned Person.

 

16.15 Times for making representations

 

(a) The representations set out in this Clause are made on the date of this Agreement.

 

(b) The representations in Clauses 16.2 ( Status ) to 16.5(b) ( Non-conflict ) (inclusive), 16.6 ( No default ) to 16.8 ( Financial Statements ) (inclusive) and 16.12 ( ERISA ) (together, the Term Representations ) and Clause 16.13 (the Margin Stock Representation ) are deemed to be repeated by:

 

  (i) each Additional Guarantor and the Company on the date that Additional Guarantor becomes an Obligor; and

 

  (ii) each Obligor on the date of each Request and:

 

  (A) in respect of the Term Representations, on the first day of each Term of a Loan; and

 

  (B) in respect of the Margin Stock Representation, on the Utilisation Date.

 

(c) When a representation is repeated, it is applied to the circumstances existing at the time of repetition.

 

17. INFORMATION COVENANTS

 

17.1 Financial statements

 

(a) The Company must supply to the Facility Agent in sufficient copies for all the Lenders:

 

  (i) its audited consolidated financial statements for each of its financial years;

 

  (ii) if required to be produced by applicable law, the audited financial statements of each Obligor for each of its financial years; and

 

  (iii) its interim consolidated financial statements for the first half year of each of its financial years.

 

(b) All financial statements must be supplied to the Facility Agent at the same time as they are dispatched by the Company to its shareholders following the end of the relevant financial period.

 

17.2 Compliance Certificate

 

(a) The Company must supply to the Facility Agent a Compliance Certificate:

 

  (i) in the case of the Company’s audited consolidated financial statements, within 180 days; and

 

Page 45


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (ii) in the case of the Company’s interim consolidated financial statements, within 120 days

of the end of the relevant financial period.

 

(b) A Compliance Certificate is a certificate substantially in the form of Schedule 7 ( Form of Compliance Certificate ) setting out, among other things, calculations of the financial covenants.

 

(c) A Compliance Certificate must be signed by two authorised signatories of the Company.

 

17.3 Form of financial statements

 

(a) The Company must ensure that each set of financial statements supplied under this Agreement fairly represents the relevant Obligor’s financial condition (consolidated or otherwise) as at the date to which those financial statements were drawn up.

 

(b) The Company must notify the Facility Agent of any material change to the basis on which its audited consolidated financial statements are prepared.

 

(c) If requested by the Facility Agent, the Company must supply to the Facility Agent:

 

  (i) a full description of any change notified under paragraph (b) above; and

 

  (ii) sufficient information to enable the Finance Parties to make a proper comparison between the financial position shown by the set of financial statements prepared on the changed basis and its most recent audited consolidated financial statements delivered to the Facility Agent under this Agreement in so far as it impacts the financial covenants under Clause 18 ( Financial Covenants ).

 

(d) If requested by the Facility Agent, the Company must enter into discussions for a period of not more than 30 days with a view to agreeing any amendments required to be made to this Agreement to place the Company and the Lenders in the same position as they would have been in if the change had not happened. Any agreement between the Company and the Facility Agent will be, with the prior consent of the Majority Lenders, binding on all the Parties.

 

(e) If no agreement is reached under paragraph (d) above on the required amendments to this Agreement, the Company must ensure that its auditors certify those amendments which would be necessary to place the Company and the Lenders in the same position as they would have been in if the change had not happened; the certificate of the auditors will be, in the absence of manifest error, binding on all the Parties and the certified amendments shall be deemed to be incorporated into this Agreement.

 

17.4 Information – miscellaneous

The Company must supply to the Facility Agent:

 

(a) copies of all documents despatched by the Company to its shareholders (or any class of them) or its creditors generally at the same time as they are despatched;

 

(b) promptly upon becoming aware of them, details of any litigation, arbitration or administrative proceedings which:

 

  (i) are current, threatened in writing or pending;

 

Page 46


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (ii) are reasonably likely to be adversely determined; and

 

  (iii) would, if adversely determined, have a Material Adverse Effect;

 

(c) promptly on request, a list of the then current Material Subsidiaries; and

 

(d) as soon as reasonably practicable (but in any case by no later than two Business Days) after the Closing Date, a written notice that the Closing Date has occurred.

 

17.5 “Know Your Customer” checks

 

(a) The Company shall promptly upon the request of the Facility Agent or any Lender supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Facility Agent (for itself or on behalf of any Lender) or any Lender (for itself or on behalf of any prospective new Lender) in order for the Facility Agent, such Lender or any prospective new Lender to carry out and be satisfied with the results of all necessary “know your customer” or other checks in relation to any person that it is required to carry out pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

(b) Each Lender shall promptly upon the request of the Facility Agent supply, or procure the supply of, such documentation and other evidence as is reasonably requested by the Facility Agent (for itself) in order for the Facility Agent to carry out and be satisfied with the result of all necessary “know your customer” or other checks in relation to any person that it is required to carry out pursuant to the transactions contemplated in the Finance Documents.

 

17.6 Notification of Default

Unless the Facility Agent has already been so notified by another Obligor, each Obligor must notify the Facility Agent of any Event of Default (and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it) promptly upon becoming aware of its occurrence.

 

18. FINANCIAL COVENANTS

 

18.1 Definitions

In this Clause:

Consolidated Cash and Cash Equivalents means, at any time, the aggregate of the following:

 

(a) cash in hand or on deposit with any Acceptable Bank, which, in either case, is not subject to any security interest and is readily remittable to the U.K or capable of being applied against Consolidated Total Borrowings;

 

(b) certificates of deposit, maturing within one year after the relevant date of calculation, issued by an Acceptable Bank;

 

(c) any investment in marketable obligations issued or guaranteed by the government of the United States of America or the U.K. or by an instrumentality or agency of the government of the United States of America or the U.K. having an equivalent credit rating;

 

(d) any investment in debt instruments permitting cash withdrawals on not more than one month’s notice and which have a rating of A or higher by Standard and Poor’s or Fitch or A2 or higher by Moody’s;

 

(e) open market commercial paper:

 

Page 47


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) for which a recognised trading market exists;

 

  (ii) issued in the United States of America or the U.K.;

 

  (iii) which matures within one year after the relevant date of calculation; and

 

  (iv) which has a credit rating of either A-1 by Standard & Poor’s or Fitch or P-1 by Moody’s, or, if no rating is available in respect of the commercial paper or indebtedness, the issuer of which has, in respect of its long term debt obligations, an equivalent rating;

 

(f) debt securities eligible for rediscount at the Bank of England and accepted by an Acceptable Bank;

 

(g) any cash deposited as collateral against any Consolidated Total Borrowings up to the maximum amount of those Consolidated Total Borrowings; or

 

(h) any other instrument, security or investment approved by the Majority Lenders,

in each case, to which any member of the Group is beneficially entitled at that time and which is capable of being applied against Consolidated Total Borrowings.

Any amount outstanding in a currency other than U.S. Dollars is to be taken into account at its Dollar equivalent calculated on the basis of:

 

  (i) the Agent’s Dollar Rate of Exchange; or

 

  (ii) if the amount is to be calculated on the last day of a financial period of the Company, the rate of exchange used by the Company in its financial statements for that last day of the financial period. However, if by using this rate the Company does not comply with any term of this Clause 18, the Company may apply the average rate of exchange used by the Company in its financial statements for that period instead.

Consolidated EBITA means Consolidated EBITDA for a Measurement Period adjusted by deducting depreciation.

Consolidated EBITDA means the consolidated net pre-taxation profits of the Group for a Measurement Period, adjusted by:

 

(a) adding back Consolidated Net Interest Payable;

 

(b) adding back any other finance costs included in consolidated net pre-taxation profits;

 

(c) taking no account of any exceptional or extraordinary item;

 

(d) adding back the profit and loss effect of any adjustment to the carrying value of inventory or any other asset or liability arising from purchase accounting adjustments, to the extent that any such adjustment (in whole or part) is included in consolidated net pre-taxation profits;

 

(e) adding back depreciation and amortisation;

 

(f) adding back any charges in respect of share based payments; and

 

(g) including the EBITDA (calculated on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA, mutatis mutandis ) of any member of the Group treated as held for sale.

 

Page 48


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

Consolidated Interest Payable means all interest and recurring financing charges including acceptance commission, commitment fees (but excluding for the avoidance of doubt any one-off or up-front fees), the interest element of rental payments on finance or capital leases (whether, in each case, paid or payable) and any other finance costs having the nature of interest included in consolidated pre-taxation profits, incurred by the Group in effecting, servicing or maintaining Consolidated Total Borrowings during a Measurement Period, after taking into account any amount relating to the current Measurement Period in respect of any interest rate hedging transactions in respect of the Consolidated Total Borrowings whether or not designated as IAS 39 hedges.

Consolidated Net Interest Payable means Consolidated Interest Payable less all interest and financing charges received or receivable by the Group during the relevant Measurement Period.

Consolidated Total Borrowings means, in respect of the Group, at any time the aggregate of the following:

 

(a) the outstanding principal amount of any moneys borrowed;

 

(b) the outstanding principal amount of any acceptance under any acceptance credit;

 

(c) the outstanding principal amount of any bond, note, debenture, loan stock or other similar instrument;

 

(d) the capitalised element of indebtedness under a finance or capital lease as defined in accordance with accounting principles applied in preparation of the Original Financial Statements;

 

(e) the outstanding principal amount of all moneys owing in connection with the sale or discounting of receivables (otherwise than on a non recourse basis);

 

(f) the outstanding principal amount of any indebtedness arising from any deferred payment agreements arranged primarily as a method of raising finance or financing the acquisition of an asset;

 

(g) any fixed or minimum premium due and payable on the repayment or redemption of any instrument referred to in paragraph (c) above;

 

(h) the outstanding principal amount of any indebtedness arising in connection with any other transaction (including any forward sale or purchase agreement) which has the commercial effect of a borrowing;

 

(i) the outstanding principal amount of any indebtedness of any person who is not a member of the Group of a type referred to in paragraphs (a) to (h) above which is the subject of a guarantee, indemnity or similar assurances against financial loss provided by a member of the Group; and

 

(j) the value of any assets or liabilities arising from the mark-to-market valuation of any derivative financial instruments in respect of currency hedging on Consolidated Total Borrowings which gives rise to balance sheet assets or liabilities.

Any amount outstanding in a currency other than U.S. Dollars is to be taken into account at its Dollar equivalent calculated on the basis of:

 

  (i) the Agent’s Dollar Rate of Exchange; or

 

Page 49


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (ii) if the amount is to be calculated on the last day of a financial period of the Company, the rate of exchange used by the Company in its financial statements for that last day of the financial period. However, if by using this rate the Company does not comply with any term of this Clause 18, the Company may apply the average rate of exchange used by the Company in its financial statements for that period instead.

Consolidated Total Net Borrowings means at any time Consolidated Total Borrowings less Consolidated Cash and Cash Equivalents.

Measurement Period means a period of 12 months ending on a Testing Date.

Testing Date means the last day of a financial year or financial half year of the Company.

 

18.2 Interpretation

 

(a) Except as provided to the contrary in this Agreement, an accounting definition used in this Clause is to be construed in accordance with the accounting principles applied in accordance with the Original Financial Statements.

 

(b) No item shall be credited or deducted more than once in any calculation under this Clause.

 

(c) For the purpose of calculation of ‘Gearing’ pursuant to Clause 18.3 ( Gearing ) only:

 

  (i) there shall be included in determining Consolidated EBITDA for any Measurement Period (including that portion thereof occurring prior to the relevant acquisition) the EBITDA (calculated on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA, mutatis mutandis ) of any material person, property, business or fixed asset acquired by any member of the Group during such Measurement Period as if they were acquired as of the first day of that Measurement Period; and

 

  (ii) there shall be excluded in determining Consolidated EBITDA for any Measurement Period the EBITDA (calculated on the same basis as Consolidated EBITDA, mutatis mutandis ) of any material person, property, business or fixed asset sold by any member of the Group during such Measurement Period (including that portion thereof occurring prior to the relevant disposal) as if they were disposed of as of the first day of that Measurement Period.

For the avoidance of doubt, there shall be no corresponding adjustments to Consolidated EBITA for the purposes of calculating ‘Interest Cover’ pursuant to Clause 18.4 ( Interest Cover ).

 

18.3 Gearing

The Company must ensure that the ratio of Consolidated Total Net Borrowings (as at each Testing Date) to Consolidated EBITDA (for the Measurement Period ending on that Testing Date) is not more than 3:1.

 

18.4 Interest cover

The Company must ensure that on each Testing Date the ratio of Consolidated EBITA to Consolidated Net Interest Payable for the Measurement Period ending on that Testing Date is not less than 3:1.

 

Page 50


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

19. GENERAL COVENANTS

 

19.1 General

Each Obligor agrees to be bound by the covenants set out in this Clause relating to it and, where the covenant is expressed to apply to each member or to specified members of the Group, each Obligor must ensure that each of its Subsidiaries to which the covenant relates performs that covenant.

 

19.2 Authorisations

Each Obligor must promptly obtain, maintain and comply with the terms of any authorisation required under any law or regulation to enable it to perform its obligations under, or for the validity or (subject to any general principles of law limiting its obligations and referred to in any legal opinion required under this Agreement) enforceability of, any Finance Document.

 

19.3 Compliance with laws

Each member of the Group must comply in all respects with all laws and regulations to which it is subject where failure to do so is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.4 Compliance with ERISA

No Obligor shall allow, or permit any of its ERISA Affiliates to allow, any ERISA Event to occur with respect to any Plan to the extent that any ERISA Event, individually or when aggregated with all other ERISA Events, is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

19.5 Use of proceeds

No Obligor will request any Utilisation, and no Obligor shall use, and shall procure that its Subsidiaries shall not use, the proceeds of any Utilisation:

 

(a) in furtherance of an offer, payment, promise to pay, or authorisation of the payment or giving of money, or anything else of value, to any person in violation of any Anti-Corruption Laws;

 

(b) for the purpose of funding, financing or facilitating any activities, business or transaction of or with any Sanctioned Person, or in any Sanctioned Country; or

 

(c) in any manner that would result in the violation of any Sanctions applicable to any Party.

 

19.6 Pari passu ranking

Each Obligor must ensure that its payment obligations under the Finance Documents rank at least pari passu with all its other present and future unsecured payment obligations, except for obligations mandatorily preferred by law applying to companies generally.

 

19.7 Negative pledge

 

(a) In this Clause, Security Interest means any mortgage, pledge, lien, charge, assignment, hypothecation or security interest.

 

(b) Except as provided below, no member of the Group may create or allow to exist any Security Interest on any of its assets.

 

(c) Paragraph (b) does not apply to:

 

Page 51


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) any Security Interest comprising a netting, set off or lien arrangement entered into by a member of the Group in the ordinary course of its banking arrangements for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances;

 

  (ii) any lien arising by operation of law and in the ordinary course of business;

 

  (iii) any Security Interest on an asset, or an asset of any person, acquired by a member of the Group after the date of this Agreement to the extent that the principal amount secured by that Security Interest has not been incurred or increased in contemplation of, or since, the acquisition;

 

  (iv) any Security Interest arising under any contract for the purchase of goods entered into in the normal course of trading;

 

  (v) any Security Interest over goods and products or over the documents of title or insurance policies relating to such goods and products, arising in the ordinary course of trading in connection with letters of credit and similar transactions, provided such Security Interest secures only so much of the acquisition cost or selling price (and amounts incidental thereto) of these goods and products which is required to be paid within 6 months after the date upon which the same was first incurred;

 

  (vi) set-off rights on market standard terms contained in any hedging agreement;

 

  (vii) set-off rights in the ordinary course of trading;

 

  (viii) any Security Interest created in substitution for any of the above Security Interests but only:

 

  (A) if the Security Interest is over the same asset;

 

  (B) if the principal amount secured by that Security Interest does not exceed the principal amount secured by the Security Interest which is replaced; and

 

  (C) if the Security Interest which is replaced was only permitted to be outstanding for a certain period of time, to the extent the new Security Interest is not outstanding for any greater period; and

 

  (ix) any Security Interest securing indebtedness the amount of which (when aggregated with the amount of assets or receivables sold, transferred or disposed of under paragraph (d) below) does not exceed 10 per cent. of the consolidated gross assets of the Group as shown in the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Company delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 17.1 ( Financial statements ) (being as at the date of this Agreement the Original Financial Statements).

 

(d) No member of the Group may sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of any of its receivables on recourse terms, in circumstances where the transaction is entered into primarily as a method of raising Financial Indebtedness or of financing the acquisition of an asset unless the amount of assets or receivables sold, transferred or disposed of under this paragraph (including any assets the subject of any such arrangement on the date of this Agreement) (when aggregated with the amount of indebtedness secured under Clause 19.7(c)(ix) above) does not exceed 10 per cent. of the consolidated gross assets of the Group as shown in the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Company delivered to the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 17.1 ( Financial statements ) (being as at the date of this Agreement the Original Financial Statements).

 

Page 52


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

19.8 Disposals

 

(a) In this Clause, disposal means a sale, transfer, grant, lease or other disposal, whether voluntary or involuntary, and dispose will be construed accordingly.

 

(b) Except as provided below, the Company will not, and will procure that no Subsidiary will, either in a single transaction or in a series of transactions and whether related or not, dispose of all or any part of its assets.

 

(c) Paragraph (b) does not apply to any disposal:

 

  (i) made in the ordinary course of business of the disposing entity;

 

  (ii) of assets which are exchanged within 180 days for other assets comparable or superior as to type, value and quality;

 

  (iii) by one company in the Group to another company in the Group;

 

  (iv) of machinery or plant at or nearly at the end of their useful life or period of depreciation;

 

  (v) of obsolete equipment owned by a member of the Group no longer required for the purposes of the business carried on by that member of the Group;

 

  (vi) which would not be deemed to be a class 1 transaction under the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority or which would not require the approval of the shareholders of the Company in general meeting; or

 

  (vii) the net proceeds of which are applied in permanent prepayment and cancellation of Loans.

 

19.9 Financial Indebtedness

 

(a) Except as provided below no member of the Group (other than the Company) may incur any Financial Indebtedness.

 

(b) Paragraph (a) does not apply to:

 

  (i) any Financial Indebtedness of any person acquired by a member of the Group which is incurred under arrangements in existence at the date of acquisition, but only for a period of six months from the date of acquisition;

 

  (ii) any derivative transaction protecting against or benefiting from fluctuations in any rate or price entered into in the ordinary course of business;

 

  (iii) the capital element of any liability under finance or capital leases up to a maximum amount not exceeding U.S.$50,000,000 (or the equivalent in any other currency) or any higher amount which is approved in writing by the Facility Agent acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders;

 

  (iv) foreign exchange, interest rate or similar hedging arrangements entered into only for the purposes of managing the interest rate and foreign exchange rates of the Group and not for any speculative purpose or pursuant to any financial trading;

 

  (v)

Financial Indebtedness incurred in favour of banks or other financial institutions as a result of netting or set off arrangements entered into by a member of the Group in the

 

Page 53


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  ordinary course of its banking arrangements for the purpose of netting debit and credit balances on accounts maintained with such banks or financial institutions but only to the extent that such Financial Indebtedness does not exceed the amount of such credit balances;

 

  (vi) any Financial Indebtedness due under any Finance Document; or

 

  (vii) any other Financial Indebtedness which in aggregate does not exceed 5 per cent. of consolidated gross assets as shown in the most recent audited consolidated financial statements of the Company.

 

19.10 Change of business

The Company must ensure that there are no substantial changes made to the general nature of the business of the Group, taken as a whole, as exists at the date of this Agreement such that the principal activities of the Group, taken as a whole, are no longer consistent with such business.

 

19.11 Mergers

No Obligor may enter into any amalgamation, demerger, merger or reconstruction otherwise than under an intra Group reorganisation on a solvent basis or other transaction agreed by the Majority Lenders.

 

20. DEFAULT

 

20.1 Events of Default

 

(a) Save for Clause 20.13 ( Acceleration ) and Clause 20.14 ( Clean-Up Period ), each of the events set out in this Clause 20 is an Event of Default.

 

(b) In this Clause 20:

Material Group Member means an Obligor or a Material Subsidiary; and

Permitted Transaction means:

 

  (i) an intra Group reorganisation of a Material Subsidiary on a solvent basis; or

 

  (ii) any other transaction agreed by the Majority Lenders.

 

20.2 Non payment

An Obligor does not pay on the due date any amount payable by it under the Finance Documents in the manner required under the Finance Documents, unless the non payment:

 

(a) is caused by administrative or technical error; and

 

(b) is remedied within three Business Days (in the case of principal amounts due under this Agreement) and within five Business Days (in the case of any other amount due under this Agreement) of its due date.

 

20.3 Breach of other obligations

 

(a) The Company does not comply with any term of Clause 18 ( Financial covenants ) or Clause 19.5 ( Use of proceeds ); or

 

Page 54


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(b) an Obligor does not comply with any other term of the Finance Documents not already referred to in this Clause, unless the non compliance:

 

  (i) is capable of remedy; and

 

  (ii) is remedied within twenty Business Days of the earlier of the Facility Agent giving notice and the Obligor becoming aware of the non compliance.

 

20.4 Misrepresentation

A representation made or repeated by an Obligor in any Finance Document or in any document delivered by or on behalf of an Obligor under any Finance Document is incorrect in any material respect when made or deemed to be repeated unless the circumstances giving rise to the misrepresentation:

 

(a) are capable of remedy; and

 

(b) are remedied within twenty Business Days of the earlier of the Facility Agent giving notice and the relevant Obligor becoming aware of the misrepresentation.

 

20.5 Cross default

Any of the following occurs in respect of a member of the Group:

 

(a) any of its Financial Indebtedness is not paid when due (after the expiry of any originally applicable grace period);

 

(b) any of its Financial Indebtedness:

 

  (i) becomes prematurely due and payable; or

 

  (ii) is placed on demand,

in each case, as a result of an event of default; or

 

(c) any commitment for its Financial Indebtedness is cancelled or suspended as a result of an event of default;

 

(d) No Event of Default will occur under this Clause 20.5 if:

 

  (i) the Financial Indebtedness is of any person acquired by a member of the Group which is:

 

  (A) incurred under the arrangements in existence at the date of acquisition; and

 

  (B) the event of default in respect thereof is no longer outstanding after one month from the date of acquisition;

or

 

  (ii) the aggregate amount of Financial Indebtedness falling within paragraphs (a) to (c) above is at the time of any determination less than U.S.$30,000,000 or its equivalent.

 

20.6 Insolvency

Any of the following occurs in respect of a Material Group Member:

 

Page 55


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(a) it is or is deemed for the purposes of Section 123 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (but as if the figure of £750 in paragraph (a) was replaced with the figure of U.S.$10,000,000 (or its equivalent)) to be unable to pay its debts as they fall due;

 

(b) it admits its inability to pay its debts as they fall due;

 

(c) it suspends making payments on its debts generally or announces an intention to do so;

 

(d) by reason of actual or anticipated financial difficulties, it begins negotiations with creditors generally or any class of them for the rescheduling of any of its indebtedness;

 

(e) a moratorium is declared in respect of its indebtedness generally.

 

20.7 Insolvency proceedings

 

(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) below, any of the following occurs in respect of a Material Group Member:

 

  (i) any step is taken with a view to a composition, assignment or similar arrangement with its creditors generally;

 

  (ii) a meeting of it is convened for the purpose of considering any resolution for or to petition for its winding up, administration or dissolution or any such resolution is passed;

 

  (iii) any person presents a petition for its bankruptcy, winding up, administration or dissolution;

 

  (iv) an order for its winding up, administration or dissolution is made;

 

  (v) any liquidator, trustee in bankruptcy, judicial custodian, compulsory manager, receiver, administrative receiver, administrator or similar officer is appointed in respect of it;

 

  (vi) its directors or other officers request the appointment of a liquidator, trustee in bankruptcy, judicial custodian, compulsory manager, receiver, administrative receiver, administrator or similar officer; or

 

  (vii) any other analogous step or procedure is taken in any jurisdiction.

 

(b) Paragraph (a) does not apply to:

 

  (i) any step or procedure which is part of a Permitted Transaction; or

 

  (ii) a petition for winding-up presented by a creditor which is being contested in good faith and with due diligence and is discharged or struck out within fourteen days.

 

20.8 Creditors’ process

Any attachment, sequestration, distress, execution or analogous event affects any asset(s) of a Material Group Member, having an aggregate value of U.S.$10,000,000 (or its equivalent), and is not discharged within 21 days or is being contested in good faith to the satisfaction of the Facility Agent acting reasonably.

 

Page 56


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

20.9 Cessation of business

A Material Group Member ceases, or threatens to cease, to carry on business except:

 

(a) as part of a Permitted Transaction; or

 

(b) as a result of any disposal allowed under this Agreement.

 

20.10 Ownership

Any Obligor (other than the Company) is not or ceases to be a wholly owned Subsidiary of the Company.

 

20.11 Unlawfulness

It is or becomes unlawful for an Obligor to perform any of its obligations under the Finance Documents.

 

20.12 Repudiation

An Obligor repudiates a Finance Document or purports to repudiate a Finance Document.

 

20.13 Acceleration

If an Event of Default is outstanding, the Facility Agent may, and must if so directed by the Majority Lenders, by notice to the Company:

 

(a) cancel the Total Commitments; and/or

 

(b) declare that all or part of any amounts outstanding under the Finance Documents are:

 

  (i) immediately due and payable; and/or

 

  (ii) payable on demand by the Facility Agent acting on the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

Any notice given under this Clause will take effect in accordance with its terms.

 

20.14 Clean-Up Period

Notwithstanding any other provision of any Finance Documents:

 

(a) any breach of a Clean-Up Representation or a Clean-Up Undertaking; or

 

(b) any Event of Default constituting a Clean-Up Default,

will be deemed not to be a breach of a representation or warranty, a breach of covenant or an Event of Default (as the case may be) for the purposes of this Agreement including, without limitation, Clause 4.2 ( Further conditions precedent ), if:

 

  (i) it would have been (if it were not for this provision) a breach of representation or warranty, or a breach of covenant or an Event of Default only by reason of circumstances relating exclusively to any member of the Target Group (or any obligation to procure or ensure in relation to a member of the Target Group);

 

  (ii) it is capable of remedy and reasonable steps are being taken to remedy it;

 

Page 57


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (iii) the circumstances giving rise to it have not been procured by or approved by any Obligor that is an Obligor at the date of this Agreement; and

 

  (iv) it is not reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect.

If the relevant circumstances are continuing on or after the Clean-Up Date, there shall be a breach of representation or warranty, breach of covenant or Event of Default, as the case may be, notwithstanding the above (and without prejudice to the rights and remedies of the Finance Parties).

 

21. THE ADMINISTRATIVE PARTIES

 

21.1 Appointment and duties of the Facility Agent

 

(a) Each Finance Party (other than the Facility Agent) irrevocably appoints the Facility Agent to act as its agent under the Finance Documents.

 

(b) Each Finance Party irrevocably authorises the Facility Agent to:

 

  (i) perform the duties and to exercise the rights, powers and discretions that are specifically given to it under the Finance Documents, together with any other incidental rights, powers and discretions; and

 

  (ii) execute each Finance Document expressed to be executed by the Facility Agent.

 

(c) The Facility Agent has only those duties which are expressly specified in the Finance Documents. Those duties are solely of a mechanical and administrative nature.

 

21.2 Role of the Mandated Lead Arrangers

Except as specifically provided in the Finance Documents, no Mandated Lead Arranger has any obligations of any kind to any other Party in connection with any Finance Document.

 

21.3 No fiduciary duties

Except as specifically provided in a Finance Document, nothing in the Finance Documents makes an Administrative Party a trustee or fiduciary for any other Party or any other person. No Administrative Party need hold in trust any moneys paid to it for a Party or be liable to account for interest on those moneys received by it for its own account.

 

21.4 Individual position of an Administrative Party

 

(a) If it is also a Lender, each Administrative Party has the same rights and powers under the Finance Documents as any other Lender and may exercise those rights and powers as though it were not an Administrative Party.

 

(b) Each Administrative Party may:

 

  (i) carry on any business with any Obligor or its related entities (including acting as an agent or a trustee for any other financing); and

 

  (ii) retain any profits or remuneration it receives under the Finance Documents or in relation to any other business it carries on with any Obligor or its related entities.

 

21.5 Reliance, rights and discretions of the Facility Agent

 

(a) The Facility Agent may:

 

Page 58


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) rely on any notice or document believed by it to be genuine and correct and to have been signed by, or with the authority of, the proper person;

 

  (ii) rely on any statement made by any person regarding any matters which may reasonably be assumed to be within his knowledge or within his power to verify;

 

  (iii) engage, pay for and rely on professional advisers selected by it (including those representing a Party other than the Facility Agent);

 

  (iv) act under the Finance Documents through its personnel and agents;

 

  (v) disclose to any other Party information it reasonably believes it has received as agent under this Agreement;

 

  (vi) disclose the identity of a Defaulting Lender to the other Finance Parties and the Company and shall disclose the same upon the written request of the Company or the Majority Lenders; and

 

  (vii) not disclose to any Finance Party any details of the rate notified to the Facility Agent by any Lender or the identity of any such Lender for the purpose of paragraph (a)(ii) of Clause 10.2 ( Market disruption ).

 

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of any Finance Document to the contrary, neither the Facility Agent nor the Mandated Lead Arrangers are obliged to do or omit to do anything if it would or might in their reasonable opinion constitute a breach of any law or regulation or a breach of a fiduciary duty or duty of confidentiality.

 

21.6 Majority Lenders’ instructions

 

(a) The Facility Agent is fully protected if it acts on the instructions of the Majority Lenders in the exercise of any right, power or discretion or any matter not expressly provided for in the Finance Documents. Any such instructions given by the Majority Lenders will be binding on all the Lenders. In the absence of instructions, the Facility Agent may act as it considers to be in the best interests of all the Lenders.

 

(b) The Facility Agent is not authorised to act on behalf of a Lender (without first obtaining that Lender’s consent) in any legal or arbitration proceedings in connection with any Finance Document.

 

(c) The Facility Agent may require the receipt of security satisfactory to it, whether by way of payment in advance or otherwise, against any liability or loss which it may incur in complying with the instructions of the Majority Lenders.

 

21.7 Responsibility

 

(a) No Administrative Party is responsible to any other Finance Party for the adequacy, accuracy or completeness of:

 

  (i) any Finance Document or any other document; or

 

  (ii) any statement or information (whether written or oral) made in or supplied in connection with any Finance Document.

 

(b)

No Administrative Party is responsible for any determination as to whether any information provided or to be provided to any Finance Party is non-public information the use of which

 

Page 59


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  may be regulated or prohibited by applicable law or regulation relating to insider dealing or otherwise.

 

(c) Without affecting the responsibility of any Obligor for information supplied by it or on its behalf in connection with any Finance Document, each Lender confirms that it:

 

  (i) has made, and will continue to make, its own independent appraisal of all risks arising under or in connection with the Finance Documents (including the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities and the nature and extent of any recourse against any Party or its assets); and

 

  (ii) has not relied exclusively on any information provided to it by any Administrative Party in connection with any Finance Document.

 

21.8 Exclusion of liability

 

(a) The Facility Agent is not liable to any other Finance Party for any action taken or not taken by it in connection with any Finance Document, unless directly caused by its gross negligence or wilful misconduct.

 

(b) No Party (other than the Facility Agent) may take any proceedings against any officer, employee or agent of the Facility Agent in respect of any claim it might have against the Facility Agent or in respect of any act or omission of any kind by that officer, employee or agent in connection with any Finance Document. Any officer, employee or agent of the Facility Agent may rely on this Clause and enforce its terms under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999.

 

21.9 Default

 

(a) The Facility Agent is not obliged to monitor or enquire whether a Default has occurred. The Facility Agent is not deemed to have knowledge of the occurrence of a Default.

 

(b) If the Facility Agent:

 

  (i) receives notice from a Party referring to this Agreement, describing a Default and stating that the event is a Default; or

 

  (ii) is aware of the non payment of any principal or interest or any fee payable to a Lender under this Agreement,

it must promptly notify the Lenders.

 

21.10 Information

 

(a) Subject to paragraph (b) below, the Facility Agent must promptly forward to the person concerned the original or a copy of any document which is delivered to the Facility Agent by a Party for that person.

 

(b) Without prejudice to Clause 27.11 ( Copy of Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation to the Company ), paragraph (a) above shall not apply to any Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation.

 

(c) Except where a Finance Document specifically provides otherwise, the Facility Agent is not obliged to review or check the adequacy, accuracy or completeness of any document it forwards to another Party.

 

Page 60


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(d) Except as provided above, the Facility Agent has no duty:

 

  (i) either initially or on a continuing basis to provide any Lender with any credit or other information concerning the risks arising under or in connection with the Finance Documents (including any information relating to the financial condition or affairs of any Obligor or its related entities or the nature or extent of recourse against any Party or its assets) whether coming into its possession before, on or after the date of this Agreement; or

 

  (ii) unless specifically requested to do so by a Lender in accordance with a Finance Document, to request any certificate or other document from any Obligor.

 

(e) In acting as the Facility Agent, the agency division of the Facility Agent is treated as a separate entity from its other divisions and departments. Any information acquired by the Facility Agent which, in its opinion, is acquired by it otherwise than in its capacity as the Facility Agent may be treated as confidential by the Facility Agent and will not be treated as information possessed by the Facility Agent in its capacity as such.

 

(f) Each Obligor irrevocably authorises the Facility Agent to disclose to the other Finance Parties any information which, in its opinion, is received by it in its capacity as the Facility Agent.

 

21.11 Indemnities

 

(a) Without limiting the liability of any Obligor under the Finance Documents, each Lender must indemnify the Facility Agent for that Lender’s Pro Rata Share of any loss or liability incurred by the Facility Agent in acting as the Facility Agent, except to the extent that the loss or liability is caused by the Facility Agent’s gross negligence or wilful misconduct.

 

(b) The Facility Agent may deduct from any amount received by it for a Lender any amount due to the Facility Agent from that Lender under a Finance Document but unpaid.

 

21.12 Compliance

The Facility Agent may refrain from doing anything (including the disclosure of any information) which might, in its opinion, constitute a breach of any law or regulation or be otherwise actionable at the suit of any person, and may do anything which, in its opinion, is necessary or desirable to comply with any law or regulation.

 

21.13 Resignation of the Facility Agent

 

(a) The Facility Agent may resign and appoint any of its Affiliates as successor Facility Agent by giving notice to the Lenders and the Company.

 

(b) Alternatively, the Facility Agent may resign by giving notice to the Lenders and the Company, in which case the Majority Lenders may appoint a successor Facility Agent.

 

(c) If no successor Facility Agent has been appointed under paragraph (b) above within 30 days after notice of resignation was given, the Facility Agent may appoint a successor Facility Agent.

 

(d) The person(s) appointing a successor Facility Agent must, if practicable, consult with the Company prior to the appointment for a period of not less than 30 days. Any successor Facility Agent must have an office in the U.K.

 

Page 61


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(e) The resignation of the Facility Agent and the appointment of any successor Facility Agent will both become effective only when the successor Facility Agent notifies all the Parties that it accepts its appointment. On giving the notification, the successor Facility Agent will succeed to the position of the Facility Agent and the term Facility Agent will mean the successor Facility Agent.

 

(f) The retiring Facility Agent must, at its own cost, make available to the successor Facility Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Facility Agent may reasonably request for the purposes of performing its functions as the Facility Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

(g) Upon its resignation becoming effective, this Clause will continue to benefit the retiring Facility Agent in respect of any action taken or not taken by it in connection with the Finance Documents while it was the Facility Agent, and, subject to paragraph (f) above, it will have no further obligations under any Finance Document.

 

(h) The Majority Lenders may, by notice to the Facility Agent, require it to resign under paragraph (b) above.

 

(i) The Facility Agent shall resign in accordance with paragraph (b) above (and, to the extent applicable, shall use reasonable endeavours to appoint a successor Facility Agent pursuant to paragraph (c) above) if on or after the date which is three months before the earliest FATCA Application Date relating to any payment to the Facility Agent under the Finance Documents, either:

 

  (i) the Facility Agent fails to respond to a request under Clause 11.8 ( FATCA Information ) and the Company or a Lender reasonably believes that the Facility Agent will not be (or will have ceased to be) a FATCA Exempt Party on or after that FATCA Application Date;

 

  (ii) the information supplied by the Facility Agent pursuant to Clause 11.8 ( FATCA Information ) indicates that the Facility Agent will not be (or will have ceased to be) a FATCA Exempt Party on or after that FATCA Application Date; or

 

  (iii) the Facility Agent notifies the Company and the Lenders that the Facility Agent will not be (or will have ceased to be) a FATCA Exempt Party on or after that FATCA Application Date;

and (in each case) the Company or a Lender reasonably believes that a Party will be required to make a FATCA Deduction that would not be required if the Facility Agent were a FATCA Exempt Party, and the Company or that Lender, by notice to the Facility Agent, requires it to resign.

 

21.14 Replacement of the Facility Agent

 

(a) After consultation with the Company, the Majority Lenders may, by giving 30 days’ notice to the Facility Agent (or, at any time the Facility Agent is an Impaired Agent, by giving any shorter notice determined by the Majority Lenders) replace the Facility Agent by appointing a successor Facility Agent (acting through an office in the United Kingdom).

 

(b) The retiring Facility Agent shall (at its own cost if it is an Impaired Agent and otherwise at the expense of the Lenders) make available to the successor Facility Agent such documents and records and provide such assistance as the successor Facility Agent may reasonably request for the purposes of performing its functions as Facility Agent under the Finance Documents.

 

Page 62


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(c) The appointment of the successor Facility Agent shall take effect on the date specified in the notice from the Majority Lenders to the retiring Facility Agent. As from this date, the retiring Facility Agent shall be discharged from any further obligation in respect of the Finance Documents but shall remain entitled to the benefit of this Clause (and any agency fees for the account of the retiring Facility Agent shall cease to accrue from (and shall be payable on) that date).

 

(d) Any successor Facility Agent and each of the other Parties shall have the same rights and obligations amongst themselves as they would have had if such successor had been an original Party.

 

21.15 Relationship with Lenders

 

(a) Subject to Clause 27.13 ( Pro rata Interest Settlement ), the Facility Agent may treat the person shown in its records as Lender at the opening of business (in the place of the Facility Agent’s principal office as notified to the Finance Parties from time to time) as the Lender acting through its Facility Office:

 

  (i) entitled to or liable for any payment due under any Finance Document on that day; and

 

  (ii) entitled to receive and act upon any notice, request, document or communication or make any decision or determination under any Finance Document made or delivered on that day,

unless it has received not less than five Business Days’ prior notice from that Lender to the contrary in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

(b) The Facility Agent may at any time, and must if requested to do so by the Majority Lenders, convene a meeting of the Lenders.

 

(c) The Facility Agent, acting for this purpose solely as an agent of the Company, must keep a register (the Register ) of all the Parties and supply the Company with a copy of the Register on request. The Register will include each Lender’s Facility Office(s) and contact details for the purposes of this Agreement. The Register shall be available for inspection by the Borrower, at any reasonable time and from time to time upon reasonable prior notice. The right to the principal of, and interest on, the Loans may be transferred or assigned only if such transfer or assignment is recorded in the Register.

 

(d) Any Lender may by notice to the Facility Agent appoint a person to receive on its behalf all notices, communications, information and documents to be made or despatched to that Lender under the Finance Documents. Such notice shall contain the address, fax number and (where communication by electronic mail or other electronic means is permitted under Clause 33.5 ( Electronic communication )) electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means (and, in each case, the department or officer, if any, for whose attention communication is to be made) and be treated as a notification of a substitute address, fax number, electronic mail address, department and officer by that Lender for the purposes of Clause 33.2 ( Contact details ) and paragraph (a)(iii) of Clause 33.5 ( Electronic communication ) and the Facility Agent shall be entitled to treat such person as the person entitled to receive all such notices, communications, information and documents as though that person were that Lender.

 

Page 63


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

21.16 Notice period

Where this Agreement specifies a minimum period of notice to be given to the Facility Agent, the Facility Agent may, at its discretion, accept a shorter notice period.

 

22. EVIDENCE AND CALCULATIONS

 

22.1 Accounts

Accounts maintained by a Finance Party in connection with this Agreement are prima facie evidence of the matters to which they relate for the purpose of any litigation or arbitration proceedings.

 

22.2 Certificates and determinations

Any certification or determination by a Finance Party of a rate or amount under the Finance Documents will be, in the absence of manifest error, conclusive evidence of the matters to which it relates.

 

22.3 Calculations

Any interest or fee accruing under a Finance Document accrues from day to day and is calculated on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed and a year of 360 or 365 days or otherwise, depending on what the Facility Agent determines is market practice.

 

23. FEES

 

23.1 Facility Agent’s fee

The Company must pay to the Facility Agent for its own account an agency fee in the manner agreed in the Fee Letter between the Facility Agent and the Company. If the Commitment of each Lender has not been automatically cancelled pursuant to Clause 7.7(b) ( Automatic cancellation ) by 15 April 2014, the Company must enter into a Fee Letter with the Facility Agent by no later than 22 April 2014.

 

23.2 Arrangement fee and participation fee

The Company must pay:

 

(a) to the Mandated Lead Arrangers, an arrangement fee; and

 

(b) to the Original Lenders, a participation fee,

in each case, for their own account in the manner agreed in:

 

  (i) in respect of the arrangement fee, the Fee Letter between the Mandated Lead Arrangers and the Company; and

 

  (ii) in respect of the participation fee, the Fee Letter between the Facility Agent (for the account of the Lenders) and the Company.

 

23.3 Commitment fee

 

(a) The Company must pay to the Facility Agent (for the account of each Lender) a commitment fee computed at the rate of:

 

Page 64


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) from the date of this Agreement to the date falling two months after the Signing Date, 25 per cent. of the applicable Margin on that Lender’s Available Commitment; and

 

  (ii) thereafter to the end of the Availability Period, 35 per cent. of the applicable Margin on that Lender’s Available Commitment.

 

(b) Accrued commitment fee is payable quarterly in arrear. Accrued commitment fee is also payable to the Facility Agent for the account of the Lenders on:

 

  (i) the first Utilisation Date;

 

  (ii) the last date of the Availability Period; and

 

  (iii) (for the account of the relevant Lenders only) the date a relevant Lender’s Commitment is cancelled in full.

 

(c) No commitment fee is payable to the Facility Agent (for the account of a Lender) on any Available Commitment of that Lender for any day on which that Lender is a Defaulting Lender.

 

24. INDEMNITIES AND BREAK COSTS

 

24.1 Currency indemnity

 

(a) The Company shall, as an independent obligation, indemnify each Finance Party against any loss or liability which that Finance Party incurs as a consequence of:

 

  (i) that Finance Party receiving an amount in respect of an Obligor’s liability under the Finance Documents; or

 

  (ii) that liability being converted into a claim, proof, judgment or order,

in a currency other than the currency in which the amount is expressed to be payable under the relevant Finance Document.

 

(b) Unless otherwise required by law, each Obligor waives any right it may have in any jurisdiction to pay any amount under the Finance Documents in a currency other than that in which it is expressed to be payable.

 

24.2 Other indemnities

 

(a) The Company must indemnify each Finance Party against any loss or liability which that Finance Party incurs as a consequence of:

 

  (i) the occurrence of any Event of Default;

 

  (ii) any failure by an Obligor to pay any amount due under a Finance Document on its due date, including any resulting from any distribution or redistribution of any amount among the Lenders under this Agreement;

 

  (iii) (other than by reason of negligence or default by that Finance Party) a Loan not being made after a Request has been delivered for that Loan; or

 

  (iv) a Loan (or part of a Loan) not being prepaid in accordance with a notice of prepayment.

 

Page 65


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

The Company’s liability in each case includes any loss or expense on account of funds borrowed, contracted for or utilised to fund any amount payable under any Finance Document, any amount repaid or prepaid or any Loan.

 

(b) The Company must indemnify the Facility Agent against any loss or liability incurred by the Facility Agent as a result of:

 

  (i) investigating any event which the Facility Agent reasonably believes to be a Default; or

 

  (ii) acting or relying on any notice, request or instruction which it reasonably believes to be genuine, correct and appropriately authorised.

 

24.3 Break Costs

 

(a) The Borrower must pay to each Lender its Break Costs.

 

(b) Break Costs are the amount (if any) determined by the relevant Lender by which:

 

  (i) the interest which that Lender would have received for the period from the date of receipt of any part of its share in a Loan or an overdue amount to the last day of the applicable Term for that Loan or overdue amount if the principal or overdue amount received had been paid on the last day of that Term;

exceeds

 

  (ii) the amount which that Lender would be able to obtain by placing an amount equal to the amount received by it on deposit with a leading bank in the appropriate interbank market for a period starting on the Business Day following receipt and ending on the last day of the applicable Term.

 

(c) Each Lender must supply to the Facility Agent for the Borrower details of the amount of any Break Costs claimed by it under this Clause.

 

25. EXPENSES

 

25.1 Subsequent costs

The Company must pay to the Facility Agent the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) reasonably incurred by it in connection with:

 

(a) the negotiation, preparation, printing and execution of any Finance Document (other than a Transfer Certificate) executed after the date of this Agreement; and

 

(b) any amendment, waiver or consent requested by or on behalf of any Obligor or specifically allowed by this Agreement.

 

25.2 Enforcement costs

The Company must pay to each Finance Party the amount of all costs and expenses (including legal fees) incurred by it in connection with the enforcement of, or the preservation of any rights under, any Finance Document.

 

Page 66


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

26. AMENDMENTS AND WAIVERS

 

26.1 Procedure

 

(a) Except as provided in this Clause, any term of the Finance Documents may be amended or waived with the agreement of the Company and the Majority Lenders. The Facility Agent may effect, on behalf of any Finance Party, an amendment or waiver allowed under this Clause.

 

(b) The Facility Agent must promptly notify the other Parties of any amendment or waiver effected by it under paragraph (a) above. Any such amendment or waiver is binding on all the Parties.

 

26.2 Exceptions

 

(a) An amendment or waiver which relates to:

 

  (i) the definition of “Majority Lenders” in Clause 1.1 ( Definitions );

 

  (ii) an extension of the date of payment of any amount to a Lender under the Finance Documents;

 

  (iii) a reduction in the Margin or a reduction in the amount of any payment of principal, interest, fee or other amount payable to a Lender under the Finance Documents;

 

  (iv) an increase in, or an extension of, a Commitment;

 

  (v) a release of an Obligor otherwise than in accordance with Clause 27.7 ( Resignation of an Obligor (other than the Company) ) or as a result of a disposal permitted under Clause 19.8 ( Disposals );

 

  (vi) a term of a Finance Document which expressly requires the consent of each Lender;

 

  (vii) the right of a Lender to assign or transfer its rights or obligations under the Finance Documents; or

 

  (viii) this Clause,

may only be made with the consent of all the Lenders.

 

(b) An amendment or waiver which relates to the rights or obligations of an Administrative Party may only be made with the consent of that Administrative Party.

 

26.3 Disenfranchisement of Defaulting Lenders

 

(a) For so long as a Defaulting Lender has any Available Commitment, in ascertaining the Majority Lenders or whether any given percentage (including, for the avoidance of doubt, unanimity) of the Total Commitments has been obtained to approve any request for a consent, waiver, amendment or other vote under the Finance Documents, that Defaulting Lender’s Commitments will be reduced by the amount of its Available Commitments and, to the extent that reduction results in that Defaulting Lender’s Total Commitments being zero, that Defaulting Lender shall be deemed not to be a Lender for the purpose of this paragraph (a).

 

(b)

If a Defaulting Lender fails to respond to a request for a consent, waiver, amendment or other vote under the Finance Documents or any other vote of the Lenders under the terms of this Agreement within ten Business Days in relation to consents, waivers, amendments or votes

 

Page 67


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  which require Majority Lender consent, and within fifteen Business Days in relation to consents, waivers, amendments or votes which require all Lender consent (unless the Company and the Facility Agent agree to a longer time period) of that request being made, its Commitment and/or participation shall not be included for the purpose of calculating the Total Commitments or participations under the Facility when ascertaining whether any relevant percentage of Total Commitments and/or participations has been obtained to approve that request.

 

(c) For the purposes of this Clause, the Facility Agent may assume that the following Lenders are Defaulting Lenders:

 

  (i) any Lender which has notified the Facility Agent that it has become a Defaulting Lender;

 

  (ii) any Lender in relation to which it is aware that any of the events or circumstances referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of the definition of Defaulting Lender has occurred,

unless it has received notice to the contrary from the Lender concerned or the Facility Agent is otherwise aware that the Lender has ceased to be a Defaulting Lender.

 

26.4 Replacement of a Defaulting Lender

 

(a) The Company may, at any time a Lender has become and continues to be a Defaulting Lender, by giving five Business Days’ prior written notice to the Facility Agent and such Lender:

 

  (i) replace such Lender by requiring such Lender to (and to the extent permitted by law such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties ) all (and not part only) of its rights and obligations under this Agreement; or

 

  (ii) require such Lender to (and to the extent permitted by law such Lender shall) transfer pursuant to Clause 27 ( Changes to the Parties ) all (and not part only) of the undrawn Commitment of the Lender,

to a Lender or other bank, financial institution, trust, fund or other entity (a Replacement Lender ) selected by the Company, and which (unless the Facility Agent is an Impaired Agent) is acceptable to the Facility Agent (acting reasonably) and which confirms its willingness to assume and does assume all the obligations or all the relevant obligations of the transferring Lender (including the assumption of the transferring Lender’s participations or unfunded participations (as the case may be) on the same basis as the transferring Lender) for a purchase price in cash payable at the time of transfer equal to the outstanding principal amount of such Lender’s participation in the outstanding Utilisations and all accrued interest, Break Costs and other amounts payable in relation thereto under the Finance Documents.

 

(b) Any transfer of rights and obligations of a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this Clause shall be subject to the following conditions:

 

  (i) the Company shall have no right to replace the Facility Agent;

 

  (ii) neither the Facility Agent nor the Defaulting Lender shall have any obligation to the Company to find a Replacement Lender;

 

  (iii) the transfer must take place no later than 30 days after the notice referred to in paragraph (a) above; and

 

Page 68


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (iv) in no event shall the Defaulting Lender be required to pay or surrender to the Replacement Lender any of the fees received by the Defaulting Lender pursuant to the Finance Documents.

 

26.5 Change of currency

If a change in any currency of a country occurs (including where there is more than one currency or currency unit recognised at the same time as the lawful currency of a country), this Agreement will be amended to the extent the Facility Agent (acting reasonably and after consultation with the Company) determines is necessary to reflect the change.

 

26.6 Waivers and remedies cumulative

The rights of each Finance Party under the Finance Documents:

 

(a) may be exercised as often as necessary;

 

(b) are cumulative and not exclusive of its rights under the general law; and

 

(c) may be waived only in writing and specifically.

Delay in exercising or non exercise of any right is not a waiver of that right.

 

27. CHANGES TO THE PARTIES

 

27.1 Assignments and transfers by Obligors

No Obligor may assign or transfer any of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents without the prior consent of all the Lenders.

 

27.2 Assignments and transfers by Lenders

 

(a) A Lender (the Existing Lender ) may, subject to the following provisions of this Clause, at any time assign or transfer (including by way of novation) any of its rights and obligations under this Agreement to another bank or financial institution or to a trust, fund or other entity regularly engaged in or established for the purpose of making, purchasing or investing in loans, securities or other financial assets which:

 

  (i) is a Qualifying Lender, as defined in Clause 11.1 ( General ); and

 

  (ii) has a minimum of two credit ratings of either ‘A-’ or higher by Standard & Poor’s, A3 or higher by Moody’s or a comparable rating from a nationally recognised credit rating agency for its longer term debt obligations,

(the New Lender ).

 

(b) A transfer of part of a Commitment must be in a minimum amount of at least U.S.$20,000,000 and an integral multiple of U.S.$5,000,000.

 

(c) Unless:

 

  (i) an Event of Default has occurred which is outstanding;

 

  (ii) the assignment or transfer is to a lender which is a lender to the Company under the Existing Facility Agreement on the date of this Agreement; or

 

Page 69


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (iii) the assignment or transfer:

 

  (A) is to take place during primary syndication;

 

  (B) is to another Lender; or

 

  (C) is to an Affiliate of a Lender,

provided that, if such transfer or assignment under paragraph (A), (B) or (C) is to take place prior to the first Utilisation Date, such transferee or assignee has a rating that complies with paragraph (a)(ii) above,

the consent of the Company is required for any assignment or transfer to a New Lender.

 

(d) The consent of the Company given pursuant to paragraph (c) must not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. The Company will be deemed to have given its consent ten Business Days after the Company is given notice of the request unless it is expressly refused by the Company within that time.

 

(e) A transfer of obligations will be effective only if either:

 

  (i) the obligations are novated in accordance with the following provisions of this Clause; or

 

  (ii) the New Lender confirms to the Facility Agent and the Company in form and substance satisfactory to the Facility Agent that it is bound by the terms of this Agreement as a Lender. On the transfer becoming effective in this manner the Existing Lender will be released from its obligations under this Agreement to the extent that they are transferred to the New Lender.

 

(f) Unless the Facility Agent otherwise agrees, the New Lender must pay to the Facility Agent for its own account, on or before the date any assignment or transfer occurs, a fee of U.S.$4,000.

 

(g) Any reference in this Agreement to a Lender includes a New Lender but excludes a Lender if no amount is or may be owed to or by it under this Agreement.

 

(h) Each New Lender, by executing the relevant Transfer Certificate, confirms, for the avoidance of doubt, that the Facility Agent has authority to execute on its behalf any amendment or waiver that has been approved by or on behalf of the requisite Lender or Lenders in accordance with this Agreement on or prior to the date on which the transfer or assignment becomes effective in accordance with this Agreement and that it is bound by that decision to the same extent as the Existing Lender would have been had it remained a Lender.

 

27.3 Procedure for transfer by way of novations

 

(a) A novation is effected if the Existing Lender and the New Lender deliver to the Facility Agent a duly completed Transfer Certificate and the Facility Agent executes it.

 

(b) The Facility Agent must execute as soon as reasonably practicable a Transfer Certificate delivered to it and which appears on its face to be in order.

 

(c) Each Party (other than the Existing Lender and the New Lender) irrevocably authorises the Facility Agent to execute any duly completed Transfer Certificate on its behalf.

 

(d) Subject to Clause 27.13 ( Pro rata interest settlement ), on the Transfer Date:

 

Page 70


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (i) the New Lender will assume the rights and obligations of the Existing Lender expressed to be the subject of the novation in the Transfer Certificate in substitution for the Existing Lender; and

 

  (ii) the Existing Lender will be released from those obligations and cease to have those rights.

 

27.4 Limitation of responsibility of Existing Lender

 

(a) Unless expressly agreed to the contrary, an Existing Lender is not responsible to a New Lender for the legality, validity, adequacy, accuracy, completeness or performance of:

 

  (i) any Finance Document or any other document; or

 

  (ii) any statement or information (whether written or oral) made in or supplied in connection with any Finance Document,

and any representations or warranties implied by law are excluded.

 

(b) Each New Lender confirms to the Existing Lender and the other Finance Parties that it:

 

  (i) has made, and will continue to make, its own independent appraisal of the financial condition and affairs of each Obligor and its related entities in connection with its participation in this Agreement; and

 

  (ii) has not relied exclusively on any information supplied to it by the Existing Lender in connection with any Finance Document.

 

(c) Nothing in any Finance Document requires an Existing Lender to:

 

  (i) accept a re transfer from a New Lender of any of the rights and obligations assigned or transferred under this Clause; or

 

  (ii) support any losses incurred by the New Lender by reason of the non performance by any Obligor of its obligations under any Finance Document or otherwise.

 

27.5 Costs resulting from change of Lender or Facility Office

If:

 

(a) a Lender assigns or transfers any of its rights and obligations under the Finance Documents or changes its Facility Office; and

 

(b) as a result of circumstances existing at the date the assignment, transfer or change occurs, an Obligor would be obliged to pay a Tax Payment or an Increased Cost,

then the Obligor need only pay that Tax Payment or Increased Cost to the same extent that it would have been obliged to if no assignment, transfer or change had occurred, except that this paragraph shall not apply:

 

  (i) if the assignment, transfer or change is made by a Lender to mitigate any circumstances giving rise to the Tax Payment, Increased Cost or right to be prepaid and/or cancelled by reason of illegality; or

 

  (ii)

in respect of a Tax Payment, if a Treaty Lender has included a confirmation that it wished the HMRC DT Treaty Passport scheme to apply to this Agreement in

 

Page 71


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  accordance with Clause 11.2(g)(ii)(B) and the Obligor making the Tax Payment has not made a Borrower DTTP Filing.

 

27.6 Additional Guarantors

 

(a)     

 

  (i) Subject to sub-paragraph (ii) below and compliance with Clause 17.5 (“ Know Your Customer” checks ), the Company may elect for any of its wholly owned Subsidiaries to become an Additional Guarantor.

 

  (ii) If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than the U.K. the prior consent of all the Lenders is required, which shall be conditional upon, but not limited to, the agreement of appropriate amendments to Clause 11 ( Taxes ) to take into account the jurisdiction of incorporation of that Additional Guarantor.

 

(b) If one of the Subsidiaries of the Company is to become an Additional Guarantor, then the Company must (following consultation with the Facility Agent) deliver to the Facility Agent the relevant documents and evidence listed in Part B of Schedule 2 ( Conditions precedent documents ).

 

(c) The relevant Subsidiary will become an Additional Guarantor when the Facility Agent notifies the other Finance Parties and the Company that it has received (or waived receipt of) all of the documents and evidence referred to in paragraph (b) above in form and substance satisfactory to it. The Facility Agent must give this notification as soon as reasonably practicable.

 

(d) Delivery of an Accession Agreement, executed by the relevant Subsidiary and the Company, to the Facility Agent constitutes confirmation by that Subsidiary and the Company that the Repeating Representations are then correct.

 

(e) Clause 15 ( Guarantee and Indemnity ) will be amended to the extent the Facility Agent (acting reasonably and after consultation with the Company) determines is necessary to reflect any requirement under the law of the jurisdiction of any Additional Guarantor to limit the guarantee to be provided by that Additional Guarantor.

 

27.7 Resignation of an Obligor (other than the Company)

 

(a) In this Clause, Resignation Request means a letter in the form of Schedule 6 ( Form of Resignation Request ), with such amendments as the Facility Agent may approve or reasonably require.

 

(b) The Company may request that an Obligor (other than the Company) ceases to be an Obligor by giving to the Facility Agent a duly completed Resignation Request.

 

(c) The Facility Agent must accept a Resignation Request and notify the Company and the Lenders of its acceptance if:

 

  (i) no Default is outstanding or would result from the acceptance of the Resignation Request and the Company confirms this; and

 

  (ii) no amount owed by that Obligor under this Agreement is still outstanding.

 

(d) The Obligor will cease to be a Guarantor when the Facility Agent gives the notification referred to in paragraph (c) above.

 

Page 72


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

27.8 Affiliates of Lenders

 

(a) Each Lender may fulfil its obligations in respect of any Loan through an Affiliate if:

 

  (i) the relevant Affiliate is specified in this Agreement as a Lender or becomes a Lender by means of a Transfer Certificate in accordance with this Agreement; and

 

  (ii) the Loans in which that Affiliate will participate are specified in this Agreement, a Transfer Certificate or in a notice given by that Lender to the Facility Agent and the Company.

In this event, the Lender and the Affiliate will participate in Loans in the manner provided for in sub-paragraph (ii) above.

 

(b) If paragraph (a) above applies, the Lender and its Affiliate will be treated as having a single Commitment and a single vote, but, for all other purposes, will be treated as separate Lenders.

 

27.9 Changes to the Reference Banks

If a Reference Bank (or, if a Reference Bank is not a Lender, the Lender of which it is an Affiliate) ceases to be a Lender, the Facility Agent must (with the agreement of the Company) appoint another Lender or an Affiliate of a Lender to replace that Reference Bank.

 

27.10 Replacement of a Lender

 

(a) For the purposes of this Clause, Non-Consenting Lender means a Lender who does not agree to a consent or amendment or who fails to respond to a request for a consent or amendment where:

 

  (i) the Company or the Facility Agent has requested the Lenders to consent to a departure from or waiver of any provision of the Finance Documents or to agree to any amendment to the Finance Documents;

 

  (ii) the relevant consent or amendment requires the agreement of all Lenders;

 

  (iii) a period of not less than 15 Business Days (or such longer period as the Company and the Facility Agent may agree) has elapsed from the date the consent or amendment was requested;

 

  (iv) the Majority Lenders have agreed to that consent or amendment; and

 

  (v) the Company has notified the Lender it will treat it as a Non Consenting Lender.

 

(b) If at any time any Lender becomes a Non-Consenting Lender, then the Company may, on ten Business Days’ prior notice to the Facility Agent and that Lender, replace that Lender by causing it to (and that Lender shall) transfer in accordance with this Clause 27 all of its rights and obligations under this Agreement to a Lender or other person selected by the Company and acceptable to the Facility Agent (acting reasonably) for a purchase price equal to the outstanding principal amount of that Lender’s participation in the outstanding Loans and all accrued interest and fees and other amounts payable to that Lender under this Agreement.

 

(c) The Company shall have no right to replace the Facility Agent and neither the Facility Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation to the Company to find a replacement Lender or other such entity.

 

Page 73


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(d) The Company may only replace a Non-Consenting Lender if that replacement takes place no later than 180 days after the date the Non-Consenting Lender becomes a Non-Consenting Lender.

 

(e) No Lender replaced under this Clause may be required to pay or surrender to that replacement Lender or other entity any of the fees received by it.

 

(f) The Company’s right to replace a Non-Consenting Lender under this Clause is, and shall be, in addition to, and not in lieu of, all other rights and remedies available to the Company against that Non-Consenting Lender under this Agreement, at law, in equity, or by statute.

 

27.11 Copy of Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation to the Company

The Facility Agent shall, as soon as reasonably practicable after it has executed a Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation, send to the Company a copy of that Transfer Certificate or Increase Confirmation.

 

27.12 Security over Lenders’ rights

In addition to the other rights provided to Lenders under this Clause 27, each Lender may without consulting with or obtaining consent from any Obligor, at any time charge, assign or otherwise create any Security Interest in or over (whether by way of collateral or otherwise) all or any of its rights under any Finance Document to secure obligations of that Lender including without limitation:

 

(a) any charge, assignment or other Security Interest to secure obligations to a federal reserve or central bank or to governmental authorities, agencies or departments including HM Treasury; and

 

(b) in the case of any Lender which is a fund, any charge, assignment or other Security Interest granted to any holders (or trustee or representatives of holders) of obligations owed, or securities issued by that Lender as security for those obligations or securities,

except that no such charge, assignment or Security Interest shall:

 

  (i) release a Lender from any of its obligations under the Finance Documents or substitute the beneficiary of the relevant charge, assignment or Security Interest for the Lender as a party to any of the Finance Documents; or

 

  (ii) require any payments to be made by an Obligor other than or in excess of, or grant to any person any more extensive rights than, those required to be made or granted to the relevant Lender under the Finance Documents.

 

27.13 Pro rata interest settlement

If the Facility Agent has notified the Lenders that it is able to distribute interest payments on a pro rata basis to Existing Lenders and New Lenders then (in respect of any transfer pursuant to Clause 27.3 ( Procedure for transfer by way of novations ) the Transfer Date of which, in each case, is after the date of such notification and is not on the last day of a Term):

 

(a) any interest or fees in respect of the relevant participation which are expressed to accrue by reference to the lapse of time shall continue to accrue in favour of the Existing Lender up to but excluding the Transfer Date ( Accrued Amounts ) and shall become due and payable to the Existing Lender (without further interest accruing on them) on the last day of the current Term (or, if the Term is longer than six months, on the next of the dates which falls at six monthly intervals after the first day of that Term); and

 

Page 74


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(b) the rights assigned or transferred by the Existing Lender will not include the right to the Accrued Amounts, so that, for the avoidance of doubt:

 

  (i) when the Accrued Amounts become payable, those Accrued Amounts will be payable to the Existing Lender; and

 

  (ii) the amount payable to the New Lender on that date will be the amount which would, but for the application of this Clause, have been payable to it on that date, but after deduction of the Accrued Amounts.

 

28. CONFIDENTIALITY

 

28.1 Confidential Information

Each Finance Party agrees to keep all Confidential Information confidential and not to disclose it to anyone, save to the extent permitted by Clause 28.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) and Clause 28.3 ( Disclosure to numbering service providers ), and to ensure that all Confidential Information is protected with security measures and a degree of care that would apply to its own confidential information.

 

28.2 Disclosure of Confidential Information

Any Finance Party may disclose:

 

(a) to any of its Affiliates and any of its or their officers, directors, employees, professional advisers, auditors, partners and Representatives such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if any person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given pursuant to this paragraph (a) is informed in writing of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no such requirement to so inform if the recipient is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the information or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information;

 

(b) to any person:

 

  (i) to (or through) whom it assigns or transfers (or may potentially assign or transfer) all or any of its rights and/or obligations under one or more Finance Documents and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (ii) with (or through) whom it enters into (or may potentially enter into), whether directly or indirectly, any sub-participation in relation to, or any other transaction under which payments are to be made or may be made by reference to, one or more Finance Documents and/or one or more Obligors and to any of that person’s Affiliates, Representatives and professional advisers;

 

  (iii) appointed by any Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (ii) above applies to receive communications, notices, information or documents delivered pursuant to the Finance Documents on its behalf (including, without limitation, any person appointed under paragraph (c) of Clause 21.15 ( Relationship with the Lenders ));

 

  (iv) who invests in or otherwise finances (or may potentially invest in or otherwise finance), directly or indirectly, any transaction referred to in paragraph (b)(i) or (b)(ii) above;

 

Page 75


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (v) to whom information is required or requested to be disclosed by any court of competent jurisdiction or any governmental, banking, taxation or other regulatory authority or similar body, the rules of any relevant stock exchange or pursuant to any applicable law or regulation;

 

  (vi) to whom or for whose benefit that Finance Party charges, assigns or otherwise creates a Security Interest (or may do so) pursuant to Clause 27.12 ( Security over Lenders’ rights );

 

  (vii) to whom information is required to be disclosed in connection with, and for the purposes of, any litigation, arbitration, administrative or other investigations, proceedings or disputes;

 

  (viii) who is a Party; or

 

  (ix) with the consent of the Company;

in each case, such Confidential Information as that Finance Party shall consider appropriate if:

 

  (A) in relation to paragraphs (b)(i), (b)(ii) and (b)(iii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking except that there shall be no requirement for a Confidentiality Undertaking if the recipient is a professional adviser and is subject to professional obligations to maintain the confidentiality of the Confidential Information;

 

  (B) in relation to paragraph (b)(iv) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a Confidentiality Undertaking or is otherwise bound by requirements of confidentiality in relation to the Confidential Information they receive and is informed that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information;

 

  (C) in relation to paragraphs (b)(v), (b)(vi) and (b)(vii) above, the person to whom the Confidential Information is to be given is informed of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information except that there shall be no requirement to so inform if, in the opinion of that Finance Party, it is not practicable so to do in the circumstances;

 

(c) to any person appointed by that Finance Party or by a person to whom paragraph (b)(i) or (ii) above applies to provide administration or settlement services in respect of one or more of the Finance Documents including without limitation, in relation to the trading of participations in respect of the Finance Documents, such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such service provider to provide any of the services referred to in this paragraph (c) if the service provider to whom the Confidential Information is to be given has entered into a confidentiality agreement substantially in the form of the LMA Master Confidentiality Undertaking for Use With Administration/Settlement Service Providers or such other form of confidentiality undertaking agreed between the Company and the relevant Finance Party; and

 

(d)

to any rating agency (including its professional advisers) such Confidential Information as may be required to be disclosed to enable such rating agency to carry out its normal rating activities in relation to the Finance Documents and/or the Obligors if the rating agency to

 

Page 76


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  whom the Confidential Information is to be given is informed of its confidential nature and that some or all of such Confidential Information may be price-sensitive information.

 

28.3 Disclosure to numbering service providers

 

(a) Any Finance Party may disclose to any national or international numbering service provider appointed by that Finance Party to provide identification numbering services in respect of this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors the following information:

 

  (i) names of Obligors;

 

  (ii) country of domicile of Obligors;

 

  (iii) place of incorporation of Obligors;

 

  (iv) date of this Agreement;

 

  (v) the names of the Facility Agent and the Mandated Lead Arrangers;

 

  (vi) date of each amendment and restatement of this Agreement;

 

  (vii) amount of Total Commitments;

 

  (viii) currency of Facility;

 

  (ix) type of Facility;

 

  (x) ranking of Facility;

 

  (xi) Final Maturity Date of Facility;

 

  (xii) changes to any of the information previously supplied pursuant to paragraphs (i) to (xi) above; and

 

  (xiii) such other information agreed between such Finance Party and the Company,

to enable such numbering service provider to provide its usual syndicated loan numbering identification services.

 

(b) The Parties acknowledge and agree that each identification number assigned to this Agreement, the Facility and/or one or more Obligors by a numbering service provider and the information associated with each such number may be disclosed to users of its services in accordance with the standard terms and conditions of that numbering service provider.

 

28.4 Entire agreement

This Clause 28 constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties in relation to the obligations of the Finance Parties under the Finance Documents regarding Confidential Information and supersedes any previous agreement, whether express or implied, regarding Confidential Information.

 

28.5 Inside information

Each of the Finance Parties acknowledges that some or all of the Confidential Information is or may be price-sensitive information and that the use of such information may be regulated or prohibited by applicable legislation including securities law relating to insider dealing and market abuse and each of the Finance Parties undertakes not to use any Confidential Information for any unlawful purpose.

 

Page 77


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

28.6 Notification of disclosure

Each of the Finance Parties agrees (to the extent permitted by law and regulation) to inform the Company:

 

(a) of the circumstances of any disclosure of Confidential Information made pursuant to paragraph (b)(v) of Clause 28.2 ( Disclosure of Confidential Information ) except where such disclosure is made to any of the persons referred to in that paragraph during the ordinary course of its supervisory or regulatory function; and

 

(b) upon becoming aware that Confidential Information has been disclosed in breach of this Clause 28.

 

28.7 Continuing obligations

The obligations in this Clause 28 are continuing and, in particular, shall survive and remain binding on each Finance Party for a period of twelve months from the earlier of:

 

(a) the date on which all amounts payable by the Obligors under or in connection with this Agreement have been paid in full and all Commitments have been cancelled or otherwise cease to be available; and

 

(b) the date on which such Finance Party otherwise ceases to be a Finance Party.

 

29. SET OFF

Following an Event of Default, a Finance Party may set off any matured obligation owed to it by an Obligor under the Finance Documents (to the extent beneficially owned by that Finance Party) against any obligation (whether or not matured) owed by that Finance Party to that Obligor, regardless of the place of payment, booking branch or currency of either obligation. If the obligations are in different currencies, the Finance Party may convert either obligation at a market rate of exchange in its usual course of business for the purpose of the set off.

 

30. PRO RATA SHARING

 

30.1 Redistribution

If any amount owing by an Obligor under this Agreement to a Lender (the recovering Lender ) is discharged by payment, set off or any other manner other than through the Facility Agent under this Agreement (a recovery ), then:

 

(a) the recovering Lender must, within three Business Days, supply details of the recovery to the Facility Agent;

 

(b) the Facility Agent must calculate whether the recovery is in excess of the amount which the recovering Lender would have received if the recovery had been received by the Facility Agent under this Agreement; and

 

(c) the recovering Lender must pay to the Facility Agent an amount equal to the excess (the redistribution ).

 

30.2 Effect of redistribution

 

(a) The Facility Agent must treat a redistribution as if it were a payment by the relevant Obligor under this Agreement and distribute it among the Lenders accordingly.

 

Page 78


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(b) When the Facility Agent makes a distribution under paragraph (a) above, the recovering Lender will be subrogated to the rights of the Finance Parties which have shared in that redistribution.

 

(c) If and to the extent that the recovering Lender is not able to rely on any rights of subrogation under paragraph (b) above, the relevant Obligor will owe the recovering Lender a debt which is equal to the redistribution, immediately payable and of the type originally discharged.

 

(d) If:

 

  (i) a recovering Lender must subsequently return a recovery, or an amount measured by reference to a recovery, to an Obligor; and

 

  (ii) the recovering Lender has paid a redistribution in relation to that recovery,

each Finance Party must reimburse the recovering Lender all or the appropriate portion of the redistribution paid to that Finance Party, together with interest for the period while it held the re distribution. In this event, the subrogation in paragraph (b) above will operate in reverse to the extent of the reimbursement.

 

30.3 Exceptions

Notwithstanding any other term of this Clause, a recovering Lender need not pay a redistribution to the extent that:

 

(a) it would not, after the payment, have a valid claim against the relevant Obligor in the amount of the redistribution; or

 

(b) it would be sharing with another Finance Party any amount which the recovering Lender has received or recovered as a result of legal or arbitration proceedings, where:

 

  (i) the recovering Lender notified the Facility Agent of those proceedings; and

 

  (ii) the other Finance Party had an opportunity to participate in those proceedings but did not do so or did not take separate legal or arbitration proceedings as soon as reasonably practicable after receiving notice of them.

 

31. SEVERABILITY

If a term of a Finance Document is or becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable in any jurisdiction, that shall not affect:

 

(a) the legality, validity or enforceability in that jurisdiction of any other term of the Finance Documents; or

 

(b) the legality, validity or enforceability in other jurisdictions of that or any other term of the Finance Documents.

 

32. COUNTERPARTS

Each Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts. This has the same effect as if the signatures on the counterparts were on a single copy of the Finance Document. Delivery of a counterpart of a Finance Document by email attachment or telecopy shall be an effective mode of delivery.

 

Page 79


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

33. NOTICES

 

33.1 In writing

 

(a) Any formal communication in connection with a Finance Document must be in writing and, unless otherwise stated, may be given in person, by post or fax approved by the Facility Agent.

 

(b) Unless it is agreed to the contrary, any consent or agreement required under a Finance Document must be given in writing.

 

33.2 Contact details

 

(a) Except as provided below, the contact details of each Party for all communications in connection with the Finance Documents are those notified by that Party for this purpose to the Facility Agent on or before the date it becomes a Party.

 

(b) The contact details of the Company for this purpose are:

Smith & Nephew plc

15 Adam Street

London WC2N 6LA

 

Tel:    0207 401 7646   
Fax:    0207 930 3353   
For the attention of:    The Company Secretary

 

(c) The contact details of the Facility Agent for operational duties as Facility Agent (such as drawdowns, interest rate fixing, interest/fee calculations and payments) are:

J.P. Morgan Europe Limited

Loans Agency 6 th floor

25 Bank Street, Canary Wharf

London E14 5JP

United Kingdom

 

Attention:    Loans Agency
Facsimile:    +44 20 7777 2360
Email:    loan_and_agency_london@jpmorgan.com

For non operational matters as Facility Agent (such as documentation; compliance with covenants; amendments and waivers etc):

J.P. Morgan Europe Limited

25 Bank Street, Canary Wharf

London, E14 5JP

 

Tel:    020 7134 5712   
Fax:    020 3493 0074   
For the attention of:    Jonathan Richards

 

(d) Any Party may change its contact details by giving five Business Days’ notice to the Facility Agent or (in the case of the Facility Agent) to the other Parties.

 

(e) Where a Party nominates a particular department or officer to receive a communication, a communication will not be effective if it fails to specify that department or officer.

 

Page 80


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

33.3 Effectiveness

 

(a) Except as provided below, any communication in connection with a Finance Document will be deemed to be given as follows:

 

  (i) if delivered in person, at the time of delivery;

 

  (ii) if posted, five days after being deposited in the post, postage prepaid, in a correctly addressed envelope;

 

  (iii) if by fax, when received in legible form.

 

(b) A communication given under paragraph (a) above but received on a non working day or after business hours in the place of receipt will only be deemed to be given on the next working day in that place.

 

(c) A communication to the Facility Agent will only be effective on actual receipt by it.

 

33.4 Communication when Facility Agent is Impaired Agent

If the Facility Agent is an Impaired Agent the Parties may, instead of communicating with each other through the Facility Agent, communicate with each other directly and (while the Facility Agent is an Impaired Agent) all the provisions of the Finance Documents which require communications to be made or notices to be given to or by the Facility Agent shall be varied so that communications may be made and notices given to or by the relevant Parties directly. This provision shall not operate after a replacement Facility Agent has been appointed unless such replacement Facility Agent becomes an Impaired Agent.

 

33.5 Electronic communication

 

(a) Any communication to be made between the Facility Agent and a Lender under or in connection with the Finance Documents may be made by electronic mail or other electronic means, if the Facility Agent and the relevant Lender:

 

  (i) agree that, unless and until notified to the contrary, this is to be an accepted form of communication;

 

  (ii) notify each other in writing of their electronic mail address and/or any other information required to enable the sending and receipt of information by that means; and

 

  (iii) notify each other of any change to their address or any other such information supplied by them.

 

(b) Any electronic communication made between the Facility Agent and a Lender will be effective only when actually received in readable form and in the case of any electronic communication made by a Lender to the Facility Agent only if it is addressed in such a manner as the Facility Agent shall specify for this purpose.

 

33.6 Obligors

 

(a) All communications under the Finance Documents to or from an Obligor must be sent through the Facility Agent.

 

(b) All communications under the Finance Documents to or from an Obligor (other than the Company) must be sent through the Company.

 

Page 81


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(c) Each Obligor (other than the Company) irrevocably appoints the Company to act as its agent:

 

  (i) to give and receive all communications under the Finance Documents;

 

  (ii) to supply all information concerning itself to any Finance Party; and

 

  (iii) to sign all documents under or in connection with the Finance Documents including, without limitation and for the avoidance of doubt, any amendments to the Finance Documents, any Request, or notice of a prepayment.

 

(d) Any communication given to the Company in connection with a Finance Document will be deemed to have been given also to the other Obligors.

 

(e) The Facility Agent may assume that any communication made by the Company is made with the consent of each other Obligor.

 

34. LANGUAGE

 

(a) Any notice given in connection with a Finance Document must be in English.

 

(b) Any other document provided in connection with a Finance Document must be:

 

  (i) in English; or

 

  (ii) (unless the Facility Agent otherwise agrees) accompanied by a certified English translation. In this case, the English translation prevails unless the document is a statutory or other official document.

 

35. GOVERNING LAW

This Agreement and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with this Agreement are governed by English law.

 

36. ENFORCEMENT

 

36.1 Jurisdiction

 

(a) The English courts have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute in connection with any Finance Document or any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with any Finance Document.

 

(b) The English courts are the most appropriate and convenient courts to settle any such dispute and each Obligor waives objection to those courts on the grounds of inconvenient forum or otherwise in relation to proceedings in connection with any Finance Documents.

 

(c) This Clause is for the benefit of the Finance Parties only. To the extent allowed by law, a Finance Party may take:

 

  (i) proceedings in any other court; and

 

  (ii) concurrent proceedings in any number of jurisdictions.

 

36.2 Service of process

 

(a)

Each Obligor (including, for the avoidance of doubt, each Additional Guarantor) not incorporated in England and Wales irrevocably appoints the Company as its agent under the

 

Page 82


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  Finance Documents for service of process in any proceedings before the English courts (which appointment the Company hereby accepts).

 

(b) If any person appointed as process agent is unable for any reason to act as agent for service of process, the Company (on behalf of all the Obligors) must immediately appoint another agent on terms acceptable to the Facility Agent. Failing this, the Facility Agent may appoint another agent for this purpose.

 

(c) Each Obligor agrees that failure by a process agent to notify it of any process will not invalidate the relevant proceedings.

 

(d) This Clause does not affect any other method of service allowed by law.

THIS AGREEMENT has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Agreement.

 

Page 83


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 1

ORIGINAL LENDERS

 

Name of Original Lender    Commitment
(U.S.$)
     Facility Office    Qualifying Lender status   

HMRC Double Taxation

Treaty Passport scheme
reference number and
jurisdiction of tax residence
(if applicable)

Barclays Bank PLC

     700,000,000.00       Barclays Bank PLC    Qualifying Lender (other than a Treaty Lender)   

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.

     700,000,000.00       JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.    Qualifying Lender (other than a Treaty Lender)   

 

Page 84


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 2

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT DOCUMENTS

Part A

To Be Delivered Before The First Request

Company

1. A copy of the constitutional documents of the Company.

2. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors (or a committee of the board of directors) of the Company approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, this Agreement.

3. If applicable, a copy of a resolution of the board of directors of the Company establishing the committee referred to in paragraph 2 above.

4. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised on behalf of the Company to execute or witness the execution of any Finance Document or to sign or send any document or notice in connection with any Finance Document.

5. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Company:

 

(a) confirming that utilising the Total Commitments in full would not breach any borrowing or guaranteeing limit binding on it; and

 

(b) certifying that each copy document specified in Part A of Schedule 2 is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of this Agreement.

6. A Group structure chart.

Legal opinions

7. A legal opinion of Allen & Overy LLP (legal advisers to the Mandated Lead Arrangers) as to matters of English law, in form and substance satisfactory to the Mandated Lead Arrangers.

8. A customary legal opinion of Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP (legal advisers to the Company on matters of U.S. law) in form and substance satisfactory to the Mandated Lead Arrangers, with respect to no violation of the Margin Regulations.

Other documents and evidence

9. Duly executed copies of each Fee Letter.

10. Original Financial Statements.

Completion

11. A duly executed copy of the Merger Agreement.

12. A certificate of the Company (signed by an authorised signatory) that:

 

(a) all conditions to the consummation of the Acquisition under the Merger Agreement shall have been, or shall be, satisfied or waived prior to or concurrently with the utilisation of the Facility; and

 

Page 85


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

(b) the payment of the Merger Consideration (as such term is defined in the Merger Agreement) will be payable in accordance with the terms of the Merger Agreement within five Business Days.

Part B

For An Additional Guarantor

Additional Guarantors

1. An Accession Agreement, duly executed by the Company and the Additional Guarantor.

2. A copy of the constitutional documents of the Additional Guarantor.

3. A copy of a resolution of the board of directors of the Additional Guarantor approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Agreement and the Finance Documents.

4. A specimen of the signature of each person authorised on behalf of the Additional Guarantor to execute or witness the execution of any Finance Document or to sign or send any document or notice in connection with any Finance Document.

5. In the case of an Additional Guarantor incorporated in the U.K., a copy of a resolution, signed by all (or any lower percentage agreed by the Facility Agent) of the holders of its issued or allotted shares, approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Agreement.

6. If applicable, a copy of a resolution of the board of directors of each corporate shareholder in the Additional Guarantor approving the resolution referred to in paragraph 5 above.

7. In the case of an Additional Guarantor incorporated in any jurisdiction other than the U.K., a copy of a resolution of the shareholders of that Additional Guarantor approving the terms of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Agreement and the Finance Documents.

8. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Additional Guarantor:

 

(a) confirming that utilising and/or guaranteeing (as applicable) the Total Commitments in full would not breach any limit binding on it; and

 

(b) certifying that each copy document specified in Part B of this Schedule is correct, complete and in full force and effect as at a date no earlier than the date of the Accession Agreement.

9. If available, a copy of the latest audited accounts of the Additional Guarantor.

10. Compliance with Clause 17.5 (“ Know Your Customer” checks )

Legal opinions

11. A legal opinion of Allen & Overy LLP, legal advisers to the Facility Agent, addressed to the Finance Parties.

12. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated in a jurisdiction other than England or the United States of America (or any state thereof, including the District of Columbia), a legal opinion from legal advisers to the Facility Agent in that jurisdiction, addressed to the Finance Parties.

13. If the Additional Guarantor is incorporated or formed in the United States of America (or any state thereof, including the District of Columbia), a legal opinion from legal advisers to the Additional Guarantor in that jurisdiction, addressed to the Finance Parties.

 

Page 86


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

Other documents and evidence

14. A copy of any other authorisation or other document, opinion or assurance which the Facility Agent has notified the Company is necessary in connection with the entry into and performance of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Accession Agreement or for the validity and enforceability of any Finance Document.

 

Page 87


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 3

REQUESTS

Part A

Form of Request

 

To:    [                    ] as Facility Agent
From:    [BORROWER]
Date:    [            ], 201[ ]

Smith & Nephew PLC – U.S.$1,400,000,000 Facility Agreement dated [ ], 2014 (the Agreement )

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Request.

2. We wish to borrow a Loan on the following terms:

 

(a) Utilisation Date: [                    ]

 

(b) Amount: [            ]

 

(c) Term: [        ].

3. Our payment instructions are: [                    ].

4. We confirm that each condition precedent under the Agreement which must be satisfied on the date of this Request is so satisfied.

5. This Request is irrevocable.

 

By:  
[BORROWER]

 

Page 88


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

Part B

Form of Selection Notice

 

From:    [Borrower]
To:    [Facility Agent]
Dated:   

Dear Sirs

Smith & Nephew PLC – U.S.$1,400,000,000 Facility Agreement dated [ ], 2014 (the Agreement )

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Selection Notice. Terms defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Selection Notice unless given a different meaning in this Selection Notice.

2. We refer to the following Loan[s] with a Term ending on [                    ].*

3. [We request that the above Loan[s] be divided into [        ] Loans with the following amounts and Terms:]**

or

[We request that the next Term for the above Loan[s] is [        ]].***

4. This Selection Notice is irrevocable.

 

Yours faithfully

 

authorised signatory for

[BORROWER]

 

* Insert details of all Loans which have a Term ending on the same date.
** Use this option if division of Loans is requested.
*** Use this option if sub-division is not required.

 

Page 89


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 4

FORM OF TRANSFER CERTIFICATE

 

To:    [                    ] as Facility Agent and Smith & Nephew plc as the Company, for and on behalf of each Obligor
From:    [THE EXISTING LENDER] (the Existing Lender ) and [THE NEW LENDER] (the New Lender )
Date:    [                    ]

Smith & Nephew PLC – U.S.$1,400,000,000 Facility Agreement dated [•], 2014 (the Agreement )

We refer to the Agreement. This is a Transfer Certificate.

1. The Existing Lender transfers by novation to the New Lender the Existing Lender’s rights and obligations referred to in the Schedule below in accordance with the terms of the Agreement.

2. The proposed Transfer Date is [                    ].

3. [The New Lender confirms that it is:

 

(a) [not a Qualifying Lender;

 

(b) a Qualifying Lender (other than a Treaty Lender); or

 

(c) a Treaty Lender.] 1

4. [The New Lender confirms that the person beneficially entitled to interest payable to that Lender in respect of an advance under a Finance Document is either:

 

(a) a company resident in the United Kingdom for United Kingdom tax purposes;

 

(b) a partnership each member of which is:

 

  (i) a company so resident in the United Kingdom; or

 

  (ii) a company not so resident in the United Kingdom which carries on a trade in the United Kingdom through a permanent establishment and which brings into account in computing its chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) the whole of any share of interest payable in respect of that advance that falls to it by reason of Part 17 of the CTA; or

 

(c) a company not so resident in the United Kingdom which carries on a trade in the United Kingdom through a permanent establishment and which brings into account interest payable in respect of that advance in computing the chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) of that company.] 2

5. [The New Lender hereby confirms that it is a Treaty Lender that holds a passport under the HMRC DT Treaty Passport scheme, that its reference number is [    ], that it is tax resident in [        ], and notifies the Company that the Borrower must make an application to HMRC under form DTTP2 within 30 days of the Transfer Date.

 

 

1   Delete as applicable – each New Lender is required to confirm which of these three categories it falls within.
2   Include if New Lender comes within paragraph (i)(B) of the definition of Qualifying Lender in clause 12.1.

 

Page 90


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

6. The administrative details of the New Lender for the purposes of the Agreement are set out in the Schedule.

7. This Transfer Certificate and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with this Transfer Certificate are governed by English law.

 

Page 91


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

THE SCHEDULE

Rights and obligations to be transferred by novation

[insert relevant details, including applicable Commitment (or part)]

Administrative details of the New Lender

[insert details of Facility Office, address for notices and payment details etc.]

 

[EXISTING LENDER]     [NEW LENDER]
By:       By:  

 

The Transfer Date is confirmed by the Facility Agent as [                    ].
[FACILITY AGENT]   

 

By:  

 

Page 92


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 5

FORM OF ACCESSION AGREEMENT

 

To:    [                    ] as Facility Agent
From:    Smith & Nephew plc and [Proposed Guarantor]
Date:    [                    ]

Smith & Nephew PLC – U.S.$1,400,000,000 Facility Agreement dated [ ], 2014 (the Agreement )

We refer to the Agreement. This is an Accession Agreement.

[Name of company] of [address/registered office] agrees to become an Additional Guarantor and to be bound by the terms of the Agreement as an Additional Guarantor.

Jurisdiction of incorporation of new Obligor; registered number of new Obligor; and administrative details of new Obligor.

This Accession Agreement and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with this Accession Agreement are governed by English law.

 

Smith & Nephew plc
By:  

[EXECUTED AND DELIVERED AS A DEED BY PROPOSED GUARANTOR]

 

[By:]  

 

Page 93


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 6

FORM OF RESIGNATION REQUEST

 

To:    [                    ] as Facility Agent
From:    Smith & Nephew plc and [relevant Obligor]
Date:    [                    ]

Smith & Nephew PLC – U.S.$1,400,000,000 Facility Agreement dated [ ], 2014 (the Agreement )

We refer to the Agreement. This is a Resignation Request.

1. We request that [resigning Obligor] be released from its obligations as a Guarantor under the Agreement.

2. We confirm that no Default is outstanding or would result from the acceptance of this Resignation Request.

3. We confirm that as at the date of this Resignation Request no amount owed by [resigning Obligor] under the Agreement is outstanding.

4. This Resignation Request and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with this Resignation Request are governed by English law.

 

Smith & Nephew plc     [Relevant Obligor]
By:       By:  

The Facility Agent confirms that this resignation takes effect on [                    ].

[FACILITY AGENT]

 

By:  

 

Page 94


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 7

FORM OF COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE

 

To:    [                    ] as Facility Agent
From:    Smith & Nephew plc
Date:    [                    ]

Smith & Nephew PLC – U.S.$1,400,000,000 Facility Agreement dated [ ], 2014 (the Agreement )

 

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is a Compliance Certificate.

 

2. We confirm that as at [relevant testing date]:

 

(a) Consolidated EBITDA for the Measurement period then ending was [                    ]; and Consolidated Total Net Borrowings are [        ]; therefore, Consolidated Total Net Borrowings are [        ] x Consolidated EBITDA; and

 

(b) Consolidated EBITA for the Measurement period then ending was [                    ] and Consolidated Net Interest Payable was [        ]; therefore, the ratio of Consolidated EBITA to Consolidated Net Interest Payable was [    ] to 1.

 

3. We set out below calculations establishing the figures in paragraph 2 above:

[            ].

 

4. [We confirm that no Default is outstanding as at [relevant testing date]*

Smith & Nephew plc

 

By:  

[insert applicable certification language]

 

* If this statement cannot be made, the certificate should identify any Default that is outstanding and the steps, if any, being taken to remedy it.

 

Page 95


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 8

FORM OF INCREASE CONFIRMATION

To: [ ] as Facility Agent and Smith & Nephew plc as the Company, for and on behalf of each Obligor

From: [the Increase Lender ] (the Increase Lender )

Dated:

Smith & Nephew PLC – U.S.$1,400,000,000 Facility Agreement dated [ ], 2014 (the Agreement )

1. We refer to the Agreement. This is an Increase Confirmation. [Terms] defined in the Agreement have the same meaning in this Increase Confirmation unless given a different meaning in this Increase Confirmation.

2. We refer to Clause 2.2 ( Increase ).

3. The Increase Lender agrees to assume and will assume all of the obligations corresponding to the Commitment specified in the Schedule (the Relevant Commitment ) as if it was an Original Lender under the Agreement.

4. The proposed date on which the increase in relation to the Increase Lender and the Relevant Commitment is to take effect (the Increase Date ) is [ ].

5. On the Increase Date, the Increase Lender becomes party to the Finance Documents as a Lender.

6. The Facility Office and address, fax number and attention details for notices to the Increase Lender for the purposes of Clause 33.2 ( Contact details ) are set out in the Schedule.

7. The Increase Lender expressly acknowledges the limitations on the Lenders’ obligations referred to in paragraph (f) of Clause 2.2 ( Increase ).

8. [The Increase Lender confirms that it is:

 

  (a) [not a Qualifying Lender]

 

  (b) [a Qualifying Lender (other than a Treaty Lender);]

 

  (c) [a Treaty Lender;] 3

9. [The Increase Lender confirms that the person beneficially entitled to interest payable to that Lender in respect of an advance under a Finance Document is either:

 

(a) a company resident in the United Kingdom for United Kingdom tax purposes;

 

(b) a partnership each member of which is:

 

  (i) a company so resident in the United Kingdom; or

 

3   Delete as applicable — each Increase Lender is required to confirm which of these three categories it falls within.

 

Page 96


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

  (ii) a company not so resident in the United Kingdom which carries on a trade in the United Kingdom through a permanent establishment and which brings into account in computing its chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) the whole of any share of interest payable in respect of that advance that falls to it by reason of Part 17 of the CTA; or

 

(c) a company not so resident in the United Kingdom which carries on a trade in the United Kingdom through a permanent establishment and which brings into account interest payable in respect of that advance in computing the chargeable profits (within the meaning of section 19 of the CTA) of that company.] 4

10. [The Increase Lender hereby confirms that it is a Treaty Lender that holds a passport under the HMRC DT Treaty Passport scheme, that its reference number is [    ], that it is tax resident in [    ], and notifies the Company that the Borrower must make an application to HMRC under form DTTP2 within 30 days of the Relevant Increase Date.

11. Each Finance Document may be executed in any number of counterparts, and by each party on separate counterparts. Each counterpart is an original, but all counterparts shall together constitute one and the same instrument. Delivery of a counterpart of a Finance Document by e-mail attachment or telecopy shall be an effective mode of delivery.

12. This Increase Confirmation and any non contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with this Increase Confirmation are governed by English law.

This Increase Confirmation has been entered into on the date stated at the beginning of this Increase Confirmation.

 

4   Include if Increase Lender comes within paragraph (i)(B) of the definition of Qualifying Lender in clause 12.1.

 

Page 97


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

THE SCHEDULE

Relevant Commitment/rights and obligations to be assumed by the Increase Lender

[ insert relevant details ]

[ Facility office address, fax number and attention details for notices and account details for payments ]

[Increase Lender]

By:

This Increase Confirmation is accepted as an Increase Confirmation for the purposes of the Agreement by the Facility Agent and the Increase Date is confirmed as [ ].

[FACILITY AGENT]

By:

 

Page 98


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SCHEDULE 9

TIMETABLE

 

Delivery of a duly completed Utilisation Request (Clause 5.1 ( Giving of Requests ) or Selection Notice (Clause 9.1 ( Selection of Terms ))    Noon three Business Days before the Utilisation Date
Facility Agent notifies the Lenders of the Loan in accordance with Clause 5.4 ( Advance of Loan ).   

Close of business in London on the later of:

 

(a)    the date which is three Business Days before the Utilisation Date; and

 

(b)    the date on which the Facility Agent receives the Request.

LIBOR is fixed    Rate Fixing Day as of 11:00 a.m.
A Reference Bank fails to supply a quotation under Clause 10.1 ( Failure of a Reference Bank to supply a rate )    Noon on the Rate Fixing Day

 

Page 99


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

SIGNATORIES

 

The Company
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC
  /s/ Julie Brown     /s/ Susan Swabey
By:   JULIE BROWN   By:   SUSAN MARGARET SWABEY
Title:   Director   Title:   Company Secretary


Facility Agreement

CONFORMED COPY

 

The Mandated Lead Arrangers
BARCLAYS BANK PLC
  /s/ John Hogarth
By:   JOHN HOGARTH
Title:   Director
J.P. MORGAN LIMITED
  /s/ Jonathan Richards
By:   JONATHAN RICHARDS
Title:   Executive Director
The Original Lenders
BARCLAYS BANK PLC
  /s/ John Hogarth
By:   JOHN HOGARTH
Title:   Director
JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.
  /s/ Jonathan Richards
By:   JONATHAN RICHARDS
Title:   Executive Director
The Underwriters
BARCLAYS BANK PLC
  /s/ John Hogarth
By:   JOHN HOGARTH
Title:   Director
JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.
  /s/ Jonathan Richards
By:   JONATHAN RICHARDS
Title:   Executive Director
The Facility Agent
J.P. MORGAN EUROPE LIMITED
  /s/ Jonathan Richards
By:   JONATHAN RICHARDS
Title:   Executive Director

Exhibit 4(a)(vi)

EXECUTION VERSION

AGREEMENT AND PLAN OF MERGER

dated as of

February 2, 2014

among

ARTHROCARE CORPORATION,

SMITH & NEPHEW, INC.

ROSEBUD ACQUISITION CORPORATION

and

SMITH & NEPHEW PLC


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

          P AGE  
ARTICLE 1   
D EFINITIONS   

Section 1.01.

  

Definitions

     1   

Section 1.02.

  

Other Definitional and Interpretative Provisions

     12   
ARTICLE 2   
T HE M ERGER   

Section 2.01.

  

The Merger

     13   

Section 2.02.

  

Conversion of Shares

     13   

Section 2.03.

  

Surrender and Payment

     14   

Section 2.04.

  

Dissenting Shares

     16   

Section 2.05.

  

Equity Awards

     17   

Section 2.06.

  

Adjustments

     18   

Section 2.07.

  

Withholding Rights

     19   

Section 2.08.

  

Lost Certificates

     19   
ARTICLE 3   
T HE S URVIVING C ORPORATION   

Section 3.01.

  

Certificate of Incorporation

     19   

Section 3.02.

  

Bylaws

     19   

Section 3.03.

  

Directors and Officers

     20   
ARTICLE 4   
R EPRESENTATIONS AND W ARRANTIES OF THE C OMPANY   

Section 4.01.

  

Corporate Existence and Power

     20   

Section 4.02.

  

Corporate Authorization

     20   

Section 4.03.

  

Governmental Authorization

     21   

Section 4.04.

  

Non-contravention

     21   

Section 4.05.

  

Capitalization

     22   

Section 4.06.

  

Subsidiaries

     23   

Section 4.07.

  

SEC Filings and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act

     24   

Section 4.08.

  

Financial Statements

     25   

Section 4.09.

  

Disclosure Documents

     26   

Section 4.10.

  

Absence of Certain Changes

     26   

Section 4.11.

  

No Undisclosed Material Liabilities

     26   

Section 4.12.

  

Compliance with Applicable Laws

     27   

Section 4.13.

  

Litigation

     31   

 

i


Section 4.14.    Properties      31   
Section 4.15.    Intellectual Property      32   
Section 4.16.    Taxes      35   
Section 4.17.    Employees and Employee Benefit Plans      36   
Section 4.18.    Environmental Matters      40   
Section 4.19.    Material Contracts      40   
Section 4.20.    Insurance      43   
Section 4.21.    Finders’ Fees      44   
Section 4.22 .    Opinion of Financial Advisor      44   
Section 4.23.    Antitakeover Statutes      44   
ARTICLE 5   
R EPRESENTATIONS AND W ARRANTIES OF P ARENT   
Section 5.01.    Corporate Existence and Power      44   
Section 5.02.    Corporate Authorization      45   
Section 5.03.    Governmental Authorization      45   
Section 5.04.    Non-contravention      45   
Section 5.05.    Disclosure Documents      46   
Section 5.06.    Finders’ Fees      46   
Section 5.07.    Financing      46   
Section 5.08.    No Interested Stockholder      46   
Section 5.09.    Ownership of Merger Subsidiary; No Prior Activities      47   
Section 5.10.    Litigation      47   
Section 5.11.    Management Agreements      47   
Section 5.12.    Disclaimer of Other Representations and Warranties      47   
ARTICLE 6   
C OVENANTS OF THE C OMPANY   
Section 6.01.    Conduct of the Company      48   
Section 6.02.    Company Stockholder Meeting; Company Proxy Statement      52   
Section 6.03.    No Solicitation; Other Offers      53   
Section 6.04.    Access to Information      57   
Section 6.05.    Compensation Arrangements      58   
Section 6.06.    Certain Litigation      58   
Section 6.07.    Company Series A Preferred Stock      58   
ARTICLE 7   
C OVENANTS OF P ARENT   
Section 7.01.    Obligations of Merger Subsidiary      58   
Section 7.02.    Director and Officer Liability      59   
Section 7.03.    Employee Matters      60   

 

ii


ARTICLE 8   
C OVENANTS OF P ARENT AND THE C OMPANY   
Section 8.01.    Reasonable Best Efforts      63   
Section 8.02.    Certain Filings      68   
Section 8.03.    Public Announcements      69   
Section 8.04.    Further Assurances      69   
Section 8.05.    Notices of Certain Events      69   
Section 8.06.    De-listing; Deregistration      70   
Section 8.07.    Takeover Statutes      70   
ARTICLE 9   
C ONDITIONS TO THE M ERGER   
Section 9.01.    Conditions to the Obligations of Each Party      70   
Section 9.02.    Conditions to the Obligations of Parent and Merger Subsidiary      71   
Section 9.03.    Conditions to the Obligations of the Company      72   
ARTICLE 10   
T ERMINATION   
Section 10.01.    Termination      73   
Section 10.02.    Effect of Termination      75   
ARTICLE 11   
M ISCELLANEOUS   
Section 11.01.    Notices      75   
Section 11.02.    Survival of Representations and Warranties      77   
Section 11.03.    Amendments and Waivers      77   
Section 11.04.    Expenses      78   
Section 11.05.    Disclosure Schedule and SEC Document References      79   
Section 11.06.    Binding Effect; Benefit; Assignment      80   
Section 11.07.    Governing Law      80   
Section 11.08.    Jurisdiction      80   
Section 11.09.    WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL      81   
Section 11.10.    Counterparts; Effectiveness      81   
Section 11.11.    Entire Agreement      81   
Section 11.12.    Severability      81   
Section 11.13.    Guarantee      81   
Section 11.14.    Specific Performance      82   

 

iii


AGREEMENT AND PLAN OF MERGER

AGREEMENT AND PLAN OF MERGER (this “ Agreement ”) dated as of February 2, 2014, among ArthroCare Corporation, a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), Smith & Nephew, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“ Parent ”), and Rosebud Acquisition Corporation, a Delaware corporation and a wholly owned subsidiary of Parent (“ Merger Subsidiary ”), and, solely for purposes of Section 8.01, Section 11.04(b) and Section 11.13, Smith & Nephew plc, an English public limited company (“Parent Holdco”).

W I T N E S S E T H :

WHEREAS, the respective Boards of Directors of the Company, Parent and Merger Subsidiary have approved this Agreement, and the respective Boards of Directors of the Company and Merger Subsidiary deemed it advisable that the respective stockholders of the Company and Merger Subsidiary approve and adopt this Agreement pursuant to which, among other things, Parent would acquire the Company by means of a merger of Merger Subsidiary with and into the Company on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Agreement;

WHEREAS, Parent has required, as a condition and inducement to its willingness to enter into this Agreement, that the Persons listed on Section 1.01(a)(i) of the Parent Disclosure Schedule each simultaneously herewith enter into a voting agreement (the “ Voting Agreements ”) dated as of the date hereof, providing that each such Person shall vote in favor of and support the Merger and the other transactions contemplated hereby; and

WHEREAS, prior to the Effective Time, the Company shall cause each outstanding share of Company Series A Preferred Stock to be converted into shares of Company Common Stock in accordance with the terms of the Certificate of Designations and, as of the Effective Time, no shares of Company Series A Preferred Stock shall be issued or outstanding.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and the representations, warranties, covenants and agreements contained herein, the parties hereto agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1

D EFINITIONS

Section 1.01. Definitions . (a) As used herein, the following terms have the following meanings:

1933 Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933.


1934 Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Acquisition Proposal ” means, other than the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, any Third Party offer, proposal or inquiry relating to, or any Third Party indication of interest in, (i) any acquisition or purchase, direct or indirect, of 15% or more of the consolidated assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries or 15% or more of any class of equity or voting securities of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries whose assets, individually or in the aggregate, constitute 15% or more of the consolidated assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries, (ii) any tender offer (including a self-tender offer) or exchange offer that, if consummated, would result in such Third Party beneficially owning 15% or more of any class of equity or voting securities of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries whose assets, individually or in the aggregate, constitute 15% or more of the consolidated assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries or (iii) a merger, consolidation, share exchange, business combination, sale of substantially all the assets, reorganization, recapitalization, liquidation, dissolution or other similar transaction involving the Company or any of its Subsidiaries whose assets, individually or in the aggregate, constitute 15% or more of the consolidated assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries.

Affiliate ” means, with respect to any Person, any other Person directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by or under common control with such Person.

Anti-Corruption Laws ” means (i) the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act of 1977 and (ii) any similar Applicable Law of any other jurisdiction.

Antitrust Laws ” means the HSR Act and any other Applicable Law that is designed or intended to prohibit, restrict or regulate actions having the purpose or effect of monopolization or restraint of trade or lessening of competition through merger or acquisition.

Applicable Law ” means, with respect to any Person, any transnational, domestic or foreign federal, state or local law (statutory, common or otherwise), constitution, treaty, convention, ordinance, code, rule, regulation, order, injunction, judgment, decree, ruling or other similar requirement enacted, adopted, promulgated or applied by a Governmental Authority (including Health Care Laws) that is binding upon or applicable to such Person, as amended unless expressly specified otherwise.

Business Day ” means a day, other than Saturday, Sunday or any other day on which commercial banks in New York, New York or the City of London are authorized or required by Applicable Law to close.

Certificate of Designations ” means the certificate of designations of the Company Series A Preferred Stock.

 

2


CMS ” means Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986.

Collective Bargaining Agreement ” means any written or oral agreement, memorandum of understanding or other contractual obligation between the Company or any of its Subsidiaries and any labor organization or other authorized employee representative representing Service Providers.

Company 10-K ” means the Company’s annual report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012.

Company Balance Sheet ” means the consolidated balance sheet of the Company and its Subsidiaries as of September 30, 2013 and the footnotes thereto set forth in the Company’s quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the quarterly period then ended.

Company Balance Sheet Date ” means September 30, 2013.

Company Common Stock ” means the common stock, $0.001 par value, of the Company.

Company Disclosure Schedule ” means the disclosure schedule dated the date hereof regarding this Agreement that has been provided by the Company to Parent and Merger Subsidiary.

Company Material Adverse Effect ” means a material adverse effect on (i) the financial condition, business or results of operations of the Company and its Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, excluding any effect resulting from or arising out of (A) changes in the financial or securities markets or general economic or political conditions in the United States or elsewhere in the world, (B) changes in GAAP or in Applicable Law, or any interpretation thereof, (C) changes or conditions generally affecting the industry in which the Company and its Subsidiaries operate, (D) acts of war, sabotage or terrorism or any escalation or worsening thereof or any natural disasters, (E) the announcement, pendency or consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement (it being understood that this clause (E) shall not apply to any representation or warranty of the Company in Section 4.03, Section 4.04, Section 4.12(b), Section 4.12(e), Section 4.15(c)(ii), Section 4.17(g) or Section 4.17(j) that is intended to address the consequences of the execution, delivery or performance of this Agreement or the consummation of the transactions contemplated hereby), (F) any failure, in and of itself, by the Company and its Subsidiaries to meet any internal or third party budgets, projections, forecasts or predictions of financial performance for any period, (G) any change, in and of itself, in the trading price or trading volume of Company Common Stock on the NASDAQ, (H) events relating to the

 

3


Products, including Product candidates and Products in development, of any Person (other than, in each case, Products of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries) or (I) the pending actions, suits, investigations or proceedings involving the Company’s former chief executive officer and chief financial officer and any other former officers of the Company related to the Company’s previously publicly disclosed revenue restatements (but only to the extent publicly disclosed by the Company in filings with the SEC prior to the date hereof), including any obligation of the Company to indemnify such former offers and advance expenses in connection with such actions; provided , however , that the changes, events, circumstances or occurrences set forth in clauses (A), (B), (C) and (D) above may be taken into account in determining whether a “Company Material Adverse Effect” has occurred or would reasonably be expected to occur to the extent that such changes, events, circumstances or occurrences have a disproportionate impact on the Company and its Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, relative to the other participants in the principal industry in which the Company and its Subsidiaries conduct their businesses, and then only to the extent of such disproportionality; provided , further , that the underlying causes of any events set forth in clauses (F) and (G) that are not otherwise excluded from the definition of a “Company Material Adverse Effect” may be taken into account in determining whether a “Company Material Adverse Effect” has occurred or would reasonably be expected to occur; or (ii) the Company’s ability to consummate the Merger or the other transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

Company Performance Share ” means an award granted pursuant to any Equity Plan of performances shares with respect to shares of Company Common Stock.

Company Restricted Stock Unit ” means an award granted pursuant to any Equity Plan of restricted stock units, including any such award that may be settled in cash, with respect to shares of Company Common Stock.

Company Series A Preferred Stock ” means the Series A 3.00% Convertible Preferred Stock, $0.001 par value, of the Company.

Company Stock Appreciation Right ” means any stock appreciation right with respect to shares of Company Common Stock, including any such award that may be settled in cash, granted pursuant to any Equity Plan.

Company Stock Option ” means any option to purchase shares of Company Common Stock, including any such option that may be settled in cash, granted pursuant to any Equity Plan.

Company Transition Incentive Plan ” means the Transition Incentive Plan set forth on Section 4.17(a) of the Company Disclosure Schedule.

 

4


Contract ” or “ contract ” means any written contract, agreement, obligation, commitment, arrangement, understanding, instrument, permit, lease or license.

Delaware Law ” means the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware.

Employee Plan ” means any (i) “employee benefit plan” as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA, (ii) compensation, employment, consulting, severance, termination protection, change in control, transaction bonus, retention or similar plan, agreement, arrangement, program or policy or (iii) other plan, agreement, arrangement, program or policy providing for compensation, bonuses, profit-sharing, equity or equity-based compensation or other forms of incentive or deferred compensation, vacation benefits, insurance (including any self-insured arrangement), medical, dental, vision, prescription or fringe benefits, life insurance, relocation or expatriate benefits, perquisites, disability or sick leave benefits, employee assistance program, supplemental unemployment benefits or post-employment or retirement benefits (including compensation, pension, health, medical or insurance benefits), in each case whether or not written (x) that is sponsored, maintained, administered, contributed to or entered into by the Company or any of its Affiliates for the current or future benefit of any current or former Service Provider or (y) for which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries has any direct or indirect liability. For the avoidance of doubt, a Collective Bargaining Agreement shall constitute an agreement for purposes of clauses (ii) and (iii).

Environmental Laws ” means any Applicable Law or any Contract with a Governmental Authority relating to the environment, health and safety or any pollutant, contaminant, chemical or toxic, radioactive, ignitable, corrosive, reactive or otherwise hazardous substance, waste or material.

Environmental Permits ” means all permits, licenses, consents, variances, orders, exemptions, franchises, certificates, approvals and other similar authorizations of Governmental Authorities required by Environmental Laws and affecting, or relating to, the Company or any of its Subsidiaries.

Equity Plan ” means any equity compensation plan or arrangement of the Company.

ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974.

ERISA Affiliate ” of any entity means any other entity that, together with such entity, would be treated as a single employer under Section 414 of the Code.

FDA ” means the United States Food and Drug Administration.

 

5


Federal Health Care Program ” means each of the health care programs defined at 42 U.S.C. § 1320a-7b(f).

GAAP ” means generally accepted accounting principles in the United States.

Governmental Authority ” means any transnational, domestic or foreign federal, state or local governmental, regulatory or administrative authority, department, court, agency, commission or official, including any political subdivision thereof, or any non-governmental self-regulatory agency, commission or authority, in each case of competent jurisdiction and with authority to act with respect to the matter in question.

Hazardous Substance ” means any substance defined as or regulated as a “pollutant,” a “contaminant”, a “hazardous substance,” a “hazardous material,” or a “toxic chemical” under any Environmental Law or any substance, waste or material that is or has the characteristics of being toxic, hazardous, radioactive, ignitable, corrosive or reactive, including any substance, waste or material regulated under any Environmental Law.

Health Care Laws ” means any and all Applicable Laws relating to the regulation of the health care and medical device industry or to payment for items or services rendered, provided, dispensed or furnished by health care providers or suppliers, including, without limitation, the following laws: (i) the federal Medicare and Medicaid statutes (which include, but are not limited to, 42 U.S.C. §§ 1320a-7, 1320a-7a, 1320a-7b and 1320a-7h), the federal TRICARE statute, the Federal False Claims Act (31 U.S.C. § 3729-33), 18 U.S.C. §§ 286 and, with respect to each of the above, any ordinance, rule, regulation or order issued thereunder or with respect thereto; (ii) all international, multinational, foreign, federal or state laws or regulations applicable to medical device manufacture, registration, approval, importation, sale, use, distribution, dispensing, marketing and security, (iii) any prohibition on the defrauding of or making any false claim, false statement or misrepresentation of material facts to any third-party payer (including commercial and private payers) or any Governmental Authority that administers a Federal Health Care Program or state health care program (including, but not limited to, Medicare, Medicaid and state Medicaid Waiver Programs and TRICARE); (iv) the licensure, certification or registration requirements of health care facilities, services, equipment or health care providers, suppliers of device manufacturers; (v) all state anti-kickback and illegal remuneration laws; (vi) all federal or state laws pertaining to patient confidentiality and privacy and the confidentiality, privacy or security of Protected Health Information or Personal Data, including, but not limited to, the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 as amended by the Health Information Technology for Economic and Clinical Health Act of 2009

 

6


and (vii) The Federal Food Drug, and Cosmetic Act, 21 U.S.C. § 321 et seq., and its implementing regulations.

HSR Act ” means the Hart-Scott-Rodino Antitrust Improvements Act of 1976.

Intellectual Property Rights ” means any and all intellectual property rights or similar proprietary rights throughout the world, including all (i) national and multinational statutory invention registrations, patents and patent applications of any type issued or applied for in any jurisdiction, including all provisionals, nonprovisionals, divisions, continuations, continuations-in-part, reissues, extensions, supplementary protection certificates, reexaminations and the equivalents of any of the foregoing in any jurisdiction, and all inventions disclosed in each such registration, patent or patent application (collectively “ Patents ”), (ii) trademarks, service marks, trade dress, logos, brand names, certification marks, domain names, trade names, corporate names and other indications of origin, whether or not registered, in any jurisdiction, and all registrations and applications for registration of the foregoing in any jurisdiction, and all goodwill associated with the foregoing (collectively, “ Trademarks ”), (iii) copyrights (whether or not registered) and registrations and applications for registration thereof in any jurisdiction, including all derivative works, moral rights, renewals, extensions, reversions or restorations associated with such copyrights, regardless of the medium of fixation or means of expression (collectively, “ Copyrights ”), (iv) trade secrets, know-how, information, data, specifications, processes, methods, knowledge, experience, formulae, skills, techniques, schematics, drawings, blue prints, utility models, designs, technology, software, inventions, discoveries, ideas and improvements, including manufacturing information and processes, assays, engineering and other manuals and drawings, standard operating procedures, flow diagrams, regulatory, chemical, pharmacological, toxicological, pharmaceutical, physical and analytical, safety, quality assurance, quality control and clinical data, technical information, research records and similar data and information, (v) database rights, industrial designs, industrial property rights, publicity rights and privacy rights and (vi) the right to assert, claim or sue and collect damages for the past, present or future infringement, misappropriation or other violation of any of the foregoing.

International Plan ” means any Employee Plan that is not a US Plan.

IRS ” means the Internal Revenue Service.

IT Assets ” means computers, computer software, firmware, middleware, servers, workstations, routers, hubs, switches, data communications lines and all other information technology equipment, and all associated documentation owned

 

7


by the Company or its Subsidiaries or licensed or leased by the Company or its Subsidiaries pursuant to written agreement (excluding any public networks).

Key Employee ” means David Fitzgerald, Todd Newton and each employee of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries who is party to a continuity agreement.

knowledge of the Company ” or “ Company’s knowledge ” means the actual knowledge of the individuals listed in Section 1.01(a) of the Company Disclosure Schedule after reasonable inquiry.

Licensed Intellectual Property ” means any and all Intellectual Property Rights owned by a Third Party and licensed or sublicensed to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or for which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries has obtained a covenant not to be sued.

Lien ” means, with respect to any property or asset, any mortgage, lien, pledge, charge, security interest or encumbrance of any kind in respect of such property or asset. For purposes of this Agreement, a Person shall be deemed to own subject to a Lien any property or asset that it has acquired or holds subject to the interest of a vendor or lessor under any conditional sale agreement, capital lease or other title retention agreement relating to such property or asset.

NASDAQ ” means the NASDAQ Stock Market LLC.

OIG ” means the United States Department of Health and Human Services Office of the Inspector General.

Owned Intellectual Property Rights ” means any and all Intellectual Property Rights owned or purported to be owned by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries.

Parent Disclosure Schedule ” means the disclosure schedule dated the date hereof regarding this Agreement that has been provided by Parent to the Company.

Parent Material Adverse Effect ” means a material adverse effect on Parent’s or Merger Subsidiary’s ability to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

Permitted Liens ” means any (i) mechanics Liens and similar Liens for labor, materials or supplies provided with respect to real property incurred in the ordinary course of business for amounts which are not due and payable or are being contested in good faith, (ii) Liens that do not materially detract from the value of the specific asset affected or the present use of such asset; (iii) Liens

 

8


disclosed on the Company Balance Sheet, (iv) Liens arising by virtue of the transactions contemplated under this Agreement, (v) Liens for Taxes not yet due and payable (or those Taxes that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings), (vi) zoning, building codes and other land use Applicable Laws regulating the use or occupancy of real property or the activities conducted thereon which are imposed by any Governmental Authority having jurisdiction over such real property, (vii) easements, covenants, conditions, restrictions, encroachments and other similar matters affecting title to real property which do not materially impair the use of such real property in the operation of the business conducted thereon, (viii) Liens with respect to leased equipment and (ix) landlord’s Liens.

Person ” means an individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, association, trust or other entity or organization, including a government or political subdivision or an agency or instrumentality thereof.

Personal Data ” means a natural person’s name, street address, telephone number, e-mail address, photograph, social security number, driver’s license number, passport number, or customer or account number, or any other piece of information that alone or together with other information allows the identification of a natural person.

Products ” with respect to any Person means medical device products being researched, developed, manufactured, supplied, promoted, tested, distributed, marketed, licensed, commercialized or sold by such Person.

Protected Health Information ” means individually identifiable health information as defined at 45 C.F.R. §160.103.

Restricted Share ” means a share of Common Stock that was granted under any Equity Plan and that as of immediately prior to the Effective Time is subject to forfeiture restrictions.

Sarbanes-Oxley Act ” means the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

SEC ” means the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Service Provider ” means any director, officer, employee or individual independent contractor of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries.

Subsidiary ” means, with respect to any Person, any entity of which securities or other ownership interests having ordinary voting power to elect a majority of the board of directors or other persons performing similar functions are at any time directly or indirectly owned by such Person.

 

9


Tax ” means any tax, governmental fee or other like assessment or charge in the nature of a tax (including withholding on amounts paid to or by any Person), together with any interest, penalty, addition to tax or additional amount imposed by any Governmental Authority (a “ Taxing Authority ”) responsible for the imposition of any such tax (domestic or foreign).

Tax Grant ” means any Tax exemption, Tax holiday or reduced Tax rate granted by a Costa Rican Taxing Authority with respect to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries that is not generally available to Persons without specific application therefor.

Tax Return ” means any report, filing, election or return (including any information return) required to be filed with any Taxing Authority with respect to Taxes, including any schedules, attachments or amendments thereto.

Tax Sharing Agreements ” means all existing agreements or arrangements (whether or not written) binding the Company or any of its Subsidiaries that provide for the allocation, apportionment, sharing or assignment of any Tax liability or benefit, or the transfer or assignment of income, revenues, receipts, or gains for the purpose of determining any Person’s Tax liability and excluding any indemnification agreement or arrangement pertaining to the sale or lease of assets or subsidiaries or contained in credit agreements or other commercial agreements the primary purposes of which do not relate to Taxes.

Third Party ” means any Person, including as defined in Section 13(d) of the 1934 Act, other than Parent or any of its Affiliates.

Trade Secrets ” means trade secrets and confidential information and rights in any jurisdiction to limit the use or disclosure thereof by any Person.

US Plan ” means any Employee Plan that covers Service Providers located primarily within the United States.

WARN ” means the Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act and any comparable foreign, state or local law.

(b) Each of the following terms is defined in the Section set forth opposite such term:

 

Term

  

Section

Adverse Recommendation Change    6.03(a)
Agreed Actions    8.01(a)
Agreement    Preamble
Board of Directors    4.02(b)
Burdensome Condition    8.01(a)

 

10


Term

   Section
Certificates    2.03(a)
Closing    2.01(b)
Company    Preamble
Company Board Recommendation    4.02(b)
Company Filings    4.07(a)
Company Permits    4.12(b)
Company Proxy Statement    4.09
Company Real Property    4.14(c)
Company SEC Documents    Article 4
Company Securities    4.05(b)
Company Submissions    4.12(g)(i)
Company Subsidiary Securities    4.06(b)
Company Stockholder Approval    4.02(a)
Company Stockholder Meeting    6.02(a)
Confidentiality Agreement    6.03(b)(i)
Covered Employee    7.03(a)
Covered Products    8.01(a)
D&O Insurance    7.02(c)
Effective Time    2.01(c)
e-mail    11.01
End Date    10.01(b)(i)
ESPP    7.03(f)
Excluded Products    8.01(a)
Government Funded IP    4.15(i)
Guaranteed Obligations    11.13(a)
HC Company Permits    4.12(e)
Indemnified Person    7.02(a)
Intervening Event    6.03(b)(ii)
Lease    4.14(c)
Leased Real Property    4.14(c)
Material Contract    4.19(b)
Merger    2.01(a)
Merger Consideration    2.02(a)
Merger Subsidiary    Preamble
Non-Employee Holder    2.05(d)
Owned Real Property    4.14(b)
Parent    Preamble
Parent Holdco    Preamble
Parent Plan    7.03(c)
Paying Agent    2.03(a)
Payment Fund    2.03(a)
Registered IP    4.15(e)
Representatives    6.03(a)

 

11


Term

   Section
Sanctions    4.12(d)
Superior Proposal    6.03(e)
Surviving Corporation    2.01(a)
Tail Period    7.02(c)
Termination Fee    11.04(b)(i)
Uncertificated Shares    2.03(a)

Section 1.02. Other Definitional and Interpretative Provisions . The words “hereof,” “herein” and “hereunder” and words of like import used in this Agreement shall refer to this Agreement as a whole and not to any particular provision of this Agreement. The table of contents and captions herein are included for convenience of reference only and shall be ignored in the construction or interpretation hereof. References to Articles, Sections, Exhibits and Schedules are to Articles, Sections, Exhibits and Schedules of this Agreement unless otherwise specified. All Exhibits and Schedules annexed hereto or referred to herein, including the Company Disclosure Schedule and the Parent Disclosure Schedule, are hereby incorporated in and made a part of this Agreement as if set forth in full herein. Any capitalized terms used in any Exhibit or Schedule but not otherwise defined therein, shall have the meaning as defined in this Agreement. Any singular term in this Agreement shall be deemed to include the plural, and any plural term the singular. Whenever the words “include,” “includes” or “including” are used in this Agreement, they shall be deemed to be followed by the words “without limitation,” whether or not they are in fact followed by those words or words of like import. “Writing,” “written” and comparable terms refer to printing, typing and other means of reproducing words (including electronic media) in a visible form. References to any statute shall be deemed to refer to such statute as amended from time to time and to any rules, regulations or interpretations promulgated thereunder. References to any Contract are to such Contract as amended, modified or supplemented from time to time in accordance with the terms hereof and thereof, but only to the extent, with respect to any Contract listed on any Schedules hereto, that such amendments, modifications or supplements have been listed in the appropriate schedule or provided to Parent prior to the date hereof. References to any Person include the successors and permitted assigns of that Person. References from or through any date mean, unless otherwise specified, from and including or through and including, respectively. References to “law,” “laws” or to a particular statute or law shall be deemed also to include any Applicable Law.

 

12


ARTICLE 2

T HE M ERGER

Section 2.01. The Merger . (a) At the Effective Time, Merger Subsidiary shall be merged (the “ Merger ”) with and into the Company in accordance with Delaware Law, whereupon the separate existence of Merger Subsidiary shall cease, and the Company shall be the surviving corporation (the “ Surviving Corporation ”).

(b) Subject to the provisions of Article 9, the closing of the Merger (the “ Closing ”) shall take place in New York City at the offices of Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP, 450 Lexington Avenue, New York, New York, 10017 as soon as possible, but in any event no later than five Business Days after the date the conditions set forth in Article 9 (other than conditions that by their nature are to be satisfied at the Closing, but subject to the satisfaction or, to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, waiver of such conditions by the party or parties entitled to the benefit thereof at the Closing) have been satisfied or, to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, waived by the party or parties entitled to the benefit of such conditions, or at such other place, at such other time or on such other date as Parent and the Company may mutually agree.

(c) At the Closing, the Company and Merger Subsidiary shall file a certificate of merger with the Delaware Secretary of State and make all other filings or recordings required by Delaware Law in connection with the Merger. The Merger shall become effective at such time (the “ Effective Time ”) as the certificate of merger is duly filed with the Delaware Secretary of State (or at such later time as may be agreed by Parent and the Company and specified in the certificate of merger).

(d) From and after the Effective Time, the Surviving Corporation shall possess all the rights, powers, privileges and franchises and be subject to all of the obligations, liabilities, restrictions and disabilities of the Company and Merger Subsidiary, all as provided under Delaware Law.

Section 2.02. Conversion of Shares . At the Effective Time:

(a) Except as otherwise provided in Section 2.02(b), Section 2.02(c) or Section 2.04, each share of Company Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to the Effective Time shall be converted into the right to receive $48.25 in cash, without interest (such per share of Company Common Stock amount, the “ Merger Consideration ”). As of the Effective Time, all such shares of Company Common Stock shall no longer be outstanding and shall automatically be canceled and retired and shall cease to exist, and shall thereafter represent only

 

13


the right to receive the Merger Consideration to be paid in accordance with Section 2.03, without interest.

(b) Each share of Company Common Stock held by the Company as treasury stock or owned by Parent or Merger Subsidiary or any other direct or indirect wholly-owned Subsidiary of Parent immediately prior to the Effective Time (other than shares held for the account of clients, customers or other Persons) shall be canceled, and no payment shall be made with respect thereto.

(c) Each share of Company Common Stock held by any Subsidiary of the Company immediately prior to the Effective Time shall be converted into such number of shares of stock of the Surviving Corporation such that each such Subsidiary owns the same percentage of the outstanding capital stock of the Surviving Corporation immediately following the Effective Time as such Subsidiary owned in the Company immediately prior to the Effective Time.

(d) Each share of common stock of Merger Subsidiary outstanding immediately prior to the Effective Time shall be converted into and become one share of common stock of the Surviving Corporation with the same rights, powers and privileges as the shares so converted, and, except as provided in Section 2.02(c), shall constitute the only outstanding shares of capital stock of the Surviving Corporation.

Section 2.03. Surrender and Payment . (a) Prior to the Effective Time, Parent shall appoint a bank or trust company reasonably acceptable to the Company (the “ Paying Agent ”) for the purpose of exchanging for the Merger Consideration (or, in the case of Company Stock Options, an amount based thereon) (i) certificates representing shares of Company Common Stock (the “ Certificates ”), (ii) subject to Section 2.05, uncertificated shares of Company Common Stock (the “ Uncertificated Shares ”) or (iii) Company Stock Options, or Company Restricted Stock Units held by Non-Employee Holders. At or prior to the Effective Time, Parent shall deposit, or cause to be deposited, with the Paying Agent, in trust for the benefit of the holders of shares of Company Common Stock, cash in U.S. dollars in an amount sufficient to pay the aggregate amount of the Merger Consideration (or, in the case of Company Stock Options, the aggregate amount based thereon) to be paid in respect of the Certificates, the Uncertificated Shares, and Company Stock Options, Company Stock Appreciation Rights, Company Performance Shares or Company Restricted Stock Units held by Non-Employee Holders (any funds deposited with the Paying Agent, the “ Payment Fund ”). The Payment Fund shall not be used for any other purpose. Promptly after the Effective Time, Parent shall send, or shall cause the Paying Agent to send, to each holder of shares of Company Common Stock or each Non-Employee Holder who holds Company Stock Options, Company Stock Appreciation Rights, Company Performance Shares or Company Restricted Stock

 

14


Units at the Effective Time a letter of transmittal and instructions in customary form (which shall specify that the delivery shall be effected, and risk of loss and title shall pass, only upon proper delivery of the Certificates or transfer of the Uncertificated Shares to the Paying Agent and which shall include customary provisions with respect to delivery of an “agent’s message” with respect to shares of Company Common Stock held in book-entry form) for use in such exchange.

(b) Each holder of shares of Company Common Stock that have been converted into the right to receive the Merger Consideration shall be entitled to receive, upon (i) surrender to the Paying Agent of a Certificate, together with a properly completed letter of transmittal, or (ii) receipt of an “agent’s message” by the Paying Agent (or such other evidence, if any, of transfer as the Paying Agent may reasonably request) in the case of a book-entry transfer of Uncertificated Shares, the Merger Consideration in respect of the Company Common Stock represented by a Certificate or Uncertificated Share. Until so surrendered or transferred, as the case may be, each such Certificate or Uncertificated Share shall represent after the Effective Time for all purposes only the right to receive such Merger Consideration. Upon such surrender, Parent shall pay, or cause the Paying Agent to pay from the Payment Fund, the Merger Consideration payable to each such holder pursuant to this Article 2. Each Non-Employee Holder of Company Stock Options that have been converted into the right to receive a cash amount in accordance with Section 2.05 shall be entitled to receive such cash amount upon delivery of a properly completed letter of transmittal.

(c) If any portion of the Merger Consideration is to be paid to a Person other than the Person in whose name the surrendered Certificate or the transferred Uncertificated Share is registered, it shall be a condition to such payment that (i) either such Certificate shall be properly endorsed or shall otherwise be in proper form for transfer or such Uncertificated Share shall be properly transferred and (ii) the Person requesting such payment shall pay to the Paying Agent any transfer or other Taxes required as a result of such payment to a Person other than the registered holder of such Certificate or Uncertificated Share or establish to the satisfaction of the Paying Agent that such Tax has been paid or is not payable.

(d) After the Effective Time, there shall be no further registration of transfers of shares of Company Common Stock. If, after the Effective Time, Certificates or Uncertificated Shares are presented to the Surviving Corporation or the Paying Agent, they shall be canceled and exchanged for the Merger Consideration provided for, and in accordance with the procedures set forth, in this Article 2.

(e) Any portion of the Merger Consideration (or, in the case of Company Stock Options, an amount based thereon) deposited with the Paying Agent pursuant to Section 2.03(a) that remains unclaimed by the holders of shares

 

15


of Company Common Stock or Non-Employee Holders twelve months after the Effective Time shall be returned to Parent, upon demand, and any such holder who has not exchanged shares of Company Common Stock or Company Stock Options for the Merger Consideration (or, in the case of Company Stock Options, an amount based thereon) in accordance with this Section 2.03 prior to that time shall thereafter look only to Parent for payment of the Merger Consideration in respect of such shares without any interest thereon. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Parent shall not be liable to any holder of shares of Company Common Stock or any Non-Employee Holder for any amounts properly paid to a public official pursuant to applicable abandoned property, escheat or similar laws. Any amounts remaining unclaimed by holders of shares of Company Stock that, pursuant to Applicable Law, would otherwise escheat to or become property of any Governmental Authority shall become, to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, the property of Parent free and clear of any claims or interest of any Person previously entitled thereto.

(f) Any portion of the Merger Consideration made available to the Paying Agent pursuant to Section 2.03(a) to pay for shares of Company Common Stock for which appraisal rights have been perfected shall be returned to Parent, upon demand.

(g) The Paying Agent shall invest any cash in the Payment Fund as directed by Parent; provided that Parent shall not direct the Paying Agent to invest any cash in the Payment Fund in any investment if such investment would, or would reasonably be expected to, prevent or delay timely payment of the Merger Consideration pursuant to this Agreement. Any interest and other income resulting from such investments shall be paid to Parent. In the event the Payment Fund shall be insufficient to pay the aggregate Merger Consideration (or, in the case of Company Stock Options, the aggregate amount based thereon) payable in connection with the Merger, Parent shall, or shall cause the Surviving Corporation to, promptly deposit additional funds with the Paying Agent in an amount which is equal to the deficiency in the amount required to make such payment.

Section 2.04. Dissenting Shares . Notwithstanding Section 2.02, shares of Company Common Stock outstanding immediately prior to the Effective Time and held by a holder who has not voted in favor of the Merger or consented thereto in writing and who has demanded appraisal for such shares in accordance with Delaware Law shall not be converted into the right to receive the Merger Consideration, unless such holder fails to perfect, withdraws or otherwise loses the right to appraisal. If, after the Effective Time, such holder fails to perfect, withdraws or otherwise loses the right to appraisal, such shares shall be treated as if they had been converted as of the Effective Time into the right to receive the Merger Consideration. The Company shall give Parent prompt notice of any demands received prior to the Effective Time by the Company for appraisal of

 

16


shares of Company Common Stock, and Parent shall have the right to direct all negotiations and proceedings with respect to all such demands. Except with the prior written consent of Parent, the Company shall not make any payment with respect to, or offer to settle or settle, any such demands.

Section 2.05. Equity Awards . (a)  Company Stock Options and Company Stock Appreciation Rights . At the Effective Time, each outstanding Company Stock Option and Company Stock Appreciation Right, whether vested or unvested, shall be cancelled and, in exchange therefor, Parent shall cause the Surviving Corporation to pay to each former holder of any such cancelled Company Stock Option or Company Stock Appreciation Right a cash amount, if any, equal to the product of (i) the Merger Consideration less any applicable exercise price per share, and (ii) the number of shares of Company Common Stock covered by such Company Stock Option or Company Stock Appreciation Right, subject to reduction for any Taxes withheld pursuant to Section 2.07. Each such holder will be given the opportunity to exercise his or her outstanding Company Stock Options or Company Stock Appreciation Rights, as applicable, immediately prior to the Effective Time. In the event that such Company Stock Options or Company Stock Appreciation Rights, as applicable, are not exercised prior to the Effective Time, such Company Stock Options or Company Stock Appreciation Rights, as applicable, will be cancelled in exchange for a cash payment or for no consideration, as applicable, in accordance with this Section 2.05.

(b) Company Restricted Stock Units . At the Effective Time, each outstanding Company Restricted Stock Unit, whether or not then exercisable or vested, shall be cancelled and, in exchange therefor, Parent shall cause the Surviving Corporation to pay to each former holder of any such cancelled Company Restricted Stock Unit a cash amount equal to the product of (i) the Merger Consideration, and (ii) the number of shares of Company Common Stock covered by such Company Restricted Stock Unit, subject to reduction for any Taxes withheld pursuant to Section 2.07.

(c) Company Performance Shares . The performance period for each Company Performance Share shall terminate as of (i) the date such performance period ends in accordance with the terms of the Company Performance Share if such date is on or earlier than the Effective Time or (ii) if such performance period is scheduled to end after the Effective Time in accordance with the terms of the Company Performance Share, the last business day of the completed fiscal quarter that immediately precedes the Effective Time, and the performance achievement for such performance period shall be determined by the Company in accordance with Article VIII of the Company’s Long Term Incentive Program. At the Effective Time, each award of Company Performance Shares shall be cancelled and, in exchange therefor, Parent shall cause the Surviving Corporation

 

17


to pay to each former holder of each award of Company Performance Shares a cash amount with respect to such award equal to the product of (i) the Merger Consideration and (ii) the greater of (A) the number of Company Performance Shares (rounded down to the nearest whole number) such holder would have been entitled to receive based on the performance determined in accordance with the preceding sentence for the performance period applicable to such award, and (B) the number of Company Performance Shares (rounded down to the nearest whole number) equal to one-third (1/3 rd ) of the target number of Company Performance Shares for such award, subject to reduction for any Taxes withheld pursuant to Section 2.07.

(d) Payments through Payroll . Any payment to which a current or former employee of the Company or any Subsidiary of the Company becomes entitled pursuant Section 2.05, Section 2.05(b) or Section 2.05(c) shall be made through the Surviving Corporation’s payroll as promptly as practicable following the Effective Time. Parent shall cause the Paying Agent to pay the payments under Section 2.05, Section 2.05(b) or Section 2.05(c) payable to holders who are not current or former employees of the Company or any Subsidiary of the Company (“ Non-Employee Holders ”) in accordance with Section 2.03. Notwithstanding the foregoing, for any Company Restricted Stock Unit or Company Performance Share that constitutes deferred compensation within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code, if making the payment as promptly as practicable following the Effective Time would subject the holder of such Company Restricted Stock Unit or Company Performance Share to additional tax under Section 409A of the Code, such payment shall be made on the date that it would be made under the applicable Equity Plan absent the application of this Section 2.05.

(e) At or prior to the Effective Time, the Company, the Board of Directors or the compensation committee of the Board of Directors, as applicable, shall adopt any resolutions and take any actions which are reasonably necessary to effectuate the provisions of this Section 2.05.

Section 2.06. Adjustments . If, during the period between the date of this Agreement and the Effective Time, any change in the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company shall occur by reason of any reclassification, recapitalization, stock split or combination, exchange or readjustment of shares, subdivision or other similar transaction, or any stock dividend thereon (excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any conversion of the Company Series A Preferred Stock and any dividend or distribution of Company Series A Preferred Stock required to be made after the date hereof with respect to the outstanding shares of Company Series A Preferred Stock pursuant to the Company Certificate of Designations, including any Make Whole Amount (as defined in the Company Certificate of Designations) thereunder) with a record date during such period, the

 

18


Merger Consideration and any other amounts payable pursuant to this Agreement shall be appropriately and proportionately adjusted to eliminate the effect of such event on the Merger Consideration or any such other amounts payable pursuant to this Agreement, and such adjustment to the Merger Consideration shall provide to the Company’s stockholders the same economic effect as contemplated by this Agreement prior to such action.

Section 2.07. Withholding Rights . Notwithstanding any provision contained herein to the contrary, each of the Paying Agent, the Company, the Surviving Corporation and Parent shall be entitled to deduct and withhold from the consideration otherwise payable to any Person pursuant to this Article 2 such amounts as it is required to deduct and withhold with respect to the making of such payment under the Code, or any applicable provision of state, local or foreign Tax law. If the Paying Agent, the Company, the Surviving Corporation or Parent, as the case may be, so withholds amounts and such amounts are paid to the appropriate Governmental Authority in accordance with Applicable Law, such amounts shall be treated for all purposes of this Agreement as having been paid to the holder of the shares of Company Common Stock in respect of whom the Paying Agent, the Company, the Surviving Corporation or Parent, as the case may be, made such deduction and withholding.

Section 2.08. Lost Certificates . If any Certificate shall have been lost, stolen or destroyed, upon the making of an affidavit of that fact by the Person claiming such Certificate to be lost, stolen or destroyed and, if required by the Surviving Corporation, the posting by such Person of a bond, in such reasonable and customary amount as the Surviving Corporation may direct, as indemnity against any claim that may be made against it with respect to such Certificate, the Paying Agent will issue, in exchange for such lost, stolen or destroyed Certificate, the Merger Consideration to be paid in respect of the shares of Company Common Stock represented by such Certificate, as contemplated by this Article 2.

ARTICLE 3

T HE S URVIVING C ORPORATION

Section 3.01. Certificate of Incorporation . The certificate of incorporation of the Company in effect at the Effective Time shall be the certificate of incorporation of the Surviving Corporation until amended in accordance with Applicable Law.

Section 3.02. Bylaws . The bylaws of Merger Subsidiary in effect at the Effective Time shall be the bylaws of the Surviving Corporation until amended in accordance with Applicable Law.

 

19


Section 3.03. Directors and Officers . From and after the Effective Time, until successors are duly elected or appointed and qualified in accordance with Applicable Law, (i) the directors of Merger Subsidiary at the Effective Time shall be the directors of the Surviving Corporation and (ii) the officers of the Company at the Effective Time shall be the officers of the Surviving Corporation.

ARTICLE 4

R EPRESENTATIONS AND W ARRANTIES OF THE C OMPANY

Subject to Section 11.05, except (x) as disclosed in (i) the Company 10-K, the Company’s quarterly reports on Form 10-Q for the quarterly periods ended March 31, 2013, June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2013, (iii) each of the Company’s current reports on Form 8-K filed with or furnished to the SEC since the date of the filing of the Company’s quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2013 and prior to the date hereof or (iv) the Company’s proxy statement relating to its 2013 annual meeting of stockholders, in each case, without giving effect to any amendment thereto filed on or after the date hereof (the documents referred to in the foregoing clauses (i) through (iv), collectively, the “ Company SEC Documents ”), or (y) as set forth in the Company Disclosure Schedule, the Company represents and warrants to Parent that:

Section 4.01. Corporate Existence and Power . The Company is a corporation duly incorporated, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of Delaware and has all corporate power and authority necessary to carry on its business as now conducted. The Company is duly qualified to do business as a foreign corporation and is in good standing in each jurisdiction where such qualification is necessary, except for those jurisdictions where failure to be so qualified or in good standing would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect. The Company has heretofore made available to Parent true and complete copies of the certificate of incorporation and bylaws of the Company as currently in effect.

Section 4.02. Corporate Authorization . (a) The execution, delivery and performance by the Company of this Agreement and the consummation by the Company of the transactions contemplated hereby are within the Company’s corporate powers and, except for the required approval of the Company’s stockholders in connection with the consummation of the Merger, have been duly authorized by all necessary corporate action on the part of the Company. Assuming the accuracy of the representations and warranties of Parent and Merger Subsidiary set forth in the first sentence of Section 5.08, the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares of Company Common Stock (following the conversion of the outstanding Company Series A Preferred Stock) (the “ Company Stockholder Approval ”) and a vote with respect to a

 

20


non-binding advisory proposal to approve the “golden parachute compensation” payable to the Company’s named executive officers in connection with the Merger, are the only votes of the holders of any of the Company’s capital stock necessary in connection with the consummation of the Merger. This Agreement has been duly executed and delivered by the Company and, assuming this Agreement is a valid and binding obligation of Parent and Merger Subsidiary, constitutes a valid and binding agreement of the Company enforceable against the Company in accordance with its terms (subject to applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, fraudulent transfer, reorganization, moratorium and other laws affecting creditors’ rights generally and general principles of equity).

(b) At a meeting duly called and held, the Company’s Board of Directors (the “ Board of Directors ”) has (i) determined that this Agreement and the transactions contemplated hereby are fair to and in the best interests of the Company’s stockholders, (ii) approved, adopted and declared advisable this Agreement and the transactions contemplated hereby, including the Merger and (iii) directed that the approval and adoption of this Agreement be submitted to a vote at a meeting of the Company’s stockholders and (iv) resolved, subject to Section 6.03(b), to recommend approval and adoption of this Agreement by the stockholders of the Company (such recommendation, the “ Company Board Recommendation ”).

Section 4.03. Governmental Authorization . The execution, delivery and performance by the Company of this Agreement and the consummation by the Company of the transactions contemplated hereby require no action by or in respect of, or filing with, any Governmental Authority other than (i) the filing of a certificate of merger with respect to the Merger with the Delaware Secretary of State and appropriate documents with the relevant authorities of other states in which the Company is qualified to do business, (ii) compliance with any applicable requirements of the HSR Act and the Antitrust Laws applicable to the Merger in the jurisdictions set forth in Section 4.03 of the Company Disclosure Schedule, (iii) compliance with any applicable requirements of the 1934 Act and any other applicable U.S. state or federal securities laws, (iv) compliance with the requirements of NASDAQ and (v) any actions or filings the absence of which would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect.

Section 4.04. Non-contravention . The execution, delivery and performance by the Company of this Agreement and the consummation of the transactions contemplated hereby do not and will not (a) assuming the Company Stockholder Approval is obtained, contravene, conflict with, or result in any violation or breach of any provision of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws of the Company, (b) assuming compliance with the matters referred to in Section 5.03 and receipt of the Company Stockholder Approval, contravene, conflict with

 

21


or result in a violation or breach of any provision of any Applicable Law, (c) assuming compliance with the matters referred to in Section 5.03, require any consent or other action by any Person under, constitute a default, or an event that, with or without notice or lapse of time or both, would constitute a default, under, or cause or permit the termination, cancellation, acceleration or other change of any right or obligation or the loss of any benefit to which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries is entitled under any provision of any Material Contract binding upon the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or (d) result in the creation or imposition of any Lien (other than Permitted Liens) on any asset of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, with only such exceptions, in the case of each of clauses (b) through (d), as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect.

Section 4.05. Capitalization . (a) The authorized capital stock of the Company consists of (x) 75,000,000 shares of Company Common Stock and (y) 5,000,000 shares of preferred stock, 100,000 shares of which have been designated as Company Series A Preferred Stock. As of January 29, 2014, there were issued and outstanding (i) 28,566,029 shares of Company Common Stock, including an aggregate of 0 Restricted Shares, (ii) 75,000 shares of Company Series A Preferred Stock (which are convertible pursuant to the Certificate of Designations into a maximum of 5,805,921 shares of Company Common Stock (including, for the avoidance of doubt, the Make-Whole Amount (as defined in the Certificate of Designations), (iii) Company Stock Options to purchase an aggregate of 1,347,462 shares of Company Common Stock, (iv) Company Stock Appreciation Rights with respect to an aggregate of 120,954 shares of Company Common Stock, (v) Company Restricted Stock Units relating to an aggregate of 502,817 shares of Company Common Stock, and (vi) Company Performance Shares relating to an aggregate of 399,994 shares of Company Common Stock based on target achievement of performance goals. The weighted average exercise price of the Company Stock Options and Company Stock Appreciation Rights that were issued and outstanding as of January 29, 2014 was $29.79. All outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company have been, and all shares that may be issued pursuant to any employee stock option or other compensation plan or arrangement will be, when issued in accordance with the respective terms thereof, duly authorized and validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable and free of preemptive rights. Section 4.05 of the Company Disclosure Schedule contains a true and complete list as of January 29, 2014 of all outstanding Restricted Shares, Company Stock Options, Company Stock Appreciation Rights, Company Restricted Stock Units and Company Performance Shares, including with respect to each such award the holder, exercise price (if applicable) and number of shares of Company Common Stock subject thereto (at target, for Company Performance Shares).

 

22


(b) There are no outstanding bonds, debentures, notes or other indebtedness of the Company having the right to vote (or convertible into, or exchangeable for, securities having the right to vote) on any matters on which stockholders of the Company may vote. Except as set forth in Section 4.05(a) and for changes since January 29, 2014 resulting from (x) the exercise of Company Stock Options or Company Stock Appreciation Rights outstanding on such date or issued after such date, (y) the vesting and settlement of Company Restricted Stock Units, Company Performance Shares and Restricted Shares outstanding on such date or issued after such date and (z) the issuance of shares of Company Common Stock pursuant to the ESPP in compliance with Section 7.03(e), there are no issued, reserved for issuance or outstanding (i) shares of capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, the Company, (ii) securities of the Company convertible into or exchangeable for shares of capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, the Company, (iii) warrants, calls, options or other rights to acquire from the Company, or other obligations of the Company to issue, any shares of capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, or securities convertible into or exchangeable for capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, the Company or (iv) restricted shares, stock appreciation rights, performance units, contingent value rights, “phantom” stock or similar securities or rights that are derivative of, or provide economic benefits based, directly or indirectly, on the value or price of, any capital stock or voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, the Company (the items in clauses (i) through (iv) being referred to collectively as the “ Company Securities ”). There are no outstanding obligations of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to repurchase, redeem or otherwise acquire any Company Securities. Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries is a party to any agreement with respect to the voting of any Company Securities.

(c) No Subsidiary or controlled Affiliate of the Company owns any Company Securities.

Section 4.06. Subsidiaries . (a) Each Subsidiary of the Company is duly organized, validly existing and (where applicable) in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of organization, has all organizational power and authority necessary to carry on its business as now conducted. Each such Subsidiary is duly qualified to do business as a foreign entity and is in good standing in each jurisdiction where such qualification is necessary, except for those jurisdictions where failure to be so qualified would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect. All Subsidiaries of the Company and their respective jurisdictions of organization are identified in the Company 10-K.

 

23


(b) All of the outstanding capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, each Subsidiary of the Company is owned by the Company, directly or indirectly, free and clear of any Lien (except for Permitted Liens) and free of any other limitation or restriction other than transfer restrictions under federal and state securities laws. There are no issued, reserved for issuance or outstanding (i) securities of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries convertible into, or exchangeable for, shares of capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, any Subsidiary of the Company, (ii) warrants, calls, options or other rights to acquire from the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, or other obligations of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to issue, any capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, or any securities convertible into, or exchangeable for, any capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, any Subsidiary of the Company or (iii) restricted shares, stock appreciation rights, performance units, contingent value rights, “phantom” stock or similar securities or rights that are derivative of, or provide economic benefits based, directly or indirectly, on the value or price of, any capital stock or other voting securities of, or ownership interests in, any Subsidiary of the Company (the items in clauses (i) through (iii) being referred to collectively as the “ Company Subsidiary Securities ”). There are no outstanding obligations of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to repurchase, redeem or otherwise acquire any Company Subsidiary Securities. Except for the capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, its Subsidiaries, the Company does not own, directly or indirectly, any capital stock or other voting securities of, or other ownership interests in, any Person.

Section 4.07. SEC Filings and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act . (a) The Company and its Subsidiaries have filed with or furnished to the SEC all reports, schedules, forms, statements, prospectuses, registration statements and other documents required to be filed or furnished since January 1, 2012 (collectively, together with any exhibits and schedules thereto and other information incorporated therein, the “ Company Filings ”).

(b) As of its filing date (and as of the date of any amendment), each Company Filing complied as to form in all material respects with the applicable requirements of the 1933 Act and the 1934 Act, as the case may be.

(c) As of its filing date (or, if amended or superseded by a filing prior to the date hereof, on the date of such filing), each Company Filing filed pursuant to the 1934 Act did not, as of the date it was filed, contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state any material fact necessary in order to make the statements made therein, in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading.

 

24


(d) Each Company Filing that is a registration statement, as amended or supplemented, if applicable, filed pursuant to the 1933 Act, as of the date such registration statement or amendment or supplement became effective, did not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state any material fact required to be stated therein or necessary to make the statements therein not misleading.

(e) The Company has established and maintains disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rule 13a-15 under the 1934 Act). Such disclosure controls and procedures are designed to ensure, and the Company has no reasonable basis to believe such controls and procedures are not effective to ensure, that all material information relating to the Company required to be included in reports filed by the Company under the 1934 Act is accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management, including its principal executive officer and its principal financial officer as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.

(f) Since January 1, 2012, the Company has established and maintains a system of internal controls over financial reporting (as defined in Rule 13a-15 under the 1934 Act) sufficient to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of the Company’s financial reporting and the preparation of Company financial statements for external purposes in accordance with GAAP. Since January 1, 2012, the Company’s principal executive officer and its principal financial officer have disclosed, based on its most recent evaluation of internal controls over financial reporting prior to the date hereof, to the Company’s auditors and audit committee (i) any significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal controls over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the Company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information and (ii) any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in internal controls over financial reporting.

(g) Since January 1, 2012, there has been no transaction, or series of similar transactions, agreements, arrangements or understandings, nor is there any proposed transaction as of the date of this Agreement, or series of similar transactions, agreements, arrangements or understandings to which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries was or is to be a party, that would be required to be disclosed under Item 404 of Regulation S-K promulgated under the 1933 Act.

Section 4.08. Financial Statements . The audited consolidated financial statements and unaudited consolidated interim financial statements of the Company included or incorporated by reference in the Company Filings fairly present in all material respects, in conformity with GAAP applied on a consistent basis (except as may be indicated in the notes thereto and, in the case of unaudited

 

25


quarterly financial statements, as permitted by Form 10-Q under the 1934 Act), the consolidated financial position of the Company and its Subsidiaries as of the dates thereof and their consolidated results of operations and cash flows for the periods then ended (subject to normal year-end audit adjustments in the case of any unaudited interim financial statements).

Section 4.09. Disclosure Documents . The proxy statement of the Company to be filed with the SEC in connection with the Merger (the “ Company Proxy Statement ”) and any amendment or supplement thereto will, when filed, comply as to form in all material respects, with the applicable requirements of the 1934 Act. At the time the Company Proxy Statement and any amendments or supplements thereto are first mailed to the stockholders of the Company and at the time such stockholders vote on approval and adoption of this Agreement, the Company Proxy Statement, as supplemented or amended, if applicable, will not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state any material fact required to be stated therein or necessary in order to make the statements therein, in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading. The representations and warranties contained in this Section 4.09 will not apply to statements or omissions included or incorporated by reference in the Company Proxy Statement based upon information supplied by Parent, Merger Subsidiary or any of their respective representatives or advisors specifically for use or incorporation by reference therein.

Section 4.10. Absence of Certain Changes . (a) From the Company Balance Sheet Date until the date hereof, (i) the business of the Company and its Subsidiaries has been conducted in the ordinary course consistent with past practices and (ii) there has not been any event, occurrence, development, change or state of circumstances or facts that has had or would reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect.

(b) From the Company Balance Sheet Date until the date hereof, there has not been any action taken by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries that, if taken during the period from the date of this Agreement through the Effective Time without Parent’s consent, would constitute a breach of Section 6.01(a), (b), (c), (f), (g), (j), (l), (m) and (o).

Section 4.11. No Undisclosed Material Liabilities . There are no liabilities or obligations of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries of any kind whatsoever, whether accrued, contingent, absolute or otherwise other than: (i) liabilities or obligations disclosed and provided for in the Company Balance Sheet or in the notes thereto; (ii) liabilities or obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practices since the Company Balance Sheet Date; (iii) liabilities that were incurred under this Agreement or in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby; and (iv) liabilities or obligations that would not

 

26


reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect.

Section 4.12. Compliance with Applicable Laws . Except with respect to the matters specifically addressed in clause (d) below (which are addressed exclusively in clause (d) below), matters relating to compliance with Health Care Laws (which are addressed exclusively in clauses (e) through (h) below), infringement or misappropriation of any Intellectual Property Rights (which are addressed exclusively in Section 4.15), Tax compliance matters (which are addressed exclusively in Section 4.16 and Section 4.17), and environmental compliance matters (which are addressed exclusively in Section 4.18(ii)):

(a) the Company and each of its Subsidiaries is and since January 1, 2012, has been in compliance with, and to the knowledge of the Company is not under investigation with respect to and has not been threatened to be charged with or given notice of any violation of, any Applicable Law, except for failures to comply or violations that have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect. There is no judgment, decree, injunction, rule or order of any arbitrator or Governmental Authority outstanding against the Company or any of its Subsidiaries that has had or would reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect or that in any manner seeks to prevent, enjoin, alter or materially delay the Merger or any of the other transactions contemplated hereby.

(b) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company and its Subsidiaries hold all governmental licenses, authorizations, permits, consents, approvals, variances, exemptions and orders necessary for the operation of the businesses of the Company and its Subsidiaries as currently conducted (the “ Company Permits ”). Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect: (i) the Company and its Subsidiaries are in compliance with the terms of the Company Permits, and (ii) since January 1, 2012, there has occurred no violation of, default (with or without notice or lapse of time or both) under, or event to allow termination or cancellation of, with or without notice or lapse of time or both, any such Company Permit. Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Merger, in and of itself, will not cause the revocation, cancellation, non-renewal, adverse modification or termination of any such Company Permit.

(c) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, since January 1, 2012, none of the Company, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective directors,

 

27


officers or employees, or, to the Company’s knowledge, any agent or representative of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, has, in the course of his, her or its actions for, or on behalf of, any of them (i) used any corporate funds for any unlawful contribution, gift, entertainment or other unlawful expenses relating to political activity; (ii) made any direct or indirect unlawful payment to any foreign or domestic government official or employee; (iii) violated any provision of any Anti-Corruption Law; or (iv) directly or indirectly made any unlawful bribe, rebate, payoff, influence payment, kickback or other unlawful payment to any foreign or domestic government official or employee. Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, since January 1, 2012, neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has received any communication that alleges that the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, or any of their respective Representatives, is, or may be, in violation of, or has, or may have, any liability under, any Anti-Corruption Law. Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company and its Subsidiaries have instituted and maintain policies and procedures designed to promote and achieve compliance with such laws and the matters referred to in this Section 4.12(c).

(d) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, none of the Company, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective directors, officers or employees, or, to the Company’s knowledge, any agents or representatives of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, is, or is owned or controlled by a Person that is: (i) the subject of any sanctions administered by the U.S. Department of Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control, the U.S. Department of State, the United Nations Security Council, the European Union or any other relevant sanctions authority (collectively, “ Sanctions ”), or (ii) located, organized or resident in a country or territory that is the subject of Sanctions (currently, Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan and Syria). Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, since January 1, 2012, (A) neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has engaged in, directly or indirectly, any dealings or transactions with any Person, or in any country or territory, that, at the time of the dealing or transaction, was the subject of Sanctions, and (B) the Company and each of its Subsidiaries has been in compliance in all material respects with, and has not been penalized for or, to the Company’s knowledge, under investigation with respect to, and has not been threatened to be charged with or given notice of any violation of, any applicable Sanctions or export controls laws.

(e) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company and its Subsidiaries are not in violation of, and since January 1, 2012 have not violated,

 

28


any Health Care Laws which regulate their operations, activities, products or services or any assets owned or used by any of them. Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company and its Subsidiaries hold all governmental licenses, authorizations, permits, consents, approvals, variances, exemptions and orders required by any Health Care Laws for the operation of the businesses of the Company and its Subsidiaries as currently conducted (the “ HC Company Permits ”). Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect: (i) the Company and its Subsidiaries are in compliance with the terms of the HC Company Permits, and (ii) since January 1, 2012, there has occurred no violation of, default (with or without notice or lapse of time or both) under, or event to allow termination or cancellation of, with or without notice or lapse of time or both, any such HC Company Permit. Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Merger, in and of itself, will not cause the revocation, cancellation, non-renewal, adverse modification or termination of any such HC Company Permit.

(f) None of the Company, any of its Subsidiaries, or their respective employees, officers, or directors, or, to the Company’s knowledge, individuals with direct or indirect ownership interests of five (5) percent or more in the Company or its Subsidiaries, agents or contractors, have been, since January 1, 2012, or is currently debarred by the FDA under 21 U.S.C. § 335a, or suspended, excluded or debarred from contracting with the federal or any state government or from participation in any Federal Health Care Program nor, to the Company’s knowledge, has the Company, any Subsidiary of the Company or any of their respective employees, officers, directors, individuals with direct or indirect ownership interests of five (5) percent or more in the Company or its Subsidiaries, or agents or contractors engaged in conduct which could result in a suspension, debarment, exclusion or disqualification by any Governmental Authority. Except as described in Section 4.12(f) of the Company Disclosure Schedule, there are no proceedings pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, threatened that could result in criminal liability or suspension, exclusion, debarment or disqualification by any Governmental Authority.

(g) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect:

(i) since January 1, 2012, the Company and each of its Subsidiaries has timely filed any and all material notifications, filings and reports utilized as the basis for or submitted in connection with a request for a Company Permit from any Governmental Authority, including premarket notifications to the FDA, and any written contract or other document with respect to the purchase or reimbursement of items,

 

29


products and/or services from the Company by third-party payors, including, but not limited to, Federal Health Care Programs and licensing agencies, insurers and carriers (collectively, “ Company Submissions ”). To the Company’s knowledge, the Company Submissions were true, complete and correct in all material respects as of the date of submission and any necessary or required updates, changes, corrections or modifications to such Company Submissions have been submitted to the applicable Governmental Authority;

(ii) neither the FDA nor any other comparable Governmental Authority has withdrawn or suspended the approval or clearance of, requested or ordered the recall of, ordered the seizure of, or ordered or requested the discontinuation of advertising and promotional materials of any of the products of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries; and

(iii) neither the Company nor any Subsidiary of Company has, since January 1, 2012, received (A) any warning or untitled letter, report of inspection observations (including FDA Form 483s), establishment inspection report, notice of violation, clinical hold, or other written documents or other communications from the FDA, any other Governmental Authority or any Institutional Review Board alleging material non-compliance by the Company or such Subsidiary with any Applicable Law or regulatory requirements (including those of the FDA), (B) any written notice from FDA that FDA intends to invoke its policy with respect to Fraud, Untrue Statements of Material Facts, Bribery and Illegal Gratuities, 56 Fed. Reg. 46191 (September 10, 1991) or (C) any written notice or communication from the FDA or any other Governmental Authority which enjoins production at any facility of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries.

(h) To the knowledge of the Company, except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, since January 1, 2012, and except as set forth on Section 4.12(h) of the Company Disclosure Schedule: (i) neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has(A) received or been subject to any notice, citation, suspension, revocation, warning, request of payment or refund, investigation, request for information or administrative proceeding or review by a Governmental Authority which alleges or asserts that the Company or any of its Subsidiaries has violated any Health Care Laws or which requires or seeks any adjustment, modification or alteration in the Company’s or any of its Subsidiary’s operations, activities, products, services or financial condition that has not been resolved, including but not limited to any qui tam lawsuits, or U.S. Department of Justice, OIG, State Attorney General or State Medicaid Agency investigations or audits or(B) been subject to a corporate integrity agreement, deferred prosecution agreement,

 

30


consent decree, settlement agreement or other similar agreements or orders mandating or prohibiting future or past activities and (ii) neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has settled, or agreed to settle, any actions brought by any Governmental Authority for a violation of any Health Care Laws. To the knowledge of the Company, there are no restrictions imposed by any Governmental Authority upon the business, activities, products or services of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries which would restrict or prevent the Company or such Subsidiary from operating as it currently operates, except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect.

Section 4.13. Litigation . There is no action, suit, investigation or proceeding pending against, or, to the knowledge of the Company, threatened against or affecting, the Company, any of its Subsidiaries, any present or former officer, director or employee of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or any Person for whom the Company or any of its Subsidiaries may be liable or any of their respective properties before (or, in the case of threatened actions, suits, investigations or proceedings, would be before) or by any Governmental Authority or arbitrator, that, if determined or resolved adversely in accordance with the plaintiff’s demands, would reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect.

Section 4.14. Properties . (a) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company and its Subsidiaries have good and marketable title to, or in the case of leased property and assets have valid leasehold interests in, all property and assets (whether real, personal, tangible or intangible) reflected on the Company Balance Sheet or acquired after the Company Balance Sheet Date, except as have been disposed of since the Company Balance Sheet Date in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice.

(b) Section 4.14(b) of the Company Disclosure Schedule contains a true and complete list, as of the date hereof, of all real property owned by the Company and its Subsidiaries (the “ Owned Real Property ”).

(c) Section 4.14(c) of the Company Disclosure Schedule contains a true and complete list, as of the date hereof, or each material lease, sublease or license (each, a “ Lease ”) under which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries leases, subleases or licenses any real property (the “ Leased Real Property ” and together with the Owned Real Property, the “ Company Real Property ”). Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) each Lease is valid and in full force and effect and (ii) neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries, nor to the Company’s knowledge any other party to a Lease, has violated any provision of,

 

31


or taken or failed to take any act which, with or without notice, lapse of time, or both, would constitute a default under the provisions of such Lease, and neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has received notice that it has breached, violated or defaulted under any Lease.

(d) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company Real Property and any plants, buildings, structures and equipment thereon owned or leased by the Company and its Subsidiaries have no defects, are in good operating condition and repair and have been maintained consistent with standards generally followed in the industry (given due account to the age and length of use of same, ordinary wear and tear excepted), are adequate and suitable for their present and intended uses and, to the Company’s knowledge, in the case of buildings (including the roofs thereof), are structurally sound.

Section 4.15. Intellectual Property . (a) Section 4.15(a) of the Company Disclosure Schedule contains a true and complete list of each of the issuances, registrations and applications for issuance or registration included in the Owned Intellectual Property Rights, specifying as to each such item, as applicable (i) the owner of such item, (ii) each jurisdiction in which such item is issued or registered or in which any application for issuance or registration has been filed, (iii) the respective issuance, registration, or application number of such item and (iv) the date of application and issuance or registration of such item.

(b) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) the Company or one of its Subsidiaries is the sole and exclusive owner of the Owned Intellectual Property Rights and holds all right, title and interest in and to all Owned Intellectual Property Rights, in each case free and clear of any Lien (excluding Permitted Liens) and (ii) to the knowledge of the Company, the Company and its Subsidiaries own or have a valid and enforceable license to use all Intellectual Property Rights necessary to, or used or held for use in, the conduct of the business of the Company and its Subsidiaries as currently conducted.

(c) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) there exist no restrictions on the disclosure, use, license or transfer of the Owned Intellectual Property Rights, and (ii) the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement will not result in (A) the imposition of a Lien on, or extinguish or impair the Company’s or its applicable Subsidiary’s rights in, any Owned Intellectual Property Rights or (B) result in any breach of or any loss of any benefit or right under, constitute a default under, or give to any third party any right of termination, vesting, amendment, acceleration or cancellation under, any

 

32


Contract pursuant to which the Company or its applicable Subsidiary obtains any rights to any Licensed Intellectual Property Right.

(d) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) to the knowledge of the Company, neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries is infringing, inducing or contributing to the infringement of, misappropriating or otherwise violating any Intellectual Property Right of any Person, (ii) to the knowledge of the Company, during the six (6) years immediately preceding the date of this Agreement, neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has infringed, induced or contributed to the infringement of, misappropriated or otherwise violated any such Third Party’s Intellectual Property Rights, and (iii) there is no claim, action, suit, investigation or proceeding pending against, or, to the knowledge of the Company, threatened during the six (6) years immediately preceding the date of this Agreement against the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective present or former officers, directors or employees (A) based upon, or challenging or seeking to deny or restrict, the rights of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries in any of the Owned Intellectual Property Rights or Licensed Intellectual Property Rights, (B) alleging that any Owned Intellectual Property Right or Licensed Intellectual Property Right is invalid or unenforceable, (C) alleging that the use of any of the Owned Intellectual Property Rights or Licensed Intellectual Property Rights or any services provided, processes used or products manufactured, used, imported or sold by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries do or may conflict with, misappropriate, infringe or otherwise violate any Intellectual Property Right of any Person or (D) otherwise alleging that the Company or any of its Subsidiaries has infringed, misappropriated or otherwise violated any Intellectual Property Right of any Person.

(e) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) the Company and its Subsidiaries have taken any and all actions reasonably necessary to maintain, enforce and protect the Owned Intellectual Property Rights and the Company’s or its applicable Subsidiary’s interest in any Licensed Intellectual Property Rights, (ii) none of the Owned Intellectual Property Rights have been adjudged invalid or unenforceable in whole or part, (iii) all issued Patents, registered Trademarks and registered Copyrights included in the Owned Intellectual Property Rights (“ Registered IP ”) are, to the knowledge of the Company, valid, enforceable, in full force and effect and subsisting in all material respects, (iv) all registration, maintenance and renewal fees applicable to the Registered IP that are currently due have been paid and all documents and certificates related to such items have been filed with the relevant Governmental Authority or other authorities in the applicable jurisdictions for the purposes of maintaining such items (excluding the abandonment or other allowance of the expiration or lapse of Registered IP in the

 

33


ordinary course of business), and (v) effective written assignments constituting an unbroken, complete chain-of-title from each original owner or inventor to the Company or its applicable Subsidiary have been obtained with respect to all material Owned Intellectual Property Rights, and as to Registered IP, have been duly recorded with the appropriate Governmental Authorities, and (vi) the Company’s and its Subsidiaries’ prosecution of any and all Patents included in the Owned Intellectual Property Rights has been conducted in compliance with Applicable Law and the applicable rules of the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.

(f) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) in the five (5) years immediately preceding the date of this Agreement, neither the Company nor any Company Subsidiary has sent a written notice to any Third Party alleging that such Third Party has infringed, misappropriated or otherwise violated any Owned Intellectual Property Right, and (ii) the Company has taken reasonable steps in accordance with normal industry practice to maintain the confidentiality of all Intellectual Property Rights of the Company the value of which to the Company is contingent upon maintaining the confidentiality thereof.

(g) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) the Company and its Subsidiaries have appropriate procedures in place designed to provide that all Intellectual Property Rights conceived or developed by employees performing product development duties for the Company and its Subsidiaries, and by third parties performing research and development with respect to products for the Company or its Subsidiaries, have been assigned to the Company or its Subsidiary, as applicable, (ii) to the extent that any Intellectual Property Right has been generated by any Third Party (including any current or former employee) engaged in research and development activities reasonably anticipated to generate material Intellectual Property Rights, the Company or one of its Subsidiaries has a written agreement with such Third Party with respect thereto, which provides that the Company or its applicable Subsidiary either (A) has obtained ownership of or (B) has obtained the rights necessary to exploit, sufficient for the conduct of its business as currently conducted, such Intellectual Property Right.

(h) Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) the IT Assets operate and perform in a manner that permits the Company and its Subsidiaries to conduct its and their business as currently conducted, and (ii) the Company and its Subsidiaries have taken commercially reasonable actions, consistent with current industry standards, to protect the confidentiality, integrity and security of the IT Assets (and all information and transactions stored or contained therein or transmitted thereby) against any unauthorized use, access, interruption, modification or corruption, including the implementation of commercially

 

34


reasonable (A) data backup, (B) disaster avoidance and recovery procedures and (C) business continuity procedures.

(i) Section 4.15(i) of the Company Disclosure Schedule contains a true and complete list of any and all Owned Intellectual Property Rights that were created, developed or reduced to practice, or are being created, developed or reduced to practice, (i) pursuant to, or in connection with, any Contract between the Company or any of its Subsidiaries and any Governmental Authority or Governmental Authority-affiliated entity, or university, college or other educational institution, or (ii) using any funding or facilities of any Governmental Authority or Governmental Authority-affiliated university, college or other educational institution (collectively, “ Government Funded IP ”). Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company and its Subsidiaries have taken any and all actions necessary to obtain, secure, maintain, enforce and protect the Company’s or its applicable Subsidiary’s right, title and interest in, to and under all Government Funded IP, and the Company and its Subsidiaries have complied with any and all any Intellectual Property Right disclosure and/or licensing obligations under any applicable contract referenced in clause (i) above.

Section 4.16. Taxes . (a) All material Tax Returns required by Applicable Law to be filed with any Taxing Authority by, or on behalf of, the Company or any of its Subsidiaries have been filed when due and all such material Tax Returns are, or shall be at the time of filing, true and complete in all material respects.

(b) Subject to exceptions as would not be material, the Company and each of its Subsidiaries has paid (or has had paid on its behalf) or has withheld and remitted to the appropriate Taxing Authority all Taxes due and payable.

(c) Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has granted an extension or waiver of the limitation period for the assessment or collection of any material Tax that remains in effect.

(d) The Company, and each Subsidiary, has complied in all material respects with the conditions stipulated in each Tax Grant, no submissions made to any Taxing Authority in connection with obtaining any Tax Grant contained any material misstatement or omission and, to the knowledge of the Company, the transactions expressly contemplated by this Agreement will not adversely affect the status of any existing Tax Grant.

(e) There is no claim, audit, action, suit, proceeding or investigation now pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, threatened against or with respect

 

35


to the Company or its Subsidiaries in respect of any material Tax or material Tax asset.

(f) There are no material Liens for Taxes (other than statutory liens for taxes not yet due and payable or being contested in good faith) upon any of the assets of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries.

(g) (i) Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries is a party to or is bound by any Tax Sharing Agreement (other than such an agreement or arrangement between or among (A) the Company (or its Subsidiaries) and Parent (or its Subsidiaries) or (B) the Company and its Subsidiaries exclusively), (ii) neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has liability for the payment of any amount as a result of being party to any Tax Sharing Agreement (other than such agreement or arrangement between or among (X) the Company (or its Subsidiaries) and Parent (or its Subsidiaries) or (Y) the Company and its Subsidiaries exclusively); and (iii) neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has been a member of an affiliated group filing a consolidated federal income Tax Return (other than a group the common parent of which was the Company or Parent).

(h) Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has been a party to any “listed transaction” within the meaning of Section 6011 of the Code (including the Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder).

(i) None of the Subsidiaries of the Company owns any Company Common Stock.

(j) During the two-year period ending on the date hereof, neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries was a distributing corporation or a controlled corporation in a transaction intended to be governed by Section 355 of the Code.

(k) No claim has been made in writing in the last three (3) years by any Taxing Authority in a jurisdiction where the Company or a Subsidiary does not file Tax Returns that the Company or a Subsidiary is or may be subject to taxation by, or required to file any Tax Return in, that jurisdiction.

Section 4.17. Employees and Employee Benefit Plans . (a) Section 4.17(a) of the Company Disclosure Schedule contains a correct and complete list identifying each material Employee Plan and specifies whether such plan is a US Plan or an International Plan. For each material Employee Plan, the Company has provided to Parent a copy of such plan (or a description, if such plan is not written) and all amendments thereto and, as applicable (i) all trust agreements, insurance contracts or other funding arrangements and amendments thereto, (ii) the current prospectus or summary plan description and all summaries of material modifications, (iii) the most recent favorable determination or opinion letter from

 

36


the IRS, (iv) the most recently filed annual return/report (Form 5500) and accompanying schedules and attachments thereto, (v) the most recently prepared actuarial report and financial statements and (vi) if such plan is an International Plan, documents that are substantially comparable (taking into account differences in Applicable Law and practices) to the documents required to be provided in clauses (i) through (v). The Company’s failure to provide to Parent any of the documents referenced in the preceding sentence as the date hereof would not, individually or in the aggregate, result in a Company Material Adverse Effect, and the Company will provide such documents to Parent not later than ten Business Days after the date hereof.

(b) As of the date hereof, no Key Employee has provided written notice to any executive officer of the Company that he or she presently intends to resign or retire as a result of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or otherwise within one year after the Effective Time.

(c) With respect to any Employee Plan covered by Subtitle B, Part 4 of Title I of ERISA or Section 4975 of the Code, no non-exempt prohibited transaction has occurred that has caused or would reasonably be expected to cause the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to incur any material liability under ERISA or the Code. Neither the Company nor any of its ERISA Affiliates (nor any predecessor of any such entity) sponsors, maintains, administers or contributes to (or has any obligation to contribute to), or has in the past six years sponsored, maintained, administered or contributed to (or had any obligation to contribute to), or has or is reasonably expected to have any direct or indirect liability with respect to, any plan that is (i) subject to Title IV of ERISA or (ii) a “multiemployer plan” (as defined in Section 3(37) of ERISA).

(d) Each Employee Plan, and any award thereunder, that is or forms part of a “nonqualified deferred compensation plan” within the meaning of Section 409A or 457A of the Code has been timely amended (if applicable) to comply and has been operated in material compliance with, and the Company and its Subsidiaries have materially complied in practice and operation with, all applicable requirements of Section 409A and 457A of the Code, and no amounts currently deferred or to be deferred under any such plan would be not determinable when otherwise includible in income under Section 457A of the Code. Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has any obligation to gross-up, indemnify or otherwise reimburse any current or former Service Provider for any Tax incurred by such Service Provider, including under Section 409A, 457A or 4999 of the Code.

(e) Each Employee Plan that is intended to be qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code has received a favorable determination or opinion letter, or has pending or has time remaining in which to file, an application for such

 

37


determination from the IRS, and no circumstances exist that would reasonably be expected to result in any such determination or opinion letter being revoked or not being reissued or a penalty under the IRS Closing Agreement Program if discovered during an IRS audit or investigation. Each trust created under any such Employee Plan is exempt from Tax under Section 501(a) of the Code and has been so exempt since its creation. Each Employee Plan has been maintained in compliance with its terms and with the requirements of Applicable Law, including ERISA and the Code, except for failures to comply or violations that have not had and would not reasonably be expected have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect. No events have occurred with respect to any Employee Plan that could result in payment or assessment by or against the Company of any material excise taxes under ERISA or the Code.

(f) Except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to result in a Company Material Adverse Effect, all contributions, premiums and payments that are due have been made for each Employee Plan within the time periods prescribed by the terms of such plan and Applicable Law, and all contributions, premiums and payments for any period ending at or prior to the Effective Time that are not due are properly accrued to the extent required to be accrued under applicable accounting principles. There has been no amendment to, written interpretation of or announcement (whether or not written) by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries relating to, or change in employee participation or coverage under, any Employee Plan that would materially increase the expense of maintaining such plan above the level of expense incurred in respect thereof for the most recently completed fiscal year.

(g) Neither the execution of this Agreement nor the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement (either alone or together with any other event) will (i) entitle any current or former Service Provider to any material payment or benefit, including any bonus, retention, severance, retirement or job security payment or benefit, (ii) materially enhance any benefits or accelerate the time of payment or vesting or trigger any payment of funding (through a grantor trust or otherwise) of compensation or benefits under, or materially increase the amount payable or trigger any other obligation under, any Employee Plan or otherwise, or (iii) limit or restrict the right of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or, after Closing, Parent, to merge, amend or terminate any Employee Plan. There is no contract, plan or arrangement (written or otherwise) covering any current or former Service Provider that, individually or collectively, could give rise to the payment of any amount that would not be deductible due to the application of Section 280G or 162(m) of the Code.

(h) Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has any current or projected liability for, and no Employee Plan provides or promises, any post-employment or post-retirement medical, dental, disability, hospitalization or life

 

38


benefits (whether insured or self-insured) to any current or former Service Provider (other than coverage mandated by Applicable Law, including the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985 (or COBRA)).

(i) There is no action, suit, investigation, audit, proceeding or claim (other than routine claims for benefits) pending against or involving, or, to the Company’s knowledge, threatened against or involving any Employee Plan before any arbitrator or any Governmental Authority, including the IRS or the Department of Labor that, if determined or resolved adversely in accordance with the plaintiff’s demands, would reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect. The Company and its Subsidiaries are, and have been since January 1, 2011, in compliance with all Applicable Laws with respect to labor relations, employment and employment practices, including those relating to labor management relations, wages, hours, overtime, employee classification, discrimination, sexual harassment, civil rights, affirmative action, work authorization, immigration, safety and health, information privacy and security, workers compensation, continuation coverage under group health plans, wage payment and the payment and withholding of Taxes, except for failures to comply or violations that have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect.

(j) Each International Plan (i) has been maintained in compliance with its terms and Applicable Law, except for failures to comply or violations that have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (ii) if intended to qualify for special tax treatment, meets in all material respects all the requirements for such treatment, and (iii) if required, to any extent, to be funded, book-reserved or secured by an insurance policy, is fully funded, book-reserved or secured by an insurance policy, as applicable, based on reasonable actuarial assumptions in accordance with applicable accounting principles. To the Company’s knowledge as of the date of this Agreement, the consent or consultation of, or the rendering of formal advice by, any labor or trade union, works council or other employee representative body is not required for the Company to consummate any of the transactions contemplated hereby.

(k) Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries is or has been party to or subject to, or is currently negotiating in connection with entering into, any Collective Bargaining Agreement. There has not been any organizational campaign, petition or other unionization activity seeking recognition of a collective bargaining unit relating to any Service Provider. There are currently no, and since January 1, 2011 there have not been any, labor strikes, slowdowns, stoppages, picketings, interruptions of work or lockouts pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, threatened against or affecting the Company or any of its

 

39


Subsidiaries. There are no material unfair labor practice complaints pending or, to the Company’s knowledge, threatened against the Company or any of its Subsidiaries before the National Labor Relations Board or any other Governmental Authority or any current union representation questions involving Service Providers.

(l) The Company and each of its Subsidiaries is, and has been since January 1, 2011, in material compliance with WARN and has no material liabilities or other obligations thereunder. Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has taken any action that would reasonably be expected to cause Parent or any of its Affiliates to have any material liability or other obligation following the Effective Time under WARN.

Section 4.18. Environmental Matters . Except as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect: (i) since January 1, 2012, the Company has not received any written notice, demand, request for information, citation, summons or complaint from a Governmental Authority alleging that the Company is in violation of any Environmental Laws, and no order is outstanding or otherwise in effect, no penalty has been assessed and no action, suit, investigation or proceeding is pending or, to the knowledge of the Company, threatened with respect to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries (or, to the knowledge of the Company, any of their respective predecessors) that relates to or arises out of any Environmental Law, Environmental Permit or Hazardous Substance; (ii) the Company and its Subsidiaries (and, to the knowledge of the Company, their respective predecessors) are and, since January 1, 2012, have been in compliance with all Environmental Laws and Environmental Permits; (iii), to the knowledge of the Company, since, January 1, 2012, no Hazardous Substance has been discharged, disposed of, dumped, injected, pumped, deposited, spilled, leaked, emitted or released at, on, under, to or from (x) any location by or on behalf of, (y) any property or facility now or previously owned, leased or operated by, or (z) any property or facility to which any Hazardous Substance has been transported for disposal or treatment by or on behalf of, the Company or any of its Subsidiaries (or, to the knowledge of the Company, any of their respective predecessors).

Section 4.19. Material Contracts . (a) Except as disclosed in Section 4.19(a) of the Company Disclosure Schedule, neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries is a party to or bound by any of the following Contracts as of the date hereof:

(i) any “material contract” (as such term is defined in Item 601(b)(10) of Regulation S-K of the SEC);

 

40


(ii) any partnership, joint venture, strategic alliance, collaboration, co-promotion, research and development project or other similar Contract (but excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, any distribution, agency or clinical agreements entered into in the ordinary course of business);

(iii) any Contract (but excluding any distribution or agency agreements containing the Company’s standard terms and conditions and entered into in the ordinary course of business) that limits in any material respect the freedom of the Company or any of its Affiliates to compete in any line of business, therapeutic area or geographic region, or with any Person, or otherwise materially restricts the research, development, manufacture, marketing, distribution or sale of any product or service by the Company or any of its Affiliates;

(iv) any Contract (but excluding any distribution or agency agreements containing the Company’s standard terms and conditions and entered into in the ordinary course of business) that contains exclusivity or “most favored nation” provisions, or any Contract that grants any right of first refusal or right of first offer to any Person relating to any Product or Product candidate;

(v) any Contract (but excluding any distribution or agency agreements containing the Company’s standard terms and conditions and entered into in the ordinary course of business) that requires the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to (A) purchase or sell a minimum quantity of goods relating to any product or product candidate and that involves expenditures or receipts in excess of $1,000,000 in any calendar year remaining in its term, or (B) purchase or sell goods relating to any product or product candidate exclusively, in each case from or to any Person;

(vi) any employment Contract applicable to any Key Employee which the Company has or could be reasonably expected to have any material Liability;

(vii) any Contract relating to indebtedness for borrowed money or any financial guarantee (whether incurred, assumed, guaranteed or secured by any asset), other than Contracts solely among the Company and its wholly owned Subsidiaries;

(viii) any Contract relating to any loan or other extension of credit made by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, other than (A) Contracts solely among the Company and its wholly owned Subsidiaries

 

41


and (B) accounts receivable in the ordinary course of business of the Company and its Subsidiaries consistent with past practice;

(ix) any Contract relating to any swap, forward, futures, warrant, option or other derivative transaction;

(x) any Contract (but excluding any distribution or agency agreements containing the Company’s standard terms and conditions and entered into in the ordinary course of business) that (A) involves future expenditures or receipts by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries of more than $1,000,000 in any calendar year remaining in its term and (B) cannot be terminated by the Company or the applicable Subsidiary(ies) on less than 90 days’ notice without material payment or penalty;

(xi) any Contract pursuant to which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries has continuing obligations or interests involving (A) “milestone” or other contingent payments, including upon the achievement of regulatory or commercial milestones, which “milestone” or other contingent payments could exceed $1,000,000 in the aggregate, or (B) payment of royalties or other amounts calculated based upon any revenues or income of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries which royalties or other amounts are reasonably expected to exceed $1,000,000 in any calendar year remaining in its term, in each case that cannot be terminated by the Company or its Subsidiaries without penalty without more than 90 days’ notice without material payment or penalty;

(xii) any Contract relating to the acquisition or disposition of any business for aggregate maximum consideration (including “earn-outs”) in excess of $1,000,000 (whether by merger, sale of stock, sale of assets or otherwise) pursuant to which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries has material continuing obligations, including “earn-outs” and indemnities;

(xiii) any Contract not described in any other subsection of this Section 4.19 that relates to the research, development, distribution, marketing, supply, license, collaboration, co-promotion or manufacturing of any material product, which, if terminated or not renewed, would reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect;

(xiv) any Contract with any sole-source supplier of material tangible products or services relating to any material product of the Company or its Subsidiaries;

(xv) any Contract between the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, on the one hand, and any officer, director or Affiliate (other

 

42


than a wholly owned Subsidiary) of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective “associates” or “immediate family” members (as such terms are defined in Rule 12b-2 and Rule 16a-1 of the Exchange Act), on the other hand, including any Contract pursuant to which the Company or any of its Subsidiaries has an obligation to indemnify such officer, director, Affiliate, associate or immediate family member, except for any Contract involving employment, change in control, indemnification, stock option or similar Contracts entered into in the ordinary course of business;

(xvi) any agreement with a Governmental Authority that provides for payments of $1,000,000 in any calendar year remaining in its term;

(xvii) any agreement with any surgeon, physician or other health care professional that that provides for $250,000 in any calendar year remaining in its term; or

(xviii) any stockholders, investors rights, registration rights or similar agreement or arrangement.

(b) The Company has made available to Parent a true and complete copy of each agreement, contract, plan, arrangement or commitment required to be disclosed pursuant to Section 4.19 (each, a “ Material Contract ”). Except for breaches, violations or defaults which would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, (i) each of the Material Contracts is in full force and effect, and is a valid and binding Contract of the Company or its Subsidiaries, as applicable, and, to the Company’s knowledge, of each other party thereto, enforceable against the Company or such Subsidiary, as applicable, and, to the Company’s knowledge, each other party thereto, in accordance with its terms, and (ii) neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries, nor to the Company’s knowledge any other party to a Material Contract, has violated any provision of, or taken or failed to take any act which, with or without notice, lapse of time, or both, would constitute a default under the provisions of, such Material Contract, and neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries has received notice that it has breached, violated or defaulted under any Material Contract.

Section 4.20. Insurance . Except as had not had and would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect, the Company and its Subsidiaries maintain reasonable insurance for their business.

 

43


Section 4.21. Finders’ Fees . Except for Piper Jaffray & Co., a copy of whose engagement agreement has been provided to Parent prior to the date hereof, there is no investment banker, broker, finder or other intermediary that has been retained by or is authorized to act on behalf of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries who might be entitled to any fee or commission from the Company or any of its Affiliates in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

Section 4.22. Opinion of Financial Advisor . The Company has received the opinion of Piper Jaffray & Co., financial advisor to the Company, to the effect that, as of the date of this Agreement, the Merger Consideration is fair to the Company’s stockholders from a financial point of view. A written copy of such opinion will be delivered promptly after the date hereof to Parent for informational purposes only.

Section 4.23. Antitakeover Statutes . The Company has no “rights plan,” rights agreement,” or “poison pill” in effect. The Company has taken all action necessary to exempt the Merger, this Agreement, the Voting Agreements and the transactions contemplated hereby and thereby from Section 203 of Delaware Law, and, accordingly, neither such Section nor any other antitakeover or similar statute or regulation applies to any such transactions. No other “control share acquisition,” “fair price,” “moratorium” or other antitakeover laws enacted under U.S. state or federal laws apply to this Agreement, the Voting Agreements or any of the transactions contemplated hereby and thereby.

ARTICLE 5

R EPRESENTATIONS AND W ARRANTIES OF P ARENT

Subject to Section 11.05, except as set forth in the Parent Disclosure Schedule, Parent represents and warrants to the Company that:

Section 5.01. Corporate Existence and Power . Each of Parent and Merger Subsidiary is a corporation duly incorporated, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation and has all corporate powers and all governmental licenses, authorizations, permits, consents and approvals required to carry on its business as now conducted, except for those licenses, authorizations, permits, consents and approvals the absence of which would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Parent Material Adverse Effect. Each of Parent and Merger Subsidiary is duly qualified to do business as a foreign corporation and is in good standing in each jurisdiction where such qualification is necessary in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, except for those jurisdictions where failure to be so qualified or in good standing would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Parent Material Adverse Effect. Since

 

44


the date of its incorporation, Merger Subsidiary has not engaged in any activities other than in connection with or as contemplated by this Agreement. Parent has heretofore made available to the Company true and complete copies of the certificate of incorporation and bylaws of Parent and Merger Subsidiary.

Section 5.02. Corporate Authorization . The execution, delivery and performance by Parent and Merger Subsidiary of this Agreement and the consummation by Parent and Merger Subsidiary of the transactions contemplated hereby are within the corporate powers of Parent and Merger Subsidiary and have been duly authorized by all necessary corporate action. This Agreement has been duly executed and delivered by Parent and Merger Subsidiary and constitutes a valid and binding agreement of each of Parent and Merger Subsidiary enforceable against Parent and Merger Subsidiary in accordance with its terms (subject to applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, fraudulent transfer, reorganization, moratorium and other laws affecting creditors’ rights generally and general principles of equity). This Agreement has been duly adopted immediately following its execution by Parent as the sole stockholder of Merger Subsidiary in accordance with Delaware Law.

Section 5.03. Governmental Authorization . The execution, delivery and performance by Parent and Merger Subsidiary of this Agreement and the consummation by Parent and Merger Subsidiary of the transactions contemplated hereby require no action by or in respect of, or filing with, any Governmental Authority, other than (i) the filing of a certificate of merger with respect to the Merger with the Delaware Secretary of State and appropriate documents with the relevant authorities of other states in which Parent is qualified to do business, (ii) compliance with any applicable requirements of the HSR Act and the Antitrust Laws applicable to the Merger in the jurisdictions set forth in Section 4.03 of the Company Disclosure Schedule, (iii) compliance with any applicable requirements of the 1934 Act and any other applicable U.S. state or federal securities laws, (iv) compliance with the requirements of NASDAQ and the UK Financial Conduct Authority Listing Rules and (v) any actions or filings the absence of which would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Parent Material Adverse Effect.

Section 5.04. Non-contravention . The execution, delivery and performance by Parent and Merger Subsidiary of this Agreement and the consummation by Parent and Merger Subsidiary of the transactions contemplated hereby do not and will not (i) contravene, conflict with, or result in any violation or breach of any provision of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws of Parent or Merger Subsidiary, (ii) assuming compliance with the matters referred to in Section 5.03, contravene, conflict with or result in a violation or breach of any provision of any Applicable Law, (iii) assuming compliance with the matters referred to in Section 5.03, require any consent or other action by any Person

 

45


under, constitute a default, or an event that, with or without notice or lapse of time or both, would constitute a default, under, or cause or permit the termination, cancellation, acceleration or other change of any right or obligation or the loss of any benefit to which Parent or any of its Subsidiaries is entitled under any provision of any Contract binding upon Parent or any of its Subsidiaries or (iv) result in the creation or imposition of any Lien on any asset of Parent or any of its Subsidiaries, with only such exceptions, in the case of each of clauses (ii) through (iv), as would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Parent Material Adverse Effect.

Section 5.05. Disclosure Documents . The information supplied in writing by Parent for inclusion in the Company Proxy Statement will not, at the time the Company Proxy Statement and any amendments or supplements thereto is first mailed to the stockholders of the Company and at the time of the Company Stockholder Approval, contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state any material fact required to be stated therein or necessary in order to make the statements therein, in light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading. The representations and warranties in this Section 5.05 will not apply to statements or omissions included or incorporated by reference in the Company Proxy Statement based upon information supplied by the Company or any of its representatives or advisors specifically for use or incorporation by reference therein.

Section 5.06. Finders’ Fees . Except for Centerview Partners LLC and J.P. Morgan Securities LLC, whose fees will be paid by Parent, there is no investment banker, broker, finder or other intermediary that has been retained by or is authorized to act on behalf of Parent who might be entitled to any fee or commission in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

Section 5.07. Financing . Parent has, or will have prior to and at the Closing, sufficient cash, available lines of credit or other sources of immediately available funds to enable it to comply with its obligations under this Agreement, to consummate the Merger and the other transactions contemplated hereby, to refinance any indebtedness required to be refinanced in connection therewith and to pay any related fees and expenses. Parent understands and acknowledges that under the terms of this Agreement, Parent’s and Merger Subsidiary’s obligation to consummate the Merger is not in any way contingent upon or otherwise subject to Parent’s or Merger Subsidiary’s consummation of any financing arrangements, Parent’s or Merger Subsidiary’s obtaining of any financing or the availability, grant, provision or extension of any financing to Parent or Merger Subsidiary.

Section 5.08. No Interested Stockholder . As of the time the Company Board Recommendation was adopted by the Board of Directors, none of Parent, Merger Subsidiary or any of their “affiliates” and “associates” were, or have been

 

46


within the three years preceding such date, an “interested stockholder” of the Company, as those terms are defined in Section 203 of Delaware Law. Neither Parent nor any of its Subsidiaries owns (beneficially or otherwise) any Company Securities or Company Subsidiary Securities or any options, warrants or other rights to acquire any Company Securities or Company Subsidiary Securities (or any other economic interest through derivative securities or otherwise in the Company or any of its Subsidiaries).

Section 5.09. Ownership of Merger Subsidiary; No Prior Activities . Parent owns one hundred percent (100%) of the issued and outstanding capital stock of Merger Subsidiary. Except for obligations or liabilities incurred in connection with its formation and the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, Merger Subsidiary has not and will not, prior to the Effective Time, have incurred, directly or indirectly, through any Subsidiary or Affiliate or otherwise, any obligations or liabilities or engaged in any business activities of any type or kind whatsoever or entered into any agreements or arrangements with any Person.

Section 5.10. Litigation . As of the date of this Agreement, there is no action, suit, investigation or proceeding pending against, or, to the knowledge of Parent or Merger Subsidiary, threatened against or affecting, the Parent, any of its Subsidiaries, any present or former officer, director or employee of Parent or any of its Subsidiaries or any Person for whom Parent or any of its Subsidiaries may be liable or any of their respective properties before (or, in the case of threatened actions, suits, investigations or proceedings, would be before) or by any Governmental Authority or arbitrator, that, if determined or resolved adversely in accordance with the plaintiff’s demands, would reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Parent Material Adverse Effect.

Section 5.11. Management Agreements . As of the date hereof, other than this Agreement and the Voting Agreements, there are no Contracts, undertakings, commitments, or obligations or understandings between Parent or Merger Subsidiary or any of their Affiliates, on the one hand, and any member of the Company’s management or the Board of Directors or any of the Affiliates of the Company, on the other hand, relating to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or the operations of the Company after the Effective Time.

Section 5.12. Disclaimer of Other Representations and Warranties . Parent and Merger Subsidiary acknowledge that they their Representatives have received access to such books and records, facilities, equipment, Contracts, information, data and other assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries which they and their Representatives have requested to review, and have had full opportunity to meet with the management of the Company and its Subsidiaries and to discuss the business and assets of the Company. Parent and Merger Subsidiary each

 

47


acknowledges and agrees that, except for the representations and warranties expressly set forth in Article 4 of this Agreement neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiary, Representative of the Company or Affiliate of the Company or any of the Company’s Subsidiaries makes, or has made, any representation or warranty relating to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or the business of the Company and its Subsidiaries in connection with this Agreement, the Merger or the other transactions contemplated hereby, and Parent and Merger Subsidiary are not relying on any representation or warranty except for those expressly set forth in Article 4 of this Agreement.

ARTICLE 6

C OVENANTS OF THE C OMPANY

The Company agrees that:

Section 6.01 . Conduct of the Company . From the date hereof until the earlier of the termination of this Agreement and the Effective Time, except as expressly permitted or contemplated by this Agreement or set forth in Section 6.01 of the Company Disclosure Schedule, as required by applicable Law or as consented to in writing by Parent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed), the Company shall, and shall cause each of its Subsidiaries to, conduct its business in the ordinary course consistent with past practice in all material respects, and use its reasonable best efforts to (i) preserve intact its present business organization, (ii) maintain in effect all material foreign, federal, state and local licenses, permits, consents, franchises, approvals and authorizations, (iii) keep available the services of its directors, officers and key employees and (iv) maintain satisfactory relationships with its key customers, lenders, suppliers, licensors, licensees, distributors and others having material business relationships with it. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, from the date hereof until the earlier of the termination of this Agreement and the Effective Time, except (i) as expressly permitted or contemplated by this Agreement or set forth in Section 6.01 of the Company Disclosure Schedule, (ii) as required by applicable Law, or (iii) as consented to in writing by Parent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed), the Company shall not, nor shall it permit any of its Subsidiaries to:

(a) amend its certificate of incorporation, bylaws or other similar organizational documents (whether by merger, consolidation or otherwise);

(b) adopt a plan of or effect a complete or partial liquidation, dissolution, merger, consolidation, restructuring, conversion, recapitalization or other reorganization (other than with respect to dormant Subsidiaries);

 

48


(c) (i) split, combine or reclassify any Company Securities or Company Subsidiary Securities, (ii) declare, set aside or pay any dividend or other distribution (whether in cash, stock or property or any combination thereof) in respect of any Company Securities or Company Subsidiary Securities, or engage in any intercompany transactions between or among the Company and its Subsidiaries, in each case other than any dividends or other intercompany transactions solely between or among the Company and its wholly owned Subsidiaries, or (iii) redeem, repurchase or otherwise acquire or offer to redeem, repurchase, or otherwise acquire any Company Securities or Company Subsidiary Securities; except (A) pursuant to the exercise of Company Stock Options or Company Stock Appreciation Rights or the settlement of Company Restricted Stock Units or Company Performance Shares, in each case that are outstanding on the date of this Agreement and as required pursuant to the terms of the Equity Plans governing such awards as in effect on the date of this Agreement, or (B) conversion of the Series A Preferred Stock in accordance with the terms of the Company Certificate of Designation or payment of dividends with respect to or redemption of the Series A Preferred Stock as required by the terms of the Company Certificate of Designation;

(d) (i) issue, deliver or sell, or authorize the issuance, delivery or sale of, any Company Securities or Company Subsidiary Securities, other than the issuance of (A) any shares of Company Common Stock upon the exercise of Company Stock Options or Company Stock Appreciation Rights or the settlement of Company Restricted Stock Units, Company Performance Shares or Restricted Shares that in each case are outstanding on the date of this Agreement, and as required pursuant to the terms of the Equity Plans governing such awards as in effect on the date of this Agreement, (B) any shares of Company Common Stock pursuant to the ESPP in compliance with Section 7.03(e), (C) any Company Subsidiary Securities to the Company or any other wholly owned Subsidiary of the Company and (D) upon conversion of the Series A Preferred Stock in accordance with the terms of the Company Certificate of Designation or payment of dividends with respect to or redemption of the Series A Preferred Stock as required by the terms of the Company Certificate of Designation or (ii) amend any term of any Company Security or any Company Subsidiary Security (in each case, whether by merger, consolidation or otherwise);

(e) incur any capital expenditures or any obligations or liabilities in respect thereof, except for (i) those contemplated by the capital expenditure budgets for the projects set forth on Section 6.01(e) of the Company Disclosure Schedule and (ii) any unbudgeted capital expenditures not to exceed $2,000,000 individually or $6,000,000 in the aggregate;

(f) acquire (by merger, consolidation, acquisition of stock or assets or otherwise), directly or indirectly, any assets, securities, properties, interests or

 

49


businesses, other than (i) raw materials, supplies and goods acquired in the ordinary course of business of the Company and its Subsidiaries in a manner that is consistent with past practice and (ii) acquisitions with a purchase price (including assumed indebtedness and the present value of all contingent future payments) that does not exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate;

(g) sell, lease, license or otherwise transfer or dispose of, abandon or permit to lapse, or create or incur any Lien on, any of the Company’s or its Subsidiaries’ assets, securities, properties, interests or businesses, other than (i) sales, leases or licenses of products, inventory or equipment in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice and (ii) sales, leases or licenses of assets, securities, properties, interests or businesses with a sale price (including any related assumed indebtedness and the present value of any contingent future payments) that does not exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate;

(h) sell, lease, license or otherwise transfer or dispose of, abandon or permit to lapse, fail to take any action necessary to maintain, protect, or create or incur any Lien (other than Permitted Liens) on, any material Owned Intellectual Property Right or material Licensed Intellectual Property Right (other than non-exclusive licenses granted in the ordinary course of business);

(i) other than in connection with actions permitted by Section 6.01(e) or Section 6.01(f), make any loans, advances or capital contributions to, or investments in, any other Person, other than in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice or to wholly owned Subsidiaries of the Company;

(j) create, incur, assume, or otherwise become liable with respect to any indebtedness for borrowed money or guarantees thereof (whether evidenced by a note or other instrument, pursuant to an issuance of debt securities, financing lease or otherwise) other than (i) indebtedness in amounts not to exceed $5,000,000 in the aggregate, (ii) indebtedness solely between the Company and a wholly owned Subsidiary of the Company or between wholly owned Subsidiaries of the Company, (iii) guarantees by the Company of any indebtedness of any wholly-owned Subsidiary that is otherwise permitted to be incurred under this Section 6.01(j) or (iv) guarantees by any Subsidiary of the Company of any indebtedness of the Company;

(k) amend or modify in any material respect, or terminate, cancel, renew or extend, any Material Contract (other than distribution agreements that incorporate the Company’s standard terms and conditions and agency agreements) or Lease, or enter into any contract that would have constituted such a Material Contract or Lease had it been in effect as of the date hereof (including by amendment of any contract that is not a Material Contract or Lease so that such contract becomes a contract that would have been a Material Contract or

 

50


Lease had it been in effect as of the date hereof), or waive, release, assign or fail to exercise or pursue any material right, claim or benefit of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries under any such contract, in each case, other than in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice;

(l) except as required by Applicable Law or the terms of an Employee Plan as in effect on the date hereof, (i) implement any new severance plans or retention plans, modify the Company Transition Incentive Plan, modify any existing, or enter into any new, continuity, retention or similar agreement (other than in a manner that will not increase the cost of such agreements by an amount equal to $15 million less the value of payments to be made under the Company Transition Incentive Plan), in each case with existing or new Service Providers, (ii) increase the compensation or benefits provided to any current or former Service Provider, other than base salary increases of not more than 4% on average in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice, (iii) grant any equity, equity-based or other incentive awards to, or discretionarily accelerate the vesting or payment of any such awards held by, any current or former Service Provider or (iv) except as permitted pursuant to clause (i), establish, adopt, enter into or amend any Employee Plan or Collective Bargaining Agreement;

(m) change the Company’s methods of accounting, except as required by concurrent changes in GAAP or Applicable Law, including Regulation S-X of the 1934 Act, as agreed to by its independent public accountants;

(n) settle, or offer to settle, (i) any material litigation, investigation, arbitration, proceeding or other claim or dispute involving or against the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, (ii) any stockholder litigation, demand or dispute against the Company, any of its Subsidiaries or any of their respective officers or directors or (iii) any litigation, arbitration, proceeding or other claim or dispute that relates to the transactions contemplated hereby, in each case other than the settlement of any litigation, investigation, arbitration, proceeding or other claim or dispute solely for monetary damages (without any admission of wrongdoing, liability or other adverse consequences or restrictions on the Company, Parent, Merger Subsidiary or the Surviving Corporation) not in excess of $500,000 individually or $3,000,000 in the aggregate; provided that the foregoing exception shall not apply to any matters covered by Section 6.06;

(o) except as may be required by Applicable Law, make or change any material Tax election, change any annual tax accounting period for any material Taxes, adopt or change any method of tax accounting for any material Taxes, amend any material Tax Returns, enter into any closing agreement in respect of material Taxes, settle any claim, audit or assessment in respect of material Taxes, or surrender any right to claim a material Tax refund, offset or other reduction in Tax liability;

 

51


(p) fail to maintain existing material insurance policies or comparable replacement policies; or

(q) agree, resolve or commit to do any of the foregoing.

Section 6.02. Company Stockholder Meeting; Company Proxy Statement . (a) The Company shall use its reasonable best efforts to cause a meeting of its stockholders (the “ Company Stockholder Meeting ”) to be duly called and held as soon as reasonably practicable (and in any event will use reasonable best efforts to cause the meeting to be held no later than 50 days after (i) the tenth calendar day after the preliminary Company Proxy Statement therefor has been filed with the SEC if by such date the SEC has not informed the Company that it intends to review the Company Proxy Statement or (ii) if the SEC has by such date informed the Company that it intends to review the Company Proxy Statement, the date on which the SEC confirms that it has no further comments on the Company Proxy Statement) for the purpose of voting on the approval and adoption of this Agreement, which may be the Company’s annual meeting of stockholders. The Company shall not, without the consent of Parent, adjourn or postpone the Company Stockholder Meeting; provided that the Company may, without the consent of Parent, adjourn or postpone the Company Stockholder Meeting (A) if as of the time for which the Company Stockholder Meeting is originally scheduled (as set forth in the Company Proxy Statement) there are insufficient shares of Company Common Stock represented (either in person or by proxy) to constitute a quorum necessary to conduct the business of the Company Stockholder Meeting, (B) if the failure to adjourn or postpone the Company Stockholder Meeting would reasonably be expected to be a violation of Applicable Law or for the distribution of any required supplement or amendment to the Company Proxy Statement or (C) for up to three periods, neither of which shall exceed ten Business Days, to solicit additional proxies if the Company reasonably determines that it is advisable or necessary to do so in order to obtain the Company Stockholder Approval.

(b) In connection with the Company Stockholder Meeting, the Company shall use its reasonable best efforts to (i) prepare and file with the SEC the preliminary Company Proxy Statement as soon as reasonably practicable (and in any event will use reasonable best efforts to file the preliminary Company Proxy Statement no later than 30 days from the date hereof), (ii) cause the Company Proxy Statement and any amendments or supplements thereto, when filed, to comply in all material respects with all legal requirements applicable thereto, (iii) respond as promptly as reasonably practicable to and resolve all comments received from the SEC or its staff concerning the Company Proxy Statement and all other proxy materials and (iv) cause the Company Proxy Statement to be mailed to its stockholders as promptly as reasonably practicable after resolution of all such comments. Subject to Section 6.03(b), the Board of

 

52


Directors shall (A) recommend approval and adoption of this Agreement by the Company’s stockholders, (B) use its reasonable best efforts to obtain the Company Stockholder Approval, (C) not effect an Adverse Recommendation Change and (D) use its reasonable best efforts to otherwise comply in all material respects with all legal requirements applicable to such meeting. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, unless this Agreement has been terminated in accordance with its terms, this Agreement and the Merger shall be submitted to the Company’s stockholders at the Company Stockholder Meeting whether or not an Adverse Recommendation Change shall have occurred.

Section 6.03. No Solicitation; Other Offers . (a)  General Prohibitions . Neither the Company nor any of its Subsidiaries shall, nor shall the Company or any of its Subsidiaries authorize or permit any of its or their officers, directors, employees, investment bankers, attorneys, accountants, consultants or other agents or advisors (“ Representatives ”) to, directly or indirectly, (i) solicit, initiate or knowingly take any action to facilitate or encourage the submission of any Acquisition Proposal, (ii) enter into or participate in any discussions or negotiations with, furnish any nonpublic information relating to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or afford access to the business, properties, assets, books or records of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to, otherwise knowingly cooperate in any way with, or knowingly assist, participate in, facilitate or encourage any effort by any Third Party that, to the knowledge of the Company, is seeking to make, or has made, an Acquisition Proposal, (iii) fail to include in the Proxy Statement, or withdraw or modify in a manner adverse to Parent the Company Board Recommendation (or recommend an Acquisition Proposal or make any public statement that contradicts the Company Board Recommendation) (any of the foregoing in this clause (iii), an “ Adverse Recommendation Change ”), (iv) approve any transaction under, or any Person becoming an “interested stockholder” under, Section 203 of Delaware Law or (v) enter into any agreement in principle, letter of intent, term sheet, merger agreement, acquisition agreement, option agreement or other similar instrument relating to an Acquisition Proposal. It is agreed that any violation of the restrictions on the Company set forth in this Section by any Representative of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries shall be a breach of this Section by the Company.

(b) Exceptions . Notwithstanding Section 6.03(a), but subject to compliance in all material respects with this Section 6.03(b) and Sections 6.03(c) and (d), at any time prior to the adoption of this Agreement by the Company’s stockholders:

(i) the Company, directly or indirectly through advisors, agents or other intermediaries or Representatives, may (A) engage in negotiations or discussions with any Third Party and its Representatives

 

53


that, subject to the Company’s compliance with Section 6.03(a) in all material respects, has made after the date of this Agreement a bona fide , written Acquisition Proposal that the Board of Directors reasonably believes will or would reasonably be expected to lead to a Superior Proposal, and waive such Third Party’s noncompliance with the provisions of any standstill agreement to the extent necessary to permit such negotiations or discussions and (B) furnish to such Third Party or its Representatives non-public information relating to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries pursuant to a confidentiality agreement (a copy of which shall be provided for informational purposes only to Parent) with such Third Party on substantially the same terms (other than standstill obligations) or terms more favorable to the Company than those contained in the confidentiality agreement dated November 11, 2013 between the Company and Parent (the “ Confidentiality Agreement ”); provided that all such information (to the extent that such information has not been previously provided or made available to Parent) is provided or made available to Parent, as the case may be, prior to or substantially concurrently with the time it is provided or made available to such Third Party); and

(ii) subject to compliance with Section 6.03(d), the Board of Directors may make an Adverse Recommendation Change (A) following receipt of a bona fide written Acquisition Proposal that the Board of Directors has determined constitutes a Superior Proposal or (B) in response to material events or changes in circumstances arising after the date hereof that were neither known to nor reasonably foreseeable by the Board of Directors as of or prior to the date hereof (an “ Intervening Event ”), in each case referred to in the foregoing clauses (A) and (B) only if the Board of Directors determines in good faith, after consultation with outside legal counsel, that the failure to take such action would be inconsistent with its fiduciary duties under Delaware Law. For the avoidance of doubt, notwithstanding any Adverse Recommendation Change, until the termination of this Agreement in accordance with its terms (x) in no event may the Company (A) enter into any agreement in principle, letter of intent, term sheet, merger agreement, acquisition agreement, option agreement or other similar instrument relating to an Acquisition Proposal (other than a confidentiality agreement permitted under Section 6.03(b)(i) above), or (B) without limitation of Section 6.03(b)(i) above, make, facilitate or provide information for use by any Third Party in any SEC or other regulatory filings in connection with the transactions contemplated by any Acquisition Proposal, and (y) the Company shall otherwise remain subject to all of its obligations under this Agreement.

 

54


In addition, nothing contained herein shall prevent the Board of Directors from (1) complying with Rule 14e-2(a) under the 1934 Act with regard to an Acquisition Proposal (including any disclosure to stockholders) so long as any action taken or statement made to so comply is consistent with this Section 6.03; provided that any such action taken or statement made that relates to an Acquisition Proposal shall be deemed to be an Adverse Recommendation Change unless the Board of Directors reaffirms the Company Board Recommendation in such statement or in connection with such action, (2) making any disclosure to the Company’s stockholders if the Company Board has determined in good faith, after consultation with its legal advisors, that the failure to do so would be inconsistent with the directors’ fiduciary obligations under Delaware Law, including with respect to the fact that an Acquisition Proposal has been made, the identity of the party making such Acquisition Proposal or the material terms of such Acquisition Proposal (and no such disclosure shall, taken by itself, be deemed to be an Adverse Recommendation Change); provided that any such disclosure that relates to an Acquisition Proposal shall be deemed to be an Adverse Recommendation Change unless the Board of Directors reaffirms the Company Board Recommendation in such disclosure or in connection therewith, or (3) issuing a “stop, look and listen” disclosure or similar communication of the type contemplated by Rule 14d-9(f) under the 1934 Act.

(c) Required Notices . The Company shall notify Parent promptly (but in no event later than 24 hours or, if received on a day that is not a Business Day, the following Business Day) after receipt by the Company (or any of its Representatives) of any Acquisition Proposal, any indication that a Third Party is considering making an Acquisition Proposal or any request for information relating to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or for access to the business, properties, assets, books or records of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries by any Third Party that, to the knowledge of the Company, may be considering making, or has made, an Acquisition Proposal. The Company shall provide such notice orally and in writing and shall identify the Third Party making, and the material terms and conditions of, any such Acquisition Proposal, indication or request, subject to such restrictions as may exist under confidentiality agreements as in effect on the date hereof. The Company shall keep Parent fully informed, on a prompt basis, of any material changes to the status, terms or conditions of any such Acquisition Proposal, indication or request and shall promptly (but in no event later than 24 hours after receipt or, if received on a day that is not a Business Day, the following Business Day) provide to Parent copies of all correspondence and written materials sent or provided to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries that describes any material terms or conditions of any Acquisition Proposal.

(d) “Last Look.” Further, the Board of Directors shall not make an Adverse Recommendation Change pursuant to Section 6.03(b)(ii) (or terminate

 

55


this Agreement pursuant to Section 10.01(d)(i)), unless (i) the Company promptly provides written notice to Parent, in writing at least three Business Days before taking such action, of its intention to do so (which notice shall not constitute an Adverse Recommendation Change), attaching (A) in the case of an Adverse Recommendation Change to be made following receipt of an Acquisition Proposal that the Board of Directors has determined constitutes a Superior Proposal, the most current version of the proposed agreement under which such Superior Proposal is proposed to be consummated and the identity of the Third Party making the Acquisition Proposal, or (B) in the case of an Adverse Recommendation Change to be made pursuant to an Intervening Event, a reasonably detailed description of the underlying facts giving rise to, and the reasons for making, such Adverse Recommendation Change, and (ii) Parent does not make, within three Business Days after its receipt of that written notification, a binding and irrevocable written offer that (1) in the case of any Adverse Recommendation Change to be made following receipt of a Superior Proposal, is at least as favorable to the stockholders of the Company as such Superior Proposal (it being understood and agreed that any amendment to the financial terms or other material terms of such Superior Proposal shall require a new written notification from the Company and a new three Business Day period under this Section 6.03(d)) or (2) in the case of an Adverse Recommendation Change to be made pursuant to an Intervening Event, obviates the need for such Adverse Recommendation Change. The Company agrees that, during any applicable three Business Day period referred to in this Section 6.03(d), the Company shall negotiate in good faith with Parent regarding any revisions to the terms of this Agreement proposed by Parent.

(e) Definition of Superior Proposal . For purposes of this Agreement, “ Superior Proposal ” means a bona fide written Acquisition Proposal for at least a majority of the equity or voting securities of the Company and its Subsidiaries or assets representing at least a majority of the consolidated revenues of the Company and its Subsidiaries, that was not solicited in violation of Section 6.03(a) in all material respects and which is on terms that the Board of Directors determines in good faith by a majority vote, after considering the advice of a financial advisor of nationally recognized reputation and outside legal counsel and taking into account all the terms and conditions of the Acquisition Proposal, including any break-up fees, expense reimbursement provisions, the availability of any financing (if a cash transaction) and conditions to consummation, are more favorable from a financial point of view to the Company’s stockholders than as provided hereunder (taking into account any proposal by Parent to amend the terms of this Agreement pursuant to Section 6.03(d)).

(f) Obligation of the Company to Terminate Existing Discussions . The Company shall, and shall cause its Subsidiaries and its and their Representatives to, cease immediately and cause to be terminated any and all existing activities,

 

56


discussions or negotiations, if any, with any Third Party and its Representatives conducted prior to the date hereof with respect to any Acquisition Proposal. The Company shall promptly request that each Third Party, if any, that has executed a confidentiality agreement within the 24-month period prior to the date hereof in connection with its consideration of any Acquisition Proposal return or destroy all confidential information heretofore furnished to such Person by or on behalf of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries (and all analyses and other materials prepared by or on behalf of such Person that contains, reflects or analyzes that information) as promptly as practicable, in accordance with, and to the extent provided for in, any applicable confidentiality agreement and subject to any contractual retention rights of any such Third Party.

Section 6.04. Access to Information. From the date hereof until the Effective Time and subject to Applicable Law and the Confidentiality Agreement, the Company shall (i) give to Parent, its counsel, financial advisors, auditors and other authorized representatives reasonable access (during regular business hours upon reasonable notice) to the offices, properties, books and records of the Company and its Subsidiaries, (ii) furnish to Parent, its counsel, financial advisors, auditors and other authorized representatives such financial and operating data and other information as such Persons may reasonably request and (iii) instruct its employees, counsel, financial advisors, auditors and other authorized representatives to cooperate with Parent in its investigation of the Company and its Subsidiaries. Any investigation pursuant to this Section shall be conducted in such manner as not to interfere unreasonably with the conduct of the business of the Company and its Subsidiaries. No information or knowledge obtained by Parent in any investigation pursuant to this Section shall affect or be deemed to modify any representation or warranty made by the Company hereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company shall not be required to (A) furnish, or provide any access to, any information to any Person not a party to, or otherwise covered by, the Confidentiality Agreement or a similar agreement with the Company with respect to such information or (B) provide access to or furnish any information if doing so would violate any Contract, or where such access to information would involve the waiver or loss of an attorney-client or work product privilege so long as the Company has reasonably cooperated with Parent to permit such inspection of, or to disclose such, information on a basis that does not violate such Contract or compromise or waive such privilege with respect thereto; provided , however , that such access and information shall be disclosed or granted, as applicable, to external counsel for Parent to the extent reasonably required for the purpose of complying with applicable Antitrust Laws. With respect to any information disclosed pursuant to this Section 6.04, Parent and Merger Subsidiary shall comply with, and shall instruct their respective Representatives to comply with, all of their respective obligations under the Confidentiality Agreement or any similar agreement entered into between the Company and any Person to whom the Company or any of is Representative

 

57


provides information pursuant to this Section 6.04, and all information disclosed to Parent, Merger Subsidiary or any of their respective Representatives pursuant to this Section 6.04 shall be subject to the terms of the Confidentiality Agreement. The confidentiality obligations set forth in the Confidentiality Agreement shall continue in full force and effect in accordance with its terms until the earlier of the Effective Time or the expiration of the Confidentiality Agreement according to its terms.

Section 6.05. Compensation Arrangements . Prior to the Effective Time, the Company shall take all such steps as may be required to cause any dispositions or other transactions in Company Common Stock (including derivative securities with respect to Company Common Stock) resulting from the transactions contemplated by Article 2 of this Agreement by each individual who is subject to the reporting requirements of Section 16(a) of the 1934 Act with respect to the Company to be exempt under Rule 16b-3 promulgated under the 1934 Act.

Section 6.06. Certain Litigation. The Company shall give Parent notice of and the opportunity to participate in the defense or settlement of any litigation (including derivative claims) against the Company and/or its directors or executive officers relating to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement. The Company agrees that it shall not settle or offer to settle any litigation commenced on or after the date of this Agreement against it or any of its directors or executive officers relating to this Agreement, the Merger or any other transaction contemplated hereby or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Parent (not to be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed).

Section 6.07. Company Series A Preferred Stock . Prior to the Effective Time, the Company shall cause each outstanding share of Company Series A Preferred Stock to be converted into shares of Company Common Stock in accordance with the terms of the Company Certificate of Designation and, as of the Effective Time, no shares of Company Series A Preferred Stock shall be issued or outstanding.

ARTICLE 7

C OVENANTS OF P ARENT

Parent agrees that:

Section 7.01. Obligations of Merger Subsidiary . Parent shall take all action necessary to cause Merger Subsidiary to perform its obligations under this Agreement and to consummate the Merger on the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.

 

58


Section 7.02. Director and Officer Liability . Parent shall cause the Surviving Corporation, and the Surviving Corporation hereby agrees, to do the following:

(a) For six years after the Effective Time, the Surviving Corporation shall indemnify and hold harmless the present and former officers and directors of the Company (each, an “ Indemnified Person ”) in respect of acts or omissions occurring at or prior to the Effective Time to the fullest extent provided under the Company’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws in effect on the date hereof or any indemnity agreements between the Company and its present and former officers in effect as of the date hereof, and, with respect to any currently serving directors and officers of the Company, Parent and the Surviving Corporation shall be jointly and severally liable to pay and perform in a timely manner such obligations; provided that such indemnification shall be subject to any limitation imposed from time to time under Applicable Law and such indemnity agreements.

(b) For six years after the Effective Time, Parent shall cause to be maintained in effect provisions in the Surviving Corporation’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws (or in such documents of any successor to the business of the Surviving Corporation) regarding elimination of liability of directors, indemnification of officers, directors and employees and advancement of expenses that are no less advantageous to the intended beneficiaries than the corresponding provisions in the Company’s certificate of incorporation and bylaws in existence on the date of this Agreement.

(c) Prior to the Effective Time, the Company shall or, if the Company is unable to, Parent shall cause the Surviving Corporation as of the Effective Time to obtain and fully pay the premium for a non-cancellable extension (or “tail”) of the Company’s directors’ and officers’ insurance policies and fiduciary liability insurance policies (collectively, the “ D&O Insurance ”) in place as of the date hereof, in each case for a claims reporting or discovery period of at least six years from and after the Effective Time (such period, the “ Tail Period ”), with terms, conditions, retentions and limits of liability that are at least as favorable as those contained in the Company’s D&O Insurance policies in effect as of the date hereof. Parent shall, and shall cause the Surviving Corporation to, maintain such “tail” policies in full force and effect through such six year period. If the Company or the Surviving Corporation for any reason fails to obtain such “tail” insurance policies as of the Effective Time, then from the Effective Time through the end of the Tail Period, Parent shall, or shall cause the Surviving Corporation to, maintain in effect the Company’s current D&O Insurance covering each Person currently covered by the Company’s D&O Insurance for acts or omissions occurring prior to the Effective Time with respect to any matter claimed against such Person by reason of him or her serving in the applicable capacity on terms with respect to such coverage and amounts no less favorable than those of such

 

59


D&O Insurance policies in effect on the date of this Agreement; provided that if the aggregate cost for such insurance coverage exceeds 200% of the current annual premium paid by the Company (which amount is set forth in Section 7.02(c) of the Company Disclosure Schedule), the Surviving Corporation shall instead be obligated to obtain D&O Insurance with the best available coverage with respect to matters occurring at or prior to the Effective Time for an aggregate cost of 200% of the current annual premium.

(d) If Parent, the Surviving Corporation or any of its successors or assigns (i) consolidates with or merges into any other Person and shall not be the continuing or surviving corporation or entity of such consolidation or merger, or (ii) transfers or conveys all or substantially all of its properties and assets to any Person, then, and in each such case, to the extent necessary, proper provision shall be made so that the successors and assigns of Parent or the Surviving Corporation, as the case may be, shall assume the obligations set forth in this Section 7.02.

(e) The rights of each Indemnified Person under this Section 7.02 shall be in addition to any rights such Person may have under the certificate of incorporation or bylaws of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, under Delaware Law or any other Applicable Law or under any agreement of any Indemnified Person with the Company or any of its Subsidiaries. These rights shall survive consummation of the Merger and are intended to benefit, and shall be enforceable by, each Indemnified Person.

Section 7.03. Employee Matters . (a) During the period beginning at the Effective Time and ending on the first anniversary thereof, Parent shall, or shall cause its Subsidiaries to, provide to each employee who is actively employed by the Company or its Subsidiaries at the Effective Time (each, a “ Covered Employee ”) and who is located primarily (i) in the United States, compensation and benefits that are substantially comparable in the aggregate to the compensation and benefits (other than equity compensation and other long-term incentives, change in control, retention, transition, stay or similar arrangements) that were provided to such Covered Employee under the Employee Plans set forth on Section 4.17(a) of the Company Disclosure Schedule immediately prior to the Effective Time and (ii) outside the United States, compensation and benefits that, as determined by Parent in its sole discretion, either (x) were provided to such Covered Employee under the Employee Plans set forth on Section 4.17(a) of the Company Disclosure Schedule immediately prior to the Effective Time or (y) are provided to similarly situated employees of Parent and its Subsidiaries (other than the Company and its Subsidiaries).

(b) Without limiting paragraph (a) of this Section 7.03, during the period beginning at the Effective Time and ending on June 30, 2014, Parent shall cause the Company to continue to perform the Company’s obligations with

 

60


respect to any Covered Employee who is covered by the ENTrigue severance policy in accordance with the terms of such policy, as such terms are set forth on Section 7.03(b) of the Company Disclosure Schedule.

(c) Crediting of Payments . In the event any Covered Employee first becomes eligible to participate under any employee benefit plan, program, policy or arrangement of Parent or any of its Subsidiaries (each, a “ Parent Plan ”) following the Effective Time, Parent shall, or shall cause its Subsidiaries to, use reasonable best efforts to: (i) waive any preexisting condition exclusions and waiting periods with respect to participation and coverage requirements applicable to such Covered Employee under any Parent Plan providing medical, dental or vision benefits to the same extent such limitation would have been waived or satisfied under the Employee Plan such Covered Employee participated in immediately prior to coverage under such Parent Plan and (ii) provide such Covered Employee with credit for any copayments and deductibles paid under an Employee Plan prior to such Covered Employee’s coverage under any Parent Plan during the calendar year in which such amount was paid, to the same extent such credit was given under the Employee Plan such Covered Employee participated in immediately prior to coverage under such Parent Plan in satisfying any applicable deductible or out-of-pocket requirements under such Parent Plan.

(d) Service Crediting . As of the Effective Time, Parent shall, or shall cause its Subsidiaries to, recognize all service of each Covered Employee prior to the Effective Time, with the Company and its Subsidiaries for vesting and eligibility purposes (but not for benefit accrual purposes, except for vacation and severance, as applicable). In no event shall anything contained in this Section 7.03 result in any duplication of benefits for the same period of service.

(e) Company 401(k) Plan . Effective as of immediately prior to the Effective Time, unless otherwise directed in writing by Parent at least five Business Days prior to the Effective Time, the Company shall terminate the Company’s Retirement Savings and Investment Plan, pursuant to resolutions of the Board of Directors that are reasonably satisfactory to Parent. In connection with the termination of such plan, Parent shall permit each Covered Employee to make rollover contributions of “eligible rollover distributions” (within the meaning of Section 401(a)(31) of the Code, but excluding all participant loans) in cash in an amount equal to the eligible rollover distribution portion of the account balance distributed to each such Covered Employee from such plan to an “eligible retirement plan” (within the meaning of Section 401(a)(31) of the Code) of Parent or any of its Subsidiaries.

(f) ESPP . Prior to the Effective Time, the Board of Directors or the appropriate committee thereof shall take all actions, including adopting any resolutions or amendments, with respect to the Company’s Employee Stock

 

61


Purchase Plan (the “ ESPP ”) to: (i) cause the “Offering Period” (as defined in the ESPP) ongoing as of the date of this Agreement to be the final Offering Period under the ESPP and the options under the ESPP to be exercised on the earlier of (x) the scheduled purchase date for such Offering Period and (y) the date that is seven Business Days prior to the Effective Time (with any participant payroll deductions not applied to the purchase of shares returned to the participant), (ii) prohibit participants in the ESPP from increasing their payroll deductions from those in effect on the date of this Agreement and (iii) terminate the ESPP effective immediately prior to the Effective Time.

(g) Employee Data . Not later than ten Business Days after the date hereof and to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, the Company will provide Parent with a schedule that sets forth, for each employee of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, his or her name, title, annual base salary, most recent annual bonus received, current annual bonus opportunity, employer, hire date, location, whether full- or part-time and whether active or on leave (and, if on leave, the nature of the leave and the expected return date). Five Business Days prior to the Effective Time and to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, the Company will provide Parent with a revised version of the schedule described in the immediately preceding sentence, updated as of ten Business Days prior to the Effective Time.

(h) Labor Groups . The parties agree to work together in good faith to consult with or obtain the consent of any labor or trade union, works council or other employee representative body as may be required to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby.

(i) Without limiting the generality of Section 11.06, nothing in this Section 7.03, express or implied, (i) is intended to or shall confer upon any Person other than the parties hereto, including any Covered Employee or any former employee, director, officer or individual independent contract of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, any right, benefit or remedy of any nature whatsoever under or by reason of this Agreement, (ii) shall establish, or constitute an amendment, termination or modification of, or an undertaking to amend, establish, terminate or modify, any benefit plan, program, agreement or arrangement, (iii) shall alter or limit the ability of Parent or any of its Subsidiaries (or, following the Effective Time, the Company or any of its Subsidiaries) to amend, modify or terminate any benefit plan, program, agreement or arrangement at any time assumed, established, sponsored or maintained by any of them or (iv) shall create any obligation on the part of Parent or its Subsidiaries (or, following the Effective Time, the Company or any of its Subsidiaries) to employ any Covered Employee for any period following the Effective Time.

 

62


ARTICLE 8

C OVENANTS OF P ARENT AND THE C OMPANY

The parties hereto agree that:

Section 8.01. Reasonable Best Efforts . (a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, the Company, Parent Holdco and Parent shall use their reasonable best efforts to take, or cause to be taken, all actions and to do, or cause to be done, all things necessary, proper or advisable under Applicable Law to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement as promptly as practicable and no later than the End Date, including (i) preparing and filing as promptly as practicable with any Governmental Authority or other Third Party all documentation to effect all necessary filings, notices, petitions, statements, registrations, submissions of information, applications and other documents and (ii) obtaining and maintaining all approvals, consents, registrations, permits, authorizations and other confirmations required to be obtained from any Governmental Authority or other Third Party that are necessary, proper or advisable to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, including by defending, contesting and resisting any actual or threatened claim, suit, action, objection or other proceeding brought by a Governmental Authority or other Third Party challenging any transaction contemplated by this Agreement as violative of any Applicable Law, including Antitrust Laws, and seeking to have vacated, lifted, reversed or overturned any decree, judgment, injunction or other order, whether temporary, preliminary or permanent, that prohibits, prevents or restricts consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement by the End Date or which would materially impair or materially delay the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement; provided that the parties hereto understand and agree that the reasonable best efforts of any party hereto shall not be deemed to include (A) entering into any settlement, undertaking, consent decree, stipulation or agreement with any Governmental Authority in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby, or (B) divesting or otherwise holding separate (including by establishing a trust or otherwise), or taking any other action (or otherwise agreeing to do any of the foregoing) with respect to any of its or the Surviving Corporation’s Subsidiaries or any of their respective Affiliates’ businesses, assets or properties (any such action in the foregoing clause (A) or (B), a “ Burdensome Condition ”), other than the Agreed Actions. For the avoidance of doubt, without the prior written consent of Parent, the Company shall not offer, propose or agree to any Burdensome Condition, including any Agreed Action. “ Agreed Actions ” means negotiation of and entry into a non-exclusive license on a worldwide basis with one or two third parties (in no case shall this provision require licenses that would allow more than one third party to manufacture or have manufactured, or sell or have sold, products in overlapping fields of use), for use solely in the field of radiofrequency energy in the sports medicine field of use, with respect to any or all of the following: (i) all

 

63


of the “Coblation” patents licensed by the Company or its Affiliates to Parent or its Affiliates enabling a third party to have manufactured or supplied, under commercially reasonable terms, the same products that Parent or its Affiliates have manufactured or supplied as of the Effective Time, and improvements thereto by the third party, under existing agreements with the Company or its Affiliates, and any other patents of Parent or its Affiliates, in each case to the extent embodied in Parent’s or its Affiliates’ “DYONICS RF” products as of the Effective Time, (ii) all patents owned or licensed by Parent and its Affiliates to the extent embodied in their “E-FLEX” products at the Effective Time, and improvements thereto by the third party, (iii) intellectual property (excluding trademarks, trade names, brand names and domain names) and technical, development and other related information and files, in each case to the extent related to any research and development efforts by Parent and its Affiliates that exist prior to the Effective Time with respect to new products or technology of Parent and its Affiliates using radiofrequency energy in the sports medicine field of use, and (iv) all patents owned or licensed by Parent and its Affiliates as of the Effective Time to the extent embodied in other products, and improvements thereto by the third party, ( i.e. , other than those covered in clauses (i) and (ii) but not the Excluded Products) of Parent and its Affiliates using radiofrequency energy in the sports medicine field of use; provided that in no event shall Parent or its Affiliates be required to license patents embodied in any such other product under this clause (iv) to the extent that the product associated with such patents, individually or taken together with all other products associated with patents licensed pursuant to this clause (iv), represented more than US $40 million of aggregate consolidated revenues of Parent Holdco for the twelve months ended November 30, 2013 (for the avoidance of doubt, revenues associated with products incorporating “Coblation” intellectual property and with “DYONICS RF” products shall not be included for purposes of calculating the aggregate consolidated revenues in this clause (iv)) (all of the products described in clauses (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) above, including, for the avoidance of doubt, the DYONICS RF, E-FLEX, SCULPTOR and SAPHYRE product lines and Parent’s and its Affiliates’ RF consumables, the “ Covered Products ”), and (v) know-how, design history files, technical information and related documentation and intellectual property owned or licensed by Parent and its Affiliates as of the Effective Time related to the Covered Products which are reasonably necessary to allow a licensee to register, make, use and sell Covered Products, and to make improvements to the Covered Products, on a worldwide basis. Notwithstanding the foregoing, (A) in no event shall the Covered Products include (x) the Company’s or its Affiliates’ products utilizing temperature sensing technology or (y) “ELECTROBLADE” (the products described in (x) and (y) collectively, the “ Excluded Products ”) and (B) to the extent that any third party’s consent is required in connection with the Agreed Actions the parties shall only be required to take commercially reasonable efforts to obtain such consents. “Agreed Actions” shall also include negotiation of and entry into transitional technical

 

64


support agreements, transitional manufacturing or interim supply agreements and other ancillary agreements that Governmental Authorities customarily require in connection with settlements, undertakings, consent decrees, stipulations and other agreements related to Antitrust Laws that involve licenses of intellectual property, to the extent reasonably necessary to permit a licensee to enter into the manufacture and sale of Covered Products on a worldwide basis. For the avoidance of doubt, as used in the definition of “Agreed Actions,” Parent and its Affiliates excludes the Company and its Affiliates.

(b) In furtherance and not in limitation of the foregoing, each of Parent and the Company shall make an appropriate filing of a Notification and Report Form pursuant to the HSR Act with respect to the transactions contemplated hereby as promptly as practicable after the date of this Agreement and shall make such other filings or submissions with Governmental Authorities in the jurisdictions set forth in Section 9.01(b) of the Company Disclosure Schedule as promptly as practicable, and supply as promptly as practicable any additional information and documentary material that may be requested pursuant to the HSR Act or such other Antitrust Laws and shall use their reasonable best efforts to take all other actions necessary to cause the expiration or termination of the applicable waiting periods under the HSR Act and the receipt or occurrence of approvals, consents, registrations, permits, authorizations, clearances, non-actions, investigation closures and conclusions and other confirmations in the jurisdictions set forth in Section 9.01(b) of the Company Disclosure Schedule (if filings or submissions are made in such jurisdictions) as soon as practicable and no later than the End Date. In furtherance of and without limiting the foregoing, (i) to the extent permitted by applicable Law, Parent shall, on behalf of the parties, control and lead all joint filings, communications, defense, litigation, negotiations and strategy relating to the HSR Act or any other Competition Law regarding any of the transactions contemplated hereby; provided that each party shall consult, and share drafts of any filings or communications, a reasonable period of time in advance with respect to and consider in good faith the comments and views of the other party in connection with any filing, communication, defense, litigation, negotiation or strategy and any final decisions with respect thereto in each case relating to the HSR Act or any other Competition Law regarding any of the transactions contemplated hereby, to the extent reasonably practicable and to the extent permitted by applicable Law, and shall give the other party and its Representatives a reasonable advance opportunity to attend and participate in any in-person or telephonic meeting or conference with any Governmental Authority or, in connection with any litigation by a private party, relating to the HSR Act or any other Competition Law regarding any of the transactions contemplated hereby, and shall provide concurrent copies to the other party of any material written communications or filings with respect thereto, and (ii) notwithstanding the foregoing, neither Parent nor the Company shall without the consent of the other party (not to be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned) (A) consent

 

65


to any voluntary extension of any statutory deadline or waiting period or to any voluntary delay of the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement at the behest of any Governmental Authority acting pursuant to the HSR Act or any other Competition Law or (B) withdraw any Notification and Report Form filed pursuant to the HSR Act. Parent shall control negotiations with respect to Agreed Actions; provided that Parent and its Representatives shall keep the Company and its Representatives informed on a current and regular basis and consult and consider in good faith the comments and views of the Company in connection with (i) the timing and terms of any solicitation or proposal process undertaken in connection with any Agreed Actions and (ii) the status and terms of offers and negotiations with any third party with respect to any Agreed Actions, including in each case providing copies of any material proposals, counterproposals or agreements.

(c) Prior to the Closing, each party hereto shall (i) consult with the other parties hereto with respect to, and shall provide any necessary or appropriate information with respect to (and, in the case of correspondence, provide the other parties (or their counsel) copies of), all filings made by such party with any Governmental Authority or any other information supplied by such party to, or meetings, conferences or correspondence with, any Governmental Authority in connection with this Agreement, the Merger or the other transactions contemplated by this Agreement, (ii) permit the other parties or their counsel to review in advance, where appropriate, any information, correspondence or filing (and the documents submitted therewith) intended to be given by it to any Governmental Authority; provided that such materials may be supplied on an outside counsel only basis where they include competitively sensitive information, (iii) to the extent permitted by the applicable Governmental Authority, give the other parties or their counsel the opportunity to attend and participate in any meetings or conferences with such Governmental Authority and (iv) if such party receives a request for additional information or documentary material from any Governmental Authority with respect to the Merger or any of the other transactions contemplated by this Agreement, use reasonable best efforts to provide, or cause to be provided, after consultation with the other parties hereto, such additional information or material as promptly as practicable. Subject to Applicable Laws and the instructions of any Governmental Authority, the Company and Parent each shall keep the other apprised of the status of matters relating to the obtaining of any consents, approvals, registrations, authorizations, waivers, permits and orders contemplated by this Section 8.01 and Section 8.02.

(d) At Parent’s sole cost and expense, the Company shall, and shall cause its Subsidiaries and its and their respective officers, directors, employees, financial advisors, attorneys, accountants and other advisors, investment bankers and other Representatives to, use its commercially reasonable efforts to cooperate with Parent in its efforts to consummate the financing transactions that Parent or

 

66


Merger Subsidiary may undertake to finance the Merger and the other transactions contemplated by this Agreement; provided that Parent shall indemnify and hold harmless the Company and its Subsidiaries and its and their respective officers, directors, employees, financial advisors, attorneys, accountants and other advisors, investment bankers and other Representatives from and against any and all liabilities, losses, damages, claims, costs, expenses, interest, awards, judgments and penalties suffered or incurred in connection with such financing or any assistance or activities provided in connection therewith except that the foregoing shall not apply in the willful misconduct or gross negligence of the Company or its Subsidiaries and its and their respective officers, directors, employees, financial advisors, attorneys, accountants and other advisors, investment bankers and other Representatives. Such commercially reasonable efforts shall include, to the extent reasonably requested by Parent, (i) providing direct contact between prospective financing sources and the senior management of the Company (including participation in due diligence sessions), (ii) providing assistance in preparation of confidential information memoranda, preliminary offering memoranda, financial information and other materials to be used in connection with obtaining such financing (including the provision of due diligence materials); provided that the Company shall have the right to review and comment on such materials prior to their dissemination to potential lenders or other counterparties to any proposed financing transaction, (iii) cooperation with the marketing efforts of Parent and its financing sources for such financing, including use of the Company’s logos and participation in a reasonable number of management presentation sessions, “road shows” and sessions with rating agencies, (iv) providing assistance in obtaining any consents of third parties necessary in connection with such financing, (v) providing assistance in extinguishing existing indebtedness of the Company and its Subsidiaries and releasing the Liens securing such indebtedness, in each case to take effect at the Effective Time; provided that such assistance shall not require the Company or any of its Affiliates to agree to any contractual obligation relating to the financing that is not conditioned upon the Closing and that does not terminate without liability to the Company or any of its Affiliates upon the termination of this Agreement, (vi) cooperation with respect to matters relating to pledges of collateral to take effect at the Effective Time in connection with such financing, (vii) assisting Parent in obtaining legal opinions to be delivered in connection with such financing and (viii) assisting Parent in securing the cooperation of the independent accountants of the Company, including with respect to the delivery of accountants’ comfort letters.

(e) Parent shall use its reasonable best efforts to take, or cause to be taken, all actions and do, or cause to be done, all things reasonably necessary or advisable to arrange and consummate any financing necessary for it to consummate the Merger and the transactions contemplated by this Agreement as promptly as practicable following the date of this Agreement and prior to the End

 

67


Date. Parent shall consult with and keep the Company informed in reasonable detail of the status of its efforts to arrange such financing.

Section 8.02. Certain Filings . (a) The Company and Parent shall cooperate with one another (i) in connection with the preparation of the Company Proxy Statement, (ii) in determining whether any action by or in respect of, or filing with, any Governmental Authority is required, or any actions, consents, approvals or waivers are required to be obtained from parties to any material contracts, in connection with the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement and (iii) in taking such actions or making any such filings, furnishing information required in connection therewith or with the Company Proxy Statement and seeking timely to obtain any such actions, consents, approvals or waivers. Subject to Section 6.04 and Applicable Law, each of Parent and the Company shall, upon request by the other, furnish the other with all information concerning itself, its Subsidiaries, directors, officers and equityholders and such other matters as may be reasonably necessary, proper or advisable in connection with any statement, filing, notice, or application, submission or response required to be made by or on behalf of Parent, the Company or any of their respective Subsidiaries to any Third Party or any Governmental Authority in connection with the Merger and the other transactions contemplated by this Agreement. In exercising the foregoing rights, each of Parent and the Company shall act reasonably and as promptly as reasonably practicable. With respect to any non-public information provided by or on behalf of Parent pursuant to this Section 8.02 or otherwise pursuant to this Agreement that is not intended for use in the Company Proxy Statement or related filings, the Company shall be bound by the confidentiality obligations (but not the other obligations) set forth in the Confidentiality Agreement as though the Company was “you” and Parent Holdco was (collectively with its Subsidiaries) the “Company” under the Confidentiality Agreement, subject to any exceptions set forth therein.

(b) Parent and its counsel shall be given a reasonable opportunity to review and comment on the Company Proxy Statement each time before it is filed with the SEC, and the Company shall give reasonable and good faith consideration to any comments made by Parent and its counsel. The Company shall provide Parent and its counsel with (i) any comments or other communications, whether written or oral, that the Company or its counsel may receive from time to time from the SEC or its staff with respect to the Company Proxy Statement promptly after receipt of those comments or other communications and (ii) a reasonable opportunity to participate in the Company’s response to those comments and to provide comments on that response (to which reasonable and good faith consideration shall be given), including by participating with the Company or its counsel in any discussions or meetings with the SEC.

 

68


Section 8.03. Public Announcements . The initial press release regarding the execution of this Agreement and the transactions contemplated hereby shall be a joint press release by the Company and Parent in a mutually agreed upon form and thereafter, to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, Parent and the Company shall consult with each other before, directly or indirectly through any Representatives, issuing any press release, having any communication with the press (whether or not for attribution), making any other public statement (which, for the avoidance of doubt, shall not include private communications with investors or analysts), press release or scheduling or participating in any press conference or conference call with investors or analysts with respect to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby, and, except in respect of any press release or other communication as may be required by Applicable Law or any listing agreement with or rule of any national securities exchange or association, shall not issue any such press release, have any such communication with the press or make any such other public statement or schedule or participate in any such press conference or scheduled conference call without the consent of the other party. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in connection with any action by the Company or the Board of Directors contemplated by Section 6.03(b), the Company shall not be required to consult with or obtain the consent of Parent prior to issuing any press release or otherwise making public announcements in compliance with Section 6.03(b).

Section 8.04. Further Assurances . At and after the Effective Time, the officers and directors of the Surviving Corporation shall be authorized to execute and deliver, in the name and on behalf of the Company or Merger Subsidiary, any deeds, bills of sale, assignments or assurances and to take and do, in the name and on behalf of the Company or Merger Subsidiary, any other actions and things to vest, perfect or confirm of record or otherwise in the Surviving Corporation any and all right, title and interest in, to and under any of the rights, properties or assets of the Company acquired or to be acquired by the Surviving Corporation as a result of, or in connection with, the Merger.

Section 8.05. Notices of Certain Events . Each of the Company and Parent shall promptly notify the other of:

(a) any material notice or other material communication from any Person alleging that the consent of such Person is or may be required in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement;

(b) any material notice or other material communication from any Governmental Authority in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement;

 

69


(c) any actions, suits, claims, investigations or proceedings commenced or, to its knowledge, threatened against, relating to or involving or otherwise affecting the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, or Parent or any of its Subsidiaries, as the case may be, that, if pending on the date of this Agreement, would have been required to have been disclosed pursuant to any Section of this Agreement or that relate to the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement; and

(d) upon the senior executives of such party becoming aware of the occurrence, or non-occurrence, of any event that, individually or in the aggregate, would reasonably be expected to cause any condition to the obligations of any party to effect the Merger set forth in Article 9 not to be satisfied.

Section 8.06. De-listing; Deregistration . Prior to the Effective Time, the Company shall cooperate with Parent and use its reasonable best efforts to take, or cause to be taken, all actions, and do or cause to be done all things, reasonably necessary, proper or advisable on its part under Applicable Laws and rules and policies of NASDAQ to enable the de-listing by the Surviving Corporation of the Company Common Stock from NASDAQ and the deregistration of the Company Common Stock under the 1934 Act as promptly as practicable after the Effective Time.

Section 8.07. Takeover Statutes . If any “control share acquisition,” “fair price,” “moratorium” or other antitakeover or similar statute or regulation shall become applicable to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, each of the Company, Parent and Merger Subsidiary and the respective members of their boards of directors shall, to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, use reasonable best efforts to grant such approvals and to take such actions as are reasonably necessary so that the transactions contemplated by this Agreement may be consummated as promptly as practicable on the terms contemplated herein and otherwise to take all such other actions as are reasonably necessary to eliminate or minimize the effects of any such statute or regulation on the transactions contemplated hereby.

ARTICLE 9

C ONDITIONS TO THE M ERGER

Section 9.01. Conditions to the Obligations of Each Party . The obligations of the Company, Parent and Merger Subsidiary to consummate the Merger are subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions:

(a) the Company Stockholder Approval shall have been obtained in accordance with Delaware Law;

 

70


(b) all applicable waiting periods (and any extensions thereof) under the HSR Act shall have expired or been terminated, and all consents, approvals, authorizations, clearances, non-actions or investigation closures or conclusions under the Antitrust Laws of the jurisdictions set forth in Section 9.01(b) of the Company Disclosure Schedule shall have been made, obtained or taken, and any applicable waiting periods or periods to apply for a review of any decision thereunder shall have expired or been terminated; provided that no such waiting period or review period shall have terminated or expired, and no such approval shall have been obtained, subject to or conditioned upon the imposition of a Burdensome Condition, other than the Agreed Actions; and

(c) no provision of any Applicable Law shall enjoin, prohibit or otherwise make illegal the consummation of the Merger.

Section 9.02. Conditions to the Obligations of Parent and Merger Subsidiary . The obligations of Parent and Merger Subsidiary to consummate the Merger are subject to the satisfaction (or, to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, waiver) of the following further conditions:

(a) (i) the Company shall have performed in all material respects all of its obligations hereunder required to be performed by it at or prior to the Effective Time; (ii) (A) the representations and warranties of the Company contained in Section 4.05(a) and (b) shall be true and correct at and as of the date of this Agreement and at and as of the Effective Time as if made at and as of such time (other than any such representations and warranties that by their terms address matters only at and as of another specified time, which shall be true and correct, only at and as of such time), in each case, subject to such exceptions as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to cause the aggregate consideration to be paid by Parent and Merger Subsidiary to holders of Company Securities under this Agreement to increase by $7,500,000 or more, (B) the representation and warranty of the Company contained in Section 4.10(a)(ii) shall be true and correct at and as of the times specified therein, (C) the representations and warranties of the Company contained in Section 4.21 shall be true and correct in all material respects at and as of the date of this Agreement and at and as of the Effective Time as if made at and as of such time, and (D) all other representations and warranties of the Company contained in this Agreement or in any certificate or other writing delivered by the Company pursuant hereto shall be true and correct (disregarding all materiality and Company Material Adverse Effect qualifications contained therein) at and as of the date of this Agreement and at and as of the Effective Time as if made at and as of such time (other than any such representations and warranties that by their terms address matters only as of another specified time, which shall be true and correct (disregarding all materiality and Company Material Adverse Effect qualifications contained therein) only as of such time), with, in the case of this clause (D) only, only such

 

71


exceptions as have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Company Material Adverse Effect; and (iii) Parent shall have received a certificate signed by an executive officer of the Company to the foregoing effect;

(b) no event, occurrence, revelation, development, change or state of circumstances or facts which, individually or in the aggregate, has had or would reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect shall have occurred since the date of this Agreement and be continuing;

(c) there shall not have been instituted and remain pending any unresolved action or proceeding by any Governmental Authority (i) challenging or seeking to make illegal, enjoin or otherwise to restrain or prohibit the consummation of the Merger, (ii) seeking to restrain or prohibit the ownership or operation by Parent, the Company or any of their respective Affiliates of all or any portion of the businesses or assets of any of Parent, the Company or any of their respective Affiliates following the Closing, except in any such case in so far as such restraint or prohibition would constitute an Agreed Action, or (iii) seeking to compel Parent, the Company or any of their respective Affiliates to take or accept any Burdensome Condition, other than an Agreed Action; and

(d) no Applicable Law shall have been enacted, enforced, promulgated or issued that has or would result in a Burdensome Condition, other than an Agreed Action.

Section 9.03. Conditions to the Obligations of the Company . The obligations of the Company to consummate the Merger are subject to the satisfaction (or, to the extent permitted by Applicable Law, waiver) of the following further conditions:

(a) (i) each of Parent and Merger Subsidiary shall have performed in all material respects all of its obligations hereunder required to be performed by it at or prior to the Effective Time; (ii) (A) the representations and warranties of Parent and Merger Subsidiary that are qualified by reference to Parent Material Adverse Effect shall be true and correct at and as of the date of this Agreement and at and as of the Effective Time as if made at and as of such time (other than any such representations and warranties that by their terms address matters only at and as of another specified time, which shall be true and correct only at and as of such time), (B) the representations and warranties of Parent and Merger Subsidiary contained in Section 5.07 shall be true and correct in all material respects at and as of the date of this Agreement and at and as of the Effective Time as if made at and as of such time (other than any such representations and warranties that by their terms address matters only at and as of another specified time, which shall be true and correct in all material respects only at and as of such time) and (C) all

 

72


other representations and warranties of Parent and Merger Subsidiary contained in this Agreement or in any certificate or other writing delivered by Parent or Merger Subsidiary pursuant hereto shall be true and correct (disregarding all materiality qualifications contained therein) at and as of the date of this Agreement and at and as of the Effective Time as if made at and as of such time (other than any such representations and warranties that by their terms address matters only as of another specified time, which shall be true and correct (disregarding all materiality qualifications contained therein) only at and as of such time), with, in the case of this clause (C) only, only such exceptions as have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have, individually or in the aggregate, a Parent Material Adverse Effect; and (iii) the Company shall have received a certificate signed by an executive officer of Parent to the foregoing effect; and

(b) there shall not have been instituted and remain pending any unresolved action or proceeding by any Governmental Authority seeking to make illegal, enjoin or otherwise to restrain or prohibit the consummation of the Merger.

ARTICLE 10

T ERMINATION

Section 10.01. Termination . This Agreement may be terminated and the Merger may be abandoned at any time prior to the Effective Time (notwithstanding any approval of this Agreement by the stockholders of the Company):

(a) by mutual written agreement of the Company and Parent;

(b) by either the Company or Parent, if:

(i) the Merger has not been consummated on or before July 2, 2014 (the “ End Date ”); provided that if, as of the End Date, the conditions set forth in Section 9.01(b), Section 9.01(c), Section 9.02(c) or Section 9.02(d) shall not have been satisfied or waived then, upon notice given by Parent or the Company to the other party not later than 6:00 p.m., Eastern Time, on the End Date, the End Date shall be extended to and including September 2, 2014, which date shall thereupon constitute the End Date of all purposes of this Agreement ; provided, further , that, if Parent and the Company mutually agree to extend the End Date not later than (A) September 2, 2014 they may extend the End Date to October 2, 2014 and (B) October 2, 2014 they may extend the End Date to November 3, 2014; provided, further , that the right to terminate this Agreement pursuant to this Section 10.01(b)(i) shall not be available to any party

 

73


whose breach of any provision of this Agreement is the proximate cause of the failure of the Merger to be consummated by such time;

(ii) there shall be any Applicable Law that (A) makes consummation of the Merger illegal or otherwise prohibited, (B) restrains or enjoins the Company or Parent from consummating the Merger and has become final and nonappealable or (C) conditions the consummation of the Merger on the acceptance of, or the taking of any action that constitutes, a Burdensome Condition (other than an Agreed Action) and has become final and nonappealable; or

(iii) at the Company Stockholder Meeting (including any adjournment or postponement thereof), the Company Stockholder Approval shall not have been obtained;

(c) by Parent, if:

(i) an Adverse Recommendation Change shall have occurred or at any time after receipt or public announcement of an Acquisition Proposal, the Board of Directors shall have failed to reaffirm the Company Board Recommendation as promptly as practicable (but in any event within ten Business Days) after receipt of any written request to do so from Parent;

(ii) there shall have been a material breach of Section 6.03 on the part of the Company; or

(iii) a breach of any representation or warranty or failure to perform any covenant or agreement on the part of the Company set forth in this Agreement shall have occurred that would cause the conditions set forth in Section 9.02(a) not to be satisfied and such breach or failure to perform (A) is incapable of being cured by the End Date or (B) has not been cured by the Company within 30 days following notice to the Company from Parent or Merger Subsidiary of such breach or failure to perform;

(d) by the Company if:

(i) prior to the Company Stockholder Meeting, if the Board of Directors shall have made an Adverse Recommendation Change in compliance in all material respects with the terms of Section 6.03, in order to enter into a definitive, written agreement concerning a Superior Proposal; provided that the Company shall have paid any amount due pursuant to Section 11.04(b) in accordance therewith; or

 

74


(ii) a breach in any material respect of any representation or warranty or failure to perform any covenant or agreement on the part of Parent or Merger Subsidiary set forth in this Agreement shall have occurred that would cause the conditions set forth in Section 9.03(a) not to be satisfied and such breach or failure to perform (A) is incapable of being cured by the End Date or (B) has not been cured by Parent or Merger Subsidiary, as applicable, within 30 days following notice to Parent or Merger Subsidiary from the Company of such breach or failure to perform.

The party desiring to terminate this Agreement pursuant to this Section 10.01 (other than pursuant to Section 10.01(a)) shall give notice of such termination to the other party.

Section 10.02. Effect of Termination . If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to Section 10.01, this Agreement shall become void and of no effect without liability of any party (or any stockholder, director, officer, employee, agent, consultant or representative of such party) to any other party hereto; provided that, if such termination shall result from the intentional (i) failure of either party to fulfill a condition to the performance of the obligations of the other party, (ii) failure of either party to perform a covenant hereof or (iii) breach by either party of any representation or warranty herein, such party shall be fully liable for any and all liabilities and damages incurred or suffered by the other party as a result of such failure. The provisions of this Section 10.02 and Sections 11.01, 11.04, 11.07, 11.08 and 11.09 shall survive any termination hereof pursuant to Section 10.01. For purposes of this Section 10.02, “intentional breach” or “intentional failure” means a material breach of any representation or warranty or a material failure to fulfill a condition or perform a covenant that, in any such case, is a consequence of an act or omission undertaken by the party breaching or failing to perform with the knowledge that the taking of, or failure to take, such act would, or would reasonably be expected to, cause a breach of this Agreement, and with the intent that that such act or omission actually breach this agreement.

ARTICLE 11

M ISCELLANEOUS

Section 11.01. Notices . All notices, requests and other communications to any party hereunder shall be in writing (including facsimile transmission and electronic mail (“ e-mail ”) transmission, so long as such e-mail is actually received) and shall be given,

 

75


if to Parent or Merger Subsidiary, to:

 

Smith & Nephew, Inc.

150 Minuteman Road

Andover, MA 01810

Attention: General Counsel

Facsimile No.: (978) 749 1599

E-mail: Company.Secretary@smith-nephew.com

with a copy to:

 

Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP

450 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

Attention:   

George R. Bason, Jr.

Michael Davis

Facsimile No.:    (212) 701-5800
E-mail:   

george.bason@davispolk.com

michael.davis@davispolk.com

if to Parent Holdco, to:

 

Smith & Nephew plc

15 Adam Street

London

WC2N 6LA

United Kingdom

Attention: Chief Legal Officer

Facsimile No.: +44 (0)20 7930 3353

Attention: Company Secretary

E-mail: Company.Secretary@smith-nephew.com

with a copy to:

 

Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP

450 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

Attention:   

George R. Bason, Jr.

Michael Davis

Facsimile No.:    (212) 701-5800
E-mail:   

george.bason@davispolk.com

michael.davis@davispolk.com

 

76


if to the Company, to:

 

ArthroCare Corporation

7000 West William Cannon

Building 1

Austin, TX 78735

Attention:    Richard Rew, General Counsel
Facsimile No.:    (512) 391-3901
E-mail:    richard.rew@arthrocare.com

with a copy to:

 

Latham & Watkins LLP

885 Third Avenue

New York, NY 10022

Attention: Charles K. Ruck and Josh Dubofsky

Facsimile No.: (212) 751-4864

E-mail: charles.ruck@lw.com , josh.dubofsky@lw.com

or to such other address or facsimile number as such party may hereafter specify for the purpose by notice to the other parties hereto. All such notices, requests and other communications shall be deemed received on the date of receipt by the recipient thereof if received prior to 5:00 p.m. New York time. Otherwise, any such notice, request or communication shall be deemed to have been received on the next succeeding day.

Section 11.02. Survival of Representations and Warranties . The representations and warranties contained herein and in any certificate or other writing delivered pursuant hereto shall not survive the Effective Time.

Section 11.03. Amendments and Waivers . (a) Any provision of this Agreement may be amended or waived prior to the Effective Time if, but only if, such amendment or waiver is in writing and is signed, in the case of an amendment, by each party to this Agreement or, in the case of a waiver, by each party against whom the waiver is to be effective; provided that after the Company Stockholder Approval has been obtained there shall be no amendment or waiver that would require the further approval of the stockholders of the Company under Delaware Law without such approval having first been obtained.

(b) No failure or delay by any party in exercising any right, power or privilege hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof nor shall any single or partial exercise thereof preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies herein provided shall be cumulative and not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by Applicable Law.

 

77


Section 11.04. Expenses . (a)  General . Except as otherwise provided herein, all costs and expenses incurred in connection with this Agreement shall be paid by the party incurring such cost or expense; provided , however, that the Surviving Corporation shall pay all transfer, documentary, sales, use, stamp, registration and other similar such Taxes and fees (including penalties and interest) incurred in connection with the transactions contemplated by Article 2.

(b) Termination Fee .

(i) If this Agreement is terminated by Parent pursuant to Section 10.01(c)(i) or Section 10.01(c)(ii), or by the Company pursuant to Section 10.01(d)(i), then the Company shall pay to Parent Holdco in immediately available funds $54,900,000 (the “ Termination Fee ”) in order to compensate Parent Holdco for the loss of opportunity or rights under this Agreement and expenses incurred in furtherance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement by Parent Holdco after the date hereof. Such payment shall be made, in the case of a termination by Parent, within one Business Day after such termination and, in the case of a termination by the Company, immediately before and as a condition to such termination ( provided that Parent has provided wire instructions with respect to such payment and otherwise promptly following receipt of such wire instructions).

(ii) If (A) this Agreement is terminated by Parent or the Company pursuant to Section 10.01(b)(i) or Section 10.01(b)(iii), (B) after the date of this Agreement and prior to such termination, an Acquisition Proposal shall have been publicly announced and not publicly and unconditionally withdrawn at least five (5) Business Days prior to (x) the date of termination, in the case of a termination pursuant to Section 10.01(b)(i) or (y) the Company Stockholder Meeting, in the case of a termination pursuant to Section 10.01(b)(iii), (C) in the case of a termination pursuant to Section 10.01(b)(i), at the time of such termination the condition set forth in Section 9.01(a) shall not have been satisfied, and (D) within nine (9) months following the date of such termination, the Company shall have entered into a definitive agreement with respect to or recommended to its stockholders an Acquisition Proposal or an Acquisition Proposal shall have been consummated ( provided that for purposes of this clause (ii), each reference to “15%” in the definition of Acquisition Proposal shall be deemed to be a reference to “50%”), then the Company shall pay to Parent Holdco in immediately available funds, concurrently with the occurrence of the applicable event described in clause (D), the Termination Fee in order to compensate Parent Holdco for the loss of opportunity or rights under this Agreement and expenses

 

78


incurred in furtherance of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement by Parent Holdco after the date hereof.

(iii) For the avoidance of doubt, in no event shall the Company be obligated to pay, or cause to be paid, the Termination Fee on more than one (1) occasion.

(c) Other Costs and Expenses . Each party acknowledges that (i) the agreements contained in Section 11.04(b) are an integral part of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, (ii) the amounts payable pursuant to Section 11.04(b) are not a penalty or liquidated damages, (iii) notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement, except as set forth in the last sentence of this Section 11.04(c), in the event that any Termination Fee is paid or payable pursuant to Section 11.04(b), Parent’s right to receive payment of the Termination Fee shall be the sole and exclusive remedy of Parent and its Affiliates and Representatives against the Company and its Affiliates and Representatives under this Agreement or arising out of or related to this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby, and upon payment of such amount, none of the Company or any of its Affiliates or Representatives shall have any liability or obligation relating to or arising out of this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby, in each case whether based on contract, tort or strict liability, by the enforcement of any assessment, by any legal or equitable proceeding, by virtue of any statute, regulation or applicable Laws or otherwise and (iv) without the agreements contained in Section 11.04(b) and this Section 11.04(c), Parent and the Company would not have entered into this Agreement. Accordingly, (A) if the Company fails to promptly pay the Company Termination Fee when due pursuant to Section 11.04(b) and, in order to obtain such payment, Parent commences a suit that results in a judgment against the Company for the amount set forth in Section 11.04(b), the Company shall pay to Parent reasonable costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees) incurred by Parent in connection with such suit, together with interest on such amount or portion thereof at the prime rate of Citibank N.A. in effect on the date such payment was required to be made through the date of payment.

Section 11.05. Disclosure Schedule and SEC Document References . (a) The parties hereto agree that any reference in a particular Section of either the Company Disclosure Schedule or the Parent Disclosure Schedule shall only be deemed to be an exception to (or, as applicable, a disclosure for purposes of) (i)the representations and warranties (or covenants, as applicable) of the relevant party that are contained in the corresponding Section of this Agreement and (ii) any other representations and warranties (or covenants, as applicable) of such party that is contained in this Agreement, but only if the relevance of that reference as an exception to (or a disclosure for purposes of) such representations

 

79


and warranties (or covenants, as applicable) would be reasonably apparent to a reasonable person who has read that reference.

(b) In no event shall any predictive, cautionary or forward-looking statements contained in any part of any Company SEC Document entitled “Risk Factors” or containing a description or explanation of “Forward-Looking Statements” be deemed to be an exception to (or a disclosure for purposes of) any representations and warranties of the Company contained in this Agreement.

Section 11.06. Binding Effect; Benefit; Assignment . (a) The provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon and, except as provided in Section 7.02, shall inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns. No provision of this Agreement is intended to confer any rights, benefits, remedies, obligations or liabilities hereunder upon any Person other than the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns, other than (i) as provided in Section 7.02 and (ii) at and after the Effective Time, the rights of the holders of shares of Company Common Stock to receive the Merger Consideration in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

(b) No party may assign, delegate or otherwise transfer any of its rights or obligations under this Agreement without the consent of each other party hereto, except that Parent or Merger Subsidiary may transfer or assign its rights and obligations under this Agreement, in whole or from time to time in part, to (i) one or more of its Affiliates at any time and (ii) after the Effective Time, to any Person; provided that such transfer or assignment (x) shall not relieve Parent or Merger Subsidiary of its obligations hereunder, alter or change any obligation of any other party hereto or due to Parent or Merger Subsidiary and (y) shall not be permitted if it would result in any increase in withholding under Section 2.07.

Section 11.07. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Delaware, without regard to the conflicts of law rules of such state.

Section 11.08. Jurisdiction . The parties hereto agree that any suit, action or proceeding seeking to enforce any provision of, or based on any matter arising out of or in connection with, this Agreement or the transactions contemplated hereby (whether brought by any party or any of its controlled Affiliates or against any party or any of its controlled Affiliates) shall be brought in the Delaware Chancery Court or, if such court shall not have jurisdiction, any federal court located in the State of Delaware or other Delaware state court, and each of the parties hereby irrevocably consents to the jurisdiction of such courts (and of the appropriate appellate courts therefrom) in any such suit, action or proceeding and irrevocably waives, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any objection that it may now or hereafter have to the laying of the venue of any such suit, action or

 

80


proceeding in any such court or that any such suit, action or proceeding brought in any such court has been brought in an inconvenient forum. Process in any such suit, action or proceeding may be served on any party anywhere in the world, whether within or without the jurisdiction of any such court. Without limiting the foregoing, each party agrees that service of process on such party as provided in Section 11.01 shall be deemed effective service of process on such party.

Section 11.09. WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL . EACH OF THE PARTIES HERETO HEREBY IRREVOCABLY WAIVES ANY AND ALL RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY LEGAL PROCEEDING ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED HEREBY.

Section 11.10. Counterparts; Effectiveness . This Agreement may be signed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be an original, with the same effect as if the signatures thereto and hereto were upon the same instrument, and may be signed electronically by delivery of signatures in .pdf or similar format. This Agreement shall become effective when each party hereto shall have received a counterpart hereof signed by all of the other parties hereto. Until and unless each party has received a counterpart hereof signed by all of the other parties hereto, this Agreement shall have no effect and no party shall have any right or obligation hereunder (whether by virtue of any other oral or written agreement or other communication).

Section 11.11. Entire Agreement . This Agreement and the Confidentiality Agreement constitute the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter thereof and supersede all prior agreements and understandings, both oral and written, between the parties with respect to the subject matter thereof.

Section 11.12. Severability . If any term, provision, covenant or restriction of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction or other Governmental Authority to be invalid, void or unenforceable, the remainder of the terms, provisions, covenants and restrictions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect and shall in no way be affected, impaired or invalidated so long as the economic or legal substance of the transactions contemplated hereby is not affected in any manner materially adverse to any party. Upon such a determination, the parties shall negotiate in good faith to modify this Agreement so as to effect the original intent of the parties as closely as possible in an acceptable manner in order that the transactions contemplated hereby be consummated as originally contemplated to the fullest extent possible.

Section 11.13. Guarantee . (a) Parent Holdco irrevocably and unconditionally guarantees the due and punctual performance of the obligations of

 

81


Parent, Merger Subsidiary, the Surviving Corporation and their permitted assigns hereunder (the “ Guaranteed Obligations ”) subject to the conditions hereunder. If, for any reason whatsoever, Parent, Merger Subsidiary the Surviving Corporation or any of their permitted assigns shall fail or be unable to duly, punctually and fully pay or perform the Guaranteed Obligations, Parent Holdco will forthwith pay or perform, or cause to be paid or performed, the Guaranteed Obligations. Parent Holdco hereby waives diligence, presentment, demand of payment, filing objections with a court, any right to require proceeding first against Parent, Merger Subsidiary the Surviving Corporation or any such permitted assign, any right to require the prior disposition of the assets of Parent, Merger Subsidiary or any such permitted assign to meet their respective obligations, notice, protest and all demands whatsoever. This is a guarantee of payment and performance and not collectability.

(b) Parent Holdco is a legal entity duly organized, validly existing and (to the extent applicable) in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of organization. Parent Holdco has all requisite corporate power and authority and has taken all corporate action necessary in order to execute, deliver and perform its obligations under this Agreement. This Agreement has been duly approved, executed and delivered by Parent Holdco and is a valid and binding agreement of Parent Holdco, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms, except as such enforcement may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, moratorium or other laws affecting creditors’ rights generally or by principles of equity (regardless of whether enforcement is sought in a proceeding at law or in equity). Parent Holdco owns directly one hundred percent (100%) of the issued and outstanding capital stock of Parent.

(c) Parent Holdco shall not transfer or assign, in whole or in part, any of its obligations under this Section 11.13.

Section 11.14. Specific Performance . The parties hereto agree that irreparable damage would occur if any provision of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with the terms hereof and that, prior to the termination hereof in accordance with Article 10, the parties shall be entitled to an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement or to enforce specifically the performance of the terms and provisions hereof in any federal court located in the State of Delaware or any Delaware state court, in addition to any other remedy to which they are entitled at law or in equity.

[ The remainder of this page has been intentionally left blank ]

 

82


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed by their respective authorized officers as of the date set forth on the cover page of this Agreement.

 

ARTHROCARE CORPORATION
By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:
SMITH & NEPHEW, INC.
By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:
ROSEBUD ACQUISITION CORPORATION
By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:
SMITH & NEPHEW PLC
By:  

 

  Name:
  Title:

 

83

Exhibit 4(c)(x)

26 February 2014

Mr Richard U. De Schutter

15, Adam Street,

London

WC2N 6LA

Dear Dick,

SMITH & NEPHEW plc (THE “COMPANY”) AND YOUR RE-APPOINTMENT

AS SENIOR INDEPENDENT DIRECTOR AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

Following the recommendation of the Nomination & Governance Committee, the board of the Company (the “Board” ) confirms you will remain on the Board as Senior Independent Director and Non-Executive Director of the Company from 1 January 2014. This letter confirms the main terms of your appointment to this office. It is agreed that this is a contract for services and not a contract of employment. Please note, due to your retirement from the Board following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014 your re-appointment will not require ratification by the Company’s shareholders at the Annual General Meeting. If there is a conflict between the terms of this letter and the Articles of Association then the Articles shall prevail.

DUTIES

 

1. You are already aware how the Board is structured and what authorities are delegated to the Chief Executive Officer and his colleagues.

 

2. The Board as a whole is collectively responsible for promoting the success of the Company by directing and supervising the Company’s affairs. The Board’s role is to:

 

  (a) provide entrepreneurial leadership to the Company within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enable risk to be assessed and managed;

 

  (b) set the Company’s strategic aims, ensure that the necessary financial and human resources are in place for the Company to meet its objectives, and review management performance; and

 

  (c) set the Company’s values and standards and ensure that its obligations to its shareholders and others are understood and met.

 

1


3. In your role as a Non-Executive Director you are required (with the other non-executives) to:

 

  (a) constructively challenge and contribute to the development of strategy;

 

  (b) scrutinise the performance of management in meeting agreed goals and objectives and monitor the reporting of performance;

 

  (c) satisfy yourself that financial information is accurate and that financial controls and systems of risk management are robust and defensible; and

 

  (d) have a prime role in appointing, and where necessary removing, senior management and in succession planning and where required by the relevant policy of the Company from time to time be responsible for determining appropriate levels of remuneration of executive directors.

 

4. You will be required to:

 

  (a) exercise relevant powers under the Company’s Articles of Association;

 

  (b) perform your duties faithfully, efficiently and diligently and use all reasonable endeavours to promote the interests and reputation of the Company;

 

  (c) serve on various committees of the Board and attend wherever possible all meetings of such committees. You will be provided with the terms of reference of a committee on your appointment to such a committee;

 

  (d) attend wherever possible this year’s Annual General Meetings and other General Meetings of the Company;

 

  (e) attend wherever possible all meetings of the Board, which meets at least six times a year, normally at 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA (at least one meeting per year is held at one of the major divisions);

 

  (f) consider all relevant papers in advance of each meeting in order to ensure that you can play a full part in the work of the Board and its committees;

 

  (g) bring independent judgement to bear on issues of strategy, policy, resources, performance and standards of conduct;

 

  (h) make yourself available (on reasonable notice) to provide ad hoc advice to individual directors of the Company. We do not envisage that this would take more than three days of your time a year;

 

  (i) provide guidance and direction in planning, developing and enhancing the future strategic direction of the Company;

 

  (j) share responsibility with the other directors for the effective control of the Company and with the other non-executive directors for the supervision of the executive directors; and

 

2


  (k) comply with the Financial Conduct Authority’s Model Code for securities transactions by directors of UK listed companies and with any code of conduct relating to securities transactions by directors and specified employees issued by the Company from time to time (the Smith & Nephew Code of Dealing in Securities has been sent to you and further copies are available from the Company Secretary).

 

5. Overall the Company anticipates that if you were appointed for a full year you would need to spend a minimum of 15 days per year fulfilling your duties. This will include the Board Meetings, Annual General Meetings, one Board away-day each year and Board committee meetings. In addition you will be expected to spend an appropriate period of time preparing for each meeting and be prepared to be available for additional meetings and business when required. By accepting this appointment you confirm that you are able to commit sufficient time to the role to meet the Company’s expectations.

 

6. The Company seeks to adhere to the principles in The UK Corporate Governance Code. You will be expected to carry out your duties in accordance with the principles set out in these reports, copies of which are available from the Company Secretary.

 

7. The performance of the Board and its committees, and of individual directors, is evaluated annually. At least every third year the performance will be reviewed by an external body.

 

8. You shall, in pursuance of your duties hereunder, be entitled to request such information from the Company, its subsidiary undertakings (as defined in section 1162 of the Companies Act 2006 as amended from time to time) or its or their employees, consultants or professional advisers as may be reasonably necessary to enable you to perform your role effectively. The Company shall use its reasonable endeavours to provide such information promptly.

CONFIDENTIALITY

During the course of your duties you will have access to confidential information belonging to the Company and its subsidiary undertakings (including, but not limited to, details of suppliers, customers, margins, know-how, marketing and other relevant business information). Unauthorised disclosure of this information could seriously damage the Company. You therefore undertake not to use or disclose such information save in pursuance of your duties or in accordance with any statutory obligation or court or similar order.

Your attention is drawn to the rules relating to the disclosure of price sensitive information. You must not make any statement or do anything which may be a breach of these rules without prior clearance from the Chairman or Company Secretary.

 

3


OUTSIDE INTERESTS

The agreement of the Chairman should be sought before you accept any new outside interests which might affect the time you are able to devote to this appointment.

In accordance with the principles set out in The UK Corporate Governance Code you must inform the Company Secretary of any interests which you have, or acquire, which might reasonably be thought to jeopardise your independence from the Company. You should also provide the Company Secretary with any change to your personal details.

During your appointment you must not take up any office or employment with, or have any interest in, any firm or company which is or may be in direct or indirect competition with the Company.

The Board has determined you to be independent, according to the provisions of The UK Corporate Governance Code.

INSURANCE

During your appointment you will be covered by the Company’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance on the terms in place from time to time. Details of the policy are available from the Company Secretary. The Company does not guarantee to maintain this insurance cover after the termination of your appointment, but you will continue to be covered by the policy or any replacement on the same basis as the rest of the Board.

A deed of indemnity is in place between you and the Company.

APPOINTMENT

Your re-appointment will be from 1 January 2014 and until your retirement following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014.

Upon retirement you shall only be entitled to such fees as may have accrued to the date of retirement together with reimbursement in the normal way of any expenses properly incurred prior to that date and will be expected to return all company property.

REMUNERATION

The fees are US$120,000 per annum (subject to income tax and statutory deductions) and will be reviewed each year. There is an additional allowance relating to inter-continental travel of US$7,000 per trip.

As Senior Independent Director you will receive an additional fee of US$27,000 per annum.

EXPENSES

The Company will reimburse you for any expenses that you may incur properly and reasonably in performing your duties and which are properly documented. Such expenses would include reasonable legal fees if circumstances should arise in which it was necessary for you to seek separate legal advice about the performance of your duties. In such a situation, you are required to discuss the issue either with me or with one of your non-executive colleagues in advance.

 

4


INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE

In some circumstances you may think that you need professional advice in the furtherance of your duties as a director. It may also be appropriate for you to seek advice from independent advisers at the Company’s expense. The Company will reimburse the full cost of any expenditure incurred.

DATA PROTECTION

By signing this agreement you consent to the Company holding and processing information about you which it may acquire during the course of this agreement, providing such use is in accordance with the Data Protection Act 1998.

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall not apply to this agreement. No person other than the parties to this agreement shall have any rights under it and it will not be enforceable by any person other than the parties to it.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT

This agreement constitutes the entire and only agreement relating to your appointment between you and the Company and shall be construed in accordance with English law.

Any previous agreement or arrangement between you and the Company or any Group company shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual consent as from the commencement of this re-appointment, including but not limited to the re-appointment letter dated 6 February 2013.

Please sign and return the enclosed copy of this letter to confirm your agreement to your re-appointment on the above terms.

I look forward to continue working with you in the future.

Yours sincerely

/s/ Susan Swabey

Susan Swabey

Company Secretary

I, Richard De Schutter, agree to the above terms of re-appointment as a Non-Executive Director of Smith & Nephew plc.

 

Name  

/s/ Richard De Schutter

Date  

1 March 2014

 

5

Exhibit 4(c)(xi)

26 February 2014

Dr Pam Kirby

15, Adam Street

London

WC2N 6LA

Dear Pam,

SMITH & NEPHEW plc (THE “COMPANY”) AND YOUR RE-APPOINTMENT

AS A NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

Following the recommendation of the Nomination & Governance Committee, the board of the Company (the “Board” ) confirms you will remain on the Board as a Non-Executive Director of the Company from 1 January 2014. This letter confirms the main terms of your appointment to this office. It is agreed that this is a contract for services and not a contract of employment. You should be aware that your re-appointment will have to be ratified on an annual basis by the Company’s shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and is subject to the Company’s Articles of Association as amended from time to time. If there is a conflict between the terms of this letter and the Articles of Association then the Articles shall prevail.

DUTIES

 

1. You are already aware how the Board is structured and what authorities are delegated to the Chief Executive Officer and his colleagues.

 

2. The Board as a whole is collectively responsible for promoting the success of the Company by directing and supervising the Company’s affairs. The Board’s role is to:

 

  (a) provide entrepreneurial leadership to the Company within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enable risk to be assessed and managed;

 

  (b) set the Company’s strategic aims, ensure that the necessary financial and human resources are in place for the Company to meet its objectives, and review management performance; and

 

  (c) set the Company’s values and standards and ensure that its obligations to its shareholders and others are understood and met.

 

1


3. In your role as a Non-Executive Director you are required (with the other non-executives) to:

 

  (a) constructively challenge and contribute to the development of strategy;

 

  (b) scrutinise the performance of management in meeting agreed goals and objectives and monitor the reporting of performance;

 

  (c) satisfy yourself that financial information is accurate and that financial controls and systems of risk management are robust and defensible; and

 

  (d) have a prime role in appointing, and where necessary removing, senior management and in succession planning and where required by the relevant policy of the Company from time to time be responsible for determining appropriate levels of remuneration of executive directors.

 

4. You will be required to:

 

  (a) exercise relevant powers under the Company’s Articles of Association;

 

  (b) perform your duties faithfully, efficiently and diligently and use all reasonable endeavours to promote the interests and reputation of the Company;

 

  (c) serve on various committees of the Board and attend wherever possible all meetings of such committees. You will be provided with the terms of reference of a committee on your appointment to such a committee;

 

  (d) attend wherever possible all Annual General Meetings and other General Meetings of the Company;

 

  (e) attend wherever possible all meetings of the Board, which meets at least six times a year, normally at 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA (at least one meeting per year is held at one of the major divisions);

 

  (f) consider all relevant papers in advance of each meeting in order to ensure that you can play a full part in the work of the Board and its committees;

 

  (g) bring independent judgement to bear on issues of strategy, policy, resources, performance and standards of conduct;

 

  (h) make yourself available (on reasonable notice) to provide ad hoc advice to individual directors of the Company. We do not envisage that this would take more than three days of your time a year;

 

  (i) provide guidance and direction in planning, developing and enhancing the future strategic direction of the Company;

 

  (j) share responsibility with the other directors for the effective control of the Company and with the other non-executive directors for the supervision of the executive directors; and

 

  (k)

comply with the Financial Conduct Authority’s Model Code for securities transactions by directors of UK listed companies and with any code of conduct relating to securities

 

2


  transactions by directors and specified employees issued by the Company from time to time (the Smith & Nephew Code of Dealing in Securities has been sent to you and further copies are available from the Company Secretary).

 

5. Overall the Company anticipates that if you were appointed for a full year you would need to spend a minimum of 15 days per year fulfilling your duties. This will include the Board Meetings, Annual General Meetings, one Board away-day each year and Board committee meetings. In addition you will be expected to spend an appropriate period of time preparing for each meeting and be prepared to be available for additional meetings and business when required. By accepting this appointment you confirm that you are able to commit sufficient time to the role to meet the Company’s expectations.

 

6. The Company seeks to adhere to the principles in The UK Corporate Governance Code. You will be expected to carry out your duties in accordance with the principles set out in these reports, copies of which are available from the Company Secretary.

 

7. The performance of the Board and its committees, and of individual directors, is evaluated annually. At least every third year the performance will be reviewed by an external body.

 

8. You shall, in pursuance of your duties hereunder, be entitled to request such information from the Company, its subsidiary undertakings (as defined in section 1162 of the Companies Act 2006 as amended from time to time) or its or their employees, consultants or professional advisers as may be reasonably necessary to enable you to perform your role effectively. The Company shall use its reasonable endeavours to provide such information promptly.

CONFIDENTIALITY

During the course of your duties you will have access to confidential information belonging to the Company and its subsidiary undertakings (including, but not limited to, details of suppliers, customers, margins, know-how, marketing and other relevant business information). Unauthorised disclosure of this information could seriously damage the Company. You therefore undertake not to use or disclose such information save in pursuance of your duties or in accordance with any statutory obligation or court or similar order.

Your attention is drawn to the rules relating to the disclosure of price sensitive information. You must not make any statement or do anything which may be a breach of these rules without prior clearance from the Chairman or Company Secretary.

OUTSIDE INTERESTS

The agreement of the Chairman should be sought before you accept any new outside interests which might affect the time you are able to devote to this appointment.

In accordance with the principles set out in The UK Corporate Governance Code you must inform the Company Secretary of any interests which you have, or acquire, which might reasonably be thought to jeopardise your independence from the Company. You should also provide the Company Secretary with any change to your personal details.

 

3


During your appointment you must not take up any office or employment with, or have any interest in, any firm or company which is or may be in direct or indirect competition with the Company.

The Board has determined you to be independent, according to the provisions of The UK Corporate Governance Code.

INSURANCE

During your appointment you will be covered by the Company’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance on the terms in place from time to time. Details of the policy are available from the Company Secretary. The Company does not guarantee to maintain this insurance cover after the termination of your appointment, but you will continue to be covered by the policy or any replacement on the same basis as the rest of the Board.

A deed of indemnity is in place between you and the Company.

APPOINTMENT

Your re-appointment will be from 1 January 2014 and is terminable at the will of the parties. However, it is envisaged that your term will be for a further period of 7 months continuing until your retirement on 31 July 2014. The continuation of your appointment depends upon satisfactory performance and re-election at each Annual General Meeting.

All appointments and re-appointments to the Board are, of course, subject to the Company’s Articles of Association. If you are not re-elected to your position as a director of the Company by the shareholders at any time and for any reason then this appointment shall terminate automatically and with immediate effect.

Upon retirement you shall only be entitled to such fees as may have accrued to the date of retirement together with reimbursement in the normal way of any expenses properly incurred prior to that date and will be expected to return all company property.

REMUNERATION

The fees are £63,000 per annum (subject to income tax and statutory deductions) and will be reviewed each year. There is an additional allowance relating to inter-continental travel of £3,500 per trip.

As Chairman of the Ethics & Compliance Committee you will receive an additional fee of £15,000 per annum.

EXPENSES

The Company will reimburse you for any expenses that you may incur properly and reasonably in performing your duties and which are properly documented. Such expenses would include reasonable legal fees if circumstances should arise in which it was necessary for you to seek separate legal advice about the performance of your duties. In such a situation, you are required to discuss the issue either with me or with one of your non-executive colleagues in advance.

 

4


INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE

In some circumstances you may think that you need professional advice in the furtherance of your duties as a director. It may also be appropriate for you to seek advice from independent advisers at the Company’s expense. The Company will reimburse the full cost of any expenditure incurred.

DATA PROTECTION

By signing this agreement you consent to the Company holding and processing information about you which it may acquire during the course of this agreement, providing such use is in accordance with the Data Protection Act 1998.

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall not apply to this agreement. No person other than the parties to this agreement shall have any rights under it and it will not be enforceable by any person other than the parties to it.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT

This agreement constitutes the entire and only agreement relating to your re- appointment between you and the Company and shall be construed in accordance with English law.

Any previous agreement or arrangement between you and the Company or any Group company shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual consent as from the commencement of this re-appointment, including but not limited to the re-appointment letter dated 6 February 2013.

Please sign and return the enclosed copy of this letter to confirm your agreement to your re-appointment on the above terms.

I look forward to continue working with you in the future.

Yours sincerely

/s/ Susan Swabey

Susan Swabey

Company Secretary

I, Dr Pam Kirby, agree to the above terms of re-appointment as a Non-Executive Director of Smith & Nephew plc.

 

Name  

/s/ Pam Kirby

Date  

5 March 2014

 

5

Exhibit 4(c)(xii)

26 February 2014

Mr Brian Larcombe

15 Adam Street

London

WC2N 6LA

Dear Brian,

SMITH & NEPHEW plc (THE “COMPANY”) AND YOUR RE-APPOINTMENT

AS A NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

Following the recommendation of the Nomination & Governance Committee, the board of the Company (the “Board” ) confirms that you will remain on the Board as a Non-Executive Director of the Company from 1 January 2014. This letter confirms the main terms of your appointment to this office. It is agreed that this is a contract for services and not a contract of employment. You should be aware that your re-appointment will have to be ratified on an annual basis by the Company’s shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and is subject to the Company’s Articles of Association as amended from time to time. If there is a conflict between the terms of this letter and the Articles of Association then the Articles shall prevail. Subject to your re-election at the Annual General Meeting, you will assume the role of Senior Independent Director with effect from 10 April 2014.

DUTIES

 

1. You are already aware how the Board is structured and what authorities are delegated to the Chief Executive Officer and his colleagues.

 

2. The Board as a whole is collectively responsible for promoting the success of the Company by directing and supervising the Company’s affairs. The Board’s role is to:

 

  (a) provide entrepreneurial leadership to the Company within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enable risk to be assessed and managed;

 

  (b) set the Company’s strategic aims, ensure that the necessary financial and human resources are in place for the Company to meet its objectives, and review management performance; and

 

  (c) set the Company’s values and standards and ensure that its obligations to its shareholders and others are understood and met.

 

1


3. In your role as a Non-Executive Director you are required (with the other non-executives) to:

 

  (a) constructively challenge and contribute to the development of strategy;

 

  (b) scrutinise the performance of management in meeting agreed goals and objectives and monitor the reporting of performance;

 

  (c) satisfy yourself that financial information is accurate and that financial controls and systems of risk management are robust and defensible; and

 

  (d) have a prime role in appointing, and where necessary removing, senior management and in succession planning and where required by the relevant policy of the Company from time to time be responsible for determining appropriate levels of remuneration of executive directors.

 

4. You will be required to:

 

  (a) exercise relevant powers under the Company’s Articles of Association;

 

  (b) perform your duties faithfully, efficiently and diligently and use all reasonable endeavours to promote the interests and reputation of the Company;

 

  (c) serve on various committees of the Board and attend wherever possible all meetings of such committees. You will be provided with the terms of reference of a committee on your appointment to such a committee;

 

  (d) attend wherever possible all Annual General Meetings and other General Meetings of the Company;

 

  (e) attend wherever possible all meetings of the Board, which meets at least six times a year, normally at 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA (at least one meeting per year is held at one of the major divisions);

 

  (f) attend wherever possible the Annual Strategy Review, which is usually held off-site over two days in September;

 

  (g) consider all relevant papers in advance of each meeting in order to ensure that you can play a full part in the work of the Board and its committees;

 

  (h) bring independent judgement to bear on issues of strategy, policy, resources, performance and standards of conduct;

 

  (i) make yourself available (on reasonable notice) to provide ad hoc advice to individual directors of the Company. We do not envisage that this would take more than three days of your time a year;

 

2


  (j) provide guidance and direction in planning, developing and enhancing the future strategic direction of the Company;

 

  (k) share responsibility with the other directors for the effective control of the Company and with the other non-executive directors for the supervision of the executive directors; and

 

  (l) comply with the Financial Conduct Authority’s Model Code for securities transactions by directors of UK listed companies and with any code of conduct relating to securities transactions by directors and specified employees issued by the Company from time to time (the Smith & Nephew Code of Dealing in Securities has been sent to you and further copies are available from the Company Secretary).

 

5. In your role as Senior Independent Director, you will be expected to:

 

  (a) act as the sounding board and provide support to the Chairman in delivering his objectives;

 

  (b) lead the annual evaluation of the Chairman’s performance in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code 2012;

 

  (c) chair meetings of the Nomination & Governance Committee when it is considering succession to the role of the Chairman of the Board;

 

  (d) be available to shareholders if they have concerns which contact through the normal channels of Chairman, Chief Executive Officer or Chief Financial Officer has failed to resolve or where such contact is inappropriate;

 

  (e) attend sufficient meetings with major shareholders and financial analysts to obtain a balanced understanding of the issues and concerns of such shareholders; and

 

  (f) work with the Chairman and other Directors to resolve contentious issues.

 

6. Overall the Company anticipates that you will need to spend a minimum of 15 days per year fulfilling your duties. This will include the Board Meetings, Annual General Meetings, one Board away-day each year and Board committee meetings. In addition you will be expected to spend an appropriate period of time preparing for each meeting and be prepared to be available for additional meetings and business when required. By accepting this appointment you confirm that you are able to commit sufficient time to the role to meet the Company’s expectations.

 

7. The Company seeks to adhere to the principles in The UK Corporate Governance Code. You will be expected to carry out your duties in accordance with the principles set out in these reports, copies of which are available from the Company Secretary.

 

3


8. The performance of the Board and its committees, and of individual directors, is evaluated annually. At least every third year the performance will be reviewed by an external body.

 

9. You shall, in pursuance of your duties hereunder, be entitled to request such information from the Company, its subsidiary undertakings (as defined in section 1162 of the Companies Act 2006 as amended from time to time) or its or their employees, consultants or professional advisers as may be reasonably necessary to enable you to perform your role effectively. The Company shall use its reasonable endeavours to provide such information promptly.

CONFIDENTIALITY

During the course of your duties you will have access to confidential information belonging to the Company and its subsidiary undertakings (including, but not limited to, details of suppliers, customers, margins, know-how, marketing and other relevant business information). Unauthorised disclosure of this information could seriously damage the Company. You therefore undertake not to use or disclose such information save in pursuance of your duties or in accordance with any statutory obligation or court or similar order.

Your attention is drawn to the rules relating to the disclosure of price sensitive information. You must not make any statement or do anything which may be a breach of these rules without prior clearance from the Chairman or Company Secretary.

OUTSIDE INTERESTS

The agreement of the Chairman should be sought before you accept any new outside interests which might affect the time you are able to devote to this appointment.

In accordance with the principles set out in The UK Corporate Governance Code you must inform the Company Secretary of any interests which you have, or acquire, which might reasonably be thought to jeopardise your independence from the Company. You should also provide the Company Secretary with any change to your personal details.

During your appointment you must not take up any office or employment with, or have any interest in, any firm or company which is or may be in direct or indirect competition with the Company.

The Board has determined you to be independent, according to the provisions of The UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

4


INSURANCE

During your appointment you will be covered by the Company’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance on the terms in place from time to time. Details of the policy are available from the Company Secretary. The Company does not guarantee to maintain this insurance cover after the termination of your appointment, but you will continue to be covered by the policy or any replacement on the same basis as the rest of the Board.

A deed of indemnity is in place between you and the Company.

APPOINTMENT

Your re-appointment will be from 1 January 2014 and is terminable at the will of the parties. However, it is envisaged that it will be for a further period of 12 months continuing until 31 December 2014 subject to an annual review taking into account the need for progressive refreshing of the Board. The continuation of your appointment depends upon satisfactory performance and re-election at each Annual General Meeting.

All appointments and re-appointments to the Board are, of course, subject to the Company’s Articles of Association. If you are not re-elected to your position as a director of the Company by the shareholders at any time and for any reason then this appointment shall terminate automatically and with immediate effect.

On termination of the appointment you shall only be entitled to such fees as may have accrued to the date of termination together with reimbursement in the normal way of any expenses properly incurred prior to that date and will be expected to return all company property.

REMUNERATION

The fees are £63,000 per annum in cash and £3,150 delivered in shares in August each year (subject to income tax and statutory deductions) and will be reviewed each year. There is an additional allowance relating to inter-continental travel of £3,500 per trip.

On appointment as Senior Independent Director, you will receive an additional fee of £15,000 per annum (subject to income tax and statutory deductions) with effect from 10 April 2014.

EXPENSES

The Company will reimburse you for any expenses that you may incur properly and reasonably in performing your duties and which are properly documented. Such expenses would include reasonable legal fees if circumstances should arise in which it was necessary for you to seek separate legal advice about the performance of your duties. In such a situation, you are required to discuss the issue either with me or with one of your non-executive colleagues in advance.

 

5


INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE

In some circumstances you may think that you need professional advice in the furtherance of your duties as a director. It may also be appropriate for you to seek advice from independent advisers at the Company’s expense. The Company will reimburse the full cost of any expenditure incurred.

DATA PROTECTION

By signing this agreement you consent to the Company holding and processing information about you which it may acquire during the course of this agreement, providing such use is in accordance with the Data Protection Act 1998.

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall not apply to this agreement. No person other than the parties to this agreement shall have any rights under it and it will not be enforceable by any person other than the parties to it.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT

This agreement constitutes the entire and only agreement relating to your re-appointment between you and the Company and shall be construed in accordance with English law.

Any previous agreement or arrangement between you and the Company or any Group company shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual consent as from the commencement of this re-appointment, including but not limited to the re-appointment letter dated 6 February 2013.

Please sign and return the enclosed copy of this letter to confirm your agreement to your re-appointment on the above terms.

I look forward to continue working with you in the future.

 

Yours sincerely
/s/ Susan Swabey
Susan Swabey
Company Secretary

I, Brian Larcombe, agree to the above terms of re-appointment as a Non-Executive Director of Smith & Nephew plc.

 

Name  

/s/ Brian Larcombe

Date  

3 March 2014

 

6

Exhibit 4(c)(xiii)

26 February 2014

Mr Joseph Papa

15, Adam Street

London

WC2N 6LA

Dear Joe,

SMITH & NEPHEW plc (THE “COMPANY”) AND YOUR RE-APPOINTMENT

AS A NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

Following the recommendation of the Nomination & Governance Committee, the board of the Company (the “Board” ) confirms that you will remain on the Board as a Non-Executive Director of the Company from 1 August 2014. This letter confirms the main terms of your appointment to this office. It is agreed that this is a contract for services and not a contract of employment. You should be aware that your re-appointment will have to be ratified on an annual basis by the Company’s shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and is subject to the Company’s Articles of Association as amended from time to time. If there is a conflict between the terms of this letter and the Articles of Association then the articles shall prevail.

DUTIES

 

1. You are already aware how the Board is structured and what authorities are delegated to the Chief Executive Officer and his colleagues.

 

2. The Board as a whole is collectively responsible for promoting the success of the Company by directing and supervising the Company’s affairs. The Board’s role is to:

 

  (a) provide entrepreneurial leadership to the Company within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enable risk to be assessed and managed;

 

  (b) set the Company’s strategic aims, ensure that the necessary financial and human resources are in place for the Company to meet its objectives, and review management performance; and

 

  (c) set the Company’s values and standards and ensure that its obligations to its shareholders and others are understood and met.

 

1


3. In your role as a non-executive director you are required (with the other non-executives) to:

 

  (a) constructively challenge and contribute to the development of strategy;

 

  (b) scrutinise the performance of management in meeting agreed goals and objectives and monitor the reporting of performance;

 

  (c) satisfy yourself that financial information is accurate and that financial controls and systems of risk management are robust and defensible; and

 

  (d) have a prime role in appointing, and where necessary removing, senior management and in succession planning and where required by the relevant policy of the Company from time to time be responsible for determining appropriate levels of remuneration of executive directors.

 

4. You will be required to:

 

  (a) exercise relevant powers under the Company’s Articles of Association;

 

  (b) perform your duties faithfully, efficiently and diligently and use all reasonable endeavours to promote the interests and reputation of the Company;

 

  (c) serve on various committees of the Board and attend wherever possible all meetings of such committees. You will be provided with the terms of reference of a committee on your appointment to such a committee;

 

  (d) attend wherever possible all Annual General Meetings and other General Meetings of the Company;

 

  (e) attend wherever possible all meetings of the Board, which meets at least six times a year, normally at 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA (at least one meeting per year is held at one of the major divisions);

 

  (f) attend wherever possible the Annual Strategy Review, which is usually held off-site over two days in September;

 

  (g) consider all relevant papers in advance of each meeting in order to ensure that you can play a full part in the work of the Board and its committees;

 

  (h) bring independent judgement to bear on issues of strategy, policy, resources, performance and standards of conduct;

 

  (i) make yourself available (on reasonable notice) to provide ad hoc advice to individual directors of the Company. We do not envisage that this would take more than three days of your time a year;

 

  (j) provide guidance and direction in planning, developing and enhancing the future strategic direction of the Company;

 

2


  (k) share responsibility with the other directors for the effective control of the Company and with the other non-executive directors for the supervision of the executive directors; and

 

  (l) comply with the Financial Conduct Authority’s Model Code for securities transactions by directors of UK listed companies and with any code of conduct relating to securities transactions by directors and specified employees issued by the Company from time to time (the Smith & Nephew Code of Dealing in Securities has been sent to you and further copies are available from the Company Secretary).

 

5. Overall the Company anticipates that you will need to spend a minimum of 15 days per year fulfilling your duties. This will include the Board Meetings, Annual General Meetings, one Board away-day each year and Board committee meetings. In addition you will be expected to spend an appropriate period of time preparing for each meeting and be prepared to be available for additional meetings and business when required. By accepting this appointment you confirm that you are able to commit sufficient time to the role to meet the Company’s expectations.

 

6. The Company seeks to adhere to the principles in UK Corporate Governance Code. You will be expected to carry out your duties in accordance with the principles set out in these reports, copies of which are available from the Company Secretary.

 

7. The performance of the Board and its committees, and of individual directors, is evaluated annually. At least every third year the performance will be reviewed by an external body.

 

8. You shall, in pursuance of your duties hereunder, be entitled to request such information from the Company, its subsidiary undertakings (as defined in section 1162 of the Companies Act 2006 as amended from time to time) or its or their employees, consultants or professional advisers as may be reasonably necessary to enable you to perform your role effectively. The Company shall use its reasonable endeavours to provide such information promptly.

CONFIDENTIALITY

During the course of your duties you will have access to confidential information belonging to the Company and its subsidiary undertakings (including, but not limited to, details of suppliers, customers, margins, know-how, marketing and other relevant business information). Unauthorised disclosure of this information could seriously damage the Company. You therefore undertake not to use or disclose such information save in pursuance of your duties or in accordance with any statutory obligation or court or similar order.

Your attention is drawn to the rules relating to the disclosure of price sensitive information. You must not make any statement or do anything which may be a breach of these rules without prior clearance from the Chairman or Company Secretary.

 

3


OUTSIDE INTERESTS

The agreement of the Chairman should be sought before you accept any new outside interests which might affect the time you are able to devote to this appointment.

In accordance with the principles set out in the Corporate Governance Code you must inform the Company Secretary of any interests which you have, or acquire, which might reasonably be thought to jeopardise your independence from the Company.

During your appointment you must not take up any office or employment with, or have any interest in, any firm or company which is or may be in direct or indirect competition with the Company.

The Board has determined you to be independent, according to the provisions of the Corporate Governance Code.

INSURANCE

During your appointment you will be covered by the Company’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance on the terms in place from time to time. Details of the policy are available from the Company Secretary. The Company does not guarantee to maintain this insurance cover after the termination of your appointment, but you will continue to be covered by the policy or any replacement on the same basis as the rest of the Board.

A deed of indemnity is in place between you and the Company.

APPOINTMENT

Your re-appointment will be from 1 August 2014 and is terminable at the will of the parties. However, it is envisaged that it will be for a further period of 3 years continuing until 1 August 2017 subject to an annual review taking into account the need for progressive refreshing of the Board. The continuation of your appointment depends upon satisfactory performance and re-election at the each Annual General Meeting.

All appointments and re-appointments to the Board are, of course, subject to the Company’s Articles of Association. If you are not re-elected to your position as a director of the Company by the shareholders at any time and for any reason then this appointment shall terminate automatically and with immediate effect.

On termination of the appointment you shall only be entitled to such fees as may have accrued to the date of termination together with reimbursement in the normal way of any expenses properly incurred prior to that date.

REMUNERATION

The fees are US$120,000 per annum in cash and US$6,000 delivered in shares in August each year (subject to income tax and statutory deductions) and will be reviewed each year. There is an additional allowance relating to inter-continental travel of US$7,000 per trip.

As Chairman of the Remuneration Committee you will receive an additional fee of US$27,000 per annum.

 

4


EXPENSES

The Company will reimburse you for any expenses that you may incur properly and reasonably in performing your duties and which are properly documented. Such expenses would include reasonable legal fees if circumstances should arise in which it was necessary for you to seek separate legal advice about the performance of your duties. In such a situation, you are required to discuss the issue either with me or with one of your non-executive colleagues in advance.

INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE

In some circumstances you may think that you need professional advice in the furtherance of your duties as a director. It may also be appropriate for you to seek advice from independent advisers at the Company’s expense. The Company will reimburse the full cost of any expenditure incurred.

DATA PROTECTION

By signing this agreement you consent to the Company holding and processing information about you which it may acquire during the course of this agreement, providing such use is in accordance with the Data Protection Act 1998.

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall not apply to this agreement. No person other than the parties to this agreement shall have any rights under it and it will not be enforceable by any person other than the parties to it.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT

This agreement constitutes the entire and only agreement relating to your re-appointment between you and the Company.

Any previous agreement or arrangement between you and the Company or any Group company shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual consent as from the commencement of this re-appointment, including but not limited to the re-appointment letter dated 27 September 2011.

Please sign and return the enclosed copy of this letter to confirm your agreement to your re-appointment on the above terms.

I look forward to continue working with you in the future.

 

Yours sincerely
/s/ Susan Swabey
Susan Swabey
Company Secretary

 

5


I, Joseph Papa, agree to the above terms of re-appointment as a Non-Executive Director of Smith & Nephew plc.

 

Name  

/s/ Joseph Papa

Date  

3 March 2014

 

6

Exhibit 4(c)(xiv)

30 October 2013

Roberto Quarta

15, Adam Street,

London WC2N 6LA

Dear Mr Quarta,

SMITH & NEPHEW plc (THE “COMPANY”) AND YOUR APPOINTMENT

AS NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR AND CHAIRMAN ELECT

Following the recommendation of the Nomination & Governance Committee, the board of the Company (“the Board”) is pleased to hear that you have accepted our offer to join the Board as Non-Executive Director and Chairman Elect with effect from 4 December 2013. It is expected that you will be appointed Chairman of the Company following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014, on the retirement of Sir John Buchanan, although it is possible that you might be required to assume the position of Chairman at an earlier date.

This letter confirms the main terms of your appointment to this office. It is agreed that this is a contract for services and not a contract of employment. You should be aware that your re-appointment will have to be ratified by the Company’s shareholders at the Annual General Meeting to be held on 10 April 2014 and is subject to the Company’s articles of association as amended from time to time. If there is a conflict between the terms of this letter and the articles of association then the articles shall prevail.

DUTIES

 

1. You have already been informed how the Board is structured and what authorities are delegated to the Chief Executive Officer and his colleagues.

 

2. The Board as a whole is collectively responsible for promoting the success of the Company by directing and supervising the Company’s affairs. The Board’s role is to:

 

  (a) provide entrepreneurial leadership to the Company within a framework of prudent and effective controls which enable risk to be assessed and managed;

 

  (b) set the Company’s strategic aims, ensure that the necessary financial and human resources are in place for the Company to meet its objectives, and review management performance; and

 

  (c) set the Company’s values and standards and ensure that its obligations to its shareholders and others are understood and met.

 

1


3. In your role as Non-Executive Director you are required (with the other Non-Executive Directors) to:

 

  (a) constructively challenge and contribute to the development of strategy;

 

  (b) scrutinise the performance of management in meeting agreed goals and objectives and monitor the reporting of performance;

 

  (c) satisfy yourself that financial information is accurate and that financial controls and systems of risk management are robust and defensible; and

 

  (d) have a prime role in appointing, and where necessary removing, senior management and in succession planning and where required by the relevant policy of the Company from time to time be responsible for determining appropriate levels of remuneration of executive directors.

 

4. On appointment as Chairman, you will additionally be required to:

 

  (a) provide coherent leadership of the Company, including, in conjunction with the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, representing the Company to customers, suppliers, governments, shareholders, financial institutions, the media, the community and the public;

 

  (b) ensure the Board continues to maintain and build on the reputation of the Company;

 

  (c) provide leadership to the Board and interface with the Chief Executive Officer;

 

  (d) develop an active, challenging and committed Board and elicit its consensus view;

 

  (e) set the tone, values and ethics of the Board and thereby the Company by upholding the highest standards of integrity and probity;

 

  (f) ensure good communications between Board meetings and see that the Board receives full and proper information;

 

  (g) ensure that the Board takes responsibility for strategy and key decisions by:

 

  (i) making sure that it is engaged in setting objectives and assessing strategy; and

 

  (ii) ensuring that it focuses on key tasks;

 

  (h) keep up the pace and, where appropriate, the pressure by pushing for top corporate performance, taking an independent perspective on management’s performance and ensuring that there is a leadership and organisation;

 

  (i) guide and appraise the Chief Executive Officer by giving guidance and leadership, assisting in setting strategy and balancing the power and authority of the Chief Executive Officer; and

 

2


5. You will be required to:

 

  (a) exercise relevant powers under the Company’s Articles of Association;

 

  (b) perform your duties faithfully, efficiently and diligently and use all reasonable endeavours to promote the interests and reputation of the Company;

 

  (c) serve on various committees of the Board and attend wherever possible all meetings of such committees. You will be provided with the terms of reference of a committee on your appointment to such committees and are available from the Company Secretary;

 

  (d) attend all Annual General Meetings and other General Meetings of the Company;

 

  (e) attend all meetings of the Board, which normally meets at least six times a year, normally at 15 Adam Street, London WC2N 6LA (at least one meeting per year is held at one of the major divisions, and additional Board calls are held between physical meetings);

 

  (f) attend the Annual Strategy Review, which is usually held off-site over two days in September;

 

  (g) consider all relevant papers in advance of each meeting in order to ensure that you can play a full part in the work of the Board and its committees;

 

  (h) bring independent judgement to bear on issues of strategy, policy, resources, performance and standards of conduct;

 

  (i) make yourself available (on reasonable notice) to provide ad hoc advice to individual directors of the Company. We do not envisage that this would take more than three days of your time a year;

 

  (j) provide guidance and direction in planning, developing and enhancing the future strategic direction of the Company;

 

  (k) share responsibility with the other directors for the effective control of the Company and with the other non-executive directors for the supervision of the executive directors;

 

  (l) comply with the Financial Conduct Authority’s Model Code for securities transactions by directors of UK listed companies and with any code of conduct relating to securities transactions by directors and specified employees issued by the Company from time to time (the Smith & Nephew Code of Dealing in Securities has been sent to you and further copies are available from the Company Secretary);

 

3


6. Overall the Company anticipates that you will need to spend 3 days a month in your role as Non-Executive Director and Chairman Elect. On appointment as Chairman, you will need to commit to between 80 and 100 days per year in your role. This will include the Board Meetings, Annual General Meetings, one Board away-day each year and Board committee meetings. In addition you will be expected to spend an appropriate period of time preparing for each meeting and be prepared to be available for additional meetings and business when required. By accepting this appointment you confirm that you are able to commit sufficient time to the role to meet the Company’s expectations.

 

7. The Company seeks to adhere to the principles in The UK Corporate Governance Code. You will be expected to carry out your duties in accordance with the principles set out in this reports, copies of which are available from the Company Secretary.

 

8. The performance of the Board and its committees, and of individual directors, is evaluated on a regular basis.

 

9. You shall, in pursuance of your duties, be entitled to request such information from the Company, its subsidiary undertakings (as defined in section 1162 of the Companies Act 2006 as amended from time to time) or its or their employees, consultants or professional advisers as may be reasonably necessary to enable you to perform your role effectively. The Company shall use its reasonable endeavours to provide such information promptly.

CONFIDENTIALITY

During the course of your duties you will have access to confidential information belonging to the Company and its subsidiary undertakings (including, but not limited to, details of suppliers, customers, margins, know-how, marketing and other relevant business information). Unauthorised disclosure of this information could seriously damage the Company. You therefore undertake not to use or disclose such information save in pursuance of your duties or in accordance with any statutory obligation or court or similar order.

Your attention is drawn to the rules relating to the disclosure of price sensitive information. You must not make any statement or do anything which may be a breach of these rules without prior clearance from the Company Secretary.

 

4


OUTSIDE INTERESTS

The agreement of the Nominations & Governance Committee should be sought before you accept any new outside interests which might affect the time you are able to devote to this appointment.

In accordance with the principles set out in The UK Corporate Governance Code you must inform the Company Secretary of any interests which you have, or acquire, which might reasonably be thought to jeopardise your independence from the Company.

During your appointment you must not take up any office or employment with, or have any interest in, any firm or company which is or may be in direct or indirect competition with the Company.

The Board has determined you to be independent, according to the provisions of The UK Corporate Governance Code.

INSURANCE

During your appointment you will be covered by the Company’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance on the terms in place from time to time. Details of the policy are available from the Company Secretary. The Company does not guarantee to maintain this insurance cover after the termination of your appointment, but you will continue to be covered by the policy or any replacement on the same basis as the rest of the Board.

A deed of indemnity will be put in place between you and the Company.

APPOINTMENT

Your appointment as Non-Executive Director and Chairman Elect will be from 4 December 2013 and is terminable by six months’ notice from either the Company or yourself. Your appointment as Chairman will be confirmed following the Annual General Meeting on 10 April 2014, subject to your election by the shareholders. Your appointment will be for an initial period of 36 months and the continuation of your appointment, and your appointment of Chairman, depends upon satisfactory performance in the opinion of the Board.

All appointments and reappointments to the Board are, of course, subject to the Company’s articles of association. If you are not re-elected to your position as a director of the Company by the shareholders at any time and for any reason then this appointment shall terminate automatically and with immediate effect.

On termination of the appointment your only entitlement shall be to such fees as may have accrued to the date of termination together with reimbursement in the normal way of any expenses properly incurred prior to that date.

 

5


REMUNERATION

The fee is £63,000 per annum (subject to income tax and other statutory deductions) and will be reviewed each year. On appointment as Chairman, this fee shall increase to £400,000 of which £100,000 will be delivered in shares. The shares will be purchased for you net of tax and statutory deductions in August each year. There is an additional allowance relating to inter-continental travel of £3,500 per trip. These fees will remain fixed for a two year period and shall be reviewed again in February 2016.

EXPENSES

The Company will reimburse you for any expenses that you may incur properly and reasonably in performing your duties and which are properly documented. Such expenses would include reasonable legal fees if circumstances should arise in which it was necessary for you to seek separate legal advice about the performance of your duties. In such a situation, you are required to discuss the issue with the Senior Independent Director in advance.

INDEPENDENT PROFESSIONAL ADVICE

In some circumstances you may think that you need professional advice in the furtherance of your duties as a director. It may also be appropriate for you to seek advice from independent advisers at the Company’s expense. The Company will reimburse the full cost of any expenditure incurred.

DATA PROTECTION

By signing this agreement you consent to the Company holding and processing information about you which it may acquire during the course of this agreement, providing such use is in accordance with the Data Protection Act 1998.

THIRD PARTY RIGHTS

The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 shall not apply to this agreement. No person other than the parties to this agreement shall have any rights under it and it will not be enforceable by any person other than the parties to it.

ENTIRE AGREEMENT

This agreement constitutes the entire and only agreement between you and any Group Company relating to your appointment with the Company.

Any previous agreement or arrangement between you and the Company or any Group company shall be deemed to have been terminated by mutual consent as from the commencement of this appointment.

Please sign and return the enclosed copy of this letter to confirm your agreement to your appointment on the above terms.

 

6


I look forward to working with you in the future.

Yours sincerely

/s/ Susan Swabey

Susan Swabey

Company Secretary

I, Roberto Quarta, agree to the above terms of appointment as non-executive director and Chairman Elect of Smith & Nephew plc.

 

Name   /s/ Roberto Quarta
Date   30 October 2013

 

7

Exhibit 8

PRINCIPAL SUBSIDIARIES

Smith & Nephew plc

Subsidiary Undertakings

 

Company    Country of Incorporation

A2 Surgical

  

France

Adler Mediequip Private Limited

  

India

Blue Sky Medical Group Inc

  

USA

Endocare GmbH (80%)

  

Germany

Healicoil Inc.

  

USA

Hipco Inc

  

USA

ICEMBE Medical (pty) Ltd

  

South Africa

Kalypto Medical, Inc.

  

USA

LifeModeler, Inc.

  

USA

LLC Smith & Nephew

  

Russia

Oratec Interventions, Inc

  

USA

Orthopaedic Biosystems Ltd., Inc.

  

USA

OsteoBiologics, Inc

  

USA

Plus Orthopaedics (UK) Ltd

  

UK

Plus Orthopedics GmbH

  

Austria

Plus Orthopedics Hellas SA

  

Greece

Plus Orthopedics Holding AG

  

Switzerland

Plus Orthopedics LLC

  

USA

Smith & Nephew (Alberta) Inc

  

Canada

Smith & Nephew (Europe) B.V.

  

Netherlands

Smith & Nephew (Manchester) Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew (Overseas) Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew (Pty) Limited

  

South Africa

Smith & Nephew A/S

  

Denmark

Smith & Nephew A/S

  

Norway

Smith & Nephew AB

  

Sweden

Smith & Nephew AG

  

Switzerland

Smith & Nephew AH Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew AHP Inc.

  

USA

Smith & Nephew Albion Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew B.V.

  

Netherlands

Smith & Nephew Beijing Holdings Ltd

  

Hong Kong

Smith & Nephew Business Services Gmbh & Co. KG.

  

Germany

Smith & Nephew Business Services Verwaltungs Gmbh

  

Germany

Smith & Nephew Beta Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew CC Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Chester Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Collagenase Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Comercios de Productos Medicos Ltda

  

Brazil

Smith & Nephew Consolidated, Inc

  

USA

Smith & Nephew Consumer Products Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Crystal (Holdings) Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Crystal Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Curacao N.V.

  

Netherlands

Smith & Nephew Delta Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Deutschland (Holding) GmbH

  

Germany

Smith & Nephew do Brasil Participacoes S.A.

  

Brazil


Company    Country of Incorporation

Smith & Nephew Employees Trustees Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Endoscopy KK

  

Japan

Smith & Nephew Epsilon Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew ESN Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Everett Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Extruded Films Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Finance

  

England

Smith & Nephew Finance Holdings Limited

  

Cayman Islands

Smith & Nephew Finance Lux LLP

  

England

Smith & Nephew Finance Oratec

  

England

Smith & Nephew Finance USD Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew France SAS

  

France

Smith & Nephew FZE

  

United Arab Emirates

Smith & Nephew Gamma Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Gibbs Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew GmbH

  

Germany

Smith & Nephew GmbH

  

Austria

Smith & Nephew Grover Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Healthcare Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Healthcare Private Limited

  

India

Smith & Nephew Healthcare Sdn Berhad

  

Malaysia

Smith & Nephew Hellas SA

  

Greece

Smith & Nephew Holdings Inc.

  

USA

Smith & Nephew Inc.

  

Canada

Smith & Nephew Inc.

  

Puerto Rico

Smith & Nephew, Inc.

  

USA

Smith & Nephew Insurance Company Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew International S.A.

  

Luxembourg

Smith & Nephew Investment Holdings Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Kappa Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew KK

  

Japan

Smith & Nephew Lda

  

Portugal

Smith & Nephew Lilia Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Limited

  

Ireland

Smith & Nephew Limited

  

Korea

Smith & Nephew Limited

  

Thailand

Smith & Nephew Limited

  

New Zealand

Smith & Nephew Limited

  

Hong Kong

Smith & Nephew Lindsay Maid Limited

  

Scotland

Smith & Nephew Management B.V.

  

Netherlands

Smith & Nephew Manufacturing AG

  

Switzerland

Smith & Nephew Medical (Shanghai) Limited

  

China

Smith & Nephew Medical (Suzhou) Limited

  

China

Smith & Nephew Medical Fabrics Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Medical Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Medinvestments Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Nederland C.V.

  

Netherlands

Smith & Nephew Nominee Company Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Nominee Services Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Optics B.V.

  

Netherlands

Smith & Nephew Optics Limited UK

  

England

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics AG

  

Switzerland

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics (Beijing) Limited

  

China

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics France SAS

  

France


Company    Country of Incorporation

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics GmbH

  

Germany

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics KK

  

Japan

Smith & Nephew Orthopaedics Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew OUS, Inc.

  

USA

Smith & Nephew Oy

  

Finland

Smith & Nephew Pensions Nominees Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Pharmaceuticals (Proprietary) Limited

  

South Africa

Smith & Nephew Pharmaceuticals Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Polyweave Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Pte Limited

  

Singapore

Smith & Nephew Pty Limited

  

Australia

Smith & Nephew Raisegrade Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Rareletter Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Research Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew S.A.U

  

Spain

Smith & Nephew S.A. de C.V.

  

Mexico

Smith & Nephew S.A.-N.V

  

Belgium

Smith & Nephew S.a.r.l

  

Luxembourg

Smith & Nephew S.A.S.

  

France

Smith & Nephew Schwiez

  

Switzerland

Smith & Nephew S.r.l.

  

Italy

Smith & Nephew Suzhou Holding Company

  

Hong Kong

Smith & Nephew sp. z.o.o.

  

Poland

Smith & Nephew Surgical Holdings Pty Limited

  

Australia

Smith & Nephew Surgical Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Surgical Limited

  

New Zealand

Smith & Nephew Surgical Pty Limited

  

Australia

Smith & Nephew TE I, LLC

  

USA

Smith & Nephew TE II, L.L.C

  

USA

Smith & Nephew Trading Group Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew UK Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew UK Executive Pension Scheme Trustee Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew UK Pension Fund Trustee Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew USD Limited

  

England

Smith & Nephew Wound Management (LaJolla)

  

USA

Smith & Nephew Wound Management KK

  

Japan

Smith ve Nephew Medikal Cihazlar Ticaret Limited Sirketi

  

Turkey

Sir Siam Medical Limited

  

Thailand

T. J. Smith & Nephew, Limited

  

England

The Albion Soap Company Limited

  

England

TP Limited

  

Scotland

Tenet Medical Engineer Inc

  

Canada

Smith & Nephew Argentina SRL

  

Argentina

Rosebud Acquisition Corporation

  

USA

All companies trade under the name of Smith & Nephew and deal with Medical Device products.

Exhibit 12(a)

CERTIFICATION OF OLIVIER BOHUON

302 CERTIFICATION

I, Olivier Bohuon, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Smith & Nephew plc;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and


5. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 6, 2014

 

By:  

/s/ Olivier Bohuon

Name:   Mr Olivier Bohuon
Title:   Chief Executive Officer

Exhibit 12(b)

CERTIFICATION OF JULIE BROWN

302 CERTIFICATION

I, Julie Brown, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Smith & Nephew plc;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and


5. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 6, 2014

 

By:  

/s/ Julie Brown

Name:   Mrs Julie Brown
Title:   Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 13(a)

CERTIFICATION OF OLIVIER BOHUON AND JULIE BROWN

906 CERTIFICATION

The certification set forth below is being submitted in connection with the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2013 (the “Report”) for the purpose of complying with Rule 13a-14(b) or Rule 15d-14(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) and Section 1350 of Chapter 63 of Title 18 of the United States Code.

Olivier Bohuon, the Chief Executive Officer and Julie Brown, the Chief Financial Officer of Smith & Nephew plc, each certifies that, to the best of their knowledge:

 

1. the Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Exchange Act; and

 

2. the information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of Smith & Nephew plc.

Date: March 6, 2014

 

By:  

/s/ Olivier Bohuon

Name:   Mr Olivier Bohuon
Title:   Chief Executive Officer
By:  

/s/ Julie Brown

Name:   Mrs Julie Brown
Title:   Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 15.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the following Registration Statements:

 

1. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-122801) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew 2004 Executive Share Option Scheme

 

2. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-122801) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew 2004 Performance Share Plan

 

3. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-122801) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew 2004 Co-investment Plan

 

4. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-13694) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan

 

5. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-12052) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew U.S. Employee Stock Purchase Plan

 

6. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 33-39814) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew Long Service Award Scheme

 

7. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-155173) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew 2001 US Share Plan

 

8. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-155172) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew 2004 Performance Share Plan

 

9. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-158239) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew plc Deferred Bonus Plan

 

10. Registration Statement (Form S-8 No. 333-168544) pertaining to the Smith & Nephew Global Share Plan 2010

of our reports dated February 26, 2014, with respect to the consolidated financial statements of Smith & Nephew plc, and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting of Smith & Nephew plc, included in the Annual Report (Form 20-F) for the year ended December 31, 2013.

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

Ernst & Young LLP

London, England

February 26, 2014